Garmin | G1000: Beechcraft Baron G58 | Garmin G1000: Beechcraft Baron G58 G1000 Pilot's Guide Beechcraft G58 - SSV 0857.10

Garmin G1000: Beechcraft Baron G58 G1000 Pilot's Guide Beechcraft G58 - SSV 0857.10
G1000
®
Integrated Flight Deck
Pilot’s Guide
®
G1000 Pilot’s Guide
Garmin International, Inc.
1200 East 151st Street
Olathe, Kansas 66062, U.S.A.
Garmin AT, Inc.
2345 Turner Road SE
Salem, OR 97302, U.S.A.
Garmin (Europe) Ltd.
Liberty House, Hounsdown Business Park
Southampton, Hampshire SO40 9LR U.K.
Contact Garmin Product Support or view
warranty information at www.flygarmin.com.
Beechcraft G58
Garmin Corporation
No. 68, Zhangshu 2nd Road
Xizhi District, New Taipei City, Taiwan
190-00629-04
Revision A
Beechcraft G58
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
EIS
AUDIO PANEL & CNS
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
AFCS
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
Copyright © 2007-2010, 2012, 2017, 2019 Garmin Ltd. or its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
This manual reflects the operation of System Software version 0857.10 or later for the Beechcraft G58 . Some differences in operation may
be observed when comparing the information in this manual to earlier or later software versions.
Garmin International, Inc.
1200 East 151st Street
Olathe, Kansas 66062, U.S.A.
Garmin (Europe) Ltd.
Liberty House, Hounsdown Business Park
Southampton, Hampshire SO40 9LR U.K.
Garmin AT, Inc.
2345 Turner Road SE
Salem, OR 97302, U.S.A.
Garmin Corporation
No. 68, Zhangshu 2nd Road
Xizhi District, New Taipei City, Taiwan
Contact Garmin Product Support or view warranty information at www.flygarmin.com.
Except as expressly provided herein, no part of this manual may be reproduced, copied, transmitted, disseminated, downloaded or stored
in any storage medium, for any purpose without the express written permission of Garmin. Garmin hereby grants permission to download
a single copy of this manual and of any revision to this manual onto a hard drive or other electronic storage medium to be viewed for
personal use, provided that such electronic or printed copy of this manual or revision must contain the complete text of this copyright notice
and provided further that any unauthorized commercial distribution of this manual or any revision hereto is strictly prohibited.
Garmin® is a registered trademark of Garmin Ltd. or its subsidiaries, and G1000® is a trademark of Garmin Ltd. or its subsidiaries. These
trademarks may not be used without the express permission of Garmin.
Bendix/King® and Honeywell® are registered trademarks of Honeywell International, Inc.; Becker® is a registered trademark of Becker
Flugfunkwerk GmbH; NavData® is a registered trademark of Jeppesen, Inc. SiriusXM Weather and SiriusXM Satellite Radio are provided
by SiriusXM Satellite Radio, Inc.
AOPA Membership Publications, Inc. and its related organizations (hereinafter collectively “AOPA”) expressly disclaim all warranties,
with respect to the AOPA information included in this data, express or implied, including, but not limited to, the implied warranties
of merchantability and fitness for a particular purpose. The information is provided “as is” and AOPA does not warrant or make any
representations regarding its accuracy, reliability, or otherwise. Under no circumstances including negligence, shall AOPA be liable for any
incidental, special or consequential damages that result from the use or inability to use the software or related documentation, even if
AOPA or an AOPA authorized representative has been advised of the possibility of such damages. User agrees not to sue AOPA and, to
the maximum extent allowed by law, to release and hold harmless AOPA from any causes of action, claims or losses related to any actual
or alleged inaccuracies in the information. Some jurisdictions do not allow the limitation or exclusion of implied warranties or liability for
incidental or consequential damages so the above limitations or exclusions may not apply to you.
AC-U-KWIK and its related organizations (hereafter collectively “AC-U-KWIK Organizations”) expressly disclaim all warranties with
respect to the AC-U-KWIK information included in this data, express or implied, including, but not limited to, the implied warranties of
merchantability and fitness for a particular purpose. The information is provided “as is” and AC-U-KWIK Organizations do not warrant or
make any representations regarding its accuracy, reliability, or otherwise. Licensee agrees not to sue AC-U-KWIK Organizations and, to the
maximum extent allowed by law, to release and hold harmless AC-U-KWIK Organizations from any cause of action, claims or losses related
to any actual or alleged inaccuracies in the information arising out of Garmin’s use of the information in the datasets. Some jurisdictions
do not allow the limitation or exclusion of implied warranties or liability for incidental or consequential damages so the above limitations
or exclusions may not apply to licensee.
Printed in the U.S.A.
190-00629-04 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58
Blank Page
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58
190-00629-04 Rev. A
WARNINGS, CAUTIONS, AND NOTES
WARNING: Do not use terrain avoidance displays as the sole source of information for maintaining separation
from terrain and obstacles. Garmin obtains terrain and obstacle data from third party sources and cannot
independently verify the accuracy of the information.
WARNING: Always refer to current aeronautical charts and NOTAMs for verification of displayed aeronautical
information. Displayed aeronautical data may not incorporate the latest NOTAM information.
WARNING: Do not use geometric altitude for compliance with air traffic control altitude requirements. The
primary barometric altimeter must be used for compliance with all air traffic control altitude regulations,
requirements, instructions, and clearances.
WARNING: Do not use basemap information (land and water data) as the sole means of navigation. Basemap
data is intended only to supplement other approved navigation data sources and should be considered only
an aid to enhance situational awareness.
WARNING: Do not rely solely upon the display of traffic information to accurately depict all of the traffic
within range of the aircraft. Due to lack of equipment, poor signal reception, and/or inaccurate information
from aircraft or ground stations, traffic may be present that is not represented on the display.
WARNING: Do not use data link weather information for maneuvering in, near, or around areas of hazardous
weather. Information contained within data link weather products may not accurately depict current
weather conditions.
WARNING: Do not use the indicated data link weather product age to determine the age of the weather
information shown by the data link weather product. Due to time delays inherent in gathering and processing
weather data for data link transmission, the weather information shown by the data link weather product
may be older than the indicated weather product age.
WARNING: The displayed minimum safe altitude (MSAs) are only advisory in nature and should not be relied
upon as the sole source of obstacle and terrain avoidance information. Always refer to current aeronautical
charts for appropriate minimum clearance altitudes.
WARNING: Always obtain qualified instruction prior to operational use of this equipment.
WARNING: Do not use GPS to navigate to any active waypoint identified as a ‘NON WGS84 WPT’ by a
system message. ‘NON WGS84 WPT’ waypoints are derived from an unknown map reference datum that
may be incompatible with the map reference datum used by GPS (known as WGS84) and may be positioned
in error as displayed.
WARNING: Do not rely on the autopilot to level the aircraft at the MDA/DH when flying an approach with
vertical guidance. The autopilot will not level the aircraft at the MDA/DH even if the MDA/DH is set in the
altitude preselect.
190-00629-04 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58
WARNINGS, CAUTIONS, AND NOTES
WARNING: Do not rely solely upon the display of traffic information for collision avoidance maneuvering.
The traffic display does not provide collision avoidance resolution advisories and does not under any
circumstances or conditions relieve the pilot’s responsibility to see and avoid other aircraft.
WARNING: Use appropriate primary systems for navigation, and for terrain, obstacle, and traffic avoidance.
Garmin SVT is intended as an aid to situational awareness only and may not provide either the accuracy or
reliability upon which to solely base decisions and/or plan maneuvers to avoid terrain, obstacles, or traffic.
WARNING: Do not use the Garmin SVT runway depiction as the sole means for determining the proximity of
the aircraft to the runway or for maintaining the proper approach path angle during landing.
WARNING: Do not rely on information from a lightning detection system display as the sole basis for hazardous
weather avoidance. Range limitations and interference may cause the system to display inaccurate or
incomplete information. Refer to documentation from the lightning detection system manufacturer for
detailed information about the system.
WARNING: Do not operate the weather radar in a transmitting mode when personnel or objects are within
the MPEL boundary.
WARNING: Always position the weather radar gain setting to Calibrated for viewing the actual intensity of
precipitation. Changing the gain in weather mode causes precipitation intensity to be displayed as a color
not representative of the true intensity.
WARNING: Do not use TAWS information for primary terrain or obstacle avoidance. TAWS is intended only
to enhance situational awareness.
WARNING: Do not use a QFE altimeter setting with this system. System functions will not operate properly
with a QFE altimeter setting. Use only a QNH altimeter setting for height above mean sea level, or the
standard pressure setting, as applicable.
CAUTION: Do not clean display surfaces with abrasive cloths or cleaners containing ammonia. They will
harm the anti-reflective coating.
CAUTION: Do not allow repairs to be made by anyone other than an authorized Garmin service center.
Unauthorized repairs or modifications could void both the warranty and affect the airworthiness of the
aircraft.
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58
190-00629-04 Rev. A
WARNINGS, CAUTIONS, AND NOTES
CAUTION: Never disconnect power to the system when loading a database. Power interruption during the
database loading process could result in maintenance being required to reboot the system.
NOTE: Do not rely solely upon data link services to provide Temporary Flight Restriction (TFR) information.
Always confirm TFR information through official sources such as Flight Service Stations or Air Traffic Control.
NOTE All visual depictions contained within this document, including screen images of the system panel
and displays, are subject to change and may not reflect the most current system and aviation databases.
Depictions of equipment may differ slightly from the actual equipment.
NOTE: The United States government operates the Global Positioning System and is solely responsible for
its accuracy and maintenance. The GPS system is subject to changes which could affect the accuracy and
performance of all GPS equipment. Portions of the system utilize GPS as a precision electronic NAVigation
AID (NAVAID). Therefore, as with all NAVAIDs, information presented by the system can be misused or
misinterpreted and, therefore, become unsafe.
NOTE: This device complies with part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
(1) this device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired operation.
NOTE: Interference from GPS repeaters operating inside nearby hangars can cause an intermittent loss of
attitude and heading displays while the aircraft is on the ground. Moving the aircraft more than 100 yards
away from the source of the interference should alleviate the condition.
NOTE: Use of polarized eyewear may cause the flight displays to appear dim or blank.
NOTE: This product, its packaging, and its components contain chemicals known to the State of California
to cause cancer, birth defects, or reproductive harm. This notice is being provided in accordance with
California’s Proposition 65. If you have any questions or would like additional information, please refer to
our web site at www.garmin.com/prop65.
NOTE: Operating the system in the vicinity of metal buildings, metal structures, or electromagnetic fields
can cause sensor differences that may result in nuisance miscompare annunciations during start up, shut
down, or while taxiing. If one or more of the sensed values are unavailable, the annunciation indicates no
comparison is possible.
NOTE: The system responds to a terminal procedure based on data coded within that procedure in the
Navigation Database. Differences in system operation may be observed among similar types of procedures
due to differences in the Navigation Database coding specific to each procedure.
190-00629-04 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58
WARNINGS, CAUTIONS, AND NOTES
NOTE: The FAA has asked Garmin to remind pilots who fly with Garmin database-dependent avionics of the
following:
• It is the pilot’s responsibility to remain familiar with all FAA regulatory and advisory guidance and information
related to the use of databases in the National Airspace System.
• Garmin equipment will only recognize and use databases that are obtained from Garmin or Jeppesen. Databases
obtained from Garmin or Jeppesen that have a Type 2 Letter of Authorization (LOA) from the FAA are assured
compliance with all data quality requirements (DQRs). A copy of the Type 2 LOA is available for each applicable
database and can be viewed at http://fly.garmin.com by selecting ‘Aviation Database Declarations.’
• Use of a current Garmin or Jeppesen database in your Garmin equipment is required for compliance with
established FAA regulatory guidance, but does not constitute authorization to fly any and all terminal procedures
that may be presented by the system. It is the pilot’s responsibility to operate in accordance with established
pertinent aircraft documents and regulatory guidance or limitations as applicable to the pilot, the aircraft, and
installed equipment.
NOTE: The pilot/operator must review and be familiar with Garmin’s database exclusion list as discussed in
SAIB CE-14-04 to determine what data may be incomplete. The database exclusion list can be viewed at
www.flygarmin.com by selecting ‘Database Exclusions List.’
NOTE: The pilot/operator must have access to Garmin and Jeppesen database alerts and consider their
impact on the intended aircraft operation. The database alerts can be viewed at www.flygarmin.com by
selecting ‘Aviation Database Alerts.’
NOTE: If the pilot/operator wants or needs to adjust the database, contact Garmin Product Support.
NOTE: Garmin requests the flight crew report any observed discrepancies related to database information.
These discrepancies could come in the form of an incorrect procedure; incorrectly identified terrain, obstacles
and fixes; or any other displayed item used for navigation or communication in the air or on the ground. Go
to FlyGarmin.com and select ‘Aviation Data Error Report’.
NOTE: Electronic aeronautical charts displayed on this system have been shown to meet the guidance in AC
120-76D as a Type B Electronic Flight Bag (EFB) for FliteCharts and ChartView. The accuracy of the charts
is subject to the chart data provider. Own-ship position on airport surface charts cannot be guaranteed to
meet the accuracy specified in AC 120-76D. Possible additional requirements may make a secondary source
of aeronautical charts, such as traditional paper charts or an additional electronic display, necessary on the
aircraft and available to the pilot. If the secondary source of aeronautical charts is a Portable Electronic
Device (PED), its use must be consistent with the guidance in AC 120-76D.
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58
190-00629-04 Rev. A
WARNINGS, CAUTIONS, AND NOTES
NOTE: The navigation databases used in Garmin navigation systems contain Special Procedures. Prior
to flying these procedures, pilots must have specific FAA authorization, training, and possession of the
corresponding current, and legitimately-sourced chart (approach plate, etc.). Inclusion of the Special
Procedure in the navigation database DOES NOT imply specific FAA authorization to fly the procedure.
NOTE: Terrain and obstacle alerting is not available north of 89º North latitude and south of 89º South
latitude. This is due to limitations present within the Terrain database and the system’s ability to process
the data representing the affected areas.
NOTE: The nose of the ‘own ship’ symbol represents the location of the aircraft. The center of any traffic
symbol represents the location of that traffic. The traffic and own ship symbols are an abstract representation
and do not reflect the physical extent of the aircraft/traffic, and should not replace other methods for
identifying traffic.
NOTE: Lamp(s) inside this product contain mercury (HG) and must be recycled or disposed of according
to local, state, or federal laws. For more information, refer to our website at www.garmin.com/en-US/
company/environment/recycling
NOTE: When using Stormscope, there are several atmospheric phenomena in addition to nearby thunderstorms
that can cause isolated discharge points in the strike display mode. However, clusters of two or more
discharge points in the strike display mode do indicate thunderstorm activity if these points reappear after
the screen has been cleared.
NOTE: Operate G1000 system power through at least one cycle in a period of four days of continuous
operation to avoid an autonomous system reboot.
190-00629-04 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58
WARNINGS, CAUTIONS, AND NOTES
Blank Page
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58
190-00629-04 Rev. A
SOFTWARE LICENSE AGREEMENT
SOFTWARE LICENSE AGREEMENT
BY USING THE DEVICE, COMPONENT OR SYSTEM MANUFACTURED OR SOLD BY GARMIN (“THE GARMIN PRODUCT”), YOU AGREE TO
BE BOUND BY THE TERMS AND CONDITIONS OF THE FOLLOWING SOFTWARE LICENSE AGREEMENT. PLEASE READ THIS AGREEMENT
CAREFULLY. Garmin Ltd. and its subsidiaries (“Garmin”) grants you a limited license to use the software embedded in the Garmin Product
(the “Software”) in binary executable form in the normal operation of the Garmin Product. Title, ownership rights, and intellectual property
rights in and to the Software remain with Garmin and/or its third-party providers. You acknowledge that the Software is the property of
Garmin and/or its third-party providers and is protected under the United States of America copyright laws and international copyright
treaties. You further acknowledge that the structure, organization, and code of the Software are valuable trade secrets of Garmin and/or its
third-party providers and that the Software in source code form remains a valuable trade secret of Garmin and/or its third-party providers.
You agree not to reproduce, decompile, disassemble, modify, reverse assemble, reverse engineer, or reduce to human readable form the
Software or any part thereof or create any derivative works based on the Software. You agree not to export or re-export the Software to
any country in violation of the export control laws of the United States of America.
190-00629-04 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58
SOFTWARE LICENSE AGREEMENT
Blank Page
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58
190-00629-04 Rev. A
REVISION INFORMATION
Record of Revisions
Part Number
190-00629-00
190-00629-00
190-00629-01
Revision
A
B
A
Date
10/18/05
11/09/05
12/21/07
B
4/08/08
190-00629-02
A
6/11/10
190-00629-03
A
4/9/12
B
11/27/17
All
A
6/11/19
All
190-00629-04
190-00629-04 Rev. A
Page Range
Description
Initial Release
All
ECO 34504: Corrected figure numbering sequence in Section 7
All
Reformatted PG, Updated to GDU SW version 8.10, and added
WAAS
Change System Software version, update description of two
All
warning messages, delete PA function, and other minor
corrections
All
Updated to GDU SW version 11.01, added SVS, added extended
squitter, added GTS 820 TAS, and other minor corrections
All
Updated to GDU SW version 11.12, added profile view, added
selected altitude arc, added METARs on active flight plan, and
other minor corrections
Clerical
Added Software License Agreement
Updated Warnings, Cautions, and Notes section
Added support for ADS-B out
Added User Defined Holding Patterns
Added support for Geo-Referencing on charts
Updated Approach types
Added Temperature Compensated Altitudes
Updated System Setup information
Updated TAWS-B information
Updated Transponder information
Updated Sirius XM radio information
Added GDU 13.31
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58
REVISION INFORMATION
Blank Page
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58
190-00629-04 Rev. A
TABLE OF CONTENTS
1.1
1.2
1.3
1.4
1.5
1.6
1.7
1.8
SECTION 1 SYSTEM OVERVIEW
System Description.................................................. 1
Line Replaceable Units (LRU).................................. 2
G1000 Controls......................................................... 7
PFD/MFD Controls......................................................... 7
Additional AFCS Controls............................................. 10
Audio Panel Controls................................................... 11
Secure Digital Cards.............................................. 13
System Power-up.................................................... 14
System Operation................................................... 15
Normal Operation........................................................ 15
Reversionary Mode...................................................... 15
AHRS Operation.......................................................... 16
G1000 System Annunciations....................................... 18
Softkey Function.......................................................... 19
GPS Receiver Operation............................................... 25
Accessing G1000 Functionality............................ 30
Menus........................................................................ 30
MFD Page Groups........................................................ 30
MFD System Pages...................................................... 34
Display Backlighting.............................................. 53
SECTION 2 FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
2.1 Flight Instruments.................................................. 58
Airspeed Indicator....................................................... 58
Attitude Indicator........................................................ 61
Altimeter.................................................................... 62
Vertical Speed Indicator (VSI)........................................ 63
Vertical Deviation........................................................ 64
Horizontal Situation Indicator (HSI)............................... 65
Course Deviation Indicator (CDI)................................... 70
2.2 Supplemental Flight Data..................................... 77
Temperature Displays................................................... 77
Wind Data.................................................................. 78
Vertical Navigation (VNV) Indications............................ 79
2.3 PFD Annunciations and Alerting Functions......... 80
G1000 Alerting System................................................. 80
Marker Beacon Annunciations...................................... 81
Traffic Annunciation..................................................... 82
TAWS Annunciations.................................................... 82
Altitude Alerting.......................................................... 83
190-00629-04 Rev. A
Low Altitude Annunciation........................................... 83
Minimum Descent Altitude/Decision Height Alerting....... 84
2.4 Abnormal Operations............................................ 85
Abnormal GPS Conditions............................................ 85
Unusual Attitudes........................................................ 86
SECTION 3 ENGINE INDICATION SYSTEM
3.1 Engine Display........................................................ 89
3.2 Lean Display............................................................ 91
3.3 System Display....................................................... 94
4.1
4.2
4.3
4.4
4.5
SECTION 4 AUDIO PANEL AND CNS
Overview................................................................. 97
MFD/PFD Controls and Frequency Display...................... 98
Audio Panel Controls................................................. 100
COM Operation..................................................... 102
COM Transceiver Selection and Activation.................... 102
COM Transceiver Manual Tuning................................. 103
Quick-Tuning and Activating 121.500 MHz................... 104
Auto-Tuning the COM Frequency................................. 105
Frequency Spacing..................................................... 109
Automatic Squelch..................................................... 110
Volume..................................................................... 110
NAV Operation...................................................... 111
NAV Radio Selection and Activation............................ 111
NAV Receiver Manual Tuning...................................... 112
Auto-Tuning a NAV Frequency from the MFD............... 114
Marker Beacon Receiver............................................. 119
DME Tuning (Optional)............................................... 120
GTX 33 ES Mode S Transponder......................... 121
Transponder Controls................................................. 121
Transponder Mode Selection....................................... 122
Entering a Transponder Code...................................... 125
IDENT Function......................................................... 126
Flight ID Reporting.................................................... 127
Additional Audio Panel Functions...................... 128
Power-Up.................................................................. 128
Mono/Stereo Headsets............................................... 128
Speaker.................................................................... 128
Intercom................................................................... 129
Clearance Recorder and Player.................................... 131
Split COM................................................................. 132
Entertainment Inputs................................................. 133
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58
TABLE OF CONTENTS
4.6 Audio Panel Preflight Procedure........................ 134
4.7 Abnormal Operation............................................ 135
Stuck Microphone...................................................... 135
COM Tuning Failure.................................................... 135
Audio Panel Fail-Safe Operation.................................. 135
Reversionary Mode.................................................... 135
5.1
5.2
5.3
5.4
5.5
5.6
SECTION 5 FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
Introduction.......................................................... 137
Navigation Status Box................................................ 138
Using Map Displays.............................................. 140
Map Orientation........................................................ 140
Map Range............................................................... 142
Map Panning............................................................. 144
Measuring Bearing and Distance................................. 149
Topography............................................................... 150
Map Symbols............................................................ 153
Airways.................................................................... 159
Track Vector.............................................................. 161
Wind Vector.............................................................. 162
Nav Range Ring........................................................ 163
Fuel Range Ring........................................................ 164
Field of View (SVS)..................................................... 165
Selected Altitude Intercept Arc.................................... 166
Waypoints.............................................................. 167
Airports.................................................................... 168
Intersections............................................................. 175
NDBs........................................................................ 177
VORs........................................................................ 179
User Waypoints......................................................... 181
Airspaces............................................................... 187
Direct-to-Navigation ........................................... 191
Flight Planning...................................................... 197
Flight Plan Creation................................................... 198
Adding Waypoints to an Existing Flight Plan................. 203
Adding Airways to a Flight Plan.................................. 205
Adding Procedures to a Stored Flight Plan................... 207
Flight Plan Storage.................................................... 214
Flight Plan Editing..................................................... 216
Along Track Offsets.................................................... 219
Parallel Track............................................................. 220
Activating a Flight Plan Leg........................................ 224
Inverting a Flight Plan................................................ 225
Flight Plan Views....................................................... 226
Closest Point of FPL................................................... 228
User-Defined Holding Patterns.................................... 228
5.7 Vertical Navigation.............................................. 233
Altitude Constraints................................................... 235
5.8 Procedures............................................................ 239
Departures................................................................ 239
Arrivals .................................................................... 243
Approaches .............................................................. 246
5.9 Trip Planning......................................................... 254
Trip Planning............................................................. 254
5.10 RAIM Prediction................................................... 258
5.11 Navigating a Flight Plan...................................... 261
5.12 Abnormal Operation............................................ 289
6.1
6.2
6.3
6.4
6.5
6.6
SECTION 6 HAZARD AVOIDANCE
XM WX Satellite Weather.................................... 292
Activating Services..................................................... 292
Using XM WX Satellite Weather Products..................... 294
Airborne Color Weather Radar........................... 324
System Description.................................................... 324
Principles of Pulsed Airborne Weather Radar................ 324
Safe Operating Distance............................................. 329
Basic Antenna Tilt Setup............................................. 329
Weather Mapping and Interpretation.......................... 331
Ground Mapping and Interpretation............................ 344
System Status............................................................ 345
WX-500 Stormscope............................................ 346
Setting Up Stormscope on the Navigation Map............ 346
Selecting the Stormscope Page................................... 350
TAWS-B.................................................................. 352
Displaying TAWS-B Data............................................. 353
TAWS-B Page............................................................ 355
TAWS-B Alerts........................................................... 357
System Status............................................................ 363
Profile View Terrain.............................................. 365
Profile View Display................................................... 366
Traffic Information Service (TIS)......................... 369
Displaying TRAFFIC Data............................................ 370
Traffic Map Page........................................................ 372
TIS Alerts.................................................................. 373
System Status............................................................ 374
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58
190-00629-04 Rev. A
TABLE OF CONTENTS
6.7 Garmin GTS 820 Traffic........................................ 377
Theory of operation................................................... 377
TAS Alerts................................................................. 380
System Test............................................................... 381
Operation................................................................. 382
6.8 L-3 Skywatch Traffic............................................. 390
TAS Symbology.......................................................... 390
Operation................................................................. 391
Altitude Display......................................................... 394
Traffic Map Page Display Range.................................. 394
TAS Alerts................................................................. 396
System Status............................................................ 396
SECTION 7 AUTOMATIC FLIGHT CONTROL SYSTEM
7.1 AFCS Overview..................................................... 399
Additional AFCS Controls........................................... 401
7.2 Flight Director Operation.................................... 402
Activating the Flight Director...................................... 402
AFCS Status Box........................................................ 403
Flight Director Modes................................................. 404
Command Bars.......................................................... 404
7.3 Vertical Modes...................................................... 405
Pitch Hold Mode (PIT)................................................ 406
Selected Altitude Capture Mode (ALTS)........................ 407
Altitude Hold Mode (ALT)........................................... 408
Vertical Speed Mode (VS)........................................... 409
Flight Level Change Mode (FLC).................................. 410
Vertical Navigation Modes (VPTH, ALTV)...................... 412
Glidepath Mode (GP) (SBAS only)................................ 417
Glideslope Mode (GS)................................................ 419
Go Around Mode (GA)............................................... 420
7.4 Lateral Modes....................................................... 421
Roll Hold Mode (ROL)................................................ 422
Navigation Modes (GPS, VOR, LOC, bc)........................ 424
Approach Modes (GPS, VAPP, LOC).............................. 426
Backcourse Mode (BC)............................................... 427
Intercepting and Flying A DME Arc.............................. 428
7.5 Autopilot and Yaw Damper Operation.............. 429
Flight Control............................................................ 429
Engagement.............................................................. 430
Control Wheel Steering.............................................. 430
Disengagement......................................................... 431
190-00629-04 Rev. A
7.6 Example Flight Plan............................................. 432
Departure................................................................. 433
Intercepting a VOR Radial........................................... 435
Flying a Flight Plan/GPS Course.................................. 436
Descent.................................................................... 437
Approach.................................................................. 441
Go Around/Missed Approach...................................... 445
7.7 AFCS Annunciations and Alerts.......................... 447
AFCS Status Alerts..................................................... 447
Overspeed Protection................................................. 448
8.1
8.2
8.3
8.4
8.5
8.6
8.7
8.8
8.9
SECTION 8 ADDITIONAL FEATURES
Synthetic Vision System (SVS) (Optional).......... 450
SVS Operation........................................................... 451
SVS Features............................................................. 453
Field of View............................................................. 461
SafeTaxi................................................................. 463
ChartView.............................................................. 469
ChartView Softkeys.................................................... 470
Terminal Procedures Charts........................................ 471
Chart Options............................................................ 479
Day/Night View......................................................... 485
ChartView Cycle Number and Expiration Date.............. 487
FliteCharts............................................................. 490
FliteCharts Softkeys................................................... 491
Terminal Procedures Charts........................................ 492
Chart Options............................................................ 500
Day/Night View......................................................... 504
FliteCharts Cycle Number and Expiration Date.............. 507
Airport Directory................................................. 511
Airport Directory Database Cycle Number and Revision.512
SiriusXM Satellite Radio Entertainment............ 514
Activating SiriusXM Satellite Radio Services................. 514
Using SiriusXM Satellite Radio.................................... 515
Automatic Audio Muting............................................ 519
Scheduler............................................................... 521
Flight Data Logging............................................. 523
Abnormal Operation............................................ 525
SVS Troubleshooting.................................................. 525
Reversionary Mode.................................................... 525
Unusual Attitudes...................................................... 526
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58
TABLE OF CONTENTS
APPENDICES
Annunciations and Alerts.............................................. 529
Alert Level Definitions................................................ 530
Aircraft Alerts............................................................ 531
G1000 System Annunciations..................................... 533
G1000 System Message Advisories.............................. 536
Pilot Profile Import/Export Messages........................... 546
Database Management................................................. 547
Jeppesen Databases................................................... 547
Garmin Databases..................................................... 551
Glossary........................................................................... 557
Frequently Asked Questions......................................... 565
Map Symbols.................................................................. 569
INDEX
Index .................................................................................I-1
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58
190-00629-04 Rev. A
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
SECTION 1 SYSTEM OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
1.1 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
This section provides an overview of the G1000 Integrated Flight Deck as installed in the Beechcraft G58 Baron.
The G1000 system is an integrated flight control system that presents flight instrumentation, position, navigation,
communication, and identification information to the pilot through large-format displays. The system consists of
the following Line Replaceable Units (LRUs):
• GDL 69A Satellite Data Link Receiver
• GDC 74A Air Data Computer (ADC)
• GWX 68 Weather Radar
• GEA 71 Engine/Airframe Unit
• GTP 59 Outside Air Temperature (OAT) Probe
• GRS 77 Attitude and Heading Reference System
(AHRS)
• GSA 81 AFCS Servos
• GMU 44 Magnetometer
• GTS 820 Traffic Advisory System (if installed)
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
• GIA 63W Integrated Avionics Unit
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
• GDU 1043/1045 Multi Function Display (MFD)
• GTX 33 Mode S Transponder with Extended
Squitter
EIS
• GDU 1040 Primary Flight Display (PFD)
• GSM 85 Servo Gearboxes
• GMA 1347 Audio System with Integrated Marker
Beacon Receiver
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
A top-level G1000 system block diagram is shown in Figure 1-1 (it does not include the GSM 85A).
NOTE: Refer to the AFCS section for details on the GFC 700 AFCS.
AFCS
In the Beechcraft G58 Baron, the GFC 700 Automated Flight Control System (AFCS) provides the flight director
(FD), autopilot (AP), and yaw damper (YD) functions of the G1000 system.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-00629-04 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58
1
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
1.2 LINE REPLACEABLE UNITS (LRU)
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
• GDU 1040 (1) – The GDU 1040 is configured as a Primary Flight Display (PFD) that features a 10.4-inch LCD
with 1024 x 768 resolution. The display communicates with the MFD and with the #1 GIA 63W Integrated
Avionics Unit through a High-Speed Data Bus (HSDB) Ethernet connection.
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
• GDU 1043/1045 (1) – The GDU 1043 or GDU 1045 is configured as an MFD that features a 10.4-inch LCD
with 1024 x 768 resolution. The display communicates with the PFD and with the #2 GIA 63W Integrated
Avionics Unit through a High-Speed Data Bus (HSDB) Ethernet connection. The GDU 1045 has a VNV Button,
which is needed to enable optional coupled Baro-VNAV AFCS mode.
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
• GIA 63W (2) – Functions as the main communication hub, linking all LRUs with the PFD and MFD. Each
GIA 63W contains a GPS receiver, VHF COM/NAV/GS receivers, a flight director (FD) and system integration
microprocessors. Each GIA 63W contains a GPS SBAS receiver. Each GIA 63W is paired with a display via
HSDB connection. The GIA 63Ws are not paired together and do not communicate with each other directly.
2
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58
190-00629-04 Rev. A
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
• GDC 74A (1) – Processes data from the pitot/static system as well as the OAT probe. This unit provides
pressure altitude, airspeed, vertical speed and OAT information to the G1000 system, and it communicates with
the GIA 63Ws, the displays, and the GRS 77, using an ARINC 429 digital interface (it also interfaces directly
with the GTP 59).
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
EIS
• GEA 71 (2) – Receives and processes signals from the engine and airframe sensors. This unit communicates
with both GIA 63Ws using an RS-485 digital interface.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
• GRS 77 (1) – Provides aircraft attitude and heading information via ARINC 429 to both displays and both
GIA 63Ws. The GRS 77 contains advanced sensors (including accelerometers and rate sensors) and interfaces
with the GMU 44 to obtain magnetic field information, with the GDC 74A to obtain air data, and with both
GIA 63Ws to obtain GPS information. AHRS modes of operation are discussed later in this document.
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
• GMU 44 (1) – Measures local magnetic field. Data is sent to the GRS 77 for processing to determine aircraft
magnetic heading. This unit receives power directly from the GRS 77 and communicates with the GRS 77
using an RS-485 digital interface.
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-00629-04 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58
3
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
• GMA 1347 (1) – Integrates NAV/COM digital audio, intercom system and marker beacon controls. This
unit also enables the manual control of the display reversionary mode (red DISPLAY BACKUP button) and
communicates with both GIA 63W units, using an RS-232 digital interface.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
• GTX 33 with Extended Squitter(1) – Solid-state transponder that provides Modes A, C, S, and ADS-B Out
capability. The transponder can be controlled from the PFD. The transponder communicates with the GIA
63Ws through an RS-232 digital interface.
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
• GDL 69A (1) – A satellite radio receiver that provides real-time weather information to the G1000 MFD (and,
indirectly, to the inset map of the PFD) as well as digital audio entertainment. The GDL 69A communicates
with the MFD via HSDB connection. A subscription to the XM Satellite Radio service is required to enable the
GDL 69A capability.
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
• GWX 68 (1) – Provides airborne weather and ground mapped radar data to the MFD, through the GDL 69A,
via HSDB connection.
4
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58
190-00629-04 Rev. A
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
• GTP 59 (1) – Provides Outside Air Temperature (OAT) data to the GDC 74A.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
• GSA 81 (4), and GSM 85 (4) – The GSA 81 servos are used for the automatic control of roll, pitch, yaw, and
pitch trim. These units interface with each GIA 63W.
The GSM 85 servo gearbox is responsible for transferring the output torque of the GSA 81 servo actuator to the
mechanical flight-control surface linkage.
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
• GTS 820 – The GTS 820 Traffic Advisory System (TAS) uses active interrogations of Mode S, Mode A, and
Mode C transponders to provide Traffic Advisories to the pilot independent of the air traffic control system.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
• GA 58 (2) – The GA 58 is a directional antenna for the Traffic Avoidance System. One top-mounted directional
antenna and one bottom mounted antenna are required.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-00629-04 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58
5
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
GDU 1040
GDU 1043/1045
GMA 1347
Audio Panel
Primary Flight Display
Reversionary
Control
Reversionary
Control
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Multi Function Display
EIS
G
GDC
74A
A
Air Data
C
Computerr
OAT
Airspeed
Altitude
Vertical
Speed
Ve
ed
No. 1 GIA 63W
Integrated Avionics Unit
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
System Integration Processors
I/O Processors
VHF COM
VHF NAV/LOC
GPS
Glideslope
No. 2 GIA 63W
Integrated Avionics Unit
System Integration Processors
I/O Processors
VHF COM
VHF NAV/LOC
GPS
Glideslope
GRS 77
AHRS
Attitude
Rate of Turn
Slip/Skid
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
GPS Output
GPS Output
GMU 44
Magnetometer
Heading
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
GTX 33
Transponder
GEA 71(2)
Engine/Airframe
Units
GSA 81 (4)
AFCS
Servos
L-3 WX-500
Stormscope
Lightning Sensor
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
(optional)
L-3 Skywatch
SKY497
Traffic
Advisory System
(if installed)
APPENDICES
Honeywell
KN 63
DME
(optional)
GWX 68
GDL 69A
Weather Radar
GTS 820
Data Link Weather
and Digital Audio
Entertainment
INDEX
Traffic Advisory System
(if installed)
Figure 1-1 G1000 System Block Diagram
6
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58
190-00629-04 Rev. A
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
1.3 G1000 CONTROLS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
NOTE: The Audio Panel (GMA 1347) and AFCS controls are also described in the CNS & Audio Panel and
AFCS sections respectively.
The G1000 system controls are located on the PFD and MFD bezels, and the audio panel. The controls for the
PFD and MFD are discussed within the following pages of this section.
1
2
EIS
PFD/MFD CONTROLS
5
4
3
6
7
8
9
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
24
10
13
19
25
11
14
20
26
12
15
21
27
22
28
23
29
APPENDICES
18
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
17
16
MFD Only
190-00629-04 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58
INDEX
Figure 1-2 PFD/MFD Controls
7
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
1 NAV VOL/ID Knob
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Turn to control NAV audio volume (shown in the NAV Frequency Box as a percentage)
Press to toggle Morse code identifier audio ON/OFF
2 NAV Frequency Trans- Transfers the standby and active NAV frequencies
fer Key
3 NAV Knob
Turn to tune NAV receiver standby frequencies (large knob for MHz; small for kHz)
Press to toggle light blue tuning box between NAV1 and NAV2
EIS
4 Heading Knob
5
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
6
7
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
8
AFCS
9
Turn to manually select a heading. When operating in Heading Select mode, this knob provides the heading reference to the flight director.
Press to display a digital heading momentarily to the left of the HSI and synchronize the
Selected Heading to the current heading
Turn to change map range
Joystick
Press to activate Map Pointer for map panning
Turn large knob for altimeter barometric pressure setting
CRS/BARO Knob
Turn the small knob to set the pilot-selected course on the HSI when the VOR1, VOR2, or
OBS/SUSP mode is selected. Pressing this knob centers the CDI on the currently selected
VOR. The pilot-selected course provides course reference to the pilot-side flight director
when operating in Navigation and Approach modes.
Press to re-center the CDI and return course pointer directly TO bearing of active waypoint/
station
Turn to tune COM transceiver standby frequencies (large knob for MHz; small for kHz)
COM Knob
Press to toggle light blue tuning box between COM1 and COM2
The selected COM (green) is controlled with the COM MIC Key (Audio Panel).
COM Frequency Trans- Transfers the standby and active COM frequencies
Press and hold two seconds to tune the emergency frequency (121.5 MHz) automatically into
fer Key (EMERG)
the active frequency field
COM VOL/SQ Knob Turn to control COM audio volume level (shown as a percentage in the COM Frequency
Box)
Press to turn the COM automatic squelch ON/OFF
10 Direct-to Key (
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
11 FPL Key
12 CLR Key
(DFLT MAP)
APPENDICES
13 MENU Key
14 PROC Key
Activates the direct-to function and allows the user to enter a destination waypoint and establish a direct course to the selected destination (specified by identifier, chosen from the
active route)
Displays flight plan information
Erases information, cancels entries, or removes menus
Press and hold to display the MFD Navigation Map Page (MFD only).
Displays a context-sensitive list of options for accessing additional features or making setting
changes
Gives access to IFR departure procedures (DPs), arrival procedures (STARs), and approach
procedures (IAPs) for a flight plan or selected airport
Validates/confirms menu selection or data entry
INDEX
15 ENT Key
)
8
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58
190-00629-04 Rev. A
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
16 FMS Knob
Selects/deselects the Altitude Hold mode.
22
VS Key
Selects/deselects the Vertical Speed mode.
23
FLC Key
Selects/deselects the Flight Level Change mode.
24
YD Key
Engages/disengages the Yaw Damper.
25
HDG Key
Selects/deselects the Heading Select mode.
26
APR Key
Selects/deselects the Approach mode.
27
Selects/deselects Vertical Navigation mode
28
VNV Key
(if equipped)
NOSE UP Key
29
NOSE DN Key
AFCS
ALT Key
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
21
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
20
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
19
EIS
18
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
17
Press to turn the selection cursor ON/OFF.
(Flight Management Data Entry: With cursor ON, turn to enter data in the highlighted field (large knob moves
cursor location; small knob selects character for highlighted cursor location)
System Knob)
Scrolling: When a list of information is too long for the window/box, a scroll bar appears,
indicating more items to view. With cursor ON, turn large knob to scroll through the list.
Page Selection: Turn knob on MFD to select the page to view (large knob selects a page
group; small knob selects a specific page from the group)
Sets the selected altitude in the Selected Altitude Box (the large knob selects the thousands,
ALT Knob
the small knob selects the hundreds). In addition to providing the standard G1000 altitude
alerter function, selected altitude provides an altitude setting for the Altitude Capture/Hold
mode of the AFCS.
Engages/disengages the Autopilot and Flight Director in the default vertical and lateral
AP Key
modes.
FD Key
Activates/deactivates the Flight Director only. Pressing the FD key turns on the Flight Director in the default vertical and lateral modes. Pressing the FD key again deactivates the Flight
Director and removes the command bars, unless the Autopilot is engaged. If the Autopilot
is engaged, the FD key is disabled.
Selects/deselects the Navigation mode.
NAV Key
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Controls the active pitch reference for the Pitch Hold, Vertical Speed, and Flight Level
Change modes.
Controls the active pitch reference for the Pitch Hold, Vertical Speed, and Flight Level
Change modes.
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-00629-04 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58
9
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
The NAV, CRS/BARO, COM, FMS, and ALT knobs are concentric dual knobs, each having small (inner)
and large (outer) control portion. When a portion of the knob is not specified in the text, either may be used.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
Large (Outer)
Knob
Small (Inner)
Knob
EIS
Figure 1-3 Dual Concentric Knob
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
The bottom portion of the MFD bezel features 12 softkeys that are designed to perform various functions
depending upon the specific page being displayed. These softkeys are discussed throughout the Pilot’s Guide
documentation.
ADDITIONAL AFCS CONTROLS
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
The AP DISC (Autopilot Disconnect) Switch, CWS (Control Wheel Steering) Button, GO AROUND
Switch, and MEPT (Manual Electric Pitch Trim) Switch are additional AFCS controls and are located in the cockpit,
separately from the AFCS Control Unit. These are discussed in detail in the AFCS section.
10
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58
190-00629-04 Rev. A
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
AUDIO PANEL CONTROLS
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
3
EIS
2
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
1
17
20
21
22
23
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
19
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
18
24
Figure 1-4 Audio Panel Controls (GMA 1347)
AFCS
NOTE: When a key is selected, a triangular annunciator above the key is illuminated.
COM1 – When selected, audio from the #1 COM receiver can be heard.
3
COM2 MIC – Selects the #2 transmitter for transmitting. COM2 receive is simultaneously selected when
this key is pressed allowing received audio from the #2 COM receiver to be heard. COM1 receive can be
added by pressing the COM1 Key.
4
COM2 – When selected, audio from the #2 COM receiver can be heard.
5
COM3 MIC – Not used in Beechcraft G58 aircraft.
190-00629-04 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58
INDEX
2
APPENDICES
COM1 MIC – Selects the #1 transmitter for transmitting. COM1 receive is simultaneously selected when
this key is pressed allowing received audio from the #1 COM receiver to be heard. COM2 receive can be
added by pressing the COM2 Key.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
1
11
COM3 – Not used in Beechcraft G58 aircraft.
7
COM 1/2 – Split COM Key. Allows simultaneous transmission on COM1 and COM2 by the pilot and copilot.
8
TEL – Not used in Beechcraft G58 aircraft.
9
PA – Not used in Beechcraft G58 aircraft.
10
SPKR – Selects and deselects the cabin speaker. COM and NAV receiver audio can be heard on the
speaker.
11
MKR/MUTE – Selects marker beacon receiver audio. Mutes the currently received marker beacon receiver
audio. Unmutes automatically when new marker beacon audio is received. Also, stops play of recorded
COM audio.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
12
HI SENS – Press to increase marker beacon receiver sensitivity. Press again to return to low sensitivity.
13
DME – Pressing turns optional DME audio on or off.
14
NAV1 – When selected, audio from the #1 NAV receiver can be heard.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
15
ADF – Not used in Beechcraft G58 aircraft.
16
NAV2 – When selected, audio from the #2 NAV receiver can be heard.
17
AUX – Not used in Beechcraft G58 aircraft.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
18
MAN SQ – Enables manual squelch for the intercom. When the intercom is active, press the PILOT Knob
to illuminate SQ. Turn the PILOT/PASS Knobs to adjust squelch.
19
PLAY – Press once to play the last recorded COM audio. Press again while audio is playing and the
previous block of recorded audio is played. Each subsequent press plays each previously recorded block.
Pressing the MKR/MUTE Key during play of a memory block stops play.
20
PILOT – Selects and deselects the pilot intercom isolation.
21
COPLT – Selects and deselects the copilot intercom isolation.
22
PILOT Knob – Press to switch between volume and squelch control as indicated by illumination of VOL
or SQ. Turn to adjust intercom volume or squelch. The MAN SQ Key must be selected to allow squelch
adjustment.
23
PASS Knob – Turn to adjust Copilot/Passenger intercom volume or squelch. The MAN SQ Key must be
selected to allow squelch adjustment.
24
DISPLAY BACKUP Button – Manually selects Reversionary Mode.
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
6
AFCS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
12
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58
190-00629-04 Rev. A
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
1.4 SECURE DIGITAL CARDS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
NOTE: Refer to the Appendices for instructions on updating the aviation database.
NOTE: Ensure that the G1000 system is powered off before inserting the SD card.
EIS
The GDU 1040 and GDU 1043/1045 data card slots use Secure Digital (SD) cards and are located on the top
right portion of the display bezels. Each display bezel is equipped with two SD card slots. SD cards are used for
aviation database and system software updates as well as terrain database storage.
Install an SD card
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Insert the SD card in the SD card slot, pushing the card in until the spring latch engages. The front of the card
should remain flush with the face of the display bezel.
Remove an SD card
Gently press on the SD card to release the spring latch and eject the card.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
SD Card Slots
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Figure 1-5 Display Bezel SD Card Slots
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-00629-04 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58
13
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
1.5 SYSTEM POWER-UP
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
NOTE: Refer to the Appendices for AHRS initialization bank angle limitations.
NOTE: See the Appendices for additional information regarding system-specific annunciations and alerts.
NOTE: See the Pilot’s Operating Handbook and FAA Approved Airplane Flight Manual (AFM/POH) for specific
EIS
procedures concerning avionics power application and emergency power supply operation.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
The G1000 system is integrated with the aircraft electrical system and receives power directly from electrical
busses. The G1000 PFDs, MFD and supporting sub-systems include both power-on and continuous built-in test
features that exercise the processor, RAM, ROM, external inputs and outputs to provide safe operation.
During system initialization, test annunciations are displayed, as shown in Figure 1-6. All system annunciations
should disappear typically within one minute of power-up. Upon power-up, key annunciator lights also become
momentarily illuminated on the audio panels, the control units and the display bezels.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
On the PFD, the AHRS begins to initialize and displays ‘AHRS ALIGN: Keep Wings Level’. The AHRS should
display valid attitude and heading fields typically within one minute of power-up. The AHRS can align itself both
while taxiing and during level flight.
When the MFD powers up (Figure 1-7), the MFD Power-up Page displays the following information:
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
• System version
• Copyright
• Land database name and version
• Safe Taxi database information
• Terrain database name and version
• Obstacle database name and version
• Navigation database name, version, and effective
dates
• Airport Directory name, version and effective dates
• FliteCharts/ChartView database information
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Current database information includes the valid operating dates, cycle number and database type. When this
information has been reviewed for currency (to ensure that no databases have expired), the pilot is prompted to
continue. Pressing the ENT Key acknowledges this information and displays the Navigation Map Page.
Figure 1-6 PFD Initialization
14
Figure 1-7 MFD Power-up Page
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58
190-00629-04 Rev. A
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
1.6 SYSTEM OPERATION
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The displays are connected together via multiple data busses, thus allowing for high-speed communication.
As shown in Figure 1-1, each GIA 63W is connected to one display. This section discusses the normal and
reversionary modes of operation as well as the various AHRS modes of the G1000 system.
NORMAL OPERATION
PFD
EIS
In normal mode, the PFD presents graphical flight instrumentation (attitude, heading, airspeed, altitude
and vertical speed), thereby replacing the traditional flight instrument cluster. The PFD also offers control for
COM and NAV frequency selection.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
MFD
In normal mode, the right portion of the MFD displays a full-color moving map with navigation information,
while the left portion of the MFD is dedicated to the Engine Indication System (EIS).
Primary Flight Display
Audio Panel
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Figure 1-8 gives an example of the G1000 displays in normal mode.
Multi Function Display
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
Figure 1-8 Normal Operation
REVERSIONARY MODE
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
NOTE: The G1000 System alerts the pilot when backup paths are utilized by the LRUs. Refer to Appendix A
for further information regarding system-specific alerts.
APPENDICES
In the event of a display failure, the G1000 System automatically switches to reversionary (backup) mode. In
reversionary mode, all important flight information is presented on the remaining display in the same format
as in normal operating mode.
190-00629-04 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58
INDEX
If a display fails, the appropriate IAU Ethernet interface to the display is cut off. Thus, the IAU can no longer
communicate with the remaining display (refer to Figure 1-1), and the NAV and COM functions provided to
the failed display by the IAU are flagged as invalid on the remaining display. The system reverts to backup
paths for the AHRS, ADC, Engine/Airframe Unit, and Transponder, as required. The change to backup paths is
completely automated for all LRUs and no pilot action is required.
15
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
Audio Panel
Multi Function Display
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Primary Flight Display Failed
Figure 1-9 Reversionary Mode Operation
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
If the system fails to detect a display problem, reversionary mode may be manually activated by pressing the
Audio Panel’s red DISPLAY BACKUP button (refer to the Audio Panel section for further details). Pressing this
button again deactivates reversionary mode.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Pressing the DISPLAY BACKUP
button activates/deactivates
reversionary mode for both the
PFD and the MFD.
Figure 1-10 DISPLAY BACKUP Button
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Should the connection between a PFD and the on-side GIA 63W become inoperative, the on-side GIA 63W
can no longer communicate with the remaining PFD (refer to Figure 1-1). As a result, the NAV and COM
functions provided to the failed PFD by the on-side GIA 63W are flagged as invalid (red “X”) on the remaining
PFD (see Figure 1-11).
Figure 1-11 Inoperative Input (NAV1 Shown)
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AHRS OPERATION
NOTE: Refer to the Appendices for specific AHRS alert information.
APPENDICES
NOTE: Aggressive maneuvering while AHRS is not operating normally may degrade AHRS accuracy.
INDEX
In addition to using internal sensors, the GRS 77 AHRS uses GPS information, magnetic field data and air
data to assist in attitude/heading calculations. In normal mode, the AHRS relies upon GPS and magnetic
field measurements. If either of these external measurements is unavailable or invalid, the AHRS uses air
data information for attitude determination. Four AHRS modes of operation are available (see Figure 1-12)
and depend upon the combination of available sensor inputs. Loss of air data, GPS, or magnetometer sensor
inputs is communicated to the pilot by message advisory alerts.
16
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58
190-00629-04 Rev. A
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
available
available
unavailable
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
le
ab
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AHRS
no-GPS
Mode
ail
av
AHRS no- AHRS no-Mag/
Mag Mode
no-Air Mode
Heading Invalid
Air Data
un
available
Air Data
AHRS Normal
Operation
unavailable
available
unavailable
available
Magnetometer Data
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Magnetometer Data
EIS
unavailable
GPS Data
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The AHRS (GRS 77) corrects for shifts and variations in the Earth’s magnetic field by applying the Magnetic
Field Variation Database. The Magnetic Field Variation Database is derived from the International Geomagnetic
Reference Field (IGRF). The IGRF is a mathematical model that describes the Earth’s main magnetic field
and its annual rate of change. The database is updated approximately every 5 years. See the Appendices for
information on updating the Magnetic Field Variation Database. The system will prompt you on startup when
an update is available. Failure to update this database could lead to erroneous heading information being
displayed to the pilot.
Attitude/Heading Invalid
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Figure 1-12 AHRS Operation
GPS INPUT FAILURE
APPENDICES
NOTE: In-flight initialization of AHRS, when operating without any valid source of GPS data and at true
air speed values greater than approximately 200 knots, is not guaranteed. Under these rare conditions, it
is possible for in-flight AHRS initialization to take an indefinite amount of time which would result in an
extended period of time where valid AHRS outputs are unavailable.
190-00629-04 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58
INDEX
The G1000 system provides two sources of GPS information. If a single GPS receiver fails, or if the
information provided from one of the GPS receivers is unreliable, the AHRS seamlessly transitions to using the
other GPS receiver. An alert message informs the pilot of the use of the backup GPS path. If both GPS inputs
fail, the AHRS continues to operate in reversionary No-GPS mode so long as the air data and magnetometer
inputs are available and valid.
17
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
AIR DATA INPUT FAILURE
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
A failure of the air data input has no effect on AHRS output while AHRS is operating in normal mode. A
failure of the air data input while the AHRS is operating in reversionary No-GPS mode results in invalid
attitude and heading information on the PFD (as indicated by red “X” flags).
MAGNETOMETER FAILURE
EIS
If the magnetometer input fails, the AHRS transitions to one of the reversionary No-Magnetometer modes
and continues to output valid attitude information. However, if the aircraft is airborne, the heading output
on the PFD does become invalid (as indicated by a red “X”).
G1000 SYSTEM ANNUNCIATIONS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
NOTE: For a detailed description of all annunciations and alerts, refer to Appendix A. Refer to the (AFM/
POH) for additional information regarding pilot responses to these annunciations.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
When an LRU or an LRU function fails, a large red “X” is typically displayed on windows associated with
the failed data (Figure 1-14 displays all possible flags and responsible LRUs). Upon G1000 power-up, certain
windows remain invalid as equipment begins to initialize. All windows should be operational within one
minute of power-up. If any window remains flagged, the G1000 system should be serviced by a Garminauthorized repair facility.
GIA 63W
Integrated Avionics
Units
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
GIA 63W
Integrated
Avionics Units
AFCS
GDC 74A Air
Data Computer
GRS 77 AHRS
Or
GMU 44
Magnetometer
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
GEA 71 Engine
Airframe Unit
Or
GIA 63W
Integrated Avionics
Unit
INDEX
GDC 74A Air
Data Computer
Figure 1-13 G1000 System Failure Annunciations
GIA 63W
Integrated Avionics
Units
GTX 33 Transponder
Or
GIA 63W Integrated
Avionics Units
18
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58
190-00629-04 Rev. A
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
SOFTKEY FUNCTION
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The softkeys are located along the bottoms of the displays. The softkeys shown depend on the softkey level
or page being displayed. The bezel keys below the softkeys can be used to select the appropriate softkey. When
a softkey is selected, its color changes to black text on gray background and remains this way until it is turned
off, at which time it reverts to white text on black background.
Softkey On
Softkey Names (displayed)
Bezel-Mounted Softkeys (press)
EIS
Figure 1-14 Softkeys (Second-Level PFD Configuration)
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
PFD SOFTKEYS
The CDI, IDENT, TMR/REF, NRST, and ALERTS Softkeys undergo a momentary change to black text
on gray background and automatically switch back to white text on black background when selected. If
messages remain after acknowledgement, the ALERTS Softkey is black on white.
INSET
Displays terrain information on Inset Map
Displays Stormscope information on Inset Map (optional)
Displays NEXRAD weather and coverage on Inset Map (optional)
Displays XM lightning information on Inset Map (optional)
Displays METAR information on Inset Map (optional)
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58
INDEX
190-00629-04 Rev. A
APPENDICES
TERRAIN
STRMSCP
NEXRAD
XM LTNG
METAR
Displays icons and age on the Inset Map for selected weather products (optional)
Displays traffic information on Inset Map
TRAFFIC: No Traffic displayed on Inset Map
TRFC-1: Traffic displayed on Inset Map
TRFC-2: Traffic Only display shown
Displays topographical data (e.g., coastlines, terrain, rivers, lakes) and elevation scale
on Inset Map
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
TOPO
AFCS
WX LGND
TRAFFIC
Displays Inset Map in PFD lower left corner
Removes Inset Map
Selects desired amount of map detail; cycles through declutter levels:
DCLTR (No Declutter): All map features visible
DCLTR-1: Declutters land data
DCLTR-2: Declutters land and SUA data
DCLTR-3: Removes everything except for the active flight plan
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
OFF
DCLTR (3)
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
The PFD softkeys provide control over flight management functions, including GPS, NAV, terrain, traffic,
and lightning. Each softkey sublevel has a BACK Softkey which can be pressed to return to the previous
level. The ALERTS Softkey is visible in all softkey levels. For the top level softkeys and the transponder
(XPDR) levels, the IDENT Softkey remains visible.
19
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
PFD
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
SYN VIS
PATHWAY
SYN TERR
HRZN HDG
APTSIGNS
EIS
DFLTS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
WIND
OPTN 1
OPTN 2
OPTN 3
OFF
DME
BRG1
HSI FRMT
HPA
Press to display the BARO setting as hectopacals
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
OBS
CDI
DME
APPENDICES
Displays the softkeys for selecting the two HSI formats
ALT UNIT
METERS
IN
STD BARO
XPDR
STBY
ON
INDEX
Displays softkeys to select wind data parameters
Headwind/tailwind and crosswind arrows with numeric speed components
Wind direction arrow and numeric speed
Wind direction arrow with numeric direction and speed
Information not displayed
Displays/removes the DME Information Window (optional)
Cycles the Bearing 1 Information Window between NAV1, and GPS/ waypoint
identifier and GPS-derived distance information
Displays HSI as a 360° compass rose
Displays HSI as a 140° viewable arc
Cycles the Bearing 1 Information Window between NAV2, and GPS/ waypoint
identifier and GPS-derived distance information
Displays softkeys for setting the altimeter and BARO settings to metric units
When enabled, displays altimeter in meters
Press to display the BARO setting as inches of mercury
360 HSI
ARC HSI
BRG2
20
Displays second-level softkeys for additional PFD configurations
Displays the softkeys for enabling or disabling Synthetic Vision features
Displays rectangular boxes representing the horizontal and vertical flight path of the
active flight plan
Enables synthetic terrain depiction
Displays compass heading along the Zero-Pitch line
Displays position markers for airports within approximately 15 nm of the current
aircraft position. Airport identifiers are displayed when the airport is within
approximately 9 nm.
Resets PFD to default settings, including changing units to standard
Sets barometric pressure to 29.92 in Hg (1013 hPa if metric units are selected)
Selects OBS mode on the CDI when navigating by GPS (only available with active
leg)
Cycles through GPS, VOR1, and VOR2 navigation modes on the CDI
Displays the DME Tuning Window, allowing tuning and selection of the DME
(optional)
Displays transponder mode selection softkeys
Selects standby mode (transponder does not reply to any interrogations)
White (On-Ground) - Transponder generates Mode A and Mode S replies, as well as
transmission of acquisition and extended squitters, including ADS-B out.
Green (Airborne) - Transponder generates Mode A and Mode S replies, as well as
transmission of acquisition and extended squitters, including ADS-B out.
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58
190-00629-04 Rev. A
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
TMR/REF
NRST
ALERTS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
IDENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
ADS-B TX
EIS
BKSP
IDENT
Selects Altitude Mode (selection is usually automatic)
White (On-Ground) - Transponder does not allow Mode A or Mode C replies to
interrogations, , but it does permit acquisition and extended squitters including
ADS-B out, and replies to discretely addressed Mode S interrogations.
Green (Airborne) - Transponder generates Mode A, Mode C, and Mode S replies
to interrogations, as well as transmissions of acquisition and extended squitters
including ADS-B out.
Automatically enters the VFR code (1200 in the U.S.A. only)
Displays transponder code selection softkeys 0-7
Use numbers to enter code
Activates the Special Position Identification (SPI) pulse for 18 seconds, identifying
the transponder return on the ATC screen
Removes numbers entered, one at a time
Activates the Special Position Identification (SPI) pulse for 18 seconds, identifying
the transponder return on the ATC screen
Enables/disables automatic transmission of ADS-B position and speed.
Activates the Special Position Identification (SPI) pulse for 18 seconds, identifying
the transponder return on the ATC screen
Displays Timer/References Window
Displays Nearest Airports Window
Displays Alerts Window
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
VFR
CODE
0—7
IDENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
ALT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
(optional)
ALERTS
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Figure 1-15 Top Level PFD Softkeys
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-00629-04 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58
21
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
(optional)
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
ALERTS
(optional)
(optional)
WX LGND
STRMSCP
(optional)
(optional)
(optional)
METAR
TRFC-1
ALERTS
Select the BACK Softkey
to return to the top-level softkeys.
EIS
TRFC-2
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Figure 1-16 INSET Softkeys
(optional)
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
ALERTS
HSI FRMT
ALT UNIT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
SYN VIS
ALERTS
Select the BACK Softkey to return
to the top-level softkeys
AFCS
METERS
HPA
ARC HSI
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
360 HSI
IN
ALERTS
ALERTS
ALERTS
APPENDICES
PATHWAY SYN TERR HRZN HDG APTSIGNS
ALERTS
INDEX
Figure 1-17 PFD Configuration Softkeys
22
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58
190-00629-04 Rev. A
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
(optional)
ALERTS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
ADS-B TX
ALERTS
Select the BACK Softkey to return
to the top-level softkeys.
EIS
ALERTS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Select the BACK Softkey to return
to the previous level softkeys.
Figure 1-18 XPDR Softkeys
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-00629-04 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58
23
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
MFD SOFTKEYS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
ENGINE
ENGINE
LEAN
CYL SLCT
ASSIST
SYSTEM
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
DEC FUEL
INC FUEL
166 GAL
194 GAL
MAP
TRAFFIC
PROFILE
TOPO
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
TERRAIN
AIRWAYS
(Default label is
dependent on map
setup option selected)
STRMSCP
NEXRAD
XM LTNG
METAR
LEGEND
BACK
DCLTR (3)
INDEX
SHW CHRT
CHKLIST
Displays second-level softkeys for additional EIS configuration
Displays default EIS display
Displays EIS lean display
Allows selection of engine cylinder to view additional information
Enables/disables leaning assist mode
Displays system oil pressure and temperature, fuel calculations, and electrical system
information
Decreases calculated fuel remaining by 1 lb for each softkey press
Increases calculated fuel remaining by 1 lb for each softkey press
Resets calculated fuel remaining to 166 gallons and resets fuel used to zero
Resets calculated fuel remaining to 194 gallons and resets fuel used to zero
Enables second-level Navigation Map softkeys
Displays traffic information on Navigation Map
Displays the profile view on Navigation Map
Displays topographical data (e.g., coastlines, terrain, rivers, lakes) and elevation scale
on Navigation Map
Displays terrain information on Navigation Map
Displays airways on the map; cycles through the following:
AIRWAYS: No airways are displayed
AIRWY ON: All airways are displayed
AIRWY LO: Only low altitude airways are displayed
AIRWY HI: Only high altitude airways are displayed
Displays Stormscope information on Navigation Map (optional)
Displays NEXRAD weather and coverage information on Navigation Map
Displays XM lightning information on Navigation Map
Displays METAR information on Navigation Map (optional)
Displays selected XM weather product legends on Navigation Map
Returns to top-level softkeys
Selects desired amount of map detail; cycles through declutter levels:
DCLTR (No Declutter): All map features visible
DCLTR-1: Declutters land data
DCLTR-2: Declutters land and SUA data
DCLTR-3: Removes everything except for the active flight plan
When available, displays optional airport and terminal procedure charts
When available, displays optional checklists
24
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58
190-00629-04 Rev. A
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
DCLTR
MAP
SHW CHRT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
ENGINE
CHKLIST
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
DCLTR-1
DCLTR-2
DCLTR-3
PROFILE
TOPO
TERRAIN
AIRWAYS
(optional) (optional)
STRMSCP NEXRAD
(optional) (optional)
XM LTNG
METAR
LEGEND
BACK
EIS
TRAFFIC
Select the BACK Softkey
on this level to return to
the top softkey level.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
AIRWY ON
AIRWY LO
AIRWAY HI
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
BACK
LEAN
SYSTEM
ENGINE
LEAN
SYSTEM
DEC FUEL
INC FUEL
ENGINE
LEAN
SYSTEM
CYL SLCT
ASSIST
166 GAL
194 GAL
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
ENGINE
BACK
BACK
AFCS
Figure 1-19 MFD Softkeys
GPS RECEIVER OPERATION
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
Each Integrated Avionics Unit (IAU) contains a GPS receiver. Internal system checking is performed to
ensure both GPS receivers are providing accurate data to the PFD. When both GPS receivers are providing
accurate data, the GPS receiver producing the better solution is used by the system. Information collected by
the specified receiver (GPS1 for the #1 IAU or GPS2 for the #2 IAU) may be viewed on the AUX - GPS Status
Page.
INDEX
These GPS sensor annunciations are most often seen after system power-up when one GPS receiver has
acquired satellites before the other, or one of the GPS receivers has not yet acquired a SBAS signal. While
the aircraft is on the ground, the SBAS signal may be blocked by obstructions causing one GPS receiver to
have difficulty acquiring a good signal. Also, while airborne, turning the aircraft may result in one of the GPS
receivers temporarily losing the SBAS signal.
If the sensor annunciation persists, check for a system failure message in the Messages Window on the PFD.
If no failure message exists, check the GPS Status Page and compare the information for GPS1 and GPS2.
Discrepancies may indicate a problem.
190-00629-04 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58
25
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Viewing GPS receiver status information
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
2) Use the small FMS Knob to select GPS Status Page.
1) Use the large FMS Knob to select the Auxiliary Page Group (see Section 1.7 for information on navigating MFD
page groups).
Selecting the GPS receiver for which data may be reviewed
1) Use the FMS Knob to select the AUX - GPS STATUS Page.
2) To change the selected GPS receiver:
EIS
a) Press the desired GPS Softkey.
Or:
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
a) Press the MENU Key.
b) Use the FMS Knob to highlight the receiver which is not selected and press the ENT Key.
Satellite Signal
Information Status
GPS Receiver RAIM Availability
Status
Prediction
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Satellite Constellation
Diagram
AFCS
SBAS
Selected
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Satellite Signal
Strength Bars
APPENDICES
GPS Selection
Softkeys
RAIM Softkey
Selected
SBAS Softkey
Selected
INDEX
Figure 1-20 GPS Status Page (RAIM or SBAS Selected)
26
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58
190-00629-04 Rev. A
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
The GPS Status Page provides the following information:
• Satellite constellation diagram
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Satellites currently in view are shown at their respective positions on a sky view diagram. The sky view is
always in a north-up orientation, with the outer circle representing the horizon, the inner circle representing
45° above the horizon, and the center point showing the position directly overhead.
Each satellite is represented by an oval containing the Pseudo-random noise (PRN) number (i.e., satellite
identification number). Satellites whose signals are currently being used are represented by solid ovals.
• Satellite signal information status
EIS
The accuracy of the aircraft’s GPS fix is calculated using Estimated Position Uncertainty (EPU), Dilution
of Precision (DOP), and horizontal and vertical figures of merit (HFOM and VFOM). EPU is the radius of a
circle centered on an estimated horizontal position in which actual position has 95% probability of laying.
EPU is a statistical error indication and not an actual error measurement.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
DOP measures satellite geometry quality (i.e., number of satellites received and where they are relative to
each other) on a range from 0.0 to 9.9, with lower numbers denoting better accuracy. HFOM and VFOM,
measures of horizontal and vertical position uncertainty, are the current 95% confidence horizontal and
vertical accuracy values reported by the GPS receiver.
The current calculated GPS position, time, altitude, ground speed, and track for the aircraft are displayed
below the satellite signal accuracy measurements.
• GPS receiver status
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
The GPS solution type (ACQUIRING, 2D NAV, 2D DIFF NAV, 3D NAV, 3D DIFF NAV) for the active
GPS receiver (GPS1 or GPS2) is shown in the upper right of the GPS Status Page. When the receiver is
in the process of acquiring enough satellite signals for navigation, the receiver uses satellite orbital data
(collected continuously from the satellites) and last known position to determine the satellites that should be
in view. ACQUIRING is indicated as the solution until a sufficient number of satellites have been acquired
for computing a solution.
AFCS
When the receiver is in the process of acquiring a 3D differential GPS solution, 3D NAV is indicated as the
solution until the 3D differential fix has finished acquisition. SBAS (Satellite-Based Augmentation System)
indicates INACTIVE. When acquisition is complete, the solution status indicates 3D DIFF NAV and SBAS
indicates ACTIVE.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
• RAIM (Receiver Autonomous Integrity Monitoring) Prediction (RAIM Softkey is selected)
APPENDICES
In most cases performing a RAIM prediction is not necessary. However, in some cases, the selected approach
may be outside the SBAS coverage area and it may be necessary to perform a RAIM prediction for the intended
approach.
Receiver Autonomous Integrity Monitoring (RAIM) is a GPS receiver function that performs a consistency
check on all tracked satellites. RAIM ensures that the available satellite geometry allows the receiver to
calculate a position within a specified RAIM protection limit (2.0 nautical miles for oceanic and enroute, 1.0
nm for terminal, and 0.3 nm for non-precision approaches). During oceanic, enroute, and terminal phases of
flight, RAIM is available nearly 100% of the time.
INDEX
The RAIM prediction function also indicates whether RAIM is available at a specified date and time. RAIM
computations predict satellite coverage within ±15 min of the specified arrival date and time.
190-00629-04 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58
27
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Because of the tighter protection limit on approaches, there may be times when RAIM is not available. The
G1000 automatically monitors RAIM and warns with an alert message when it is not available. If RAIM is not
predicted to be available for the final approach course, the approach does not become active, as indicated by
the messages “Approach is not active” and “RAIM not available from FAF to MAP”. If RAIM is not available
when crossing the FAF, the missed approach procedure must be flown.
Predicting RAIM availability at a selected waypoint
1) Select the GPS Status Page.
2) If necessary, press the RAIM Softkey.
EIS
3) Press the FMS Knob. The ‘WAYPOINT’ field is highlighted.
4) Turn the small FMS Knob to display the Waypoint Information Window.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
5) Enter the desired waypoint:
a) Use the FMS Knob to enter the desired waypoint by identifier, facility, or city name and press the ENT Key. Refer
to Section 1.7 for instructions on entering alphanumeric data into the G1000.
Or:
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
a) Turn the small FMS Knob counter-clockwise to display a list of flight plan waypoints (the FPL list is populated
only when navigating a flight plan).
b) Turn the small FMS Knob clockwise to display the NRST, RECENT, or AIRWAY waypoints, if required.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
c) Turn the large FMS Knob clockwise to select the desired waypoint. The G1000 automatically fills in the identifier,
facility, and city fields with the information for the selected waypoint.
d) Press the ENT Key to accept the waypoint entry.
6) Use the FMS Knob to enter an arrival time and press the ENT Key.
7) Use the FMS Knob to enter an arrival date and press the ENT Key.
AFCS
8) With the cursor highlighting ‘COMPUTE RAIM?’, press the ENT Key. Once RAIM availability is computed, one
of the following is displayed:
• ‘COMPUTE RAIM?’—RAIM has not been computed for the current waypoint, time, and date combination
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
• ‘COMPUTING AVAILABILITY’—RAIM calculation in progress
• ‘RAIM AVAILABLE’—RAIM is predicted to be available for the specified waypoint, time, and date
• ‘RAIM NOT AVAILABLE’—RAIM is predicted to be unavailable for the specified waypoint, time, and date
APPENDICES
Predicting RAIM availability at present position
1) Select the GPS Status Page.
2) If necessary, press the RAIM Softkey.
3) Press the FMS Knob. The ‘WAYPOINT’ field is highlighted.
INDEX
4) Press the MENU Key.
5) With ‘Set WPT to Present Position’ highlighted, press the ENT Key.
28
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58
190-00629-04 Rev. A
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
6) Press the ENT Key to accept the waypoint entry.
7) Use the FMS Knob to enter an arrival time and press the ENT Key.
8) Use the FMS Knob to enter an arrival date and press the ENT Key.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
9) With the cursor highlighting ‘COMPUTE RAIM?’, press the ENT Key. Once RAIM availability is computed, one
of the following is displayed:
• ‘COMPUTE RAIM?’—RAIM has not been computed for the current waypoint, time, and date combination
• ‘COMPUTING AVAILABILITY’—RAIM calculation in progress
• ‘RAIM AVAILABLE’—RAIM is predicted to be available for the specified waypoint, time, and date
EIS
• ‘RAIM NOT AVAILABLE’—RAIM is predicted to be unavailable for the specified waypoint, time, and date
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
• SBAS Selection (SBAS Softkey is selected)
In certain situations, such as when the aircraft is outside or on the fringe of the SBAS coverage area, it may
be desireable to disable SBAS (although it is not recommended). When disabled, the SBAS field in the GPS
Status box indicates DISABLED.
Disabling SBAS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
1) Select the GPS Status Page.
2) If necessary, press the SBAS Softkey.
3) Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
4) Turn either FMS Knob to select ‘EGNOS’ or ‘MSAS’ or ‘WAAS’, as necessary.
5) Press the ENT Key to uncheck the box.
6) Repeat steps 4 & 5 as necessary, then press the FMS Knob to remove the cursor.
AFCS
• GPS Satellite Signal Strengths
The GPS Status Page can be helpful in troubleshooting weak (or missing) signal levels due to poor satellite
coverage or installation problems. As the GPS receiver locks onto satellites, a signal strength bar is displayed
for each satellite in view, with the appropriate satellite PRN number (01-32 or 120-138 for SBAS) below each
bar. The progress of satellite acquisition is shown in three stages, as indicated by signal bar appearance:
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
- No bar—Receiver is looking for the indicated satellite
- Hollow bar—Receiver has found the satellite and is collecting data
- Light blue bar—Receiver has collected the necessary data and the satellite signal can be used
- Green bar—Satellite is being used for the GPS solution
- Checkered bar—Receiver has excluded the satellite (Fault Detection and Exclusion)
- “D” indication—Denotes the satellite is being used as part of the differential computations
APPENDICES
Each satellite has a 30-second data transmission that must be collected (signal strength bar is hollow) before
the satellite may be used for navigation (signal strength bar becomes solid).
INDEX
190-00629-04 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58
29
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
1.7 ACCESSING G1000 FUNCTIONALITY
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
MENUS
EIS
The G1000 has a MENU Key that, when pressed, displays a context-sensitive list of options. This options list
allows the user to access additional features or make settings changes which specifically relate to the currently
displayed window/page. There is no all-encompassing menu. Some menus provide access to additional
submenus that are used to view, edit, select, and review options. Menus display ‘NO OPTIONS’ when there are
no options for the window/page selected. The main controls used in association with all window/page group
operations are described in section 1.3. Softkey selection does not display menus or submenus.
Navigating the Page Menu Window
1) Press the MENU Key to display the Page Menu Window.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
2) Turn the FMS Knob to scroll through a list of available options (a scroll bar appears to the right of the window
when the option list is longer than the window).
3) Press the ENT Key to select the desired option.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
4) The CLR Key may be pressed to remove the menu and cancel the operation. Pressing the FMS Knob also
removes the displayed menu.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
No Options with
NRST Window
Displayed on the
PFD
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
Options
with FPL
Window
Displayed
Figure 1-21 Page Menu Examples
MFD PAGE GROUPS
INDEX
NOTE: Refer to other supporting sections in this Pilot’s Guide for details on specific pages.
30
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58
190-00629-04 Rev. A
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Page Group
Active Page Title
EIS
MFD
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Information on the MFD is presented on pages which are grouped according to function. The page group and
active page title are displayed in the upper center of the screen, below the Navigation Status Box. In the bottom
right corner of the screen, the current page group, number of pages available in the group, and placement of the
current page within the group are indicated. The MFD displays information in four main page groups; specific
pages within each group can vary depending on the configuration of optional equipment.
Selected Page
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Page Groups
Pages in Current Group
Figure 1-22 Page Title and Page Groups
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Selecting a page using the FMS Knob
1) Turn the large FMS Knob until the desired page group is selected.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
2) Turn the small FMS Knob until the desired page is selected.
There are also several pages (Airport/Procedures/Weather Information and XM pages) which are selected first
from within a main page group with the FMS Knob, then with the appropriate softkey at the bottom of the page
(or from the page menu). In this case, the page remains set to the selected page until a different page softkey is
selected, even if a different page group is selected.
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Map Pages (MAP)
Navigation Map
Traffic Map
APPENDICES
Weather Radar
Stormscope®(optional)
Weather Data Link (service optional)
Terrain
INDEX
Figure 1-23 Map Pages
190-00629-04 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58
31
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
Waypoint Page Group (WPT)
Airport/Procedures/Weather Information Pages
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
- Airport Information
(INFO-1 Softkey)
- Airport Directory Information
(INFO-2 Softkey)
- Departure Information
(DP Softkey)
EIS
- Arrival Information
(STAR Softkey)
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
- Approach Information
(APR Softkey)
- Weather Information (optional)
(WX Softkey)
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Intersection Information
NDB Information
Airport
Information
Pages
VOR Information
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
User Waypoint Information
Figure 1-24 Waypoint Pages
Auxiliary Pages (AUX)
Trip Planning
Utility
AFCS
GPS Status
System Setup
XM Satellite pages
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
- XM Information
(INFO Softkey)
- XM Radio
(RADIO Softkey)
XM
Satellite
Pages
APPENDICES
System Status
INDEX
Figure 1-25 Auxiliary Pages
32
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58
190-00629-04 Rev. A
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Nearest Pages (NRST)
Nearest Airports
Nearest Intersections
Nearest NDB
EIS
Nearest VOR
Nearest User Waypoints
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Nearest Frequencies
Nearest Airspaces
Figure 1-26 Nearest Pages
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
In addition to the main page groups accessed exclusively using the FMS Knobs, there are pages for flight
planning (FPL) and loading procedures (PROC) which are accessed by a dedicated key. In some instances,
softkeys may be used to access the Procedure Pages.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
The Flight Plan Pages are accessed using the FPL Key.. Main pages within this group are selected by turning
the small FMS Knob.
AFCS
Flight Plan Pages (FPL)
Active Flight Plan
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
- Wide View, Narrow View (VIEW
Softkey)
Flight Plan Catalog
Stored Flight Plan (NEW Softkey)
APPENDICES
Narrow and
Wide View
Figure 1-27 Flight Plan Pages
INDEX
190-00629-04 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58
33
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The Procedure pages may be accessed at any time on the MFD by pressing the PROC Key. A menu is
initialized, and when a departure, approach, or arrival is selected, the appropriate Procedure Loading Page is
opened. Turning the FMS Knob does not scroll through the Procedure pages (note the single page icon in the
lower right corner).
Procedure Pages (PROC)
Departure Loading
EIS
Arrival Loading
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Approach Loading
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Figure 1-28 Procedure Pages
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
For some of these pages (Airport Information pages, XM Satellite pages, Procedure pages), the title of the page
may change while the page icon remains the same.
MFD SYSTEM PAGES
In the Auxiliary (AUX) Page Group, there are two system pages: System Setup (page 4 of 6) and System Status
(page 6 of 6). The System Setup Page allows management of various system parameters, while the System
Status Page displays the status of all G1000 system LRUs.
AFCS
SYSTEM SETUP PAGE
G1000 system settings are managed from the System Setup Page. The following settings can be changed:
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
• Date/time
INDEX
APPENDICES
• Displayed navigation angle reference, temperature,
and position settings
34
• Flight Director
(see the AFCS Section)
• Page Navigation
• Baro transition alert
(see the Flight Instruments Section)
• MFD Navigation Status Box fields
(see the Flight Management Section)
• Airspace alerts
(see the Flight Management Section)
• CDI scaling for GPS navigation source
(see the Flight Instruments Section)
• Arrival alerts
(see the Flight Management Section)
• COM channel spacing
(see the Audio Panel and CNS Section)
• Audio alerts
• Criteria for displaying nearest airports
(see the Flight Management Section)
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58
190-00629-04 Rev. A
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Restoring system setup defaults:
1) Select the AUX - SYSTEM SETUP Page.
2) Press the DFLTS Softkey; or press the MENU Key, highlight ‘Restore Defaults’, and press the ENT Key.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Figure 1-29 System Setup Page
Pilot Profiles
AFCS
System settings may be saved under a pilot profile. When the system is powered on, the last selected pilot
profile is shown on the MFD Power-up Splash Screen (Figure 1-7). The G1000 can store up to 25 profiles;
the currently active profile, the amount of memory used, and the amount of memory available are shown at
the top of the System Setup Page in the box labeled ‘Pilot Profile’. From here, pilot profiles may be created,
selected, renamed, or deleted.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-00629-04 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58
35
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
Figure 1-30 Pilot Profile Management (System Setup Page)
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Creating a profile:
1) Select the AUX - SYSTEM SETUP Page.
2) Press the FMS Knob momentarily to activate the flashing cursor.
3) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight ‘CREATE’ in the Pilot Profile Box.
4) Press the ENT Key. A ‘Create Profile’ window is displayed.
AFCS
5) Use the FMS Knob to enter a profile name up to 16 characters long and press the ENT Key. Pilot profile names
cannot begin with a blank as the first letter.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
6) In the next field, use the small FMS Knob to select the desired settings upon which to base the new profile.
Profiles can be created based on Garmin factory defaults, default profile settings (initially based on Garmin
factory defaults unless edited by the pilot), or current system settings.
7) Press the ENT Key.
8) With ‘CREATE’ highlighted, press the ENT Key to create the profile
APPENDICES
Or:
Use the large FMS Knob to select ‘CREATE and ACTIVATE’ and press the ENT Key to activate the new profile.
9) To cancel the process, select ‘CANCEL’ with the large FMS Knob and press the ENT Key.
INDEX
Selecting an active profile:
1) Select the AUX - SYSTEM SETUP Page.
2) Press the FMS Knob momentarily to activate the flashing cursor.
36
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58
190-00629-04 Rev. A
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
3) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the active profile field in the Pilot Profile Box.
4) Turn the small FMS Knob to display the pilot profile list and highlight the desired profile.
5) Press the ENT Key. The G1000 loads and displays the system settings for the selected profile.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Renaming a profile:
1) Select the AUX - SYSTEM SETUP Page.
2) Press the FMS Knob momentarily to activate the flashing cursor.
3) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight ‘RENAME’ in the Pilot Profile Box.
EIS
4) Press the ENT Key.
5) In the ‘Rename Profile’ window, turn the FMS Knob to select the profile to rename.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
6) Press the ENT Key.
7) Use the FMS Knob to enter a new profile name up to 16 characters long and press the ENT Key.
8) With ‘RENAME’ highlighted, press the ENT Key.
9) To cancel the process, use the large FMS Knob to select ‘CANCEL’ and press the ENT Key.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Deleting a profile:
1) Select the AUX - SYSTEM SETUP Page.
2) Press the FMS Knob momentarily to activate the flashing cursor.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
3) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight ‘DELETE’ in the Pilot Profile Box.
4) Press the ENT Key.
5) In the ‘Delete Profile’ window, turn the FMS Knob to select the profile to delete.
6) Press the ENT Key.
AFCS
7) With ‘DELETE’ highlighted, press the ENT Key.
8) To cancel the process, use the large FMS Knob to select ‘CANCEL’ and press the ENT Key.
Importing a profile from an SD card:
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
1) Insert an SD card containing the pilot profile(s) into the top card slot on the MFD.
2) Turn the FMS Knob to select the AUX - SYSTEM SETUP Page.
3) Select the IMPORT Softkey.
APPENDICES
Or:
a) Press the MENU Key.
b) Turn the FMS Knob to highlight ‘Import Pilot Profile’ and press the ENT Key.
190-00629-04 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58
INDEX
4) The system displays the Pilot Profile Importing window with ‘IMPORT’ highlighted. To change the selected
profile to be imported from the SD card (shown as ‘SELECT FILE’), turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the
profile file name, then turn the small FMS Knob to highlight a profile from the list, and press the ENT Key.
37
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
5) If desired, the profile name to be used after profile has been imported can be changed by turning the FMS
Knob to highlight the ‘PROFILE NAME’ field, then use the large and small FMS Knobs to enter the name, and
press the ENT Key. Imported profile names cannot begin with a blank space or be named ‘DEFAULT’, ‘GARMIN
DEFAULTS’ or ‘DEFAULT SETTINGS’.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
6) With ‘IMPORT’ highlighted, press the ENT Key.
7) If the imported profile name is the same as an existing profile on the system, the system displays an ‘Overwrite
existing file? OK or CANCEL’ prompt. Press the ENT Key to replace profile on the system with the profile
imported from the SD card, or turn the FMS Knob to highlight ‘CANCEL’ and press the ENT Key to return to the
Pilot Profile Importing window.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
8) If successful, the system displays ‘Pilot profile import succeeded.’ in the IMPORT RESULTS window below. With
‘OK’ highlighted, press the ENT or CLR Keys or press the FMS Knob to return to the AUX - SYSTEM SETUP Page.
The imported profile becomes the active profile.
Pilot Profile Importing and Import
Results Window
Pilot Profiles Available for Import from
SD Card (‘STEVE’S PROFILE’ Selected)
Import Successful
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
Figure 1-31 Pilot Profile Import (AUX - System Setup Page)
38
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58
190-00629-04 Rev. A
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Exporting a profile to an SD card:
1) Insert the SD card for storing the Pilot Profile into the top card slot on the MFD.
2) Turn the FMS Knob to select the AUX - SYSTEM SETUP Page.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
3) If necessary, activate the desired pilot profile to export. Only the currently active Pilot Profile can be exported.
4) Select the EXPORT Softkey. The system displays the Pilot Profile Exporting window.
Or:
a) Press the MENU Key.
EIS
b) Turn the FMS Knob to highlight ‘Export Pilot Profile’ and press the ENT Key.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
5) To export the pilot profile using the current supplied name, press the ENT Key with ‘EXPORT’ highlighted. To
change the profile file name turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the ‘SELECT FILE’ field, then enter the new
name with the large and small FMS Knobs, then press the ENT Key. Then press the ENT Key with ‘EXPORT’
highlighted.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
6) If the profile name to be exported is the same as an existing profile file name on the SD card, the system displays
an ‘Overwrite existing file? OK or CANCEL’ prompt. Press the ENT Key to replace the profile on the SD card
with the profile to be exported, or turn the FMS Knob to highlight ‘CANCEL’ and press the ENT Key to return to
the Pilot Profile Exporting window without exporting the profile.
7) If successful, the EXPORT RESULTS window displays ‘Pilot profile export succeeded.’ With ‘OK’ highlighted,
press the ENT or CLR Keys, or press the FMS Knob to return to the AUX - SYSTEM SETUP Page.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
Export Successful
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Pilot Profile Exporting Window, Enter a
Name to Use for Exported Profile
Figure 1-32 Pilot Profile Export on the AUX - System Setup Page
APPENDICES
Date/Time
The G1000 obtains the current Universal Coordinated Time (UTC) date and time directly from the GPS
satellite signals (shown on the AUX - GPS Status Page). System time (displayed in the lower right corner of
the PFD) can be displayed in three formats: local 12-hr, local 24-hr, or UTC. Local time is set by adding/
subtracting an offset (hours:minutes) to/from UTC.
INDEX
190-00629-04 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58
39
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Figure 1-33 System Time (Local 24-hr Format)
To set the system time format:
1) While on the System Setup Page, press the FMS Knob momentarily to activate the flashing cursor.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
2) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the time format field in the Date/Time Box.
3) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the desired system time format (local 12hr, local 24hr, UTC) and press the
ENT Key.
To set the current time offset:
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
1) While on the System Setup Page, press the FMS Knob momentarily to activate the flashing cursor.
2) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the time offset field in the Date/Time Box.
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
3) Turn the FMS Knobs to enter the time offset and press the ENT Key.
INDEX
Figure 1-34 Date/Time Settings (System Setup Page)
40
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58
190-00629-04 Rev. A
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Display Units
Units in which various quantities are displayed on the G1000 screens are listed on the System Setup Page.
The Navigation Angle reference, the Temperature units, and the Position units can be set from here.
N/A
N/A
All positions
N/A
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Position
Engine Indication System (EIS)
AFCS
Weight**
All temperatures on PFD
Total Air Temperature (Trip Planning Page)
Fuel parameters (Trip Planning Page)
Altimeter
Vertical Speed Indicator
VNV altitudes (Active Flight Plan)
Engine Indication System (EIS)
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Fuel and Fuel Flow
Celsius*
Fahrenheit
Gallons*
Imperial Gallons
Kilograms
Liters
Pounds
Pounds*
Kilograms
HDDD°MM.MM’*
HDDD°MM’SS.S”
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Temperature
Airspeed Indicator
True Airspeed (PFD)
Wind speed vector
Map range (Traffic Page, Terrain
Proximity/TAWS Page)
CDI scaling (System Setup)
Fuel range calculation (EIS)
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Altitude and Vertical
Speed
Exceptions
EIS
Distance and Speed
Settings
Affected Quantities
Magnetic (North)* Heading
True (North)
Course
Bearing
Track
Desired Track
Wind direction (Trip Planning Page)
Metric
Crosstrack error (HSI)
Nautical*
Bearing distances (information windows)
DME distance (information window)
Flight plan distances
Map ranges
DIS, GS, TAS, XTK fields (Navigation Status Box)
All distances on MFD
Altitude buffer distance (System Setup)
Arrival Alert trigger distance (System Setup)
All speeds on MFD
Feet*
All altitudes on MFD
Meters
All elevations on MFD
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Category
Navigation Angle
* Default setting
** Contact a Garmin-authorized service center to change this setting
APPENDICES
Table 1-1 Display Units Settings (System Setup Page)
Changing a display unit setting
1) While on the System Setup Page, press the FMS Knob momentarily to activate the flashing cursor.
INDEX
2) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the desired field in the Display Units Box.
3) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the desired units.
4) Press the ENT Key. Press the CLR Key to cancel the action without changing the units.
190-00629-04 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58
41
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
BARO Transition Alert
See the Flight Instruments section for a discussion on setting the Baro Transition Alert.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Airspace Alerts
The Airspace Alerts Box allows the pilot to turn the controlled/special-use airspace message alerts on
or off. This does not affect the alerts listed on the Nearest Airspaces Page or the airspace boundaries
depicted on the MFD Navigation Map Page. It simply turns on/off the warning provided when the aircraft
is approaching or near an airspace.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
Alerts for the following airspaces can be turned on/off in the Airspace Alerts Box:
• Class B/TMA
• Restricted
• Class C/TCA
• MOA (Military)
• Class D
• Other airspaces
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
An altitude buffer is also provided which “expands” the vertical range above or below an airspace. For
example, if the buffer is set at 500 feet, and the aircraft is more than 500 feet above/below an airspace, an
alert message is not generated, but if the aircraft is less than 500 feet above/below an airspace and projected
to enter it, the pilot is notified with an alert message. The default setting for the altitude buffer is 200 feet.
To change the altitude buffer distance setting:
1) While on the System Setup Page, press the FMS Knob momentarily to activate the flashing cursor.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
2) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the altitude buffer field in the Airspace Alerts Box.
3) Turn the FMS Knobs to enter an altitude buffer value and press the ENT Key.
To turn an airspace alert on or off:
1) While on the System Setup Page, press the FMS Knob momentarily to activate the flashing cursor.
AFCS
2) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the desired field in the Airspace Alerts Box.
3) Turn the small FMS Knob clockwise to turn the airspace alert ON or counterclockwise to turn the alert OFF.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Arrival Alerts
APPENDICES
The Arrival Alert Box on the System Setup Page allows arrival alerts to be turned on/off and the alert
trigger distance set. An arrival alert can be set to notify the pilot with a message upon reaching a userspecified distance from the final destination (the direct-to waypoint or the last waypoint in a flight plan).
Once the set distance (up to 99.9 units) has been reached, an “Arrival at [waypoint]” message is displayed
in the PFD Navigation Status Box.
Enabling/disabling an arrival alert:
1) Use the FMS Knob to select the AUX - SYSTEM SETUP Page.
2) Press the FMS Knob momentarily to activate the flashing cursor.
INDEX
3) Turn the large FMS Knob to select the ON/OFF field in the Arrival Alert Box.
4) Turn the small FMS Knob clockwise to turn the airspace alert ON or counterclockwise to turn the alert OFF.
42
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58
190-00629-04 Rev. A
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Changing the arrival alert trigger distance:
1) Use the FMS Knob to select the AUX - SYSTEM SETUP Page.
2) Press the FMS Knob momentarily to activate the flashing cursor.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
3) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the distance field in the Arrival Alert Box.
4) Use the FMS Knob to enter a trigger distance and press the ENT Key.
Audio Alerts
The Audio Alert Box on the System Setup Page allows the audio alert voice to be set to male or female.
EIS
Changing the audio alert voice
1) While on the System Setup Page, press the FMS Knob momentarily to activate the flashing cursor.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
2) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the voice in the Audio Alert Box.
3) Turn the small FMS Knob to display and highlight the desired voice and press the ENT Key.
Flight Director
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Two formats are available for the display of the flight director. Single Cue or X-Pointer may be selected.
To change the flight director format:
1) While on the System Setup Page, press the FMS Knob momentarily to activate the flashing cursor.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
2) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the Format Active field in the Flight Director Box.
3) Turn the small FMS Knob to display and highlight the desired flight director format and press the ENT Key.
Page Navigation
AFCS
The large FMS Knob displays the Page Group Tabs and navigates through the tabs. The small FMS Knob
navigates through the pages listed within a specific group. The number of clicks it takes to display the
Page Group Tabs and change to the next tab can be controlled from the Page Navigation box on the AUX
- SYSTEM SETUP Page.
OFF – Displays the Page Group Tabs with one click of either FMS Knob.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
ON – Displays the Page Group Tabs and navigates to the next tab with one click of either FMS Knob.
The pilot can select, from the AUX - SYSTEM SETUP Page, the amount of time the Page Group Tabs are
displayed (in the lower right corner of the MFD). The timeout can range from two to ten seconds.
APPENDICES
Selecting page navigation settings:
1) Use the FMS Knob to select the AUX - SYSTEM SETUP Page.
2) Press the FMS Knob momentarily to activate the flashing cursor.
3) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the ‘Change On 1st Click’ field in the Page Navigation Box.
INDEX
4) Turn the small FMS Knob to select ‘OFF’ or ‘ON’.
5) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the ‘Timeout Seconds’ field in the Page navigation Box.
190-00629-04 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58
43
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
6) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the desired number of seconds
7) Press the FMS Knob momentarily to remove the flashing cursor.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
MFD Data Bar Fields
The MFD Data Bar Fields Box on the System Setup Page displays the current configuration of the MFD
Navigation Status Box. By default, the Navigation Status Bar is set to display ground speed (GS), desired
track (DTK), track (TRK), and estimated time enroute (ETE).
To change the information shown in an MFD Navigation Status Bar field:
EIS
1) While on the System Setup Page, press the FMS Knob momentarily to activate the flashing cursor.
2) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the desired field number in the MFD Data Bar Fields Box.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
3) Turn the small FMS Knob to display and scroll through the data options list and press the ENT Key when the
desired data selection is highlighted.
The following data may be selected for display in each of the four fields of the Navigation Status Box.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
• Bearing (BRG)
• Distance (DIS)
• Desired Track (DTK)
• Endurance (END)
• En Route Safe Altitude (ESA)
• Estimated Time of Arrival (ETA)
• Estimated Time En Route (ETE)
• Fuel On Board (FOB)
• Fuel Over Destination (FOD)
• Ground Speed (GS)
• Minimum Safe Altitude (MSA)
• True Air Speed (TAS)
• Track Angle Error (TKE)
• Track (TRK)
• Vertical Speed Required (VSR)
• Crosstrack Error (XTK)
AFCS
GPS CDI
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
The GPS CDI Box on the System Setup Page allows the pilot to define the range for the on-screen course
deviation indicator (CDI). The range values represent full range deflection for the CDI to either side. The
default setting is ‘AUTO’. Refer to the Flight Instruments sections for a discussion on CDI scaling.
If a lower CDI range setting is selected (i.e., 1.0 or 0.3 nm), the higher range settings are not selected
during any phase of flight. For example, if 1.0 nm is selected, the G1000 uses this for en route and terminal
phases and ramps down to 0.3 nm during an approach. Note that the Receiver Autonomous Integrity
Monitoring (RAIM) protection limits follow the selected CDI range and corresponding flight phases.
APPENDICES
The GPS CDI Box on the System Setup Page displays the following:
• Selected CDI range (auto, 2 nm, 1 nm, 0.3 nm)
INDEX
• Current system CDI range (2 nm, 1 nm, 0.3 nm)
44
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58
190-00629-04 Rev. A
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
To change the CDI range:
1) While on the System Setup Page, press the FMS Knob momentarily to activate the flashing cursor.
2) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the selected field in the GPS CDI Box.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
3) Turn the small FMS Knob to display and scroll through the range list and press the ENT Key when the desired
selection is highlighted.
COM Configuration
EIS
WARNING: Selecting the DFLTS Softkey will set the COM frequency spacing to 25.0 kHz, possibly resulting
in loss of communications if using 8.33 kHz frequency spacing.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
NOTE: 8.33 kHz VHF communication frequency channel spacing is not approved for use in the United States.
Select the 25.0 kHz channel spacing option for use in the United States.
The COM Configuration Box on the System Setup Page allows the pilot to select 8.33 kHz or 25.0 kHz
COM frequency channel spacing.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
To change COM channel spacing:
1) While on the System Setup Page, press the FMS Knob momentarily to activate the flashing cursor.
2) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the channel spacing field in the COM Configuration Box.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
3) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the desired spacing and press the ENT Key.
Nearest Airports
AFCS
The Nearest Airports Box on the System Setup Page defines the minimum runway length and surface type
used when determining the nine nearest airports to display on the MFD Nearest Airports Page. A minimum
runway length and/or surface type can be entered to prevent airports with small runways or runways that
are not of appropriate surface from being displayed. Default settings are zero feet (or meters) for runway
length and “HARD/SOFT” for runway surface type.
To select nearest airport surface matching criteria (ANY, HARD ONLY, HARD/SOFT, WATER):
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
1) While on the System Setup Page, press the FMS Knob momentarily to activate the flashing cursor.
2) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the runway surface field in the Nearest Airports Box.
APPENDICES
3) Turn the small FMS Knob to display and scroll through the runway options (ANY, HARD ONLY, HARD/SOFT,
WATER) and press the ENT Key when the desired selection is highlighted.
To select nearest airport minimum runway length matching criteria:
1) While on the System Setup Page, press the FMS Knob momentarily to activate the flashing cursor.
2) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the minimum length field in the Nearest Airport Box.
190-00629-04 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58
INDEX
3) Turn the FMS Knobs to enter the minimum runway length (zero to 99,999 feet) and press the ENT Key.
45
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
SYSTEM STATUS PAGE
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The System Status Page displays the status and software version numbers for all detected system LRUs.
Pertinent information on all system databases is also displayed. Active LRUs are indicated by green check
marks and failed LRUs are indicated by red “X”s. Failed LRUs should be noted and a service center or Garmin
dealer informed.
Figure 1-35 Example System Status Page
The LRU and ARFRM Softkeys on the System Status Page select the applicable list (LRU INFO or AIRFRAME
window) through which the FMS Knob can be used to scroll information within the selected window.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
Selecting the MFD1 DB Softkey (label background changes to grey indicating the softkey is selected) places
the cursor in the database window. Use the FMS Knob to scroll through database information for the MFD.
Selecting the softkey again will change the softkey label to PFD1 DB. PFD 1 database information is now
displayed in the database window. Selecting the softkey a third time will change the softkey label back to
MFD1 DB. MFD 1 database information is displayed in the database window again.
The ANN TEST Softkey, when selected, causes an annunciation test tone to be played.
INDEX
APPENDICES
Selecting the SYNC DBS Softkey (label background changes to grey indicting the softkey is selected)
activates the Automatic Database Synchronization feature. When this feature is active, databases are
updated automatically in the MFD and both PFDs from one SD card. For a detailed discussion on database
synchronization, see the Database Management section in the Appendices.
46
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58
190-00629-04 Rev. A
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
UTILITY PAGE
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
For flight planning purposes, timers, trip statistics, and a scheduler feature are provided on the AUX UTILITY Page. The timers available include a stopwatch-like generic timer, a total time in flight timer, and
a record of the time of departure. Trip statistics—odometer, trip odometer, and average trip and maximum
groundspeeds—are displayed from the time of the last reset. Refer to the Additional Features section for a
dicussion on the Scheduler feature.
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Figure 1-36 Utility Page
Timers
AFCS
The G1000 timers available include:
• Stopwatch-like generic timers (available from the PFD Timer/References Window and on the MFD AUX
- UTILITY Page)
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
• Total-time-in-flight timer (MFD AUX - UTILITY Page)
• Time since departure (MFD AUX - UTILITY Page)
APPENDICES
The generic timer can be set to count up or down from a specified time (HH:MM:SS). When the
countdown on the timer reaches zero the digits begin to count up from zero. If the timer is reset before
reaching zero on a countdown, the digits are reset to the initial value. If the timer is counting up when
reset, the digits are zeroed.
INDEX
190-00629-04 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58
47
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
Setting the generic timer (PFD):
1) Press the TMR/REF Softkey.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
2) Turn the large FMS Knob to select the timer field (hh/mm/ss).
3) Use the FMS Knob to enter the desired time and press the ENT Key.
4) With the UP/DN field highlighted, turn the small FMS Knob to select the timer counting direction (UP/DN) and
press the ENT Key.
5) With ‘START?’ highlighted, press the ENT Key to start the timer. The field changes to ‘STOP?’.
EIS
6) To stop the timer, press the ENT Key with ‘STOP?’ highlighted. The field changes to ‘RESET?’.
7) To reset the timer, press the ENT Key with ‘RESET?’ highlighted. The field changes back to ‘START?’ and the
digits are reset.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
8) To remove the window, press the CLR Key or the TMR/REF Softkey.
AFCS
Figure 1-37 Generic Timer (PFD Timer/References Window)
Setting the generic timer (MFD AUX - UTILITY Page)
1) Use the FMS Knob to select the AUX - UTILITY Page.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
2) Press the FMS Knob momentarily to activate the flashing cursor.
3) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the timer counting direction (UP/DN) and press the ENT Key.
4) If a desired starting time is desired:
APPENDICES
a) Use the large FMS Knob to highlight the HH:MM:SS field.
b) Use the FMS Knob to enter the desired time and press the ENT Key.
5) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight ‘START?’ and press the ENT Key to start the timer. The field changes to
‘STOP?’.
INDEX
6) To stop the timer, press the ENT Key with ‘STOP?’ highlighted. The field changes to ‘RESET?’.
7) To reset the timer, press the ENT Key with ‘RESET?’ highlighted. The field changes back to ‘START?’ and the
digits are reset.
48
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58
190-00629-04 Rev. A
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
EIS
Figure 1-38 Timers (MFD AUX - UTILITY Page)
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
The flight timer can be set to count up from zero starting at system power-up or from the time that the
aircraft lifts off; the timer can also be reset to zero at any time.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Setting the flight timer starting criterion
1) Use the FMS Knob to select the AUX - UTILITY Page.
2) Press the FMS Knob momentarily to activate the flashing cursor.
3) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the field next to the flight timer.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
4) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the starting criterion (PWR-ON or IN-AIR) and press the ENT Key.
Resetting the flight timer
1) Use the FMS Knob to select the AUX - UTILITY Page.
2) Press the MENU Key.
AFCS
3) With ‘Reset Flight Timer’ highlighted, press the ENT Key.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
The G1000 records the time at which departure occurs, depending on whether the pilot prefers the time
to be recorded from system power-up or from aircraft lift off. The displayed departure time can also be reset
to display the current time at the point of reset. The format in which the time is displayed is controlled
from the System Setup Page.
Setting the departure timer starting criterion
1) Use the FMS Knob to select the AUX - UTILITY Page.
APPENDICES
2) Press the FMS Knob momentarily to activate the flashing cursor.
3) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the field next to the departure time.
4) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the starting criterion (PWR-ON or IN-AIR) and press the ENT Key.
INDEX
190-00629-04 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58
49
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
Resetting the departure time
1) Use the FMS Knob to select the AUX - UTILITY Page.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
2) Press the MENU Key.
3) Use the FMS Knob to highlight ‘Reset Departure Time’ and press the ENT Key.
Trip Statistics
EIS
The odometer and trip odometer record the total mileage traveled from the last reset; these odometers can
be reset independently. Resetting the trip odometer also resets the average trip groundspeed. Maximum
groundspeed for the period of time since the last reset is also displayed.
Resetting trip statistics readouts
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
1) Use the FMS Knob to select the AUX - UTILITY Page.
2) Press the MENU Key. The following reset options for trip statistics are displayed:
• Reset Trip ODOM/AVG GS—Resets trip average ground speed readout and odometer
• Reset Odometer—Resets odometer readout only
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
• Reset Maximum Speed—Resets maximum speed readout only
• Reset All—Resets flight timer, departure timer, odometers, and groundspeed readouts
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
3) Use the FMS Knob to highlight the desired reset option and press the ENT Key. The selected parameters are reset
to zero and begin to display data from the point of reset.
Scheduler
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
The G1000’s Scheduler feature can be used to enter and display reminder messages (e.g., “Change oil”,
“Switch fuel tanks”, “Overhaul”) in the Alerts Window on the PFD. Messages can be set to display based
on a specific date and time (event), once the message timer reaches zero (one-time; default setting), or
recurrently whenever the message timer reaches zero (periodic). Message timers set to periodic alerting
automatically reset to the original timer value once the message is displayed. When power is cycled,
messages are retained until deleted, and message timer countdown is restarted.
50
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58
190-00629-04 Rev. A
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
EIS
Figure 1-39 Scheduler (Utility Page)
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Entering a scheduler message:
1) Select the AUX - UTILITY Page.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
2) Press the FMS Knob momentarily to activate the flashing cursor.
3) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the first empty scheduler message naming field.
4) Use the FMS Knob to enter the message text to be displayed in the Alerts Window and press the ENT Key.
5) Press the ENT Key again or use the large FMS Knob to move the cursor to the field next to ‘Type’.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
6) Turn the small FMS Knob to select set the message alert type:
• Event—Message issued at the specified date/time
• One-time—Message issued when the message timer reaches zero (default setting)
• Periodic—Message issued each time the message timer reaches zero
AFCS
7) Press the ENT Key again or use the large FMS Knob to move the cursor to the next field.
8) For periodic and one-time message, use the FMS Knob to enter the timer value (HHH:MM:SS) from which to
countdown and press the ENT Key.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
9) For event-based messages:
a) Use the FMS Knob to enter the desired date (DD-MMM-YYY) and press the ENT Key.
b) Press the ENT Key again or use the large FMS Knob to move the cursor to the next field.
c) Use the FMS Knob to enter the desired time (HH:MM) and press the ENT Key.
APPENDICES
10) Press the ENT Key again or use the large FMS Knob to move the cursor to enter the next message.
INDEX
190-00629-04 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58
51
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
Deleting a scheduler message:
1) Select the AUX - UTILITY Page.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
2) Press the FMS Knob momentarily to activate the flashing cursor.
3) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the name field of the scheduler message to be deleted.
4) Press the CLR Key to clear the message text. If the CLR Key is pressed again, the message is restored.
5) Press the ENT Key to confirm message deletion.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
Scheduler messages appear in the Alerts Window on the PFD and cause the ALERTS Softkey label to
change to ‘ADVISORY’. Pressing the ADVISORY Softkey opens the Alerts Window and acknowledges
the scheduler message. The softkey reverts to the ‘ALERTS’ label and when pressed, the Alerts Window is
removed from the display and the scheduler message is deleted from the message queue.
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
Figure 1-40 PFD Alerts Window
52
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58
190-00629-04 Rev. A
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
1.8 DISPLAY BACKLIGHTING
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The PFD and MFD display backlighting, the PFD and MFD bezel, and the Audio Panel keys can be adjusted
manually in one of two ways:
• Using the individual dimmer bus control for the desired display, or
• Using the PFD Setup Menu and the following procedures. In normal operating mode, backlighting can only be
adjusted from the PFD. In reversionary mode, adjustments can be made from any remaining displays.
Adjusting display backlighting:
EIS
1) Press the PFD MENU Key to display the PFD Setup Menu. ‘AUTO’ is now highlighted next to ‘PFD DSPL’. If
desired, turn the large FMS Knob to select ‘AUTO’ next to ‘MFD DSPL’.
2) Turn the small FMS Knob to select ‘MANUAL’ and press the ENT Key. The intensity value is now highlighted.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
3) Use the FMS Knob to enter the desired backlighting then press the ENT Key.
4) To remove the menu, press the CLR or MENU Key.
Adjusting key backlighting:
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
1) Press the PFD MENU Key to display the PFD Setup Menu. ‘AUTO’ is now highlighted next to ‘PFD DSPL’.
2) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight ‘PFD DSPL’ or ‘MFD DSPL’, as desired.
3) Turn the small FMS Knob in the direction of the green arrowhead to display ‘PFD KEY’ or ‘MFD KEY’.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
4) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight ‘AUTO’.
5) Turn the small FMS Knob to select ‘MANUAL’ and press the ENT Key. The intensity value is now highlighted.
6) Use the FMS Knob to enter the desired backlighting and press the ENT Key.
7) To remove the menu, press the CLR or MENU Key.
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
Figure 1-41 PFD Setup Menu
INDEX
190-00629-04 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58
53
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
Blank Page
54
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58
190-00629-04 Rev. A
FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
SECTION 2 FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
WARNING: In the event that the airspeed, attitude, altitude, or heading indications become unusable, refer
to the backup instruments.
NOTE: The Automatic Flight Control System (AFCS) provides additional readouts and bugs on selected flight
instruments. Refer to the AFCS Section for details on these bugs and readouts, as they appear on the display
during certain AFCS modes.
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Increased situational awareness is provided by replacing the traditional instruments on the panel with an easyto-scan Primary Flight Display (PFD) that features a large horizon, airspeed, attitude, altitude, vertical speed, and
course deviation information. In addition to the flight instruments, navigation, communication, terrain, traffic,
and weather information are also presented on the PFD and explained in other sections of this Pilot’s Guide.
The following flight instruments and supplemental flight data are displayed on the PFD:
• Airspeed Indicator, showing
– Heading and course indications
– Turn Rate Indicator
– Airspeed awareness ranges
– Navigation source
– Reference flags
– Bearing pointers and information windows
– Groundspeed
– DME Information Window (optional)
• Altimeter, showing
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
• Attitude Indicator with slip/skid indication
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
– True Airspeed
– Course Deviation Indicator (CDI)
• DME Tuning Window (optional)
– Selected Altitude
• Vertical Deviation/Glideslope Indicators
• International Standard Atmosphere temperature
deviation (ISA)
• Vertical Speed Indicator (VSI)
• System time
• Vertical Navigation indications
• Wind data
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
• Outside air temperature (OAT)
AFCS
– Barometric setting
• Horizontal Situation Indicator, showing
The PFD also displays various alerts and annunciations.
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-00629-04 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58
55
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
24
23
22
21
20
19
1
18
17
2
EIS
16
15
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
3
14
4
13
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
5
6
12
7
11
8
10
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
9
1
NAV Frequency Box
13
Turn Rate Indicator
2
Airspeed Indicator
14
Altimeter Barometric Setting
3
Groundspeed
15
Vertical Speed Indicator (VSI)
4
True Airspeed
16
Selected Altitude Bug
5
Current Heading
17
Altimeter
6
Horizontal Situation Indicator ( HSI)
18
Selected Altitude
7
19
COM Frequency Box
8
International Standard Atmosphere
(ISA) temperature
Outside Air Temperature (OAT)
20
TAWS Alert Annunciation
9
Softkeys
21
AFCS Status Box
10
System Time
22
Navigation Status Box
11
Transponder Data Box
23
Slip/Skid Indicator
12
Selected Heading Bug
24
Attitude Indicator
INDEX
Figure 2-1 Primary Flight Display (Default)
56
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58
190-00629-04 Rev. A
FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
14
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
13
1
12
EIS
11
2
10
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
3
9
8
4
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
6
5
7
8
Flight Plan Window
2
Selected Heading
9
Annunciation Window
3
Wind Data
10
Selected Course
4
Inset Map
11
Vertical Speed Required
5
DME Information Window (optional)
12
Vertical Deviation Indicator (VDI)
6
Bearing Information Windows
13
Current VNV Target Altitude
7
Minimum Descent Altitude/
Decision Height
14
AFCS Status Annunciation
AFCS
Traffic Annunciation
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
1
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Figure 2-2 Additional PFD Information
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-00629-04 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58
57
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
2.1 FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
AIRSPEED INDICATOR
NOTE: Refer to the Pilot’s Operating Handbook (POH) and FAA Approved Airplane Flight Manual (AFM) for
speed criteria and Vspeed values.
EIS
The Airspeed Indicator displays airspeed on a rolling number gauge using a moving tape. The true airspeed
(TAS) is displayed in knots below the Airspeed Indicator.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
The numeric labels and major tick marks on the moving tape are shown at intervals of 10 knots, while minor
tick marks on the moving tape are indicated at intervals of 5 knots. Speed indication starts at 20 knots, with 60
knots of airspeed viewable at any time. The actual airspeed is displayed inside the black pointer. The pointer
remains black until reaching never-exceed speed (VNE), at which point it turns red.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Airspeed
Trend Vector
VYSE
Blue Line
Actual
Airspeed
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
VMCA
Red Line
Vspeed
References
Color-coded
Speed Tape
Figure 2-4 Red Pointer
Showing Airspeed Above VNE
True
Airspeed
AFCS
Figure 2-3 Airspeed Indicator
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
A color-coded (white, green, yellow, and red) speed range strip is located on the moving tape. The colors
denote flaps operating range, normal operating range, caution range, and never-exceed speed (VNE). Speeds
above the never-exceed speed (VNE), appear in the high speed warning range, represented on the airspeed tape
by red/white “barber pole” coloration.
APPENDICES
A red low speed awareness range extends up to the low speed awareness velocity, VLSA. An aural stall warning
is generated as the aircraft approaches a stall condition.
INDEX
The Airspeed Trend Vector is a vertical, magenta line, extending up or down on the airspeed scale, located
to the right of the color-coded speed range strip. The end of the trend vector displays approximately what
airspeed will be reached in 6 seconds if the current acceleration is maintained. If the trend vector crosses VNE,
the text of the actual airspeed readout changes to yellow while the pointer remains black. The trend vector is
absent if the speed remains constant or if any data needed to calculate airspeed is not available due to a system
failure.
58
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58
190-00629-04 Rev. A
FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Black reference markers along the right side of the airspeed scale denote GLIDE, VX, and VY. The blue line
displays VYSE while the red line displays VMCA. GLIDE, VX, and VY may be set and displayed using the Timer/
References window.
GLIDE
G
Vx
X
Vy
Y
EIS
Flag
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Vspeed
Table 2-1 Vspeed Flag Labels
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Figure 2-5 VSpeed References
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
A solid white triangle is automatically set at the maximum landing gear extension speed. This indication is
always displayed and cannot be turned off by the pilot.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
Figure 2-6 Maximum Landing Gear
Extended Speed Reference
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-00629-04 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58
59
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
NOTE: Refer to the Pilot’s Operating Handbook (POH) and FAA Approved Airplane Flight Manual (AFM) for
speed criteria and Vspeed values.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Changing Vspeeds and turning Vspeed flags on/off:
1) Press the TMR/REF Softkey.
2) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the desired Vspeed.
EIS
3) Use the small FMS Knob to change the Vspeed in 1-kt increments (when a speed has been changed from a
default value, an asterisk appears next to the speed).
4) Press the ENT Key or turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the ON/OFF field
5) Turn the small FMS Knob clockwise to ON or counterclockwise to OFF.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
6) To remove the window, press the CLR Key or the TMR/REF Softkey.
Figure 2-7 Vspeed References
(Timer/References Window)
Vspeed flags can be turned on or off and values restored all at once.
AFCS
Modifying Vspeeds (on, off, restore defaults):
1) Press the TMR/REF Softkey.
2) Press the MENU Key.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
3) Turn the FMS Knob to highlight the desired selection.
4) Press the ENT Key.
INDEX
APPENDICES
5) To remove the window, press the CLR Key or the TMR/REF Softkey.
Figure 2-8 Page Menu
(Timer/References Window)
60
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58
190-00629-04 Rev. A
FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
ATTITUDE INDICATOR
1
2
Roll Pointer
8
2
Roll Scale
7
3
Horizon Line
4
Aircraft Symbol
5
Land Representation
6
Pitch Scale
7
Slip/Skid Indicator
8
Sky Representation
9
Roll Scale Zero
6
3
4
5
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
1
EIS
9
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Attitude information is displayed over a virtual blue sky and brown ground with a white horizon line. The
Attitude Indicator displays the pitch (indicated by the yellow symbolic aircraft on the pitch scale), roll, and slip/
skid information.
Figure 2-9 Attitude Indicator
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
The horizon line is part of the pitch scale. Above and below the horizon line, major pitch marks and numeric
labels are shown for every 10˚, up to 80˚. Minor pitch marks are shown for intervening 5˚ increments, up to
25˚ below and 45˚ above the horizon line. Between 20˚ below to 20˚ above the horizon line, minor pitch marks
occur every 2.5˚. When the optional Synthetic Vision System (SVS) is activated, the pitch scale is reduced to 10˚
up and 7.5˚ down; refer to the Additional Features section for more information about Synthetic Vision.
The inverted white triangle indicates zero on the roll scale. Major tick marks at 30˚ and 60˚ and minor tick
marks at 10˚, 20˚, and 45˚ are shown to the left and right of the zero. Angle of bank is indicated by the position
of the pointer on the roll scale.
AFCS
The Slip/Skid Indicator is the bar beneath the roll pointer. The indicator moves with the roll pointer and
moves laterally away from the pointer to indicate lateral acceleration. Slip/skid is indicated by the location of
the bar relative to the pointer.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
Figure 2-10 Slip/Skid Indication
INDEX
190-00629-04 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58
61
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
ALTIMETER
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The Altimeter displays 600 feet of barometric altitude values at a time on a rolling number gauge using a
moving tape. Numeric labels and major tick marks are shown at intervals of 100 feet. Minor tick marks are at
intervals of 20 feet. The current altitude is displayed in the black pointer.
The Selected Altitude is displayed above the Altimeter in the box indicated by a selection bug symbol. A bug
corresponding to this altitude is shown on the tape; if the Selected Altitude exceeds the range shown on the
tape, the bug appears at the corresponding edge of the tape. See the AFCS Section for more information about
how the G1000 uses the Selected Altitude.
EIS
Setting the Selected Altitude:
T urn the ALT SEL Knob to set the Selected Altitude in 100-ft increments When meters are displayed, Selected
Altitude is adjusted in 50 meter increments.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
If set, the Minimum Descent Altitude/Decision Height (MDA/DH) value is also available for the Selected Altitude.
Selected
Altitude
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Selected
Altitude
Bug
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Altitude
Trend
Vector
Current
Altitude
Minimum Descent
Altitude/Decision
Height Bug
AFCS
Barometric
Setting
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Figure 2-11 Altimeter
Figure 2-12 Altimeter (Metric Units)
Selected and current altitudes can also be displayed in meters (readouts displayed above the normal readouts
in feet; Figure 2-12). Note that the altitude tape does not change scale.
APPENDICES
Displaying altitude in meters:
1) Press the PFD Softkey to display the second-level softkeys.
2) Press the ALT UNIT Softkey.
3) Press the METERS Softkey to turn on metric altitude readouts.
INDEX
4) Press the BACK Softkey to return to the top-level softkeys.
62
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58
190-00629-04 Rev. A
FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
A magenta Altitude Trend Vector extends up or down the left of the altitude tape, the end resting at the
approximate altitude to be reached in 6 seconds at the current vertical speed. The trend vector is not shown if
altitude remains constant or if data needed for calculation is not available due to a system failure.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The barometric pressure setting is displayed below the Altimeter in inches of mercury (in Hg) or hectopascals
(hPa) when metric units are selected. Adjusting the altimeter barometric setting creates discontinuities in VNV
vertical deviation, moving the descent path. For large adjustments, it may take several minutes for the aircraft
to re-establish on the descent path. If the change is made while nearing a waypoint with a VNV Target Altitude,
the aircraft may not re-establish on the descent path in time to meet the vertical constraint.
EIS
WARNING: Do not use a QFE altimeter setting with this system. System functions will not operate properly
with a QFE altimeter setting. Use only a QNH altimeter setting for height above mean sea level, or the
standard pressure setting, as applicable.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Selecting the altimeter barometric pressure setting:
Turn the BARO Knob to select the desired setting.
Selecting standard barometric pressure (29.92 in Hg):
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
1) Press the PFD Softkey to display the second-level softkeys.
2) Press the STD BARO Softkey.
Changing altimeter barometric pressure setting units:
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
1) Press the PFD Softkey to display the second-level softkeys.
2) Press the ALT UNIT Softkey.
3) Press the IN Softkey to display the barometric pressure setting in inches of mercury (in Hg).
Or, press the HPA Softkey to display the barometric pressure setting in hectopascals (hPa; see Figure 2-12).
AFCS
4) Press the BACK Softkey to return to the top-level softkeys.
VERTICAL SPEED INDICATOR (VSI)
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
The Vertical Speed Indicator (VSI) displays the aircraft vertical speed using a non-moving tape labeled at 1000
and 2000 fpm with minor tick marks every 500 fpm. The current vertical speed is displayed in the pointer
along the tape. Digits appear in the pointer when the climb or descent rate is greater than 100 fpm. If the rate
of ascent/descent exceeds 2000 fpm, the pointer appears at the corresponding edge of the tape and the rate
appears inside the pointer.
APPENDICES
A magenta chevron is displayed as the Required Vertical Speed Indication (RVSI) for reaching a VNV Target
Altitude once the “TOD [Top of Descent] within 1 minute” alert has been generated. See the Flight Management
Section for details on VNV features, and refer to Section 2.2, Supplemental Flight Data, for more information
about VNV indications on the PFD.
INDEX
190-00629-04 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58
63
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
VERTICAL DEVIATION
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
The Vertical Deviation Indicator (VDI; Figure 2-13) uses a magenta chevron to indicate the baro-VNV vertical
deviation when Vertical Navigation (VNV) is being used; the VDI appears in conjunction with the “TOD within
1 minute” alert. Full-scale deflection (two dots) is 1000 feet. The VDI is removed from the display if vertical
deviation becomes invalid. See the Flight Management Section for details on VNV features, and refer to Section
2.2, Supplemental Flight Data, for more information about VNV indications on the PFD.
NOTE: The Glidepath Indicator is only available when SBAS is available.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
The Glideslope Indicator (Figure 2-14) appears to the left of the Altimeter whenever an ILS frequency is tuned
in the active NAV field and the heading is less than 105° from the inbound course. A green diamond acts as the
Glideslope Indicator, like a glideslope needle on a conventional indicator. If a localizer frequency is tuned and
there is no glideslope, “NO GS” is annunciated.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
The glidepath is analogous to the glideslope for GPS approaches supporting SBAS vertical guidance (LNAV+V,
L/VNV, LPV) and is generated by the system to reduce pilot workload during approach. When an approach of
this type is loaded into the flight plan and GPS is the selected navigation source, the Glidepath Indicator (Figure
2-15) appears as a magenta diamond. If the approach type downgrades past the final approach fix (FAF), “NO
GP” is annunciated.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
VNV Target
Altitude
Vertical
Deviation
Indicator
Marker Beacon
Annunciation
Vertical
Speed
Indicator
Glidepath
Indicator
Vertical
Speed
Pointer
AFCS
Required Glideslope
Indicator
Vertical
Speed
Indicator
Figure 2-14 Glideslope Indicator
Figure 2-15 Glidepath Indicator
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Figure 2-13 Vertical Speed and
Deviation Indicators (VSI and VDI)
64
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58
190-00629-04 Rev. A
FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
HORIZONTAL SITUATION INDICATOR (HSI)
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The Horizontal Situation Indicator (HSI) displays a rotating compass card in a heading-up orientation. Letters
indicate the cardinal points and numeric labels occur every 30˚. Major tick marks are at 10˚ intervals and minor
tick marks at 5˚ intervals. A digital reading of the current heading appears on top of the HSI, and the current
track is represented on the HSI by a magenta diamond indicator. The HSI also presents turn rate, course
deviation, bearing, and navigation source information and is available in two formats (360˚ compass rose and
140˚ arc).
Changing the HSI display format:
EIS
1) Press the PFD Softkey.
2) Press the HSI FRMT Softkey.
3) Press the 360 HSI or ARC HSI Softkey.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
The 360˚ HSI contains a Course Deviation Indicator (CDI), with a Course Pointer, To/From Indicator, and a
sliding deviation bar and scale. The course pointer is a single line arrow (GPS, VOR1, and LOC1) or a double
line arrow (VOR2 and LOC2) which points in the direction of the set course. The To/From arrow rotates with
the course pointer and is displayed when the active NAVAID is received.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
1
15
14
2
13
4
12
5
11
6
10
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
3
AFCS
9
7
8
9
To/From Indicator
2
Current Track Indicator
10
Course Pointer
3
Lateral Deviation Scale
11
Heading Bug
4
Navigation Source
12
Flight Phase
5
Aircraft Symbol
13
Lubber Line
6
14
7
Course Deviation Indicator
(CDI)
Rotating Compass Rose
8
OBS Mode Active
APPENDICES
Turn Rate Indicator
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
1
Turn Rate/Heading
Trend Vector
15 Current Heading
INDEX
Figure 2-16 Horizontal Situation Indicator (HSI)
190-00629-04 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58
65
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The Arc HSI is a 140˚ expanded section of the compass rose. The Arc HSI contains a Course Pointer,
To/From Indicator, a sliding deviation indicator (the To/From and deviation indicators are combined), and a
deviation scale. Upon station passage, the To/From Indicator flips and points to the tail of the aircraft, just like
a conventional To/From flag. Depending on the navigation source, the CDI on the Arc HSI can appear in two
different ways: an arrowhead (GPS, VOR, OBS) or a diamond (LOC).
Course Pointer
Navigation Source
Flight Phase Annunciation
Course Deviation and
To/From Indicator
EIS
Lateral Deviation Scale
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Figure 2-17 Arc HSI
The Selected Heading is shown to the upper left of the HSI for 3 seconds after being adjusted The light blue
bug on the compass rose corresponds to the Selected Heading. While the HSI is displayed as an arc, if the
Selected Heading Bug is adjusted off the shown portion of the compass rose, the digital reading is displayed.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Adjusting the Selected Heading:
Turn the HDG Knob to set the Selected Heading.
Press the HDG Knob to synchronize the bug to the current heading.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
The Selected Course is shown to the upper right of the HSI for 3 seconds after being adjusted. While the
HSI is displayed as an arc, the Selected Course is displayed whenever the Course Pointer is not within the 140˚
currently shown.
Adjusting the Selected Course:
Turn the CRS Knob to set the Selected Course.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
Press the CRS Knob to re-center the CDI and return the course pointer to the bearing of the active waypoint or
navigation station (see OBS Mode for adjusting a GPS course).
Current Track Bug
Current Heading
Selected Heading
Selected Course
Selected Heading Bug
INDEX
APPENDICES
Figure 2-18 Heading and Course Indications
66
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58
190-00629-04 Rev. A
FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Navigation angles (track, heading, course, bearing) are corrected to the computed magnetic variation (‘Mag
Var’) or referenced to true north (denoted ‘T’), set on the AUX - System Setup Page. When an approach
referenced to true north has been loaded into the flight plan, the system generates a message to change the
navigation angle setting to ‘True’ at the appropriate time.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
EIS
Figure 2-19 Heading and Course Indications (True)
Changing the navigation angle setting:
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
1) Use the FMS Knob to select the AUX - System Setup Page on the MFD.
2) Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor.
3) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight ‘Nav Angle’ in the ‘Display Units’ box (Figure 2-20).
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
4) Turn the small FMS Knob to highlight the desired setting and press the ENT Key.
• TRUE - References angles to true north (denoted with ‘T’)
• MAGNETIC - Angles corrected to the computed magnetic variation (‘Mag Var’)
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
Figure 2-20 Navigation Angle Settings
(AUX-System Setup Page)
INDEX
190-00629-04 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58
67
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
TURN RATE INDICATOR
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The Turn Rate Indicator is located directly above the rotating compass card. Tick marks to the left and right
of the lubber line denote half-standard and standard turn rates. A magenta Turn Rate Trend Vector shows the
current turn rate. The end of the trend vector gives the heading predicted in 6 seconds, based on the present
turn rate. A standard-rate turn is shown on the indicator by the trend vector stopping at the standard turn
rate tick mark, corresponding to a predicted heading of 18˚ from the current heading. At rates greater than 4
deg/sec, an arrowhead appears at the end of the magenta trend vector and the prediction is no longer valid.
EIS
Half Standard
Turn Rate
Arrow Shown
for Turn Rate
> 4 Degrees
per Second
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Standard
Turn Rate
Figure 2-21 Turn Rate Indicator and Trend Vector
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
BEARING POINTERS AND INFORMATION WINDOWS
NOTE: When the Arc HSI is displayed, the Bearing Information windows and pointers are disabled.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Two bearing pointers and associated information can be displayed on the HSI for NAV and GPS sources.
The pointers are light blue and are single- (BRG1) or double-lined (BRG2); an icon is shown in the respective
information window to indicate the pointer type. The bearing pointers never override the CDI and are
visually separated from the CDI by a white ring (shown when bearing pointers are selected but not necessarily
visible due to data unavailability).
Tuning Mode
AFCS
Frequency
Bearing 1
Pointer
Bearing 2
Pointer
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Distance
DME Information Window
(optional)
APPENDICES
Distance to
Bearing Source
Bearing
Source
No
Waypoint
Selected
Station
Identifier
Pointer
Icon
Pointer
Icon
Bearing 1 Information Window
Bearing
Source
Bearing 2 Information Window
INDEX
Figure 2-22 HSI with Bearing and DME Information
68
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58
190-00629-04 Rev. A
FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
When a bearing pointer is displayed, its associated information window is also displayed. The Bearing
Information windows (Figure 2-22) are displayed to the lower sides of the HSI and show:
• Station/waypoint identifier (NAV, GPS)
• Pointer icon (BRG1 = single line, BRG2 = double line)
• GPS-derived great circle distance to bearing
source
• Frequency (NAV)
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
• Bearing source (NAV, GPS)
EIS
If the NAV radio is the bearing source and is tuned to an ILS frequency (refer to the Audio Panel and CNS
Section for information on tuning the radios), the bearing pointer is removed from the HSI and the frequency
is replaced with “ILS”. When NAV1 or NAV2 is the selected bearing source, the frequency is replaced by the
station identifier when the station is within range. If GPS is the bearing source, the active waypoint identifier
is displayed in lieu of a frequency.
The bearing pointer is removed from the HSI and “NO DATA” is displayed in the information window if:
• GPS is the bearing source and an active waypoint
is not selected
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
• The NAV radio is not receiving the tuned VOR
station
Selecting bearing display and changing sources:
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
1) Press the PFD Softkey.
2) Press a BRG Softkey to display the desired bearing pointer and information window with a NAV source.
3) Press the BRG Softkey again to change the bearing source to GPS.
4) To remove the bearing pointer and information window, press the BRG Softkey again.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
DME INFORMATION WINDOW
NOTE: DME radio installation is optional.
AFCS
The DME Information Window is displayed above the BRG1 Information Window and shows the DME
label, tuning mode (NAV1, NAV2, or HOLD), frequency, and distance. When a signal is invalid, the distance
is replaced by “–.– – NM”. Refer to the Audio Panel and CNS Section for information on tuning the radios.
Displaying the DME Information Window:
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
1) Press the PFD Softkey.
2) Press the DME Softkey to display the DME Information Window above the BRG1 Information Window.
3) To remove the DME Information Window, press the DME Softkey again.
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-00629-04 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58
69
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
COURSE DEVIATION INDICATOR (CDI)
NOTE: If a heading change of greater than 105˚ with respect to the course is made, the CDI on the Arc HSI
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
switches to the opposite side of the deviation scale and displays reverse sensing.
The Course Deviation Indicator (CDI) moves left or right from the course pointer along a lateral deviation
scale to display aircraft position relative to the course. If the course deviation data is not valid, the CDI is not
displayed.
EIS
360º HSI
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Navigation
Source
Scale
Crosstrack
Error
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Arc HSI
Flight
Phase
Navigation
Source
Crosstrack
Error
CDI Scale
Flight
Phase
CDI
CDI
Figure 2-23 Course Deviation Indicator
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
The CDI can display two sources of navigation: GPS or NAV (VOR, localizer). Color indicates the current
navigation source: magenta (for GPS) or green (for VOR and LOC). The full scale limits for the CDI are defined
by a GPS-derived distance when coupled to GPS. When coupled to a VOR or localizer (LOC), the CDI has the
same angular limits as a mechanical CDI. If the CDI exceeds the maximum deviation on the scale (two dots)
while displaying GPS, the crosstrack error (XTK) is displayed below the white aircraft symbol.
INDEX
Figure 2-24 Navigation Sources
70
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58
190-00629-04 Rev. A
FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Changing navigation sources:
1) Press the CDI Softkey to change from GPS to VOR1 or LOC1. This places the light blue tuning box over the
NAV1 standby frequency in the upper left corner of the PFD.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
2) Press the CDI Softkey again to change from VOR1 or LOC1 to VOR2 or LOC2. This places the light blue tuning
box over the NAV2 standby frequency.
3) Press the CDI Softkey a third time to return to GPS.
NAV2 Selected for Tuning
NAV1 Selected for Tuning
EIS
LOC1
Selected
VOR2
Selected
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
GPS
Selected
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Pressing the CDI Softkey
Cycles through
Navigation Sources
Figure 2-25 Selecting a Navigation Source
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
The system automatically switches from GPS to LOC navigation source and changes the CDI scaling accordingly
when all of the following occur:
• A localizer or ILS approach has been loaded into the active flight plan
• The final approach fix (FAF) is the active waypoint, the FAF is less than 15 nm away, and the aircraft is moving
toward the FAF
AFCS
• A valid localizer frequency has been tuned
• The GPS CDI deviation is less than 1.2 times full-scale deflection
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
GPS steering guidance is still provided after the CDI automatically switches to LOC until LOC capture, up
to the Final Approach Fix (FAF) for an ILS approach, or until GPS information becomes invalid. Activating
a Vector-to-Final (VTF; see the Flight Management Section) also causes the CDI to switch to LOC navigation
source; GPS steering guidance is not provided after this switch.
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-00629-04 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58
71
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
GPS CDI SCALING
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
When GPS is the selected navigation source, the flight plan legs are sequenced automatically and
annunciations appear on the HSI for the flight phase. Flight phase annunciations are normally shown in
magenta, but when cautionary conditions exist the color changes to yellow. If the current leg in the flight plan
is a heading leg, ‘HDG LEG’ is annunciated in magenta beneath the aircraft symbol.
EIS
The current GPS CDI scale setting is displayed as ‘System CDI’ on the AUX - System Setup Page and the fullscale deflection setting may also be changed (2.0 nm, 1.0 nm, 0.3 nm, or Auto) from this page (Figure 2-26).
If the selected scaling is smaller than the automatic setting for enroute and terminal phases, the CDI is scaled
accordingly and the selected setting is be displayed rather than the flight phase annunciation.
Changing the selected GPS CDI setting:
1) Use the FMS Knob to select the AUX - System Setup Page on the MFD.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
2) Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor.
3) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight ‘Selected’ in the ‘GPS CDI’ box.
4) Turn the small FMS Knob to highlight the desired setting and press the ENT Key.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
5) To cancel the selection, press the FMS Knob or the CLR Key.
Figure 2-26 GPS CDI Settings
(AUX-System Setup Page)
INDEX
APPENDICES
When set to ‘Auto’ (default), the GPS CDI scale automatically adjusts to the desired limits based upon the
current phase of flight (Figure 2-27, 2-28, 2-29, Table 2-2).
72
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58
190-00629-04 Rev. A
Enroute
(Oceanic if >200 nm
from nearest airport)
Terminal
Approach
0.3 nm
1.0 nm
1.0 nm
2.0 nm
0.3 nm
1.0 nm
Terminal
Refer to accompanying
approach CDI scaling figures
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Departure
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
CDI Full-scale Deflection
FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
Missed
Approach
EIS
Figure 2-27 Automatic CDI Scaling
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
• When a departure procedure is active, the CDI is scaled for departure (0.3 nm).
• The system switches from departure to terminal CDI scaling (1.0 nm) under the following conditions:
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
- The next leg in the procedure is not aligned with the departure runway
- The next leg in the departure procedure is not CA, CD, CF, CI, CR, DF, FA, FC, FD, FM, IF, or TF (see
Glossary for leg type definitions)
- After any leg in the departure procedure that is not CA or FA
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
• At 30 nm from the departure airport the enroute phase of flight is automatically entered and CDI scaling
changes to 2.0 nm over a distance of 1.0 nm, except under the following conditions:
- When navigating with an active departure procedure, the flight phase and CDI scale does not change
until the aircraft arrives at the last departure waypoint (if more than 30 nm from the departure airport)
or the leg after the last departure waypoint has been activated or a direct-to waypoint is activated.
AFCS
• If after completing the departure procedure the nearest airport is more than 200 nm away from the aircraft
and the approach procedure has not yet commenced, the CDI is scaled for oceanic flight (2.0 nm).
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
• Within 31 nm of the destination airport (terminal area), the CDI scale gradually ramps down from 2.0 nm
to 1.0 nm over a distance of 1.0 nm; except under the following conditions:
- Upon reaching the first waypoint of an arrival route that is more than 31 nm from the destination airport,
the flight phase changes to terminal and the CDI scale begins to transition down from 2.0 nm to 1.0 nm
over a distance of 1.0 nm.
APPENDICES
• During approach, the CDI scale ramps down even further (see Figures 2-28 and 2-29). This transition
normally occurs within 2.0 nm of the final approach fix (FAF). The CDI switches to approach scaling
automatically once the approach procedure is activated or if Vector-to-Final (VTF) is selected.
- If the active waypoint is the FAF, the ground track and the bearing to the FAF must be within 45° of the
final approach segment course.
190-00629-04 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58
INDEX
- If the active waypoint is part of the missed approach procedure, the active leg and preceding missed
approach legs must be aligned with the final approach segment course and the aircraft must not have
passed the turn initiation point.
73
2 nm
FAF
CDI scale varies if VTF is activated
0.3 nm
1.0 nm
2 nm
FAF
Landing
Threshold
CDI scale varies if VTF is activated
Figure 2-28 Typical LNAV and LNAV+V Approach CDI Scaling
EIS
angle based
on database
information
course width
angle set
by system
CDI Full-scale Deflection
0.3 nm
1.0 nm
CDI scale is set to the smaller of 0.3 nm
or an angle set by the system
350 ft
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
CDI Full-scale Deflection
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
Figure 2-29 Typical LNAV/VNAV and LPV Approach CDI Scaling
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
• When a missed approach is activated, the CDI scale changes to 0.3 nm.
• The system automatically switches back to terminal scaling under the following conditions:
- The next leg in the missed approach procedure is not aligned with the final approach path
- The next leg in the missed approach procedure is not CA, CD, CF, CI, CR, DF, FA, FC, FD, FM, IF, or TF
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
- After any leg in the missed approach procedure that is not CA or FA
Flight Phase
Departure
Terminal
Enroute
Oceanic
Annunciation
DPRT
TERM
ENR
OCN
Approach
(Non-precision)
LNAV
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
Approach
(Non-precision with
Vertical Guidance)
Approach
(LNAV/VNAV)
Approach
(LPV)
Missed Approach
Automatic CDI Full-scale Deflection
0.3 nm
1.0 nm
2.0 nm
2.0 nm
1.0 nm decreasing to 350 feet depending on
variables (see Figure 2-28)
LNAV + V
L/VNAV
LPV
MAPR
1.0 nm decreasing to a specified course width, then
0.3 nm, depending on variables (see Figure 2-29)
0.3 nm
INDEX
APPENDICES
Table 2-2 Automatic GPS CDI Scaling
74
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58
190-00629-04 Rev. A
FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
OBS MODE
NOTE: VNV is inhibited while automatic waypoint sequencing has been suspended.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Enabling Omni-bearing Selector (OBS) Mode suspends the automatic sequencing of waypoints in a GPS
flight plan (GPS must be the selected navigation source), but retains the current “active-to” waypoint as the
navigation reference even after passing the waypoint. ‘OBS’ is annunciated to the lower right of the aircraft
symbol when OBS Mode is selected (see Figure 2-30).
EIS
While OBS Mode is enabled, a course line is drawn through the “active-to” waypoint on the moving map.
If desired, the course to/from the waypoint can now be adjusted. When OBS Mode is disabled, the GPS flight
plan returns to normal operation with automatic sequencing of waypoints, following the course set in OBS
Mode. The flight path on the moving map retains the modified course line.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
GPS
Selected
Extended
Course
Line
Pressing the OBS
Softkey Suspends
Waypoint Sequencing
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
OBS
Mode
Enabled
Pressing the OBS
Softkey Again Returns
to Normal Operation
AFCS
Figure 2-30 Omni-bearing Selector (OBS) Mode
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-00629-04 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58
75
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
Enabling/disabling OBS Mode while navigating a GPS flight plan:
1) Press the OBS Softkey to select OBS Mode.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
2) Turn the CRS Knob to select the desired course to/from the waypoint. Press the CRS Knob to synchronize the
Selected Course with the bearing to the next waypoint.
3) Press the OBS Softkey again to return to automatic waypoint sequencing.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
As the aircraft crosses the missed approach point (in approach mode), automatic approach waypoint
sequencing is suspended. ‘SUSP’ appears on the HSI (to the lower right of the aircraft symbol) in place of
‘OBS’ and the OBS Softkey label changes to SUSP.
SUSP
Softkey
SUSP
Annunciation
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
Figure 2-31 Suspending Automatic Waypoint Sequencing
76
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58
190-00629-04 Rev. A
FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
2.2 SUPPLEMENTAL FLIGHT DATA
NOTE: Selecting the DFLTS Softkey (a second-level PFD softkey) turns off metric Altimeter display, the Inset
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Map, and wind data display.
In addition to the flight instruments, the PFD also displays various supplemental information, including
temperatures, wind data, and Vertical Navigation (VNV) indications.
TEMPERATURE DISPLAYS
EIS
The Outside Air Temperature (OAT) and the deviation from International Standard Atmosphere (ISA)
temperature are displayed in degrees Celsius (°C) by default in the lower left of the PFD under normal display
conditions, or below the groundspeed in reversionary mode.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Normal Display
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Reversionary Mode
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
Figure 2-32 Outside Air Temperature
INDEX
190-00629-04 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58
77
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
WIND DATA
Option 1
Option 2
Option 3
No Data
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Wind direction and speed in knots can be displayed in a window to the upper left of the HSI. When the
window is selected for display, but wind information is invalid or unavailable, the window shows “NO WIND
DATA”. Wind data can be displayed in three different ways:
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Figure 2-33 Wind Data
Displaying wind data:
1) Press the PFD Softkey.
AFCS
2) Press the WIND Softkey to display wind data below the Selected Heading.
3) Press one of the OPTN softkeys to change how wind data is displayed:
• OPTN 1: Head and crosswind components
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
• OPTN 2: Total wind direction and numeric speed
• OPTN 3: Wind direction arrow with numeric True direction and speed
INDEX
APPENDICES
4) To remove the window, press the OFF Softkey.
78
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58
190-00629-04 Rev. A
FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
VERTICAL NAVIGATION (VNV) INDICATIONS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
When a VNV flight plan has been activated, VNV indications (VNV Target Altitude, RVSI, VDI) appear on the
PFD in conjunction with the “TOD within 1 minute” message and “Vertical track” voice alert. See the Flight
Management section for details on VNV features. VNV indications are removed from the PFD according to the
criteria listed in Table 2-3.
Top of Descent Message
VNV Target
Altitude
EIS
Vertical
Deviation
Indicator
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Required
Vertical
Speed
Indicator
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
GPS is
Selected
Navigation
Source
Enroute
Phase of
Flight
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Figure 2-34 Vertical Navigation Indications (PFD)
AFCS
VNV Indication Removed
Criteria
Required Vertical
Vertical
VNV Target
Speed (RVSI)
Deviation (VDI)
Altitude
Aircraft > 1 min before the next TOD and not on a descent leg
X
X
X
Aircraft > 1 min before the next TOD due to flight plan change
X
X
X
VNV cancelled (CNCL VNV Softkey selected on MFD)
X
X
X
Distance to active waypoint cannot be computed due to
unsupported flight plan leg type (see Flight Management
X
X
X
Section)
Aircraft > 250 feet below active VNV Target Altitude
X
X
X
Current crosstrack or track angle error has exceeded limit
X
X
X
Active altitude-constrained waypoint can not be reached within
X
X
maximum allowed flight path angle and vertical speed
X
Last altitude-constrained waypoint in active flight plan reached
X
X
(30 sec before)
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
Table 2-3 VNV Indication Removal Criteria
190-00629-04 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58
79
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
2.3 PFD ANNUNCIATIONS AND ALERTING FUNCTIONS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The following annunciations and alerting functions are displayed on the PFD. Refer to Appendix A for more
information on alerts and annunciations.
G1000 ALERTING SYSTEM
EIS
Messages appear in the Alerts Window (in the lower right corner of the PFD; Figure 2-35) when a warning,
caution, advisory alert, or G1000 message advisory occurs. System alert messages are provided for awareness
of G1000 system problems or status and may not require pilot action. The Alerts Window allows system alerts
to be displayed simultaneously. The FMS Knob can be used to scroll through the alert messages. The Alerts
Window is enabled/disabled by selecting the ALERTS Softkey. If the window is already open when a new
message is generated, selecting the ALERTS Softkey to acknowledge the message causes it to turn gray.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
The Annunciation Window appears to the right of the Vertical Speed Indicator and displays abbreviated
annunciation text for aircraft alerts. Text color is based on alert level: warnings appear in red, cautions in
yellow, advisory alerts in white, safe operating annunciations in green. New alerts, regardless of priority, are
displayed at the top of the Annunciation Window, separated by a white line from acknowledged alerts. Once
acknowledged, they are sequenced based on priority.
Annunciation
Window
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Alerts
Window
AFCS
Softkey
Annunciation
Figure 2-35 G1000 Alerting System
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
The ALERTS Softkey label changes to display the appropriate annunciation when an alert is issued. The
annunciation flashes and the appropriate aural alert sounds until acknowledged by pressing the softkey. The
softkey then reverts to the ALERTS Softkey label, and when selected again opens the Alerts Window to display
a descriptive message of the alert.
80
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58
190-00629-04 Rev. A
FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Warnings are time-critical and require immediate attention. A flashing WARNING Softkey annunciation and
aural tone (single chime every two seconds) indicate the presence of a warning. The aural tone and flashing
WARNING Softkey annunciation continue until acknowledged (by pressing the WARNING Softkey).
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Caution indicates the existence of abnormal conditions on the aircraft that may require pilot intervention. A
flashing CAUTION Softkey annunciation and single aural tone (one chime) indicate the presence of a caution.
The flashing CAUTION Softkey annunciation continues to flash until acknowledged (by pressing the CAUTION
Softkey).
EIS
An advisory provides general information to the pilot that may not need immediate attention. A flashing
ADVISORY Softkey annunciation (no aural tone) indicates the presence of a message advisory. The flashing
ADVISORY Softkey annunciation continues to flash until acknowledged (by pressing the ADVISORY
Softkey).
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Figure 2-36 Softkey Annunciation (ALERTS Softkey Labels)
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
MARKER BEACON ANNUNCIATIONS
Marker Beacon Annunciations are displayed on the PFD to the left of the Selected Altitude. Outer marker
reception is indicated in blue, middle in yellow, and inner in white. Refer to the Audio Panel and CNS Section
for more information on Marker Beacon Annunciations.
Middle Marker
Inner Marker
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Outer Marker
AFCS
Altimeter
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Figure 2-37 Marker Beacon Annunciations
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-00629-04 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58
81
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
TRAFFIC ANNUNCIATION
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The G1000 System displays traffic symbolically on the PFD Inset Map, the Navigation Map Page (MFD),
and various other MFD page maps. Refer to the Hazard Avoidance Section and Appendix E for more details
about the Traffic Information Service (TIS) and Traffic Advisory Systems (TAS). When a traffic advisory (TA) is
detected, the following automatically occur:
• The PFD Inset Map is enabled and displays traffic
• A flashing black-on-yellow ‘TRAFFIC’ annunciation (Figure 2-39) appears to the top left of the Attitude
Indicator for five seconds and remains displayed until no TAs are detected in the area
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
If additional TAs appear, new aural and visual alerts are generated.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Traffic
Symbol
Figure 2-38 Inset Map with Traffic Displayed
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
TAWS ANNUNCIATIONS
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
Terrain Awareness and Warning System (TAWS) annunciations appear on the PFD to the upper left of
the Altimeter. Refer to the Hazard Avoidance Section and Appendix A for information on TAWS alerts and
annunciations.
INDEX
Figure 2-39 Traffic and Example TAWS Annunciations
82
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58
190-00629-04 Rev. A
FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
ALTITUDE ALERTING
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The Altitude Alerting function provides the pilot with visual and aural alerts when approaching the Selected
Altitude. Whenever the Selected Altitude is changed, the Altitude Alerter is reset. The Altitude Alerter is
independent of the GFC 700 AFCS, but alerting tones are generated only when the GFC 700 is installed. The
following occur when approaching the Selected Altitude:
• Upon passing through 1000 feet of the Selected Altitude, the Selected Altitude (shown above the Altimeter)
changes to black text on a light blue background and flashes for 5 seconds.
EIS
• When the aircraft passes within 200 ft of the Selected Altitude, the Selected Altitude changes to light blue text
on a black background and flashes for 5 seconds, and an aural tone is generated.
Within 1000 feet
Within 200 feet
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
• After reaching the Selected Altitude, if the pilot flies outside the deviation band (±200 feet of the Selected
Altitude), the Selected Altitude changes to yellow text on a black background, flashes for 5 seconds, and an
aural tone is generated.
Deviation of ±200 feet
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Figure 2-40 Altitude Alerting Visual Annunciations
LOW ALTITUDE ANNUNCIATION
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
NOTE: The Low Altitude Annunciation is available only when SBAS is available. This annunciation is normally
not shown, unless TAWS alerting is inhibited.
AFCS
When the Final Approach Fix (FAF) is the active waypoint in a GPS SBAS approach using vertical guidance,
a Low Altitude Annunciation may appear if the current aircraft altitude is at least 164 feet below the prescribed
altitude at the FAF. A black-on-yellow ‘LOW ALT’ annunciation appears to the top right of the Altimeter,
flashing for several seconds then remaining displayed until the condition is resolved.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Altimeter
Figure 2-41 Low Altitude on GPS SBAS Approach
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-00629-04 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58
83
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
MINIMUM DESCENT ALTITUDE/DECISION HEIGHT ALERTING
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
For altitude awareness, a barometric Minimum Descent Altitude (MDA, or Decision Height, DH) can be set
in the Timer/References Window and is reset when the power is cycled. When active, the altitude setting is
displayed to the lower left of the Altimeter and with a bug at the corresponding altitude along the Altimeter
(once the altitude is within the range of the tape). The following visual annunciations occur when approaching
the MDA/DH:
• When the aircraft altitude descends to within 2500 feet of the MDA/DH setting, the ‘BARO MIN’ box appears
with the altitude in light blue text. The bug appears on the altitude tape in light blue once in range.
EIS
• When the aircraft passes through 100 feet of the MDA/DH, the bug and text turn white.
• Once the aircraft reaches the MDA/DH, the bug and text turn yellow and the aural alert, “Minimums
Minimums”, is generated.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Within 2500 feet
Within 100 feet
Altitude Reached
MDA/DH Bug
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
MDA/DH
Setting
Figure 2-39 Barometric MDA/DH Alerting Visual Annunciations
Setting the barometric minimum descent altitude/decision height and bug:
AFCS
1) Press the TMR/REF Softkey.
2) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the ‘Minimums’ field (Figure 2-43).
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
3) Turn the small FMS Knob to select BARO. OFF is selected by default. Press the ENT Key or turn the large FMS
Knob to highlight the next field.
4) Use the small FMS Knob to enter the desired altitude (from zero to 16,000 feet).
APPENDICES
5) To remove the window, press the CLR Key or the TMR/REF Softkey.
Figure 2-43 Minimum Descent Altitude/Decision Height Setting
(Timer/References Window)
INDEX
Alerting is inhibited while the aircraft is on the ground and until the aircraft reaches 150 feet above the setting
for the alert. If the aircraft proceeds to climb after having reached the MDA/DH, once it reaches 50 feet above
the MDA/DH, alerting is disabled.
84
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58
190-00629-04 Rev. A
FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
2.4 ABNORMAL OPERATIONS
ABNORMAL GPS CONDITIONS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The annunciations listed in Table 2-4 can appear on the HSI when abnormal GPS conditions occur; see Figure
2-44 for examples. Refer to the Flight Management Section for more information on Dead Reckoning Mode.
Annunciation
LOI
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
DR
Description
Loss of Integrity Monitoring–GPS integrity is insufficient for the current
phase of flight
Integrity OK–GPS integrity has been restored to within normal limits
(annunciation displayed for 5 seconds)
Dead Reckoning–System is using projected position rather than GPS position
to compute navigation data and sequence active flight plan waypoints
EIS
INTEG OK
Location
Lower left of
aircraft symbol
Lower left of
aircraft symbol
Upper right of
aircraft symbol
Table 2-4 Abnormal GPS Conditions Annunciated on HSI
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Figure 2-44 Example HSI Annunciations
Dead Reckoning (DR) Mode causes the following items on the PFD to be shown in yellow when GPS is the
selected navigation source:
AFCS
• CDI (removed after 20 minutes)
• Current Track Bug
• Wind Data
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
• Distances in the Bearing Information Windows
• GPS bearing pointers
APPENDICES
It is important to note that estimated navigation data supplied by the G1000 in DR Mode may become
increasingly unreliable and must not be used as a sole means of navigation. See the Flight Management section
for more information about DR mode
INDEX
190-00629-04 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58
85
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
UNUSUAL ATTITUDES
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
When the aircraft enters an unusual pitch attitude, red extreme pitch warning chevrons pointing toward the
horizon are displayed on the Attitude Indicator, starting at 50˚ above and 30˚ below the horizon line.
Nose Low
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
Nose High
Figure 2-45 Pitch Attitude Warnings
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
If pitch exceeds +30˚/-20˚ or bank exceeds 65˚, some information displayed on the PFD is removed. The
Altimeter and Airspeed, Attitude, Vertical Speed, and Horizontal Situation indicators remain on the display
and the Bearing Information, Alerts, and Annunciation windows can be displayed during such situations. The
following information is removed from the PFD (and corresponding softkeys are disabled) when the aircraft
experiences unusual attitudes:
• Traffic Annunciations
• System Time
• AFCS Annunciations
• PFD Setup Menu
• Flight director Command Bars
• Windows displayed in the lower
right corner of the PFD:
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
• Inset Map
• Altimeter Barometric Setting
• Selected Altitude
• Outside air temperature (OAT)
– Timer/References
• Selected Course
• International Standard
Atmosphere temperature (ISA)
– Nearest Airports
• Selected Heading
– Flight Plan
• VNV Target Altitude
• Groundspeed
– Alerts
• DME Information Window
(optional)
– Procedures
• Wind data
• Transponder Status Box
– DME Tuning (optional)
• Minimum Descent Altitude/
Decision Height readout
INDEX
APPENDICES
• Vertical Deviation, Glideslope,
and Glidepath Indicators
86
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58
190-00629-04 Rev. A
ENGINE INDICATION SYSTEM
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
SECTION 3 ENGINE INDICATION SYSTEM
NOTE: Refer to the Pilot’s Operating Handbook (POH) and FAA Approved Airplane Flight Manual (AFM) for
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
operating limitations.
The G1000 Engine Indication System (EIS) displays critical engine, electrical, fuel quantity and fuel flow
parameters on the left side of the Multi Function Display (MFD) during normal operations (Figure 3-1). In
Reversionary Mode, the displays are re-configured to present Primary Flight Display (PFD) symbology together
with the EIS (Figure 3-2).
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
Display
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Figure 3-1 MFD (Normal Operations)
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Failed NAV/COM
AFCS
EIS
Display
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Figure 3-2 PFD (Reversionary Mode)
APPENDICES
190-00629-04 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58
INDEX
Green bands on the instrument scales indicate normal ranges of operation; yellow and red bands indicate
caution and warning, respectively. White or uncolored bands indicate areas outside of normal operation not
yet in the caution or warning ranges. When an unsafe operating condition occurs, readouts, pointers and labels
change color corresponding to the level of the condition; warnings also flash. If the sensor data for a parameter
becomes invalid or unavailable, a red “X” is displayed across the indicator and/or readout.
87
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
ENGINE INDICATION SYSTEM
EIS information is presented in three displays, accessed using the ENGINE Softkey on the MFD:
• Engine Display – Default display, shows all critical engine, fuel and electrical indicators.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
• System Display – Shows numeric readouts of critical engine, fuel and electrical indicators.
EIS
• Lean Display – Provides engine leaning information.
ENGINE
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
ENGINE
LEAN
SYSTEM
BACK
Press the ENGINE or BACK Softkey to
return to the default Engine Page level.
LEAN
SYSTEM
CYL SLCT
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
ENGINE
ASSIST
BACK
Press the ENGINE Softkey to return
to the default Engine Page level.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
ENGINE
LEAN
SYSTEM
DEC FUEL
Press the BACK Softkey to return
to the previous softkey level.
INC FUEL
166 GAL
194 GAL
BACK
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
Figure 3-3 Engine Softkey Flowchart
88
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58
190-00629-04 Rev. A
ENGINE INDICATION SYSTEM
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
3.1 ENGINE DISPLAY
NOTE: Refer to the Pilot’s Operating Handbook (POH) and FAA Approved Airplane Flight Manual (AFM) for
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
operating limitations.
The Engine Display is the default EIS display and can be selected by pressing the ENGINE or BACK Softkey
when another EIS display is currently shown. Beneath the dial gauges are the horizontal bar indicators for fuel
flow, cylinder head temperature, oil temperature and pressure, alternator load and fuel quantity.
EIS
1
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
2
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
3
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Fuel Flow
Leaning
Markers
4
5
AFCS
6
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
7
8
APPENDICES
9
Figure 3-4 Engine Display
INDEX
190-00629-04 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58
89
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
ENGINE INDICATION SYSTEM
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
1
2
Engine Manifold Pressure
Gauge (MAN)
Tachometer Gauge (RPM)
3
Propeller Sync Indicator
4
Fuel Flow Indicator
Displays engine power in inches of Mercury (in Hg)
Displays propeller speed in revolutions per minute (rpm); the red band
indicates propeller overspeed
The small white pointer located in the center of the Tachometer points
towards the propeller turning at a lower-speed.
Displays current fuel flow in gallons per hour (gph)
Fuel Flow Leaning Markers (light blue) provide a leaning reference during
a cruise or max power climb (MPC). The pointers are displayed along
the horizontal bar indicator if the propeller speed exceeds 2530 rpm or
fuel flow exceeds a specified value based on altitude during a cruise or
max power (MPC) climb.
Cylinder Head Temperature Displays the highest cylinder head temperature
Indicator (CHT)
Oil Temperature Indicator Displays oil temperature
(OIL TEMP)
Displays pressure of oil supplied to the engines
Oil Pressure Indicator
(OIL PRES)
Displays current loads for each alternator
Ammeter (ALT LOAD)
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
5
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
EIS
(FFLOW GPH)
7
6
8
Fuel Quantity Indicator
(FUEL QTY GAL)
Displays the quantity of fuel in each tank in gallons
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
9
90
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58
190-00629-04 Rev. A
ENGINE INDICATION SYSTEM
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
3.2 LEAN DISPLAY
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
NOTE: The pilot should follow the engine manufacturer’s recommended leaning procedures as described in
the Pilot’s Operating Handbook (POH) and FAA Approved Airplane Flight Manual (AFM).
The Lean Display is accessed by pressing the ENGINE Softkey followed by the LEAN Softkey and provides
information for performing engine leaning.
EIS
Manifold Gauge, Tachometer and Fuel Flow Indicator remain on the Lean Display. Exhaust Gas Temperature
(EGT) and Cylinder Head Temperature (CHT) are displayed graphically with numeric readouts for the selected
cylinder.
Accessing the EIS Lean Display:
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
1) Press the ENGINE Softkey.
2) Press the LEAN Softkey.
3) To return to the default Engine Display, press the ENGINE or BACK Softkey.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
From the Lean Display, the CYL SLCT and ASSIST Softkeys can be utilized to obtain information about specific
cylinders on both the EGT and CHT graphs. Pressing the CYL SLCT Softkey cycles through the cylinders; the
selected cylinder number is displayed in light blue. The CYL SLCT Softkey is disabled during warning or caution
conditions or when the ASSIST Softkey is pressed.
Monitoring the desired cylinder’s EGT and CHT:
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
From the Lean Display, press the CYL SLCT Softkey to cycle through each cylinder and view its EGT and CHT.
The selected cylinder is shown in light blue.
When the ASSIST Softkey is selected, the system initially highlights and selects the cylinder number with the
hottest EGT and displays its temperature below the EGT bar graph. A readout showing the difference between
peak (DPEAK) and the current temperature for the selected cylinder is displayed above the EGT bar graph.
AFCS
As the mixture is leaned, a light blue line will appear above each cylinder to indicate EGT peak.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
When the system detects the first cylinder to peak, the cylinder numbers below the EGT graph disappear, and
the letter “R” is annunciated below the first peaked cylinder to indicate the other cylinders are rich of peak. As
the mixture is further leaned, the letter “L” is annunciated below the last peaked cylinder indicating all cylinders
are lean of peak. Refer to the POH and AFM for the recommended mixture adjustment procedures.
APPENDICES
Monitoring of the cylinder continues until the ASSIST Softkey is pressed again which disables lean assist and
removes the peak lines from the bar graph and the temperature deviation from peak (DPEAK). The system then
returns to seeking the hottest cylinder.
INDEX
190-00629-04 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58
91
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
ENGINE INDICATION SYSTEM
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
1
EIS
2
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Propeller
Sync
Indicator
3
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Temperature
Deviation
From Peak
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
4
AFCS
5
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Figure 3-5 Lean Display (G58)
92
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58
190-00629-04 Rev. A
ENGINE INDICATION SYSTEM
3
Fuel Flow Indicator
(FFLOW GPH)
Fuel Flow Leaning Markers (light blue) provide a leaning reference during
a cruise or max power climb (MPC). The pointers are displayed along
the horizontal bar indicator if the propeller speed exceeds 2530 rpm or
fuel flow exceeds a specified value based on altitude during a cruise or
max power (MPC) climb.
The number of the cylinder with the highest Exhaust Gas Temperature
(EGT) is highlighted in light blue and its readout given below the bar
graph in degrees Celsius (°C).
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
When the ASSIST Softkey is pressed and the mixture is leaned, a light
blue line appears above each cylinder’s bar to represent its peak EGT
The letter “R” (rich) appears below the first peaked cylinder to indicate
some cylinders are rich of peak; the letter “L’” (lean) appears below the
last cylinder to peak.
Cylinder Head Temperature The number of the cylinder with the highest head temperature is
highlighted in light blue and its readout given below the bar graph in
Bar Graph (CHT °C)
degrees Celsius (°C).
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
5
Exhaust Gas Temperature
Bar Graph (EGT °C)
Displays propeller speed in revolutions per minute (rpm); the red band
indicates propeller overspeed
Displays current fuel flow in gallons per hour (gph)
EIS
4
Displays engine power in inches of Mercury (in Hg)
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
2
Engine Manifold Pressure
Gauge (MAN)
Tachometer Gauge (RPM)
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
1
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
A caution or warning condition is denoted by color change of a cylinder’s
bar to yellow or red, respectively.
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-00629-04 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58
93
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
ENGINE INDICATION SYSTEM
3.3 SYSTEM DISPLAY
NOTE: Fuel calculations do not use the aircraft Fuel Quantity Indicator and are calculated from the last time
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
the fuel was reset.
NOTE: Refer to the Pilot’s Operating Handbook (POH) and FAA Approved Airplane Flight Manual (AFM) for
operating limitations.
EIS
The System Display is accessed by pressing the ENGINE Softkey followed by the SYSTEM Softkey. Readouts
below the Manifold Pressure Gauge and Tachometer are grouped into three categories: System (Oil), Fuel
Calculations and Electrical.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
1
2
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Propeller
Sync
Indicator
3
AFCS
4
5
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
6
APPENDICES
7
7
INDEX
Figure 3-6 System Display
94
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58
190-00629-04 Rev. A
ENGINE INDICATION SYSTEM
2
4
6
8
Displays oil pressure in pounds per square inch (psi)
Displays the totalizer-based fuel remaining in gallons, adjusted using the
DEC FUEL and INC FUEL Softkeys
Displays fuel used in gallons, based on fuel flow
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
7
Displays propeller speed in revolutions per minute (rpm); the red band
indicates propeller overspeed
Displays oil temperature in degrees Celsius (°C)
EIS
5
Displays engine power in inches of Mercury (in Hg)
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
3
Engine Manifold Pressure
Gauge (MAN)
Tachometer Gauge
(RPM)
Oil Temperature Indicator
(OIL °C)
Oil Pressure Indicator
(OIL PSI)
Calculated Fuel Remaining
(GAL REM)
Calculated Fuel Used
(GAL USED)
Ammeter
(ALT LOAD)
Voltmeter
(BUS VOLTS)
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
1
Displays current loads for each alternator (L and R) as a percentage of the
capacity
Displays voltage for each bus (L and R)
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Fuel calculations are based on the fuel flow totalizer and the displayed fuel remaining (GAL REM), adjusted
using the following softkeys:
• DEC FUEL – Decreases totalizer-based fuel remaining in one-gallon increments
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
• INC FUEL – Increases totalizer-based fuel remaining in one-gallon increments
• 166 GAL – Resets totalizer-based fuel remaining to 166 gallons and fuel used display to zero
• 194 GAL – Resets totalizer-based fuel remaining to 194 gallons and fuel used display to zero
Accessing the EIS System Display:
AFCS
1) Press the ENGINE Softkey.
2) Press the SYSTEM Softkey.
3) To return to the default Engine Display, press the ENGINE or BACK Softkey.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Adjusting the fuel totalizer quantity:
From the System Display, press the DEC FUEL or INC FUEL Softkey to obtain the desired number of gallons
remaining (GAL REM).
APPENDICES
Resetting the fuel totalizer:
From the System Display, press the 166 GAL or 194 GAL Softkey to rest the totalizer. This also resets the fuel
used (GAL USED) to zero.
INDEX
190-00629-04 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58
95
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
ENGINE INDICATION SYSTEM
Blank Page
96
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58
190-00629-04 Rev. A
AUDIO PANEL AND CNS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
SECTION 4 AUDIO PANEL AND CNS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
4.1 OVERVIEW
The Communication/Navigation/Surveillance (CNS) system includes the Audio Panel, communication radios,
navigation radios, and Mode S transponder. The System Overview Section provides a block diagram description
of the Audio Panel and CNS system interconnection.
CNS operation in Beechcraft G58 aircraft is performed by the following Line Replaceable Units (LRUs):
• Audio Panel
• Multi Function Display (MFD)
• Mode S Transponder
EIS
• Primary Flight Display (PFD)
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
• Integrated Avionics Unit (2)
The MFD/PFD controls are used to tune the communication transceivers and navigation radios.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
The Audio Panel provides the traditional audio selector functions of microphone and receiver audio selection.
The Audio Panel includes an intercom system (ICS) between the pilot, copilot, and passengers, a marker beacon
receiver, and a COM clearance recorder. Ambient noise from the aircraft radios is reduced by a feature called
Master Avionics Squelch (MASQ). When no audio is detected, MASQ processing further reduces the amount of
background noise from the radios.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
The Mode S transponder is controlled with softkeys and the FMS Knob located on the Primary Flight Display
(PFD). The Transponder Data Box is located to the left of the System Time Box. The data box displays the active
four-digit code, mode, and reply status (Figure 4-1).
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-00629-04 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58
97
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
AUDIO PANEL AND CNS
MFD/PFD CONTROLS AND FREQUENCY DISPLAY
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
1
9
10
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
11
12
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
Figure 4-1 MFD/PFD Controls, NAV/COM Frequency Tuning Boxes, and DME Tuning Window (PFD Shown)
98
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58
190-00629-04 Rev. A
AUDIO PANEL AND CNS
NAV Frequency Box – Displays NAV standby and active frequency fields, volume, and station ID. The
frequency of the NAV radio selected for navigation is displayed in green.
5
COM Frequency Box – Displays COM standby and active frequency fields and volume. The selected COM
transceiver frequency is displayed in green.
6
COM Knob – Tunes the standby frequencies for the COM transceiver (large knob for MHz; small knob for
kHz). Press to move the tuning box (light blue box) and Frequency Transfer Arrow between COM1 and
COM2.
7
COM Frequency Transfer Key – Transfers the standby and active COM frequencies. Press and hold this key
for two seconds to tune the emergency frequency (121.500 MHz) automatically into the active frequency
field.
8
COM VOL/SQ Knob – Controls COM audio volume level. Press to turn the COM automatic squelch on
and off. Volume level is shown in the COM frequency field as a percentage.
9
DME Tuning Window – Displays DME frequency pairing mode. Display by pressing the DME Softkey.
10
ENT Key – Validates or confirms DME pairing mode and Auto-tune selection.
11
FMS Knob – Flight Management System Knob, used to enter transponder codes, select DME modes, and
Auto-tune entries when DME Tuning Window or NRST Window is present. Press the FMS Knob to turn
the selection cursor on and off. The large knob moves the cursor in the window. The small knob selects
individual characters for the highlighted cursor location.
12
Transponder Data Box – Indicates the selected transponder code, operating mode, reply, and ident status
for the transponder.
AFCS
4
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
NAV Knob – Tunes the standby frequencies for the NAV receiver (large knob for MHz; small knob for kHz).
Press to move the tuning box (light blue box) and Frequency Transfer Arrow between NAV1 and NAV2.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
3
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
NAV Frequency Transfer Key – Transfers the standby and active NAV frequencies.
EIS
2
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
NAV VOL/ID Knob – Controls NAV audio volume level. Press to turn the Morse code identifier audio on
and off. Volume level is shown in the NAV frequency field as a percentage.
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
1
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-00629-04 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58
99
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
AUDIO PANEL AND CNS
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
14
15
16
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
2
13
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
1
18
19
20
21
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
AUDIO PANEL CONTROLS
22
23
17
24
AFCS
Figure 4-2 Audio Panel Controls
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
NOTE: When a key is selected, a triangular annunciator above the key is illuminated.
100
1
COM1 MIC – Selects the #1 transmitter for transmitting. COM1 receive is simultaneously selected when
this key is pressed allowing received audio from the #1 COM receiver to be heard. COM2 receive can be
added by pressing the COM2 Key.
2
COM1 – When selected, audio from the #1 COM receiver can be heard.
3
COM2 MIC – Selects the #2 transmitter for transmitting. COM2 receive is simultaneously selected when
this key is pressed allowing received audio from the #2 COM receiver to be heard. COM1 receive can be
added by pressing the COM1 Key.
4
COM2 – When selected, audio from the #2 COM receiver can be heard.
5
COM3 MIC – Not used in Beechcraft G58 aircraft.
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58
190-00629-04 Rev. A
AUDIO PANEL AND CNS
SPKR – Selects and deselects the cabin speaker. COM and NAV receiver audio can be heard on the
speaker.
11
MKR/MUTE – Selects marker beacon receiver audio. Mutes the currently received marker beacon receiver
audio. Unmutes automatically when new marker beacon audio is received. Also, stops play of recorded
COM audio.
12
HI SENS – Press to increase marker beacon receiver sensitivity. Press again to return to low sensitivity.
13
DME – Turns optional DME audio on or off.
14
NAV1 – When selected, audio from the #1 NAV receiver can be heard.
15
ADF – Not used in Beechcraft G58 aircraft.
16
NAV2 – When selected, audio from the #2 NAV receiver can be heard.
17
AUX – Not used in Beechcraft G58 aircraft.
18
MAN SQ – Enables manual squelch for the intercom. When the intercom is active, press the PILOT Knob
to illuminate SQ. Turn the PILOT/PASS Knobs to adjust squelch.
19
PLAY – Press once to play the last recorded COM audio. Press again while audio is playing and the
previous block of recorded audio is played. Each subsequent press plays each previously recorded block.
Pressing the MKR/MUTE Key during play of a memory block stops play.
20
PILOT – Selects and deselects the pilot intercom isolation.
21
COPLT – Selects and deselects the copilot intercom isolation.
22
PILOT Knob – Press to switch between volume and squelch control as indicated by illumination of VOL
or SQ. Turn to adjust intercom volume or squelch. The MAN SQ Key must be selected to allow squelch
adjustment.
23
PASS Knob – Turn to adjust Copilot/Passenger intercom volume or squelch. The MAN SQ Key must be
selected to allow squelch adjustment.
24
DISPLAY BACKUP Button – Manually selects Reversionary Mode.
APPENDICES
10
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
PA – Not used in Beechcraft G58 aircraft.
AFCS
9
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
TEL – Not used in Beechcraft G58 aircraft.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
8
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
COM 1/2 – Split COM Key. Allows simultaneous transmission on COM1 and COM2 by the pilot and copilot.
EIS
7
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
COM3 – Not used in Beechcraft G58 aircraft.
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
6
INDEX
190-00629-04 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58
101
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
AUDIO PANEL AND CNS
4.2 COM OPERATION
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
COM TRANSCEIVER SELECTION AND ACTIVATION
NOTE: When turning on the G1000 for use, the system remembers the last frequencies used and the active
COM transceiver state prior to shutdown.
EIS
The COM Frequency Box is composed of four fields; the two active frequencies are on the left side and the
two standby frequencies are on the right. The COM transceiver is selected for transmitting by pressing the
COM MIC Keys on the Audio Panel. During reception of audio from the COM radio selected for transmission,
audio from the other COM radio is muted.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
An active COM frequency displayed in green indicates that the COM transceiver is selected on the Audio
Panel (COM1 MIC or COM2 MIC Key).
Frequencies in the standby field are displayed in either white or gray. The standby frequency in the tuning
box is white. The other standby frequency is gray.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Active
Fields
Standby
Fields
Top Section of
the Audio Panel
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Tuning Box
AFCS
COM2 Radio is Selected
on the Audio Panel
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Figure 4-3 Selecting a COM Radio for Transmit
102
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58
190-00629-04 Rev. A
AUDIO PANEL AND CNS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
TRANSMIT/RECEIVE INDICATIONS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
During COM transmission, a white TX appears by the active COM frequency replacing the Frequency
Transfer Arrow. On the Audio Panel, when the active COM is transmitting, the active transceiver COM MIC
Key Annunciator flashes approximately once per second.
During COM signal reception, a white RX appears by the active COM frequency replacing the Frequency
Transfer Arrow. Entertainment audio, if selected, is muted during active COM radio reception. Refer to
Additional Audio Panel Functions later in this section, and details on the Data Link Receiver in the Additional
Features Section.
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Transmit and
Receive Indicators
Annunciator
Flashes During
Transmission
Figure 4-4 COM Radio Transmit and Receive Indications
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
COM TRANSCEIVER MANUAL TUNING
The COM frequency controls and frequency boxes are on the right side of the MFD and PFD.
Manually tuning a COM frequency:
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
1) Turn the COM Knob to tune the desired frequency in the COM Tuning Box (large knob for MHz; small knob for
kHz).
2) Press the Frequency Transfer Key to transfer the frequency to the active field.
3) Adjust the volume level with the COM VOL/SQ Knob.
4) Press the COM VOL/SQ Knob to turn automatic squelch on and off.
AFCS
Turn the VOL/SQ Knob to adjust
volume. Press the Knob to Turn
Automatic Squelch On or Off
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Press the Frequency Transfer
Key to Transfer COM
Frequencies Between Active
and Standby Frequency Boxes
Turn the COM Knob to
Tune the Frequency in
the Tuning Box
APPENDICES
Figure 4-5 COM Frequency Tuning
INDEX
190-00629-04 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58
103
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
AUDIO PANEL AND CNS
SELECTING THE RADIO TO BE TUNED
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Press the small COM Knob to transfer the frequency tuning box and Frequency Transfer Arrow between the
upper and lower radio frequency fields.
EIS
Press the COM Knob to
Switch the Tuning Box From
One COM Radio to the Other
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Figure 4-6 Switching COM Tuning Boxes
QUICK-TUNING AND ACTIVATING 121.500 MHZ
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Pressing and holding the COM Frequency Transfer Key for two seconds automatically loads the emergency
COM frequency (121.500 MHz) in the active field of the COM radio selected for tuning (the one with the
transfer arrow). In the example shown, pressing the Audio Panel COM2 MIC Key activates the transceiver.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Press for Two Seconds to
Load 121.500 MHz
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
Figure 4-7 Quickly Tuning 121.500 MHz
104
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58
190-00629-04 Rev. A
AUDIO PANEL AND CNS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
AUTO-TUNING THE COM FREQUENCY
COM frequencies can be automatically tuned from the following:
• Nearest Airports Window (PFD)
• NRST – Nearest Frequencies Page (ARTCC, FSS, WX)
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
• WPT – Airport Information Page
• NRST – Nearest Airspaces Page
• NRST – Nearest Airports Page
AUTO-TUNING FROM THE PFD
EIS
COM frequencies for the nearest airports can be automatically tuned from the Nearest Airports Window on
the PFD. When the desired frequency is entered, it becomes a standby frequency. Pressing the Frequency
Transfer Key places this frequency into the COM Active Frequency Field.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Auto-tuning a COM frequency for a nearby airport from the PFD:
1) Press the NRST Softkey on the PFD to open the Nearest Airports Window. A list of 25 nearest airport identifiers
and COM frequencies is displayed.
2) Turn the FMS Knob to scroll through the list and highlight the desired COM frequency.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
3) Press the ENT Key to load the COM frequency into the COM Standby Tuning Box.
4) Press the Frequency Transfer Key to transfer the frequency to the COM Active Frequency Field.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
Press the NRST
Softkey to Open
the Nearest
Airports Window
Figure 4-8 Nearest Airports Window (PFD)
INDEX
190-00629-04 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58
105
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
AUDIO PANEL AND CNS
AUTO-TUNING FROM THE MFD
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Frequencies can be automatically loaded into the COM Frequency Box from pages in the NRST or WPT
page group by highlighting the frequency and pressing the ENT Key (Figures 4-9, 4-10, and 4-11).
Auto-tuning a COM frequency from the WPT and NRST Pages:
1) From any page that the COM frequency can be auto-tuned, activate the cursor by pressing the FMS Knob or the
appropriate softkey.
2) Turn the FMS Knob to place the cursor on the desired COM frequency (Figure 4-11).
EIS
3) Press the ENT Key to load the COM frequency into the standby field of the selected COM radio.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
4) Press the Frequency Transfer Key to transfer the frequency to the COM Active Frequency Field.
Press the ENT Key to
Load a Highlighted
Frequency into
the COM Standby
Frequency Box
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Turn the FMS
Knob to Scroll
Through a List
of Frequencies
Figure 4-9 Frequency Auto-Tuning from the MFD
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Or:
1) On the Nearest Airports, Frequencies, or Airspaces page, press the MENU Key to display the page menu.
2) Turn the large FMS Knob to scroll through the menu options.
3) Press the ENT Key to place the cursor on the desired selection.
AFCS
4) Scroll through the frequency selections with the FMS Knob.
5) Press the ENT Key to load the COM frequency into the standby field of the selected COM radio.
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
6) Press the Frequency Transfer Key to transfer the frequency to the COM Active Frequency Field.
Nearest Airports Menu
Nearest Frequencies Menu
Nearest Airspaces Menu
Figure 4-10 Nearest Pages Menus
106
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58
190-00629-04 Rev. A
AUDIO PANEL AND CNS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
On the WPT - Airport Information Page, the cursor can be placed on the frequency field by pressing the
FMS Knob and scrolling through the list. The frequency is transferred to the COM Standby Field with the
ENT Key.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Press Frequency
Transfer Key to Load
Frequency into COM
Active Frequency Field
Selected Airport
Identifier and
Information
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Runway
Information
Press INFO-x Softkey
for AIRPORT,
RUNWAYS,
FREQUENCIES, and
AOPA Data
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Figure 4-11 WPT – Airport Information Page
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Press ENT Key to Load
Frequency into COM
Standby Field. Cursor
then Advances to
Next Frequency.
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-00629-04 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58
107
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
AUDIO PANEL AND CNS
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
COM frequencies can also be auto-tuned from the NRST – Nearest Airspaces, NRST – Nearest Frequencies,
and NRST – Nearest Airports Pages on the MFD in a similar manner using the appropriate softkeys or MENU
Key, the FMS Knob, and the ENT Key.
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Figure 4-12 NRST – Nearest Airspaces, NRST – Nearest Airports, and NRST – Nearest Frequencies Pages
108
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58
190-00629-04 Rev. A
AUDIO PANEL AND CNS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FREQUENCY SPACING
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The G1000 COM radios can tune either 25-kHz spacing (118.000 to 136.975 MHz) or 8.33-kHz spacing
(118.000 to 136.990 MHz) for 760-channel or 3040-channel configuration. When 8.33-kHz channel spacing
is selected, all of the 25-kHz channel spacing frequencies are also available in the complete 3040-channel list.
COM channel spacing is set on the System Setup Page of the AUX Page Group.
25-kHz Channel
Spacing
EIS
8.33-kHz Channel
Spacing
Figure 4-13 COM Channel Spacing
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Changing COM frequency channel spacing:
1) Select the AUX – System Setup Page.
2) Press the FMS Knob to activate the flashing cursor.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
3) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the Channel Spacing Field in the COM Configuration Box.
4) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the desired channel spacing.
5) Press the ENT Key to complete the channel spacing selection.
While the COM CONFIG Window is selected, the G1000 softkeys are blank.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
Select 8.33-kHz
or 25.0-kHz
COM Frequency
Channel Spacing
AUX - SYSTEM
SETUP PAGE
INDEX
Figure 4-14 AUX – System Setup Page
190-00629-04 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58
109
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
AUDIO PANEL AND CNS
AUTOMATIC SQUELCH
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Automatic Squelch quiets unwanted static noise when no audio signal is received, while still providing good
sensitivity to weak COM signals. To disable Automatic Squelch, press the VOL/SQ Knob. When Automatic
Squelch is disabled, COM audio reception is always on. Continuous static noise is heard over the headsets and
speaker, if selected. Pressing the VOL/SQ Knob again enables Automatic Squelch.
EIS
Press the COM VOL/
SQ Knob to turn off
Automatic Squelch.
Press again to restore
Automatic Squelch.
Figure 4-15 Overriding Automatic Squelch
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
VOLUME
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
COM radio volume level can be adjusted from 0 to 100% using the VOL/SQ Knob. Turning the knob
clockwise increases volume, turning the knob counterclockwise decreases volume. When adjusting volume,
the level is displayed in place of the standby frequencies. Volume level indication remains for two seconds after
the change.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
COM Volume
Level Remains for
Two Seconds
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
Figure 4-16 COM Volume Level
110
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58
190-00629-04 Rev. A
AUDIO PANEL AND CNS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
4.3 NAV OPERATION
NAV RADIO SELECTION AND ACTIVATION
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The NAV Frequency Box is composed of four fields; two standby fields and two active fields. The active
frequencies are on the right side and the standby frequencies are on the left.
EIS
A NAV radio is selected for navigation by pressing the CDI Softkey located on the PFD. The active NAV
frequency selected for navigation is displayed in green. Pressing the CDI Softkey once selects NAV1 as the
navigation radio. Pressing the CDI Softkey a second time selects NAV2 as the navigation radio. Pressing the
CDI Softkey a third time activates GPS mode. Pressing the CDI Softkey again cycles back to NAV1.
While cycling through the CDI Softkey selections, the NAV Tuning Box and the Frequency Transfer Arrow are
placed in the active NAV Frequency Field and the active NAV frequency color changes to green.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
The three navigation modes that can be cycled through are:
• VOR1 (or LOC1) – If NAV1 is selected, a green single line arrow (not shown) labeled either VOR1 or LOC1
is displayed on the HSI and the active NAV1 frequency is displayed in green.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
• VOR2 (or LOC2) – If NAV2 is selected, a green double line arrow (shown) labeled either VOR2 or LOC2 is
displayed on the HSI and the active NAV2 frequency is displayed in green.
• GPS – If GPS Mode is selected, a magenta single line arrow (not shown) appears on the HSI and neither NAV
radio is selected. Both active NAV frequencies are then displayed in white.
Active
Fields
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Standby
Fields
Tuning Box
AFCS
The NAV Radio is
Selected by Pressing
the CDI Softkey
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Figure 4-17 Selecting a NAV Radio for Navigation
APPENDICES
See the Flight Instruments Section for selecting the DME and Bearing Information windows and using VOR
as the source for the bearing pointer.
INDEX
190-00629-04 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58
111
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
AUDIO PANEL AND CNS
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
NAV radios are selected for listening by pressing the corresponding keys on the Audio Panel. Pressing the
NAV1, NAV2, or DME Key selects and deselects the navigation radio source. Selected audio can be heard over the
headset and the speaker (if selected). All radios can be selected individually or simultaneously.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Figure 4-18 Selecting a NAV Radio Receiver
NAV RECEIVER MANUAL TUNING
The NAV frequency controls and frequency boxes are on the left side of the MFD and PFD.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Manually tuning a NAV frequency:
1) Turn the NAV Knob to tune the desired frequency in the NAV Tuning Box.
2) Press the Frequency Transfer Key to transfer the frequency to the NAV Active Frequency Field.
3) Adjust the volume level with the NAV VOL/ID Knob.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
4) Press the NAV VOL/ID Knob to turn the Morse code identifier audio on and off.
AFCS
Turn VOL/ID Knob to adjust
volume. Press Knob to Turn
Morse Code On or Off.
Press the Frequency Transfer Key to
Transfer NAV Frequencies Between
Active and Standby Frequency Fields
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Turn the NAV Knob to
Tune the Frequency in
the Tuning Box
INDEX
APPENDICES
Figure 4-19 NAV Frequency Tuning
112
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58
190-00629-04 Rev. A
AUDIO PANEL AND CNS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
SELECTING THE RADIO TO BE TUNED
Press the small NAV Knob to transfer the frequency tuning box and Frequency Transfer Arrow between the
upper and lower radio frequency fields.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Press the NAV Knob to
Switch the Tuning Box From
One NAV Radio to the Other
EIS
Figure 4-20 Switching NAV Tuning Boxes
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
VOR/LOC ID
When the Morse code Identifier audio is on for a NAV radio, a white ID appears to the left of the active
NAV frequency.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
The Morse Code Identifier
for the GHM VOR is On
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
In the example shown, in order to listen to either station identifier, press the NAV1 or NAV2 Key on the
Audio Panel. Pressing the VOL/ID Knob turns off the Morse code audio only in the radio with the NAV
Tuning Box. To turn off both NAV IDs, transfer the NAV Tuning Box between NAV1 and NAV2 by pressing
the small NAV Knob and pressing the VOL/ID Knob again to turn the Morse code off in the other radio.
Station
Identifier
Figure 4-21 NAV Radio ID Indication
AFCS
VOLUME
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
NAV Radio volume level can be adjusted from 0 to 100% using the VOL/ID Knob. Turning the knob
clockwise increases volume, counterclockwise decreases volume.
When adjusting, the level is displayed in place of the standby frequencies. Volume level indication remains
for two seconds after the change.
APPENDICES
NAV Volume
Level Remains
for Two Seconds
Figure 4-22 NAV Volume Levels
INDEX
190-00629-04 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58
113
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
AUTO-TUNING A NAV FREQUENCY FROM THE MFD
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
AUDIO PANEL AND CNS
• WPT – VOR Information
• NRST – Nearest Frequencies (FSS, WX)
• NRST – Nearest Airports
• NRST – Nearest Airspaces
NAV frequencies can be selected and loaded from the following MFD pages:
• WPT – Airport Information
• NRST – Nearest VOR
EIS
The MFD provides auto-tuning of NAV frequencies from waypoint and nearest pages. During enroute
navigation, the NAV frequency is entered automatically into the NAV standby frequency field. During approach
activation the NAV frequency is entered automatically into the NAV active frequency field.
Frequencies can be automatically loaded into the NAV Frequency Box from pages in the NRST or WPT page
group by highlighting the frequency and pressing the ENT Key (Figures 4-23, 4-24, and 4-25).
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Auto-tuning a NAV frequency from the WPT and NRST Pages:
1) From any page that the NAV frequency can be auto-tuned, activate the cursor by pressing the FMS Knob or the
appropriate softkey.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
2) Turn the FMS Knob to place the cursor on the desired NAV identifier or NAV frequency.
3) On the Nearest VOR and Nearest Airports pages, press the FREQ Softkey to place the cursor on the NAV
frequency (Figure 4-25).
4) Press the ENT Key to load the NAV frequency into the standby field of the selected NAV radio.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
5) Press the Frequency Transfer Key to transfer the frequency to the NAV Active Frequency Field.
AFCS
Turn the FMS
Knob to Scroll
Through a List
of Frequencies
Press the ENT
Key to Load
a Highlighted
Frequency into
the NAV Standby
Frequency Box
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Figure 4-23 NAV Frequency Auto-Tuning from the MFD
114
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58
190-00629-04 Rev. A
AUDIO PANEL AND CNS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Or:
1) When on the Nearest VOR, Nearest Airspaces, and Nearest Airports pages, press the MENU Key to display the
page menu.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
2) Turn the large FMS Knob to scroll through the menu options.
3) Press the ENT Key to place the cursor in the desired window.
4) Scroll through the frequency selections with the FMS Knob.
5) Press the ENT Key to load the NAV frequency into the standby field of the selected NAV radio.
6) Press the Frequency Transfer Key to transfer the frequency to the NAV Active Frequency Field.
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Nearest VOR Menu
Nearest Frequencies Menu
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Nearest Airports Menu
Nearest Airspaces Menu
Figure 4-24 Nearest Pages Menus
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-00629-04 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58
115
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
AUDIO PANEL AND CNS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
In the example shown, the VOR list is selected with the VOR Softkey or from the page menu. The FMS Knob
or ENT Key is used to scroll through the list. The cursor is placed on the frequency with the FREQ Softkey and
loaded into the NAV Tuning Box with the ENT Key.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Press the ENT
Key to Load
the Frequency
into the NAV
Standby Field.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Press the VOR
Softkey to Place
the Cursor on the
VOR Identifier
Press the FREQ
Softkey to Place
the Cursor on the
VOR Frequency
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
Figure 4-25 Loading the NAV Frequency from the NRST – Nearest VOR Page
116
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58
190-00629-04 Rev. A
AUDIO PANEL AND CNS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
While enroute, NAV frequencies can also be auto-tuned from the NRST – Nearest Airports,
WPT – Airport Information, WPT – VOR Information, and NRST – Nearest Frequencies Pages on the MFD in
a similar manner using the appropriate softkeys or MENU Key, the FMS Knob, and the ENT Key.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
Figure 4-26 NRST – Nearest Frequencies, WPT – VOR Information, WPT – Airport Information, and
NRST – Nearest Airports Pages
INDEX
190-00629-04 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58
117
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
AUDIO PANEL AND CNS
AUTO-TUNING NAV FREQUENCIES ON APPROACH ACTIVATION
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
NOTE: The primary NAV frequency is auto-tuned upon loading a VOR or ILS/Localizer approach.
NOTE: When an ILS/LOC approach has been activated while navigating by GPS, the system automatically
switches to LOC as the final approach course is intercepted (within 15 nm of the FAF). See the Flight
Management Section for details.
NAV frequencies are automatically loaded into the NAV Frequency Box on approach activation.
EIS
When loading or activating a VOR or ILS/LOC approach, the approach frequency is automatically transferred
to a NAV frequency field as follows:
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
• If the current CDI navigation source is GPS, the approach frequency is transferred to the NAV1 active
frequency field. The frequency that was previously in the NAV1 active frequency field is transferred to
standby.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
• If the current CDI navigation source is GPS, and if the approach frequency is already loaded into the NAV1
standby frequency field, the standby frequency is transferred to active.
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
• If the current CDI navigation source is NAV1 or NAV2, the approach frequency is transferred to the standby
frequency fields of the selected CDI NAV radio.
118
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58
190-00629-04 Rev. A
AUDIO PANEL AND CNS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
MARKER BEACON RECEIVER
NOTE: The marker beacon indicators operate independently of marker beacon audio and cannot be turned
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
off.
The marker beacon receiver is used as part of the ILS. The marker beacon receiver is always on and detects
any marker beacon signals within the reception range of the aircraft.
The receiver detects the three marker tones – outer, middle, and inner – and provides the marker beacon
annunciations located to the left of the Altimeter on the PFD.
Middle Marker
Indication
Inner Marker
Indication
EIS
Outer Marker
Indication
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Figure 4-27 Marker Beacon Annunciations on the PFD
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Figure 4-28 Marker Beacon Keys
AFCS
The Audio Panel provides three different states of marker beacon operation; On, Muted, and Deselected.
Pressing the MKR/MUTE Key selects and deselects marker beacon audio. The key annunciator indicates when
marker beacon audio is selected.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
During marker beacon audio reception, pressing the MKR/MUTE Key mutes the audio but does not affect the
marker annunciations (Figure 4-27). The marker tone is silenced, then waits for the next marker tone. The
MKR/MUTE Key Annunciator is illuminated, indicating audio muting. The audio returns when the next marker
beacon signal is received. If the MKR/MUTE Key is pressed during signal reception (O, M, I indication) while
marker beacon audio is muted, the audio is deselected and the MKR/MUTE Key Annunciator is extinguished.
APPENDICES
Pressing the HI SENS Key switches between high and low marker beacon receiver sensitivity. The HI SENS
function (annunciator illuminated) is used to provide an earlier indication when nearing a marker during an
approach. The LO SENS function (annunciator extinguished) results in a narrower marker dwell while over a
station.
INDEX
190-00629-04 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58
119
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
AUDIO PANEL AND CNS
DME TUNING (OPTIONAL)
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
NOTE: When another auxiliary window is turned on, the DME Tuning Window is replaced on the PFD.
NOTE: When turning on the G1000 for use, the system remembers the last frequency used for DME tuning
and the NAV1, NAV2, or HOLD state prior to shutdown.
The G1000 System tunes the optional DME transceiver. The UHF DME frequency is tuned by pairing with a
VHF NAV frequency. DME frequency pairing is automatic and only the VHF NAV frequency is shown.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
The DME Tuning Window is located to the right of the HSI in the lower right corner of the PFD. The DME
transceiver is tuned by selecting NAV1, NAV2, or HOLD in the DME Tuning Window. Pressing the DME
Softkey switches the DME Tuning Window on and off.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
DME
Modes
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Figure 4-29 DME Tuning Window
The following DME transceiver pairings can be selected:
• NAV1 – Pairs the DME frequency from the selected NAV1 frequency.
• NAV2 – Pairs the DME frequency from the selected NAV2 frequency.
AFCS
• HOLD – When in the HOLD position, the DME frequency remains paired with the last selected NAV
frequency.
Selecting DME transceiver pairing:
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
1) Press the DME Softkey to display the DME Tuning Window.
2) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the DME tuning mode.
3) Press the ENT Key to complete the selection.
APPENDICES
Pressing the CLR Key or FMS Knob while in the process of DME pairing cancels the tuning entry and reverts
back to the previously selected DME tuning state. Pressing the FMS Knob activates/deactivates the cursor in
the DME Tuning Window.
INDEX
See the Flight Instruments Section for displaying the DME information window.
120
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58
190-00629-04 Rev. A
AUDIO PANEL AND CNS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
4.4 GTX 33 ES MODE S TRANSPONDER
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The GTX 33 Mode S Transponder provides Mode A, Mode C, and Mode S interrogation and reply capabilities.
Selective addressing or Mode Select (Mode S) capability includes the following features:
• Level-2 reply data link capability (used to exchange information between aircraft and ATC facilities)
• Surveillance identifier capability
• Flight ID (Flight Identification) reporting – The Mode S Transponder reports aircraft identification as either the
aircraft registration or a unique Flight ID.
EIS
• Altitude reporting
• Airborne status determination
• Transponder capability reporting
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
• Mode S Enhanced Surveillance (EHS) requirements
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
• Acquisition squitter – Acquisition squitter, or short squitter, is the transponder 24-bit identification address.
The transmission is sent periodically, regardless of the presence of interrogations. The purpose of acquisition
squitter is to enable Mode S ground stations and aircraft equipped with a Traffic Avoidance System (TAS) to
recognize the presence of Mode S-equipped aircraft for selective interrogation.
• Extended squitter – The extended squitter is transmitted periodically and contains information such as altitude
(barometric and GPS), GPS position, and aircraft identification. The purpose of extended squitter is to provide
aircraft position and identification to ADS-B Ground-Based Transceivers (GBTs) and other aircraft.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
The Hazard Avoidance Section provides more details on traffic avoidance systems.
TRANSPONDER CONTROLS
AFCS
Transponder function is displayed on three levels of softkeys on the PFD: Top-level, Mode Selection, and
Code Selection. When the top-level XPDR Softkey is pressed, the Mode Selection softkeys appear: STBY, ON,
ALT, VFR, CODE, IDENT, ADS-B TX, BACK.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
When the CODE Softkey is pressed, the number softkeys appear: 0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, IDENT, BKSP,
BACK. The digits 8 and 9 are not used for code entry. Pressing the numbered softkeys in sequence enters the
transponder code. If an error is made, the code selection cursor can be moved back to the left one digit with
each press of the BKSP Softkey.
Pressing the BACK Softkey during code selection reverts to the Mode Selection Softkeys. Pressing the BACK
Softkey during mode selection reverts to the top-level softkeys.
APPENDICES
The code can also be entered with the FMS Knob on the PFD. Code entry must be completed with either the
softkeys or the FMS Knob, but not a combination of both.
Pressing the IDENT Softkey while in Mode or Code Selection initiates the ident function and reverts to the
top-level softkeys.
After 45 seconds of transponder softkey inactivity, the system reverts back to the top-level softkeys.
INDEX
190-00629-04 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58
121
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
AUDIO PANEL AND CNS
STBY
ON
ALT
VFR
XPDR
IDENT
CODE
IDENT
ADS-B TX
BACK
ALERTS
EIS
Pressing the BACK Softkey
returns to the top-level softkeys.
1
2
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
0
3
4
5
6
7
IDENT
BKSP
BACK
ALERTS
Pressing the BACK Softkey returns to the mode selection softkeys.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Figure 4-30 Transponder Softkeys (PFD)
TRANSPONDER MODE SELECTION
Mode selection can be automatic (Ground and Altitude Modes) or manual (Standby, ON, and Altitude Modes).
The STBY, ON, and ALT Softkeys can be accessed by pressing the XPDR Softkey.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Selecting a transponder mode:
1) Press the XPDR Softkey to display the Transponder Mode Selection Softkeys.
2) Press the desired softkey to activate the transponder mode.
AFCS
STANDBY MODE (MANUAL)
NOTE: In Standby Mode, the IDENT function is inoperative.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Standby Mode can be selected at any time by pressing the STBY Softkey. In Standby, the transponder
is powered and new codes can be entered, but no replies or squitters are transmitted.. When Standby is
selected, a white STBY indication and transponder code appear in the mode field of the Transponder Data
Box.
APPENDICES
STBY Mode (White
Code Number and
Mode)
INDEX
Figure 4-31 Standby Mode
122
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58
190-00629-04 Rev. A
AUDIO PANEL AND CNS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
MANUAL ON MODE
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
On Mode can be selected at any time by pressing the ON Softkey. An On indication will appear in the
mode field of the Transponder Data Box. Selecting On mode enables transmission of transponder replies and
squitters, but transmissions will not include altitude information. The On indication and transponder code
in the Transponder Data Box will appear green while airborne and white while on the ground. When the
transponder is operating with an air state of on-ground it will disable replies to Mode A, Mode C, and Mode
S all-call interrogations.
On Ground On Mode
(No Altitude Reporting)
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Airborne On Mode
(No Altitude Reporting)
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Figure 4-32 ON Mode
ALTITUDE MODE (AUTOMATIC OR MANUAL)
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
ALT Mode can be selected at any time by pressing the ALT Softkey. When ALT mode is selected,
an ALT indication will appear in the mode field of the Transponder Data Box. Selecting ALT mode enables
transmission of transponder replies and squitters (Including ADS-B out). Transmissions will include pressure
altitude information. The ALT indication and transponder code in the Transponder Data Box will appear
green while airborne and white while on the ground. When the transponder is operating with an air state of
on-ground it will disable replies to Mode A, Mode C, and Mode S all-call interrogations.
On Ground ALT Mode
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Airborne ALT Mode
APPENDICES
Figure 4-33 Altitude Mode
INDEX
190-00629-04 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58
123
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
AUDIO PANEL AND CNS
REPLY STATUS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
When the transponder sends replies to interrogations, a white R indication appears momentarily in the
reply status field of the Transponder Data Box.
Reply to
Interrogation
EIS
Figure 4-34 Reply Indication
ADS-B TX MODE
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
The transmission of the ADS-B information is enabled/disabled by pressing the ADS-B TX Softkey. ADS-B
transmission defaults to enabled at each power cycle.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
ADS-B Transmission
Enabled
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Figure 4-35 Altitude Mode
124
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58
190-00629-04 Rev. A
AUDIO PANEL AND CNS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
ENTERING A TRANSPONDER CODE
Entering a transponder code with softkeys:
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
1) Press the XPDR Softkey to display the Transponder Mode Selection Softkeys.
2) Press the CODE Softkey to display the Transponder Code Selection Softkeys, for digit entry.
3) Press the digit softkeys to enter the code in the code field. When entering the code, the next softkey in sequence
must be pressed within 10 seconds, or the entry is cancelled and restored to the previous code. Pressing the
BKSP Softkey moves the code selection cursor to the previous digit. Five seconds after the fourth digit has been
entered, the transponder code becomes active.
EIS
Entering
a Code
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Figure 4-36 Entering a Code
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Entering a transponder code with the PFD FMS Knob:
1) Press the XPDR and the CODE Softkeys as in the previous procedure to enable code entry.
2) Turn the small FMS Knob on the PFD to enter the first two code digits.
3) Turn the large FMS Knob to move the cursor to the next code field.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
4) Enter the last two code digits with the small FMS Knob.
5) Press the ENT Key to complete code digit entry.
Pressing the CLR Key or small FMS Knob before code entry is complete cancels code entry and restores the
previous code. Waiting for 10 seconds after code entry is finished activates the code automatically.
AFCS
Turn the Large
FMS Knob
to Move the
Cursor to the
Next Code Field
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Turn the Small
FMS Knob to
Enter Two Code
Digits at a Time
Press the
ENT Key to
Complete
Code Entry
Figure 4-37 Entering a Code with the FMS Knob
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-00629-04 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58
125
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
AUDIO PANEL AND CNS
VFR CODE
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The VFR code can be entered either manually or by pressing the XPDR Softkey, then the VFR Softkey.
When the VFR Softkey is pressed, the pre-programmed VFR code is automatically displayed in the code field
of the Transponder Data Box. Pressing the VFR Softkey again restores the previous identification code.
The pre-programmed VFR Code is set at the factory to 1200. If a VFR code change is required, contact a
Garmin-authorized service center for configuration.
EIS
VFR Code
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
IDENT FUNCTION
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Figure 4-38 VFR Code
Pressing the IDENT Softkey sends a distinct identity indication to Air Traffic Control (ATC). The indication
distinguishes the identing transponder from all the others on the air traffic controller’s screen. The IDENT
Softkey appears on all levels of transponder softkeys. When the IDENT Softkey is pressed, a green IDNT
indication is displayed in the mode field of the Transponder Data Box for a duration of 18 seconds.
NOTE: In Standby Mode, the IDENT Softkey is inoperative.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
After the IDENT Softkey is pressed while in Mode or Code Selection, the system reverts to the top-level
softkeys.
IDNT
Indication
AFCS
Press the
IDENT Softkey
to Initiate the
ID Function
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Figure 4-39 IDENT Softkey and Indication
126
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58
190-00629-04 Rev. A
AUDIO PANEL AND CNS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT ID REPORTING
NOTE: If the Flight ID is required but the system is not configured for it, contact a Garmin-authorized service
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
center for configuration.
When the Flight ID must be entered before flight operation, the identifier is placed in the Timer/References
Window on the PFD. The Flight ID is not to exceed seven characters. No space is needed when entering
Flight ID. When a Flight ID contains a space, the system automatically removes it upon completion of Flight
ID entry.
EIS
Entering a Flight ID:
1) Press the TMR/REF Softkey to display the Timer/References Window.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
2) Press the FMS Knob to activate the selection cursor, if not already activated.
3) Turn the large FMS Knob to scroll down to the Flight ID.
4) Turn the small FMS Knob to enter the desired Flight ID.
5) Press the ENT Key to complete Flight ID entry.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
If an error is made during Flight ID entry, pressing the CLR Key returns to the original Flight ID entry. While
entering a Flight ID, turning the FMS Knob counterclockwise moves the cursor back one space for each detent
of rotation. If an incorrect Flight ID is discovered after the unit begins operation, reenter the correct Flight ID
using the same procedure.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
Flight ID
PFD Entry
Figure 4-40 Timer/References Window, Entering Flight ID
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-00629-04 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58
127
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
AUDIO PANEL AND CNS
4.5 ADDITIONAL AUDIO PANEL FUNCTIONS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
POWER-UP
The Audio Panel performs a self-test during power-up. During the self-test all Audio Panel annunciator lights
illuminate for approximately two seconds. Once the self-test is completed, most of the settings are restored to
those in use before the unit was last turned off.
MONO/STEREO HEADSETS
EIS
Stereo headsets are recommended for use in this aircraft.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Using a monaural headset in a stereo jack shorts the right headset channel output to ground. While this does
not damage the Audio Panel, a person listening on a monaural headset hears only the left channel in both ears.
If a monaural headset is used at one of the passenger positions, any other passenger using a stereo headset hears
audio in the left ear only.
SPEAKER
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
All of the radios can be heard over the cabin speaker. Pressing the SPKR Key selects and deselects the cabin
speaker. Speaker audio is muted when the PTT is pressed. Certain aural alerts and warnings (autopilot, traffic,
altitude) are always heard on the speaker, even when the speaker is not selected.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
The speaker volume is adjustable within a nominal range. Contact a Garmin-authorized service center for
volume adjustment.
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
Figure 4-41 Passenger Address and Speaker Keys
128
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58
190-00629-04 Rev. A
AUDIO PANEL AND CNS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
INTERCOM
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The Audio Panel includes a six-position intercom system (ICS) and two stereo music inputs for the pilot,
copilot and up to four passengers. The intercom provides Pilot and Copilot isolation from the passengers and
aircraft radios.
COPLT KEY
Annunciator
Pilot Hears
Passenger Hears
Selected radios, aural
alerts, pilot, copilot,
passengers, MUSIC
INPUT #1
Selected radios, aural alerts,
pilot, copilot, passengers,
MUSIC INPUT #2
Copilot, passengers,
MUSIC INPUT #1
Copilot, passengers,
MUSIC INPUT #2
OFF
ON
OFF
Selected radios, aural
alerts, pilot
OFF
ON
Selected radios, aural
alerts, pilot; passengers, Copilot
MUSIC INPUT #1
Selected radios, aural alerts,
pilot, passengers,
MUSIC INPUT #2
ON
ON
Selected radios, aural
alerts, pilot, copilot
Passengers;
MUSIC INPUT #2
Selected radios, aural
alerts, pilot, copilot
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
OFF
Selected radios, aural
alerts, pilot, copilot,
passengers, MUSIC
INPUT #1
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Copilot Hears
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
PILOT KEY
Annunciator
EIS
Figure 4-42 Intercom Controls
AFCS
Table 4-1 ICS Isolation Modes
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Pilot isolation is selected when the PILOT Annunciator is illuminated. During Pilot isolation, the pilot can
hear the selected radios and aural alerts and warnings. The copilot and passengers can communicate with each
other. The copilot is isolated from aural alerts and warnings.
Copilot isolation is selected when the COPLT Annunciator is illuminated. The copilot is isolated from the
selected radios, aural alerts and warnings, and everyone else. The pilot and passengers can hear the selected
radios, aural alerts, and communicate with each other.
APPENDICES
When both the PILOT and COPLT Annunciators are illuminated, the pilot and copilot can hear the selected
radios, aural alerts, and communicate with each other. The passengers are isolated from the pilot and copilot
but can communicate with each other.
When both the PILOT and COPLT Annunciators are extinguished, everyone hears the selected radios, aural
alerts, and is able to communicate with everyone else.
INDEX
190-00629-04 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58
129
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
AUDIO PANEL AND CNS
INTERCOM VOLUME AND SQUELCH
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The PILOT/PASS Knob controls volume or manual squelch adjustment for the pilot and copilot/passenger.
The small knob controls the pilot volume and squelch. The large knob controls the copilot/passenger volume
and squelch. The VOL and SQ annunciations at the bottom of the unit indicate which function the knob is
controlling. Pressing the PILOT/PASS Knob switches between volume and squelch control as indicated by
the VOL or SQ annunciation being illuminated.
The MAN SQ Key allows either automatic or manual control of the squelch setting.
EIS
• When the MAN SQ Annunciator is extinguished (Automatic Squelch is on), the PILOT/PASS Knob
controls only the volume (pressing the PILOT/PASS Knob has no effect on the VOL/SQ selection).
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
• When the MAN SQ Annunciator is illuminated (Manual Squelch), the PILOT/PASS Knob controls
either volume or squelch (selected by pressing the PILOT/PASS Knob and indicated by the VOL or SQ
annunciation).
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Manual Squelch Annunciator;
Off for Automatic Squelch, On
for Manual Squelch
Automatic/Manual Squelch
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Pilot Volume or Manual
Squelch. Press to switch
between VOL and SQ. Turn
to adjust Squelch when SQ
Annunciation is lit, Volume
when VOL Annunciation is lit.
Copilot/Passenger
Volume or
Manual Squelch
AFCS
Volume Annunciation
Squelch Annunciation
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Figure 4-43 Volume/Squelch Control
130
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58
190-00629-04 Rev. A
AUDIO PANEL AND CNS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
CLEARANCE RECORDER AND PLAYER
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The Audio Panel contains a digital clearance recorder that records up to 2.5 minutes of the selected COM
radio signal. Recorded COM audio is stored in separate memory blocks. Once 2.5 minutes of recording time
have been reached, the recorder begins recording over the stored memory blocks, starting from the oldest
block.
The PLAY Key controls the play function. Pressing the PLAY Key once plays the latest recorded memory
block. The PLAY Annunciator flashes to indicate when play is in progress. The PLAY Annunciator turns off
after the present memory block has finished playing.
EIS
Pressing the MKR/MUTE Key during play of a memory block stops play. If a COM input signal is detected
during play of a recorded memory block, play is halted.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Pressing the PLAY Key while audio is playing begins playing the previously recorded memory block. Each
subsequent press of the PLAY Key selects the previously recorded memory block.
Powering off the unit automatically clears all recorded blocks.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
MKR/MUTE
Key Stops Play
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
PLAY Key
Controls the
Play Function
Figure 4-44 Marker Mute and Play Keys
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-00629-04 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58
131
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
AUDIO PANEL AND CNS
SPLIT COM
NOTE: Split COM performance is affected by the distance between the COM antennas and the separation
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
of the tuned frequencies. If the selected COM1 and COM2 frequencies are too close together, interference
may be heard during transmission on the other radio.
During Split COM operation, both the pilot and the copilot can transmit simultaneously over separate radios.
The pilot can still monitor NAV1, NAV2, ADF, DME, and MKR Audio as selected, but the copilot is only able
to monitor COM2.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
Pressing the COM 1/2 Key selects Split COM operation. The COM 1/2 Annunciator is illuminated indicating
Split COM operation. COM1 and COM2 frequencies are displayed in green indicating that both transceivers
are active. Split COM operation is cancelled by pressing the COM 1/2 Key again, at which time the annunciator
is extinguished.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
When Split COM operation is selected, COM1 is used by the pilot and COM2 is used by the copilot. The
COM1 MIC Annunciator flashes when the pilot’s microphone PTT is pressed. The COM2 MIC Annunciator
flashes when the copilot’s microphone PTT is pressed.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
COM1 Radio is Used
by the Pilot
AFCS
COM2 Radio is Used
by the Copilot
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Figure 4-45 Split COM Operation
132
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58
190-00629-04 Rev. A
AUDIO PANEL AND CNS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
ENTERTAINMENT INPUTS
MUSIC INPUT #1 and MUSIC INPUT #2 cannot be completely turned off. Audio level for
MUSIC INPUT #1 and MUSIC INPUT #2 can be adjusted by a Garmin-authorized service center.
NOTE:
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The Audio Panel provides two stereo auxiliary entertainment inputs: MUSIC INPUT #1 and MUSIC INPUT #2.
These inputs are compatible with popular portable entertainment devices such as MP3 and CD players. Two
3.5-mm stereo phone jacks are installed in convenient locations for audio connection. The headphone outputs
of the entertainment devices are plugged into the MUSIC INPUT #1 or MUSIC INPUT #2 jacks.
EIS
The current ICS state of isolation affects the distribution of the entertainment input MUSIC INPUT #1 (see
Table 4‑1).
MUSIC INPUT #1
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
MUSIC INPUT #1 can be heard by the pilot and copilot when both the PILOT and the COPLT Annunciators
are extinguished. MUSIC INPUT #1 can also be heard by the pilot when the COPLT Annunciator is illuminated
and by the copilot when the PILOT Annunciator is illuminated.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
MUSIC INPUT #1 Muting
MUSIC INPUT #1 muting occurs when aircraft radio or marker beacon activity is heard. MUSIC
INPUT #1 is always soft muted when an interruption occurs from these sources. Soft muting is the gradual
return of MUSIC INPUT #1 to its original volume level. The time required for MUSIC INPUT #1 volume
to return to normal is between one-half and four seconds.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
MUSIC INPUT #1 Muting Enable/Disable
AFCS
Pressing and holding the MKR/MUTE Key for three seconds switches MUSIC INPUT #1 muting on and
off. When switching, either one or two beeps are heard; one beep indicates that music muting is enabled,
two beeps indicate music muting is disabled. MUSIC INPUT #1 muting is reset (enabled) during power
up.
MUSIC INPUT #2
MUSIC INPUT #2 can be heard only by the passengers and is never muted.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
XM RADIO ENTERTAINMENT
APPENDICES
XM Radio audio from the Data Link Receiver may be heard by the pilot and passengers simultaneously
(optional: requires subscription to XM Radio Service). Refer to the Additional Features Section for more
details on the Data Link Receiver.
Connecting a stereo input to either MUSIC INPUT #1 or MUSIC INPUT #2 jacks removes the XM Radio
Audio from that input. For example, if passengers prefer their own music while the pilot listens to the XM
Radio, the entertainment audio should be connected to the MUSIC INPUT #2 jack.
INDEX
190-00629-04 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58
133
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
AUDIO PANEL AND CNS
4.6 AUDIO PANEL PREFLIGHT PROCEDURE
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
NOTE: If the pilot and/or copilot are using headsets that have a high/low switch or volume control knob,
verify that the switch is in the high position and the volume control on the headsets are at maximum volume
setting. On single‑pilot flights, verify that all other headsets are not connected to avoid excess noise in the
audio system.
NOTE: When the MAN SQ Key is pressed, the ICS squelch can be set manually by the pilot and copilot. If
EIS
manual squelch is set to full open (SQ annunciated and the knobs turned counterclockwise) background
noise is heard in the ICS system as well as during COM transmissions.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
After powering up the G1000 System, the following steps aid in maximizing the use of the Audio Panel as well
as prevent pilot and copilot induced issues. These preflight procedures should be performed each time a pilot
boards the aircraft to insure awareness of all audio levels in the Audio Panel and radios.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Automatic/Manual
Squelch
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Pilot and
Copilot ICS
Isolation Keys
Pilot Volume
or Manual
Squelch
Copilot/Passenger
Volume or
Manual Squelch
Squelch
Annunciation
AFCS
Volume
Annunciation
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Figure 4-46 Audio Panel Controls
Setting the Audio Panel during preflight:
1) Verify that the PILOT and COPLT Annunciators are extinguished.
APPENDICES
2) Verify manual squelch is set to full open.
3) Turn the PILOT/PASS Knobs clockwise two full turns. This sets the intercom level to max volume (least amount
of attenuation).
4) Adjust radio volume levels (COM, NAV) to a suitable level.
5) Adjust the PILOT/PASS Knob volume to the desired intercom level.
INDEX
6) Reset squelch to automatic, or adjust to the appropriate level manually.
Once this procedure has been completed, the pilot and copilot can change settings, keeping in mind the notes
above.
134
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58
190-00629-04 Rev. A
AUDIO PANEL AND CNS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
4.7 ABNORMAL OPERATION
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Abnormal operation of the G1000 includes equipment failures of the G1000 components and failure of
associated equipment, including switches and external devices.
STUCK MICROPHONE
If the push-to-talk (PTT) Key becomes stuck, the COM transmitter stops transmitting after 35 seconds of
continuous operation. An alert appears on the PFD to advise the pilot of a stuck microphone.
EIS
The COM1 MIC or COM2 MIC Key Annunciator on the Audio Panel flashes as long as the PTT Key remains
stuck.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Figure 4-47 Stuck Microphone Alert
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
COM TUNING FAILURE
In case of a COM system tuning failure, the emergency frequency (121.500 MHz) is automatically tuned in
the radio in which the tuning failure occurred. Depending on the failure mode, a red X may appear on the
frequency display.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Emergency Channel
Loaded Automatically
Figure 4-48 COM Tuning Failure
AFCS
AUDIO PANEL FAIL-SAFE OPERATION
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
If there is a failure of the Audio Panel, a fail-safe circuit connects the pilot’s headset and microphone directly
to the COM1 transceiver. Audio is not available on the speaker during Fail-safe operation.
REVERSIONARY MODE
APPENDICES
The red DISPLAY BACKUP Button selects the Reversionary Mode. See the System Overview Section for
more information on Reversionary Mode.
INDEX
Figure 4-49 Display Backup Button
190-00629-04 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58
135
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
AUDIO PANEL AND CNS
Blank Page
136
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58
190-00629-04 Rev. A
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
SECTION 5 FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
5.1 INTRODUCTION
The G1000 is an integrated flight, engine, communication, navigation and surveillance system. This section of
the Pilot’s Guide explains flight management using the G1000.
EIS
The most prominent part of the G1000 are the two full color displays: a Primary Flight Display (PFD) and a
Multi Function Display (MFD). The information to successfully navigate the aircraft using the GPS sensors is
displayed on the PFD and the MFD. See examples in the Figure 5-1 and Figure 5-2. Detailed descriptions of flight
management functions are discussed later in this section.
A brief description of the flight management data on the PFD and MFD follows.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Navigation mode indicates which sensor is providing the course data (e.g., GPS, VOR) and the flight plan phase
(e.g., Departure (DPRT), Terminal (TERM), Enroute (ENR), Oceanic (OCN), Approach (LNAV, LNAV+V, L/VNAV,
LP, LP+V, LPV), or Missed Approach (MAPR)).
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
The Inset Map is a small version of the MFD Navigation Map and can be displayed in the lower left corner of
the PFD. When the system is in reversionary mode, the Inset Map is displayed in the lower right corner. The
Inset Map is displayed by pressing the INSET Softkey. Selecting the INSET Softkey again, then selecting the OFF
Softkey removes the Inset Map.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
The Navigation Map displays aviation data (e.g., airports, VORs, airways, airspaces), geographic data (e.g.,
cities, lakes, highways, borders), topographic data (map shading indicating elevation), and hazard data (e.g.,
traffic, terrain, weather). The amount of displayed data can be reduced by selecting the DCLTR Softkey. The
Navigation Map can be oriented four different ways: North Up (NORTH UP), Track Up (TRK UP), Desired Track
Up (DTK UP), or Heading Up (HDG UP).
AFCS
An aircraft icon is placed on the Navigation Map at the location corresponding to the calculated present position.
The aircraft position and the flight plan legs are accurately based on GPS calculations. The basemap upon which
these are placed are from a source with less resolution, therefore the relative position of the aircraft to map features
is not exact. The leg of the active flight plan currently being flown is shown as a magenta line on the navigation
map. The other legs are shown in white.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
There are 28 different map ranges available, from 500 feet to 2000 nm. The current range is indicated in the
lower right corner of the map and represents the top-to-bottom distance covered by the map. To change the map
range on any map, turn the Joystick counter-clockwise to zoom in ( -, decreasing), or clockwise to zoom out (+,
increasing).
APPENDICES
The Direct-to Window, the Flight Plan Window, the Procedures Window, and the Nearest Airports Window
can be displayed in the lower right corner of the PFD. Details of these windows are discussed in detail later in
the section.
INDEX
190-00629-04 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58
137
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Navigation Status Box
Navigation Mode
Inset Map
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
Location of:
- Direct To Window
- Flight Plan Window
- Procedures Window
- Nearest Airports Window
Figure 5-1 GPS Navigation Information on the PFD
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Navigation Status Box
Map Orientation
Navigation Page Title
Navigation Map
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
- Aviation Data
- Geographic Data
- Topographic Data
- Hazard Data
Flight Plan Leg
Aircraft Icon
at Present Position
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
Active Flight Plan Leg
Map Range
APPENDICES
Figure 5-2 GPS Navigation Information on the MFD Navigation Page
NAVIGATION STATUS BOX
INDEX
The Navigation Status Box located at the top of the PFD contains two fields displaying the following
information:
PFD Navigation Status Box
138
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58
190-00629-04 Rev. A
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
• Distance (DIS) and Bearing (BRG) to the next
waypoint or flight plan annunciations (e.g., ‘TOD
within 1 minute’)
• Bearing (BRG)
The symbols used in the PFD status bar are:
Symbol
Description
Active Leg
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The Navigation Status Box located at the top of the
MFD contains four data fields, each displaying one of
the following items:
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
• Active flight plan leg (e.g., ‘D-> KICT’ or ‘KIXD ->
KCOS’) or flight plan annunciations (e.g., ‘Turn
right to 021˚ in 8 seconds’)
• Distance (DIS)
• Desired Track (DTK)
• Endurance (END)
• Enroute Safe Altitude (ESA)
EIS
• Estimated Time of Arrival (ETA)
Direct-to
• Estimated Time Enroute (ETE)
Left Procedure Turn
Right Holding Pattern
• Fuel on Board (FOB)
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Right Procedure Turn
• Fuel over Destination (FOD)
• Ground Speed (GS)
• Minimum Safe Altitude (MSA)
• True Air Speed (TAS)
Vector to Final
• Track Angle Error (TKE)
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Left Holding Pattern
• Track (TRK)
Right DME Arc
Left DME Arc
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
• Vertical Speed Required (VSR)
• Crosstrack Error (XTK)
AFCS
MFD Navigation Status Box
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
The navigation information displayed in the four data fields can be selected on the MFD Data Bar Fields Box
on the AUX - System Setup Page. The default selections (in order left to right) are GS, DTK, TRK, and ETE.
Changing a field in the MFD Navigation Status Box:
1) Select the System Setup Page.
2) Press the FMS Knob momentarily to activate the flashing cursor.
APPENDICES
3) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the desired field number in the MFD Data Bar Fields Box.
4) Turn the small FMS Knob to display and scroll through the data options list.
5) Select the desired data.
6) Press the ENT Key. Pressing the DFLTS Softkey returns all fields to the default setting.
INDEX
190-00629-04 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58
139
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
5.2 USING MAP DISPLAYS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Map displays are used extensively in the G1000 to provide situational awareness in flight. Most G1000 maps
can display the following information:
• Airports, NAVAIDs, airspaces, airways, land data
(highways, cities, lakes, rivers, borders, etc.) with
names
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
• Map Pointer information (distance and bearing to
pointer, location of pointer, name, and other pertinent
information)
• Aircraft icon (representing present position)
• Nav range ring
• Fuel range ring
• Flight plan legs
• User waypoints
• Map range
• Track vector
• Wind direction and speed
• Topography scale
• Map orientation
• Topography data
• Icons for enabled map features
• Obstacle data
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
The information in this section applies to the following maps unless otherwise noted:
• All Map Group Pages (MAP)
• Flight Plan Pages (FPL)
• All Waypoint Group Pages (WPT)
• Direct-to Window
• AUX - Trip Planning
• PFD Inset Map
• All Nearest Group Pages (NRST)
• Procedure Loading Pages
MAP ORIENTATION
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
Maps are shown in one of four different orientation options, allowing flexibility in determining aircraft
position relative to other items on the map (north up) or for determining where map items are relative to where
the aircraft is going (track up, desired track up, or heading up). The map orientation is shown in the upper
right corner of the map.
Figure 5-3 Map Orientation
INDEX
• North up (NORTH UP) aligns the top of the map display to north (default setting).
• Track up (TRK UP) aligns the top of the map display to the current ground track.
• Desired track up (DTK UP) aligns the top of the map display to the desired course.
• Heading up (HDG UP) aligns the top of the map display to the current aircraft heading.
140
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58
190-00629-04 Rev. A
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
NOTE: When panning or reviewing active flight plan legs in a non-North Up orientation, the map does not
show the map orientation nor the wind direction and speed.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
NOTE: Map orientation can only be changed on the Navigation Map Page. Any other displays that show
navigation data reflect the orientation selected for the Navigation Map Page.
Changing the Navigation Map orientation:
1) With the Navigation Map Page displayed, press the MENU Key. The cursor flashes on the ‘Map Setup’ option.
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Map Setup
Selection
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Figure 5-4 Navigation Map Page Menu Window
2) Select the ENT Key to display the Map Setup Window.
3) Turn the large FMS Knob, or select the ENT Key once, to select the ‘ORIENTATION’ field.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Map Group Selection
Orientation Field
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
Figure 5-5 Map Setup Menu Window - Map Group
4) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the desired orientation.
5) Select the ENT Key to select the new orientation.
6) Press the FMS Knob to return to the base page.
INDEX
190-00629-04 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58
141
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
MAP RANGE
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
There are 28 different map ranges available, from 500 feet to 2000 nm. The current range is indicated in
the lower right corner of the map and represents the top-to-bottom distance covered by the map. When the
map range is decreased to a point that exceeds the capability of the G1000 to accurately represent the map,
a magnifying glass icon is shown to the left of the map range. To change the map range turn the Joystick
counter-clockwise to decrease the range, or clockwise to increase the range.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
Range Overzoom
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Figure 5-6 Map Range
AUTO ZOOM
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Auto zoom allows the G1000 to change the map display range to the smallest range clearly showing the
active waypoint. Auto zoom can be overridden by adjusting the range with the Joystick, and remains until
the active waypoint changes, a terrain or traffic alert occurs, the aircraft takes off, or the manual override times
out (timer set on Map Setup Window).
AFCS
If a terrain caution or warning occurs, any map page displaying TAWS/TERRAIN data automatically adjusts
to the smallest map range clearly showing the highest priority alert. If a new traffic advisory alert occurs, any
map page capable of displaying traffic advisory alerts automatically adjusts to the smallest map range clearly
showing the traffic advisory. When terrain or traffic alerts clear, the map returns to the previous auto zoom
range based on the active waypoint.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
The auto zoom function can be turned on or off independently for the PFDs and MFD. Control of the
ranges at which the auto zoom occurs is done by setting the minimum and maximum ‘look forward’ times
(set on the Map Setup Window for the Map Group). These settings determines the minimum and maximum
distance to display based upon the aircraft’s ground speed.
APPENDICES
• Waypoints that are long distances apart cause the map range to increase to a point where many details on
the map are decluttered. If this is not acceptable, lower the maximum look ahead time to a value that limits
the auto zoom to an acceptable range.
• Waypoints that are very short distances apart cause the map range to decrease to a point where situational
awareness may not be what is desired. Increase the minimum look ahead time to a value that limits the auto
zoom to a minimum range that provides acceptable situational awareness.
INDEX
• Flight plans that have a combination of long and short legs cause the range to increase and decrease as
waypoints sequence. To avoid this, auto zoom can be disabled or the maximum/minimum times can be
adjusted.
142
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58
190-00629-04 Rev. A
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
• The ‘time out’ time (configurable on the Map Setup Page for the Map Group) determines how long auto
zoom is overridden by a manual adjustment of the range knob. At the expiration of this time, the auto
zoom range is restored. Setting the ‘time out’ value to zero causes the manual override to never time out.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
• When the maximum ‘look forward’ time is set to zero, the upper limit becomes the maximum range available
(2000 nm).
• When the minimum ‘look forward’ time is set to zero, the lower limit becomes 1.5 nm.
Manual Range Override
Expiration Time
EIS
Auto Zoom:
Off, MFD Only, PFD Only, All On
Maximum Look Forward Time
Minimum Look Forward Time
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Figure 5-7 Map Setup Menu Window - Map Group, Auto Zoom
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Configuring automatic zoom:
1) Press the MENU Key with the Navigation Map Page displayed. The cursor flashes on the ‘Map Setup’ option.
2) Press the ENT Key. The Map Setup Menu is displayed.
3) Select the ‘Map’ group.
AFCS
4) Press the ENT Key.
5) Highlight the ‘AUTO ZOOM’ field.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
6) Select ‘Off’, ‘MFD Only’, ‘PFD Only’, or ‘ALL On’.
7) Press the ENT Key to accept the selected option. The flashing cursor highlights the ‘MAX LOOK FWD’ field.
Times are from zero to 999 minutes.
8) Use the FMS Knobs to set the time. Press the ENT Key.
APPENDICES
9) Repeat step 8 for ‘MIN LOOK FWD’ (zero to 99 minutes) and ‘TIME OUT’ (zero to 99 minutes).
10) Press the FMS Knob to return to the Navigation Map Page.
INDEX
190-00629-04 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58
143
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
MAP PANNING
Map panning allows the pilot to:
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
• View parts of the map outside the displayed range without adjusting the map range
• Highlight and select locations on the map
• Review information for a selected airport, NAVAID or user waypoint
• Designate locations for use in flight planning
• View airspace and airway information
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
When the panning function is selected by pressing the Joystick, the Map Pointer flashes on the map display.
A window also appears at the top of the map display showing the latitude/longitude position of the pointer,
the bearing and distance to the pointer from the aircraft’s present position, and the elevation of the land at the
position of the pointer.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Map Pointer Information
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Map Pointer
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Figure 5-8 Navigation Map - Map Pointer Activated
NOTE: The map is normally centered on the aircraft’s position. If the map has been panned and there has
INDEX
APPENDICES
been no pointer movement for about 60 seconds, the map reverts back to centered on the aircraft position
and the flashing pointer is removed.
144
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58
190-00629-04 Rev. A
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
When the Map Pointer is placed on an object, the name of the object is highlighted (even if the name was
not originally displayed on the map). When any map feature or object is selected on the map display, pertinent
information is displayed.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Information about Point
of Interest
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Map Pointer on
POI
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Figure 5-9 Navigation Map - Map Pointer on Point of Interest
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-00629-04 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58
145
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
When the Map Pointer crosses an airspace boundary, the boundary is highlighted and airspace information
is shown at the top of the display. The information includes the name and class of airspace, the ceiling in feet
above Mean Sea Level (MSL), and the floor in feet MSL.
EIS
Information about
Airspace
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Map Pointer on
Airspace
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Figure 5-10 Navigation Map - Map Pointer on Airspace
Panning the map:
1) Press the Joystick to display the Map Pointer.
2) Move the Joystick to move the Map Pointer around the map.
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
3) Press the Joystick to remove the Map Pointer and recenter the map on the aircraft’s current position.
146
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58
190-00629-04 Rev. A
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Reviewing information for an airport, NAVAID, or user waypoint:
1) Place the Map Pointer on a waypoint.
2) Press the ENT Key to display the Waypoint Information Page for the selected waypoint.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
3) Press the GO BACK Softkey, the CLR Key, or the ENT Key to exit the Waypoint Information Page and return to
the Navigation Map showing the selected waypoint.
EIS
NAVAID
Information
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
GO BACK Softkey
Figure 5-11 Navigation Map - Information Window - NAVAID
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-00629-04 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58
147
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
Viewing airspace information for a special-use or controlled airspace:
1) Place the Map Pointer on an open area within the boundaries of an airspace.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
2) Press the ENT Key to display an options menu.
3) ‘Review Airspaces’ should already be highlighted, if not select it. Press the ENT Key to display the Airspace
Information Page for the selected airspace.
EIS
4) Press the CLR or ENT Key to exit the Airspace Information Page.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Airspace
Information
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
Figure 5-12 Navigation Map - Information Window - Airspace
148
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58
190-00629-04 Rev. A
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
MEASURING BEARING AND DISTANCE
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Distance and bearing from the aircraft’s present position to any point on the viewable navigation map may be
calculated using the ‘Measure Bearing and Distance’ selection from Navigation Map page menu. The bearing
and distance tool displays a dashed Measurement Line and a Measure Pointer to aid in graphically identifying
points with which to measure. Lat/Long, distance and elevation data for the Measure Pointer is provided in a
window at the top of the navigation map.
Measuring bearing and distance between any two points:
1) Press the MENU Key (with the Navigation Map Page displayed).
EIS
2) Highlight the ‘Measure Bearing/Distance’ field.
3) Press the ENT Key. A Measure Pointer is displayed on the map at the aircraft’s present position.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
4) Move the Joystick to place the reference pointer at the desired location. The bearing and distance are displayed
at the top of the map. Elevation at the current pointer position is also displayed. Pressing the ENT Key changes
the starting point for measuring.
Measurement
Information
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
5) To exit the Measure Bearing/Distance option, press the Joystick; or select ‘Stop Measuring’ from the Page
Menu and press the ENT Key.
Pointer Lat/Long
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Measurement Line
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
Figure 5-13 Navigation Map - Measuring Bearing and Distance
INDEX
190-00629-04 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58
149
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
TOPOGRAPHY
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
All navigation maps can display various shades of topography colors representing land elevation, similar
to aviation sectional charts. Topographic data can be displayed or removed as described in the following
procedures. Topographic data can also be displayed on the selectable profile map at the bottom of the navigation
map
Displaying/removing Profile View
1) From the Navigation Map Page, press the MAP Softkey.
EIS
2) Press the PROFILE Softkey to enable or disable Profile View.
Or:
1) Press the MENU Key.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
2) Select ‘Show Profile View’ or ‘Hide Profile View’ and press the ENT Key.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Navigation Map
Black Background
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Navigation Map
Topographic Data
TOPO Softkey
Not Enabled
TOPO Softkey
Enabled
TOPO Off
TOPO On
AFCS
Figure 5-14 Navigation Map - Topographic Data
Displaying/removing topographic data on all pages displaying navigation maps:
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
1) Press the MAP Softkey (the INSET Softkey for the PFD Inset Map).
2) Press the TOPO Softkey.
APPENDICES
3) Press the TOPO Softkey again to remove topographic data from the Navigation Map. When topographic data
is removed from the page, all navigation data is presented on a black background.
Displaying/removing topographic data (TOPO DATA) using the Navigation Map Page Menu:
1) Press the MENU Key with the Navigation Map Page displayed. The cursor flashes on the ‘Map Setup’ option.
2) Press the ENT Key. The Map Setup Menu is displayed.
INDEX
3) Select the ‘Map’ group.
4) Press the ENT Key.
150
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58
190-00629-04 Rev. A
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
5) Highlight the ‘TOPO DATA’ field.
6) Select ‘On’ or ‘Off’.
7) Press the FMS Knob to return to the Navigation Map Page.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
EIS
TOPO DATA
Range
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
TOPO DATA
On/Off
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Figure 5-15 Navigation Map Setup Menu - TOPO DATA Setup
The topographic data range is the maximum map range on which topographic data is displayed.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
NOTE: Since the PFD Inset Map is much smaller than the MFD navigation maps, items are removed on the
PFD Inset Map two range levels smaller than the range selected in the Map Setup pages (e.g., a setting
of 100 nm removes the item at ranges above 100 nm on MFD navigation maps, while the PFD Inset Map
removes the same item at 50 nm).
AFCS
Selecting a topographical data range (TOPO DATA):
1) Press the MENU Key with the Navigation Map Page displayed. The cursor flashes on the ‘Map Setup’ option.
2) Press the ENT Key. The Map Setup Menu is displayed.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
3) Select the ‘Map’ group.
4) Press the ENT Key.
5) Highlight the ‘TOPO DATA’ range field. TOPO ranges are from 500 ft to 2000 nm.
APPENDICES
6) To change the TOPO range setting, turn the small FMS Knob to display the range list.
7) Select the desired range using the small FMS Knob.
8) Press the ENT Key.
9) Press the FMS Knob to return to the Navigation Map Page.
190-00629-04 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58
INDEX
In addition, the Navigation Map can display a topographic scale (located in the lower right hand side of the
map) showing a scale of the terrain elevation and current elevation values.
151
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
Maximum Displayed Elevation
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Minimum Displayed Elevation
Aircraft Altitude (MSL)
Range of
Displayed
Elevations
EIS
Ground Elevation at Map Pointer
Location (only visible when Map
Pointer is displayed)
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Figure 5-16 Navigation Map - TOPO SCALE
Displaying/removing the topographic scale (TOPO SCALE):
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
1) Press the MENU Key with the Navigation Map Page displayed. The cursor flashes on the ‘Map Setup’ option.
2) Press the ENT Key. The Map Setup Menu is displayed.
3) Select the ‘Map’ group and select the ENT Key.
4) Highlight the ‘TOPO SCALE’ field.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
5) Select ‘On’ or ‘Off’.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
6) Press the FMS Knob to return to the Navigation Map Page.
APPENDICES
TOPO SCALE
On/Off
INDEX
Figure 5-17 Navigation Map Setup Menu - TOPO SCALE Setup
152
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58
190-00629-04 Rev. A
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
MAP SYMBOLS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
This section discusses the types of land and aviation symbols that can be displayed. Each listed type of symbol
can be turned on or off, and the maximum range to display each symbol can be set. The decluttering of the
symbols from the map using the DCLTR Softkey is also discussed.
LAND SYMBOLS
The following items are configured on the land menu:
Land Symbols
Symbol
Default
Maximum
Range (nm) Range (nm)
EIS
(Text label size can be None, Small, Medium (Med), or Large
(Lrg))
Latitude/Longitude (LAT/LON)
Off
2000
Interstate Highway (FREEWAY)
300
800
International Highway (FREEWAY)
300
800
US Highway (NATIONAL HWY)
30
80
State Highway (LOCAL HWY)
15
30
8
15
Railroads (RAILROAD)
15
30
LARGE CITY (> 200,000)
800
1500
MEDIUM CITY (> 50,000)
100
200
SMALL CITY (> 5,000)
States and Provinces (STATE/PROV)
20
800
50
1500
Rivers and Lakes (RIVER/LAKE)
200
500
USER WAYPOINT
150
300
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
N/A
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Local Road (LOCAL ROAD)
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Highways and Roads
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
Table 5-1 Land Symbol Information
INDEX
190-00629-04 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58
153
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
AVIATION SYMBOLS
The following items are configured on the aviation menu:
Aviation Symbols
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
(Text label size can be None, Small, Medium (Med),
or Large (Lrg))
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Default
Maximum
Range (nm) Range (nm)
Active Flight Plan Leg (ACTIVE FPL)
2000
2000
Non-active Flight Plan Leg (ACTIVE FPL)
2000
2000
2000
250
150
50
3
Off
15
2000
500
300
100
20
100
30
Non-directional Beacon (NDB WAYPOINT)
15
30
VOR (VOR WAYPOINT)
150
300
Class B Airspace/TMA (CLASS B/TMA)
200
500
Class C Airspace/TCA (CLASS C/TCA)
200
500
Class D Airspace (CLASS D)
150
300
Restricted Area (RESTRICTED)
200
500
Military Operations Area [MOA(MILITARY)]
200
500
Other/Air Defense Interdiction Zone (OTHER/ADIZ)
200
500
Temporary Flight Restriction (TFR)
500
2000
Active Flight Plan Waypoint (ACTIVE FPL WPT)
Large Airports (LARGE APT)
Medium Airports (MEDIUM APT)
Small Airports (SMALL APT)
Taxiways (SAFETAXI)
Runway Extension (RWY EXTENSION)
Intersection (INT WAYPOINT)
APPENDICES
Symbol
See Airports, NAVAIDs
See Additional Features
N/A
INDEX
Table 5-2 Aviation Symbol Information
154
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58
190-00629-04 Rev. A
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
SYMBOL SETUP
All pages with maps can display land symbols (roads, lakes, borders, etc). Land symbols can be removed
totally (turned off).
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Displaying/removing all land symbols:
1) Press the MENU Key with the Navigation Map Page displayed. The Page Menu is displayed and the cursor
flashes on the ‘Map Setup’ option.
2) Press the ENT Key. The Map Setup Group Menu is displayed and the cursor flashes on the ‘Map’ option.
EIS
3) Highlight the ‘LAND DATA’ field.
4) Select ‘On’ or ‘Off’.
5) Press the FMS Knob to return to the Navigation Map Page.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
LAND DATA
On/Off
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
Figure 5-18 Navigation Map Setup Menu - LAND DATA Setup
The label size (TEXT) sets the size at which labels appear on the display (none, small, medium, and large).
The range (RNG) sets the maximum range at which items appear on the display.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Selecting a ‘Land’ or ‘Aviation’ group item text size and range:
1) Press the MENU Key with the Navigation Map Page displayed. The cursor flashes on the ‘Map Setup’ option.
2) Press the ENT Key. The Map Setup Menu is displayed.
APPENDICES
3) Select the ‘Land’ or ‘Aviation’ group.
4) Press the ENT Key. The cursor flashes on the first field.
5) Select the desired land option.
6) Select the desired text size.
INDEX
7) Press the ENT Key to accept the selected size.
8) Select the desired range.
190-00629-04 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58
155
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
9) Press the ENT Key to accept the selected range.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
10) Press the FMS Knob to return to the Navigation Map Page.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
Text Label Size
(None, Small, Med, or Lrg)
Maximum Display Range
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Figure 5-19 Navigation Map Setup Menu - LAND GROUP Setup
Maximum Display Range
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
Text Label Size
(None, Small, Med, or Lrg)
APPENDICES
Figure 5-20 Navigation Map Setup Menu - AVIATION GROUP Setup
NOTE: Since the PFD Inset Map is much smaller than the MFD navigation maps, items are removed on the
INDEX
PFD Inset Map two range levels smaller than the range selected in the Map Setup pages (e.g., a setting
of 100 nm removes the item at ranges above 100 nm on MFD navigation maps, while the PFD Inset Map
removes the same item at 50 nm).
156
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58
190-00629-04 Rev. A
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
MAP DECLUTTER
The declutter feature allows the pilot to progressively step through four levels of removing map information.
The declutter level is displayed in the DCLTR Softkey and next to the Declutter Menu Option.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Declutter Level
EIS
DCLTR Softkey
Navigation Map Page Menu
Figure 5-21 Navigation Map - Declutter Level Indications
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Decluttering the map:
Select the DCLTR Softkey with the Navigation Map Page displayed. The current declutter level is shown. With
each softkey selection, another level of map information is removed.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Or:
1) Press the MENU Key with the Navigation Map Page displayed.
2) Select ‘Declutter’. The current declutter level is shown.
3) Press the ENT Key.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Decluttering the PFD Inset Map:
1) Press the INSET Softkey.
2) Select the DCLTR Softkey. The current declutter level is shown. With each selection, another level of map
information is removed.
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-00629-04 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58
157
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
Table 5-3 lists the items displayed at each declutter level. The ‘X’ represents map items displayed for the
various levels of declutter.
Item
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Flight Plan Route Lines
Flight Plan Route Waypoints
Rivers/Lakes
Topography Data
International Borders
Track Vector
Navigation Range Ring
Fuel Range Ring
Terrain Data
Traffic
Airways
NEXRAD
XM Lightning Data
Airports
Runway Labels
Restricted
MOA (Military)
User Waypoints
Latitude/Longitude Grid
NAVAIDs
Class B Airspaces/TMA
Class C Airspaces/TCA
Class D Airspaces
Other Airspaces/ADIZ
TFRs
Obstacles
Land/Country Text
Cities
Roads
Railroads
State/Province Boundaries
River/Lake Names
No Declutter Declutter-1 Declutter-2 Declutter-3
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
INDEX
Table 5-3 Navigation Map Items Displayed by Declutter Level
158
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58
190-00629-04 Rev. A
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
AIRWAYS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
This airways discussion is based upon the North American airway structure. The airway structure in places
other than North America vary by location, etc. and are not discussed in this book. Low Altitude Airways (or
Victor Airways) primarily serve smaller piston-engine, propeller-driven airplanes on shorter routes and at lower
altitudes. Airways are eight nautical miles wide and start 1,200 feet above ground level (AGL) and extend up
to 18,000 feet mean sea level (MSL). Low Altitude Airways are designated with a “V” before the airway number
(hence the name “Victor Airways”) since they run primarily between VORs.
EIS
High Altitude Airways (or Jet Routes) primarily serve airliners, jets, turboprops, and turbocharged piston
aircraft operating above 18,000 feet MSL. Jet Routes start at 18,000 feet MSL and extend upward to 45,000 feet
MSL (altitudes above 18,000 feet are called “flight levels” and are described as FL450 for 45,000 feet MSL). Jet
Routes are designated with a “J” before the route number.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Low Altitude Airways are drawn in gray (the same shade used for roads). High Altitude Airways are drawn
in green. When both types of airways are displayed, High Altitude Airways are drawn on top of Low Altitude
Airways.
When airways are selected for display on the map, the airway waypoints (VORs, NDBs and Intersections) are
also displayed.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Low Altitude
Airway
(Victor Airway)
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
High Altitude
Airway
(Jet Route)
APPENDICES
Figure 5-22 Airways on MFD Navigation Page
INDEX
190-00629-04 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58
159
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
Airways may be displayed on the map at the pilot’s discretion using either a combination of AIRWAYS Softkey
presses, or menu selections using the MENU Key from the Navigation Map Page. The Airway range can also be
programmed to only display Airways on the MFD when the map range is at or below a specific number.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Displaying/removing airways:
1) Select the MAP Softkey.
2) Select the AIRWAYS Softkey. Both High and Low Altitude Airways are displayed (AIRWY ON).
3) Select the softkey again to display Low Altitude Airways only (AIRWY LO).
EIS
4) Select the softkey again to display High Altitude Airways only (AIRWY HI).
5) Select the softkey again to remove High Altitude Airways. No airways are displayed (AIRWAYS).
Or:
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
1) Press the MENU Key with the Navigation Map Page displayed. The cursor flashes on the ‘Map Setup’ option.
2) Press the ENT Key. The Map Setup Menu is displayed.
3) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the ‘Airways’ group, and press the ENT Key.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
4) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the ‘AIRWAYS’ field.
5) Turn the FMS Knob to select ‘Off’, ‘All’, ‘LO Only’, or ‘HI Only’, and press the ENT Key.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
6) Press the FMS Knob to return to the Navigation Map Page.
Airway Display Selection
Off, All, LO Only, HI Only
Low Altitude Airway Range
High Altitude Airway Range
AFCS
Figure 5-23 Navigation Map Setup Menu - AIRWAYS Setup
The airway range is the maximum map range on which airways are displayed.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Selecting an airway range (LOW ALT AIRWAY or HI ALT AIRWAY):
1) Press the MENU Key with the Navigation Map Page displayed. The cursor flashes on the ‘Map Setup’ option.
2) Press the ENT Key. The Map Setup Menu is displayed.
3) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the ‘Airways’ group and press the ENT Key.
APPENDICES
4) Highlight the ‘LOW ALT AIRWAY’ or ‘HI ALT AIRWAY’ range field.
5) To change the range setting, turn the small FMS Knob to display the range list.
6) Select the desired range using the small FMS Knob.
7) Press the ENT Key.
INDEX
8) Press the FMS Knob to return to the Navigation Map Page.
160
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58
190-00629-04 Rev. A
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
The following range items are configurable on the airways menu:
Airway Type
Symbol
Low Altitude Airway (LOW ALT AIRWAY)
High Altitude Airway (HI ALT AIRWAY)
300
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Default
Maximum
Range (nm) Range (nm)
200
500
500
Table 5-4 Airway Range Information
EIS
TRACK VECTOR
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
The Navigation Map can display a track vector that is useful in minimizing track angle error. The track vector
is a solid light blue line segment extended to a predicted location. The track vector look-ahead time is selectable
(30 sec, 60 sec (default), 2 min, 5 min, 10 min, 20 min) and determines the length of the track vector. The track
vector shows up to 90 degrees of a turn for the 30 and 60 second time settings.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Track Vector
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Figure 5-24 Navigation Map -Track Vector
Displaying/removing the track vector:
AFCS
1) Press the MENU Key with the Navigation Map Page displayed. The cursor flashes on the ‘Map Setup’ option.
2) Press the ENT Key. The Map Setup Menu is displayed.
3) Select the ‘Map’ group.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
4) Press the ENT Key.
5) Highlight the ‘TRACK VECTOR’ field.
APPENDICES
6) Select ‘On’ or ‘Off’. Press the ENT Key to accept the selected option. The flashing cursor highlights the look
ahead time field. Use the FMS Knob to select the desired time. Press the ENT Key.
7) Press the FMS Knob to return to the Navigation Map Page.
INDEX
190-00629-04 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58
161
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
Wind Vector On/Off
EIS
Nav Range Ring On/Off
Track Vector
- On/Off
- Look Ahead Time
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Fuel Range
- On/Off
- Fuel Reserve Time
Figure 5-25 Navigation Map Setup Menu -TRACK VECTOR, WIND VECTOR, NAV RANGE RING, FUEL RANGE RING Setup
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
WIND VECTOR
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
The map displays a wind vector arrow in the upper right-hand portion of the screen. Wind vector information
is displayed as a white arrow pointing in the direction in which the wind is moving for wind speeds greater than
or equal to 1 kt.
Wind Direction
Wind Speed
Figure 5-26 Navigation Map - Wind Vector
AFCS
NOTE: The wind vector is not displayed until the aircraft is moving. It is not displayed on the Waypoint
Information pages.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Displaying/removing the wind vector:
1) Press the MENU Key with the Navigation Map Page displayed. The cursor flashes on the ‘Map Setup’ option.
2) Press the ENT Key. The Map Setup Menu is displayed.
3) Select the ‘Map’ group.
APPENDICES
4) Press the ENT Key.
5) Highlight the ‘WIND VECTOR’ field.
6) Select ‘On’ or ‘Off’.
INDEX
7) Press the FMS Knob to return to the Navigation Map Page.
162
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58
190-00629-04 Rev. A
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
NAV RANGE RING
The Nav Range Ring shows the direction of travel (ground track) on a rotating compass card. The range is
determined by the map range. The range is 1/4 of the map range (e.g., 37.5 nm on a 150 nm map).
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Range (radius)
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Nav Range Ring
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Figure 5-27 Navigation Map - Nav Range Ring
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
NOTE: The Nav Range Ring is not displayed on the Waypoint Information pages, Nearest pages, or Direct-to
Window map.
Displaying/removing the Nav Range Ring:
AFCS
1) Press the MENU Key with the Navigation Map Page displayed. The cursor flashes on the ‘Map Setup’ option.
2) Press the ENT Key. The Map Setup Menu is displayed.
3) Select the ‘Map’ group.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
4) Press the ENT Key.
5) Highlight the ‘NAV RANGE RING’ field.
6) Select ‘On’ or ‘Off’.
APPENDICES
7) Press the FMS Knob to return to the Navigation Map Page.
NOTE: The Nav Range Ring is referenced to either magnetic or true north, based on the selection on the AUX
- System Setup Page.
INDEX
190-00629-04 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58
163
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
FUEL RANGE RING
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The map can display a fuel range ring which shows the remaining flight distance. A dashed green circle
indicates the selected range to reserve fuel. A solid green circle indicates the total endurance range. If only
reserve fuel remains, the range is indicated by a solid yellow circle.
Total Endurance Range
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
Time to Reserve Fuel
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Range to Reserve Fuel
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Figure 5-28 Navigation Map - Fuel Range Ring
Displaying/removing the fuel range ring and selecting a fuel range time:
1) Press the MENU Key with the Navigation Map Page displayed. The cursor flashes on the ‘Map Setup’ option.
2) Press the ENT Key. The Map Setup Menu is displayed.
AFCS
3) Select the ‘Map’ group.
4) Press the ENT Key.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
5) Highlight the ‘FUEL RNG (RSV)’ field.
6) Select ‘On’ or ‘Off’.
7) Highlight the fuel reserve time field. This time should be set to the amount of flight time equal to the amount
of fuel reserve desired.
APPENDICES
8) To change the reserve fuel time, enter a time (00:00 to 23:59; hours:minutes). The default setting is 00:45
minutes.
9) Press the ENT Key.
INDEX
10) Press the FMS Knob to return to the Navigation Map Page.
164
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58
190-00629-04 Rev. A
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FIELD OF VIEW (SVS)
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The map can display the boundaries of the PFD Synthetic Vision System (SVS) lateral field of view. The field
of view is shown as two dashed lines forming a V shape in front of the aircraft symbol on the map. This is only
available if SVS is installed on the aircraft.
EIS
Lateral Field
of View
Boundaries
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Figure 5-29 Navigation Map - Field of View
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Displaying/removing the field of view:
1) Press the MENU Key with the Navigation Map Page displayed. The cursor flashes on the ‘Map Setup’ option.
2) Press the ENT Key. The Map Setup Menu is displayed.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
3) Select the ‘Map’ group.
4) Press the ENT Key.
5) Highlight the ‘FIELD OF VIEW’ field.
6) Select ‘On’ or ‘Off’.
AFCS
7) Press the FMS Knob to return to the Navigation Map Page.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-00629-04 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58
165
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SELECTED ALTITUDE INTERCEPT ARC
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The map can display the location along the current track where the aircraft will intercept the selected altitude.
The location will be shown as a light blue arc when the aircraft is actuallly climbing or descending.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
Range to
Altitude Arc
Figure 5-30 Navigation Map - Range to Altitude Arc
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Displaying/removing the selected altitude intercept arc:
1) Press the MENU Key with the Navigation Map Page displayed. The cursor flashes on the ‘Map Setup’ option.
2) Press the ENT Key. The Map Setup Menu is displayed.
3) Select the ‘Map’ group.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
4) Press the ENT Key.
5) Highlight the ‘SEL ALT ARC’ field.
6) Select ‘On’ or ‘Off’.
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
7) Press the FMS Knob to return to the Navigation Map Page.
166
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58
190-00629-04 Rev. A
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
5.3 WAYPOINTS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Waypoints are predetermined geographical positions (internal database) or pilot-entered positions, and are
used for all phases of flight planning and navigation.
Communication and navigation frequencies can be tuned “automatically” from various Waypoint Information
(WPT) pages, Nearest (NRST) pages, and the Nearest Airports Window (on PFD). This auto-tuning feature
simplifies frequency entry over manual tuning. Refer to the Audio Panel and CNS section for details on autotuning.
- Waypoint Identifier
- Type (symbol)
- Facility Name
- City
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
City Entry Field
Facility
Entry Field
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Identifier Entry Field
EIS
Waypoints can be selected by entering the ICAO identifier, entering the name of the facility, or by entering
the city name. See the System Overview section for detailed instructions on entering data in the G1000. As a
waypoint identifier, facility name, or location is entered, the G1000’s Spell’N’Find™ feature scrolls through the
database, displaying those waypoints matching the characters which have been entered to that point. A direct-to
navigation leg to the selected waypoint can be initiated by pressing the Direct-to Key on any of the waypoint
pages.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Entered Waypoint on
Map
Map Area Showing
Entered Waypoint
AFCS
Waypoint Location
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Figure 5-31 Waypoint Information Window
APPENDICES
If duplicate entries exist for the entered facility name or location, additional entries may be viewed by continuing
to turn the small FMS Knob during the selection process. If duplicate entries exist for an identifier, a Duplicate
Waypoints Window is displayed when the ENT Key is pressed.
INDEX
190-00629-04 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58
167
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Identifier with
Duplicates
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
Duplicate
Waypoints
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Duplicate Message
AIRPORTS
Figure 5-32 Waypoint Information Window - Duplicate Identifier
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
NOTE: ‘North Up’ orientation on the Airport Information Page cannot be changed; the pilot needs to be
aware of proper orientation if the Navigation Map orientation is different from the Airport Information Page
Map.
AFCS
The Airport Information Page is the first page in WPT group and allows the pilot to view airport information,
load frequencies (COM, NAV, and lighting), review runways, and review instrument procedures that may be
involved in the flight plan. See the Audio Panel and CNS Section for more information on loading frequencies
(auto-tuning). After engine startup, the Airport Information Page defaults to the airport where the aircraft is
located. After a flight plan has been loaded, it defaults to the destination airport. On a flight plan with multiple
airports, it defaults to the airport which is the current active waypoint.
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
In addition to displaying a map of the currently selected airport and surrounding area, the Airport Information
Page displays airport information in three boxes labeled ‘AIRPORT’, ‘RUNWAYS’, and ‘FREQUENCIES’. For
airports with multiple runways, information for each runway is available. This information is viewed on the
Airport Information Page by pressing the INFO softkey until INFO-1 is displayed.
168
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58
190-00629-04 Rev. A
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Airport Information
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
- ID/Facility/City
- Usage Type/Region
- Lat/Long/Elev
- Fuel Available
- Time Zone (UTC Offset)
Navigation Map
Showing Selected
Airport
Runway Information
- Designation
- Length/Width/Surface
- Lighting Available
EIS
COM/NAV Freq. Info.
Airport/Runway
Diagram
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
- Identification
- Frequency
- Availability
- Additional Information
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Softkeys
Figure 5-33 Airport Information Page
The following descriptions and abbreviations are used on the Airport Information Page:
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
• Usage type: Public, Military, Private, or Heliport
• Runway surface type: Hard, Turf, Sealed, Gravel, Dirt, Soft, Unknown, or Water
• Runway lighting type: No Lights, Part Time, Full Time, Unknown, or PCL Freq (for pilot-controlled
lighting)
• COM Availability: TX (transmit only), RX (receive only), PT (part time), i (additional information available)
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-00629-04 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58
169
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
Airport Directory
Information
Airport Information
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
- ID/Facility/City
- Usage Type/Region
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Softkeys
Figure 5-34 Airport Directory Page Example
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
The AOPA directory information is viewed on the Airport Directory Page by pressing the INFO softkey until
INFO-2 is displayed. The following are types of AOPA airport directory information shown (if available) on
the Airport Directory Page:
• Airport:
Identifier, Site
Number, Name, City, State
• Phones: Phone/Fax Numbers
AFCS
• Hours: Facility Hours, Light
Hours, Tower Hours, Beacon
Hours
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
• Location: Sectional, Magnetic
Variation
• Frequencies: Type/Frequency
• Runway: Headings, Length,
Width, Obstructions, Surface
• Obstructions: General Airport
Obstructions
• Special
Operations
at
Airport
• Instrument
Approaches:
Published
Approach,
Frequency
• NAVAIDS: Type, Identifier,
Frequency, Radial, Distance
• Noise:
Noise Abatement
Procedures
• Charts: Low Altitude Chart
Number
• Services Available: Category,
Specific Service
• Notes: Airport Notes
• Pilot Controlled Lighting:
High/Med/Low Clicks/Second
• FBO:
Type, Frequencies,
Services, Fees, Fuel, Credit
Cards, Phone/Fax Numbers
INDEX
APPENDICES
• Transportation:
Ground
Transportation Type Available
• Approach: Approach Facility
Name, Frequency, Frequency
Parameter
• Traffic Pattern Altitudes
(TPA): Aircraft Class/Altitude
• Weather:
Service Type,
Frequency, Phone Number
• Flight Service Station (FSS):
FSS Name, Phone Numbers
170
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58
190-00629-04 Rev. A
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Selecting an airport for review by identifier, facility name, or location:
1) From the Airport Information Page, press the FMS Knob.
2) Use the FMS Knobs and enter an identifier, facility name, or location.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
3) Press the ENT Key.
4) Press the FMS Knob to remove the cursor.
Selecting a runway:
1) With the Airport Information Page displayed, press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor.
EIS
2) Turn the large FMS Knob to place the cursor in the ‘RUNWAYS’ Box, on the runway designator.
3) Turn the small FMS Knob to display the desired runway (if more than one) for the selected airport.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
4) To remove the flashing cursor, press the FMS Knob.
Viewing a destination airport:
From the Airport Information Page press the MENU Key. Select ‘View Destination Airport’. The Destination
Airport is displayed.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
The Airport Frequencies Box uses the descriptions and abbreviations listed in the following table:
Navigation Frequencies
ILS
LOC
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
Communication Frequencies
Approach * Control
Pre-Taxi
Arrival *
CTA *
Radar
ASOS
Departure * Ramp
ATIS
Gate
Terminal *
AWOS
Ground
TMA *
Center
Helicopter
Tower
Class B *
Multicom
TRSA *
Class C *
Other
Unicom
Clearance
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
* May include Additional Information
Table 5-5 Airport Frequency Abbreviations
APPENDICES
A departure, arrival, or approach can be loaded using the softkeys on the Airport Information Page. See the
Procedures section for details. METARs or TAFs applicable to the selected airport can be selected for display (see
the Hazard Avoidance section for details about weather).
The G1000 provides a NRST Softkey on the PFD, which gives the pilot quick access to nearest airport
information (very useful if an immediate landing is required). The Nearest Airports Window displays a list of
up to the 25 nearest airports (three entries can be displayed at one time). If there are more than three they are
displayed in a scrollable list. If there are no nearest airports available, “NONE WITHIN 200NM” is displayed.
INDEX
190-00629-04 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58
171
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
Bearing/Distance to Airport
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Airport Identifier/
Type
Approach Available
Length of Longest
Runway
COM Freq. Info.
- Identification
- Frequency
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
Additional Airports
(within 200 nm)
NRST Softkey
Figure 5-35 Nearest Airports Window on PFD
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Pressing the ENT Key displays the PFD Airport Information Window for the highlighted airport. Pressing the
ENT Key again returns to the Nearest Airports Window with the cursor on the next airport in the list. Continued
presses of the ENT Key sequences through the information pages for all airports in the Nearest Airports list.
Airport Information
- ID/Type/City
- Facility
Airport Information
- Usage/Time/Elev
- Region
AFCS
Airport Information
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
- Lat/Long
APPENDICES
Figure 5-36 Airport Information Window on PFD
The Nearest Airports Page on the MFD is first in the group of NRST pages because of its potential use in
the event of an in-flight emergency. In addition to displaying a map of the currently selected airport and
surrounding area, the page displays nearest airport information in five boxes labeled ‘NEAREST AIRPORTS’,
‘INFORMATION’, ‘RUNWAYS’, ‘FREQUENCIES’, and ‘APPROACHES’.
INDEX
The selected airport is indicated by a white arrow, and a dashed white line is drawn on the navigation map
from the aircraft position to the nearest airport. Up to five nearest airports, one runway, up to five frequencies,
and up to five approaches are visible at one time. If there are more than can be shown, each list can be scrolled.
172
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58
190-00629-04 Rev. A
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
If there are no items for display in a boxed area, text indicating that fact is displayed. The currently selected
airport remains in the list until it is unselected.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Nearest Airports
- ID/Type
- Bearing/Distance
Airport Information
- Facility/City/Elevation
EIS
Runway Information
Nearest Airport
- Designation/Surface
- Length/Width
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
COM/NAV Freq. Info.
- Identification
- Frequency
Navigation Map
Showing Nearest
Airport
Approaches Available
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Window Selection
Softkeys
LD APR Softkey (only
available if an approach is
highlighted)
Figure 5-37 Nearest Airport Page
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Viewing information for a nearest airport on the PFD:
1) Press the NRST Softkey to display the Nearest Airports Window. Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor.
2) Highlight the airport identifier with the FMS Knob and press the ENT Key to display the Airport Information
Window.
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
3) To return to the Nearest Airports Window press the ENT Key (with the cursor on ‘BACK’) or press the CLR
Key. The cursor is now on the next airport in the nearest airports list. (Repeatedly pressing the ENT Key
moves through the airport list, alternating between the Nearest Airports Window and the Airport Information
Window.)
4) Press the CLR Key or the NRST Softkey to close the PFD Nearest Airports Window.
Viewing information for a nearest airport on the MFD:
APPENDICES
1) Turn the large FMS Knob to select the NRST page group.
2) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the Nearest Airports Page (it is the first page of the group, so it may already
be selected). If there are no Nearest Airports available, “NONE WITHIN 200 NM” is displayed.
INDEX
3) Press the APT Softkey; or press the FMS Knob; or press the MENU Key, highlight ‘Select Airport Window’ and
press the ENT Key. The cursor is placed in the ‘NEAREST AIRPORTS’ Box. The first airport in the nearest airports
list is highlighted.
4) Turn the FMS Knob to highlight the desired airport. (Pressing the ENT Key also moves to the next airport.)
5) Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor.
190-00629-04 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58
173
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Viewing runway information for a specific airport:
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
2) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the desired runway.
1) With the Nearest Airports Page displayed, press the RNWY Softkey; or press the MENU Key, highlight ‘Select
Runway Window’; and press the ENT Key. The cursor is placed in the ‘RUNWAYS’ Box.
3) Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor.
See the Audio Panel and CNS Section for frequency selection and the Procedures section for approaches.
EIS
The Nearest Airports Box on the System Setup Page defines the minimum runway length and surface type
used when determining the 25 nearest airports to display on the MFD Nearest Airports Page. A minimum
runway length and/or surface type can be entered to prevent airports with small runways or runways that are
not appropriately surfaced from being displayed. Default settings are 0 feet (or meters) for runway length and
“HARD/SOFT” for runway surface type.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Selecting nearest airport surface matching criteria:
1) Use the FMS Knob to select the System Setup Page.
2) Press the FMS Knob momentarily to activate the flashing cursor.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
3) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the runway surface field in the Nearest Airports Box.
4) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the desired runway option (ANY, HARD ONLY, HARD/SOFT, WATER).
5) Press the ENT Key.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
6) Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor.
Selecting nearest airport minimum runway length matching criteria:
1) Use the FMS Knob to select the System Setup Page.
2) Press the FMS Knob momentarily to activate the flashing cursor.
AFCS
3) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the minimum length field in the Nearest Airport Box.
4) Use the FMS Knob to enter the minimum runway length (zero to 25,000 feet) and press the ENT Key.
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
5) Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor.
Nearest Airport Criteria
INDEX
- Type of Runway Surface
- Minimum Runway Length
Figure 5-38 System Setup Page - Nearest Airport Selection Criteria
174
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58
190-00629-04 Rev. A
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
INTERSECTIONS
NOTE: The VOR displayed on the Intersection Information Page is the nearest VOR, not necessarily the VOR
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
used to define the intersection.
The Intersection Information Page is used to view information about intersections. In addition to displaying
a map of the currently selected intersection and surrounding area, the Intersection Information Page displays
intersection information in three boxes labeled ‘INTERSECTION’, ‘INFORMATION’, and ‘NEAREST VOR’.
Navigation Map
Showing Selected
Intersection
EIS
Intersection Identifier
Intersection Info
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
- Region
- Lat/Long
Nearest VOR Info
- Identifier/Type (symbol)
- Radial to VOR
- Distance to VOR
Selected Intersection
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Figure 5-39 Intersection Information Page
AFCS
Selecting an intersection:
1) With the Intersection Information Page displayed, enter an identifier in the Intersection Box.
2) Press the ENT Key.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
3) Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor.
Or:
1) With the Nearest Intersections Page displayed, press the FMS Knob.
APPENDICES
2) Press the ENT Key or turn either FMS Knob to select an identifier in the Nearest Intersection Box.
3) Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor.
The Nearest Intersections Page can be used to quickly find an intersection close to the flight path. In addition
to displaying a map of the surrounding area, the page displays information for up to 25 nearest intersections in
three boxes labeled ‘NEAREST INT’, ‘INFORMATION’, and ‘REFERENCE VOR’.
INDEX
190-00629-04 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58
175
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The selected intersection is indicated by a white arrow. Up to eleven intersections are visible at a time. If
there are more than can be shown, the list can be scrolled. If there are no items for display, text indicating that
fact is displayed.
NOTE: The list only includes waypoints that are within 200 nm.
Intersection Information
- Identifier/Symbol
- Bearing/Distance to
intersection from
aircraft position
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
Navigation Map
Showing Nearest
Intersection
Intersection Lat/Long
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Reference VOR Info
- Identifier/Type (symbol)
- VOR Frequency
- Bearing/Distance to VOR
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Nearest
Intersection
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
Figure 5-40 Nearest Intersections Page
176
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58
190-00629-04 Rev. A
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
NDBS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The NDB Information Page is used to view information about NDBs. In addition to displaying a map of
the currently selected NDB and surrounding area, the page displays NDB information in four boxes labeled
‘NDB’, ‘INFORMATION’, ‘FREQUENCY’, and ‘NEAREST AIRPORT’.
NDB Identifier/Type
- Facility Name
- Nearest City
Navigation Map
Showing Selected
NDB
NDB Information
EIS
- Type
- Region
- Lat/Long
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
NDB Frequency
Selected NDB
Nearest Airport Info
- Identifier/Type (symbol)
- Bearing/Distance to
Airport
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Figure 5-41 NDB Information Page
NOTE: Compass locator (LOM, LMM): a low power, low or medium frequency radio beacon installed in
conjunction with the instrument landing system. When LOM is used, the locator is at the Outer Marker;
when LMM is used, the locator is at the Middle Marker.
AFCS
Selecting an NDB:
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
1) With the NDB Information Page displayed, enter an identifier, the name of the NDB, or the city in which it’s
located in the NDB Box.
2) Press the ENT Key.
3) Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor.
Or:
APPENDICES
1) With the Nearest NDB Page displayed, press the FMS Knob.
2) Press the ENT Key or turn either FMS Knob to select an identifier in the Nearest NDB Box.
3) Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor.
INDEX
The Nearest NDB Page can be used to quickly find a NDB close to the flight path. In addition to displaying
a map of the surrounding area, the page displays information for up to 25 nearest NDBs in three boxes labeled
‘NEAREST NDB’, ‘INFORMATION’, and ‘FREQUENCY’.
190-00629-04 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58
177
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
A white arrow before the NDB identifier indicates the selected NDB. Up to eleven NDBs are visible at a time.
If there are more than can be shown, each list can be scrolled. The list only includes waypoints that are within
200nm. If there are no NDBs in the list, text indicating that there are no nearest NDBs is displayed. If there are
no nearest NDBs in the list, the information and frequency fields are dashed.
NDB Identifier/Symbol
- Bearing/Distance to
NDB from aircraft
position
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
Navigation Map
Showing Selected
NDB
Nearest NDB
NDB Information
- Facility Name/City
- Type
- Lat/Long
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
NDB Frequency
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Figure 5-42 Nearest NDB Page
178
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58
190-00629-04 Rev. A
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
VORS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The VOR Information Page can be used to view information about VOR and ILS signals (since ILS signals
can be received on a NAV receiver), or to quickly auto-tune a VOR or ILS frequency. Localizer information
cannot be viewed on the VOR Information Page. If a VOR station is combined with a TACAN station it is listed
as a VORTAC on the VOR Information Page and if it includes only DME, it i s displayed as VOR-DME.
In addition to displaying a map of the currently selected VOR and surrounding area, the VOR Information
Page displays VOR information in four boxes labeled ‘VOR’, ‘INFORMATION’, ‘FREQUENCY’, and ‘NEAREST
AIRPORT’.
EIS
VOR Identifier/Type
- Facility Name
- Nearest City
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Navigation Map
Showing
Selected VOR
VOR Information
- Class/Magnetic Variation
- Region
- Lat/Long
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
VOR Frequency
Nearest Airport Info
Selected VOR
- Identifier/Type (symbol)
- Bearing/Distance to
Airport
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Figure 5-43 VOR Information Page
AFCS
The VOR classes used in the VOR information box are: LOW ALTITUDE, HIGH ALTITUDE, and
TERMINAL.
Selecting a VOR:
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
1) With the VOR Information Page displayed, enter an identifier, the name of the VOR, or the city in which it’s
located in the VOR Box.
2) Press the ENT Key.
APPENDICES
3) Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor.
Or:
1) With the Nearest VOR Page displayed, press the FMS Knob or press the VOR Softkey.
2) Press the ENT Key or turn either FMS Knob to select an identifier in the Nearest VOR Box.
INDEX
3) Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor.
Or:
190-00629-04 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58
179
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
1) With the Nearest VOR Page displayed, press the MENU Key.
2) Highlight ‘Select VOR Window’, and press the ENT Key.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
3) Press the ENT Key or turn either FMS Knob to select an identifier in the Nearest VOR Box.
4) Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor.
EIS
The Nearest VOR Page can be used to quickly find a VOR station close to the aircraft. Also, a NAV frequency
from a selected VOR station can be loaded from the Nearest VOR Page. In addition to displaying a map of
the surrounding area, the Nearest VOR Page displays information for up to 25 nearest VOR stations in three
boxes labeled ‘NEAREST VOR’, ‘INFORMATION’, and ‘FREQUENCY’. The list only includes waypoints that
are within 200 nm.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
A white arrow before the VOR identifier indicates the selected VOR. Up to eleven VORs are visible at a
time. If there are more than can be shown, each list can be scrolled. If there are no VORs in the list, text
indicating that there are no nearest VORs is displayed. If there are no nearest VORs in the list, the information
is dashed.
VOR Identifier/Symbol
- Bearing/Distance to VOR
from aircraft position
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Navigation Map
Showing Nearest
VOR
VOR Information
AFCS
- Facility Name/City
- Class/Magnetic Variation
- Lat/Long
VOR Frequency
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Nearest VOR
INDEX
APPENDICES
Figure 5-44 Nearest VOR Page
180
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58
190-00629-04 Rev. A
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
USER WAYPOINTS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The G1000 can create and store up to 1,000 user-defined waypoints. User waypoints can be created from any
map page (except PFD Inset Map, AUX-Trip Planning Page, or Procedure Pages) by selecting a position on the
map using the Joystick, or from the User Waypoint Information Page by referencing a bearing/distance from
an existing waypoint, bearings from two existing waypoints, or latitude and longitude. Once a waypoint has
been created, it can be renamed, deleted, or moved. Temporary user waypoints are erased upon system power
down.
EIS
User Waypoint Info
- Identifier
- Temporary/Normal
- Waypoint Type
User Wpt Comment
Reference Wpt/Info
Selected User
Waypoint
User Waypoint List
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Navigation Map
Showing Selected
User Waypoint
- Identifier/Rad/Dist or
- Identifiers/Radials or
- Region/Lat/Long
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
- Identifier
- Comment
# User Wpts Used
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
GO BACK displayed if
User Wpt was created
on map page
Softkeys
Figure 5-45 User Waypoint Information Page
AFCS
Selecting a User Waypoint:
1) With the User Waypoint Information Page displayed, enter the name of the User Waypoint, or scroll to the
desired waypoint in the User Waypoint List using the large FMS Knob.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
2) Press the ENT Key.
3) Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor.
Or:
APPENDICES
1) With the Nearest User Waypoints Page displayed, press the FMS Knob.
2) Press the ENT Key or turn either FMS Knob to select an identifier in the Nearest USR Box.
3) Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor.
INDEX
190-00629-04 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58
181
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
Nearest User Wpt List
- Identifier
- Bearing/Distance from
aircraft position
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Navigation Map
Showing Selected
User Waypoint
EIS
User Waypoint Info
- Comment
- Lat/Long
Reference Wpt Info
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Selected User
Waypoint
- Identifier
- Radial/Distance
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Figure 5-46 Nearest User Waypoint Page
CREATING USER WAYPOINTS
User waypoints can be created from the User Waypoint Information Page in the following ways:
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Creating user waypoints from the User Waypoint Information Page:
1) Select the NEW Softkey, or press the MENU Key and select ‘Create New User Waypoint’.
2) Enter a user waypoint name (up to six characters).
3) Press the ENT Key. The current aircraft position is the default location of the new waypoint.
AFCS
4) If desired, define the type and location of the waypoint in one of the following ways:
a) Select “RAD/RAD” using the small FMS Knob, press the ENT Key, and enter the two reference waypoint
identifiers and radials into the REFERENCE WAYPOINTS window using the FMS Knobs.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Or:
b) Select “RAD/DIS” using the small FMS Knob, press the ENT Key, and enter the reference waypoint identifier,
the radial, and the distance into the REFERENCE WAYPOINTS window using the FMS Knobs.
APPENDICES
Or:
c) Select “LAT/LON” using the small FMS Knob, press the ENT Key, and enter the latitude and longitude into
the INFORMATION window using the FMS Knobs.
5) Press the ENT Key to accept the new waypoint.
INDEX
6) If desired, change the storage method of the waypoint to “TEMPORARY” or “NORMAL” by moving the cursor
to “TEMPORARY” and selecting the ENT Key to check or uncheck the box.
7) Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor.
Or:
182
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58
190-00629-04 Rev. A
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
1) Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor.
2) Enter a user waypoint name (up to six characters).
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
3) Press the ENT Key. The message ‘Are you sure you want to create the new User Waypoint AAAAAA?’ is
displayed.
4) With ‘YES’ highlighted, press the ENT Key.
5) If desired, define the type and location of the waypoint in one of the following ways:
a) Select “RAD/RAD” using the small FMS Knob, press the ENT Key, and enter the two reference waypoint
identifiers and radials into the REFERENCE WAYPOINTS window using the FMS Knobs.
EIS
Or:
b) Select “RAD/DIS” using the small FMS Knob, press the ENT Key, and enter the reference waypoint identifier,
the radial, and the distance into the REFERENCE WAYPOINTS window using the FMS Knobs.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Or:
c) Select “LAT/LON” using the small FMS Knob, press the ENT Key, and enter the latitude and longitude into
the INFORMATION window using the FMS Knobs.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
6) Press the ENT Key to accept the new waypoint.
7) If desired, change the storage method of the waypoint to “TEMPORARY” or “NORMAL” by moving the cursor
to “TEMPORARY” and selecting the ENT Key to check or uncheck the box.
8) Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Figure 5-47 User Waypoint Information Page Menu
Creating user waypoints from map pages:
APPENDICES
1) Press the Joystick to activate the panning function and pan to the map location of the desired user waypoint.
2) Press the ENT Key. The User Waypoint Information Page is displayed with the captured position.
NOTE: If the pointer has highlighted a map database feature, one of three things happens upon pressing
190-00629-04 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58
INDEX
the ENT Key: 1) information about the selected feature is displayed instead of initiating a new waypoint,
2) a menu pops up allowing a choice between ‘Review Airspaces’ or ‘Create User Waypoint’, or 3) a new
waypoint is initiated with the default name being the selected map item.
183
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
3) Enter a user waypoint name (up to six characters).
4) Press the ENT Key to accept the selected name. The first reference waypoint box is highlighted.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
5) If desired, define the type and location of the waypoint in one of the following ways:
a) Select “RAD/RAD” using the small FMS Knob, press the ENT Key, and enter the two reference waypoint
identifiers and radials into the REFERENCE WAYPOINTS window using the FMS Knobs.
Or:
b) Select “RAD/DIS” using the small FMS Knob, press the ENT Key, and enter the reference waypoint identifier,
the radial, and the distance into the REFERENCE WAYPOINTS window using the FMS Knobs.
EIS
Or:
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
c) Select “LAT/LON” using the small FMS Knob, press the ENT Key, and enter the latitude and longitude into
the INFORMATION window using the FMS Knobs.
6) Press the ENT Key to accept the new waypoint.
7) If desired, change the storage method of the waypoint to “TEMPORARY” or “NORMAL” by moving the cursor
to “TEMPORARY” and selecting the ENT Key to check or uncheck the box.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
8) Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor.
9) Press the GO BACK Softkey to return to the map page.
EDITING USER WAYPOINTS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Editing a user waypoint comment or location:
1) With the User Waypoint Information Page displayed, press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor.
2) Select a user waypoint in the User Waypoint List, if required, and press the ENT Key.
3) Move the cursor to the desired field.
AFCS
4) Turn the small FMS Knob to make any changes.
5) Press the ENT Key to accept the changes.
6) Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Renaming user waypoints:
1) Highlight a user waypoint in the User Waypoint List. Press the RENAME Softkey, or press the MENU Key and
select ‘Rename User Waypoint’.
APPENDICES
2) Enter a new name.
3) Press the ENT Key. The message ‘Do you want to rename the user waypoint AAAAAA to BBBBBB?’ is
displayed.
4) With ‘YES’ highlighted, press the ENT Key.
INDEX
5) Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor.
184
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58
190-00629-04 Rev. A
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Changing the location of an existing waypoint to the aircraft present position:
1) Enter a waypoint name or select the waypoint in the User Waypoint List, then press the ENT Key.
2) Press the MENU Key.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
3) Select ‘Use Present Position’.
4) Press the ENT Key twice. The new waypoint’s location is saved.
5) Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor.
EIS
A system generated comment for a user waypoint incorporates the reference waypoint identifier, bearing,
and distance. If a system generated comment has been edited, a new comment can be generated.
Resetting the comment field to the system generated comment:
1) Enter a waypoint name or select the waypoint in the User Waypoint List, then press the ENT Key.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
2) Press the MENU Key.
3) Select ‘Auto Comment’.
4) Press the ENT Key. The generated comment is based on the reference point used to define the waypoint.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
The default type of user waypoint (normal or temporary) can be changed using the user waypoint information
page menu. Temporary user waypoints are automatically deleted upon the next power cycle.
Changing the user waypoint storage duration default setting:
1) With the User Waypoint Information Page displayed, press the MENU Key.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
2) Move the cursor to select ‘Waypoint Setup’, and press the ENT Key.
3) Select ‘NORMAL’ or ‘TEMPORARY’ as desired, and press the ENT Key.
4) Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor and return to the User Waypoint Information Page.
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-00629-04 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58
185
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
DELETING USER WAYPOINTS
Deleting a single user waypoint:
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
1) Highlight a User Waypoint in the User Waypoint List, or enter a waypoint in the User Waypoint field.
2) Press the DELETE Softkey or press the CLR Key. ‘Yes’ is highlighted in the confirmation window.
3) Press the ENT Key.
4) Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor.
Or:
EIS
1) Highlight a User Waypoint in the User Waypoint List, or enter a waypoint in the User Waypoint field.
2) Press the MENU Key.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
3) Select ‘Delete User Waypoint’.
4) Press the ENT Key twice to confirm the selection.
5) Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
NOTE: The option to ‘Delete All User Waypoints’ is not available while the aircraft is in flight.
Deleting all user waypoints:
1) Highlight a User Waypoint in the User Waypoint List.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
2) Press the MENU Key.
3) Select ‘Delete All User Waypoints’.
4) Press the ENT Key twice to confirm the selection.
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
5) Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor.
186
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58
190-00629-04 Rev. A
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
5.4 AIRSPACES
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The G1000 can display the following types of airspaces: Class B/TMA, Class C/TCA, Class D, Restricted, MOA
(Military), Other Airspace, Air Defense Interdiction Zone (ADIZ), and Temporary Flight Restriction (TFR).
Class D Airspace
EIS
MOA (Military)
Class B Airspace
Restricted Area
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Alert Area
Class C Airspace
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
ADIZ
Warning Area
APPENDICES
Figure 5-48 Airspaces
190-00629-04 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58
INDEX
The Nearest Airspaces Page, Airspace Alerts Window, and Airspace Alerts on the PFD provide additional
information about airspaces and the location of the aircraft in relationship to them.
187
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The Airspace Alerts Box allows the pilot to turn the controlled/special-use airspace message alerts on or off.
This does not affect the alerts listed on the Nearest Airspaces Page or the airspace boundaries depicted on the
Navigation Map Page. It simply turns on/off the warning provided when the aircraft is approaching or near an
airspace.
An altitude buffer is also provided which “expands” the vertical range above or below an airspace. For example,
if the buffer is set at 500 feet, and the aircraft is more than 500 feet above/below an airspace, an alert message is
not generated, but if the aircraft is less than 500 feet above/below an airspace and projected to enter it, the pilot
is notified with an alert message. The default setting for the altitude buffer is 200 feet.
EIS
Changing the altitude buffer distance setting:
1) Use the FMS Knob to select the AUX - System Setup Page.
2) Press the FMS Knob momentarily to activate the flashing cursor.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
3) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the altitude buffer field in the Airspace Alerts Box.
4) Use the FMS Knob to enter an altitude buffer value and press the ENT Key.
5) Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Turning an airspace alert on or off:
1) Use the FMS Knob to select the AUX - System Setup Page.
2) Press the FMS Knob momentarily to activate the flashing cursor.
3) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the desired field in the Airspace Alerts Box.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
4) Turn the small FMS Knob clockwise to turn the airspace alert ON or counterclockwise to turn the alert OFF.
AFCS
5) Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor.
Airspace Alerts Box
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
- Airspace Altitude Buffer
- Alert On/Off
(Default Settings Shown)
INDEX
DFLTS Softkey
Figure 5-49 System Setup Page - Airspace Alerts
188
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58
190-00629-04 Rev. A
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Map ranges for the airspace boundaries are selected from the Aviation Group in the Map Setup Menu. See Table
5-2 for the default and maximum ranges for each type of airspace and the symbol used to define the airspace
area.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The Nearest Airspaces Page can be used to quickly find airspaces close to the flight path. In addition, a selected
frequency associated with the airspace can be loaded from the Nearest Airspaces Page. In addition to displaying
a map of airspace boundaries and surrounding area, the Nearest Airspaces Page displays airspace information in
four boxes labeled ‘AIRSPACE ALERTS’, ‘AIRSPACE, AGENCY’, ‘VERTICAL LIMITS’, and ‘FREQUENCIES’.
EIS
Airspace Alerts Info
Airspace 1
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
- Name
- Proximity (Ahead, Inside,
Ahead < 2nm, Within 2nm)
- Time till Intercept (only if
Ahead or Ahead < 2nm)
Airspace/Agency Info
- Airspace Type
- Controlling Agency
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Airspace Vertical Limits
- Ceiling
- Floor
Airspace 2
Associated Frequencies
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
- Type
- Availability/Info
- Frequency
Softkeys
Figure 5-50 Nearest Airspaces Page
AFCS
Airspace alerts and associated frequencies are shown in scrollable lists on the Nearest Airspaces Page. The
ALERTS and FREQ softkeys place the cursor in the respective list. The FREQ Softkey is enabled only if one or
more frequencies exist for a selected airspace.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Selecting and viewing an airspace alert with its associated information:
1) Select the Nearest Airspaces Page.
2) Press the ALERTS Softkey; or press the FMS Knob; or press the MENU Key, highlight ‘Select Alerts Window’,
and press the ENT Key. The cursor is placed in the ‘AIRSPACE ALERTS’ Box.
APPENDICES
3) Select the desired airspace.
4) Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor.
INDEX
190-00629-04 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58
189
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
Pressing the PFD ALERTS Softkey displays the message window on the PFD. The following airspace alerts are
displayed in the message window:
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Message
INSIDE ARSPC – Inside airspace.
ARSPC AHEAD – Airspace ahead –
less than 10 minutes.
ARSPC NEAR – Airspace near and
ahead.
ARSPC NEAR – Airspace near –
less than 2 nm.
Comments
The aircraft is inside the airspace.
Special use airspace is ahead of aircraft. The aircraft penetrates the airspace within 10
minutes.
Special use airspace is near and ahead of the aircraft position.
Special use airspace is within 2 nm of the aircraft position.
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Table 5-6 PFD Airspace Alert Messages
190
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58
190-00629-04 Rev. A
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
5.5 DIRECT-TO-NAVIGATION
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The Direct-to method of navigation, initiated by pressing the Direct-to Key on either the MFD or PFD, is
quicker to use than a flight plan when the desire is to navigate to a single point such as a nearby airport.
Once a direct-to is activated, the G1000 establishes a point-to-point course line from the present position to the
selected direct-to destination. Course guidance is provided until the direct-to is replaced with a new direct-to or
flight plan, or cancelled.
EIS
A vertical navigation (VNV) direct-to creates a descent path (and provides guidance to stay on the path) from
the current altitude to a selected altitude at the direct-to waypoint. Vertical navigation is based on barometric
altitudes, not on GPS altitude, and is used for cruise and descent phases of flight.
The Direct-to Window allows selection and activation of direct-to navigation. The Direct-to Window displays
selected direct-to waypoint data on the PFD and the MFD.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Direct-to Point Info
VNV Constraints
- Altitude at Arrival
- Along Track Offset
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
- Identifier/Symbol/Region
- Facility Name
- City
Map of Selected Point
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Location of Destination
- Bearing/Distance
AFCS
Desired Course
Figure 5-51 Direct-to Window - MFD
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Direct-to Point Info
VNV Constraints
- Altitude at Arrival
- Along Track Offset
APPENDICES
- Identifier/Symbol/City
- Facility Name
Direct-to Point Info
- Bearing/Distance
- Desired Course
INDEX
Activation Command
Figure 5-52 Direct-to Window - PFD
190-00629-04 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58
191
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
Any waypoint can be entered as a direct-to destination from the Direct-to Window.
Entering a waypoint identifier, facility name, or city as a direct-to destination:
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
1) Press the Direct-to Key. The Direct-to Window is displayed (with the active flight plan wayoint as the default
selection or a blank waypoint field if no flight plan is active).
EIS
2) Turn the small FMS Knob clockwise to begin entering a waypoint identifier (turning it counter-clockwise brings
up the waypoint selection submenu - press the CLR Key to remove it), or turn the large FMS Knob to select the
facility name, or city field and turn the small FMS Knob to begin entering a facility name or city. If duplicate
entries exist for the entered facility or city name, additional entries can be viewed by turning the small FMS
Knob during the selection process.
3) Press the ENT Key. The ‘Activate?’ field is highlighted.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
4) Press the ENT Key to activate the direct-to.
Any waypoint contained in the active flight plan can be selected as a direct-to waypoint from the Direct-to
Window, the Active Flight Plan Page, or the Active Flight Plan Window.
Waypoint Submenu
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
- Flight Plan Waypoints
- Nearest Airports
- Recent Waypoints
- User Waypoints
- Airway Waypoints
(only available when
active leg is part of an
airway)
Figure 5-53 Waypoint Submenu
Selecting an active flight plan waypoint as a direct-to destination:
AFCS
1) While navigating an active flight plan, press the Direct-to Key. The Direct-to Window is displayed with the
active flight plan waypoint as the default selection.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
2) Turn the small FMS Knob counter-clockwise to display a list of flight plan waypoints (the FPL list is populated
only when navigating a flight plan).
3) Select the desired waypoint.
4) Press the ENT Key. The cursor is now displayed on ‘ACTIVATE?’.
APPENDICES
5) Press the ENT Key again to activate the direct-to.
Or:
1) Select the Active Flight Plan Page on the MFD, or the Active Flight Plan Window on the PFD.
2) Select the desired waypoint.
INDEX
3) Press the Direct-to Key.
192
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58
190-00629-04 Rev. A
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
4) Press the ENT Key. The cursor is now displayed on ‘ACTIVATE?’.
5) Press the ENT Key again to activate the direct-to.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Any NRST, RECENT, USER, or AIRWAY waypoints can be selected as a direct-to destination in the Direct-to
Window.
Selecting a NRST, RECENT, USER, or AIRWAY waypoint as a direct-to destination:
1) Press the Direct-to Key. The Direct-to Window is displayed (with the active flight plan destination as the
default selection or a blank destination if no flight plan is active).
EIS
2) Turn the small FMS Knob counter-clockwise to display a list of FPL waypoints (the FPL list is populated only
when navigating a flight plan, and the AIRWAY list is available only when the active leg is part of an airway).
3) Turn the small FMS Knob clockwise to display the NRST, RECENT, USER, or AIRWAY waypoints.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
4) Turn the large FMS Knob clockwise to select the desired waypoint.
5) Press the ENT Key. The cursor is now displayed on ‘ACTIVATE?’.
6) Press the ENT Key again to activate the direct-to.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
The Direct-to Window can be displayed from any page and allows selection and activation of direct-to navigation.
If the direct-to is initiated from any page except the WPT pages, the default waypoint is the active flight plan
waypoint (if a flight plan is active) or a blank waypoint field. Direct-to requests on any WPT page defaults to the
displayed waypoint.
Selecting any waypoint as a direct-to destination:
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
1) Select the page or window containing the desired waypoint type and select the desired waypoint.
2) Press the Direct-to Key to display the Direct-to Window with the selected waypoint as the direct-to
destination.
3) Press the ENT Key. The cursor is now displayed on ‘ACTIVATE?’.
AFCS
4) Press ENT again to activate the direct-to.
Selecting a nearby airport as a direct-to destination:
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
1) Select the NRST Softkey on the PFD; or turn the FMS Knob to display the Nearest Airports Page and press the
FMS Knob.
2) Select the desired airport (the nearest one is already selected).
3) Press the Direct-to Key.
APPENDICES
4) Press the ENT Key. The cursor is now displayed on ‘ACTIVATE?’.
5) Press the ENT Key again to activate the direct-to.
Direct-to destinations may also be selected by using the pointer on the navigation map pages. If no airport,
NAVAID, or user waypoint exists at the desired location, a temporary waypoint named ‘MAPWPT’ is automatically
created at the location of the map arrow.
INDEX
190-00629-04 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58
193
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
Selecting a waypoint as a direct-to destination using the pointer:
1) From a navigation map page, press the Joystick to display the pointer.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
2) Move the Joystick to place the pointer at the desired destination location.
3) If the pointer is placed on an existing airport, NAVAID, or user waypoint, the waypoint name is highlighted.
4) Press the Direct-to Key to display the Direct-to Window with the selected point entered as the direct-to
destination.
5) Press the ENT Key. The cursor is now displayed on ‘ACTIVATE?’.
EIS
6) Press the ENT Key again to activate the direct-to.
Cancelling a Direct-to:
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
1) Press the Direct-to Key to display the Direct-to Window.
2) Press the MENU Key.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
3) With ‘Cancel Direct-To NAV’ highlighted, press the ENT Key. If a flight plan is still active, the G1000 resumes
navigating the flight plan along the closest leg.
Page Menu
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
- Cancel Direct-To
Navigation
INDEX
APPENDICES
Figure 5-54 Direct-to Window - Cancelling Direct-to Navigation
194
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58
190-00629-04 Rev. A
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
When navigating a direct-to, the G1000 sets a direct great circle course to the selected destination. The course
to a destination can also be manually selected using the course field (‘COURSE’) on the Direct-to Window.
Selecting a manual direct-to course:
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
1) Press the Direct-to Key. The Direct-to Window is displayed with the destination field highlighted.
2) Highlight the course field.
3) Enter the desired course.
4) Press the ENT Key. The cursor is now displayed on ‘ACTIVATE?’.
EIS
5) Press the ENT Key again to activate the direct-to.
Reselecting the direct course from the current position:
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
1) Press the Direct-to Key. The Direct-to Window is displayed with the destination field highlighted.
2) Press the ENT Key. The cursor is now displayed on ‘ACTIVATE?’.
3) Press the ENT Key again to activate the direct-to.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
A direct-to with altitude constraints creates a descent path (and provides guidance to stay on the path) from the
aircraft’s current altitude to the altitude of the direct-to waypoint. The altitude is reached at the waypoint, or at the
specified distance along the flight path if an offset distance has been entered. All VNV altitudes prior to the directto destination are removed from the active flight plan upon successful activation of a direct-to destination that is
part of the active flight plan. All VNV altitudes following the direct-to waypoint are retained. See the section on
Vertical Navigation for more information regarding the use and purpose of VNV altitudes and offset distances.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Entering a VNV altitude and along-track offset for the waypoint:
1) Press the Direct-to Key to display the Direct-to Window.
2) Turn the large FMS Knob to place the cursor over the ‘VNV’ altitude field.
3) Enter the desired altitude.
AFCS
4) Press the ENT Key. The option to select MSL or AGL is now displayed.
5) Turn the small FMS Knob to select ‘MSL’ or ‘AGL’.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
6) Press the ENT Key. The cursor is now flashing in the VNV offset distance field.
7) Enter the desired along-track distance before the waypoint.
8) Press the ENT Key. The ‘Activate?’ field is highlighted.
9) Press the ENT Key to activate.
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-00629-04 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58
195
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
Removing a VNV altitude constraint:
1) Press the Direct-to Key to display the Direct-to Window.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
2) Press the MENU Key.
3) With ‘Clear Vertical Constraints’ highlighted, press the ENT Key.
Page Menu
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
- Clear Vertical Navigation
Constraints
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Figure 5-55 Direct-to Window - Clearing Vertical Constraints
196
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58
190-00629-04 Rev. A
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
5.6 FLIGHT PLANNING
Flight Plan Leg Type
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Flight planning on the G1000 consists of building a flight plan by entering waypoints one at a time, adding
waypoints along airways, and inserting departures, airways, arrivals, or approaches as needed. The G1000 allows
flight planning information to be entered from either the MFD or PFD. The flight plan is displayed on maps using
different line widths, colors, and types, based on the type of leg and the segment of the flight plan currently being
flown (departure, enroute, arrival, approach, or missed approach).
Symbol
EIS
Active Course Leg (TOPO On)
Active Course Leg (TOPO Off)
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Active Heading Leg (TOPO On)
Active Heading Leg (TOPO Off)
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Course Leg in the current flight segment (TOPO On)
Course Leg in the current flight segment (TOPO Off)
Course Leg not in the current flight segment (TOPO On)
Course Leg not in the current flight segment (TOPO Off)
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Heading Leg (TOPO On)
Heading Leg (TOPO Off)
Turn Anticipation Arc (TOPO On/TOPO Off)
AFCS
Table 5-7 Flight Plan Leg Symbols
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Up to 99 flight plans with up to 99 waypoints each can be created and stored in memory. One flight plan can be
activated at a time and becomes the active flight plan. The active flight plan is erased when the system is turned
off and overwritten when another flight plan is activated. When storing flight plans with an approach, departure,
or arrival, the G1000 uses the waypoint information from the current database to define the waypoints. If the
database is changed or updated, the G1000 automatically updates the information if the procedure has not been
modified. If an approach, departure, or arrival procedure is no longer available, the procedure is deleted from the
affected stored flight plan(s), and an alert is displayed (see Miscellaneous Messages in Appendix A) advising that
one or more stored flight plans need to be edited.
APPENDICES
190-00629-04 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58
INDEX
Whenever an approach, departure, or arrival procedure is loaded into the active flight plan, a set of approach,
departure, or arrival waypoints is inserted into the flight plan along with a header line describing the instrument
procedure the pilot selected. The original enroute portion of the flight plan remains active (unless an instrument
procedure is activated) when the procedure is loaded.
197
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
When the database is updated, the airways need to be reloaded also. Each airway segment is reloaded from
the database given the entry waypoint, the airway identifier and the exit waypoint. This reloads the sequence of
waypoints between the entry and exit waypoints (the sequence may change when the database is updated). The
update of an airway can fail during this process. If that happens, the airway waypoints are changed to regular
(non-airway) flight plan waypoints, and an alert is displayed (see Miscellaneous Messages in Appendix A).
The following could cause the airway update to fail:
• Airway identifier, entry waypoint or exit waypoint not found in the new database.
EIS
• Airway entry/exit waypoint is not an acceptable waypoint for the airway – either the waypoint is no longer on
the airway, or there is a new directional restriction that prevents it being used.
• Loading the new airway sequence would exceed the capacity of the flight plan.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT PLAN CREATION
There are three methods to create or modify a flight plan:
• Active Flight Plan Page on the MFD (create/modify the active flight plan)
• Active Flight Plan Window on the PFD (create/modify the active flight plan)
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
• Flight Plan Catalog Page on the MFD (create/modify a stored flight plan)
Active FPL Waypoint List
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
- Comment
- Procedure Header
- Waypoint Identifier
- Airway Identifier
- Desired Track to Waypoint
- Distance to Waypoint
- Waypoint Altitude Constraint
AFCS
Active Flight
Plan Leg
Turn Anticipation
Arc
Vertical Navigation Profile
- Active Vertical WPT Alt/ID
- Vertical Speed Target
- Flight Path Angle
- Vertical Speed Target
- Time to Top of Descent
- Vertical Deviation
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Non-Active,
Flight Plan Leg
INDEX
APPENDICES
Figure 5-56 Active Flight Plan Page
198
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58
190-00629-04 Rev. A
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Active Flight Plan Comment
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Active Flight
Plan Leg
Active Flight Plan Waypoint List
- Waypoint ID
- Desired Track to Waypoint
- Distance to Waypoint
- Airway Identifier
EIS
Figure 5-57 Active Flight Plan Window on PFD
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Catalog Contents
- # Used
- # Empty
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Flight Plan List
- Comment
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Selected
Flight Plan
Map
Selected FPL Info
AFCS
- Departure Waypoint
- Destination Waypoint
- Total Flight Plan Distance
- Enroute Safe Altitude
Softkeys
Figure 5-58 Flight Plan Catalog Page
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
The active flight plan is listed on the active Flight Plan Page on the MFD, and in the Active Flight Plan
Window on the PFD. It is the flight plan to which the G1000 is currently providing guidance, and is shown
on the navigation maps. Stored flight plans are listed on the Flight Plan Catalog Page, and are available for
activation (becomes the active flight plan).
APPENDICES
Creating an active flight plan:
1) Press the FPL Key.
2) Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor (only on MFD).
190-00629-04 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58
INDEX
3) Turn the small FMS Knob to display the Waypoint Information Window. (Turning it clockwise displays a blank
Waypoint Information Window, turning it counter-clockwise displays the Waypoint Information Window with a
waypoint selection submenu allowing selection of active flight plan, nearest, recent, user, or airway waypoints).
199
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
4) Enter the identifier, facility, or city name of the departure waypoint or select a waypoint from the submenu of
waypoints and press the ENT Key. The active flight plan is modified as each waypoint is entered.
5) Repeat step numbers 3 and 4 to enter each additional flight plan waypoint.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
6) When all waypoints have been entered, press the FMS Knob to remove the cursor.
Creating a stored flight plan:
1) Press the FPL Key.
2) Turn the small FMS Knob clockwise to display the Flight Plan Catalog Page.
EIS
3) Select the NEW Softkey; or press the MENU Key, highlight ‘Create New Flight Plan’, and press the ENT Key to
display a blank flight plan for the first empty storage location.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
4) Turn the small FMS Knob to display the Waypoint Information Window. (Turning it clockwise displays a blank
Waypoint Information Window, turning it counter-clockwise displays the Waypoint Information Window with a
waypoint selection submenu allowing selection of active flight plan, nearest, recent, user, or airway waypoints).
5) Enter the identifier, facility, or city name of the departure waypoint or select a waypoint from the submenu of
waypoints and press the ENT Key.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
6) Repeat step numbers 4 and 5 to enter each additional flight plan waypoint.
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
7) When all waypoints have been entered, press the FMS Knob to return to the Flight Plan Catalog Page. The new
flight plan is now in the list.
200
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58
190-00629-04 Rev. A
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Flight plans can be imported from an SD Card or exported to an SD Card from the Stored Flight Plan Page.
Importing a Flight Plan from an SD Card
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
1) Insert the SD card containing the flight plan in the top card slot on the MFD.
2) Press the FPL Key to display the Active Flight Plan Page on the MFD.
3) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the Flight Plan Catalog Page.
4) Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor.
5) Turn either FMS Knob to highlight an empty or existing flight plan.
EIS
6) Press the IMPORT Softkey; or press the MENU Key, select “Import Flight Plan”, and press the ENT Key.
If an empty slot is selected, a list of the available flight plans on the SD card will be displayed.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Or:
If an existing flight plan is selected, an “Overwrite existing flight plan? OK or CANCEL” prompt is displayed.
Press the ENT Key to choose to overwrite the selected flight plan and see the list of available flight plans on the
SD card. If overwriting the existing flight plan is not desired, select “CANCEL” using the FMS Knob, press the
ENT Key, select another flight plan slot, and press the IMPORT Softkey again.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
7) Turn the small FMS Knob to highlight the desired flight plan for importing.
8) Press the ENT Key to initiate the import.
9) Press the ENT Key again to confirm the import.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
List of Flight Plans to Import &
Details for the Selected File
APPENDICES
Import/Export Softkeys
Import Successful
190-00629-04 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58
INDEX
Figure 5-59 Flight Plan Import
201
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
NOTE: If the imported flight plan contains a waypoint with a name that duplicates the name of a waypoint
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
already stored on the system, the system compares the coordinates of the imported waypoint with those of
the existing waypoint. If the coordinates are different, the imported waypoint is automatically renamed by
adding characters to the end of the name.
Exporting a Flight Plan to an SD Card
1) Insert the SD card into the top card slot on the MFD.
2) Press the FPL Key to display the Active Flight Plan Page on the MFD.
EIS
3) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the Flight Plan Catalog Page.
4) Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
5) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the flight plan to be exported.
6) Press the EXPORT Softkey; or press the MENU Key, select “Export Flight Plan”.
7) If desired, change the name for the exported file by turning the large FMS Knob to the left to highlight the
name, then use the small and large FMS knobs to enter the new name, and press the ENT Key.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
8) Press the ENT Key to initiate the export.
9) Press the ENT Key to confirm the export.
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
NOTE: The exported flight plan will not contain any procedures or airways.
Import/Export Softkeys
Stored Flight Plan to be Exported &
Exported Flight Plan Name
Export Successful
INDEX
Figure 5-60 Flight Plan Export
202
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58
190-00629-04 Rev. A
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
ADDING WAYPOINTS TO AN EXISTING FLIGHT PLAN
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Waypoints can be added to the active flight plan or any stored flight plan. Choose the flight plan, select the
desired point of insertion, enter the waypoint, and it is added in front of the selected waypoint. Flight plans
are limited to 99 waypoints (including waypoints within airways and procedures). If the number of waypoints
in the flight plan exceeds 99, the message “Flight plan is full. Remove unnecessary waypoints.” appears and the
new waypoint(s) are not added to the flight plan.
Stored Flight Plan Selected
EIS
- Memory Slot
- Comment
- Procedure Identifier
- Waypoint Identifier
- Airway Identifier
- Desired Track to Waypoint
- Distance to Waypoint
- Waypoint Altitude Constraint
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Softkeys
Figure 5-61 Stored Flight Plan Page
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Flight Plan Full Message
APPENDICES
190-00629-04 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58
INDEX
Figure 5-62 Active Flight Plan Page - FPL Full
203
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
Adding a waypoint to a stored flight plan:
1) On the Flight Plan Catalog Page, press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
2) Highlight the desired flight plan.
3) Press the EDIT Softkey; or press the ENT Key, turn the large FMS Knob clockwise to select “EDIT” and press the
ENT Key. The Stored Flight Plan Page is displayed.
4) Select the point in the flight plan to add the new waypoint. The new waypoint is placed directly in front of the
highlighted waypoint.
EIS
5) Turn the small FMS Knob to display the Waypoint Information Window. (Turning it clockwise displays a blank
Waypoint Information Window, turning it counter-clockwise displays the Waypoint Information Window
with a waypoint selection submenu allowing selection of active flight plan, nearest, recent, user, or airway
waypoints).
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
6) Enter the identifier, facility, or city name of the waypoint or select a waypoint from the submenu of waypoints
and press the ENT Key. The new waypoint now exists in the flight plan.
NOTE: If the identifier entered in the Waypoint Information Window has duplicates, a Duplicate Waypoint
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Window is displayed. Use the FMS Knob to select the correct waypoint.
Figure 5-63 Duplicate Waypoints Window
Adding a waypoint to the active flight plan:
APPENDICES
1) Press the FPL Key.
2) Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor (not required on the PFD).
3) Select the point in the flight plan before which to add the new waypoint. The new waypoint is placed directly
in front of the highlighted waypoint.
INDEX
4) Turn the small FMS Knob to display the Waypoint Information Window. (Turning it clockwise displays a blank
Waypoint Information Window, turning it counter-clockwise displays the Waypoint Information Window with a
waypoint selection submenu allowing selection of active flight plan, nearest, recent, or airway waypoints).
5) Enter the identifier, facility, or city name of the waypoint or select a waypoint from the submenu of waypoints
and press the ENT Key. The active flight plan is modified as each waypoint is entered.
204
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58
190-00629-04 Rev. A
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Creating and adding user waypoints to the active flight plan:
1) Press the Joystick to activate the panning function on the Active Flight Plan Page and pan to the map location
of the desired user waypoint.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
2) Select the LD WPT Softkey; or press the MENU Key, select ‘Load Waypoint’, and press the ENT Key. The user
waypoint is created with a name of USRxxx (using the next available in sequence) and is added to the end of
the active flight plan.
ADDING AIRWAYS TO A FLIGHT PLAN
EIS
Airways can be added to the active flight plan or any stored flight plan. Choose a flight plan (add the desired
airway entry point if not already in the flight plan), select the waypoint after the desired airway entry point,
select the airway, and it is added in front of the selected waypoint. An airway can only be loaded if there is a
waypoint in the flight plan that is part of the desired airway and is not part of an arrival or approach procedure.
The G1000 also anticipates the desired airway and exit point based on loaded flight plan waypoints.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Airway Entry Waypoint
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Selected Airway
Airways Available at TOP
Airway Waypoint
Sequence
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Preview of
Selected Airway
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Figure 5-64 Select Airway Page - Selecting Airway
Adding an airway to a flight plan:
1) Press the FPL Key.
APPENDICES
2) Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor (not required on the PFD).
3) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the waypoint after the desired airway entry point. If this waypoint is not
a valid airway entry point, a valid entry point should be entered at this time.
190-00629-04 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58
INDEX
4) Turn the small FMS Knob one click clockwise and select the LD AIRWY Softkey, or press the MENU Key and
select “Load Airway”. The Select Airway Page is displayed. The LD AIRWY Softkey or the “Load Airway” menu
item is available only when a valid airway entry waypoint has been chosen (the waypoint ahead of the cursor
position).
205
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
5) Turn the FMS Knob to select the desired airway from the list, and press the ENT Key. Low altitude airways are
shown first in the list, followed by “all” altitude airways, and then high altitude airways.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
6) Turn the FMS Knob to select the desired airway exit point from the list, and press the ENT Key. ‘LOAD?’ is
highlighted.
7) Press the ENT Key. The system returns to editing the flight plan with the new airway inserted.
Airway Entry Waypoint
EIS
Selected Airway
Selected Exit Point
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Preview of
Selected Airway
Selected Airway Exit
Point
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Airway Exit Points
Available
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
Figure 5-65 Select Airway Page - Selecting Exit Point
Inserted Airway Header
INDEX
APPENDICES
- Airway Identifier: [airway
identifier].[exit waypoint identifier]
(e.g., V4.SLN)
Figure 5-66 Active Flight Plan Page - Airway Inserted
206
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58
190-00629-04 Rev. A
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
RESTRICTIONS ON ADDING AIRWAYS
Some airways have directional restrictions on all or part of the route. Airway “A2” in Europe has a directional
restriction over the whole route such that it can be flown only in the direction MTD-ABB-BNE-DEVAL.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Airway “UR975” in North Africa has more complicated directional restrictions within the list of airway
waypoints AMANO, VAKOR, LIBRO, NELDA, DIRKA, GZO, KOSET, and SARKI:
• Starting from AMANO, the airway can be flown only to LIBRO.
• Starting from SARKI, the airway can be flown only to LIBRO.
• Between NELDA and GZO, the airway can be flown in either direction.
EIS
In the US, airways that are “one-way” for specified hours of operation are not uncommon. These airways
are always bidirectional in the G1000 database.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
The system only allows correct airway sequences to be inserted. If the pilot subsequently inverts the flight
plan, the system inverts the airway waypoint sequence and removes the airway header.
ADDING PROCEDURES TO A STORED FLIGHT PLAN
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
The G1000 allows the pilot to insert pre-defined instrument procedures from the navigation database into a
flight plan. The procedures are designed to facilitate routing of traffic leaving an airport (departure), arriving at
an airport (arrival), and landing at an airport (approach). See the procedures section for more details.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Flight Plan Name
Flight Plan Waypoint
List
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Softkeys
Load Departure Load Arrival Load Approach Activate Flight Plan -
APPENDICES
Figure 5-67 Stored Flight Plan Page
INDEX
190-00629-04 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58
207
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
DEPARTURE (DP)
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
A Departure Procedure (DP) is loaded at the departure airport in the flight plan. Only one departure can
be loaded at a time in a flight plan. The route is defined by selection of a departure, the transition waypoints,
and a runway.
Departure Airport
EIS
Selected
Departure
Departures Available at
KMCI
Departure Waypoint
Sequence
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Preview of
Selected
Departure
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Figure 5-68 Departure Loading Page - Selecting the Departure
Loading a departure procedure into a stored flight plan:
1) Select a stored flight plan from the Flight Plan Catalog Page.
AFCS
2) Select the EDIT Softkey; or press the MENU Key, select ‘Edit Flight Plan’, and press the ENT Key. The Stored
Flight Plan Page is displayed.
3) Select the LD DP Softkey; or press the MENU Key, select “Load Departure”, and press the ENT Key. The
Departure Loading Page is displayed.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
4) Select a departure. Press the ENT Key.
5) Select a runway served by the selected departure, if required. Press the ENT Key.
6) Select a transition for the selected departure. Press the ENT Key.
INDEX
APPENDICES
7) Press the ENT Key to load the selected departure procedure.
208
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58
190-00629-04 Rev. A
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Departure Airport
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Selected
Departure
Selected Runway
Preview of
Selected
Departure
Selected
Departure End
Point
Selected Transition
EIS
Departure Transition Points
Available
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Figure 5-69 Departure Loading Page - Selecting Transition
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Inserted Departure Header
- Departure Identifier: [departure
airport]-[departure runway].
[departure transition].
[departure end point]
(e.g., KMKC-ALL.WLDCT2.SLN)
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
Figure 5-70 Stored Flight Plan Page - Departure Inserted
INDEX
190-00629-04 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58
209
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
ARRIVAL (STAR)
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
A Standard Terminal Arrival (STAR) is loaded at the destination airport in the flight plan. Only one arrival
can be loaded at a time in a flight plan. The route is defined by selection of an arrival, the transition waypoints,
and a runway.
Destination Airport
EIS
Selected Arrival
Arrivals Available at KCOS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Selected Runway
Arrival Waypoint Sequence
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Preview of
Selected Arrival
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Figure 5-71 Arrival Loading Page - Selecting the Arrival
Loading an arrival procedure into a stored flight plan:
1) Select a stored flight plan from the Flight Plan Catalog Page.
AFCS
2) Select the EDIT Softkey; or press the MENU Key, select ‘Edit Flight Plan’, and press the ENT Key. The Stored
Flight Plan Page is displayed.
3) Select the LD STAR Softkey; or press the MENU Key, select “Load Arrival”, and press the ENT Key. The Arrival
Loading Page is displayed.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
4) Select an arrival. Press the ENT Key.
5) Select a transition for the selected arrival. Press the ENT Key.
6) Select a runway served by the selected arrival, if required. Press the ENT Key.
INDEX
APPENDICES
7) Press the ENT Key to load the selected arrival procedure.
210
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58
190-00629-04 Rev. A
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Destination Airport
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Selected Arrival
Selected Transition
Transitions Available with
DBRY1
EIS
Arrival Waypoint Sequence
Preview of
Selected Arrival
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Figure 5-72 Arrival Loading Page - Selecting the Transition
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Inserted Arrival Header
- Arrival Identifier:
[arrival airport]-[arrival transition].
[arrival].[arrival runway]
(e.g., KCOS-TBE.DBRY1.ALL)
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
Figure 5-73 Stored Flight Plan Page - Arrival Inserted
INDEX
190-00629-04 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58
211
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
APPROACH (APPR)
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
An Approach Procedure (APPR) can be loaded at any airport that has an approach available. Only one
approach can be loaded at a time in a flight plan. The route for a selected approach is defined by designating
transition waypoints.
EIS
Destination Airport
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Selected
Approach
Approaches Available at
KCOS
Barometric Minimum
Preview of
Selected
Approach
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Approach Waypoint
Sequence
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Figure 5-74 Approach Loading Page - Selecting the Approach
Loading an approach procedure into a stored flight plan:
1) Select a stored flight plan from the Flight Plan Catalog Page.
AFCS
2) Select the EDIT Softkey; or press the MENU Key, select ‘Edit Flight Plan’, and press the ENT Key. The Stored
Flight Plan Page is displayed.
3) Select the LD APR Softkey; or press the MENU Key, select “Load Approach”, and press the ENT Key. The
Approach Loading Page is displayed.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
4) Select an approach. Press the ENT Key.
5) Select a transition for the selected approach. Press the ENT Key.
INDEX
APPENDICES
6) Press the ENT Key to load the selected approach procedure.
212
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58
190-00629-04 Rev. A
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Destination Airport
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Selected
Approach
Selected Transition
Barometric Minimum
EIS
Transitions Available with
Selected Approach
Preview of
Selected
Approach
Approach Waypoint
Sequence
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Load Approach?
Figure 5-75 Approach Loading Page - Selecting the Transition
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Inserted Approach Header
- Approach Identifier: [approach
airport].[runway and approach type]
(e.g., KCOS-RNAV 35RGPS LPV)
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Figure 5-76 Stored Flight Plan Page - Approach Inserted
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-00629-04 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58
213
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
FLIGHT PLAN STORAGE
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The G1000 can store up to 99 flight plans, numbered 1 through 99. The active flight plan is erased when
the G1000 is powered off or when another flight plan is activated. Details about each stored flight plan can be
viewed on the Flight Plan Catalog Page and on the Stored Flight Plan Page.
Viewing information about a stored flight plan:
1) Press the FPL Key on the MFD to display the Active Flight Plan Page.
2) Turn the small FMS Knob clockwise one click to display the Flight Plan Catalog Page.
EIS
3) Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor and turn the FMS Knob to highlight the desired flight plan.
4) The Flight Plan Information is displayed showing departure, destination, total distance, and enroute safe altitude
information for the selected Flight Plan.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
5) Press the EDIT Softkey to open the Stored Flight Plan Page and view the waypoints in the flight plan.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
6) Press the FMS Knob to exit the Stored Flight Plan Page.
Flight Plan Name
(Comment)
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Selected Flight Plan
Preview of Selected
Flight Plan
Stored Flight Plan Info
AFCS
- Departure Airport
- Destination Airport
- Total Flight Plan Distance
- Enroute Safe Altitude
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Stored FPL Editing
Softkeys
Figure 5-77 Stored Flight Plan Information
APPENDICES
Storing an active flight plan from the Active Flight Plan Page or the Active Flight Plan Window:
1) Press the MENU Key.
2) Highlight ‘Store Flight Plan’.
3) Press the ENT Key.
INDEX
4) With ‘OK’ highlighted, press the ENT Key. The flight plan is stored in the next available position in the flight
plan list on the Flight Plan Catalog Page.
214
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58
190-00629-04 Rev. A
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
ACTIVATE A FLIGHT PLAN
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Activating a stored flight plan erases the active flight plan and replaces it with the flight plan being activated.
Inverting a stored flight plan reverses the waypoint order, erases the active flight plan, and replaces it with the
flight plan being activated (the stored flight plan is not changed).
Activating a stored flight plan on the MFD:
1) Press the FPL Key and turn the small FMS Knob to display the Flight Plan Catalog Page.
2) Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor, and turn the FMS Knob to highlight the desired flight plan.
EIS
3) Select the ACTIVE Softkey; or press the ENT Key twice; or press the MENU Key, highlight ‘Activate Flight Plan’,
and press the ENT Key. The ‘Activate Stored Flight Plan?’ window is displayed.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
4) With ‘OK’ highlighted, select the ENT Key. To cancel the request, press the CLR Key, or highlight ‘CANCEL’ and
press the ENT Key.
Inverting and activating a stored flight plan on the MFD:
1) Press the FPL Key and turn the small FMS Knob to display the Flight Plan Catalog Page.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
2) Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor, and turn the FMS Knob to highlight the desired flight plan.
3) Select the INVERT Softkey; or press the MENU Key, highlight ‘Invert & Activate FPL?’, and press the ENT Key.
The ‘Invert and activate stored flight plan?’ window is displayed.
4) With ‘OK’ highlighted, press the ENT Key. To cancel the request, press the CLR Key, or highlight ‘CANCEL’ and
press the ENT Key.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
COPY A FLIGHT PLAN
The G1000 allows copying a flight plan into a new flight plan memory slot, allowing editing, etc., without
affecting the original flight plan. This can be used to duplicate an existing stored flight plan for use in creating
a modified version of the original stored flight plan.
AFCS
Copying a stored flight plan on the MFD:
1) Press the FPL Key and turn the small FMS Knob to display the Flight Plan Catalog Page.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
2) Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor, and turn the FMS Knob to highlight the desired flight plan.
3) Select the COPY Softkey; or press the MENU Key, highlight ‘Copy Flight Plan’, and press the ENT Key. The
‘Copy to Flight Plan XX?’ window is displayed.
APPENDICES
4) With ‘OK’ highlighted, press the ENT Key to copy the flight plan. To cancel the request, press the CLR Key, or
highlight ‘CANCEL’ and press the ENT Key.
DELETE A STORED FLIGHT PLAN
Individual or all stored flight plans can be deleted from the G1000 memory.
Deleting a stored flight plan:
INDEX
1) Press the FPL Key and turn the small FMS Knob to display the Flight Plan Catalog Page.
2) Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor, and turn the FMS Knob to highlight the desired flight plan.
190-00629-04 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58
215
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
3) Select the DELETE Softkey; press the CLR Key; or press the MENU Key, highlight ‘Delete Flight Plan’, and press
the ENT Key. The ‘Delete Flight Plan XX?’ window is displayed.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
4) With ‘OK’ highlighted, press the ENT Key to delete the flight plan. To cancel the request, press the CLR Key, or
highlight ‘CANCEL’ and press the ENT Key.
NOTE: The option to delete all stored flight plans is not available while the aircraft is in flight.
Deleting all stored flight plans:
EIS
1) Press the FPL Key and turn the small FMS Knob to display the Flight Plan Catalog Page.
2) Press the MENU Key.
3) Highlight ‘Delete All’ and press the ENT Key. A ‘Delete all flight plans?’ confirmation window is displayed.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
4) With ‘OK’ highlighted, press the ENT Key to delete all flight plans. To cancel the request, press the CLR Key, or
highlight ‘CANCEL’ and press the ENT Key.
FLIGHT PLAN EDITING
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
The active flight plan or any stored flight plan can be edited. The edits made to the active flight plan affect
navigation as soon as they are entered.
DELETING THE ACTIVE FLIGHT PLAN
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
The G1000 allows deleting an active flight plan. Deleting the active flight plan suspends navigation by the
G1000.
Deleting the active flight plan:
1) Press the FPL Key to display the Active Flight Plan Page (MFD) or the Active Flight Plan Window (PFD).
AFCS
2) Press the MENU Key, highlight ‘Delete Flight Plan’, and press the ENT Key. The ‘Delete all waypoints in flight
plan?’ window is displayed.
3) With ‘OK’ highlighted, press the ENT Key to delete the active flight plan. To cancel the request, press the CLR
Key, or highlight ‘CANCEL’ and press the ENT Key.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
DELETING FLIGHT PLAN ITEMS
APPENDICES
Deleting an individual waypoint from the active flight plan:
INDEX
Individual waypoints, entire airways, and entire procedures can be deleted from a flight plan. Some waypoints
in the final approach segment (such as the FAF or MAP) can not be deleted individually. Attempting to delete
a waypoint that is not allowed results in a window displaying ‘Invalid flight plan modification.’
3) Press the CLR Key. The ‘Remove XXXXX?’ window is displayed.
1) Press the FPL Key to display the Active Flight Plan Page (MFD) or the Active Flight Plan Window (PFD).
2) Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor (not required on the PFD) and turn the large FMS Knob to highlight
the waypoint to be deleted.
216
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58
190-00629-04 Rev. A
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
4) With ‘OK’ highlighted, press the ENT Key. To cancel the request, press the CLR Key, or highlight ‘CANCEL’ and
press the ENT Key.
5) Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Deleting an entire airway from the active flight plan:
1) Press the FPL Key to display the Active Flight Plan Page (MFD) or the Active Flight Plan Window (PFD).
2) Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor (not required on the PFD) and turn the large FMS Knob to highlight
the white header of the airway to be deleted.
3) Press the CLR Key. The ‘Remove <airway name>?’ window is displayed.
EIS
4) With ‘OK’ highlighted, press the ENT Key. To cancel the request, press the CLR Key, or highlight ‘CANCEL’ and
press the ENT Key.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
5) Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor.
Deleting an entire procedure from the active flight plan:
1) Press the FPL Key to display the Active Flight Plan Page (MFD) or the Active Flight Plan Window (PFD).
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
2) Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor (not required on the PFD) and turn the large FMS Knob to highlight
the white header of the procedure to be deleted.
3) Press the CLR Key. The ‘Remove <procedure name> from flight plan?’ window is displayed.
4) With ‘OK’ highlighted, press the ENT Key. To cancel the request, press the CLR Key, or highlight ‘CANCEL’ and
press the ENT Key.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
5) Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor.
Or:
1) Press the FPL Key to display the Active Flight Plan Page (MFD) or the Active Flight Plan Window (PFD).
2) Press the MENU Key to display the Page Menu and turn the FMS Knob to highlight ‘Remove <procedure>’.
AFCS
3) Press the ENT Key. The ‘Remove <procedure name> from flight plan?’ window is displayed.
4) With ‘OK’ highlighted, press the ENT Key. To cancel the request, press the CLR Key, or highlight ‘CANCEL’ and
press the ENT Key.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Deleting an individual waypoint from a stored flight plan:
1) Press the FPL Key to display the Active Flight Plan Page.
2) Turn the small FMS Knob clockwise one click to display the Flight Plan Catalog Page.
APPENDICES
3) Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor and turn the FMS Knob to highlight the flight plan to be edited.
4) Select the EDIT Softkey; or press the MENU Key, select ‘Edit Flight Plan’ and press the ENT Key. The Stored
Flight Plan Page is displayed.
5) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the waypoint to be deleted.
190-00629-04 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58
INDEX
6) Press the CLR Key. The ‘Remove XXXXX?’ window is displayed.
217
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
7) With ‘OK’ highlighted, press the ENT Key. To cancel the request, press the CLR Key, or highlight ‘CANCEL’ and
press the ENT Key.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
Deleting an entire airway from a stored flight plan:
8) Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor.
1) Press the FPL Key to display the Active Flight Plan Page.
2) Turn the small FMS Knob clockwise one click to display the Flight Plan Catalog Page.
3) Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor and turn the FMS Knob to highlight the flight plan to be edited.
EIS
4) Select the EDIT Softkey; or press the MENU Key, select ‘Edit Flight Plan’ and press the ENT Key. The Stored
Flight Plan Page is displayed.
5) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the white header of the airway to be deleted.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
6) Press the CLR Key. The ‘Remove <airway name>?’ window is displayed.
7) With ‘OK’ highlighted, press the ENT Key. To cancel the request, press the CLR Key, or highlight ‘CANCEL’ and
press the ENT Key.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
8) Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor.
Deleting an entire procedure from a stored flight plan:
1) Press the FPL Key to display the Active Flight Plan Page.
2) Turn the small FMS Knob clockwise one click to display the Flight Plan Catalog Page.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
3) Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor and turn the FMS Knob to highlight the flight plan to be edited.
4) Select the EDIT Softkey; or press the MENU Key, select ‘Edit Flight Plan’ and press the ENT Key. The Stored
Flight Plan Page is displayed.
5) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the white header of the procedure to be deleted.
AFCS
6) Press the CLR Key. The ‘Remove <procedure name> from flight plan?’ window is displayed.
7) With ‘OK’ highlighted, press the ENT Key. To cancel the request, press the CLR Key, or highlight ‘CANCEL’ and
press the ENT Key.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
8) Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor.
Or:
1) Press the FPL Key to display the Active Flight Plan Page.
2) Turn the small FMS Knob clockwise one click to display the Flight Plan Catalog Page.
APPENDICES
3) Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor and turn the FMS Knob to highlight the flight plan to be edited.
4) Select the EDIT Softkey; or press the MENU Key, select ‘Edit Flight Plan’ and press the ENT Key. The Stored
Flight Plan Page is displayed.
5) Press the MENU Key to display the Page Menu and turn the FMS Knob to highlight ‘Remove <procedure>’.
INDEX
6) Press the ENT Key. The ‘Remove <procedure name> from flight plan?’ window is displayed.
218
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58
190-00629-04 Rev. A
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
7) With ‘OK’ highlighted, press the ENT Key. To cancel the request, press the CLR Key, or highlight ‘CANCEL’ and
press the ENT Key.
8) Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
CHANGING FLIGHT PLAN COMMENTS (NAMES)
The comment field (or name) of each flight plan can be changed to something that is useful for identification
and sorting.
Changing the active flight plan comment:
EIS
1) Press the FPL Key to display the Active Flight Plan Page.
2) Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor and turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the comment field.
3) Use the FMS Knobs to edit the comment.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
4) Press the ENT Key to accept the changes.
5) Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor.
Changing a stored flight plan comment:
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
1) Press the FPL Key to display the Active Flight Plan Page.
2) Turn the small FMS Knob clockwise one click to display the Flight Plan Catalog Page.
3) Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor and turn the FMS Knob to highlight the flight plan to be edited.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
4) Select the EDIT Softkey; or press the MENU Key, select ‘Edit Flight Plan’ and press the ENT Key. The Stored
Flight Plan Page is displayed.
5) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the comment field.
6) Use the FMS Knobs to edit the comment.
7) Press the ENT Key to accept the changes.
AFCS
8) Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor.
ALONG TRACK OFFSETS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
A waypoint having an “along track offset” distance from an existing waypoint can be entered into a flight plan.
Along track offset waypoints lie along the path of the existing flight plan, and can be used to make the system
reach a specified altitude before or after reaching the specified flight plan waypoint. Offset distances can be
entered from 1 to 999 nm in increments of 1 nm. Entering a negative offset distance results in an along track
offset waypoint inserted before the selected waypoint, whereas entering a positive offset distance results in an
along track offset waypoint inserted after the selected waypoint. Multiple offset waypoints are allowed.
APPENDICES
190-00629-04 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58
INDEX
A waypoint must be adjacent to its parent waypoint in the flight plan, so the system limits the along-track
distance to less than the length of the leg before or after the selected waypoint. If the selected waypoint is the
active waypoint, the distance is limited to less than the distance to go to the active waypoint. Assigning an along
track offset to a leg with indeterminate length is not permitted. An along track offset is not allowed at or after
the final approach fix of an approach.
219
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
An along track offset distance cannot be modified once entered. If the along track offset distance must be
changed, the existing along track offset waypoint must be deleted and a new one created with the new offset
distance.
Along Track Offset
Waypoint and Distance
from Flight Plan Waypoint
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Along Track
Offset Waypoint
and Distance
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Figure 5-78 Along Track Offset
Entering an along track offset distance:
1) Press the FPL Key to display the Active Flight Plan Page (MFD) or the Active Flight Plan Window (PFD).
2) Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor (not required on the PFD) and turn the large FMS Knob to highlight
the waypoint for the along track offset.
AFCS
3) Press the ATK OFST Softkey (MFD only); or press the MENU Key, highlight ‘Create ATK Offset Waypoint’, and
press the ENT Key.
4) Enter a positive or negative offset distance in the range of +/- 1 to 99 nm (limited by leg distances).
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
5) Press the ENT Key to create the offset waypoint.
6) Turn the small FMS Knob to enter the desired altitude for the offset.
7) Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor.
APPENDICES
PARALLEL TRACK
The Parallel Track (PTK) feature allows creation of a parallel course offset of 1 to 50 nm left or right of the
current flight plan. When Parallel Track is activated, the course line drawn on the map pages shows the parallel
course, and waypoint names have a lower case “p” placed after the identifier.
INDEX
Using direct-to, loading an approach, a holding pattern, or editing and activating the flight plan automatically
cancels Parallel Track. Parallel Track is also cancelled if a course change occurs greater than 120° or the parallel
tracks overlap as a result of the course change.
220
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58
190-00629-04 Rev. A
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
NOTE: Vertical navigation is unavailable while the Parallel Track feature is active.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Active Flight Plan prior to Parallel Track
EIS
Selecting Parallel
Track
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Figure 5-79 Active Flight Plan Window - Selecting Parallel Track
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Activating parallel track:
1) Press the FPL Key to display the Active Flight Plan Page (MFD) or the Active Flight Plan Window (PFD).
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
2) Press the MENU Key, highlight ‘Parallel Track’, and press the ENT Key. The Parallel Track Window is displayed
with the direction field highlighted.
3) Turn the small FMS Knob to select ‘Left’ or ‘Right’ and press the ENT Key. The ‘DISTANCE’ field is highlighted.
4) Turn the small FMS Knob to enter a distance from 1-99 nm and press the ENT Key. ‘ACTIVATE PARALLEL
TRACK’ is highlighted.
AFCS
5) Press the ENT Key to activate parallel track. Press the FMS Knob or the CLR Key to cancel the parallel track
activation.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-00629-04 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58
221
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
Offset Direction
Offset Distance
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Activation Prompt
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Figure 5-80 Parallel Track Window
Parallel Track Waypoints
- TIFTO-p
- TOP-p
- ULNAZ-p
- ...
Activating Parallel Track
affects the active flight
plan from the current
position on (will not affect
an approach)
AFCS
Parallel Track
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Original Track
APPENDICES
Figure 5-81 Parallel Track Active
INDEX
If the parallel track proposed by the offset direction and distance is not allowed by the system, the activation
prompt is displayed, but disabled. Parallel Track cannot be activated if a course is set using direct-to or if the
active leg is the first leg of the departure procedure. Attempting to activate parallel track with these conditions
results in the message ‘Parallel Track Unavailable Invalid Route Geometry’. If an approach leg is active the status
indicates that the system is unable to activate the parallel track with the message ‘Parallel Track Unavailable
222
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58
190-00629-04 Rev. A
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Approach Leg Active’. If the offset direction and distance results in an unreasonable route geometry the status
indicates that the system is unable to activate the parallel track because of invalid geometry.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Subdued Prompt
(Unavailable)
Unavailable Status
Approach
Active
EIS
Invalid
Geometry
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Figure 5-82 Parallel Track Unavailable
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
If the active leg is not a track between two fixes (TF) or a course to a fix (DF) leg, the status
indicates that the system is unable to activate the parallel track because parallel track is not available for the
active leg type.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Offset Direction &
Distance Subdued
(Unavailable)
Cancel Prompt
Active Status
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Figure 5-83 Cancelling Parallel Track
Cancelling parallel track:
APPENDICES
1) Press the FPL Key to display the Active Flight Plan Page (MFD) or the Active Flight Plan Window (PFD).
2) Press the MENU Key, highlight ‘Parallel Track’, and press the ENT Key. The Parallel Track Window is displayed
with ‘CANCEL PARALLEL TRACK?’ highlighted.
3) Press the ENT Key.
INDEX
190-00629-04 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58
223
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
ACTIVATING A FLIGHT PLAN LEG
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
Activating a flight plan leg:
The G1000 allows selection of a highlighted leg as the “active leg” (the flight plan leg which is currently
used for navigation guidance).
1) Press the FPL Key to display the Active Flight Plan Page (MFD) or the Active Flight Plan Window (PFD).
2) Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor (not required on the PFD) and turn the large FMS Knob to highlight
the destination waypoint for the desired leg.
EIS
3) Select the ACT LEG Softkey (MFD only); or press the MENU Key, highlight ‘Activate Leg’, and press the ENT Key.
A confirmation window is displayed with ‘ACTIVATE’ highlighted.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
4) Press the ENT Key to activate the flight plan leg. To cancel, press the CLR Key, or highlight ‘CANCEL’ and press
the ENT Key.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
5) Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor.
Selected Destination
Waypoint
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Current
Active Leg
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Activate Leg Softkey
INDEX
APPENDICES
Figure 5-84 Active Flight Plan Page - Selecting the Leg Destination Waypoint
224
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58
190-00629-04 Rev. A
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
New Active
Flight Plan Leg
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Confirmation Window
Figure 5-85 Active Flight Plan Page - New Active Leg
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
INVERTING A FLIGHT PLAN
Any flight plan may be inverted (reversed) for navigation back to the original departure point.
Inverting the active flight plan:
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
1) Press the FPL Key to display the Active Flight Plan Page (MFD) or the Active Flight Plan Window (PFD).2)
Press the MENU Key, highlight ‘Invert Flight Plan’, and press the ENT Key. An ‘Invert Active Flight Plan?’
confirmation window is displayed.
3) Select ‘OK’.
AFCS
4) Press the ENT Key to invert and activate the active flight plan. To cancel, press the CLR Key, or highlight
‘CANCEL’ and press the ENT Key.
Inverting and activating a stored flight plan:
1) Press the FPL Key and turn the small FMS Knob to display the Flight Plan Catalog Page.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
2) Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor, and turn the FMS Knob to highlight the desired flight plan.
3) Select the INVERT Softkey; or press the MENU Key, highlight ‘Invert & Activate FPL?’, and press the ENT Key.
The ‘Invert and activate stored flight plan?’ window is displayed.
APPENDICES
4) With ‘OK’ highlighted, press the ENT Key. To cancel the request, press the CLR Key, or highlight ‘CANCEL’ and
press the ENT Key.
INDEX
190-00629-04 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58
225
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
FLIGHT PLAN VIEWS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Information about flight plans can be viewed in more than one way. The active flight plan can be configured
to show cumulative distance over the length of the flight plan or the distance for each leg of the flight plan;
and the active flight plan can be viewed in a narrow or wide view. In the wide view, additional information is
displayed: Fuel Remaining (FUEL REM), Estimated Time Enroute (ETE), Estimated Time of Arrival (ETA), and
Bearing to the waypoint (BRG).
Switching between leg-to-leg waypoint distance and cumulative waypoint distance:
1) Press the FPL Key on the MFD to display the Active Flight Plan Page.
EIS
2) Press the VIEW Softkey to display the CUM and LEG-LEG Softkeys.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
3) Press the CUM Softkey to view cumulative waypoint distance, or press the LEG-LEG Softkey to view leg-to-leg
waypoint distance.
4) Press the BACK Softkey to return to the top level active flight plan softkeys.
Active Flight Plan Cumulative Distance
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Active Flight Plan Leg to Leg Distance
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
WIDE Softkey, NARROW Softkey, LEG-LEG Softkey, CUM Softkey
Figure 5-86 Active Flight Plan - Leg to Leg vs. Cumulative Distance
APPENDICES
Switching between wide and narrow view:
1) Press the FPL Key on the MFD to display the Active Flight Plan Page.
2) Press the VIEW Softkey to display the WIDE and NARROW Softkeys.
3) Press the WIDE Softkey to display the wide view, or press the NARROW Softkey to display the narrow view.
INDEX
4) Press the BACK Softkey to return to the top level active flight plan softkeys.
226
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58
190-00629-04 Rev. A
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Active Flight Plan Narrow View
Active Flight Plan Wide View
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
WIDE Softkey, NARROW Softkey, LEG-LEG Softkey, CUM Softkey
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Figure 5-87 Active Flight Plan - Wide vs. Narrow View
COLLAPSING AIRWAYS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
The G1000 allows airways on the active flight plan to be collapsed or expanded from the Active Flight Plan
Page/Window. When airways have been collapsed, it is indicated on the airway heading.
When airways are collapsed, leg-to-leg computed values such as DIS or ETE shown for the exit waypoint
reflect the total of all the legs on the airway that have been hidden in the collapsed display. The DTK value is
inhibited because it is not usable in this context.
AFCS
The Active Flight Plan Page always keeps the following three waypoints visible: “From” waypoint, “To”
waypoint, and “Next” waypoint. To prevent one or more of these waypoints from being hidden in a collapsed
airway segment, the airway segment that contains either the “To” or the “Next” waypoint is automatically
expanded. When an airway is loaded, airways are automatically expanded to facilitate flight plan review.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Q3.FEPOT Airway
Collapsed View
Expanded View
APPENDICES
INDEX
Figure 5-88 Expanded/Collapsed Airways
190-00629-04 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58
227
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
Collapsing/expanding the airways in the active flight plan:
1) Press the FPL Key to display the Active Flight Plan Page (MFD) or the Active Flight Plan Window (PFD).
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
2) Press the MENU Key, highlight ‘Collapse Airways’ or ‘Expand Airways’, and press the ENT Key. The airways are
collapsed/expanded.
CLOSEST POINT OF FPL
EIS
‘Closest Point of FPL’ calculates the bearing and closest distance at which a flight plan passes a reference
waypoint, and creates a new user waypoint along the flight plan at the location closest to a chosen reference
waypoint.
Determining the closest point along the active flight plan to a selected waypoint:
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
1) Press the FPL Key to display the Active Flight Plan Page (MFD) or the Active Flight Plan Window (PFD).
2) Press the MENU Key, highlight ‘Closest Point Of FPL’’, and press the ENT Key. A window appears with the
reference waypoint field highlighted.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
3) Enter the identifier of the reference waypoint and press the ENT Key. The G1000 displays the bearing (BRG) and
distance (DIS) to the closest point along the flight plan to the selected reference waypoint and creates a user
waypoint at this location. The name for the new user waypoint is derived from the identifier of the reference
waypoint.
USER-DEFINED HOLDING PATTERNS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
A holding pattern can be defined at any active flight plan waypoint, at the aircraft present position, or at a
direct-to waypoint.
Creating a user-defined hold at an active flight plan waypoint:
1) Press the FPL Key to display the Active Flight Plan Page (MFD) or the Active Flight Plan Window (PFD).
AFCS
2) Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor (not required on the PFD) and turn the large FMS Knob to highlight
the waypoint for the hold.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
3) Press the MENU Key, highlight ‘Hold At Waypoint’, and press the ENT Key. The HOLD AT window appears with
the course field highlighted.
4) Use the FMS Knobs to edit the entry course, and press the ENT Key.
5) Use the small FMS Knob to select ‘INBOUND’ or ‘OUTBOUND’ course direction, and press the ENT Key.
6) Use the small FMS Knob to select ‘TIME’ or ‘DIST’ length mode, and press the ENT Key.
APPENDICES
7) Use the FMS Knobs to edit the length, and press the ENT Key.
8) Use the small FMS Knob to select ‘RIGHT’ or ‘LEFT’ turn direction, and press the ENT Key.
9) Use the FMS Knobs to edit the Expect Further Clearance Time (EFC TIME), and press the ENT Key.
INDEX
10) Press the ENT Key while ‘LOAD?’ is highlighted to insert the hold into the flight plan.
228
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58
190-00629-04 Rev. A
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Waypoint
Selected
Hold At
Waypoint
Menu
Selection
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Location of Hold
Hold Entry Course
Course Direction
(INBOUND or OUTBOUND)
(TIME or DIST))
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Leg Length Mode Button
Leg Length
(Time in nm or Distance in minutes)
Turn Direction
(RIGHT or LEFT)
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Map of Hold Location
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Expect Further Clearance Time
APPENDICES
Load Hold in Active Flight Plan
Figure 5-89 Creating a User Defined Holding Pattern at an Active Flight Plan Waypoint
INDEX
Creating a user-defined hold at the aircraft present position:
1) Press the FPL Key to display the Active Flight Plan Page (MFD) or the Active Flight Plan Window (PFD).
2) Press the MENU Key, highlight ‘Hold At Present Position’, and press the ENT Key. The HOLD AT window appears
with the course field highlighted.
190-00629-04 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58
229
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
3) If desired, use the FMS Knobs to edit the entry course, and press the ENT Key.
4) Use the small FMS Knob to select ‘INBOUND’ or ‘OUTBOUND’ course direction, and press the ENT Key.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
5) Use the small FMS Knob to select ‘TIME’ or ‘DIST’ length mode, and press the ENT Key.
6) Use the FMS Knobs to edit the length, and press the ENT Key.
7) Use the small FMS Knob to select ‘RIGHT’ or ‘LEFT’ turn direction, and press the ENT Key.
8) Use the FMS Knobs to edit the Expect Further Clearance Time (EFC TIME), and press the ENT Key.
EIS
9) Press the ENT Key while ‘ACTIVATE?’ is highlighted to create an Offroute Direct-to hold waypoint at the aircraft
present position and activate the hold.
Creating a user-defined hold at a direct-to waypoint:
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
1) Press a Direct-to Key and set up the direct-to waypoint as desired, but select ‘HOLD?’ instead of ‘ACTIVATE?’
when finished (MFD or PFD).
2) Use the FMS Knobs to edit the entry course, and press the ENT Key.
3) Use the small FMS Knob to select ‘INBOUND’ or ‘OUTBOUND’ course direction, and press the ENT Key.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
4) Use the small FMS Knob to select ‘TIME’ or ‘DIST’ length mode, and press the ENT Key.
5) Use the FMS Knobs to edit the length, and press the ENT Key.
6) Use the small FMS Knob to select ‘RIGHT’ or ‘LEFT’ turn direction, and press the ENT Key.
7) Use the FMS Knobs to edit the Expect Further Clearance Time (EFC TIME), and press the ENT Key.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
8) Press the ENT Key while ‘ACTIVATE?’ is highlighted to activate the direct-to with the user-defined hold defined
at the direct-to waypoint. (If the direct-to wayoint is part of the active flight plan, the HOLD is inserted into
the active flight plan. If the direct-to waypoint is not part of the active flight plan, an off-route direct-to hold is
created.)
AFCS
Exiting a user-defined hold inserted into the active flight plan:
Press the SUSP Softkey. The system will provide guidance to follow the holding pattern to the inbound course
and resume automatic waypoint sequencing.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Removing a user-defined hold inserted into the active flight plan:
1) Press the FPL Key to display the Active Flight Plan Page (MFD) or the Active Flight Plan Window (PFD).
2) Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor (not required on the PFD) and turn the large FMS Knob to highlight
the HOLD waypoint.
APPENDICES
3) Press the CLR Key. A ‘Remove Holding Pattern?’ confirmation window is displayed.
4) Select ‘OK’ and press the ENT Key. The holding pattern is removed from the active flight plan. Select ‘CANCEL’
and press the ENT Key to cancel the removal of the holding pattern.
Removing a user-defined hold at an off-route direct-to:
INDEX
1) Press a Direct To Key to display the DIRECT TO Window (PFD or MFD).
2) Press the MENU Key to display the PAGE MENU with the cursor on the ‘Cancel Direct-To NAV’ selection.
3) Press the ENT Key. The holding pattern is removed.
230
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58
190-00629-04 Rev. A
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
EIS
Hold At
Present
Position
Menu
Selection
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Location of Hold
Hold Entry Course
Course Direction
(INBOUND or OUTBOUND)
(TIME or DIST))
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Leg Length Mode Button
Leg Length
(Time in nm or Distance in minutes)
Turn Direction
(RIGHT or LEFT)
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Map of Hold Location
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Expect Further Clearance Time
APPENDICES
Activate Hold
Figure 5-90 Creating a User Defined Holding Pattern at the Aircraft Present Position
INDEX
190-00629-04 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58
231
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
EIS
Waypoint
Selected
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Hold Entry Course
Location of Hold
Course Direction
(INBOUND or OUTBOUND)
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Leg Length
(Time in nm or
Distance in minutes)
Turn Direction
(RIGHT or LEFT)
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Leg Length Mode Button
(TIME or DIST))
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
Map of Hold Location
Expect Further
Clearance Time
APPENDICES
Hold At Direct To
Waypoint selection
Load Hold and
Activate Direct To
INDEX
Figure 5-91 Creating a User Defined Holding Pattern at a Direct To Waypoint
232
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58
190-00629-04 Rev. A
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
5.7 VERTICAL NAVIGATION
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
NOTE: The system supports vertical path guidance and altitude constraints for the following leg types: AF,
CD, CF, CI, CR, DF, FC, FD, PI, RF, and TF. Altitude constraints are not retained in stored flight plans.
Current Vertical Navigation Profile
EIS
The G1000 system Vertical Navigation (VNV) feature provides vertical profile guidance during the enroute
and teminal phases of flight. Guidance based on specified altitudes at waypoints in the active flight plan or to a
direct-to waypoint is provided. It includes vertical path guidance to a descending path, which is provided as a
linear deviation from the desired path. The desired path is defined by a line joining two waypoints with specified
altitudes or as a vertical angle from a specified waypoint/altitude. The vertical waypoints are integrated into the
active flight plan. Both manual and autopilot-coupled guidance are supported.
Current Vertical Navigation Profile
Enabled (valid data)
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Disabled (fields dashed)
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
ENBL VNV Softkey
CNCL VNV Softkey
Figure 5-92 Enabling/Disabling Vertical Navigation
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Enabling VNV guidance:
1) Press the FPL Key to display the Active Flight Plan Page on the MFD.
APPENDICES
2) Press the ENBL VNV Softkey; or press the MENU Key, highlight ‘Enable VNV’, and press the ENT Key. Vertical
navigation is enabled, and vertical guidance begins with the waypoint shown in the CURRENT VNV PROFILE box
(defaults first waypoint in the active flight plan with an altitude enabled for vertical navigation (e.g., HABUK)).
Disabling VNV guidance:
1) Press the FPL Key to display the Active Flight Plan Page on the MFD.
INDEX
2) Press the CNCL VNV Softkey; or press the MENU Key, highlight ‘Cancel VNV’, and press the ENT Key. Vertical
navigation is disabled.
190-00629-04 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58
233
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Canceling vertical navigation results in vertical deviation (V DEV), vertical speed required (VS REQ), and time to
top of descent/bottom of descent (TOD/BOD) going invalid. The Vertical Deviation Indicator (VDI) and Required
Vertical Speed Indicator (RVSI) on the PFD are removed, and the V DEV, VS REQ, and TOD items displayed in
the CURRENT VNV PROFILE box are dashed. VNV remains disabled until manually enabled. Vertical guidance
in reversionary mode can only be enabled for a direct-to waypoint.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
The G1000 allows a vertical navigation direct-to to any waypoint in the active flight plan with an altitude
constraint “designated” for vertical guidance. Selecting the VNV Direct-to Softkey on the Active Flight Plan Page
allows the flight plan to be flown, while vertical guidance based on the altitude constraint at the VNV direct-to
waypoint is provided. The altitude change begins immediately and is spread along the flight plan from current
position to the vertical direct-to waypoint, not just along the leg for the direct-to waypoint. A direct-to with
altitude constraint activated by pressing the Direct-to Key also provides vertical guidance, but would bypass
flight plan waypoints between the current position in the flight plan and the direct-to waypoint. A top of descent
(TOD) point is computed based on the default flight path angle; descent begins once the TOD is reached.
Current Vertical Navigation Profile
Current Vertical Navigation Profile
After VNV Direct-to
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Prior to VNV Direct-to
VNV Direct-To Softkey
VNV PROF Softkey
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Figure 5-93 Vertical Navigation Direct-To
Activating a vertical navigation direct-to:
APPENDICES
1) Press the FPL Key to display the Active Flight Plan Page on the MFD.
2) Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor and turn the FMS Knob to highlight the desired waypoint.
NOTE: The selected waypoint must have a designated altitude constraint (light blue number) to be used. If
INDEX
not, the first waypoint in the flight plan with a designated altitude constraint is selected.
3) Press the VNV Direct-To Softkey; or press the MENU Key, highlight ‘VNV Direct-To’, and press the ENT Key.
An ‘Activate vertical Direct-to to: NNNNNFT at XXXXXX?’ confirmation window is displayed.
234
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58
190-00629-04 Rev. A
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
4) Press the ENT Key. Vertical guidance begins to the altitude constraint for the selected waypoint.
5) Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The vertical navigation profile can be modified by directly entering a vertical speed target (VS TGT) and/or flight
path angle (FPA) in the CURRENT VNV PROFILE box.
Modifying the VS TGT and FPA:
1) Press the FPL Key to display the Active Flight Plan Page on the MFD.
2) Press the VNV PROF Softkey; or press the MENU Key, highlight ‘Select VNV Profile Window’, and press the ENT
Key. The cursor is now located in the CURRENT VNV PROFILE box.
EIS
3) Turn the FMS Knobs as needed to edit the values.
4) Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
ALTITUDE CONSTRAINTS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
The G1000 system can use altitude constraints associated with lateral waypoints to give guidance for vertical
navigation. These altitudes are, depending on the specific instance, manually entered or retrieved from the
published altitudes in the navigation database. The navigation database only contains altitudes for procedures
that call for “Cross at” altitudes. If the procedure states “Expect to cross at,” then the altitude is not in the
database. In this case the altitude may be entered manually.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Displayed Text
Examples
Cross AT
or ABOVE
5,000 ft
Large White Text
Large Light Blue Text
Cross AT
2,300 ft
Cross AT
or BELOW
3,000 ft
AFCS
Small Light Blue Text
Small Light Blue
Subdued Text
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Altitude Constraint
Examples
Small White Text with
Altitude Restriction Bar
Figure 5-94 Waypoint Altitude Constraints
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-00629-04 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58
235
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
White Text
Light Blue Text
Light Blue Subdued Text
Large Altitude calculated by the system
Text estimating the altitude of the aircraft as
it passes over the navigation point. This
altitude is provided as a reference and is
not designated to be used in determining
vertical speed and deviation guidance.
Altitude has been entered manually.
Altitude is designated for use in giving
vertical speed and deviation guidance.
Altitude does not match the published
altitude in navigation database or no
published altitude exists.
The system cannot use this
altitude in determining vertical
speed and deviation guidance
because of an invalid constraint
condition.
Small
Text
Altitude is designated for use in giving
vertical speed and deviation guidance.
Altitude has been retrieved from the
navigation database or has been entered
manually and matches a published
altitude in the navigation database.
The system cannot use this
altitude in determining vertical
speed and deviation guidance
because of an invalid constraint
condition.
Altitude is not designated to be used in
determining vertical speed and deviation
guidance. Altitude has been retrieved
from the navigation database and is
provided as a reference.
Table 5-8 Altitude Constraint Size and Color Coding
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Altitudes associated with approach procedures are “auto-designated”. This means the system automatically
uses the altitudes loaded with the approach for giving vertical speed and deviation guidance. Note that these
altitudes are displayed as blue text up to, but not including, the FAF. The FAF is always a “reference only”
altitude and cannot be designated, unless the selected approach does not provide vertical guidance. In this case,
the FAF altitude can be designated.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Altitudes that have been designated for use in vertical guidance can be “un-designated” using the CLR Key.
The altitude is now displayed only as a reference. It is not used to give vertical guidance. Other displayed
altitudes may change due to re-calculations or be rendered invalid as a result of manually changing an altitude
to a non-designated altitude.
Designating a waypoint altitude to be used for vertical guidance:
1) Press the FPL Key to display the Active Flight Plan Page on the MFD.
AFCS
2) Press the FMS Knob, and turn to highlight the desired waypoint altitude.
3) Turn the small FMS Knob to enter editing mode.
4) Press the ENT Key. The altitude is now shown in blue, indicating it is usable for vertical guidance.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Designating a procedure waypoint altitude to be used for vertical guidance:
1) Press the FPL Key to display the Active Flight Plan Page on the MFD.
2) Press the FMS Knob, and turn to highlight the desired waypoint altitude.
APPENDICES
3) Press the ENT Key. The altitude is now shown in blue, indicating it is usable for vertical guidance.
INDEX
Altitude constraints are displayed and entered in feet mean sea level (MSL) values to the nearest hundred. An
altitude constraint in feet above ground level (AGL) format is supported for airports. When a database altitude
restriction is displayed, the G1000 allows entry of a different altitude when creating a waypoint, effectively
overriding the database restriction (only before the FAF). When a database altitude restriction of type “AT or
ABOVE” or “AT or BELOW” is activated, the system uses the “AT” portion of the restriction to define the vertical
profile.
236
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58
190-00629-04 Rev. A
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
An altitude constraint is invalid if:
• Meeting the constraint requires the aircraft to climb
• Meeting the constraint requires the maximum flight path angle or maximum vertical speed to be exceeded
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
• The altitude constraint results in a TOD behind the aircraft present position
• The constraint is within a leg type for which altitude constraints are not supported
• The altitude constraint is added to the FAF of an approach that provides vertical guidance (i.e., ILS or GPS
SBAS approach)
• The altitude constraint is added to a waypoint past the FAF.
EIS
Entering/modifiying an altitude constraint:
1) Press the FPL Key to display the Active Flight Plan Page on the MFD.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
2) Press the FMS Knob, and turn to highlight the desired waypoint altitude constraint.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
3) Enter an altitude constraint value using the FMS Knobs. To enter altitudes as a flight level, turn the small
FMS Knob counter-clockwise past zero or clockwise past 9 on the first character, and the system automatically
changes to show units of Flight Level. Turn the large FMS Knob clockwise to highlight the first zero and enter
the three digit flight level.
4) Press the ENT Key to accept the altitude constraint; if the selected waypoint is an airport, an additional choice
is displayed. Turn the small FMS Knob to choose ‘MSL’ or ‘AGL’, and press the ENT Key to accept the altitude.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Altitude constraints can be modified or deleted after having been added to the flight plan. In the event
an altitude constraint is deleted and the navigation database contains an altitude restriction for the lateral
waypoint, the G1000 displays the altitude restriction from the database provided no predicted altitude
can be provided. The G1000 also provides a way to reinstate a published altitude constraint that has been
edited.
Deleting an altitude constraint provided by the navigation database:
AFCS
1) Press the FPL Key to display the Active Flight Plan Page on the MFD.
2) Press the FMS Knob, and turn to highlight the desired waypoint altitude constraint.
3) Press the CLR Key. A ‘Remove VNV altitude constraint?’ confirmation window is displayed.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
4) Select ‘OK’ and press the ENT Key.
Deleting an altitude constraint that has been manually entered:
1) Press the FPL Key to display the Active Flight Plan Page on the MFD.
APPENDICES
2) Press the FMS Knob, and turn to highlight the desired waypoint altitude constraint.
3) Press the CLR Key. A ‘Remove or Revert to published VNV altitude of nnnnnFT?’ confirmation window is
displayed.
190-00629-04 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58
INDEX
4) Select ‘REMOVE’ and press the ENT Key. The manually entered altitude is deleted (it is replaced by a system
calculated altitude, if available).
237
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
Reverting a manually entered altitude constraint back to the navigation database value:
1) Press the FPL Key to display the Active Flight Plan Page on the MFD.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
2) Press the FMS Knob, and turn to highlight the desired waypoint altitude constraint.
3) Press the CLR Key. A ‘Remove or Revert to published VNV altitude of nnnnnFT?’ confirmation window is
displayed.
4) Select ‘REVERT’ and press the ENT Key. The altitude is changed to the navigation database value.
5) Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor.
EIS
Modifying a system calculated altitude constraint:
1) Press the FPL Key to display the Active Flight Plan Page on the MFD.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
2) Press the FMS Knob, and turn to highlight the desired waypoint altitude constraint.
3) Press the CLR Key. An ‘Edit or Revert to published VNV altitude of nnnnnFT?’ confirmation window is
displayed.
4) Select ‘EDIT’ and press the ENT Key.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
5) Edit the value using the FMS Knobs, and press the ENT Key.
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
6) Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor.
238
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58
190-00629-04 Rev. A
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
5.8 PROCEDURES
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The G1000 can access the whole range of instrument procedures available. Departures (DPs), arrivals (STARs),
and non-precision and precision approaches (APPRs) are stored within the database and can be loaded using the
Procedures (PROC) Key.
EIS
The selected procedure for the departure or arrival airport is added to the active flight plan. No waypoints are
required to be in the active flight plan to load procedures; however, if the departure and arrival airport are already
loaded, the procedure loading window defaults to the appropriate airport, saving some time selecting the correct
airport on the Procedure Loading Page. Whenever an approach is selected, the choice to either “load” or “activate”
is given. “Loading” adds the approach to the end of the flight plan without immediately using it for navigation
guidance. This allows continued navigation via the intermediate waypoints in the original flight plan, but keeps
the procedure available on the Active Flight Plan Page for quick activation when needed. “Activating” also adds
the procedure to the end of the flight plan but immediately begins to provide guidance to the first waypoint in
the approach.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
The system adds terminal procedures to the flight plan based on leg types coded within that procedure in the
navigation database. If the terminal procedure in the flight plan contains an identifier like ‘6368ft’, that indicates
a leg that terminates when the specified altitude (6368 feet) has been exceeded. A heading leg in the flight plan
displays ‘hdg’ preceding the DTK (e.g. ‘hdg 008°’). A flight plan leg requiring the pilot to manually intitiate
sequencing to the next leg displays ‘MANSEQ’ as the identifier.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Heading Leg Terminating at the
Specified Altitude
Manually Sequenced Heading Leg
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Figure 5-95 Procedure Leg Identifiers
DEPARTURES
APPENDICES
A Departure Procedure (DP) is loaded at the departure airport in the flight plan. Only one departure can be
loaded at a time in a flight plan. If a departure is loaded when another departure is already in the active flight
plan, the new departure replaces the previous departure. The route is defined by selection of a departure, the
transition waypoints, and a runway.
LOADING A DEPARTURE INTO THE ACTIVE FLIGHT PLAN
INDEX
Loading a departure into the active flight plan using the PROC Key:
1) Press the PROC Key. The Procedures Window is displayed.
2) Highlight ‘SELECT DEPARTURE’.
190-00629-04 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58
239
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
3) Press the ENT Key. The Departure Loading Page is displayed.
4) Use the FMS Knob to select an airport and press the ENT Key.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
5) Select a departure from the list and press the ENT Key.
6) Select a runway (if required) and press the ENT Key.
7) Select a transition (if required) and press the ENT Key. ‘LOAD?’ is highlighted.
8) Press the ENT Key to load the departure procedure.
Available Procedure Actions
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
Departure Airport
Loaded Procedures
Departure Preview
Departure Choices
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
Figure 5-96 Departure Selection
240
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58
190-00629-04 Rev. A
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Selected Departure
Loaded Departure
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Procedure Loading Page Selection Softkeys
Figure 5-97 Departure Loading
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-00629-04 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58
241
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Viewing available departures at an airport:
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
2) To select another airport, press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor, enter an identifier/facility name/city, and
press the ENT Key.
EIS
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
5) Turn the small FMS Knob to view the available runways. Press the ENT Key to select the runway. The cursor
moves to the Transition box (only if there are available transitions). The departure is previewed on the map.
1) From the Airport Information Page (first page in the WPT group), select the DP Softkey. The Departure Information
Page is displayed, defaulting to the airport displayed on the Airport information Page.
3) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the Departure. The departure is previewed on the map.
4) Turn the small FMS Knob to view the available departures. Press the ENT Key to select the departure. The cursor
moves to the Runway box. The departure is previewed on the map.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
6) Turn the small FMS Knob to view the available transitions. Press the ENT Key to select the transition. The cursor
moves to the Sequence box. The departure is previewed on the map.
7) Select the INFO-x Softkey to return to the Airport Information Page.
Loading a departure into the active flight plan from the Departure Information Page:
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
1) From the Airport Information Page (first page in the WPT group), press the DP Softkey. The Departure Information
Page is displayed, defaulting to the airport displayed on the Airport information Page.
2) To select another airport, press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor, enter an identifier/facility name/city, and
press the ENT Key.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
3) Select a different departure, if desired.
a) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the Departure. The departure is previewed on the map.
b) Turn the small FMS Knob to view the available departures. Press the ENT Key to select the departure. The cursor
moves to the Runway box. The departure is previewed on the map.
AFCS
c) Turn the small FMS Knob to view the available runways. Press the ENT Key to select the runway. The cursor
moves to the Transition box (only if there are available transitions). The departure is previewed on the map.
d) Turn the small FMS Knob to view the available transitions. Press the ENT Key to select the transition. The cursor
moves to the Sequence box. The departure is previewed on the map.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
4) Press the MENU Key to display the Departure Information Page Menu.
5) Turn the FMS Knob to highlight ‘Load Departure’.
6) Press the ENT Key to load the departure procedure into the active flight plan.
APPENDICES
REMOVING A DEPARTURE FROM THE ACTIVE FLIGHT PLAN
When plans change while flying IFR, departures can be easily removed from the Active Flight Plan.
Removing a departure procedure from the active flight plan:
1) Press the FPL Key to display the Active Flight Plan Page (MFD) or the Active Flight Plan Window (PFD).
INDEX
2) Press the MENU Key, and highlight ‘Remove Departure’.
242
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58
190-00629-04 Rev. A
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
3) Press the ENT Key. A confirmation window is displayed listing the departure procedure.
4) With ‘OK’ highlighted, press the ENT Key. To cancel the removal request, highlight ‘CANCEL’ and press the ENT
Key.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Or:
1) Press the FPL Key to display the Active Flight Plan Page (MFD) or the Active Flight Plan Window (PFD).
2) Press the FMS Knob, and turn to highlight the departure header in the active flight plan.
3) Press the CLR Key. A confirmation window is displayed listing the departure procedure.
EIS
4) With ‘OK’ highlighted, press the ENT Key. To cancel the removal request, highlight ‘CANCEL’ and press the ENT
Key.
5) Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
ARRIVALS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
A Standard Terminal Arrival (STAR) can be loaded at any airport that has one available. Only one arrival
can be loaded at a time in a flight plan. If an arrival is loaded when another arrival is already in the active
flight plan, the new arrival replaces the previous arrival. The route is defined by selection of an arrival, the
transition waypoints, and a runway.
LOADING AN ARRIVAL INTO THE ACTIVE FLIGHT PLAN
Loading an arrival into the active flight plan using the PROC Key:
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
1) Press the PROC Key. The Procedures Window is displayed.
2) Highlight ‘SELECT ARRIVAL’.
3) Press the ENT Key. The Arrival Loading Page is displayed.
4) Use the FMS Knob to select an airport and press the ENT Key.
AFCS
5) Select an arrival from the list and press the ENT Key.
6) Select a transition (if required) and press the ENT Key.
7) Select a runway (if required) and press the ENT Key. ‘LOAD?’ is highlighted.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
8) Press the ENT Key to load the arrival procedure.
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-00629-04 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58
243
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
Destination Airport
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Available Procedure Actions
Loaded Procedures
Arrival Preview
Arrival Choices
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Figure 5-98 Arrival Selection
Loaded Arrival
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Selected Arrival
Procedure Loading Page Selection Softkeys
Figure 5-99 Arrival Loading
INDEX
Viewing available arrivals at an airport:
1) From the Airport Information Page (first page in the WPT group), select the STAR Softkey. The Arrival Information
Page is displayed, defaulting to the airport displayed on the Airport Information Page.
244
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58
190-00629-04 Rev. A
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
2) To select another airport, press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor, enter an identifier/facility name/city, and
press the ENT Key.
3) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the Arrival. The arrival is previewed on the map.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
4) Turn the small FMS Knob to view the available arrivals. Press the ENT Key to select the arrival. The cursor moves
to the Transition box. The arrival is previewed on the map.
5) Turn the small FMS Knob to view the available transitions. Press the ENT Key to select the transition. The cursor
moves to the Runway box. The arrival is previewed on the map.
EIS
6) Turn the small FMS Knob to view the available runways. Press the ENT Key to select the runway. The cursor
moves to the Sequence box. The arrival is previewed on the map.
7) Select the INFO-x Softkey to return to the Airport Information Page.
Loading an arrival into the active flight plan from the Arrival Information Page:
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
1) From the Airport Information Page (first page in the WPT group), press the STAR Softkey. The Arrival Information
Page is displayed, defaulting to the airport displayed on the Airport information Page.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
2) To select another airport, press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor, enter an identifier/facility name/city, and
press the ENT Key.
3) Select a different arrival, if desired.
a) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the arrival. The arrival is previewed on the map.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
b) Turn the small FMS Knob to view the available arrivals. Press the ENT Key to select the arrival. The cursor moves
to the Transition box (only if there are available transitions). The arrival is previewed on the map.
c) Turn the small FMS Knob to view the available transitions. Press the ENT Key to select the transition. The cursor
moves to the Runway box. The arrival is previewed on the map.
d) Turn the small FMS Knob to view the available runways. Press the ENT Key to select the runway. The cursor
moves to the Sequence box. The arrival is previewed on the map.
AFCS
4) Press the MENU Key to display the Arrival Information Page Menu.
5) Turn the FMS Knob to highlight ‘Load Arrival’.
6) Press the ENT Key to load the arrival procedure into the active flight plan.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
REMOVING AN ARRIVAL FROM THE ACTIVE FLIGHT PLAN
When plans change while flying IFR, arrivals can be easily removed from the Active Flight Plan.
Removing an arrival from the active flight plan:
APPENDICES
1) Press the FPL Key to display the Active Flight Plan Page (MFD) or the Active Flight Plan Window (PFD).
2) Press the MENU Key, and highlight ‘Remove Arrival’.
3) Press the ENT Key. A confirmation window is displayed listing the arrival procedure.
INDEX
4) With ‘OK’ highlighted, press the ENT Key. To cancel the removal request, highlight ‘CANCEL’ and press the ENT
Key.
Or:
190-00629-04 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58
245
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
1) Press the FPL Key to display the Active Flight Plan Page (MFD) or the Active Flight Plan Window (PFD).
2) Press the FMS Knob, and turn to highlight the arrival header in the active flight plan.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
3) Press the CLR Key. A confirmation window is displayed listing the arrival procedure.
4) With ‘OK’ highlighted, press the ENT Key. To cancel the removal request, highlight ‘CANCEL’ and press the ENT
Key.
5) Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor.
EIS
APPROACHES
NOTE: If certain GPS parameters (SBAS, RAIM, etc.) are not available, some published approach procedures
for the desired airport may not be displayed in the list of available approaches.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
An Approach Procedure (APPR) can be loaded at any airport that has one available, and provides guidance
for non-precision and precision approaches to airports with published instrument approach procedures.
Only one approach can be loaded at a time in a flight plan. If an approach is loaded when another approach
is already in the active flight plan, the new approach replaces the previous approach. The route is defined by
selection of an approach and the transition waypoints.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Whenever an approach is selected, the choice to either “load” or “activate” is given. “Loading” adds the
approach to the end of the flight plan without immediately using it for navigation guidance. This allows
continued navigation via the intermediate waypoints in the original flight plan, but keeps the procedure
available on the Active Flight Plan Page for quick activation when needed. “Activating” also adds the procedure
to the end of the flight plan but immediately begins to provide guidance to the first waypoint in the approach.
AFCS
When selecting an approach, a “GPS” designation to the right of the procedure name indicates the procedure
can be flown using the GPS receiver. Some procedures do not have this designation, meaning the GPS
receiver can be used for supplemental navigation guidance only. If the GPS receiver cannot be used for
primary guidance, the appropriate navigation receiver must be used for the selected approach (e.g., VOR or
ILS). The final course segment of ILS approaches, for example, must be flown by tuning the NAV receiver to
the proper frequency and selecting that NAV receiver on the CDI.
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
The SBAS GPS allows for flying LNAV, LNAV+V, LNAV/VNAV, LP, LP+V, and LPV approach service levels
according to the published chart. LNAV+V is an LNAV with advisory vertical guidance provided for assistance
in maintaining a constant vertical glidepath similar to an ILS glideslope on approach. This guidance is
displayed on the system PFD in the same location as the ILS glideslope using a magenta diamond. In all cases
where LNAV+V is indicated by the system during an approach, LNAV minima are used. The active approach
service level is annunciated on the HSI as shown in the following table:
246
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58
190-00629-04 Rev. A
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Example on HSI
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
EIS
Approach Service Level
- LNAV, LNAV+V, L/VNAV, LP, LP+V, LPV
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
HSI Annunciation
Description
LNAV
RNAV GPS approach using published LNAV minima
LNAV+V
RNAV GPS approach using published LNAV minima.
Advisory vertical guidance is provided
L/VNAV
RNAV GPS approach using published LNAV/
(available only if VNAV minima (downgrades to L/VNAV if SBAS
SBAS available) unavailable)
LP
RNAV GPS approach using published LP minima
(available only if (downgrades to LNAV if SBAS unavailable)
SBAS available)
LP+V
RNAV GPS approach using published LP minima
(available only if Advisory vertical guidance is provided (downgrades
SBAS available) to LNAV if SBAS unavailable)
LPV
RNAV GPS approach using published LPV minima
(available only if (downgrades to L/VNAV if SBAS unavailable)
SBAS available)
Table 5-9 Approach Types
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
LOADING AN APPROACH INTO THE ACTIVE FLIGHT PLAN
Loading an approach into the active flight plan using the PROC Key:
1) Press the PROC Key. The Procedures Window is displayed.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
2) Highlight ‘SELECT APPROACH’, and press the ENT Key. The Approach Loading Page is displayed.
3) Select the airport and approach:
a) Use the FMS Knob to select an airport and press the ENT Key.
b) Select an approach from the list and press the ENT Key.
AFCS
Or:
a) If necessary, push the FMS Knob to exit the approach list, and use the large FMS Knob to move the cursor to
the APPROACH CHANNEL field.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
b) Use the FMS Knob to enter the approach channel number, and press the ENT Key to accept the approach
channel number. The airport and approach are selected.
4) Select a transition (if required) and press the ENT Key.
APPENDICES
5) Minimums
a) To set ‘MINIMUMS’, turn the small FMS Knob to select ‘BARO’ or ‘TEMP COMP’, and press the ENT Key. Turn
the small FMS Knob to select the altitude, and press the ENT Key.
b) If ‘TEMP COMP’ was selected, the cursor moves to the temperature field. Turn the small FMS Knob to select the
temperature, and press the ENT Key.
INDEX
Or:
To skip setting minimums, press the ENT Key.
6) Press the ENT Key with ‘LOAD?’ highlighted to load the approach procedure; or turn the large FMS Knob to
highlight ‘ACTIVATE’ and press the ENT Key to load and activate the approach procedure.
190-00629-04 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58
247
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
NOTE: When GPS is not approved for the selected final approach course, the message ‘NOT APPROVED
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
FOR GPS’ is displayed. GPS provides guidance to the approach, but the HSI must to be switched to a NAV
receiver to fly the final course of the approach.
Available Procedure Actions
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
Destination Airport
Loaded Procedures
Approach Preview
Approach Choices
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Figure 5-100 Approach Selection
Loaded Approach
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
Selected Approach
INDEX
Procedure Loading Page Selection Softkeys
LOAD or ACTIVATE? Annunciation
Figure 5-101 Approach Loading
248
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58
190-00629-04 Rev. A
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Viewing available approaches at an airport:
1) From the Airport Information Page (first page in the WPT group), select the APR Softkey. The Approach
Information Page is displayed, defaulting to the airport displayed on the Airport information Page.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
2) To select another airport, press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor, enter an identifier/facility name/city, and
press the ENT Key.
3) Press the FMS Knob, then turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the Approach. The approach is previewed on
the map.
EIS
4) Turn the small FMS Knob to view the available approaches. Press the ENT Key to select the approach. The
cursor moves to the Transition box. The approach is previewed on the map.
5) Turn the small FMS Knob to view the available transitions. Press the ENT Key to select the transition. The cursor
moves to the Minimums box. The approach is previewed on the map.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
6) Turn the small FMS Knob to select BARO minimums on or off. Press the ENT Key.
a) When minimums are selected on, the cursor moves to the minimum altitude field . Use the small FMS Knob to
select the altitude. Press the ENT Key. The cursor moves to the Sequence box. The approach is previewed on
the map.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Or:
b) When minimums are selected off, the cursor moves to the Sequence box. The approach is previewed on the
map.
7) Press the INFO-x Softkey to return to the Airport Information Page.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Loading an approach into the active flight plan from the Nearest Airport Page:
1) Select the Nearest Airports Page.
2) Press the FMS Knob, then turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the desired nearest airport. The airport is
previewed on the map.
AFCS
3) Press the APR Softkey; or press the MENU Key, highlight ‘Select Approach Window’, and press the ENT Key.
4) Turn the FMS Knob to highlight the desired approach.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
5) Press the LD APR Softkey; or press the MENU Key, highlight ‘Load Approach’, and press the ENT Key. The
Approach Loading Page is displayed with the transitions field highlighted.
6) Turn the FMS Knob to highlight the desired transition, and press the ENT Key.
7) Barometric Minimums
APPENDICES
a) To set ‘MINIMUMS’, turn the small FMS Knob to select ‘BARO’, and press the ENT Key. Turn the small FMS
Knob to select the altitude, and press the ENT Key. The ‘LOAD?’ field is highlighted.
Or:
b) To skip setting minimums, press the ENT Key. The ‘LOAD?’ field is highlighted.
190-00629-04 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58
INDEX
8) Press the ENT Key with ‘LOAD?’ highlighted to load the approach procedure; or turn the large FMS Knob to
highlight ‘ACTIVATE’ and press the ENT Key to load and activate the approach procedure. The system continues
navigating the current flight plan until the approach is activated. When GPS is not approved for the selected
final approach course, the message ‘NOT APPROVED FOR GPS’ is displayed. GPS provides guidance to the
approach, but the HSI must to be switched to a NAV receiver to fly the final course of the approach.
249
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
ACTIVATING AN APPROACH
A previously loaded approach can be activated from the Procedures Window.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Activating a previously loaded approach:
1) Press the PROC Key. The Procedures Window is displayed with ‘Activate Approach’ highlighted.
2) Press the ENT Key to activate the approach.
EIS
In many cases, it may be easiest to “load” the full approach while still some distance away, enroute to the
destination airport. Later, if vectored to final, use the steps above to select ‘Activate Vector-To-Final’ — which
makes the inbound course to the FAF waypoint active.
Activating a previously loaded approach with vectors to final:
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
1) Press the PROC Key to display the Procedures Window.
2) Highlight ‘ACTIVATE VECTOR-TO-FINAL’ and press the ENT Key.
Loading and activating an approach using the MENU Key:
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
1) From the Approach Loading Page, press the MENU Key. The page menu is displayed with ‘Load & Activate
Approach’ highlighted.
2) Press the ENT Key. When GPS is not approved for the selected final approach course, the message ‘NOT
APPROVED FOR GPS’ is displayed. GPS provides guidance to the approach, but the HSI must to be switched to
a NAV receiver to fly the final course of the approach.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
REMOVING AN APPROACH FROM THE ACTIVE FLIGHT PLAN
When plans change while flying IFR, approaches can be easily removed from the Active Flight Plan.
Removing an approach from the active flight plan:
AFCS
1) Press the FPL Key to display the Active Flight Plan Page (MFD) or the Active Flight Plan Window (PFD).
2) Press the MENU Key, and highlight ‘Remove Approach’.
3) Press the ENT Key. A confirmation window is displayed listing the approach procedure.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
4) With ‘OK’ highlighted, press the ENT Key. To cancel the removal, highlight ‘CANCEL’ and press the ENT Key.
Or:
1) Press the FPL Key to display the Active Flight Plan Page (MFD) or the Active Flight Plan Window (PFD).
APPENDICES
2) Press the FMS Knob, and turn to highlight the approach header in the active flight plan.
3) Press the CLR Key. A confirmation window is displayed listing the approach procedure.
4) With ‘OK’ highlighted, press the ENT Key. To cancel the removal, highlight ‘CANCEL’ and press the ENT Key.
INDEX
5) Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor.
250
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58
190-00629-04 Rev. A
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
MISSED APPROACH
Activating a missed approach in the active flight plan:
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Press the Go Around Button.
Or:
Fly past the MAP, and press the SUSP Softkey on the PFD.
Or:
1) Press the PROC Key.
EIS
2) Turn the FMS Knob to highlight ‘ACTIVATE MISSED APPROACH’.
3) Press the ENT Key. The aircraft automatically sequences to the MAHP.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
COURSE TO ALTITUDE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
In this missed approach procedure, the altitude immediately following the MAP (in this case ‘6368ft’) is
not part of the published procedure. It is simply a Course to Altitude (CA) leg which guides the aircraft along
the runway centerline until the altitude required to safely make the first turn toward the MAHP is exceeded.
This altitude is provided by Jeppesen, and may be below, equal to, or above the published minimums for
this approach. In this case, if the aircraft altitude is below the specified altitude (6,368 feet) after crossing
the MAP, a direct-to is established to provide a course on runway heading until an altitude of 6,368 feet is
reached. After reaching 6,368 feet, a direct-to is established to the published MAHP (in this case MOGAL).
If the aircraft altitude is above the specified altitude after crossing the MAP, a direct-to is established to the
published fix (MOGAL) to begin the missed approach procedure.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
In some missed approach procedures this Course to Altitude leg may be part of the published procedure.
For example, a procedure may dictate a climb to 5,500 feet, then turn left and proceed to the Missed Approach
Hold Point (MAHP). In this case, the altitude would appear in the list of waypoints as ‘5500ft’. Again, if the
aircraft altitude is lower than the prescribed altitude, a direct-to is established on a Course to Altitude leg
when the missed approach procedure is activated.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
Course to Altitude Leg
INDEX
Figure 5-102 Course to Altitude
190-00629-04 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58
251
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
TEMPERATURE COMPENSATED ALTITUDE
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
If desired, the system can compensate the loaded approach altitudes based on a pilot-supplied temperature
at the destination. For example, if the pilot enters a destination temperature of -40º C, the system increases
the approach altitudes accordingly. A temperature compensated altitude is displayed in slanted text.
Activating temperature compensated altitude:
1) From the Active Flight Plan Page, press the MENU Key. The Page Menu is displayed.
2) Turn the FMS Knob to highlight ‘Temperature Compensation’.
EIS
3) Press the ENT Key. The TEMPERATURE COMPENSATION Window is displayed.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
4) Use the small FMS Knob to select the temperature at the <airport>. The compensated altitude is computed as
the temperature is selected.
NOTE: The temperature at the destination can be entered in the TEMPERATURE COMPENSATION Window
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
on the MFD, or in the REFERENCES Window on the PFD. There is only one compensation temperature for
the system, therefore, changing the temperature will affect both the loaded approach altitudes and the
minimums. Refer to the Flight Instruments section for information about applying temperature compensation
to the MDA/DH.
5) Press the ENT Key. ‘ACTIVATE COMPENSATION?’ is highlighted.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
6) Press the ENT Key. The compensated altitudes for the approach are shown in the flight plan.
AFCS
Selected
Temperature
FAF Altitude
Compensated
Altitude
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Temperature
Compensation
Selected
INDEX
APPENDICES
Figure 5-103 Temperature Compensation
252
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58
190-00629-04 Rev. A
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
ACTIVATE
COMPENSATION?
Highlighted
CANCEL
COMPENSATION?
Highlighted
EIS
Figure 5-104 Activating/Cancelling Temperature Compensation
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Compensated
Altitudes
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Uncompensated
Altitudes
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Figure 5-105 Temperature Compensation in the Active Flight Plan
Cancelling temperature compensated altitude:
1) From the Active Flight Plan Page, press the MENU Key. The Page Menu is displayed.
2) Turn the FMS Knob to highlight ‘Temperature Compensation’.
AFCS
3) Press the ENT Key. The TEMPERATURE COMPENSATION Window is displayed.
4) Press the ENT Key. ‘CANCEL COMPENSATION?’ is highlighted.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
5) Press the ENT Key. The temperature compensated altitude at the FAF is cancelled.
NOTE: Activating/cancelling temperature compensation for the loaded approach altitudes does not select/
deselect temperature compensated minimums (MDA/DH), nor does selecting/deselecting temperature
compensated minimums activate/cancel temperature compensated approach altitudes.
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-00629-04 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58
253
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
5.9 TRIP PLANNING
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The G1000 allows the pilot to view trip planning information, fuel information, and other information for
a specified flight plan or flight plan leg based on automatic data, or based on manually entered data. Weight
planning is also available, based on manually entered fuel data and the active flight plan (to estimate remaining
fuel).
TRIP PLANNING
EIS
All of the input of data needed for calculation and viewing of the statistics is done on the Trip Planning Page
located in the AUX Page Group.
Selected Flight Plan Segment
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
- FPL Number/Cumulative Legs (CUM or REM) or Leg Number (NN)
- Waypoints Defining Selected Flight Plan/Flight Plan Leg
Trip Planning Page Mode
- Automatic/Manual
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Preview of Selected
Flight Plan/
Flight Plan Leg
Trip Input Data (sensor/pilot)
- Departure Time (local)
- Ground Speed
- Fuel Flow
- Fuel On Board Aircraft
- Calibrated Airspeed
- Indicated Altitude
- Barometric Pressure
- Total Air Temperature
Trip Statistics
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Desired Track Distance Est. Time Enroute Est. Time of Arrival Enroute Safe Altitude Sunrise Time (local) Sunset Time (local) -
Other Statistics
- Density Altitude
- True Airspeed (TAS)
AFCS
Fuel Statistics
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Efficiency Total Endurance Remaining Fuel Remaining Endurance Fuel Required Total Range -
Softkeys
- Automatic/Manual Page Mode
- Flight Plan/Waypoint Mode
Figure 5-106 Trip Planning Page
APPENDICES
The trip planning inputs are based on sensor inputs (automatic page mode) or on pilot inputs (manual page
mode). Some additional explanation of the sources for some of the inputs is as follows:
• Departure time (DEP TIME) - This defaults to the current time in automatic page mode. The computations
are from the aircraft present position, so the aircraft is always just departing.
• Calibrated airspeed (CALIBRATED AS) - The primary source is from the air data system, and the secondary
source of information is GPS ground speed.
INDEX
• Indicated altitude (IND ALTITUDE) - The primary source is the barometric altitude, and the secondary source
of information is GPS altitude.
254
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58
190-00629-04 Rev. A
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
TRIP STATISTICS
The trip statistics are calculated based on the selected starting and ending waypoints and the trip planning
inputs.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
In flight plan mode (FPL) with a stored flight plan selected (NN), and the entire flight plan (CUM) selected,
the waypoints are the starting and ending waypoints of the selected flight plan.
In flight plan mode (FPL) with a stored flight plan selected (NN), and a specific leg (NN) selected, the
waypoints are the endpoints of the selected leg.
EIS
In flight plan mode (FPL) with the active flight plan selected (00), and the remaining flight plan (REM)
selected, the ‘from’ waypoint is the present position of the aircraft and the ‘to’ waypoint is the endpoint of the
active flight plan.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
In flight plan mode (FPL) with the active flight plan selected (00), and a specific leg (NN) selected, the
‘from’ waypoint is the current aircraft position and the ‘to’ waypoint is the endpoint of the selected leg.
In waypoint (WPTS) mode these are manually selected waypoints (if there is an active flight plan, these
default to the endpoints of the active leg).
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Some of the calculated trip statistics are dashed when the selected leg of the active flight plan has already
been flown.
• Desired Track (DTK) - DTK is shown as nnn° and is the desired track between the selected waypoints.
It is dashed unless only a single leg is selected.
• Distance (DIS) - The distance is shown in tenths of units up to 99.9, and in whole units up to 9999.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
• Estimated time enroute (ETE) - ETE is shown as hours:minutes until less than an hour, then it is shown
as minutes:seconds.
• Estimated time of arrival (ETA) - ETA is shown as hours:minutes and is the local time at the
destination.
- If in waypoint mode then the ETA is the ETE added to the departure time.
AFCS
- If a flight plan other than the active flight plan is selected it shows the ETA by adding to the departure
time all of the ETEs of the legs up to and including the selected leg. If the entire flight plan is selected,
then the ETA is calculated as if the last leg of the flight plan was selected.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
- If the active flight plan is selected the ETA reflects the current position of the aircraft and the current
leg being flown. The ETA is calculated by adding to the current time the ETEs of the current leg up to
and including the selected leg. If the entire flight plan is selected, then the ETA is calculated as if the
last leg of the flight plan was selected.
APPENDICES
• Enroute safe altitude (ESA) - The ESA is shown as nnnnnFT
• Destination sunrise and sunset times (SUNRISE, SUNSET) - These times are shown as hours:minutes
and are the local time at the destination.
INDEX
190-00629-04 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58
255
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
FUEL STATISTICS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The fuel statistics are calculated based on the selected starting and ending waypoints and the trip planning
inputs. Some of the calculated trip statistics are dashed when the selected leg of the active flight plan has
already been flown.
• Fuel efficiency (EFFICIENCY) - This value is calculated by dividing the current ground speed by the
current fuel flow.
• Time of fuel endurance (TOTAL ENDUR) - This time is shown as hours:minutes. This value is obtained
by dividing the amount of fuel on board by the current fuel flow.
EIS
• Fuel on board upon reaching end of selected leg (REM FUEL) - This value is calculated by taking the
amount of fuel onboard and subtracting the fuel required to reach the end of the selected leg.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
• Fuel endurance remaining at end of selected leg (REM ENDUR) - This value is calculated by taking the time
of fuel endurance and subtracting the estimated time enroute to the end of the selected leg.
• Fuel required for trip (FUEL REQ) - This value is calculated by multiplying the time to go by the fuel
flow.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
• Total range at entered fuel flow (TOTAL RANGE) - This value is calculated by multiplying the time of fuel
endurance by the ground speed.
OTHER STATISTICS
These statistics are calculated based on the system sensor inputs or the manual trip planning inputs.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
• Density altitude (DENSITY ALT)
• True airspeed (TRUE AIRSPEED)
The pilot may select automatic (AUTO) or manual (MANUAL) page mode, and flight plan (FPL) or waypoint
(WPTS) mode. In automatic page mode, only the FPL, LEG, or waypoint IDs are editable (based on FPL/WPTS
selection).
AFCS
Selected Flight Plan NN -
Selected Leg(s)
00 is Active FPL
01-99 are Stored FPLs
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Starting and Ending Waypoint of
Selected Flight Plan Segment
Stored Flight Plan
- CUM: Beginning to End of FPL
- NN: Beginning to End of Selected Leg
Active Flight Plan
- REM: Pres. Pos. to End of FPL
- NN: Pres. Pos. to End of Selected Leg
APPENDICES
Figure 5-107 Trip Planning Page - Flight Plan Mode
Selected Flight Plan
Selected Leg(s)
Not Available
Not Available
INDEX
Selected Starting and Ending Waypoints
Figure 5-108 Trip Planning Page - Waypoint Mode
256
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58
190-00629-04 Rev. A
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Selecting automatic or manual page mode:
Select the AUTO Softkey or the MANUAL Softkey; or press the MENU Key, highlight ‘Auto Mode’ or ‘Manual
Mode’, and press the ENT Key.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Selecting flight plan or waypoint mode:
Select the FPL Softkey or the WPTS Softkey; or press the MENU Key, highlight ‘Flight Plan Mode’ or ‘Waypoints
Mode’, and press the ENT Key.
Selecting a flight plan and leg for trip statistics:
EIS
1) Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor in the flight plan number field.
2) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the desired flight plan number.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
3) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight ‘CUM’ or ‘REM’. The statistics for each leg can be viewed by turning the
small FMS Knob to select the desired leg. The Inset Map also displays the selected data.
Selecting waypoints for waypoint mode:
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
1) Select the WPTS Softkey; or press the MENU Key, highlight ‘Waypoints Mode’, and press the ENT Key. The
cursor is positioned in the waypoint field directly below the FPL field.
2) Turn the FMS knobs to select the desired waypoint (or select from the Page Menu ‘Set WPT to Present Position’
if that is what is desired), and press the ENT Key. The cursor moves to the second waypoint field.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
3) Turn the FMS knobs to select the desired waypoint, and press the ENT Key. The statistics for the selected leg
are displayed.
In manual page mode, the other eight trip input data fields must be entered by the pilot, in addition to flight
plan and leg selection.
Entering manual data for trip statistics calculations:
AFCS
1) Select the MANUAL Softkey or select ‘Manual Mode’ from the Page Menu, and press the ENT Key. The cursor
may now be positioned in any field in the top right two boxes.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
2) Turn the FMS Knobs to move the cursor onto the DEP TIME field and enter the desired value. Press the ENT Key.
The statistics are calculated using the new value and the cursor moves to the next entry field. Repeat until all
desired values have been entered.
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-00629-04 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58
257
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
5.10 RAIM PREDICTION
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
RAIM (Receiver Autonomous Integrity Monitoring) is a GPS receiver function that performs a consistency
check on all tracked satellites. RAIM ensures that the available satellite geometry allows the receiver to calculate
a position within a specified RAIM protection limit (2.0 nm for oceanic, 2.0 nm for enroute, 1.0 nm for terminal,
and 0.3 nm for non-precision approaches). During oceanic, enroute, and terminal phases of flight, RAIM is
available nearly 100% of the time. The RAIM prediction function also indicates whether RAIM is available at a
specified date and time. RAIM computations predict satellite coverage within ±15 min of the specified arrival
date and time. Because of the tighter protection limit on approaches, there may be times when RAIM is not
available. RAIM prediction must be initiated manually if there is concern over SBAS coverage at the destination
or some other reason that compromises navigation precision. If RAIM is not predicted to be available for the
final approach course, the approach does not become active. If RAIM is not available when crossing the FAF, the
missed approach procedure must be flown.
RAIM PREDICTION Box
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
- Prediction Waypoint
- Arrival Time
- Arrival Date
- RAIM Status
RAIM Softkey
SBAS Softkey
(displays SBAS Selection)
(displays RAIM
PREDICTION)
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Figure 5-109 RAIM Prediction
Predicting RAIM availability at a selected waypoint:
APPENDICES
1) Select the AUX-GPS Status Page.
2) Press the FMS Knob. The RAIM Prediction ‘WAYPOINT’ field is highlighted.
3) Turn the small FMS Knob to display the Waypoint Information Window. (Turning it clockwise displays a blank
Waypoint Information Window, turning it counter-clockwise displays the Waypoint Information Window with a
waypoint selection submenu allowing selection of active flight plan, nearest, recent, user, or airway waypoints).
INDEX
4) Enter the identifier, facility, or city name of the departure waypoint; or select a waypoint from the submenu of
waypoints and press the ENT Key to accept the waypoint entry.
258
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58
190-00629-04 Rev. A
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
5) Turn the FMS Knobs to enter an arrival time and press the ENT Key.
6) Turn the FMS Knobs to enter an arrival date and press the ENT Key.
7) Press the ENT Key with ‘COMPUTE RAIM?’ highlighted to begin the computation.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Predicting RAIM availability at the aircraft present position:
1) Select the AUX-GPS Status Page.
2) Press the FMS Knob. The RAIM Prediction ‘WAYPOINT’ field is highlighted.
3) Press the MENU Key, highlight ‘Set WPT to Present Position’, and press the ENT Key.
EIS
4) Press the ENT Key to accept the waypoint entry.
5) Turn the FMS Knobs to enter an arrival time and press the ENT Key.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
6) Turn the FMS Knobs to enter an arrival date and press the ENT Key.
7) Press the ENT Key with ‘COMPUTE RAIM?’ highlighted to begin the computation.
Status of the RAIM computation for the selected waypoint, time, and date is displayed at the bottom of the
RAIM PREDICTION Box as follows:
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
• ‘COMPUTE RAIM?’ - RAIM has not been computed.
• ‘COMPUTING AVAILABILITY’ - RAIM calculation is in progress.
• ‘RAIM AVAILABLE’ - RAIM is predicted to be available.
• ‘RAIM NOT AVAILABLE’ - RAIM is predicted to be unavailable.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
The Satellite Based Augmentation System (SBAS) provides increased navigation accuracy when available. SBAS
can be enabled or disabled manually on the GPS Status Page.
AFCS
SBAS Status
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
SBAS SELECTION Box
- EGNOS Enable/Disable
- MSAS Enable/Disable
- WAAS Enable/Disable
APPENDICES
RAIM Softkey
INDEX
SBAS Softkey
(displays SBAS Selection)
(displays RAIM
PREDICTION)
Figure 5-110 SBAS Display - Active
190-00629-04 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58
259
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
Enabling/Disabling SBAS:
1) Select the AUX-GPS Status Page.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
2) Press the SBAS Softkey.
3) Press the FMS Knob, and turn the large FMS Knob to highlight ‘EGNOS’, ‘MSAS’ or ‘WAAS’.
EIS
4) Press the ENT Key to disable SBAS. Press the ENT Key again to enable SBAS.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
SBAS Status
SBAS SELECTION Box
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
- EGNOS Enable/Disable
- MSAS Enable/Disable
- WAAS Enable/Disable
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
RAIM Softkey
SBAS Softkey
(displays SBAS Selection)
Figure 5-111 SBAS Display - Disabled
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
(displays RAIM
PREDICTION)
260
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58
190-00629-04 Rev. A
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
5.11 NAVIGATING A FLIGHT PLAN
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The following discussion is an example of navigating a flight plan with the SBAS capable GPS system while the
G1000 provides vertical guidance through descents. A lateral flight plan (LNAV) would be navigated in much the
same way, but would not include vertical guidance when the final approach course is active.
NOTE: The following example flight plan is for instructional purposes only. All database information depicted
should be considered not current.
EIS
The example is a flight plan from KMKC to KCOS filed using the TIFTO2 departure, various Victor Airways,
and the DBRY1 arrival with the transition at TBE. The flight plan includes an enroute altitude of 12,000 feet, an
LPV (WAAS) approach selected for runway 35R, and a missed approach executed at the Missed Approach Point
(MAP). A few enroute changes are demonstrated.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
1) Prior to departure, the TIFTO2 departure, the airways, and the DBRY1 arrival at KCOS are loaded. See the
Procedures section for loading departures and arrivals. Note the magenta arrow in Figure 5-112 indicating the
active departure leg.
After takeoff, ATC assigns a heading of 240º.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
2) Figure 5-112 shows the aircraft on the assigned heading of 240º. ‘TERM’ (Terminal) is the current CDI flight
phase displayed on the HSI indicating 1.0 nm CDI scaling.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
Figure 5-112 Assigned Heading of 240º
INDEX
190-00629-04 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58
261
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
3) ATC now assigns routing to join V4. A heading of 290º is assigned to intercept V4. The aircraft turns to heading
290° as seen in Figure 5-113.
Figure 5-113 Assigned Heading of 290º
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
4) Enter V4 into the flight plan.
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
a) Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor.
262
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58
190-00629-04 Rev. A
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
b) The desired entry point for V4 (TOP) must be entered. Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the desired flight
plan insertion point (SLN) as shown in Figure 5-114. When the V4 entry point (TOP) is inserted, it is placed
immediately above the highlighted waypoint (SLN).
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Figure 5-114 Begin Adding V4 to the Flight Plan
c) Turn the small FMS Knob to display the Waypoint Information Window. Enter the desired entry point for V4,
Topeka VOR (TOP), as shown in Figure 5-115.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
Figure 5-115 Entering V4 Entry Point
INDEX
190-00629-04 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58
263
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
d) Press the ENT Key. TOP is inserted into the flight plan as in Figure 5-116.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Figure 5-116 TOP Inserted into the Flight Plan
e) With SLN still highlighted as in Figure 5-116, turn the small FMS Knob clockwise. The Waypoint Information
Page is displayed and the LD AIRWY Softkey is now available.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
f) Select the LD AIRWY Softkey to display the list of available airways for TOP as seen in Figure 5-117.
APPENDICES
Figure 5-117 List of Available Airways for TOP
INDEX
g) Turn either FMS Knob to highlight V4 in the list as seen in Figure 5-117.
264
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58
190-00629-04 Rev. A
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
h) Press the ENT Key. The list of available exits for V4 is now displayed as in Figure 5-118.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Figure 5-118 List of Available Exits for V4
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
i) If necessary, turn either FMS Knob to select the desired exit. In this case Salina VOR (SLN) is selected as in
Figure 5-118.
j) Press the ENT Key. The selected airway and exit are displayed, and the prompt “LOAD?” highlighted as in
Figure 5-119.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Figure 5-119 Ready to Load V4
APPENDICES
k) Press the ENT Key.
INDEX
190-00629-04 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58
265
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
l) V4 is now loaded into the flight plan as shown in Figure 5-120.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Figure 5-120 V4 is Loaded in the Flight Plan
5) Making V4 the active leg of the flight plan.
a) Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor.
b) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight SLN. The TO waypoint of the leg is selected in order to activate the leg.
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
c) Select the ACT LEG Softkey. The confirmation window is now displayed as in Figure 5-121. Note the TOP to
SLN leg is actually part of V4.
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Figure 5-121 Comfirm Active Leg
266
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58
190-00629-04 Rev. A
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
d) Verify the displayed leg is the desired leg and press the ENT Key. Note in Figure 5-122, the magenta arrow in
the flight plan window and magenta line on the map indicating V4 is now the active flight plan leg. Note the
phase of flight remained in Terminal (TERM) mode up to this point because a departure leg was active. Since a
leg after the departure is now active, the current CDI flight phase is ENR (Enroute) and CDI scaling has changed
to 2.0 nm.
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Figure 5-122 V4 Now Active Leg
6) The aircraft continues on heading 290º. When crosstrack distance is less than 2.0 nm, the XTK disappears from
the HSI and the CDI is positioned on the last dot indicating a 2.0 nm distance from the centerline of the next
course.
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-00629-04 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58
267
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
7) As the CDI approaches center, the aircraft turns onto the active leg as seen in Figure 5-123.
Figure 5-123 Turn on to Active Leg
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
8) At SLN, Victor Airway 244 (V244) is intercepted. Turn prompts are displayed in the PFD Navigation Status Box
as seen in Figure 5-124.
INDEX
APPENDICES
Figure 5-124 Turn to Intercept V244
268
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58
190-00629-04 Rev. A
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
9) As seen in Figure 5-125, V244 is now the active flight plan leg.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Figure 5-125 V244 Now Active Leg
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-00629-04 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58
269
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
10) At Lamar VOR (LAA) V263 is intercepted. See Figure 5-126.
Figure 5-126 HYS to LAA Leg Active
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
11) ATC grants clearance to proceed direct to the OPSHN intersection to begin the arrival procedure. ATC advises
to expect an altitude of 10,000 feet at OPSHN.
a) Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor.
b) Turn the large FMS Knob to select OPSHN in the flight plan list.
) Key. The Direct-to Window is now displayed as shown in Figure 5-127.
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
c) Press the Direct-to (
Figure 5-127 Direct To OPSHN
270
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58
190-00629-04 Rev. A
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
d) Turn the large FMS Knob to place the cursor in the VNV altitude field as shown in Figure 5-128.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Figure 5-128 Enter VNV Altitude
e) An altitude of 10,000 feet is entered as requested by ATC.
f) Press the ENT Key. The cursor is now displayed in the VNV offset field as shown in Figure 5-129.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
Figure 5-129 Enter VNV Offset Distance
190-00629-04 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58
INDEX
g) Enter the offset, or distance from the waypoint at which to reach the selected altitude. In this case, three miles
prior to OPSHN is entered. In other words, the G1000 gives vertical guidance so the aircraft arrives at an
altitude of 10,000 feet three miles prior to OPSHN.
271
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
h) Press the ENT Key twice to activate the direct-to. Note, in Figure 5-130, the magenta arrow indicating the
direct-to OPSHN after the offset waypoint for OPSHN. The preceding offset waypoint indicates the offset
distance and altitude that were previously entered. The remaining waypoints in the loaded arrival procedure
have no database specified altitudes, therefore, dashes are displayed. Keep the CDI centered and maintain a
track along the magenta line to OPSHN.
Note the Direct-to waypoint is within the loaded arrival procedure, therefore, phase of flight scaling for the CDI
changes to Terminal Mode and is annunciated by displaying ‘TERM’ on the HSI.
NOTE: If the loaded arrival procedure has waypoints with altitude constraints retrieved from the database
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
to be used as is, the altitude must be manually accepted by placing the cursor over the desired altitude,
then pressing the ENT Key. The altitude is now displayed as light blue meaning it is used by the system to
determine vertical speed and deviation guidance.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Figure 5-130 Direct-to Active
12) The aircraft is proceeding to OPSHN. The expected approach is the RNAV LPV approach to runway 35R, so it is
selected.
INDEX
APPENDICES
a) Press the PROC Key to display the Procedures Window.
272
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58
190-00629-04 Rev. A
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
b) ‘SELECT APPROACH’ should be highlighted as shown in Figure 5-131.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Figure 5-131 Procedures Window
c) Press the ENT Key. A list of available approaches for the destination airport is displayed as in Figure 5-132.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
Figure 5-132 List of Available Approaches
d) Turn either FMS Knob to select the LPV approach for 35R as shown in Figure 5-132.
INDEX
190-00629-04 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58
273
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
e) Press the ENT Key. A list of available transitions for the selected approach is displayed as in Figure 5-133.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
f) Turn either FMS Knob to select the desired transition. In this case, the Initial Approach Fix (IAF) at HABUK is
used.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Figure 5-133 List of Available Transitions
To set ‘MINIMUMS’, turn the small FMS Knob to select ‘BARO’, and press the ENT Key. Turn the small FMS Knob to select the altitude, and press the ENT Key.
g) Press the ENT Key.
h) Barometric Minimums
Or:
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
To skip setting minimums, press the ENT Key.
274
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58
190-00629-04 Rev. A
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Figure 5-134 Barometric Minimums Set
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
i) With ‘LOAD?’ highlighted, again press the ENT Key. The selected approach is added to the flight plan as seen
in Figure 5-135.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
Figure 5-135 Loaded Approach
INDEX
190-00629-04 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58
275
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
13) Note the altitude constraints associated with each of the approach waypoints as seen in Figure 5-136. These
altitudes are loaded from the database and are displayed as light blue text, indicating these values are
“designated” for use in computing vertical deviation guidance.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Note: To no longer use the displayed altitude for calculating vertical deviation guidance, perform the
following:
a) Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor.
b) Turn the small FMS Knob to highlight the desired altitude.
c) Press the CLR Key.
EIS
d) Press the FMS Knob to deactivate the cursor.
After making the altitude “non-designated”, it is displayed as white text.
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Altitude constraint values associated with the Final Approach Fix (FAF) and waypoints beyond the FAF cannot be
designated for vertical guidance. These altitude values are always displayed as white text, as in Figure 5-136.
Vertical guidance from the FAF and on to the Missed Approach Point (MAP) is given using the WAAS GPS
altitude source, therefore, the displayed altitude values are for reference only.
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Figure 5-136 Vertical Guidance is Active to the FAF
276
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58
190-00629-04 Rev. A
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
14) As the aircraft approaches OPSHN, it may be desirable to adjust the speed, or steepness of the upcoming
descent. The default Flight Path Angle (FPA) is -3.0 degrees and a required vertical speed is computed to
maintain the -3.0 FPA. To change the vertical flight path, perform the following steps.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
a) Select the VNV PROF Softkey to place the cursor in the target vertical speed field (VS TGT) as shown in Figure
5-137.
b) At this point, the descent vertical speed can be selected, or the FPA can be selected. Turn the large FMS Knob
to select the desired selection field, then turn the small FMS Knob to enter the desired value.
EIS
Note the information now displayed in the ‘CURRENT VNV PROFILE’ box. Also, note the offset waypoint (orange
box) and gray circle are now displayed on the map. The gray circle marks the Top of Descent (TOD). In this
example, vertical guidance is provided at the TOD that results in a -3.0 degree FPA descent to an altitude of
10,000 feet upon reaching the offset waypoint.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
Figure 5-137 Adjusting the Descent
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
c) Press the ENT Key.
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-00629-04 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58
277
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
15) As seen in Figure 5-138, the aircraft is approaching TOD. Note the target vertical speed required to reach the
selected altitude. The Vertical Deviation Indicator (VDI) and the Required Vertical Speed Indicator (RVSI) are
now displayed on the PFD as shown in Figure 5-139. When the aircraft is within one minute of the TOD, it is
annunciated as shown in Figure 5-139, and an aural alert ‘Vertical track’ will be heard.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Figure 5-138 Approaching Top of Descent (TOD)
AFCS
Target Altitude
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Vertical Deviation
Indicator (VDI)
APPENDICES
Required Vertical
Speed Indicator
(RVSI)
INDEX
Figure 5-139 VDI & RVSI Upon Reaching Top of Descent (TOD)
278
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58
190-00629-04 Rev. A
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
16) Upon reaching TOD, a descent vertical speed is established by placing the VSI pointer in line with the RVSI as
shown in Figure 5-140.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
EIS
Keep Vertical Deviation
Indicator Centered
Align Actual Vertical Speed
with
Required Vertical Speed
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Figure 5-140 VDI & RVSI Showing Correctly Established Descent
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
17) When the aircraft is one minute from the bottom of descent (BOD) it is annunciated as shown in Figure 5-141.
Upon reaching the offset waypoint for OPSHN, the aircraft is at 10,000 feet.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
Figure 5-141 Approaching Bottom of Descent (BOD) at OPSHN Offset Waypoint
INDEX
190-00629-04 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58
279
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
18) The aircraft is approaching OPSHN. The upcoming turn and next heading are annunciated at the top left of the
PFD as seen in Figure 5-142. Initiate the turn and maneuver the aircraft on a track through the turn radius to
intercept the magenta line for the OPSHN to FSHER leg and center the CDI.
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Figure 5-142 Turn to intercept OPSHN to FSHER Leg
280
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58
190-00629-04 Rev. A
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
19) After passing OPSHN, the next leg of the arrival turns magenta as shown in Figure 5-136. The magenta arrow
in the flight plan list now indicates the OPSHN to FSHER leg of the arrival procedure is now active.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Figure 5-143 Tracking the OPSHN to FSHER Leg
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
20) The flight continues through the arrival procedure to PYNON (see Figure 5-144). At a point 31 nm from the
destination airport, the phase of flight scaling for the CDI changes to Terminal Mode and is annunciated by
displaying ‘TERM’ on the HSI.
A descent to HABUK is in the next leg. Note the TOD point on the map. Annunciations for the upcoming turn
and descent, as well as the VDI and RVSI, appear on the PFD as the flight progresses.
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-00629-04 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58
281
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
INDEX
Figure 5-144 Approaching PYNON
282
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58
190-00629-04 Rev. A
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
21) Upon passing PYNON the approach procedure automatically becomes active. The approach may be activated
at any point to proceed directly to the IAF. In this example, the aircraft has progressed through the final
waypoint of the arrival and the flight plan has automatically sequenced to the IAF as the active leg, activating
the approach procedure (see Figure 5-145).
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Figure 5-145 Approach is Now Active
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Note: To manually activate the approach procedure, perform the following steps:
a) Press the PROC Key.
b) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight ‘ACTIVATE APPROACH’ as shown in Figure 5-146.
AFCS
c) Press the ENT Key to activate the approach.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
Figure 5-146 Manually Activate Approach
INDEX
190-00629-04 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58
283
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
22) The IAF is the next waypoint. At the TOD, establish a descent vertical speed as previously discussed in Step 16.
The aircraft altitude is 9,000 feet upon reaching HABUK.
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Figure 5-147 Descending Turn to the Initial Approach Fix (IAF)
284
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58
190-00629-04 Rev. A
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
23) After crossing FALUR the next waypoint is the FAF. The flight phase changes to LPV on the HSI indicating the
current phase of flight is in Approach Mode and the approach type is LPV. CDI scaling changes accordingly and is
used much like a localizer when flying an ILS approach. The RVSI is no longer displayed and the VDI changes to
the Glidepath Indicator (as shown in Figure 5-148) when the final approach course becomes active.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Figure 5-148 Descending to the FAF
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
The descent continues through the FAF (CEGIX) using the Glidepath Indicator, as one would use a glideslope
indicator, to obtain an altitude “AT” 7,800 feet at the FAF. Note the altitude restriction lines over and under (At)
the altitude in the ‘ALT’ field in Figure 5-148.
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-00629-04 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58
285
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
24) After crossing CEGIX, the aircraft continues following the glidepath to maintain the descent to “AT or ABOVE”
6,370 feet at the Missed Approach Point (MAP) (RW35R) as seen in Figure 5-149.
Figure 5-149 Descending to the Missed Approach Point
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
In this missed approach procedure, the altitude immediately following the MAP (in this case ‘6368ft’) is not part
of the published procedure. It is simply a Course to Altitude (CA) leg which guides the aircraft along the runway
centerline until the altitude required to safely make the first turn toward the MAHP is exceeded. This altitude
is provided by Jeppesen, and may be below, equal to, or above the published minimums for this approach. In
this case, if the aircraft altitude is below the specified altitude (6,368 feet) after crossing the MAP, a direct-to
is established to provide a course on runway heading until an altitude of 6,368 feet is reached. After reaching
6,368 feet, a direct-to is established to the published MAHP (in this case MOGAL). If the aircraft altitude is
above the specified altitude after crossing the MAP, a direct-to is established to the published fix (MOGAL) to
begin the missed approach procedure.
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
In some missed approach procedures this Course to Altitude leg may be part of the published procedure. For
example, a procedure may dictate a climb to 5,500 feet, then turn left and proceed to the Missed Approach Hold
Point (MAHP). In this case, the altitude would appear in the list of waypoints as ‘5500ft’. Again, if the aircraft
altitude is lower than the prescribed altitude, a direct-to is established on a Course to Altitude leg when the
missed approach procedure is activated.
286
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58
190-00629-04 Rev. A
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
25) Upon reaching the MAP, it is decided to execute a missed approach. Automatic waypoint sequencing is
suspended past the MAP. Press the Go Around Button, or press the SUSP Softkey on the PFD, to resume
automatic waypoint sequencing through the missed approach procedure.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
A direct-to is initiated to MOGAL, which is the Missed Approach Hold Point (MAHP) as seen in Figure 5-150.
The aircraft is climbing to 10,000 feet. The CDI flight phase now changes from LPV to MAPR as seen on the HSI.
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
Figure 5-150 Missed Approach Active
INDEX
190-00629-04 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58
287
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
26) The aircraft continues climbing to “AT or ABOVE” 10,000 feet at MOGAL. A holding pattern is established at
the MAHP (MOGAL) as shown in Figure 5-151.
Figure 5-151 Establishing the Holding Pattern
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
27) The aircraft maintains 10,000 feet while following the magenta line through the hold as in Figure 5-152.
INDEX
Figure 5-152 Hold Established
288
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58
190-00629-04 Rev. A
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
5.12 ABNORMAL OPERATION
This section discusses the Dead Reckoning mode of operation and the subsequent indications.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
NOTE: Dead Reckoning Mode only functions in Enroute (ENR) or Oceanic (OCN) phase of flight. In all other
phases, an invalid GPS solution produces a “NO GPS POSITION” annunciation on the map and the G1000
stops using GPS.
EIS
While in Enroute or Oceanic phase of flight, if the G1000 detects an invalid GPS solution or is unable to
calculate a GPS position, the system automatically reverts to Dead Reckoning (DR) Mode. In DR Mode, the G1000
uses its last-known position combined with continuously updated airspeed and heading data (when available) to
calculate and display the aircraft’s current estimated position.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
It is important to note that estimated navigation data supplied by the G1000 in DR Mode may become increasingly
unreliable and must not be used as a sole means of navigation. If while in DR Mode airspeed and/or heading data
is also lost or not available, the DR function may not be capable of accurately tracking estimated position and,
consequently, the system may display a path that is different than the actual movement of the aircraft. Estimated
position information displayed by the G1000 through DR while there is no heading and/or airspeed data available
should not be used for navigation.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
DR Mode is inherently less accurate than the standard GPS/SBAS Mode due to the lack of satellite measurements
needed to determine a position. Changes in wind speed and/or wind direction compounds the relative inaccuracy
of DR Mode. Because of this degraded accuracy, other navigation equipment must be relied upon for position
awareness until GPS-derived position data is restored.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
DR Mode is indicated on the G1000 by the appearance of the letters ‘DR’ superimposed in yellow over the
‘own aircraft’ symbol as shown in Figure 5-146. In addition, ‘DR’ is prominently displayed in yellow on the HSI
slightly above and to the right of the aircraft symbol on the CDI as shown in Figure 5-153. The CDI deviation
bar remains, but is removed from the display after 20 minutes in DR Mode. The autopilot will remain coupled
in DR mode as long as the deviation info is available (20 min.) Lastly, but at the same time, a ‘GPS NAV LOST’
alert message appears on the PFD. Normal navigation using GPS/SBAS source data resumes automatically once
a valid GPS solution is restored.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
As a result of operating in DR Mode, all GPS-derived data is computed based upon an estimated position and
is displayed as yellow text on the display to denote degraded navigation source information as shown in Figure
5-146.
Also, while the G1000 is in DR Mode, TAWS is disabled. Additionally, the accuracy of all nearest information
(airports, airspaces, and waypoints) is questionable. Finally, airspace alerts continue to function, but with degraded
accuracy.
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-00629-04 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58
289
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Distance &
Bearing
Current
Track
Indicator)
EIS
Ground
Speed
Dead Reckoning
Annunciaion
Wind Data
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
GPS Navigation
Lost Message
Course
Deviation
Indicator
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Bearing
Pointer/
Distance
Nav Data Bar
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
All data except
Active Leg,
TAS, and DTK
are in yellow
AFCS
Dead Reckoning
Annunciation
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Subdued Aircraft
Symbol
APPENDICES
Figure 5-153 Dead Reckoning Mode - GPS Derived Data Shown in Yellow
NOTE: The Inset Map is removed from the PFD any time aircraft pitch is greater than +30° or less than –20°,
INDEX
or when a 65° bank angle is reached.
290
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58
190-00629-04 Rev. A
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
SECTION 6 HAZARD AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The G1000 hazard avoidance features are designed to provide advisory information with regard to potential
hazards to flight safety associated with weather, terrain, and air traffic.
This section is divided into the following groups:
Weather
• Garmin GDL 69A XM WX Satellite Weather
EIS
• Garmin GWX 68 Airborne Color Weather Radar
• L-3 STORMSCOPE® WX-500 Series II Weather Mapping Sensor (Optional)
Terrain Avoidance
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
• Terrain Awareness and Warning System - Class B (TAWS-B)
Traffic
• Traffic Information Service (TIS)
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
• Garmin GTS 820 Traffic Advisory System (TAS) (Optional)
• L-3 SKYWATCH® (SKY497) Traffic Advisory System (TAS) (If installed)
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-00629-04 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58
291
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
6.1 XM WX SATELLITE WEATHER
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
NOTE: XM WX Satellite Weather data provides information for avoiding hazardous weather. Do not use XM
WX information to penetrate hazardous weather.
EIS
XM WX Satellite Weather is provided through the GDL 69/69A, a remote-mounted data link satellite receiver.
Received graphical weather information and associated text is displayed on the Multi Function Display (MFD)
and the Primary Flight Display (PFD) Inset Map. The GDL 69A can also receive SiriusXM Satellite Radio
entertainment services. Weather data and entertainment programming operate in the S-band frequency range to
provide continuous reception capabilities at any altitude throughout North America.
Services are subscription-based. For more information on specific service packages, visit www.siriusxm.com.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
ACTIVATING SERVICES
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Before XM WX Satellite Weather can be used, the service must be activated. Service is activated by providing
SiriusXM with coded IDs unique to the installed GDL 69A. SiriusXM Satellite Radio (audio) and XM WX
Satellite Weather (data) services each have coded IDs. The Data and Audio Radio IDs must be provided to
SiriusXM to activate the weather service and entertainment subscriptions, respectively. These IDs are located
on:
• The label on the back of the Data Link Receiver
• The XM Information Page on the MFD (Figure 6-1)
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
• The SiriusXM Satellite Radio Activation Instructions included with the unit (available at www.garmin.com,
P/N 190-00355-04)
Contact the installer if the Audio and Data Radio IDs cannot be located.
AFCS
SiriusXM uses the coded IDs to send an activation signal that allows the system to display weather data and/
or entertainment programming provided through the GDL 69A.
Activating XM WX Satellite Weather and SiriusXM Satellite Radio services:
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
1) Contact SiriusXM using the the customer service phone number listed on the website. Follow the instructions
provided by SiriusXM customer service.
2) Select the XM Radio page in the Auxiliary Page Group.
3) Press the INFO Softkey to display the XM Information Page.
4) Verify the desired services are activated.
APPENDICES
5) Press the LOCK Softkey.
6) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight ‘YES’.
INDEX
7) To complete activation, press the ENT Key.
292
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58
190-00629-04 Rev. A
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Data Radio ID
(for XM WX
Satellite
Weather)
Audio Radio ID
(for SiriusXM
Satellite Radio)
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Figure 6-1 XM Information Page
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Select to Display XM
Information page
EIS
Weather
Products
(Available
Products for
Service Class
Indicated in
Green)
Select to Lock
Subscription
Information
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-00629-04 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58
293
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
USING XM WX SATELLITE WEATHER PRODUCTS
The principal map for viewing XM WX data is the XM Weather Data Link Page in the Map Page Group. This
is the only G1000 map display capable of showing information for all available XM WX products.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Viewing the XM Weather Data Link Page:
1) Turn the large FMS Knob to select the Map Page Group.
2) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the XM Weather Data Link Page.
EIS
NEXRAD
Product Symbol
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
NEXRAD
Weather Product
Ages (U.S. and
Canada)
AFCS
NEXRAD
Weather
Product
Selected for
Display
Figure 6-2 XM Weather Data Link Page
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
When a weather product is active on the XM Weather Data Link Page or the Navigation Map Page, the age of
the data is displayed on the screen next to its product symbol (Figure 6-2). The age of the product is based on
the time difference between when the data was assembled on the ground and the current GPS time. Weather
products are refreshed at specific intervals.
APPENDICES
If for any reason, a weather product is not refreshed within its defined Expiration Time interval (see Table
6-1), the data is considered expired and is removed from the display, and the system shows dashes instead of
a product age. This ensures the displayed data is consistent with what is currently being provided by XM WX
services. If more than half of the expiration time has elapsed, the color of the product age displayed changes to
yellow. If a weather product is unavailable, the system displays ‘N/A’ instead of a product age.
INDEX
Table 6-1 shows the weather product symbols, the expiration time and the refresh rate. The refresh rate
represents the interval at which XM WX services provides new signals that may or may not contain new
weather data. It does not represent the rate at which weather data is updated or new content is received by
the Data Link Receiver. SiriusXM and its data suppliers control the weather product update intervals, and are
are subject to change.
294
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58
190-00629-04 Rev. A
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
Symbol
NEXRAD
Expiration Time
(Minutes)
30
Cell Movement (CELL MOV)
30
SIGMETs/AIRMETs (SIG/AIR)
60
METARs
90
City Forecast (CITY)
90
Surface Analysis (SFC)
60
Freezing Levels (FRZ LVL)
60
Winds Aloft (WIND)
60
County Warnings (COUNTY)
60
Cyclone Warnings (CYCLONE)
60
AFCS
30
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
XM Lightning (LTNG)
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
30
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Echo Top (ECHO TOP)
EIS
60
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Cloud Top (CLD TOP)
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
90
90
90
APPENDICES
180
No product image
No product image
No product image
30
60
60
INDEX
Icing Potential (CIP and SLD)
(ICNG)
Pilot Weather Report
(PIREPs)
Air Report
(AIREPs)
Turbulence
(TURB)
Radar Coverage
TFRs
TAFs
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Weather Product
Table 6-1 Weather Product Symbols and Data Timing
190-00629-04 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58
295
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Cloud Top (CLD TOP)
+
Echo Top (ECHO TOP)
+
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
+
+
+
+
+
+
Cell Movement (CELL MOV)
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
City Forecast (CITY)
+
Surface Analysis (SFC)
+
Freezing Levels (FRZ LVL)
+
Winds Aloft (WIND)
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
+
+
METARs
AFCS
+
XM Lightning (LTNG)
SIGMETs/AIRMETs (SIG/AIR)
+*
+
+
County Warnings (COUNTY)
+
Cyclone Warnings (CYCLONE)
+
Icing Potential (ICNG)
+
PIREPs
+
+
AIREPs
+
+
Turbulence (TURB)
+
Radar Coverage
TFRs
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Flight Plan Pages
+
Nearest Page Group
+
AUX - Trip Planning
Page
+
Weather Information
Page
XM Weather Data Link
Page
EIS
NEXRAD
Navigation Map Page
XM WX Satellite Weather
Product
PFD Inset Map
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Table 6-2 shows which XM WX products can be displayed (indicated with a ‘+’ symbol) on specific maps.
TAFs
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
INDEX
APPENDICES
* WInds Aloft data available in Profile View on Navigation Map Page.
Table 6-2 Weather Product Display Maps
296
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58
190-00629-04 Rev. A
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Softkeys control the display of weather information on most MFD pages and the PFD Inset Map (Figure 6-3
shows the weather product softkeys for the XM Weather Data Link Page). When a weather product is selected
for display, the corresponding softkey label changes to gray to indicate the product is enabled.
CYCLONE SFC OFF
FRZ LVL
SIG/AIR
METAR
LEGEND MORE WX CHKLIST
WIND OFF ICNG OFF TURB OFF AIREPS
PIREPS
COUNTY
LTNG
CELL MOV
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
NEXRAD ECHO TOP CLD TOP
ENGINE
BACK
SFC Softkey label changes
to reflect current selection.
WIND/ICNG/TURB Softkey labels
change to reflect current selection.
12 HR
24 HR
36 HR
48 HR
LEGEND
BACK
EIS
CURRENT
OFF
Select the BACK Softkey
to move up one level.
3000
6000
9000
12000
15000
NEXT
LEGEND
BACK
PREV
OFF
18000
21000
24000
27000
30000
33000
NEXT
LEGEND
BACK
PREV
OFF
36000
39000
42000
NEXT
LEGEND
BACK
PREV
OFF
1000
3000
6000
9000
12000
NEXT
LEGEND
BACK
PREV
OFF
18000
21000
24000
27000
30000
NEXT
LEGEND
BACK
PREV
OFF
21000
24000
27000
30000
33000
NEXT
LEGEND
BACK
PREV
OFF
39000
42000
45000
NEXT
LEGEND
BACK
15000
36000
AFCS
SFC
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
OFF
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
PREV
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
PREV and NEXT Softkeys cycle through Winds Aloft,
Icing, and Turbulence altitude selection softkeys.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Figure 6-3 Weather Data Link Weather Product Softkeys
APPENDICES
The setup menus for the Navigation Map Page and the XM Weather Data Link Page control the map range
settings above which weather products data are decluttered from the display. If a map range larger than the
weather product map range setting is selected, the weather product data is removed from the map. The menus
also provide a means in addition to the softkeys for enabling/disabling display of weather products.
INDEX
190-00629-04 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58
297
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
Setting up and customizing the XM Weather Data Link Page:
1) Select the XM Weather Data Link Page.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
2) Press the MENU Key.
3) With ‘Weather Setup’ highlighted, press the ENT Key (Figure 6-4).
4) Turn the small FMS Knob to select ‘PRODUCT GROUP 1’ or ‘PRODUCT GROUP 2’, and press the ENT Key (Figure
6-5).
5) Turn the large FMS Knob or press the ENT Key to scroll through product selections.
EIS
6) Turn the small FMS Knob to scroll through options for each product (ON/OFF, range settings, etc.).
7) Press the ENT Key to select an option.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
8) Press the FMS Knob or CLR Key to return to the XM Weather Data Link Page with the changed settings.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Figure 6-4 XM Weather Data Link Page Menu
Figure 6-5 XM Weather Data Link Page Setup Menu
Restoring default XM Weather Data Link Page settings:
APPENDICES
1) Select the XM Weather Data Link Page.
2) Press the MENU Key.
3) With ‘Weather Setup’ highlighted, press the ENT Key.
4) Press the MENU Key.
INDEX
5) Highlight the desired default(s) to restore (all or for selection) and press ENT Key.
298
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58
190-00629-04 Rev. A
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Maps besides the XM Weather Data Link Page use settings based on those selected for the Navigation Map
Page.
Setting up and customizing weather data for the Navigation Map Page:
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
1) Select the Navigation Map Page.
2) Press the MENU Key.
3) With ‘Map Setup’ highlighted, press the ENT Key (Figure 6-6).
4) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the ‘Weather’ Group and press the ENT Key (Figure 6-7).
EIS
5) Turn the large FMS Knob or press the ENT Key to scroll through product selections (Figure 6-8).
6) Turn the small FMS Knob to scroll through options for each product (ON/OFF, range settings).
7) Press the ENT Key to select an option.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
8) Press the FMS Knob or CLR Key to return to the Navigation Map Page with the changed settings.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Figure 6-6 Navigation Map Page Menu
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Figure 6-7 Navigation Map Page Setup Menu
Figure 6-8 Navigation Map Page Setup Menu, Weather Group
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-00629-04 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58
299
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
Each active weather product has an associated legend which can be displayed on the XM Weather Data Link
Page.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Viewing legends for displayed weather products
1) Select the XM Weather Data Link Page.
2) Press the LEGEND Softkey to display the legends for the displayed weather products.
Or:
a) Press the MENU Key.
EIS
b) Select ‘Weather Legend’ and press the ENT Key.
3) Turn the FMS Knob to scroll through the legends if more are available than fit in the window.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
4) To remove the Legend Window, press the LEGEND Softkey, the ENT or the CLR Key, or press the FMS Knob.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Additional information about the following can be displayed by panning over the display on the map:
• Echo Tops
• County Warnings
• Cell Movement
• TFRs
• SIGMETs
• AIREPs
• AIRMETs
• PIREPs
• METARs
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
The map panning feature is enabled by pressing the RANGE Knob. The map range is adjusted by turning
the RANGE Knob. If the map range is adjusted while panning is enabled, the map is re-centered on the Map
Pointer.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
Additional Information on Item
Selected with
Map Pointer
INDEX
APPENDICES
TFR Selected
with Map Pointer
Figure 6-9 Panning on the XM Weather Data Link Page
300
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58
190-00629-04 Rev. A
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
NEXRAD
NOTE: NEXRAD data cannot be displayed at the same time as terrain, echo tops, turbulence, or icing data.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
WSR-88D, or NEXRAD (NEXt-generation RADar), is a network of 158 high-resolution Doppler radar
systems that are operated by the National Weather Service (NWS). NEXRAD data provides centralized
meteorological information for the continental United States and selected overseas locations. The maximum
range of a single NEXRAD radar site is 250 nm. In addition to a wide array of services, the NEXRAD network
provides important information about severe weather and air traffic safety.
EIS
NEXRAD data is not real-time. The lapsed time between collection, processing, and dissemination of
NEXRAD images can be significant and may not reflect the current radar synopsis. Due to the inherent delays
and the relative age of the data, it should be used for long-range planning purposes only. Never use NEXRAD
data or any radar data to penetrate hazardous weather. Rather, use it in an early-warning capacity of predeparture and enroute evaluation.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
No Radar
Coverage
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Figure 6-10 NEXRAD Data on the XM Weather Data Link Page
NEXRAD data can be displayed on the following maps:
• Trip Planning Page
• Navigation Map Page
• Nearest Pages
• XM Weather Data Link Page
• Flight Plan Pages
APPENDICES
• PFD Inset Map
• Airport Information Page
INDEX
190-00629-04 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58
301
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Displaying NEXRAD weather information:
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
2) Press the NEXRAD Softkey.
1) Press the MAP Softkey (for the PFD Inset Map, press the INSET Softkey). This step is not necessary on the XM
Weather Data Link Page.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
Composite data from all the NEXRAD radar sites in the United States is shown. This data is composed of
the maximum reflectivity from the individual radar sweeps. The display of the information is color-coded
to indicate the weather severity level. All weather product legends can be viewed on the XM Weather Data
Link Page. For the NEXRAD legend (Figure 6-11), press the LEGEND Softkey when NEXRAD is selected for
display.
No Radar Coverage
Figure 6-11 NEXRAD Data with Legend
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
The display of radar coverage is always active when either NEXRAD or Echo Tops is selected. Areas where
NEXRAD radar coverage and Echo Tops information is not currently available or is not being collected are
indicated in a gray shade of purple.
Reflectivity
AFCS
Reflectivity is the amount of transmitted power returned to the radar receiver. Colors on the NEXRAD
display are directly correlative to the level of detected reflectivity. Reflectivity as it relates to hazardous
weather can be very complex.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
The role of radar is essentially to detect moisture in the atmosphere. Simply put, certain types of weather
reflect radar better than others. The intensity of a radar reflection is not necessarily an indication of the
weather hazard level. For instance, wet hail returns a strong radar reflection, while dry hail does not. Both
wet and dry hail can be extremely hazardous.
INDEX
APPENDICES
The different NEXRAD echo intensities are measured in decibels (dB) relative to reflectivity (Z). NEXRAD
measures the radar reflectivity ratio, or the energy reflected back to the radar receiver (designated by the
letter Z). The value of Z increases as the returned signal strength increases.
302
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58
190-00629-04 Rev. A
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
NEXRAD Limitations
NEXRAD radar images may have certain limitations:
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
• NEXRAD base reflectivity does not provide sufficient information to determine cloud layers or precipitation
characteristics (wet hail vs. rain). For example, it is not possible to distinguish between wet snow, wet
hail, and rain.
• NEXRAD base reflectivity is sampled at the minimum antenna elevation angle. An individual NEXRAD
site cannot depict high altitude storms at close ranges. It has no information about storms directly over
the site.
EIS
• When zoomed in to a range of 30 nm, each square block on the display represents an area of four square
kilometers. The intensity level reflected by each square represents the highest level of NEXRAD data
sampled within the area (Figure 6-12).
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Block Area is 4 km2
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
Figure 6-12 NEXRAD Data - Zoomed
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
The following may cause abnormalities in displayed NEXRAD radar images:
• Ground clutter
• Strobes and spurious radar data
APPENDICES
• Sun strobes (when the radar antenna points directly at the sun)
• Interference from buildings or mountains, which may cause shadows
• Metallic dust from military aircraft, which can cause alterations in radar scans
INDEX
190-00629-04 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58
303
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
NEXRAD Limitations (Canada)
• Radar coverage extends to 55ºN.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
• Any precipitation displayed between 52ºN and 55ºN is displayed as mixed precipitation.
EIS
No Coverage
Above 55ºN
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Precipitation
Above 52ºN
Displays as Mixed
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Figure 6-13 NEXRAD Data - Canada
304
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58
190-00629-04 Rev. A
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
ECHO TOPS
NOTE: Echo Tops cannot be displayed at the same time as Cloud Tops or NEXRAD data.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Echo Tops data (Figure 6-14) shows the location, elevation, and direction of the highest radar echo. The
highest radar echo does not indicate the top of a storm or clouds; rather it indicates the highest altitude at
which precipitation is detected. Information is derived from NEXRAD data.
Altitude of
Selected Echo
Top
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Echo Tops Data
Selected with
Map Pointer
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Figure 6-14 Echo Tops Data
Displaying Echo Tops information:
AFCS
1) Select the XM Weather Data Link Page.
2) Press the ECHO TOP Softkey.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
To display the Echo Tops legend (Figure 6-15), press the LEGEND Softkey when Echo Tops is selected for
display. Since Echo Tops and Cloud Tops use the same color scaling to represent altitude, display of these
weather products is mutually exclusive. When Echo Tops is activated, NEXRAD and Cloud Tops data are
removed.
APPENDICES
INDEX
No Radar Coverage
Figure 6-15 Echo Tops Legend
190-00629-04 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58
305
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
The display of radar coverage is always active when either NEXRAD or Echo Tops is selected. Areas where
NEXRAD radar coverage and Echo Tops information is not currently available or is not being collected are
indicated in a gray shade of purple.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
CLOUD TOPS
NOTE: Cloud Tops and Echo Tops cannot be displayed at the same time.
Cloud Tops data (Figure 6-16) depicts cloud top altitudes as determined from satellite imagery.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
Altitude of
Selected
Cloud Top
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Cloud
Tops Data
Selected with
Map Pointer
AFCS
Figure 6-16 Cloud Tops Data
Displaying Cloud Tops information:
1) Select the XM Weather Data Link Page.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
2) Press the CLD TOP Softkey.
INDEX
APPENDICES
To display the Cloud Tops legend (Figure 6-17), press the LEGEND Softkey when Cloud Tops is selected for
display. Since Cloud Tops and Echo Tops use the same color scaling to represent altitude, display of these
weather products is mutually exclusive. When Cloud Tops is activated, Echo Tops data is removed.
Figure 6-17 Cloud Tops Legend
306
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58
190-00629-04 Rev. A
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
XM LIGHTNING
NOTE: Optional L-3 STORMSCOPE® WX-500 Lightning and GDL 69/69A XM WX Satellite Weather Lightning
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
cannot be displayed at the same time.
XM Lightning data (Figure 6-18) shows the approximate location of cloud-to-ground lightning strikes. A
strike icon represents a strike that has occurred within a two-kilometer region. The exact location of the
lightning strike is not displayed.
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Lightning
Strikes
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Figure 6-18 XM Lightning Data
• Trip Planning Page
• Navigation Map Page
• Nearest Pages
• XM Weather Data Link Page
• Flight Plan Pages
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
• PFD Inset Map
AFCS
XM Lightning data displays on the following maps:
Displaying XM Lightning information:
APPENDICES
1) Press the MAP Softkey (for the PFD Inset Map, press the INSET Softkey). This step is not necessary on the XM
Weather Data Link Page.
2) Press the XM LTNG Softkey.
To display the XM Lightning legend on the XM Weather Data Link Page (Figure 6-19), press the LEGEND
Softkey when XM Lightning is selected for display.
INDEX
Figure 6-19 Lightning Legend
190-00629-04 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58
307
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
CELL MOVEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Cell Movement data (Figure 6-20) shows the location and movement of storm cells as identified by the
ground-based system. Cells are represented by yellow squares, with direction of movement indicated with
short, orange arrows.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Storm Cells
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Figure 6-20 Cell Movement Data
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
On most applicable maps, Cell Movement data is selected for display along with NEXRAD. On the XM
Weather Data Link Page, Cell Movement data can be selected independently. Cell Movement data can be
displayed on the following maps:
• PFD Inset Map
• Trip Planning Page
• Navigation Map Page
• Nearest Pages
• XM Weather Data Link Page
• Flight Plan Pages
Displaying Cell Movement information:
1) Press the MAP Softkey (for the PFD Inset Map, press the INSET Softkey). This step is not necessary on the XM
Weather Data Link Page.
APPENDICES
2) Press the NEXRAD Softkey (CEL MOV Softkey on the XM Weather Data Link Page). For Cell Movement to
be displayed on maps other than the XM Weather Data Link Page, Cell Movement must be turned on in the
Navigation Map Setup Menu (see “Setting up and customizing weather data for the Navigation Map Page”).
INDEX
To display the Cell Movement legend on the XM Weather Data Link Page, (Figure 6-21), press the LEGEND
Softkey when Cell Movement is selected for display.
Figure 6-21 Cell Movement Legend
308
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58
190-00629-04 Rev. A
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
SIGMETS AND AIRMETS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
SIGMETs (SIGnificant METeorological Information) and AIRMETs (AIRmen’s METeorological Information)
are broadcast for potentially hazardous weather. A Convective SIGMET is issued for hazardous convective
weather. A localized SIGMET is a significant weather condition occurring at a localized geographical
position.
EIS
AIRMET
Mountain
Obscuration
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
AIRMET
Icing
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AIRMET
IFR
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Figure 6-22 SIGMET/AIRMET Data
Displaying SIGMETs and AIRMETs:
1) Select the XM Weather Data Link Page.
AFCS
2) Press the SIG/AIR Softkey.
3) To view the text of the SIGMET or AIRMET, press the RANGE Knob and move the Map Pointer over the
icon.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
4) Press the ENT key. Figure 6-23 shows sample SIGMET text.
To display the SIGMET and AIRMET legend (Figure 6-24), press the LEGEND Softkey when SIGMETs and
AIRMETs are selected for display.
APPENDICES
INDEX
Figure 6-23 Sample SIGMET Text
190-00629-04 Rev. A
Figure 6-24 SIGMET/AIRMET Legend
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58
309
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
METARS AND TAFS
NOTE: Atmospheric pressure as reported for METARs is given in hectopascals (hPa), except for in the United
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
States, where it is reported in inches of mercury (in Hg). Temperatures are reported in Celsius.
NOTE: METAR information is only displayed within the installed navigation database service area.
EIS
METARs (METeorological Aerodrome Reports) typically contain information about the temperature,
dewpoint, wind, precipitation, cloud cover, cloud heights, visibility, and barometric pressure at an airport or
observation station. They can also contain information on precipitation amounts, lightning, and other critical
data. METARs reflect hourly observations; non-routine updates include the code “SPECI” in the report.
METARs are shown as colored flags at airports that provide them.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Instructions for
Viewing METAR and
TAF Text
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Selected Airport
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Figure 6-25 METAR Flags on the XM Weather Data Link Page
TAFs (Terminal Aerodrome Forecasts) are weather predictions for specific airports typically within a 24hour period, and may span up to 36 hours. TAFs may include forecast wind, visibility, weather phenomena,
and sky conditions using METAR codes.
APPENDICES
METAR and TAF text are displayed on the Weather Information Page. METAR data is displayed first in a
decoded fashion, then as raw text. TAF information is displayed only in its raw form when it is available.
Displaying METAR and TAF text:
1) On the XM Weather Data Link Page, press the METAR Softkey.
INDEX
2) Press the RANGE Knob and pan to the desired airport.
3) Press the ENT Key. The Weather Information Page is shown with METAR and TAF text.
4) Use the FMS Knob or the ENT Key to scroll through the METAR and TAF text. METAR text must be completely
scrolled through before scrolling through the TAF text.
310
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58
190-00629-04 Rev. A
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
5) Press the FMS Knob or the CLR Key to return to the XM Weather Data Link Page.
Or:
1) Select the Weather Information Page.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
a) Turn the large FMS Knob to select the Waypoint Page Group.
b) Press the WX Softkey to select the Weather Information Page.
2) Press the FMS Knob to display the cursor.
3) Use the FMS Knob to enter the desired airport and press the ENT Key.
EIS
4) Use the FMS Knob or the ENT Key to scroll through the METAR and TAF text. Note the METAR text must be
completely scrolled through before scrolling through the TAF text.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
METAR Text for the
Selected Airport
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
METAR Symbol
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
TAF Text for the
Selected Airport
AFCS
Figure 6-26 METAR and TAF Text on the Weather Information Page
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Raw METAR text is also accessible while panning the map cursor over a METAR flag on any map page on
which a METAR is displayed. The METAR text is shown in a box near the METAR flag.
In addition, METAR flags and their associated text are displayed on the Active Flight Plan Page on the MF.D.
A METAR flag is shown next to waypoint(s) in the flight plan with an available METAR.
APPENDICES
Displaying raw METAR text on the Active Flight Plan Page:
1) Select the Active Flight Plan Page on the MFD.
2) Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor.
3) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the desired waypoint. The METAR text will appear in the ‘SELECTED
WAYPOINT WEATHER’ window below.
INDEX
4) When finished, press the FMS Knob to remove the cursor or press the FPL Key to exit the Active Flight Plan
Page.
190-00629-04 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58
311
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
To display the METAR legend on the XM Weather Data Link Page (Figure 6-27), press the LEGEND Softkey
when METARs are selected for display.
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The METAR flag color is determined by the information in the METAR text. A gray METAR flag is displayed
when the METAR text does not contain adequate information.
Figure 6-27 METAR Legend
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
SURFACE ANALYSIS AND CITY FORECAST
NOTE: Surface Analysis and City Forecast data are displayed only within the installed Aviation Database
service area.
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Surface Analysis and City Forecast information is available for current and forecast weather conditions.
Forecasts are available for intervals of 12, 24, 36, and 48 hours.
INDEX
Figure 6-28 Current Surface Analysis Data
312
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58
190-00629-04 Rev. A
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Displaying Surface Analysis and City Forecast information:
1) Select the XM Weather Data Link Page.
2) Press the MORE WX Softkey.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
3) Press the SFC Softkey.
4) Select the desired forecast time: CURRENT, 12 HR, 24 HR, 36 HR, or 48 HR. The SFC Softkey label changes
to reflect the forecast time selected.
To display the Surface Analysis and City Forecast legend (Figure 6-29), press the LEGEND Softkey when
Surface Analysis and City Forecast are selected to be displayed.
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Figure 6-29 Surface Analysis Legend
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-00629-04 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58
313
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
FREEZING LEVELS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Freezing Level data shows the color-coded contour lines for the altitude and location at which the first
isotherm is found (Figure 6-30). When no data is displayed for a given altitude, the data for that altitude has
not been received, or is out of date and has been removed from the display. New data appears at the next
update.
Figure 6-30 Freezing Level Data
Displaying Freezing Level information:
1) Select the XM Weather Data Link Page.
AFCS
2) Press the MORE WX Softkey.
3) Press the FRZ LVL Softkey.
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
To display the Freezing Level legend (Figure 6-31), press the LEGEND Softkey when Freezing Level data is
selected to be displayed.
INDEX
Figure 6-31 Freezing Level Legend
314
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58
190-00629-04 Rev. A
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
WINDS ALOFT
Winds Aloft data (Figure 6-32) shows the forecasted wind speed and direction at the surface and at selected
altitudes. Altitude can be displayed in 3,000-foot increments up to 42,000 feet MSL.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Displaying Winds Aloft data:
1) Select the XM Weather Data Link Page.
2) Press the MORE WX Softkey.
3) Press the WIND Softkey.
EIS
4) Select the desired altitude level: SFC (surface) up to 42,000 feet. Press the NEXT or PREV Softkey to cycle
through the altitude softkeys. The WIND Softkey label changes to reflect the altitude selected.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
Figure 6-32 Winds Aloft Data at 12,000 Feet
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
To display the Winds Aloft legend (Figure 6-33), press the LEGEND Softkey when Winds Aloft is selected
for display.
APPENDICES
Figure 6-33 Winds Aloft Data with Legend
190-00629-04 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58
INDEX
Headwind and tailwind components aloft are available inside the Profile View on the Navigation Map Page
(Figure 6-34). The displayed components are relative to current aircraft altitude and track, but not to aircraft
speed.
315
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Profile View
Path
Headwind/
Tailwind
Component
Arrows
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Winds Aloft
Altitudes
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Figure 6-34 Winds Aloft Data Inside Profile View (Navigation Map Page)
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Arrows pointing to the left indicate headwind components; tailwind component arrows point to the right,
as shown in Table 6-3.
Headwind
Symbol
Tailwind
Symbol
Headwind/Tailwind
Component
None
None
Less than 5 knots
AFCS
5 knots
10 knots
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
50 knots
INDEX
APPENDICES
Table 6-3 Profile View Headwind/Tailwind Component Symbols
316
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58
190-00629-04 Rev. A
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Showing/Hiding Profile View:
1) Select the Navigation Map Page.
2) Press the MAP Softkey.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
3) Press the PROFILE Softkey.
Or:
1) Press the MENU Key.
EIS
2) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight ‘Show Profile View’ or ‘Hide Profile View’ (choice dependent on current
state) and press the ENT Key.
Winds Aloft data inside the Profile View is enabled by default when the Profile View is displayed on the
Navigation Map Page. This behavior can be changed on the Navigation Map Page.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Enabling/disabling Wind Data in Profile View:
1) Select the Navigation Map Page.
2) Press the MENU Key.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
3) With Map Setup highlighted, press the ENT Key (Figure 6-35).
4) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the Profile Group and press the ENT Key (Figure 6-36).
5) Turn the large FMS Knob to select ‘Profile Winds’ (Figure 6-37).
6) Turn the small FMS Knob to select ‘On’ or ‘Off’.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
7) Press the FMS Knob or CLR Key to return to the Navigation Map Page with the changed settings.
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Figure 6-35 Navigation Map Page Menu
APPENDICES
190-00629-04 Rev. A
INDEX
Figure 6-36 Navigation Map Page Setup Menu
Figure 6-37 Navigation Map Page Setup Menu, Weather Group
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58
317
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
ICING (CIP & SLD)
NOTE: Icing data cannot be displayed at the same time as NEXRAD data. When NEXRAD data is selected,
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
icing data is removed.
Current Icing Product (CIP) data (Figure 6-38) shows a graphical view of the current icing environment.
Icing severity is displayed in four categories: light, moderate, severe, and extreme (not specific to aircraft
type). The CIP product is not a forecast, but a presentation of the current conditions at the time of the
analysis.
EIS
Supercooled Large Droplet (SLD) icing conditions are characterized by the presence of relatively large,
super cooled water droplets indicative of freezing drizzle and freezing rain aloft. SLD threat areas are depicted
as magenta dots over the CIP colors.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Displaying Icing data:
1) Select the XM Weather Data Link Page.
2) Press the MORE WX Softkey.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
3) Press the ICNG Softkey.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
4) Select the desired altitude level: 1,000 feet up to 30,000 feet. Press the NEXT or PREV Softkey to cycle through
the altitude softkeys. The ICNG Softkey label changes to reflect the altitude selected.
AFCS
Icing
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Supercooled
Large Droplets
Figure 6-38 Icing Data at 15,000 Feet
INDEX
To display the Icing Potential legend (Figure 6-39), press the LEGEND Softkey when Icing is selected for
display.
Figure 6-39 Icing Potential Legend
318
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58
190-00629-04 Rev. A
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
TURBULENCE
NOTE: Turbulence data cannot be displayed at the same time as NEXRAD data. When NEXRAD data is
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
selected, turbulence data is removed.
Turbulence data (Figure 6-40) identifies the potential for erratic movement of high-altitude air mass
associated winds. Turbulence is classified as light, moderate, severe or extreme, at altitudes between 21,000
and 45,000 feet. Turbulence data is intended to supplement AIRMETs and SIGMETs.
Displaying Turbulence data:
EIS
1) Select the XM Weather Data Link Page.
2) Press the MORE WX Softkey.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
3) Press the TURB Softkey.
4) Select the desired altitude level: 21,000 feet up to 45,000 feet. Press the NEXT or PREV Softkey to cycle
through the altitude softkeys. The TURB Softkey label changes to reflect the altitude selected.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
Severe
Turbulence
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Figure 6-40 Turbulence Data at 21,000 Feet
APPENDICES
To display the Turbulence legend (Figure 6-41), press the LEGEND Softkey when Turbulence is selected for
display.
INDEX
Figure 6-41 Turbulence Legend
190-00629-04 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58
319
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
PIREPS AND AIREPS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Pilot Weather Reports (PIREPs) (Figure 6-42) provide timely weather information for a particular route of
flight. When significant weather conditions are reported or forecast, Air Traffic Control (ATC) facilities are
required to solicit PIREPs. A PIREP may contain adverse weather conditions, such as low in-flight visibility,
icing conditions, wind shear, and turbulence. PIREPs are issued as either Routine (UA) or Urgent (UUA).
Air Reports or AIREPs are similar to PIREPs, but used almost exclusively by commercial airlines.
EIS
Instructions for
Viewing PIREP
and AIREP Text
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
AIREP
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Urgent PIREP
Selected
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
PIREP
AFCS
Figure 6-42 AIREPs and PIREPs on the XM Weather Data Link Page
Displaying PIREP and AIREP text:
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
1) Select the XM Weather Data Link Page.
2) Press the MORE WX Softkey.
3) Press the AIREPS or PIREPS Softkey.
APPENDICES
4) Press the RANGE Knob and pan to the desired weather report. A gray circle will appear around the weather
report when it is selected.
5) Press the ENT Key. The Weather Information Page is shown with PIREP or AIREP text. The data is first displayed
in a decoded fashion, then as raw text.
6) Use the FMS Knob or the ENT Key to scroll through the PIREP or AIREP text.
INDEX
7) Press the FMS Knob or the CLR Key to return to the XM Weather Data Link Page.
320
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58
190-00629-04 Rev. A
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Decoded PIREP Text
EIS
Raw PIREP Text
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Figure 6-43 PIREP Text on the XM Weather Data Link Page
To display the PIREP or AIREP legend (Figure 6-44), press the LEGEND Softkey when PIREPs or AIREPs are
selected for display.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
The PIREP color is determined by the type (routine or urgent).
AFCS
Figure 6-44 AIREPs & PIREPs Legend
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-00629-04 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58
321
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
COUNTY WARNINGS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
County data (Figure 6-45) provides specific public awareness and protection weather warnings from the
National Weather Service (NWS). This can include information on severe thunderstorms, tornadoes, and
flood conditions.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
Additional
Information on
Warning Selected
with Map Pointer
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Flood Warning
Selected with
Map Pointer
Figure 6-45 County Warnings
AFCS
Displaying County Warning information:
1) Select the XM Weather Data Link Page.
2) Press the MORE WX Softkey.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
3) Press the COUNTY Softkey.
APPENDICES
To display the County Warnings legend (Figure 6-46), press the LEGEND Softkey when County Warnings
are selected to be displayed.
INDEX
Figure 6-46 County Warnings Legend
322
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58
190-00629-04 Rev. A
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
CYCLONE
The Cyclone weather product (Figure 6-47) shows the current location of cyclones (hurricanes), tropical
storms, and their projected tracks.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Cyclone
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Figure 6-47 Cyclone Data on the Weather Data Link Display
Displaying cyclone (hurricane) track information:
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
1) Select the XM Weather Data Link Page.
2) Press the MORE WX Softkey.
3) Press the CYCLONE Softkey.
AFCS
To display the Cyclone legend (Figure 6-48), press the LEGEND Softkey when Cyclones are selected to be
displayed.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Figure 6-48 Cyclone Legend
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-00629-04 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58
323
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
6.2 AIRBORNE COLOR WEATHER RADAR
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
The Garmin GWX 68 Airborne Color Weather Radar is a four-color digital pulsed radar with 6.5 kilowatts
of output power. It combines excellent range and adjustable scanning profiles with a high-definition target
display. The pulse width is four microseconds (µs) on all ranges except the 2.5 nm range. The GWX 68 uses a
one µs pulse width at this range to reduce the targets smearing together on the display for better target definition
at close range.
EIS
The Beechcraft G58 uses a 12-inch phased array antenna that is fully stabilized to accommodate 30º of pitch
and roll.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
To focus radar scanning on specific areas, Sector Scanning offers pilot-adjustable horizontal scan angles of
20º, 40º, 60º, or 90º. A vertical scanning function helps to analyze storm tops, gradients, and cell buildup
activity at various altitudes.
Radar features include:
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
• Extended Sensitivity Time Constant (STC) logic that automatically correlates distance of the return echo with
intensity, so cells do not suddenly appear to get larger as they get closer.
• WATCH™ (Weather ATtenuated Color Highlight) helps identify possible shadowing effects of short-range
cell activity, identifying areas where radar return signals are weakened or attenuated by intense precipitation
(or large areas of lesser precipitation) and may not fully reflect the weather behind a storm.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
• Weather Alert that looks ahead for intense cell activity in the 80-320 nm range, even if these ranges are not
being monitored.
PRINCIPLES OF PULSED AIRBORNE WEATHER RADAR
AFCS
The term RADAR is an acronym for RAdio Detecting And Ranging. Pulsed radar locates targets by transmitting
a microwave pulse beam that, upon encountering a target, is reflected back to the radar receiver as a return
echo. The microwave pulses are focused and radiated by the antenna, with the most intense energy in the
center of the beam and decreasing intensity near the edge. The same antenna is used for both transmitting and
receiving. The returned signal is then processed and displayed on the G1000 MFD.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Radar detection is a two-way process that requires 12.36 µs for the transmitted microwave pulses to travel out
and back for each nautical mile of target range. It takes 123.6 µs for a transmitted pulse to make the round trip
if a target is ten nautical miles away.
APPENDICES
Airborne weather radar should be used to avoid severe weather, not for penetrating severe weather. The
decision to fly into an area of radar targets depends on target intensity, spacing between the targets, aircraft
capabilities, and pilot experience. Pulse type weather radar detects only precipitation, not clouds or turbulence.
The display may indicate clear areas between intense returns, but this does not necessarily mean it is safe to fly
between them. Only Doppler radar can detect turbulence.
INDEX
Airborne weather radar has other capabilities beyond weather detection. It also has the ability to detect and
provide distance to cities, mountains, coastlines, rivers, lakes, and oceans.
324
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58
190-00629-04 Rev. A
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
NEXRAD AND AIRBORNE WEATHER RADAR
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Both Airborne Weather Radar and NEXRAD measure weather reflectivity in decibels (dB). A decibel is a
logarithmic expression of the ratio of two quantities. Airborne Weather Radar measures the ratio of power
against the gain of the antenna, while NEXRAD measures the energy reflected back to the radar, or the radar
reflectivity ratio.
Both systems use colors to identify the different echo intensities, but the colors are not interchangeable.
Airborne color radar values used by Garmin Airborne Color Weather Radar should not be confused with
NEXRAD radar values.
EIS
ANTENNA BEAM ILLUMINATION
Antenna at Zero Tilt
18,000 ft.
0
15
s
Beam Sidelobe
Max Power at Beam Center
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
8°
0
Half Power at
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Altitude (x1000 ft.)
80
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
The radar beam is much like the beam of a spotlight. The further the beam travels, the wider it becomes.
The radar is only capable of seeing what is inside the boundaries of the beam. The figure below depicts
a radar beam’s characteristics. The figure illustrates vertical dimensions of the radar beam, although the
same holds true for the horizontal dimensions. In other words, the beam is as wide as it is tall. Note that
it is possible to miss areas of precipitation on the radar display because of the antenna tilt setting. With the
antenna tilt set to zero in this illustration, the beam overshoots the precipitation at 15 nautical miles.
18,000 ft.
30
45
60
75
90
Range (nautical miles)
AFCS
Figure 6-49 Radar Beam from a 10 inch Antenna
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
The curvature of the earth can also be a factor in missing areas of precipitation, especially at range settings
of 150 nautical miles or more. Here the beam overshoots the precipitation at less than 320 nautical miles.
APPENDICES
320 nm
INDEX
Figure 6-50 Radar Beam in Relation to the Curvature of the Earth
190-00629-04 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58
325
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
RADAR SIGNAL ATTENUATION
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The phenomenon of radar signal attenuation affects the operation of weather radar. When the radar signal
is transmitted, it is progressively absorbed and scattered, making the signal weaker. This weakening, or
attenuation, is caused by two primary sources, distance and precipitation.
EIS
Attenuation because of distance is due to the fact that the radar energy leaving the antenna is inversely
proportional to the square of the distance. The reflected radar energy from a target 40 miles away that fills
the radar beam is one fourth the energy reflected from an equivalent target 20 miles away. This would appear
to the operator that the storm is gaining intensity as the aircraft gets closer. Internal signal processing within
the GWX 68 system compensates for much of this distance attenuation.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Attenuation due to precipitation is not as predictable as distance attenuation. It is also more intense. As the
radar signal passes through moisture, a portion of the radar energy is reflected back to the antenna. However,
much of the energy is absorbed. If precipitation is very heavy, or covers a large area, the signal may not
reach completely through the area of precipitation. The weather radar system cannot distinguish between an
attenuated signal and an area of no precipitation. If the signal has been fully attenuated, the radar displays
a radar shadow. This appears as an end to the precipitation when, in fact, the heavy rain may extend much
further. A cell containing heavy precipitation may block another cell located behind the first, preventing it
from being displayed on the radar. Never fly into these shadowed areas and never assume that all of the heavy
precipitation is being displayed unless another cell or a ground target can be seen beyond the heavy cell. The
WATCH™ feature of the GWX 68 Weather Radar system can help in identifying these shadowed areas. Areas
in question appear as shadowed or gray on the radar display. Proper use of the antenna tilt control can also
help detect radar shadows.
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Attenuation can also be due to poor maintenance or degradation of the radome. Even the smallest amount
of wear and scratching, pitting, and pinholes on the radome surface can cause damage and system inefficiency.
326
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58
190-00629-04 Rev. A
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
RADAR SIGNAL REFLECTIVITY
Precipitation
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Precipitation or objects more dense than water, such as the surface of the earth or solid structures, are
detected by the weather radar. The weather radar does not detect clouds, thunderstorms, or turbulence
directly. It detects precipitation associated with clouds, thunderstorms, and turbulence. The best radar
signal reflectors are raindrops, wet snow, or wet hail. The larger the raindrop, the better the reflectivity. The
size of the precipitation droplet is the most important factor in radar reflectivity. Because large drops in a
small concentrated area are characteristic of a severe thunderstorm, the radar displays the storm as a strong
return. Ice crystals, dry snow, and dry hail have low levels of reflectivity as shown in the illustration, and
often not displayed by the radar. Additionally, a cloud that contains only small raindrops, such as fog or
drizzle, does not reflect enough radar energy to produce a measurable target return.
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Figure 6-51 Precipitation Type and Reflectivity
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-00629-04 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58
327
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
Ground Returns
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The intensity of ground target returns depends upon the angle at which the radar beam strikes the
ground target (Angle of Incidence) and the reflective properties of that target. The gain can be adjusted so
shorelines, rivers, lakes, and cities are well-defined. Increasing the gain too much causes the display to fill
in between targets, thus obscuring some landmarks.
EIS
Cities normally provide a strong return signal. While large buildings and structures provide good returns,
small buildings can be shadowed from the radar beam by the taller buildings. As the aircraft approaches
and shorter ranges are selected, details become more noticeable as the highly reflective regular lines and
edges of the city become more defined.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Bodies of water such as lakes, rivers, and oceans are not good reflectors and normally do not provide good
returns. The energy is reflected in a forward scatter angle with inadequate energy being returned. They
can appear as dark areas on the display. However, rough or choppy water is a better reflector and provides
stronger returns from the downwind sides of the waves.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Mountains also provide strong return signals to the antenna, but also block the areas behind. However,
over mountainous terrain, the radar beam can be reflected back and forth in the mountain passes or off
canyon walls, using up all or most of the radar energy. In this case, no return signal is received from this
area, causing the display to show a dark spot which could indicate a pass where no pass exists.
Angle of Incidence
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
The angle at which the radar beam strikes the target is called the Angle of Incidence. The figure illustrates
the incident angle (‘A’). This directly affects the detectable range, the area of illumination, and the intensity
of the displayed target returns. A large incident angle gives the radar system a smaller detectable range and
lower display intensity due to minimized reflection of the radar energy.
Figure 6-52 Angle of Incidence
INDEX
A smaller incident angle gives the radar a larger detectable range of operation and the target display shows
a higher intensity. Since more radar energy is reflected back to the antenna with a low incident angle, the
resulting detectable range is increased for mountainous terrain.
328
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58
190-00629-04 Rev. A
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
SAFE OPERATING DISTANCE
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The following information establishes a minimum safe distance from the antenna for personnel near
operating weather radar. The minimum safe distance is based on the FCC’s exposure limit at 9.3 to 9.5 GHz for
general population/uncontrolled environments, which is 1 mW/cm2. See Advisory Circular 20-68B for more
information on safe distance determination.
MAXIMUM PERMISSIBLE EXPOSURE LEVEL (MPEL)
EIS
The zone in which the radiation level exceeds the US Government standard of 1 mW/cm2 is the semicircular
area of at least 11 feet from the 12-inch antenna. All personnel must remain outside of this zone. With a
scanning or rotating beam, the averaged power density at the MPEL boundary is significantly reduced.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
MPEL
Boundary
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
11’ for 12”
antenna
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Figure 6-53 MPEL Boundary
BASIC ANTENNA TILT SETUP
APPENDICES
The following discussion is a simple method for setting up the weather radar antenna tilt for most situations.
It is not to be considered an all encompassing setup that works in all situations, but this method does provide
good overall parameters for the monitoring of threats. Ultimately, it is desired to have the antenna tilted so that
the bottom of the radar beam is four degrees below parallel with the ground. The following example explains
one way of achieving this.
190-00629-04 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58
INDEX
With the aircraft flying level, adjust the antenna tilt so ground returns are displayed at a distance that equals
the aircraft’s current altitude (AGL) divided by 1,000. For example, if the aircraft is at 14,000 feet, adjust the
tilt so the front edge of ground returns are displayed at 14 nautical miles. Note this antenna tilt angle setting.
Now, raise the antenna tilt 6 degrees above this setting. The bottom of the radar beam is now angled down 4º
from parallel with the ground.
329
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
PRACTICAL APPLICATION USING THE BASIC TILT SETUP
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
With the antenna tilt set as previously described, any displayed target return should be scrutinized when
flying at altitudes between 2,000 and 30,000 feet AGL. If the displayed target advances on the screen to
within 5 nautical miles of the aircraft, avoid it. This may be either weather or ground returns that are 2,000
feet or less below the aircraft. Raising the antenna tilt 4 degrees can help separate ground returns from
weather returns in relatively flat terrain. This aligns the bottom of the radar beam parallel with the ground.
Return the antenna tilt to the previous setting after a few sweeps.
If the aircraft is above 29,000 feet, be cautious of any target return that gets to within 30 nautical miles.
This is likely a thunderstorm that has a top high enough that the aircraft cannot fly over it safely.
EIS
If the aircraft altitude is 15,000 feet or lower, setting the displayed range to 60 miles may be more helpful.
Closely monitor anything that enters the display.
4000
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Change in Antenna Tilt
+4°
+3°
+2°
+1°
0°
-1°
-2°
-3°
-4°
3000
2000
1000
0
1000
2000
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
3000
10 nm
4000
Vertical Change of Radar Beam (feet)
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Also, after setting up the antenna tilt angle as described previously, ground returns can be monitored for
possible threats. The relationship between antenna tilt angle, altitude, and distance is one degree of tilt equals
100 feet of altitude for every one nautical mile.
AFCS
Figure 6-54 Vertical Change in Radar Beam per Nautical Mile
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Therefore, with the antenna tilt set so that the bottom of the beam is four degrees below parallel with
the ground, a target return at 10 nm is approximately 4,000 feet below the aircraft; at 20 nm, 8,000 feet;
at 50 nm, 20,000 feet. In other words, at this tilt setting, a ground return (such as a mountain peak) being
displayed at 10 nm would have a maximum distance below the aircraft of 4,000 feet. A ground target return
being displayed at 5 nm would have a maximum distance below the aircraft of 2,000 feet.
INDEX
APPENDICES
This setup provides a good starting point for practical use of the GWX 68. There are many other factors to
consider in order to become proficient at using weather radar in all situations.
330
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58
190-00629-04 Rev. A
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
WEATHER MAPPING AND INTERPRETATION
WEATHER DISPLAY INTERPRETATION
Black
Green
Yellow
Red
Magenta
< 23 dBZ
23 dBZ to < 32 dBZ
32 dBZ to < 41 dBZ
41 dBZ to < 50 dBZ
50 dBZ and greater
Approximate
Precipitation Rate (in/
hr.)
< .01.
.01 - 0.1.
0.1 - 0.5
0.5 - 2
>2
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Intensity
EIS
Weather Mode Color
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
When evaluating various target returns on the weather radar display, the colors denote precipitation
intensity and rates shown in Table 6-4.
Table 6-4 Precipitation Intensity Levels
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Thunderstorms
Updrafts and downdrafts in thunderstorms carry water through the cloud. The more severe the drafts, the
greater the number and size of the precipitation droplets. With this in mind, the following interpretations
can be made from what is displayed on the weather radar. Avoid these areas by an extra wide margin.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
• In areas where the displayed target intensity is red or magenta (indicating large amounts of precipitation),
the turbulence is considered severe.
• Areas that show steep color gradients (intense color changes) over thin bands or short distances suggest
irregular rainfall rate and strong turbulence.
AFCS
• Areas that show red or magenta are associated with hail or turbulence, as well as heavy precipitation.
Vertical scanning and antenna tilt management may be necessary to identify areas of maximum intensity.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-00629-04 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58
331
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Along squall lines (multiple cells or clusters of cells in a line) individual cells may be in different stages
of development. Areas between closely spaced, intense targets may contain developing clouds not having
enough moisture to produce a return. However, these areas could have strong updrafts or downdrafts.
Targets showing wide areas of green are generally precipitation without severe turbulence.
Irregularities in the target return may also indicate turbulence, appearing as hooks, fingers, or scalloped
edges. These irregularities may be present in green areas with no yellow, red, or magenta areas and should
be treated as highly dangerous areas. Avoid these areas as if they are red or magenta.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
Squall Line
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Steep Gradient
Hook or Finger
Scalloped Edge
Figure 6-55 Cell Irregularities
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Thunderstorm development is rapid. A course may become blocked within a short time. When displaying
shorter ranges, periodically select a longer range to see if problems are developing further out. That can
help prevent getting trapped in a blind alley or an area that is closed at one end by convective weather.
INDEX
APPENDICES
Figure 6-56 The Blind Alley - Horizontal Scan
332
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58
190-00629-04 Rev. A
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
In areas of multiple heavy cells, use the Vertical Scan feature along with antenna tilt management to
examine the areas. Remember to avoid shadowed areas behind targets.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
EIS
The Large Storm Behind
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
The Blind Alley at Close Range
Figure 6-57 The Blind Alley
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Tornadoes
There are no conclusive radar target return characteristics which identify a tornado. However, tornadoes
may be present if the following characteristics are observed:
• A narrow, finger-like portion extends and in a short time curls into a hook and closes on itself.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
• A hook, which may be in the general shape of the numeral 6 (9 in the southern hemisphere), especially
if bright and projecting from the southwest quadrant (northeast quadrant in the southern hemisphere) of
a major thunderstorm.
• V-shaped notches.
• Doughnut shapes.
AFCS
These shapes do not always indicate tornadoes, and tornado returns are not limited to these characteristics.
Confirmed radar observations of tornadoes most often have not shown shapes different from those of a
normal thunderstorm display.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Hail
APPENDICES
Hail results from updrafts carrying water high enough to freeze. Therefore, the higher the top of a
thunderstorm, the greater the probability that it contains hail. Vertically scanning the target return can
give the radar top of a thunderstorm that contains hail. Radar top is the top of a storm cell as detected by
radar. It is not the actual top, or true top of the storm. The actual top of a storm cell is seen with the eyes
in clear air and may be much higher than the radar top. The actual top does not indicate the top of the
hazardous area.
190-00629-04 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58
INDEX
Hail can fall below the minimum reflectivity threshold for radar detection. It can have a film of water on
its surface, making its reflective characteristics similar to a very large water droplet. Because of this film of
water, and because hail stones usually are larger than water droplets, thunderstorms with large amounts
of wet hail return stronger signals than those with rain. Some hail shafts are extremely narrow (100 yards
or less) and make poor radar targets. In the upper regions of a cell where ice particles are dry (no liquid
coating), target returns are less intense.
333
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Hail shafts are associated with the same radar target return characteristics as tornados. U-shaped cloud
edges three to seven miles across can also indicate hail. These target returns appear quite suddenly along
any edge of the cell outline. They also change in intensity and shape in a matter of seconds, making vigilant
monitoring essential.
OPERATION IN WEATHER MODE
EIS
WARNING: Begin transmitting only when it is safe to do so. When transmitting while the aircraft is on the
ground, no personnel or objects should be within 11 feet of the antenna.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
CAUTION: In Standby mode, the antenna is parked at the center line. It is always a good idea to put the
radar in Standby mode before taxiing the aircraft to prevent the antenna from bouncing on the bottom stop
and possibly causing damage to the radar assembly.
When the weather radar system is in the Weather or Ground Map mode, the system automatically switches
to Standby mode on landing.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
In Reversionary mode, the weather radar system automatically switches to Standby mode. The system
remains in Standby mode until both displays are restored. In Reversionary mode, the weather radar system
cannot be controlled.
Scan Line
Antenna Stabilization Status
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Radar Mode
INDEX
APPENDICES
Figure 6-58 Horizontal Scan Display
334
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58
190-00629-04 Rev. A
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Displaying weather on the Weather Radar Page:
1) Select the Weather Radar Page in the Map Page Group with the FMS Knob.
2) Press the MODE Softkey.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
3) While on the ground, press the STANDBY Softkey. A one-minute warm-up period is initiated (countdown is
displayed on the screen). After the warm-up is complete, the radar enters the Standby Mode.
a)
Press the WEATHER Softkey. A confirmation window is displayed.
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Figure 6-59 Confirming Activating Radar
Turn the small FMS Knob to highlight YES and press the ENT Key to continue radar activation.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
b)
Or:
If the aircraft is airborne, press the WEATHER Softkey. A one-minute warm-up period is initiated (countdown
is displayed on the screen). After the warm-up is complete, the radar begins transmitting.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
4) Turn the RANGE Knob to select the desired map range.
5) The horizontal scan is initially displayed (Figure 6-58). If desired, press the VERTICAL Softkey to change to
vertical scanning.
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-00629-04 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58
335
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
Vertically scanning a storm cell:
NOTE: Vertical scanning of a storm cell should be done with the aircraft wings level to avoid constant
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
adjustment of the Bearing Line.
1) While in the Horizontal Scan view, press the BRG Softkey. This places the cursor in the BEARING field and
displays the Bearing Line.
If the Bearing Line is not displayed, press the MENU Key and turn the large FMS Knob to select Show Bearing
Line. Press the ENT Key.
EIS
2) Press the ENT Key.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
3) Turn the small FMS Knob to place the Bearing Line on the desired storm cell or other area to be vertically
scanned.
Bearing Line
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Scan Line
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Figure 6-60 Bearing Line on Horizontal Scan
4) Press the VERTICAL Softkey. A vertical scan of the selected area is displayed (Figure 6-61).
5) The small FMS Knob may be used to move the scanned bearing line a few degrees right or left.
6) Turn the RANGE Knob to adjust the range.
APPENDICES
7) Press the FMS Knob to remove the cursor.
8) To select a new area to be vertically scanned, press the HORIZON Softkey to return to the Horizontal Scan view
and repeat the previous steps.
INDEX
The RANGE Knob can also be used to adjust bearing from left to right.
336
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58
190-00629-04 Rev. A
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Figure 6-61 Vertical Scan Display
Adjusting Antenna Tilt Angle
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
In order to make an accurate interpretation of a storm cell, the radar beam should be pointed at the wet
part of the weather cell to record the proper rainfall intensity (color level). The ideal aiming point is just
below the freezing level of the storm. The best way to find this point is to use the Vertical Scan feature. The
antenna tilt angle can be centered on the strongest return area in the vertical scan to get a more accurate
view of the coverage and intensity of the target in the horizontal scan.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Adjusting antenna tilt on the Horizontal Scan display:
1) Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor in the TILT field.
2) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the desired antenna tilt angle.
3) Press the ENT Key.
AFCS
4) Press the FMS Knob to remove the cursor.
The RANGE Knob can also be used to adjust tilt up and down.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-00629-04 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58
337
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
Adjusting antenna tilt on the Vertical Scan display:
1) Press the TILT Softkey to activate the cursor in the TILT field and display the Tilt Line.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
If the Tilt Line is not displayed, press the MENU Key and turn the large FMS Knob to select Show Tilt Line. Press
the ENT Key.
2) Turn the small FMS Knob to adjust the antenna tilt angle. The selected tilt angle is implemented when Horizontal
Scan is selected again.
The RANGE Knob can also be used to adjust tilt.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
Tilt Line
Scan Line
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
Figure 6-62 Adjusting Tilt on Vertical Scan Display
338
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58
190-00629-04 Rev. A
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Adjusting Gain
WARNING: Changing the gain in weather mode causes precipitation intensity to be displayed as a color
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
not representative of the true intensity. Remember to return the gain setting to Calibrated for viewing the
actual intensity of precipitation.
1) Press the GAIN Softkey to activate the cursor in the GAIN field.
2) Turn the small FMS Knob to adjust the gain for the desirable level. The gain setting is visible in the GAIN field
as a movable horizontal bar in a flashing box. The line pointer is a reference depicting the calibrated position.
EIS
3) Press the FMS Knob to remove the cursor.
4) Press the GAIN Softkey again to recalibrate the gain. CALIBRATED is displayed in the GAIN field.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Manual Gain Set Below Calibrated
Calibrated Gain
AFCS
Figure 6-63 Gain Calibration
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-00629-04 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58
339
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
Sector Scan
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
1) While in horizontal scan mode, press the BRG Softkey to display the Bearing Line and place the cursor in the
BEARING field. If the Bearing Line is not displayed, press the MENU Key and turn the large FMS Knob to select
Show Bearing Line.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
2) Press the ENT Key.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Figure 6-64 Selecting Sector Scan Position
3) Turn the small FMS Knob to place the Bearing Line in the desired position. The location of the Bearing Line
becomes the center point of the Sector Scan.
4) Turn the large FMS Knob to place the cursor in the SECTOR SCAN field.
5) Turn the small FMS Knob to select FULL, 60˚, 40˚, or 20˚ scan.
AFCS
6) If desired, readjust the Bearing Line as discussed previously to change the center of the Sector Scan.
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
7) Press the BRG Softkey again to remove the Bearing Line and cursor. The bearing reference is reset to 0º.
340
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58
190-00629-04 Rev. A
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Figure 6-65 40˚ Sector Scan
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Antenna Stabilization
1) To activate or deactivate the antenna stabilization, press the MODE Softkey.
2) Press the STAB ON Softkey to activate antenna stabilization or press the STAB OFF Softkey to deactivate. The
current stabilization condition is shown in the upper right of the weather radar display.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-00629-04 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58
341
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
Weather Attenuated Color Highlight (WATCH™)
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
While in horizontal scan mode, this feature can be used as a tool to determine areas of possible inaccuracies
in displayed intensity due to weakening of the radar energy. This weakening is known as attenuation. The
radar energy weakens as it passes through areas of intense precipitation, large areas of lesser precipitation,
and distance. Issues with the radome attenuates the radar energy. All these factors have an effect on the
return intensity. The more energy that dissipates, the lesser the displayed intensity of the return. Accuracy
of the displayed intensity of returns located in the shaded areas are suspect. Make maneuvering decisions
with this information in mind. Proper antenna tilt management should still be employed to determine the
extent of attenuation in a shaded area.
EIS
To activate or deactivate the WATCH™ feature, press the WATCH Softkey.
Areas of
Attenuated Signal
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Displayed intensity is questionable.
Potentially stronger than displayed.
Horizontal Scan Without WATCH™
Horizontal Scan With WATCH™
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Figure 6-66 Horizontal Scan Without and With WATCH™
342
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58
190-00629-04 Rev. A
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Weather Alert
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The Weather Alert feature indicates the presence of heavy precipitation between the ranges of 80 and 320
nm regardless of the currently displayed range. Weather Alert targets appear as red bands along the outer
range ring at the approximate azimuth of the detected returns.
If a Weather Alert is detected within ±10° of the aircraft heading, an alert is displayed on the PFD in the
Messages Window.
If the antenna tilt is adjusted too low, a weather alert can be generated by ground returns. To avoid
unwanted weather alerts, deselect the WX ALRT Softkey..
EIS
Weather Alerts
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Figure 6-67 Weather Alert Indications
AFCS
To activate or deactivate Weather Alerts, press the WX ALRT Softkey. Activating and deactivating enables
or inhibits the alert on the PFD.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
Figure 6-68 Weather Alert on PFD
INDEX
190-00629-04 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58
343
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
GROUND MAPPING AND INTERPRETATION
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
A secondary use of the weather radar system is for the presentation of terrain. This can be a useful tool for
verifying aircraft position. A picture of the ground is represented much like a topographical map that can be
used as a supplement to the navigation map on the MFD.
EIS
Ground Map mode uses a different gain range than Weather mode. Different colors are also used to represent
the intensity levels. The displayed intensity of ground target returns are defined in the table below. Use of the
GAIN and TILT controls help improve contrast so that specific ground targets can be recognized more easily.
As previously discussed, the type and orientation of the target in relation to the aircraft affects the intensity
displayed.
When the weather radar system is in either the Weather or Ground Map mode, the system automatically
switches to Standby mode upon landing.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Ground Map
Mode Color
Black
Light blue
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Yellow
Magenta
Blue
Intensity
0 dB
> 0 dB to < 9 dB
9 dB to < 18 dB
18 dB to < 27 dB
27 dB and greater
Table 6-5 Ground Target Return Intensity Levels
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Operation in Ground Map Mode
1) Press the MODE Softkey.
2) Press the GROUND Softkey to place the radar in Ground Map mode.
3) Press the BACK Softkey.
AFCS
4) Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor.
5) Turn the large FMS Knob to place the cursor in the TILT field.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
6) Adjust the antenna tilt angle by turning the small FMS Knob to display ground returns at the desired distance.
INDEX
APPENDICES
7) Press the FMS Knob to remove the cursor.
344
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58
190-00629-04 Rev. A
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
SYSTEM STATUS
The radar mode is annunciated in the upper left corner of the Weather Radar Page. Additional information
may be displayed in the center of the Weather Radar Page as a banner annunciation.
Standby
STANDBY
STANDBY
Standby (During Warm-Up)
STANDBY
WARM-UP
XX
(XX indicates number of seconds
remaining in warm-up)
Weather
WEATHER
None
Ground Mapping
Off
Radar Failed*
GROUND MAPPING
OFF
FAIL
None
OFF
RADAR FAIL
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Center Banner Annunciation
EIS
Radar Mode Annunciation Box
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Radar Mode
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
* See Table 6-8 for additional failure annunciations
Table 6-6 Radar Modes on the Weather Radar Page
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
The system displays the status of the radar antenna stabilization feature in the upper right corner of the
Weather Radar Page.
AFCS
Radar Antenna
Description
Stabilization Status
STAB ON
Antenna stabilization is selected on.
STAB OFF
Antenna stabilization is selected off.
The radar is not receiving pitch and roll information.
STAB INOP
The antenna stabilization feature is inoperative.
Table 6-7 Antenna Stabilization Annunciations on the Weather Radar Page
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
If the unit fails, an annunciation as to the cause of the failure is shown as a banner in the center of the Weather
Radar Page.
APPENDICES
Weather Radar
Page Center Banner
Description
Annunciation
BAD CONFIG
The radar configuration is invalid. The radar should be serviced.
RDR FAULT
The radar unit is reporting a fault. The radar should be serviced.
The system is not receiving valid data from the radar unit. The system
RADAR FAIL
should be serviced.
INDEX
Table 6-8 Abnormal Radar Status Annunciations on the Weather Radar Page
190-00629-04 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58
345
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
6.3 WX-500 STORMSCOPE
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
NOTE: The optional L-3 STORMSCOPE® WX-500 Lightning system is not intended for hazardous thunderstorm
penetration. Weather information on the G1000 MFD is approved for weather avoidance only. Refer to the
WX-500 User’s Guide for a detailed description of Stormscope operation.
NOTE: Stormscope lightning data and GDL 69/69A XM WX Satellite Weather Lightning data cannot be
EIS
displayed at the same time. When Stormscope data is displayed, XM WX lightning data is removed.
The following pages can display Stormscope data:
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
• Stormscope Page
• Navigation Map
• AUX - Trip Planning Page
• Nearest Pages
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
To display Stormscope data on the Navigation Map, AUX - Trip Planning Page, or any of the Nearest Pages,
press the MAP Softkey, then press the STRMSCP Softkey. These pages can also display cell or strike data using the
yellow lightning strike symbology shown in Table 6-9.
Table 6-9 Lightning Age and Symbols
AFCS
SETTING UP STORMSCOPE ON THE NAVIGATION MAP
Setting up Stormscope options on the Navigation Map:
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
1) On the Navigation Map Page, press the MENU Key.
2) With ‘Map Setup’ selected (Figure 6-69), press the ENT Key.
3) Turn the small FMS Knob to display the group selection window. Turn the small FMS Knob to select ‘Weather’,
and press the ENT Key.
APPENDICES
4) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight and move between the product selections (Figure 6-70).
5) When an item is highlighted, turn the small FMS Knob to select the option.
6) Press the ENT Key.
INDEX
7) Press the FMS Knob to return to the Navigation Map Page (Figure 6-71).
346
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58
190-00629-04 Rev. A
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
The following options are available (Figure 6-70):
• STRMSCP LTNG – Turns the display of Stormscope data on or off.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
• STRMSCP MODE – Selects the CELL or STRIKE mode of lightning activity. Cell mode identifies clusters
or cells of electrical activity. Strike mode indicates the approximate location of lightning strikes.
• STRMSCP SMBL – Selects the range at which Stormscope data displays. Stormscope data is removed
when a map range greater than the STRMSCP SMBL value is selected.
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Figure 6-69 Navigation Map
Page Menu
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
Figure 6-70 Map Setup Menu
INDEX
190-00629-04 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58
347
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
CELL AND STRIKE MODE ON THE NAVIGATION MAP
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
On the Navigation Map, cell mode identifies cells of lightning activity (Figure 6-71). Stormscope identifies
clusters of electrical activity that indicate cells. Strike mode indicates the approximate location of lightning
strikes.
Selecting the ‘cell’ or ‘strike’ mode on the Navigation Map:
1) Press the MENU Key.
2) With ‘Map Setup’ selected, press the ENT Key.
EIS
3) Select the ‘Weather’ group.
4) Press the ENT Key. The cursor flashes on ‘STRMSCP LTNG’.
5) Turn the large FMS Knob to select ‘STRMSCP MODE’.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
6) Turn the small FMS Knob to change between ‘CELL’ and ‘STRIKE’ options. When an item is selected, press the
ENT Key.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
7) Press the FMS knob to return to the Navigation Map Page.
INDEX
APPENDICES
Figure 6-71 Navigation Map Page with Stormscope Lightning Data Enabled
348
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58
190-00629-04 Rev. A
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
If heading input is lost, strikes and/or cells must be cleared manually after the execution of each turn
(Figure 6-72). This is to ensure the strike and/or cell positions are depicted accurately in relation to the nose
of the aircraft.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Manually clearing Stormscope data on the Navigation Map:
1) Press the MENU Key.
2) Select ‘Clear Stormscope® Lightning’.
3) Press the ENT Key.
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Figure 6-72 Navigation Map Page Options Menu
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
ZOOM RANGE ON THE NAVIGATION MAP
AFCS
Stormscope lightning data can be displayed up to 800 nm zoom range (in North up mode) on the Navigation
Map Page. However, in the track up mode at the 500 nm range, a portion of Stormscope lightning data
can be behind the aircraft and therefore not visible on the Navigation Map. Since the range for Stormscope
data is 400 nm diameter total (200 nm in front and 200 nm behind), the 500 nm range in North up mode
shows all the data.
At a map range of less than 25 nm, Stormscope lightning data is not displayed, but can still be present. The
presence of Stormscope lightning data is indicated by the annunciation ‘LTNG < 25 nm’ in the upper right
corner (Figure 6-73).
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
Figure 6-73 Lightning Display Range Annunciation
INDEX
190-00629-04 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58
349
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
The maximum zoom range can also be set on the Navigation Map.
Selecting a Stormscope range on the Navigation Map:
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
1) Press the MENU Key.
2) Select ‘MAP SETUP’.
3) Select the ‘Weather’ group.
4) Press the ENT Key.
5) Turn the large FMS Knob to select ‘STRMSCP SMBL’.
EIS
6) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the maximum display range.
7) Press the ENT Key.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
8) Press the FMS Knob to return to the Navigation Map Page.
To change the display range on the Navigation Map Page, turn the RANGE Knob clockwise to zoom out or
counter-clockwise to zoom in.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
SELECTING THE STORMSCOPE PAGE
The Map - Stormscope Page is the principal page for viewing Stormscope lightning data. Lightning data can
be displayed at the ranges of 25 nm, 50 nm, 100 nm, and 200 nm.
Adjusting the Stormscope Map Range:
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
1) Turn the large FMS Knob to select the Map Page Group.
2) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the Stormscope Page.
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
3) To change the map range, turn the RANGE Knob clockwise to zoom out or counter-clockwise to zoom in.
Figure 6-74 Stormscope Page
350
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58
190-00629-04 Rev. A
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Changing between ‘cell’ and ‘strike’ mode on the Stormscope Page:
1) Select the Stormscope Page.
2) Press the MODE Softkey. The CELL and STRIKE softkeys are displayed.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
3) Press the CELL Softkey to display ‘CELL’ data or press the STRIKE Softkey to display ‘STRIKE’ data. ‘CELL’ or
‘STRIKE’ is displayed in the mode box in the upper left corner of the Stormscope Page.
4) Press the BACK Softkey to return to the main Stormscope page.
Changing the viewing mode between 360˚ and 120˚ on the Stormscope Page:
EIS
1) Select the Stormscope Page.
2) Press the VIEW Softkey. The 360 and ARC softkeys are displayed. Press the 360 Softkey to display a 360˚
viewing area or press the ARC Softkey to display a 120˚ viewing area.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
3) Press the BACK Softkey to return to the main Stormscope page.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-00629-04 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58
351
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
6.4 TAWS-B
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
NOTE: The data contained in the TAWS databases comes from government agencies. Garmin accurately
EIS
WARNING: Do not use TAWS information for primary terrain avoidance. TAWS is intended only to enhance
NOTE: Terrain data is not displayed when the aircraft is outside of the installed terrain database coverage
situational awareness.
processes and cross-validates the data but cannot guarantee the accuracy and completeness of the data.
area.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
TAWS-B (Terrain Awareness and Warning System - Class B) increases situational awareness and aids in reducing
controlled flight into terrain (CFIT). TAWS-B provides visual and aural annunciations when terrain and obstacles
are within the given altitude threshold from the aircraft. The displayed alerts and warnings are advisory in nature
only.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
TAWS-B satisfies TSO-C151b Class B requirements for certification.
TAWS-B requires the following to operate properly:
• A valid terrain/obstacle/airport terrain database
• A valid 3-D GPS position solution
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
TAWS-B uses terrain and obstacle information supplied by government sources. Terrain information is based
on terrain elevation information in a database that may contain inaccuracies. Individual obstructions may be
shown if available in the database. The data undergoes verification by Garmin to confirm accuracy of the content,
per TSO-C151b. However, the displayed information should never be understood as being all-inclusive and data
may be inaccurate.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
TAWS-B uses information provided from the GPS receiver to provide a horizontal position and altitude. GPS
altitude is derived from satellite measurements. GPS altitude is then converted to the height above geodetic sea
level (GSL), which is the height above mean sea level (MSL) calculated geometrically. GSL altitude is used to
determine TAWS-B alerts. GSL altitude accuracy is affected by satellite geometry, but is not subject to variations
in pressure and temperature that normally affect pressure altitude sensors. GSL altitude does not require local
altimeter settings to determine MSL altitude. It is a widely-used MSL altitude source. Therefore, GSL altitude
provides a highly accurate and reliable MSL altitude source to calculate terrain and obstacle alerts.
INDEX
APPENDICES
The terrain and obstacle databases used by TAWS-B are referenced to MSL. Using the GPS position and GSL
altitude, TAWS-B displays a 2-D picture of the surrounding terrain and obstacles relative to the position and
altitude of the aircraft. Furthermore, the GPS position and GSL altitude are used to calculate and “predict” the
aircraft’s flight path in relation to the surrounding terrain and obstacles. In this manner, TAWS-B can provide
advanced alerts of predicted dangerous terrain conditions.
352
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58
190-00629-04 Rev. A
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Baro-corrected altitude (or indicated altitude) is derived by adjusting the altimeter setting for local atmospheric
conditions. The most accurate baro-corrected altitude can be achieved by frequently updating the altimeter
setting to the nearest reporting station along the flight path. However, because actual atmospheric conditions
seldom match the standard conditions defined by the International Standard Atmosphere (ISA) model (where
pressure, temperature, and lapse rates have fixed values), it is common for the baro-corrected altitude (as read
from the altimeter) to differ from the GSL altitude. This variation results in the aircraft’s GSL altitude differing
from the baro-corrected altitude.
DISPLAYING TAWS-B DATA
EIS
TAWS-B uses yellow (caution) and red (warning) to depict terrain and obstacles (with heights greater than
200 feet above ground level, AGL) alerts relative to aircraft altitude. Colors are adjusted automatically as the
aircraft altitude changes. The colors and symbols in Figure 6-75 and Tables 6-10 and 6-11 are used to represent
terrain, obstacles, and potential impact points, respectively.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Figure 6-75 Terrain Altitude/Color Correlation for TAWS-B
Unlighted Obstacle
Lighted Obstacle
< 1000’ AGL > 1000’ AGL < 1000’ AGL > 1000’ AGL
Obstacle Location
AFCS
Red obstacle is above or within 100 ft
below the aircraft altitude
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Yellow obstacle is between 100 ft and
1000 ft below the aircraft altitude
Table 6-10 TAWS-B Obstacle Colors and Symbology
Alert Type
APPENDICES
Potential Impact
Point Symbol
Example Annunciation
Warning
Caution
INDEX
Table 6-11 TAWS-B Potential Impact Point Symbols with Alert Types
190-00629-04 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58
353
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
TAWS-B information can be displayed on the following maps:
• PFD Inset Map
• Trip Planning Page
• Navigation Map Page
• Flight Plan Pages
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
• TAWS-B Page
Displaying terrain and obstacle information (maps other than the TAWS-B Page):
1) Press the MAP Softkey (for the PFD Inset Map, press the INSET Softkey).
2) Press the TERRAIN Softkey to display terrain and obstacle data.
EIS
When TAWS-B is selected on maps other than the TAWS-B Page, an icon to indicate the feature is enabled for
display and a legend for TAWS-B terrain colors are shown (Figure 6-82).
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
The Navigation Map Page Setup Menu provides a means in addition to the softkey for enabling/disabling
display of terrain and obstacles. The setup menu also controls the map range settings above which terrain and
obstacle data are decluttered from the display. If a map range larger than the map range setting is selected, the
data is removed from the map. For terrain data, the enable/disable function applies only to the MFD, while the
range setting also affects the PFD Inset Map.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Terrain data can be selected for display independently of obstacle data; however, obstacles for which warnings
and cautions are issued are shown when terrain is selected for display and the map range is within the setting
limit.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Maps besides the TAWS-B Page use settings based on those selected for the Navigation Map Page. The
maximum display ranges for obstacles on each map are dependent on the range setting made for the Navigation
Map. If the maximum range for obstacle display on the Navigation Map is adjusted to below 20 nm, the highest
obstacle display range settings on the other applicable maps are also adjusted proportionally.
Customizing terrain and obstacle display on the Navigation Map Page:
1) Select the Navigation Map Page.
AFCS
2) Press the MENU Key.
3) With ‘Map Setup’ highlighted, press the ENT Key (Figure 6-76).
4) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the ‘Map’ Group and press the ENT Key (Figure 6-77).
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
5) Turn the large FMS Knob or press the ENT Key to scroll through product selections (Figure 6-78).
• TERRAIN DATA – Turns the display of terrain data on or off and sets maximum range at which terrain is shown
• OBSTACLE DATA – Turns the display of obstacle data on or off and sets maximum range at which obstacles are shown
APPENDICES
6) Turn the small FMS Knob to scroll through options for each product (ON/OFF, range settings).
7) Press the ENT Key to select an option.
INDEX
8) Press the FMS Knob or CLR Key to return to the Navigation Map Page with the changed settings.
354
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58
190-00629-04 Rev. A
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
EIS
Figure 6-76 Navigation Map Page Menu
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Figure 6-77 Navigation Map Page Setup Menu
Figure 6-78 Navigation Map Page Setup Menu, Map Group
TAWS-B PAGE
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
The Map - TAWS-B Page is the principal map display for showing terrain, obstacle, and potential impact
point data in relation to the aircraft’s current altitude, without clutter from the basemap. Aviation data (airports,
VORs, and other NAVAIDs) can be displayed for reference. If an obstacle and the projected flight path of the
aircraft intersect, the display automatically zooms in to the closest potential point of impact on the TAWS-B
Page.
AFCS
Aircraft orientation on this map is always heading up unless there is no valid heading. Two views are available
relative to the position of the aircraft: the 360° default display and the radar-like ARC (120°) display. Map range
is adjustable with the RANGE Knob from 1 to 200 nm, as indicated by the map range rings (or arcs).
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Displaying the TAWS-B Page:
1) Turn the large FMS Knob to select the Map Page Group.
2) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the TAWS-B Page.
APPENDICES
Changing the TAWS-B Page view:
1) Press the VIEW Softkey.
2) Press the 360 or ARC Softkey to select the desired view.
Or:
INDEX
1) Press the MENU Key.
2) Select ‘View Arc’ or ‘View 360º’ (choice dependent on current state) and press the ENT Key to change the view
190-00629-04 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58
355
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
Showing/hiding aviation information on the TAWS-B Page:
1) Press the MENU Key.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
2) Select ‘Show Aviation Data’ or ‘Hide Aviation Data’ (choice dependent on current state) and press the ENT Key.
Red Terrain
(Warning - Terrain
Above or Within
100’ Below the
Aircraft Altitude)
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
Yellow Terrain
(Caution - Terrain
Between 100’ and
1000’ Below the
Aircraft Altitude)
Black Terrain
(Terrain More than
1000’ Below the
Aircraft Altitude)
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Map Range Rings
Terrain Legend
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Figure 6-79 TAWS-B Page
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
Yellow Terrain
(Caution - Terrain
Between 100’
and 1000’ Below
the Aircraft
Altitude)
Red Terrain
(Warning - Terrain
Above or Within
100’ Below the
Aircraft Altitude)
Black Terrain
(Terrain More than
1000’ Below the
Aircraft Altitude)
APPENDICES
Map Range Arc
INDEX
Terrain Legend
Figure 6-80 TAWS-B Page (ARC View)
356
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58
190-00629-04 Rev. A
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
TAWS-B ALERTS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Alerts are issued when flight conditions meet parameters that are set within TAWS-B software algorithms.
TAWS-B alerts typically employ a CAUTION or a WARNING alert severity level, or both. When an alert
is issued, visual annunciations are displayed and aural alerts are simultaneously issued. Table 6-12 shows
TAWS-B alert types with corresponding annunciations and aural messages.
When an alert is issued, annunciations appear on the PFD and MFD. The TAWS-B Alert Annunciation is
shown to the upper left of the Altimeter on the PFD and below the Terrain Legend on the MFD (shown when
terrain display is enabled). If the TAWS-B Page is not displayed at the time, a pop-up alert appears on the MFD.
To acknowledge the pop-up alert:
EIS
• Press the CLR Key (returns to the currently viewed page), or
• Press the ENT Key (accesses the TAWS-B Page)
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
PFD Alert Annunciation
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
MFD Pop-up Alert
Figure 6-81 TAWS-B Alert Annunciations
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
Terrain Display Enabled
Terrain Legend
Alert Annunciation
190-00629-04 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58
INDEX
Figure 6-82 Navigation Map Page
(After TAWS-B Pop-up Alert Acknowledgment)
357
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
Alert Type
PFD/MFD**
Alert
Annunciation
MFD Pop-Up Alert
(except TAWS-B Page)
Aural Message
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Excessive Descent Rate
Warning (EDR)
“Pull Up”
EIS
Imminent Terrain Impact
Warning (ITI)
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Imminent Obstacle Impact
Warning (IOI)
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Imminent Terrain Impact
Caution (ITI)
AFCS
Reduced Required Obstacle
Clearance Caution (ROC)
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
or
“Obstacle, Obstacle; Pull Up, Pull Up”
or
* “Obstacle Ahead, Pull Up; Obstacle Ahead, Pull Up”*
or
“Caution, Terrain; Caution, Terrain”*
or
“Terrain Ahead; Terrain Ahead”
or
*
“Caution, Terrain; Caution, Terrain”
or
“Terrain Ahead; Terrain Ahead”*
*
“Caution, Obstacle; Caution, Obstacle”
or
“Obstacle Ahead; Obstacle Ahead”*
or
*
Imminent Obstacle Impact
Caution (IOI)
INDEX
or
“Obstacle, Obstacle; Pull Up, Pull Up”*
or
“Obstacle Ahead, Pull Up; Obstacle Ahead, Pull Up”
*
Reduced Required Terrain
Clearance Caution (RTC)
Negative Climb Rate
Caution (NCR)
or
“Terrain, Terrain; Pull Up, Pull Up”
or
* “Terrain Ahead, Pull Up; Terrain Ahead, Pull Up”*
*
Reduced Required Obstacle
Clearance Warning (ROC)
Premature Descent Alert
Caution (PDA)
Altitude Callout “500”
Excessive Descent Rate
Caution (EDR)
or
“Terrain, Terrain; Pull Up, Pull Up”*
or
“Terrain Ahead, Pull Up; Terrain Ahead, Pull Up”
*
Reduced Required Terrain
Clearance Warning (RTC)
or
“Caution, Obstacle; Caution, Obstacle”*
or
“Obstacle Ahead; Obstacle Ahead”
“Too Low, Terrain”
None
None
“Five-Hundred”
“Sink Rate”
*
or
“Don’t Sink”*
or
“Too Low, Terrain”
* Alerts with multiple messages are configurable at installation and are installation-dependent. Alerts for the default
configuration when more than one option is available are indicated with asterisks.
** Annunciation is displayed on the MFD when terrain display is enabled.
Table 6-12 TAWS-B Alerts Summary
358
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58
190-00629-04 Rev. A
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
EXCESSIVE DESCENT RATE ALERT
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The purpose of the Excessive Descent Rate (EDR) alert is to provide suitable notification when the
aircraft is determined to be closing (descending) upon terrain at an excessive speed. Figure 6-83 shows the
parameters for the alert as defined by TSO-C151b.
6000
5500
5000
4000
NK
: “SI
ion
Caut
3500
”
RATE
EIS
Height Above Terrain (Feet)
4500
3000
2500
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
2000
Warning: “PULL UP”
1500
1000
12000
11000
10000
9000
8000
7000
6000
5000
4000
3000
2000
1000
Descent Rate (FPM)
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
0
0
500
Figure 6-83 Excessive Descent Rate Alert Criteria
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FORWARD LOOKING TERRAIN AVOIDANCE
AFCS
Reduced Required Terrain Clearance (RTC) and Reduced Required Obstacle Clearance (ROC)
alerts are issued when the aircraft flight path is above terrain, yet is projected to come within the minimum
clearance values in Figure 6-84. When an RTC alert is issued, a potential impact point is displayed on the
TAWS-B Page.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Imminent Terrain Impact (ITI) and Imminent Obstacle Impact (IOI) alerts are issued when the
aircraft is below the elevation of a terrain or obstacle cell in the aircraft’s projected path. ITI and IOI alerts
are accompanied by a potential impact point displayed on the TAWS-B Page. The alert is annunciated when
the projected vertical flight path is calculated to come within minimum clearance altitudes in Figure 6-84.
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-00629-04 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58
359
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
Required Terrain Clearance
RTC Level (FT)
RTC Descending (FT)
800
EIS
Required
Terrain Clearance
(FT)
Required
Terrain
Clearance
(FT)
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
700
600
500
400
300
200
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
100
0
0
5
10
15
20
25
30
Distance From Runway (NM)
Distance From Runway (NM)
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Figure 6-84 FLTA Alert Minimum Terrain and Obstacle Clearance Values
FLTA alerts are automatically inhibited when the aircraft is less than 200 feet above the destination runway
elevation while within 0.5 nm of the approach runway or the aircraft is between runway ends
PREMATURE DESCENT ALERTING
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
A Premature Descent Alert (PDA) is issued when the system detects the aircraft is significantly below the
normal approach path to a runway (Figure 6-85).
PDA alerting begins when the aircraft is below 700 feet AGL within 15 nm of the destination airport and
ends when the aircraft is 0.5 nm from the runway threshold.
AFCS
800
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Height Above Destination (Feet)
700
600
500
400
300
PDA ALERTING AREA
200
100
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
0
Distance to Destination (NM)
INDEX
Figure 6-85 PDA Alerting Threshold
360
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58
190-00629-04 Rev. A
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
PDA and FLTA aural and visual alerts can be manually inhibited. Discretion should be used when inhibiting
TAWS-B and the system should be enabled when appropriate. When TAWS-B is inhibited, the alert
annunciation ‘TAWS INH’ is shown on the PFD, and on MFD pages when terrain is displayed (Figure 6-86).
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Figure 6-86 TAWS-B Alerting Disabled
(TAWS Inhibited) Annunciation
Inhibiting/enabling TAWS-B alerting:
EIS
1) Select the TAWS-B Page.
2) Press the INHIBIT Softkey to inhibit or enable TAWS (choice dependent on current state).
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Or:
a) Press the MENU Key.
b) Select ‘Inhibit TAWS’ or ‘Enable TAWS’ (choice dependent on current state) and press the ENT Key.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
If TAWS-B alerts are inhibited when the Final Approach Fix is the active waypoint in a GPS WAAS approach,
a ‘LOW ALT’ annunciation may appear on the PFD next to the Altimeter if the current aircraft altitude is at
least 164 feet below the prescribed altitude at the Final Approach Fix. See the Flight Instruments Section for
details.
ALTITUDE VOICE CALLOUT (VCO) ALERT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
The system provides a “Five-hundred” voice alert when the aircraft descends to within 500 feet above the
terrain or runway threshold. When the aircraft is within five nautical miles of an airport, the “Five Hundred”
voice alert is based on the nearest runway threshold elevation. When the aircraft is more than five nautical
miles from the nearest airport, the “Five Hundred” voice alert is based on the height above terrain, by
comparing the aircraft’s GPS-GSL altitude to the terrain database.
AFCS
There are no display annunciations or pop-up alerts that accompany the VCO alert. This alert cannot be
inhibited.
NEGATIVE CLIMB RATE AFTER TAKEOFF ALERT (NCR)
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
The Negative Climb Rate (NCR) After Takeoff alert (also referred to as “Altitude Loss After Takeoff”)
provides alerts when the system determines the aircraft is losing altitude (closing upon terrain) after takeoff.
The aural message “Don’t Sink” is given for NCR alerts, accompanied by an annunciation and a pop-up terrain
alert on the display. NCR alerting is only active when departing from an airport and when the following
conditions are met:
• Height above the terrain is less than 700 feet
• Distance from the departure airport is 2 nm or less
• Heading change from the departure heading is less than 110 degrees
190-00629-04 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58
INDEX
Figures 6-72 and 6-73 show the NCR alerting parameters as defined by TSO-C151b.
361
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
1000
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Height Above Terrain (Feet)
900
800
700
600
“DON’T SINK”
or
“TOO LOW, TERRAIN”
500
400
300
200
100
0
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
0
20
40
60
80
100
120
140
Altitude Loss (Feet)
Figure 6-87 Negative Climb Rate (NCR) Altitude Loss
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
1000
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Height Above Terrain (Feet)
900
800
700
600
“DON’T SINK”
or
“TOO LOW, TERRAIN”
500
400
300
AFCS
200
100
0
0
500
1000
1500
2000
2500
3000
3500
4000
4500
5000
5500
6000
6500
7000
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Sink Rate (FPM)
INDEX
APPENDICES
Figure 6-88 Negative Climb Rate (NCR) Sink Rate
362
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58
190-00629-04 Rev. A
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
SYSTEM STATUS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
During power-up, TAWS-B conducts a self-test of its aural and visual annunciations. The system test can also
be manually initiated. An aural alert is issued at test completion. TAWS-B System Testing is disabled when
ground speed exceeds 30 knots.
Manually testing the TAWS-B System:
1) Select the TAWS-B Page.
2) Press the MENU Key (Figure 6-89).
EIS
3) Select ‘Test TAWS System’ and press the ENT Key to confirm the selection.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Figure 6-89 TAWS-B Page Menu
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
TAWS-B continually monitors several system-critical items such as database validity, hardware status, and
GPS status. If the terrain/obstacle database is not available, the aural message “TAWS System Failure” is
generated along with the ‘TAWS FAIL’ alert annunciation.
AFCS
TAWS-B requires a 3-D GPS navigation solution along with specific vertical accuracy minimums. Should the
navigation solution become degraded or if the aircraft is out of the database coverage area, the annunciation
‘TAWS N/A’ is generated in the annunciation window and on the TAWS-B Page. The aural message “TAWS Not
Available” is generated. When the GPS signal integrity returns and the aircraft is within the database coverage
area, the aural message “TAWS Available” is generated
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-00629-04 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58
363
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
PFD/MFD
TAWS-B Page
Annunciation
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Alert Type
System Test in progress
Excessively degraded GPS signal, or
out of database coverage area
Sufficient GPS signal reception
restored
TAWS Alerting is disabled
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
TAWS System Test Fail; Terrain,
Airport Terrain or Obstacle
database unavailable or invalid
on all GDUs; software mismatch
among GDUs; TAWS audio fault
MFD Terrain or Obstacle database
unavailable or invalid. TAWS
operating with PFD Terrain or
Obstacle databases
No GPS position
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
None
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
System Test pass
None
TAWS-B Page Center
Banner Annunciation
Voice Alert
TAWS TEST
None
None
“TAWS System Test OK”
TAWS FAIL
“TAWS System Failure”
TERRAIN DATABASE
FAILURE
None
None
FLTA, PDA
None
“TAWS Not Available”
FLTA, PDA,
VCO
FLTA, PDA
None
“TAWS Available”
(voice alert only in
flight)
None
FLTA, PDA
NO GPS POSITION
“TAWS Not Available”
TAWS Alert
Types
Not
Available
None Available
None
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
Table 6-15 TAWS-B System Status Annunciations
364
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58
190-00629-04 Rev. A
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
6.5 PROFILE VIEW TERRAIN
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The system offers a Profile View of terrain and obstacles relative to the aircraft’s current flight path and altitude
on the Navigation Map Page of the MFD. Profile View does not provide terrain or obstacle caution or warning
annunciations or voice alerts, nor does it display potential impact points inside the Profile View. The colors and
symbols in Figure 6-90 and Table 6-14 are used to represent terrain and obstacles.
Terrain Above Aircraft Altitude
EIS
Red terrain is above
or within 100 ft below
the aircraft altitude
Aircraft Altitude
100 ft Threshold
1000 ft
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Yellow terrain is between 100 ft and 1000 ft below the aircraft altitude
Black terrain is more than 1000 ft below the aircraft altitude
Unlighted Obstacle
Lighted Obstacle
< 1000’ AGL > 1000’ AGL < 1000’ AGL > 1000’ AGL
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Figure 6-90 Terrain Altitude/Color Correlation for Profile View Terrain
Obstacle Location
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Red obstacle is above or within 100 ft
below the aircraft altitude
Yellow obstacle is between 100 ft and
1000 ft below the aircraft altitude
AFCS
Table 6-14 Profile View Terrain/Obstacle Colors and Symbology
Accessing Profile View:
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
1) Select the Navigation Map Page.
2) Press the MAP Softkey.
3) Press the PROFILE Softkey to enable or disable Profile View.
APPENDICES
Or:
1) Press the MENU Key.
2) Select ‘Show Profile View’ or ‘Hide Profile View’ (choice dependent on current state) and press the ENT Key.
Enabling/Disabling Profile View Terrain on the Navigation Map (when Profile View is enabled):
INDEX
1) Select the Navigation Map Page.
2) Press the MAP Softkey.
3) Press the TERRAIN Softkey.
190-00629-04 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58
365
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
PROFILE VIEW DISPLAY
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
When the Profile View is enabled, it is displayed in a window below the Navigation Map. Altitude is shown
along a vertical scale, with an aircraft icon positioned at the current altitude. Distance is represented horizontally
along the bottom of the Profile View, and increases from left (present position) to right.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
When the Navigation Map range is adjusted with the RANGE Knob, the horizontal distance of the Profile
View is adjusted proportionately to be 1/2 of the Navigation Map range distance down to 1 nm, at which point
Profile View is no longer available (‘PROFILE NOT AVAILABLE’ is displayed). When Navigation Map range is
adjusted to remove altitude-correlated colored terrain data (as shown in the Terrain Legend) or obstacles from
the Navigation Map, these items are also removed from the Profile View; only an outline of the terrain will
be displayed in black in the Profile View window. Refer to the TAWS-B section for more information about
displaying terrain or obstacles on the Navigation Map Page.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Profile View
Path Enabled
Navigation Map Range
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Terrain Legend
AFCS
Altitude Scale
Profile View Length
is One Half of the
Navigation Map
Range
Distance Scale
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Figure 6-91 Profile View on Navigation Map with Terrain Display Enabled
INDEX
APPENDICES
The Profile View is based on the current aircraft track (or heading if track is unavailable) and shows the highest
known terrain or obstacles within a predetermined width from the present aircraft position to the end of the
profile range. The width of the Profile View (Table 6-15) is determined by the phase of flight, as annunciated
on the HSI. Refer to the Flight Instruments section for more information about flight phases.
366
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58
190-00629-04 Rev. A
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
Approach
0.6 nm
Departure
0.6 nm
Terminal
2.0 nm
Enroute
4.0 nm
Oceanic
4.0 nm
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Total Profile View Width
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Flight Phase
EIS
Table 6-15 Profile View Width Scale
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
PROFILE PATH
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
The Profile Path displays the horizontal and lateral boundaries of the Profile View. The path is shown as a
white rectangle on the Navigation Map Page (Figure 6-91) and is only available when Profile View is enabled.
White range markers both edges of the Profile Path rectangle match the range markers along the distance scale
inside the Profile View display window whenever the profile range is at least 4 nm (or 7.5 km if configured
for metric units).
The Profile Path rectangle may be configured on or off, and the Navigation Map range at which the Profile
Path is removed from map display can be changed.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Customizing the Profile Path display on the Navigation Map Page:
1) Select the Navigation Map Page.
2) Press the MENU Key.
3) With ‘Map Setup’ highlighted, press the ENT Key (Figure 6-92).
AFCS
4) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the ‘Profile’ Group and press the ENT Key (Figure 6-93).
5) Turn the large FMS Knob or press the ENT Key to scroll through product selections (Figure 6-94).
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
• PROFILE PATH – Turns the display of the Profile Path on or off and sets maximum map range at which the Profile
Path is shown
6) Turn the small FMS Knob to scroll through options (ON/OFF, range settings).
7) Press the ENT Key to select an option.
8) Press the FMS Knob or CLR Key to return to the Navigation Map Page with the changed settings.
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-00629-04 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58
367
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
Figure 6-92 Navigation Map Page Menu
Figure 6-94 Navigation Map Page Setup Menu,
Profile Group
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Figure 6-93 Navigation Map Page Setup Menu
368
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58
190-00629-04 Rev. A
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
6.6 TRAFFIC INFORMATION SERVICE (TIS)
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
WARNING: The Traffic Information Service (TIS) is intended for advisory use only. TIS is intended to help the
pilot locate traffic visually. It is the responsibility of the pilot to see and maneuver to avoid traffic.
NOTE: TIS is available only when the aircraft is within the service volume of a TIS-capable terminal radar
EIS
site. Aircraft without an operating transponder are invisible to both Traffic Advisory Systems (TAS) and TIS.
Aircraft without altitude reporting capability are shown without altitude separation data or climb descent
indication.
NOTE: TIS is disabled if a Traffic Advisory System (TAS) is installed.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Traffic Information Service (TIS) is designed to help in detection and avoidance of other aircraft. TIS uses the
Mode S transponder for the traffic data link. TIS receives traffic information from ground stations, and is updated
every 5 seconds. The G1000 displays up to eight traffic targets within a 7.5-nm radius, from 3000 feet below to
3500 feet above the requesting aircraft. Traffic is displayed using the symbols shown in Table 6-16.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
TIS Symbol
Description
Non-Threat Traffic
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Traffic Advisory (TA)
Traffic Advisory Off Scale
Table 6-16 TIS Traffic Symbols
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Traffic Advisories (TA) alert the crew to intruding aircraft. When traffic meets the advisory criteria for the TA,
a solid yellow circle symbol is generated. A TA which is detected but is outside the range of the map on which
traffic is displayed are indicated with a message in the lower left corner of the map.
TIS also provides a vector line showing the direction in which the traffic is moving, to the nearest 45°. Traffic
information for which TIS is unable to determine the bearing (non-bearing traffic) is displayed in the center of
the Traffic Map Page (Figure 6-99) or in a banner at the lower left corner of maps other than the Traffic Map Page
on which traffic can be displayed.
APPENDICES
190-00629-04 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58
INDEX
The altitude difference between the requesting aircraft and other intruder aircraft is displayed above/below the
traffic symbol in hundreds of feet. If the other aircraft is above the requesting aircraft, the altitude separation
appears above the traffic symbol; if below, the altitude separation appears below. Altitude trend is displayed as
an up/down arrow (for speeds greater than 500 fpm in either direction) to the right of the target symbol. Traffic
symbols for aircraft without altitude reporting capability appear without altitude separation or climb/descent
information.
369
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
DISPLAYING TRAFFIC DATA
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Traffic information can be displayed on the following maps (when TIS is operating):
• PFD Inset Map
• Trip Planning Page
• Navigation Map Page
• Nearest Pages
• Traffic Map Page
• Active Flight Plan Page
Displaying traffic information (maps other than the Traffic Map Page):
EIS
1) Press the MAP Softkey (for the PFD Inset Map, press the INSET Softkey).
2) Press the TRAFFIC Softkey. Traffic is now displayed on the map.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
When traffic is selected on maps other than the Traffic Map Page, an icon is shown to indicate the feature is
enabled for display.
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Traffic Advisory
Traffic Display
Status Icon
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Traffic Advisory
Off-Scale
Figure 6-95 TIS Traffic on the Navigation Map Page
INDEX
APPENDICES
The Navigation Map Page Setup Menu provides a means in addition to the softkey for enabling/disabling
display of traffic. The setup menu also controls the map range settings above which traffic data (symbols
and labels) are decluttered from the display. If a map range larger than the map range setting is selected, the
data is removed from the map. Maps besides the Traffic Map Page use settings based on those selected for the
Navigation Map Page.
370
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58
190-00629-04 Rev. A
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Customizing traffic display on the Navigation Map Page:
1) Select the Navigation Map Page.
2) Press the MENU Key.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
3) With ‘Map Setup’ highlighted, press the ENT Key (Figure 6-96).
4) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the ‘Traffic’ Group and press the ENT Key (Figure 6-97).
5) Turn the large FMS Knob or press the ENT Key to scroll through product selections (Figure 6-98).
• TRAFFIC – Turns the display of traffic data on or off
EIS
• TRAFFIC MODE – Selects the traffic mode for display; select from:
- All Traffic - Displays all traffic
- TA/PA - Displays Traffic Alerts and Proximity Advisories
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
- TA ONLY - Displays Traffic Alerts only
• TRAFFIC SMBL – Selects the maximum range at which traffic symbols are shown
• TRAFFIC LBL – Selects the maximum range at which traffic labels are shown (with the option to turn off)
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
6) Turn the small FMS Knob to scroll through options for each product (ON/OFF, range settings, etc.).
7) Press the ENT Key to select an option.
8) Press the FMS Knob or CLR Key to return to the Navigation Map Page with the changed settings.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Figure 6-96 Navigation Map Page Menu
APPENDICES
190-00629-04 Rev. A
Figure 6-98 Navigation Map Page Setup Menu, Traffic Group
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58
INDEX
Figure 6-97 Navigation Map Page Setup Menu
371
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
TRAFFIC MAP PAGE
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The Map - Traffic Map Page is the principal map display for showing surrounding TIS traffic data in relation
to the aircraft’s current position and altitude, without clutter from the basemap. Aircraft orientation on this map
is always heading up unless there is no valid heading. Map range is adjustable with the RANGE Knob from 2
to 12 nm, as indicated by the map range rings.
EIS
The traffic mode is annunciated in the upper left corner of the Traffic Map Page. When the aircraft is on the
ground, TIS automatically enters Standby Mode. Once the aircraft is airborne, TIS switches from Standby to
Operating Mode and the G1000 begins to display traffic information. Refer to the System Status discussion for
more information.
Displaying traffic on the Traffic Map Page:
1) Turn the large FMS Knob to select the Map Page Group.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
2) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the Traffic Map Page.
3) Confirm TIS is in Operating Mode:
Press the OPERATE Softkey to begin displaying traffic.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Or:
a) Press the MENU Key.
b) Select ‘Operate Mode’ (shown if TIS is in Standby Mode) and press the ENT Key.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Traffic Mode Annunciation
“TIS Not Available”
Voice Alert Status
Range
Marking
Rings
AFCS
Traffic Advisory,
Same Altitude,
Climbing
Non-Threat
Traffic,
Altitude
Not
Reported
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
“Non-Bearing” Traffic
(System Unable to
Determine Bearing)
Distance is 3.9 nm,
500’ Below,
Descending
Non-Threat
Traffic,500’
Above,
Level
APPENDICES
Non-Threat Traffic,
3300’ Feet Below,
Descending
INDEX
Traffic Status
Banners
Figure 6-99 Traffic Map Page
372
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58
Select
to Mute
“TIS Not
Available”
Voice Alert
190-00629-04 Rev. A
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
TIS ALERTS
When the number of TAs on the Traffic Map Page increases from one scan to the next, the following occur:
• A single “Traffic” voice alert is generated.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
• A ‘TRAFFIC’ Annunciation appears to the top left of the Attitude Indicator on the PFD, flashing for 5 seconds
and remaining displayed until no TAs are detected in the area.
• The PFD Inset Map is automatically displayed with traffic.
EIS
To reduce the number of nuisance alerts due to proximate aircraft, the “Traffic” voice alert is generated only
when the number of TAs increases. For example, when the first TA is displayed, a voice and visual annunciation
are generated. As long as a single TA remains on the display, no additional voice alerts are generated. If a second
TA appears on the display or if the number of TAs initially decreases and then subsequently increases, another
voice alert is generated.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Inset Map
Displays When
TA is Detected
Figure 6-100 Traffic Annunciation (PFD)
AFCS
A “TIS Not Available” (TNA) voice alert is generated when the TIS service becomes unavailable or is out of
range. TIS may be unavailable in the radar coverage area due to the following:
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
• Radar site TIS Mode S sensor is not operational or is out of service
• Traffic or requesting aircraft is beyond the maximum range of the TIS-capable Mode S radar site.
• Traffic or requesting aircraft is above the radar site in the cone of silence and out of range of an adjacent site.
APPENDICES
• Traffic or requesting aircraft is below radar coverage. In flat terrain, the coverage extends from about 3000
feet upward at 55 miles. Terrain and obstacles around the radar site can further decrease radar coverage in all
directions.
• Traffic does not have an operating transponder.
The “TIS Not Available” (TNA) voice alert can be manually muted to reduce nuisance alerting. TNA muting
status is shown in the upper left corner of the Traffic Map Page.
INDEX
190-00629-04 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58
373
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
Muting the “TIS Not Available” voice alert:
1) Select the Traffic Map Page.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
2) Press the TNA MUTE Softkey. The status is displayed in the upper left corner of the Traffic Map Page.
Or:
a) Press the MENU Key.
b) Select ‘‘’Not Available” Mute On’ (shown if TNA muting is currently off) and press the ENT Key.
EIS
SYSTEM STATUS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
The G1000 performs an automatic test of TIS during power-up. If TIS passes the test, TIS enters Standby
Mode (on the ground) or Operating Mode (in the air). If TIS fails the power up test, an annunciation is shown
in the center of the Traffic Map Page.
Traffic Map Page
Annunciation
NO DATA
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
DATA FAILED
FAILED
Data is not being received from the transponder*
Data is being received from the transponder, but
a failure is detected in the data stream*
The transponder has failed*
UNAVAILABLE
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Description
TIS is unavailable or out of range
* Contact a service center or Garmin dealer for corrective action
Table 6-17 TIS Failure Annunciations
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
System Test has Failed
INDEX
APPENDICES
Data Not Received
from Transponder
Figure 6-101 TIS Power-up Test Failure
374
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58
190-00629-04 Rev. A
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Mode
Traffic Mode Annunciation
(Traffic Map Page)
TIS Operating
OPERATING
TIS Failed*
FAIL
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
STANDBY
(also shown in white in center of page)
Traffic Display Enabled Icon
(Other Maps)
EIS
TIS Standby
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The traffic mode is annunciated in the upper left corner of the Traffic Map Page. When the aircraft is on the
ground, TIS automatically enters Standby Mode. If traffic is selected for display on another map while Standby
Mode is selected, the traffic display enabled icon is crossed out (also the case whenever TIS has failed). Once
the aircraft is airborne, TIS switches to Operating Mode and traffic information is displayed. The mode can be
changed manually using softkeys or the page menu.
* See Table 6-19 for additional failure annunciations
Table 6-18 TIS Modes
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Switching between TIS modes:
1) Select the Traffic Map Page.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
2) Press the STANDBY or OPERATE Softkey to switch between modes. The mode is displayed in the upper left
corner of the Traffic Map Page.
Or:
a) Press the MENU Key.
b) Select ‘Operate Mode’ or ‘Standby Mode’ (choice dependent on current state) and press the ENT Key.
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-00629-04 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58
375
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
The annunciations to indicate the status of traffic information appear in a banner at the lower left corner of
maps on which traffic can be displayed (Table 6-19).
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Traffic Status Banner
Annunciation
TA OFF SCALE
EIS
TA X.X ± XX ↕
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
AGE MM:SS
TRFC COAST
TRFC RMVD
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
TRFC FAIL
NO TRFC DATA
TRFC UNAVAIL
Description
A Traffic Advisory is outside the selected display range*
Annunciation is removed when traffic comes within the selected display range
System cannot determine bearing of Traffic Advisory**
Annunciation indicates distance in nm, altitude separation in hundreds of feet, and
altitude trend arrow (climbing/descending)
Appears if traffic data is not refreshed within 6 seconds
If after another 6 seconds data is not received, traffic is removed from the display
The quality of displayed traffic information is reduced as the age increases
The displayed data is not current (6 to 12 seconds since last message)
The quality of displayed traffic information is reduced when this message is displayed
Traffic is removed because it is too old for coasting (12 to 60 seconds since last message)
Traffic may exist within the selected display range, but it is not displayed
Traffic data has failed
Traffic has not been detected
The traffic service is unavailable or out of range
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
*Shown as symbol on Traffic Map Page
**Shown in center of Traffic Map Page
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
Table 6-19 TIS Traffic Status Annunciations
376
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58
190-00629-04 Rev. A
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
6.7 GARMIN GTS 820 TRAFFIC
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
WARNING: The GTS 820 Traffic Advisory System (TAS) is intended for advisory use only to aid the pilot in
visually acquiring traffic. No avoidance maneuvers should be based solely upon TAS traffic information. It
is the responsibility of the pilot in command to see and maneuver to avoid traffic.
NOTE: Pilots should be aware of TAS system limitations. TAS systems require transponders of other aircraft
EIS
to respond to system interrogations. If the transponders do not respond to interrogations due phenomena
such as antenna shading or marginal transponder performance, traffic may be displayed intermittently, or
not at all. Aircraft without altitude reporting capability are shown without altitude separation data or climb
descent indication. Pilots should remain vigilant for traffic at all times.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
NOTE: TIS is disabled when a TAS is installed.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
The Garmin GTS 820 is a Traffic Advisory System (TAS), if installed. The GTS 820 enhances flight crew
situational awareness by displaying traffic information for transponder-equipped aircraft. The GTS 820 also
provides visual and aural traffic alerts including voice announcements to assist in visually acquiring traffic.
The GTS 820 is capable of tracking up to 45 intruding aircraft equipped with Mode A or C transponders, and up
to 30 intruders equipped with Mode S transponders. A maximum of 30 aircraft with the highest threat potential
can be displayed simultaneously. No TAS surveillance is provided for aircraft without operating transponders.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
THEORY OF OPERATION
When the system is in Operating Mode, the TAS unit interrogates the transponders of intruding aircraft while
monitoring transponder replies. The system uses this information to derive the distance, relative bearing, and
if reported, the altitude and vertical trend for each aircraft within its surveillance range.
AFCS
The system then calculates a closure rate to each intruder based on the projected Closest Point of Approach
(CPA). If the closure rate meets the threat criteria for a Traffic Advisory (TA), visual and aural alerting is
provided.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
TAS SURVEILLANCE VOLUME AND SYMBOLOGY
The GTS 820 TAS monitors the airspace within ±10,000 feet of own altitude, and up to 40 nm in the
forward direction. TAS range is somewhat reduced to the sides and aft of own aircraft due to the directional
interrogation signal patterns. The system displays TAS-detected traffic using the symbology shown in Table
6-20.
APPENDICES
In addition, if a 1090 MHz extended squitter transponder is installed, and the GTS 820 detects airborne
traffic providing 1090 MHz Automatic Dependent Surveillance - Broadcast (ADS-B) information, the system
will display the TAS traffic using the ADS-B symbology shown in Table 6-21.
INDEX
190-00629-04 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58
377
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
NOTE: Do not confuse this functionality with full ADS-B capability, which can provide traffic information
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
from ADS-B Ground-Based Transceivers (GBTs) and ADS-B traffic outside of the TAS surveillance volume.
This system is limited to displaying ADS-B information from suitably equipped airborne aircraft within the
TAS surveillance volume.
TAS Symbol
Description
EIS
Non-Threat Traffic
Proximity Advisory (PA)
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Traffic Advisory (TA)
Traffic Advisory Off Scale
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Table 6-20 TAS Symbol Description
Symbol
Description
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Traffic Advisory with ADS-B directional information. Points in the
direction of the intruder aircraft track.
Proximity Advisory with ADS-B directional information. Points in
the direction of the aircraft track.
Non-threat traffic with ADS-B directional information. Points in the
direction of the intruder aircraft track.
AFCS
Traffic with ADS-B directional information, but positional accuracy
is degraded. Points in the direction of the aircraft track.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Table 6-21 TAS Traffic with ADS-B Symbology
APPENDICES
A Traffic Advisory (TA), displayed as a yellow circle or triangle, alerts the crew to a potentially hazardous
intruding aircraft, if the closing rate, distance, and vertical separation meet TA criteria. A Traffic Advisory
that is beyond the selected display range (off scale) is indicated by a half TA symbol at the edge of the screen
at the relative bearing of the intruder.
A Proximity Advisory (PA), displayed as a solid white diamond or triangle, indicates the intruding aircraft
is within ±1200 feet and is within a 6 nm range, but is still not considered a TA threat.
A Non-threat Advisory, shown as an open white diamond or triangle, is displayed for traffic beyond 6 nm
that is neither a TA or PA.
INDEX
A solid white rounded arrow indicates either a PA or Non-Threat traffic with ADS-B directional information,
but the position of the traffic is shown with degraded accuracy.
Relative altitude, when available, is displayed above or below the corresponding intruder symbol in
hundreds of feet (Figure 6-102). When this altitude is above own aircraft, it is preceded by a ‘+’ symbol; a
minus sign ‘-’ indicates traffic is below own aircraft.
378
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58
190-00629-04 Rev. A
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
A vertical trend arrow to the right of the intruder symbol (Figure 6-102) indicates climbing or descending
traffic with an upward or downward-pointing arrow respectively.
Relative Altitude
Vertical trend arrow
Figure 6-102 Intruder Altitude and Vertical
Trend Arrow
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Vector Line
indicates
intruder
aircraft track
Figure 6-103 Intruder Traffic with ADS-B Directional
Information and Track
EIS
If the intruding aircraft is providing ADS-B track information, this is displayed as a vector line extending
beyond the traffic symbol in the direction of the track (Figure 6-103).
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
The GTS 820 automatically suppresses the display of aircraft on the ground operating with Mode S
transponders.
TA ALERTING CONDITIONS
No
B
Yes
B
No
APPENDICES
A
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Yes
Intruder closing rate provides less than 20 seconds of vertical and
horizontal separation.
Or:
Intruder closing rate provides less than 20 seconds of horizontal
separation and vertical separation is within 600 feet.
Or:
Intruder range is within 0.2 nm and vertical separation is within
600 feet.
Intruder closing rate provides less than 15 seconds of separation.
Intruder closing rate provides less than 30 seconds of vertical and
horizontal separation.
Or:
Intruder closing rate provides less than 30 seconds of horizontal
separation and vertical separation is within 800 feet.
Or:
Intruder range is within 0.55 nm and vertical separation is within
800 feet.
Intruder range is less than 20 seconds.
AFCS
A
TA Alerting Conditions
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Sensitivity Intruder Altitude
Level
Available
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
The GTS 820 automatically adjusts its TA sensitivity level to reduce the likelihood of nuisance TA alerting
during flight phases likely to be near airports. Level A (less) TA sensitivity is used when the aircraft’s landing
gear is extended. In all other conditions, Level B (greater) TA sensitivity is used to assess TA threats.
INDEX
Table 6-22 TA Sensitivity Level and TA Alerting Criteria
190-00629-04 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58
379
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
TAS ALERTS
NOTE: Aural traffic alerts do not occur when the landing gear is extended. Only visual traffic annunciations
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
are issued under this condition.
When the GTS 820 detects a new TA, the following occur:
EIS
• A single “Traffic!” voice alert is generated, followed by additional voice information about the bearing, relative
altitude, and approximate distance from the intruder that triggered the TA (Table 6-23). The announcement
“Traffic! 12 o’clock, high, four miles,” would indicate the traffic is in front of own aircraft, above own
altitude, and approximately four nautical miles away.
• A TRAFFIC Annunciation appears at the top right of the airspeed on the PFD, flashing for five seconds and
remains displayed until no TAs are detected in the area (Figure 6-104).
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
• The PFD Inset Map is automatically displayed with TA traffic.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
If the bearing of TA traffic cannot be determined (Figures 6-86 and 6-89), a yellow text banner will be
displayed in the center of the Traffic Map Page and in the lower-left of the PFD inset map instead of a TA
symbol. The text will indicate “TA” followed by the distance, relative altitude, and vertical trend arrow for the
TA traffic, if known.
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
A TA will be displayed for at least eight seconds, even if the condition(s) that initially triggered the TA are no
longer present.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Inset Map
Displays When
TA is Detected
INDEX
APPENDICES
Figure 6-104 Traffic Annunciation (PFD)
Bearing
Relative Altitude
Distance (nm)
“One o’clock” through
“Twelve o’clock”
or “No Bearing”
“High”, “Low”, “Same Altitude” (if
within 200 feet of own altitude), or
“Altitude not available”
“Less than one mile”,
“One Mile” through “Ten Miles”, or
“More than ten miles”
Table 6-23 TA Descriptive Voice Announcements
380
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58
190-00629-04 Rev. A
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
SYSTEM TEST
NOTE: GTS 820 traffic surveillance is not available during the system test. Use caution when performing a
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
system test during flight.
The GTS 820 provides a system test mode to verify the TAS system is operating normally. The test takes ten
seconds to complete. When the system test is initiated, a test pattern of traffic symbols is displayed on the
Traffic Map Page (Figure 6-105). If the system test passes, the aural announcement “TAS System Test Passed”
is heard, otherwise the system announces “TAS System Test Failed.” When the system test is complete, the
GTS 820 enters Standby Mode.
EIS
Testing the Traffic System:
1) Turn the large FMS Knob to select the Map Page Group.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
2) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the Traffic Map Page.
3) Turn the Range knob to set the range to 2/6 nm to allow for proper test pattern display.
4) Press the TEST Softkey.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Or:
1) Press the MENU Key and turn the small FMS knob to select ‘Test Mode’.
2) Press the ENT Key.
Operating
Mode
Non-Threat
Traffic at
11 o’clock,
Distance 3.6
nm, 1000’
Above, Level
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Test Mode
Annunciation
AFCS
Proximity
Traffic at
1 o’clock,
Distance
3.6 nm,
1000’ Below,
Descending
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
TA at 9 o’clock,
Distance 2.0
nm, 200’ Below,
Climbing
APPENDICES
INDEX
Figure 6-105 System Test in Progress with Test Pattern
190-00629-04 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58
381
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
OPERATION
NOTE: The GTS 820 automatically transitions from STANDBY to OPERATE mode eight seconds after takeoff.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The unit also automatically transitions from OPERATE to STANDBY mode 24 seconds after landing.
After power-up, the GTS 820 is in Standby Mode. The GTS 820 must be in Operating Mode for traffic to be
displayed and for TAs to be issued.
Pressing the OPERATE Softkey allows the GTS 820 to switch from Standby Mode to Operating Mode as
necessary. Pressing the STANDBY Softkey forces the unit into Standby Mode.
EIS
Switching from operating mode to standby mode:
On the Traffic Page, select the STANDBY Softkey
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Or:
1) Press the MENU Key and turn the small FMS knob to select ‘Standby Mode’.
2) Press the ENT Key.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Switching from standby mode to operating mode:
On the Traffic Page, select the OPERATE Softkey
Or:
1) Press the MENU Key and turn the small FMS knob to select ‘Operate Mode’.
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
2) Press the ENT Key. The GTS 820 switches from Standby Mode to Operating Mode as necessary.
382
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58
190-00629-04 Rev. A
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
TRAFFIC MAP PAGE
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The Map - Traffic Map Page is the principal map page for showing surrounding TAS traffic data in relation to
the aircraft’s current position and altitude, without basemap clutter. Aircraft orientation is always heading up
unless there is no valid heading. Map range is adjustable with the RANGE Knob from 2 to 40 nm, as indicated
by the map range rings.
The traffic mode and altitude display mode are annunciated in the upper left corner of the page.
EIS
Operating
Mode
Altitude
Mode
Traffic Display
Range Rings
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Traffic Advisory,
Aircraft is
500’ Below,
Climbing
“Non-Bearing”
Traffic (Bearing
Undetermined),
Distance 4.0
nm, 500’ Above,
Descending
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Non-Threat
Traffic, 2500’
Above,
Descending
Traffic
Advisory OffScale, 400’
Below, Level
Proximity Advisor
with Flight ID
displayed, 900’
Above, Level
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Non-Threat
Traffic with
ADS-B
Directional
Information,
2500’ Above,
Level
Figure 6-106 Traffic Map Page
AFCS
Displaying traffic on the Traffic Map Page:
1) Turn the large FMS Knob to select the Map Page Group.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
2) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the Traffic Map Page.
3) Press the OPERATE Softkey to begin displaying traffic. ‘OPERATING’ is displayed in the Traffic mode field.
4) Press the STANDBY Softkey to place the system in the Standby mode. ‘STANDBY’ is displayed in the Traffic
mode field.
APPENDICES
5) Turn the RANGE Knob clockwise to display a larger area or counter-clockwise to display a smaller area.
INDEX
190-00629-04 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58
383
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
Altitude Display
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The pilot can select the volume of airspace in which non-threat and proximity traffic is displayed. TAs
occurring outside of these limits will always be shown.
Changing the altitude range:
1) On the Traffic Map Page, press the ALT MODE Softkey.
2) Press one of the following Softkeys:
EIS
• ABOVE: Displays non-threat and proximity traffic from 9000 feet above the aircraft to 2700 feet below the
aircraft. Typically used during climb phase of flight.
• NORMAL: Displays non-threat and proximity traffic from 2700 feet above the aircraft to 2700 feet below
the aircraft. Typically used during enroute phase of flight.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
• BELOW: Displays non-threat and proximity traffic from 2700 feet above the aircraft to 9000 feet below the
aircraft. Typically used during descent phase of flight.
•
UNREST (unrestricted): All traffic is displayed from 9900 feet above and 9900 feet below the aircraft.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
3) To return to the Traffic Page, select the BACK Softkey.
Or:
1) Press the MENU Key.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
2) Turn the small FMS Knob to select one of the following (see softkey description in step 2 above):
•
ABOVE
•
NORMAL
•
BELOW
•
UNRESTRICTED
AFCS
3) Press the ENT Key.
Traffic Map Page Display Range
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
The display range on the Traffic Map Page can be changed at any time. Map range is adjustable with the
RANGE Knob from 2 to 40 nm, as indicated by the map range rings.
Changing the display range on the Traffic Map Page:
1) Turn the RANGE Knob.
INDEX
APPENDICES
2) The following range options are available:
384
•
2 nm
•
2 and 6 nm
•
6 and 12 nm
•
12 and 24 nm
•
24 and 40 nm
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58
190-00629-04 Rev. A
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Flight ID Display
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The Flight IDs of other aircraft (when available) can be enabled for display on the Traffic Map Page
(Figure 6-107). When a flight ID is received, it will appear above or below the corresponding traffic symbol
on the Traffic Map Page when this option is enabled.
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Flight ID
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Figure 6-107 Traffic Map Page with Flight IDs Enabled
Enabling/Disabling Flight ID Display:
AFCS
On the Traffic Map Page, press the FLT ID Softkey.
Or:
1) Press the MENU Key.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
2) Turn the small FMS Knob to select ‘Show Flight IDs’ or ‘Hide Flight IDs’ (choice dependent on current state)
(Figure 6-108).
3) Press the ENT Key.
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-00629-04 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58
385
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
Figure 6-108 Traffic Map Page Menu
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
ADDITIONAL TRAFFIC DISPLAYS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Traffic information can be displayed on the following maps on the MFD when the unit is operating:
• Navigation Map Page
• Nearest Pages
• Traffic Map Page
• Active Flight Plan Page
• Trip Planning Page
• System Pages
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Traffic information can also be displayed on the PFD when the Synthetic Vision System (SVS) option is
installed and enabled. See the Additional Features Section for details.
Displaying traffic information (MFD maps other than the Traffic Map Page):
1) Press the MAP Softkey.
2) Press the TRAFFIC Softkey. Traffic is now displayed on the map.
AFCS
When traffic is selected on maps other than the Traffic Map Page, a traffic status icon is shown to indicate
traffic is enabled for display (Figure 6-109).
Displaying traffic on the Navigation Map
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
1) Ensure the TAS system is operating. With the Navigation Map displayed, select the MAP Softkey.
INDEX
APPENDICES
2) Press the TRAFFIC Softkey. Traffic is now displayed on the map as shown in the figure.
386
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58
190-00629-04 Rev. A
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Non-Threat
Traffic
Traffic
Advisory
EIS
Proximity
Advisory
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Non-Threat
Traffic
Traffic Display
Status Icon
Traffic Advisory
Off-Scale
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Non-Bearing
Traffic Advisory
Figure 6-109 TAS Traffic on Navigation Map
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Customizing the traffic display on the Navigation Map Page:
1) Select the Navigation Map Page.
2) Press the MENU Key.
3) With Map Setup highlighted, press the ENT Key (Figure 6-110).
AFCS
4) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the Traffic Group and press the ENT Key (Figure 6-111).
5) Turn the large FMS Knob or press the ENT Key to scroll through the selections (Figure 6-112).
• TRAFFIC – Turns the display of traffic data on or off
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
• TRAFFIC MODE – Selects the traffic mode for display; select from:
- All Traffic - Displays all traffic
- TA/PA - Displays Traffic Advisories and Proximity Advisories
APPENDICES
- TA ONLY - Displays Traffic Advisories only
• TRAFFIC SMBL – Selects the maximum range at which traffic symbols are shown
• TRAFFIC LBL – Selects the maximum range at which traffic labels are shown with the option to turn off
6) Turn the small FMS Knob to scroll through options (ON/OFF, range settings, etc.).
INDEX
7) Press the ENT Key to select an option.
8) Press the FMS Knob or CLR Key to return to the Navigation Map Page.
190-00629-04 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58
387
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
Figure 6-110 Navigation Map Page Menu
Figure 6-111 Navigation Map Page Setup Menu
Figure 6-112 Navigation Map Page Setup Menu,
Traffic Group
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
The Navigation Map Page Setup Menu also controls the display of traffic. The setup menu controls the map
range settings. Traffic data symbols and labels can be decluttered from the display. If a map range larger than
the map range setting is selected, the data is removed from the map. Maps besides the Traffic Map Page use
settings based on those selected for the Navigation Map Page.
AFCS
Traffic information can also be displayed on the PFD Inset Map by pressing the INSET Softkey. A traffic map
will appear in heading up orientation. Traffic information can also be overlaid with navigation, topographic
and optional XM WX Satellite Weather data.
Displaying traffic information (PFD Inset Map):
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
1) Press the INSET Softkey.
2) Press the TRAFFIC Softkey to display traffic data on the inset map (TRFC-1).
3) Press the softkey again to display the traffic-only inset (TRFC-2).
INDEX
APPENDICES
4) Press the softkey again to remove traffic data.
388
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58
190-00629-04 Rev. A
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
SYSTEM STATUS
The traffic mode is annunciated in the upper left corner of the Traffic Map Page.
TAS System Test
Initiated
TEST
(also shown in white in center of page)
TAS Operating
OPERATING
STANDBY
(also shown in white in center of page)
TAS Failed*
FAIL
EIS
TAS Standby
Traffic Display Status Icon
(Other Maps)
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Traffic Mode Annunciation
(Traffic Map Page)
Mode
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
* See Table 6-25 for additional failure annunciations
Table 6-24 TAS Modes
DATA FAILED
FAILED
Description
Data is not being received from the TAS unit
Data is being received from the TAS unit, but the
unit is self-reporting a failure
Incorrect data format received from the TAS unit
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Traffic Map Page
Annunciation
NO DATA
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
If the traffic unit fails, an annunciation as to the cause of the failure is shown in the center of the Traffic Map
Page. During a failure condition, the Operating Mode cannot be selected.
Table 6-25 TAS Failure Annunciations
AFCS
The annunciations to indicate the status of traffic information appear in a banner at the lower left corner of
maps on which traffic can be displayed.
Traffic Status Banner
Annunciation
TRFC FAIL
INDEX
NO TRFC DATA
A Traffic Advisory is outside the selected display range*.
Annunciation is removed when traffic comes within the
selected display range.
System cannot determine bearing of Traffic Advisory**.
Annunciation indicates distance in nm, altitude separation
in hundreds of feet, and altitude trend arrow (climbing/
descending).
TAS unit has failed (unit is self-reporting a failure or
sending incorrectly formatted data)
Data is not being received from the TAS unit
APPENDICES
TA X.X ± XX ↕
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
TA OFF SCALE
Description
*Shown as symbol on Traffic Map Page
**Shown in center of Traffic Map Page
Table 6-26 TAS Traffic Status Annunciations
190-00629-04 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58
389
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
6.8 L-3 SKYWATCH TRAFFIC
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
NOTE: TIS is disabled when a Traffic Advisory System (TAS) is installed.
NOTE: Refer to the L-3 SKYWATCH® (SKY497) Pilot’s Guide for a detailed discussion of the SKY497 TAS
System.
EIS
TAS SYMBOLOGY
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
The L-3 SKYWATCH TAS (if installed) is designed to help in detection and avoidance of other aircraft. TAS
uses an on-board interrogator-processor and the Mode S transponder for the air-to-air traffic data link. Traffic is
displayed the symbols shown in Table 6-27.
TAS Symbol
Description
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Non-Threat Traffic
Proximity Advisory (PA)
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Traffic Advisory (TA)
Traffic Advisory Off Scale
Table 6-27 TAS Symbol Description
AFCS
A Non-threat Advisory, shown as an open white diamond, indicates that an intruding aircraft is at greater than
±1200 feet relative altitude or the distance is beyond 5 nm.
A Proximity Advisory indicates the intruding aircraft is within ±1200 feet and is within 5 nm range, but is
still not considered a threat.
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
A Traffic Advisory (TA) alerts the crew to a potentially hazardous intruding aircraft. Closing rate, distance,
and vertical separation meet TA criteria. A Traffic Advisory that is beyond the selected display range is indicated
by a half TA symbol at the edge of the screen at the relative bearing of the intruder.
390
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58
190-00629-04 Rev. A
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
OPERATION
The unit must be in operating mode for traffic to be displayed. The ability to switch from standby to operating
mode on the ground is especially useful for scanning the airspace around the airport before takeoff.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Switching from standby mode to operating mode:
1) On the Traffic Page, press the OPERATE Softkey or press the MENU Key and turn the small FMS knob to select
Operating Mode.
2) If using the FMS menu, press the ENT Key to place the SKY497 in the operating mode.
EIS
3) To switch to Standby Mode from the Traffic Page, press the STANDBY Softkey.
Traffic System Test
1) Set the map range to 2/6 nm to allow for full test pattern display.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
2) Press the STANDBY Softkey.
3) Press the TEST Softkey.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
4) System test takes approximately eight seconds to complete. When completed successfully, traffic symbols display
and a voice alert “Traffic Advisory System Test Passed” is heard. If the system test fails, the system reverts to
Standby Mode and a voice alert “Traffic Advisory System Test Failed” is heard.
DISPLAYING TRAFFIC DATA
Traffic information can be displayed on the following maps when the traffic unit is operating:
• Trip Planning Page
• Navigation Map Page
• Nearest Pages
• Traffic Map Page
• Active Flight Plan Page
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
• PFD Inset Map
AFCS
Displaying traffic on the Traffic Map Page:
1) Turn the large FMS Knob to select the Map Page Group.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
2) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the Traffic Map Page.
3) Press the ALT MODE Softkey to change the altitude volume.
4) Press the STANDBY Softkey to place the system in the Standby mode. ‘STANDBY’ is displayed in the Traffic
mode field.
APPENDICES
5) Turn the RANGE Knob clockwise to display a larger area or counter-clockwise to display a smaller area.
INDEX
190-00629-04 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58
391
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Operating
Mode
Altitude
Mode
Traffic Display
Range Rings
Traffic Advisory,
Aircraft is
500’ Below,
Climbing
Non-Threat
Traffic, 2500’
Above,
Descending
EIS
“Non-Bearing”
Traffic (Bearing
Undetermined),
Distance 4.0
nm, 500’ Above,
Descending
Traffic
Advisory OffScale, 400’
Below, Level
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Proximity
Advisory, 900’
Above, Level,
Non-Threat
Traffic,
Altitude Not
Reported
Figure 6-113 Traffic Map Page
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
The Traffic Map Page is the principal map page for showing surrounding TAS traffic data in relation to the
aircraft’s current position and altitude, without basemap clutter. Aircraft orientation is always heading up
unless there is no valid heading. Map range is adjustable with the RANGE Knob from 2 to 40 nm, as indicated
by the map range rings.
The traffic mode and altitude display mode are annunciated in the upper left corner.
AFCS
Displaying traffic information (maps other than the Traffic Map Page):
1) Press the MAP Softkey (for the PFD Inset Map, press the INSET Softkey).
2) Press the TRAFFIC Softkey. Traffic is now displayed on the map.
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
When traffic is selected on maps other than the Traffic Map Page, a traffic status icon is shown to indicate
TAS is enabled for display (Figure 6-114).
392
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58
190-00629-04 Rev. A
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Displaying traffic on the Navigation Map
1) Ensure the TAS system is operating. With the Navigation Map displayed, press the MAP Softkey.
2) Press the TRAFFIC Softkey. Traffic is now displayed on the map as shown in the figure.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
EIS
Non-Threat
Traffic
Traffic
Advisory
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Proximity
Advisory
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Non-Threat
Traffic
Traffic Display
Status Icon
Traffic Advisory
Off-Scale
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Non-Bearing
Traffic Advisory
Figure 6-114 TAS Traffic on Navigation Map
AFCS
The Navigation Map Page Setup Menu also controls the display of traffic. The setup menu controls the map
range settings. Traffic data symbols and labels can be decluttered from the display. If a map range larger than
the map range setting is selected, the data is removed from the map. Maps besides the Traffic Map Page use
settings based on those selected for the Navigation Map Page.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-00629-04 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58
393
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
ALTITUDE DISPLAY
Changing the altitude display mode:
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
1) On the Traffic Page, press the ALT MODE Softkey.
EIS
2) Press one of the following Softkeys:
•
BELOW
•
NORMAL
•
ABOVE
•
UNREST (unrestricted)
3) To return to the Traffic Page, press the BACK Softkey.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Or:
1) Press the MENU Key.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
2) Turn the small FMS Knob to select one of the following:
•
BELOW
•
NORMAL
•
ABOVE
•
UNREST (unrestricted)
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
3) Press the ENT Softkey.
TRAFFIC MAP PAGE DISPLAY RANGE
The display range on the Traffic Map Page can be changed at any time. Map range is adjustable with the
RANGE Knob from 2 to 40 nm, as indicated by the map range rings.
AFCS
Changing the display range on the Traffic Page:
1) Turn the RANGE Knob.
•
2 nm
•
2 and 6 nm
•
6 and 12 nm
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
2) The following range options are available:
394
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58
190-00629-04 Rev. A
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Customizing the traffic display on the Navigation Map Page:
1) Select the Navigation Map Page.
2) Press the MENU Key.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
3) With Map Setup highlighted, press the ENT Key (Figure 6-115).
4) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the Traffic Group and press the ENT Key (Figure 6-116).
5) Turn the large FMS Knob or press the ENT Key to scroll through the selections (Figure 6-117).
• TRAFFIC – Turns the display of traffic data on or off
EIS
• TRAFFIC MODE – Selects the traffic mode for display; select from:
- All Traffic - Displays all traffic
- TA/PA - Displays Traffic Alerts and Proximity Advisories
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
- TA ONLY - Displays Traffic Alerts only
• TRAFFIC SMBL – Selects the maximum range at which traffic symbols are shown
• TRAFFIC LBL – Selects the maximum range at which traffic labels are shown with the option to turn off
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
6) Turn the small FMS Knob to scroll through options (ON/OFF, range settings, etc.).
7) Press the ENT Key to select an option.
8) Press the FMS Knob or CLR Key to return to the Navigation Map Page.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Figure 6-115 Navigation Map Page Menu
APPENDICES
190-00629-04 Rev. A
Figure 6-117 Navigation Map Page Setup Menu,
Traffic Group
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58
INDEX
Figure 6-116 Navigation Map Page Setup Menu
395
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
TAS ALERTS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
When the number of TAs on the Traffic Map Page increases from one scan to the next, the following occur
on the PFD:
NOTE: Refer to the SKY497 documentation for information on alerts generated by the TAS equipment.
• A TRAFFIC Annunciation appears at the top right of the airspeed on the PFD, flashing for 5 seconds and
remaining displayed until no TAs are detected in the area.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
• The PFD Inset Map is automatically displayed with TA traffic
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Inset Map
Displays When
TA is Detected
Figure 6-118 Traffic Annunciation (PFD)
SYSTEM STATUS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
The traffic mode is annunciated in the upper left corner of the Traffic Map Page.
Mode
Traffic Mode Annunciation
(Traffic Map Page)
TAS Self-test Initiated
TEST
(also shown in white in center of page)
APPENDICES
TAS Operating
Traffic Display Enabled Icon
(Other Maps)
OPERATING
TAS Standby
STANDBY
(also shown in white in center of page)
TAS Failed*
FAIL
INDEX
* See Table 6-29 for additional failure annunciations
Table 6-28 TAS Modes
396
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58
190-00629-04 Rev. A
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
If the unit fails, an annunciation as to the cause of the failure is shown in the center of the Traffic Map Page.
DATA FAILED
FAILED
Description
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Traffic Map Page
Annunciation
NO DATA
Data is not being received from the TAS unit
Data is being received from the TAS unit, but the
unit is self-reporting a failure
Incorrect data format received from the TAS unit
Table 6-29 TAS Failure Annunciations
EIS
The annunciations to indicate the status of traffic information appear in a banner at the lower left corner of
maps on which traffic can be displayed.
TA OFF SCALE
NO TRFC DATA
A Traffic Advisory is outside the selected display range*
Annunciation is removed when traffic comes within the
selected display range
System cannot determine bearing of Traffic Advisory**
Annunciation indicates distance in nm, altitude
separation in hundreds of feet, and altitude trend
arrow (climbing/descending)
TAS unit has failed (unit is self-reporting a failure or
sending incorrectly formatted data)
Data is not being received from the TAS unit
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
TRFC FAIL
Description
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
TA X.X ± XX ↕
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Traffic Status Banner
Annunciation
*Shown as symbol on Traffic Map Page
**Shown in center of Traffic Map Page
AFCS
Table 6-30 TAS Traffic Status Annunciations
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-00629-04 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58
397
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
Blank Page
398
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58
190-00629-04 Rev. A
AUTOMATIC FLIGHT CONTROL SYSTEM
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
SECTION 7 AUTOMATIC FLIGHT CONTROL SYSTEM
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
7.1 AFCS OVERVIEW
NOTE: The approved Pilot’s Operating Handbook (POH) and FAA Approved Airplane Flight Manual (AFM)
always supersedes this Pilot’s Guide.
EIS
NOTE: A failure of the primary (#1) GIA 63W Integrated Avionics Unit (IAU) results in loss of the flight
director. Any IAU failure results in loss of the autopilot and manual electric trim.
• GSA 81 AFCS Servo (4)
• GDU 1043/1045 Multi-Function Display (MFD)
• GSM 85 Servo Mounts (4)
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
• GDU 1040 Primary Flight Display (PFD)
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
The GFC 700 is a digital Automatic Flight Control System (AFCS), fully integrated within the System avionics
architecture. The System Overview section provides a block diagram to support this system description.
GFC 700 AFCS functionality in the Beechcraft G58 is distributed across the following Line Replaceable Units
(LRUs):
• GIA 63W Integrated Avionics Units (2)
The GFC 700 AFCS can be divided into these main operating functions:
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
• Flight Director (FD) — Flight director operation takes place within the primary (#1) GIA 63W. Flight
director commands are displayed on the PFD. The flight director provides:
– Command Bars showing pitch/roll guidance
– Vertical/lateral mode selection and processing
– Autopilot communication
AFCS
• Autopilot (AP) — Autopilot operation occurs within the pitch, roll, and pitch trim servos. It also provides
servo monitoring and automatic flight control in response to flight director steering commands, Attitude and
Heading Reference System (AHRS) attitude and rate information, and airspeed.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
• Yaw Damper (YD) — The yaw servo is self-monitoring and provides Dutch roll damping and turn coordination
in response to yaw rate, roll angle, lateral acceleration, and airspeed.
• Manual Electric Pitch Trim (MEPT) — The pitch trim servo provides manual electric pitch trim capability
when the autopilot is not engaged.
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-00629-04 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58
399
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
AUTOMATIC FLIGHT CONTROL SYSTEM
AFCS CONTROLS ON THE MFD
The following dedicated AFCS keys are located on the bezel of the MFD:
NAV Key
ALT Key
VS Key
6 FLC Key
7 YD Key
8 HDG Key
9 APR Key
10 VNV Key
Selects/deselects Vertical Speed Mode
Selects/deselects Flight Level Change Mode
Engages/disengages the yaw damper
Selects/deselects Heading Select Mode
Selects/deselects Approach Mode
Selects/deselects Vertical Path Tracking Mode for Vertical Navigation flight control
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
2
3
4
EIS
AP Key
FD Key
Engages/disengages the autopilot
Activates/deactivates the flight director only
Pressing once turns on the flight director in the default vertical and lateral modes.
Pressing again deactivates the flight director and removes the Command Bars. If
the autopilot is engaged, the key is disabled.
Selects/deselects Navigation Mode
Selects/deselects Altitude Hold Mode
1
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
5
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
(If equipped)
11 NOSE UP/
Control the mode reference in Pitch Hold, Vertical Speed and Flight Level Change
modes
NOSE DN
Keys
GDU 1045
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
GDU 1043
1
7
2
8
3
9
4
10
5
11
APPENDICES
6
INDEX
Figure 7-1 Dedicated MFD AFCS Controls
400
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58
190-00629-04 Rev. A
AUTOMATIC FLIGHT CONTROL SYSTEM
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
ADDITIONAL AFCS CONTROLS
The following controls used for the AFCS are located in the cockpit separately from the MFD:
While pressed, allows manual control of the aircraft while the autopilot is engaged and
synchronizes the flight director’s Command Bars with the current aircraft pitch (if
not in a Vertical Navigation, Glideslope, or Glidepath Mode) and roll (if in Roll Hold
Mode)
EIS
CWS Switch
(Control Wheel
Steering)
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Disengages the autopilot and yaw damper and interrupts pitch trim operation
AP DISC/TRIM
INT Switch
An AP DISC/TRIM INT Switch is red and is located on the pilot’s control.
(Autopilot
Disconnect/Trim This switch may be used to acknowledge an autopilot disconnect alert and mute the
associated aural tone.
Interrupt )
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
A CWS Switch is located on the pilot’s control wheel.
GA Switch
(Go Around)
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Upon release of the CWS Switch, the flight director may establish new pitch and roll
references, depending on the current vertical and lateral modes. CWS operation
details are discussed in the respective mode sections of this manual.
Disengages the autopilot and selects flight director Go Around Mode
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
If an approach procedure is loaded this switch also activates the missed approach when
the selected navigation source is GPS or when the navigation source is VOR/LOC and
a valid frequency has been tuned.
The GA Switch is located on the throttle.
AFCS
Used to command manual electric pitch trim
MEPT Switch
(Manual Electric An MEPT Switch is located on the pilot’s control wheel.
Pitch Trim)
This composite switch is split into left and right sides. The left switch is the ARM
contact and the right switch controls the DN (forward) and UP (rearward) contacts.
Pushing the MEPT ARM Switch disengages the autopilot, if currently engaged, but
does not affect yaw damper operation. The MEPT ARM Switch may be used to
acknowledge an autopilot disconnect alert and mute the associated aural tone.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
Manual trim commands are generated only when both sides of the switch are operated
simultaneously. If either side of the switch is active separately for more than three
seconds, MEPT function is disabled and ‘PTRM’ is displayed as the AFCS Status
Annunciation on the PFD. The function remains disabled until both sides of the
switch are inactivated.
INDEX
190-00629-04 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58
401
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
AUTOMATIC FLIGHT CONTROL SYSTEM
7.2 FLIGHT DIRECTOR OPERATION
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The flight director function provides pitch and roll commands to the AFCS and displays them on the PFD.
With the flight director active, the aircraft can be hand-flown to follow the path shown by the Command Bars.
Maximum commanded pitch (−15°, +20°) and roll (25°) angles, vertical acceleration, and roll rate are limited to
values established during AFCS certification. The flight director also provides commands to the autopilot.
ACTIVATING THE FLIGHT DIRECTOR
EIS
An initial press of a key listed in Table 7-1 (when the flight director is not active) activates the flight director
in the listed modes. The flight director may be turned off and the Command Bars removed from the display by
pressing the FD Key again. The FD Key is disabled when the autopilot is engaged.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Control Pressed
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
FD Key
AP Key
CWS Switch
GA Switch
ALT Key
VS Key
VNV Key
(If equipped)
Modes Selected
Lateral
Roll Hold (default)
Roll Hold (default)
Roll Hold (default)
Go Around
Roll Hold (default)
Roll Hold (default)
ROL
ROL
ROL
GA
ROL
ROL
Roll Hold (default)
ROL Vertical Path Tracking* VPTH
NAV Key
Navigation**
APR Key
Approach**
HDG Key
Heading Select
GPS
VOR
LOC
BC
GPS
VOR
LOC
HDG
Vertical
Pitch Hold (default)
Pitch Hold (default)
Pitch Hold (default)
Go Around
Altitude Hold
Vertical Speed
PIT
PIT
PIT
GA
ALT
VS
Pitch Hold (default)
PIT
Pitch Hold (default)
PIT
Pitch Hold (default)
PIT
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
*Valid VNV flight plan must be entered before VNV Key press activates flight director.
**The selected navigation receiver must have a valid VOR or LOC signal or active GPS
course before NAV or APR Key press activates flight director.
INDEX
APPENDICES
Table 7-1 Flight Director Activation
402
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58
190-00629-04 Rev. A
AUTOMATIC FLIGHT CONTROL SYSTEM
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
AFCS STATUS BOX
Lateral Modes
Active
Vertical Modes
Active
Mode
Reference
EIS
Armed
Autopilot Yaw Damper
Status
Status
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Flight director mode annunciations are displayed on the PFD when the flight director is active. Flight director
selection and autopilot and yaw damper statuses are shown in the center of the AFCS Status Box. Lateral flight
director modes are displayed on the left and vertical on the right. Armed modes are displayed in white and
active in green.
Armed
AFCS Status Box
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
AFCS Status
Annunciation
Selected
Altitude
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Command
Bars
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
Figure 7-2 PFD AFCS Display
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-00629-04 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58
403
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
AUTOMATIC FLIGHT CONTROL SYSTEM
FLIGHT DIRECTOR MODES
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Flight director modes are normally selected independently for the pitch and roll axes. Unless otherwise
specified, all mode keys are alternate action (i.e., press on, press off). In the absence of specific mode selection,
the flight director reverts to the default pitch and/or roll modes.
Armed modes are annunciated in white and active in green in the AFCS Status Box. Under normal operation,
when the control for the active flight director mode is pressed, the flight director reverts to the default mode(s)
for the axis(es). Automatic transition from armed to active mode is indicated by the white armed mode
annunciation moving to the green active mode field and flashing for 10 seconds.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
If the information required to compute a flight director mode becomes invalid or unavailable, the flight
director automatically reverts to the default mode for that axis. A flashing yellow mode annunciation and
annunciator light indicate loss of sensor (ADC) or navigation data (VOR, LOC, GPS, VNV, SBAS) required to
compute commands. When such a loss occurs, the system automatically begins to roll the wings level (enters
Roll Hold Mode) or maintain the pitch angle (enters Pitch Hold Mode), depending on the affected axis. The
flashing annunciation stops when the affected mode key is pressed or another mode for the axis is selected. If
after 10 seconds no action is taken, the flashing annunciation stops.
Figure 7-3 Loss of VOR Signal
The flight director is automatically disabled if the attitude information required to compute the default flight
director modes becomes invalid or unavailable.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
COMMAND BARS
Upon activation of the flight director, Command Bars are displayed in magenta on the PFD as a single cue.
The Command Bars do not override the Aircraft Symbol. The Command Bars move together vertically to
indicate pitch commands and bank left or right to indicate roll commands.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
Command Bars
Aircraft Symbol
Figure 7-4 Command Bars
INDEX
APPENDICES
If the attitude information being sent to the flight director becomes invalid or unavailable, the Command Bars
are removed from the display. The flight director Command Bars also disappear if the pitch exceeds +30˚/-20˚
or bank exceeds 65˚.
404
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58
190-00629-04 Rev. A
AUTOMATIC FLIGHT CONTROL SYSTEM
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
7.3 VERTICAL MODES
Pitch Hold
Flight Level Change, IAS Hold
VNV Target Altitude Capture
Glideslope
0.5°
nnnn fpm
-2000 to
+1500 fpm
100 fpm
nnn kt
90 to
210 kt
1 kt
*
ALTS
ALT Key ALT nnnnn ft
VS Key
VS
FLC Key FLC
VNV
Key
VPTH
**
ALTV
APR
Key
GA
Switch
GP
GS
GA
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Go Around
Captures the Vertical Navigation
(VNV) Target Altitude
Captures and tracks the SBAS
glidepath on approach
Captures and tracks the ILS glideslope
on approach
Disengages the autopilot and
commands a constant pitch angle
and wings level in the air
-15° to
+20°
PIT
AFCS
Glidepath
Captures and tracks descent legs of
an active vertical profile
(default)
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Vertical Path Tracking
(If equipped)
Reference
Change
Increment
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Vertical Speed
Holds the current aircraft pitch
attitude; may be used to climb/
descend to the Selected Altitude
Captures the Selected Altitude
Holds the current Altitude Reference
Maintains the current aircraft vertical
speed; may be used to climb/descend
to the Selected Altitude
Maintains the current aircraft
airspeed in IAS while the aircraft is
climbing/descending to the Selected
Altitude
Reference
Range
Control Annunciation
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Selected Altitude Capture
Altitude Hold
Description
EIS
Vertical Mode
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Table 7-2 lists the vertical modes with their corresponding controls and annunciations. The mode reference is
displayed next to the active mode annunciation for Altitude Hold, Vertical Speed, and Flight Level Change modes.
The NOSE UP/NOSE DN Keys can be used to change the vertical mode reference while operating under Pitch
Hold, Vertical Speed, or Flight Level Change Mode. Increments of change and acceptable ranges of values for
each of these references using the NOSE UP/NOSE DN Keys are also listed in the table.
7°
* ALTS armed automatically when PIT, VS, FLC, or GA active, and under VPTH when Selected Altitude is to be captured instead
of VNV Target Altitude
APPENDICES
** ALTV armed automatically under VPTH when VNV Target Altitude is to be captured instead of Selected Altitude
Table 7-2 Flight Director Vertical Modes
INDEX
190-00629-04 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58
405
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
AUTOMATIC FLIGHT CONTROL SYSTEM
PITCH HOLD MODE (PIT)
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
When the flight director is activated (the FD Key is pressed), Pitch Hold Mode is selected by default. Pitch
Hold Mode is indicated as the active vertical mode by the green ‘PIT’ annunciation. This mode may be used for
climb or descent to the Selected Altitude (shown above the Altimeter), since Selected Altitude Capture Mode is
automatically armed when Pitch Hold Mode is activated.
EIS
In Pitch Hold Mode, the flight director maintains a constant pitch attitude, the pitch reference. The pitch
reference is set to the aircraft pitch attitude at the moment of mode selection. If the aircraft pitch attitude
exceeds the flight director pitch command limitations, the flight director commands a pitch angle equal to the
nose-up/down limit.
CHANGING THE PITCH REFERENCE
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
When operating in Pitch Hold Mode, the pitch reference can be adjusted by:
• Using the NOSE UP/NOSE DN Keys
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
• Pressing the CWS Switch, hand-flying the aircraft to establish a new pitch reference, then releasing the
CWS Switch
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Pitch Hold
Mode Active
Selected Altitude
Capture Mode Armed
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
Selected
Altitude
APPENDICES
Command Bars Maintain
Desired Pitch Reference
INDEX
Figure 7-5 Pitch Hold Mode
406
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58
190-00629-04 Rev. A
AUTOMATIC FLIGHT CONTROL SYSTEM
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
SELECTED ALTITUDE CAPTURE MODE (ALTS)
Selected Altitude Capture Mode is automatically armed with activation of the following modes:
• Go Around
• Vertical Speed
• Vertical Path Tracking (if the Selected Altitude is to
be captured instead of the VNV Target Altitude)
• Flight Level Change
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
• Pitch Hold
EIS
The white ‘ALTS’ annunciation indicates Selected Altitude Capture Mode is armed (see Figure 7-6 for example).
The ALT Knob is used to set the Selected Altitude (shown above the Altimeter) until Selected Altitude Capture
Mode becomes active.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
As the aircraft nears the Selected Altitude, the flight director automatically transitions to Selected Altitude
Capture Mode with Altitude Hold Mode armed (Figure 7-6). This automatic transition is indicated by the green
‘ALTS’ annunciation flashing for up to 10 seconds and the appearance of the white ‘ALT’ annunciation. The
Selected Altitude is shown as the Altitude Reference beside the ‘ALTS’ annunciation.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
At 50 feet from the Selected Altitude, the flight director automatically transitions from Selected Altitude
Capture to Altitude Hold Mode and holds the Selected Altitude (shown as the Altitude Reference). As Altitude
Hold Mode becomes active, the white ‘ALT’ annunciation moves to the active vertical mode field and flashes
green for 10 seconds to indicate the automatic transition.
Altitude Reference
(in this case, equal to
Selected Altitude)
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Flash up to 10 sec, Indicating Automatic Transition
AFCS
Figure 7-6 Automatic Mode Transitions During Altitude Capture
CHANGING THE SELECTED ALTITUDE
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
NOTE: Pressing the CWS Switch while in Selected Altitude Capture Mode does not cancel the mode.
APPENDICES
Use of the ALT Knob to change the Selected Altitude while Selected Altitude Capture Mode is active causes
the flight director to revert to Pitch Hold Mode with Selected Altitude Capture Mode armed for the new
Selected Altitude.
INDEX
190-00629-04 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58
407
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
AUTOMATIC FLIGHT CONTROL SYSTEM
ALTITUDE HOLD MODE (ALT)
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Altitude Hold Mode can be activated by pressing the ALT Key; the flight director maintains the current aircraft
altitude (to the nearest 10 feet) as the Altitude Reference. The flight director’s Altitude Reference, shown in the
AFCS Status Box, is independent of the Selected Altitude, displayed above the Altimeter. Altitude Hold Mode
active is indicated by a green ‘ALT’ annunciation in the AFCS Status Box.
Altitude Hold Mode is automatically armed when the flight director is in Selected Altitude Capture Mode (see
Figure 7-7). Selected Altitude Capture Mode automatically transitions to Altitude Hold Mode when the altitude
error is less than 50 feet. In this case, the Selected Altitude becomes the flight director’s Altitude Reference.
EIS
CHANGING THE ALTITUDE REFERENCE
NOTE: Turning the ALT Knob while in Altitude Hold Mode changes the Selected Altitude, but not the flight
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
director’s Altitude Reference, and does not cancel the mode.
The Altitude Reference (shown in the AFCS Status Box) may be changed by:
• Using the NOSE UP/NOSE DN Keys
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
• Pressing the CWS Switch, hand-flying the aircraft to attain a new Altitude Reference, then releasing the
CWS Switch at the desired altitude (the new altitude is now the Altitude Reference)
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Altitude Hold
Mode Active
Altitude
Reference
AFCS
Selected
Altitude
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Selected
Altitude
Bug
APPENDICES
Command Bars Hold Pitch Attitude
to Maintain Altitude Reference
INDEX
Figure 7-7 Altitude Hold Mode
408
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58
190-00629-04 Rev. A
AUTOMATIC FLIGHT CONTROL SYSTEM
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
VERTICAL SPEED MODE (VS)
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
In Vertical Speed Mode, the flight director acquires and maintains a Vertical Speed Reference. Current aircraft
vertical speed (to the nearest 100 fpm) becomes the Vertical Speed Reference at the moment of Vertical Speed
Mode activation. This mode may be used for climb or descent to the Selected Altitude (shown above the
Altimeter) since Selected Altitude Capture Mode is automatically armed when Vertical Speed Mode is selected.
When Vertical Speed Mode is activated by pressing the VS Key, ‘VS’ is annunciated in green in the AFCS Status
Box along with the Vertical Speed Reference. The Vertical Speed Reference is also displayed above the Vertical
Speed Indicator. A Vertical Speed Reference Bug corresponding to the Vertical Speed Reference is shown on
the indicator.
EIS
CHANGING THE VERTICAL SPEED REFERENCE
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
The Vertical Speed Reference (shown both in the AFCS Status Box and above the Vertical Speed Indicator)
may be changed by:
• Using the NOSE UP/NOSE DN Keys
• Pressing the CWS Switch, hand-flying the aircraft to attain a new Vertical Speed Reference, then releasing
the CWS Switch
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
NOTE: If the Selected Altitude is reached during CWS maneuvering, the Altitude Reference is not changed.
To adjust the Altitude Reference in this case, the CWS Switch must be pressed again after the Selected
Altitude is reached.
Vertical
Speed
Reference
Selected
Altitude Capture
Mode Armed
AFCS
Selected
Altitude
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Vertical Speed
Mode Active
Vertical
Speed
Reference
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Vertical
Speed
Reference
Bug
APPENDICES
Command Bars Indicate Climb to
Attain Vertical Speed Reference
190-00629-04 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58
INDEX
Figure 7-8 Vertical Speed Hold Mode
409
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT LEVEL CHANGE MODE (FLC)
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Flight Level Change Mode is selected by pressing the FLC Key. This mode acquires and maintains the
Airspeed Reference (IAS) while climbing or descending to the Selected Altitude (shown above the Altimeter).
When Flight Level Change Mode is active, the flight director continuously monitors Selected Altitude, airspeed
and altitude.
EIS
AUTOMATIC FLIGHT CONTROL SYSTEM
The Airspeed Reference is set to the current airspeed upon mode activation. Flight Level Change Mode is
indicated by a green ‘FLC’ annunciation beside the Airspeed Reference in the AFCS Status Box. The Airspeed
Reference is also displayed directly above the Airspeed Indicator, along with a bug corresponding to the Airspeed
Reference along the tape.
NOTE: The Selected Altitude should be set before selecting Flight Level Change Mode.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Engine power must be adjusted to allow the autopilot to fly the aircraft at a pitch attitude corresponding
to the desired flight profile (climb or descent) while maintaining the Airspeed Reference. The flight director
maintains the current altitude until either engine power or the Airspeed Reference are adjusted and does not
allow the aircraft to climb or descend away from the Selected Altitude.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
CHANGING THE AIRSPEED REFERENCE
The Airspeed Reference (shown in both the AFCS Status Box and above the Airspeed Indicator) may be
adjusted by:
• Using the NOSE UP/NOSE DN Keys
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
• Pressing the CWS Switch, hand-flying the aircraft to attain a new Airspeed Reference, then releasing the
CWS Switch
NOTE: If the Selected Altitude is reached during CWS maneuvering, the Airspeed Reference is not changed.
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
To adjust the Airspeed Reference in this case, the CWS Switch must be pressed again after the Selected
Altitude is reached.
410
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58
190-00629-04 Rev. A
AUTOMATIC FLIGHT CONTROL SYSTEM
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Airspeed
Reference
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Flight Level
Change Mode
Active
Selected
Altitude Capture
Mode Armed
EIS
Airspeed
Reference
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Airspeed
Reference
Bug
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Command Bars Indicate Climb
to attain Selected Altitude
Figure 7-9 Flight Level Change Mode (IAS)
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-00629-04 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58
411
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
AUTOMATIC FLIGHT CONTROL SYSTEM
VERTICAL NAVIGATION MODES (VPTH, ALTV)
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
NOTE: VNV is disabled when parallel track or Dead Reckoning Mode is active.
NOTE: The Selected Altitude takes precedence over any other vertical constraints.
Vertical Navigation (VNV) flight control is available for enroute/terminal cruise and descent operations any
time that VNV flight planning is available. Refer to the Flight Management Section for more information on
VNV flight plans. Conditions for availability include, but are not limited to:
EIS
• The selected navigation source is GPS.
• A VNV flight plan (with at least one altitude-constrained waypoint) or vertical direct-to is active.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
• VNV is enabled (VNV ENBL Softkey pressed on the MFD).
• Crosstrack error is valid and within certain limits.
• Desired/actual track are valid or track angle error is within certain limits.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
• The VNV Target Altitude of the active waypoint is no more than 250 ft above the current aircraft altitude.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
The flight director may be armed for VNV at any time, but no target altitudes are captured during a climb.
The Command Bars provide vertical profile guidance based on specified altitudes (entered manually or loaded
from the database) at waypoints in the active flight plan or vertical direct-to. The appropriate VNV flight control
modes are sequenced by the flight director to follow the path defined by the vertical profile. Upon reaching
the last waypoint in the VNV flight plan, the flight director transitions to Altitude Hold Mode and cancels any
armed VNV modes.
VERTICAL PATH TRACKING MODE (VPTH)
AFCS
NOTE: Vertical Path Tracking Mode is only applicable to aircraft equipped with a VNV Key.
NOTE: If another vertical mode key is pressed while Vertical Path Tracking Mode is selected, Vertical Path
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Tracking Mode reverts to armed.
NOTE: Pressing the CWS Switch while Vertical Path Tracking Mode is active does not cancel the mode. The
autopilot guides the aircraft back to the descent path upon release of the CWS Switch.
INDEX
APPENDICES
When a vertical profile (VNV flight plan) is active and the VNV Key is pressed, Vertical Path Tracking
Mode is armed in preparation for descent path capture. ‘VPTH’ (or ‘/V’ when Glidepath or Glideslope Mode
is concurrently armed) is annunciated in white in addition to previously armed modes. If applicable, the
appropriate altitude capture mode is armed for capture of the next VNV Target Altitude (ALTV) or the Selected
Altitude (ALTS), whichever is greater.
412
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58
190-00629-04 Rev. A
AUTOMATIC FLIGHT CONTROL SYSTEM
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Figure 7-10 Vertical Path Tracking Armed Annunciations
Prior to descent path interception, the Selected Altitude must be set below the current aircraft altitude
by at least 75 feet. For the flight director to transition from Altitude Hold to Vertical Path Tracking Mode,
acknowledgment is required within five minutes of descent path interception by:
• Adjusting the Selected Altitude
• Pressing the VNV Key
EIS
If acknowledgment is not received within one minute of descent path interception, the white ‘VPTH’
annunciation starts to flash. Flashing continues until acknowledged or the descent path is intercepted. If
the descent is not confirmed by the time of interception, Vertical Path Tracking Mode remains armed and the
descent is not captured.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
In conjunction with the “TOD [top of descent] within 1 minute” annunciation in the PFD Navigation Status
Box and the “Vertical track” voice message, VNV indications (VNV Target Altitude, vertical deviation, and
vertical speed required) appear on the PFD in magenta (Figure 7-11).
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Altitude Hold
Mode Active
Vertical Path Tracking
Armed, (Flashing Indicates
Acknowledgment Required)
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
VNV Target
Altitude
AFCS
Enroute
Phase of
Flight
APPENDICES
GPS is Selected
Navigation
Source
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Required
Vertical
Speed Bug
Vertical
Deviation
Indicator
Figure 7-11 Vertical Path Capture
INDEX
190-00629-04 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58
413
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
AUTOMATIC FLIGHT CONTROL SYSTEM
When a descent leg is captured (i.e., vertical deviation becomes valid), Vertical Path Tracking becomes
active and tracks the descent profile (Figure 7-12). An altitude capture mode (‘ALTS’ or ‘ALTV’) is armed as
appropriate.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Vertical Path
Tracking Active
VNV Target Altitude
Capture Armed
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
VNV Target
Altitude
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
GPS is Selected
Navigation
Source
Terminal
Phase of
Flight
Command Bars Indicate Descent to
Maintain Required Vertical Speed
Required
Vertical
Speed
Indication
(RVSI)
Vertical
Deviation
Indicator (VDI)
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Figure 7-12 Vertical Path Tracking Mode
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
If the altimeter barometric setting is adjusted while Vertical Path Tracking is active, the flight director
increases/decreases the descent rate by up to 500 fpm to re-establish the aircraft on the descent path (without
commanding a climb). Adjusting the altimeter barometric setting creates discontinuities in VNV vertical
deviation, moving the descent path. For large adjustments, it may take several minutes for the aircraft to reestablish on the descent path. If the change is made while nearing a waypoint with a VNV Target Altitude,
the aircraft may not re-establish on the descent path in time to meet the vertical constraint.
414
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58
190-00629-04 Rev. A
AUTOMATIC FLIGHT CONTROL SYSTEM
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Automatic Reversion to Pitch Hold Mode
Several situations can occur while Vertical Path Tracking Mode is active which cause the flight director to
revert to Pitch Hold Mode:
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
• Vertical deviation exceeds 200 feet during an overspeed condition.
• Vertical deviation experiences a discontinuity that both exceeds 200 feet in magnitude and results in the
vertical deviation exceeding 200 feet in magnitude. Such discontinuities are usually caused by flight plan
changes that affect the vertical profile.
• Vertical deviation becomes invalid (the Vertical Deviation Indicator is removed from the PFD).
EIS
• A display enters Reversionary Mode (this does not apply to an active vertical direct-to).
Unless VNV is disabled, Vertical Path Tracking Mode and the appropriate altitude capture mode become
armed following the reversion to Pitch Hold Mode to allow for possible profile recapture.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Non-Path Descents
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Pitch Hold, Vertical Speed, and Flight Level Change modes can also be used to fly non-path descents
while VNV flight control is selected. If the VS or FLC Key is pressed while Vertical Path Tracking Mode is
selected, Vertical Path Tracking Mode reverts to armed along with the appropriate altitude capture mode to
allow profile re-capture.
Figure 7-13 Flight Level Change VNV Non-Path Descent
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
To prevent immediate profile re-capture, the following must be satisfied:
• At least 10 seconds have passed since the non-path transition was initiated
• Vertical deviation from the profile has exceeded 250 feet, but is now less than 200 feet
AFCS
Pressing the VNV Key twice re-arms Vertical Path Tracking for immediate profile re-capture.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-00629-04 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58
415
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
AUTOMATIC FLIGHT CONTROL SYSTEM
VNV TARGET ALTITUDE CAPTURE MODE (ALTV)
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
NOTE: VNV Target Altitude Capture Mode is only applicable to aircraft equipped with a VNV Key.
NOTE: Armed VNV Target Altitude and Selected Altitude capture modes are mutually exclusive. However,
Selected Altitude Capture Mode is armed implicitly (not annunciated) whenever VNV Target Altitude Capture
Mode is armed.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
VNV Target Altitude Capture is analogous to Selected Altitude Capture Mode and is armed automatically
after the VNV Key is pressed and the next VNV Target Altitude is to be intercepted before the Selected
Altitude. The annunciation ‘ALTV’ indicates that the VNV Target Altitude is to be captured. VNV Target
Altitudes are shown in the active flight plan or vertical direct-to, and can be entered manually or loaded
from a database (see the Flight Management Section for details). At the same time as “TOD within 1 minute”
is annunciated in the Navigation Status Box, the active VNV Target Altitude is displayed above the Vertical
Speed Indicator (see Figure 7-11).
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
As the aircraft nears the VNV Target Altitude, the flight director automatically transitions to VNV Target
Altitude Capture Mode with Altitude Hold Mode armed. This automatic transition is indicated by the green
‘ALTV’ annunciation flashing for up to 10 seconds and the appearance of the white ‘ALT’ annunciation. The
VNV Target Altitude is shown as the Altitude Reference beside the ‘ALTV’ annunciation and remains displayed
above the Vertical Speed Indicator. The Required Vertical Speed Indication (RVSI) is removed once VNV
Target Altitude Capture Mode becomes active.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
At 50 feet from the VNV Target Altitude, the flight director automatically transitions from VNV Target
Altitude Capture to Altitude Hold Mode and tracks the level leg. As Altitude Hold Mode becomes active, the
white ‘ALT’ annunciation moves to the active vertical mode field and flashes green for 10 seconds to indicate
the automatic transition. The flight director automatically arms Vertical Path Tracking, allowing upcoming
descent legs to be captured and subsequently tracked.
AFCS
Altitude Reference (In This Case,
Equal To VNV Altitude Target)
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Flash up to 10 sec, Indicating Automatic Transition
Figure 7-14 Automatic Mode Transitions During Altitude Capture
APPENDICES
Changing the VNV Target Altitude
NOTE: Pressing the CWS Switch while in VNV Target Altitude Capture Mode does not cancel the mode.
INDEX
Changing the current VNV Target Altitude while VNV Target Altitude Capture Mode is active causes the
flight director to revert to Pitch Hold Mode. Vertical Path Tracking and the appropriate altitude capture
mode are armed in preparation to capture the new VNV Target Altitude or the Selected Altitude, depending
on which altitude is to be intercepted first.
VNV target altitudes can be changed while editing the active flight plan (see the Flight Management
Section for details).
416
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58
190-00629-04 Rev. A
AUTOMATIC FLIGHT CONTROL SYSTEM
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
GLIDEPATH MODE (GP) (SBAS ONLY)
NOTE: Pressing the CWS Switch while Glidepath Mode is active does not cancel the mode. The autopilot
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
guides the aircraft back to the glidepath upon release of the CWS Switch.
Glidepath Mode is available only when SBAS is available. Glidepath Mode is used to track the SBAS-based
glidepath (Figure 7-15). When Glidepath Mode is armed, ‘GP’ is annunciated in white in the AFCS Status Box.
Selecting Glidepath Mode (SBAS Only):
EIS
1) Ensure a GPS approach with vertical guidance or vertical descent angle (LPV, LNAV/VNAV, LNAV +V) is loaded
into the active flight plan. The active waypoint must be part of the flight plan (cannot be a direct-to a waypoint
not in the flight plan).
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
2) Ensure that GPS is the selected navigation source (use the CDI Softkey to cycle through navigation sources if
necessary).
3) Press the APR Key.
NOTE: Some RNAV (GPS) approaches provide a vertical descent angle as an aid in flying a stabilized
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
approach. These approaches are NOT considered Approaches with Vertical Guidance (APV). Approaches
that are annunciated on the HSI as LNAV or LNAV+V are considered Nonprecision Approaches (NPA) and
are flown to an MDA even though vertical glidepath (GP) information may be provided.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
WARNING: When flying an LNAV approach (with vertical descent angle) with the autopilot coupled, the
aircraft will not level off at the MDA even if the MDA is set in the altitude preselect.
Upon reaching the glidepath, the flight director transitions to Glidepath Mode and begins to capture and
track the glidepath.
Figure 7-15 Glidepath Mode Armed
AFCS
Once the following conditions have been met, the glidepath can be captured:
• The active waypoint is at or after the final approach fix (FAF).
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
• Vertical deviation is valid.
• The CDI is at less than full-scale deviation
• Automatic sequencing of waypoints has not been suspended (no ‘SUSP’ annunciation on the HSI)
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-00629-04 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58
417
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
AUTOMATIC FLIGHT CONTROL SYSTEM
Glidepath
Mode Active
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
GPS Approach
Mode Active
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
GPS is Selected
Navigation
Source
LNAV/VNAV
Approach
Active
Command Bars Indicate
Descent on Glidepath
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Figure 7-16 Glidepath Mode
Glidepath
Indicator
418
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58
190-00629-04 Rev. A
AUTOMATIC FLIGHT CONTROL SYSTEM
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
GLIDESLOPE MODE (GS)
NOTE: Pressing the CWS Switch while Glideslope Mode is active does not cancel the mode. The autopilot
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
guides the aircraft back to the glideslope upon release of the CWS Switch.
Glideslope Mode is available for LOC/ILS approaches to capture and track the glideslope. When Glideslope
Mode is armed (annunciated as ‘GS’ in white), LOC Approach Mode is armed as the lateral flight director
mode.
Selecting Glideslope Mode:
EIS
1) Ensure a valid localizer frequency is tuned.
2) Ensure that LOC is the selected navigation source (use the CDI Softkey to cycle through navigation sources if
necessary).
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
3) Press the APR Key.
Or:
1) Ensure that GPS is the selected navigation source (use the CDI Softkey to cycle through navigation sources if
necessary).
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
2) Ensure a LOC/ILS approach is loaded into the active flight plan.
3) Ensure the corresponding LOC frequency is tuned.
4) Press the APR Key.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Figure 7-17 Glideslope Mode Armed
Once LOC is the navigation source, the localizer and glideslope can be captured. Upon reaching the glideslope,
the flight director transitions to Glideslope Mode and begins to capture and track the glideslope.
Active ILS
Frequency Tuned
Approach
Mode Active
Glideslope
Mode Active
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
Command Bars Indicate Descent
on Localizer/Glideslope Path
Figure 7-18 Glideslope Mode
190-00629-04 Rev. A
INDEX
NAV2 (localizer) is Selected
Navigation Source
Glideslope
Indicator
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58
419
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
AUTOMATIC FLIGHT CONTROL SYSTEM
GO AROUND MODE (GA)
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Pressing the GA Switch while in the air activates the flight director in a wings-level, pitch-up attitude,
allowing the execution of a missed approach or a go around. Go Around Mode disengages the autopilot and
arms Selected Altitude Capture Mode automatically. Subsequent autopilot engagement is allowed. Attempts
to modify the aircraft attitude (i.e., with the NOSE UP/NOSE DN Keys or CWS Switch) result in reversion to
Pitch and Roll Hold modes.
EIS
Go Around Mode Active
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Autopilot Disconnect Annunciation
Flashes Yellow for 5 seconds
Command Bars Indicate Climb
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
Figure 7-19 Go Around Mode
420
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58
190-00629-04 Rev. A
AUTOMATIC FLIGHT CONTROL SYSTEM
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
7.4 LATERAL MODES
Lateral Mode
Description
Control Annunciation
Roll Hold
Heading Select
Navigation, VOR Enroute Capture/Track
Navigation, Backcourse Capture/Track
HDG
25°
GPS
25°
25° Capture
10° Track
25° Capture
10° Track
VOR
NAV
Key
Captures and tracks a
localizer signal for backcourse
approaches
LOC
BC
Approach, GPS
GPS
Approach, LOC Capture/Track
(Glideslope Mode automatically armed)
Captures and tracks the selected
navigation source (GPS, VOR, APR Key
LOC)
GA
Switch
LOC
GA
25°
25° Capture
10° Track
25° Capture
10° Track
Wings Level
AFCS
Disengages the autopilot and
commands a constant pitch
angle and wings level in the air
VAPP
25° Capture
10° Track
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Approach, VOR Capture/Track
Go Around
25°
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Navigation, LOC Capture/Track
(No Glideslope)
Captures and tracks the selected
navigation source (GPS, VOR,
LOC)
ROL
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Navigation, GPS
Maximum Roll
Command Limit
EIS
Holds the current aircraft roll
attitude or rolls the wings level,
(default)
depending on the commanded
bank angle
Captures and tracks the Selected HDG
Heading
Key
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The following table relates each GFC 700 lateral mode to its respective control and annunciation. Refer to the
vertical modes section for information regarding Go Around Mode.
The GFC 700 limits turn rate to 3 degrees per second (standard rate turn).
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Table 7-3 Flight Director Lateral Modes
The CWS Switch does not change lateral references for Heading Select, Navigation, Backcourse, or Approach
Mode. The autopilot guides the aircraft back to the Selected Heading/Course upon release of the CWS Switch.
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-00629-04 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58
421
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
AUTOMATIC FLIGHT CONTROL SYSTEM
ROLL HOLD MODE (ROL)
NOTE: If Roll Hold Mode is activated as a result of a mode reversion, the flight director rolls the wings
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
level.
EIS
When the flight director is activated or switched, Roll Hold Mode is selected by default. This mode is
annunciated as ‘ROL’ in the AFCS Status Box. The current aircraft bank angle is held, subject to the bank angle
condition.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Figure 7-20 Roll Hold Mode Annunciation
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Bank Angle
< 6°
6 to 25°
25° to 45°
Flight Director Response
Rolls wings level
Maintains current aircraft roll attitude
Limits bank to 25°
Table 7-4 Roll Hold Mode Responses
CHANGING THE ROLL REFERENCE
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
The roll reference can be changed by pressing the CWS Switch, establishing the desired bank angle, then
releasing the CWS Switch.
422
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58
190-00629-04 Rev. A
AUTOMATIC FLIGHT CONTROL SYSTEM
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
HEADING SELECT MODE (HDG)
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Heading Select Mode is activated by pressing the HDG Key. Heading Select Mode acquires and maintains
the Selected Heading. The Selected Heading is shown by a light blue bug on the HSI and in the box to the
upper left of the HSI.
Changing the Selected Heading
NOTE: Pressing the HDG Knob synchronizes the Selected Heading to the current heading.
EIS
The Selected Heading is adjusted using the HDG Knob. Pressing the CWS Switch and hand-flying
the aircraft does not change the Selected Heading. The autopilot guides the aircraft back to the Selected
Heading upon release of the CWS Switch.
Heading Select
Mode Active
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Turns are commanded in the same direction as Selected Heading Bug movement, even if the bug is turned
more than 180° from the present heading (e.g., a 270° turn to the right). However, Selected Heading
changes of more than 330° at a time result in turn reversals.
Pitch Hold
Mode Active
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
Selected
Heading
Bug
Command Bars Track
Selected Heading
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Selected
Heading
Figure 7-21 Heading Select Mode
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-00629-04 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58
423
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
AUTOMATIC FLIGHT CONTROL SYSTEM
NAVIGATION MODES (GPS, VOR, LOC, BC)
NOTE: The selected navigation receiver must have a valid VOR or LOC signal or active GPS course for the
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
flight director to enter Navigation Mode.
NOTE: When intercepting a flight plan leg, the flight director gives commands to capture the active leg at
approximately a 45° angle to the track between the waypoints defining the active leg. The flight director
does not give commands to fly to the starting waypoint of the active leg.
EIS
NOTE: When making a backcourse approach, set the Selected Course to the localizer front course.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Pressing the NAV Key selects Navigation Mode. Navigation Mode acquires and tracks the selected navigation
source (GPS, VOR, LOC). The flight director follows GPS roll steering commands when GPS is the selected
navigation source. When the navigation source is VOR or LOC, the flight director creates roll steering commands
from the Selected Course and deviation. Navigation Mode can also be used to fly non-precision GPS and LOC
approaches where vertical guidance is not required.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Backcourse Mode is selected when the localizer front course is greater than 105° from the aircraft heading.
Backcourse Mode captures and tracks a localizer signal in the backcourse direction. The annunciation “BC” in
the AFCS Status Box indicates Backcourse Mode.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
If the Course Deviation Indicator (CDI) shows greater than one dot when the NAV Key is pressed, the selected
mode is armed. If the CDI shows less than one dot, Navigation Mode is automatically captured when the NAV
Key is pressed. The armed annunciation appears in white to the left of the active lateral mode.
Figure 7-22 GPS Navigation Mode Armed
AFCS
When the CDI has automatically switched from GPS to LOC during a LOC/ILS approach, GPS Navigation
Mode remains active, providing GPS steering guidance until the localizer signal is captured. LOC Navigation
Mode is armed automatically when the navigation source switch takes place if the APR Key is not pressed prior
to the automatic source switch.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
If Navigation Mode is active and either of the following occur, the flight director reverts to Roll Hold Mode
(wings rolled level):
• Different VOR tuned while in VOR Navigation Mode (VOR Navigation Mode reverts to armed)
APPENDICES
• Navigation source manually switched (with the CDI Softkey)
INDEX
• During a LOC/ILS approach, the FAF is crossed while in GPS Navigation Mode after the automatic navigation
source switch from GPS to LOC
424
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58
190-00629-04 Rev. A
AUTOMATIC FLIGHT CONTROL SYSTEM
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
CHANGING THE SELECTED COURSE
If the navigation source is VOR or localizer, or OBS Mode has been enabled when using GPS, the Selected
Course is controlled using the CRS Knob.
GPS Navigation
Mode Active
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Pressing the CWS Switch and hand-flying the aircraft does not change the Selected Course while in
Navigation Mode. The autopilot guides the aircraft back to the Selected Course (or GPS flight plan) when the
CWS Switch is released.
Pitch Hold
Mode Active
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Selected
Course
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
GPS is Selected
Navigation
Source
Command Bars Indicate Left Turn
to Track GPS Course and Climb to
Intercept Selected Altitude
Figure 7-23 Navigation Mode
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-00629-04 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58
425
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
AUTOMATIC FLIGHT CONTROL SYSTEM
APPROACH MODES (GPS, VAPP, LOC)
NOTE: The selected navigation receiver must have a valid VOR or LOC signal or active GPS course for the
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
flight director to enter Approach Mode.
EIS
Approach Mode is activated when the APR Key is pressed. Approach Mode acquires and tracks the selected
navigation source (GPS, VOR, or LOC), depending on loaded approach. This mode uses the selected navigation
receiver deviation and desired course inputs to fly the approach. Pressing the APR Key when the CDI is greater
than one dot arms the selected approach mode (annunciated in white to the left of the active lateral mode). If
the CDI is less the 1 dot, the LOC is automatically captured when the APR Key is pressed.
VOR Approach Mode (VAPP) provides greater sensitivity for signal tracking than VOR Navigation Mode.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Selecting VOR Approach Mode:
1) Ensure a valid VOR frequency is tuned
2) Ensure that VOR is the selected navigation source (use the CDI Softkey to cycle through navigation sources if
necessary).
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
3) Press the APR Key.
When GPS Approach Mode is armed, Glidepath Mode is also armed.
Selecting GPS Approach Mode:
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
1) Ensure a GPS approach is loaded into the active flight plan. The active waypoint must be part of the flight plan
(cannot be a direct-to a waypoint not in the flight plan).
2) Ensure that GPS is the selected navigation source (use the CDI Softkey to cycle through navigation sources if
necessary).
AFCS
3) Press the APR Key.
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Figure 7-24 GPS Approach Mode Armed
426
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58
190-00629-04 Rev. A
AUTOMATIC FLIGHT CONTROL SYSTEM
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
LOC Approach Mode allows the autopilot to fly a LOC/ILS approach with a glideslope. When LOC Approach
Mode is armed, Glideslope Mode is also armed automatically. LOC captures are inhibited if the difference
between aircraft heading and localizer course exceeds 105°.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Selecting LOC Approach Mode:
1) Ensure a valid localizer frequency is tuned.
2) Ensure that LOC is the selected navigation source (use the CDI Softkey to cycle through navigation sources if
necessary).
3) Press the APR Key.
EIS
Or:
1) Ensure that GPS is the selected navigation source (use the CDI Softkey to cycle through navigation sources if
necessary).
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
2) Ensure a LOC/ILS approach is loaded into the active flight plan.
3) Ensure the corresponding LOC frequency is tuned.
4) Press the APR Key.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
If the following occurs, the flight director reverts to Roll Hold Mode (wings rolled level):
• Approach Mode is active and a Vectors-To-Final is activated
• Approach Mode is active and Navigation source is manually switched
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
• During a LOC/ILS approach, GPS Navigation Mode is active and the FAF is crossed after the automatic
navigation source switch from GPS to LOC
CHANGING THE SELECTED COURSE
If the navigation source is VOR or localizer, or OBS Mode has been enabled when using GPS, the Selected
Course is controlled using the CRS Knob.
AFCS
Pressing the CWS Switch and hand-flying the aircraft does not change the Selected Course while in
Approach Mode. The autopilot guides the aircraft back to the Selected Course (or GPS flight plan) when the
CWS Switch is released.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
BACKCOURSE MODE (BC)
NOTE: When making a backcourse approach, set the Selected Course to the localizer front course.
APPENDICES
Backcourse Mode captures and tracks a localizer signal in the backcourse direction. The flight director creates
roll steering commands from the Selected Course and deviation when in Backcourse Mode.
INDEX
190-00629-04 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58
427
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
AUTOMATIC FLIGHT CONTROL SYSTEM
Backcourse
Mode Active
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Pitch Hold
Mode Active
LOC2 is Selected Navigation Source
Command Bars Hold Pitch Attitude
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Figure 7-25 Backcourse Mode
CHANGING THE SELECTED COURSE
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
If the navigation source is VOR or localizer or OBS Mode has been enabled when using GPS, the Selected
Course is controlled using the CRS Knob corresponding to the selected flight director (CRS1 for the pilot
side, CRS2 for the copilot side).
Pressing the CWS Button and hand-flying the aircraft does not reset any reference data while in Backcourse
Mode. The autopilot guides the aircraft back to the Selected Course when the CWS Button is released.
AFCS
INTERCEPTING AND FLYING A DME ARC
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
The AFCS will intercept and track a DME arc that is part of the active flight plan provided that GPS
Navigation Mode is engaged, GPS is the active navigation source on the CDI, and the DME arc segment is
the active flight plan leg. It is important to note that automatic navigation of DME arcs is based on GPS.
Thus, even if the APR key is pressed and LOC or VOR Approach Mode is armed prior to reaching the Initial
Approach Fix (IAF), Approach Mode will not activate until the arc segment is completed.
INDEX
APPENDICES
If the pilot decides to intercept the arc at a location other than the published IAF (i.e. ATC provides vectors
to intercept the arc) and subsequently selects Heading Mode or Roll Mode, the AFCS will not automatically
intercept or track the arc unless the pilot activates the arc leg of the flight plan and arms GPS Navigation
Mode. The AFCS will not intercept and fly a DME arc before reaching an IAF that defines the beginning of the
arc segment. Likewise, if at any point while established on the DME arc the pilot deselects GPS Navigation
Mode, the AFCS will no longer track the arc.
428
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58
190-00629-04 Rev. A
AUTOMATIC FLIGHT CONTROL SYSTEM
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
7.5 AUTOPILOT AND YAW DAMPER OPERATION
NOTE: Refer to the POH/AFM for specific instructions regarding emergency procedures.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The Beechcraft G58 autopilot and yaw damper operate the flight control surface servos to provide automatic
flight control. The autopilot controls the aircraft pitch and roll attitudes following commands received from the
flight director. Pitch autotrim provides trim commands to the pitch trim servo to relieve any sustained effort
required by the pitch servo. Autopilot operation is independent of the yaw damper.
EIS
The yaw damper reduces Dutch roll tendencies and coordinates turns. It can operate independently of the
autopilot and may be used during normal hand-flight maneuvers. Yaw rate commands are limited to 6 deg/sec
by the yaw damper.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT CONTROL
Pitch and roll commands are provided to the servos based on the active flight director modes. Yaw damping
is provided by the yaw servo. Servo motor control limits the maximum servo speed and torque. The servo
mounts are equipped with slip-clutches set to certain values. This allows the servos to be overridden in case
of an emergency.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
PITCH AXIS AND TRIM
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
The autopilot pitch axis uses pitch rate to stabilize the aircraft pitch attitude during flight director maneuvers.
Flight director pitch commands are rate and attitude-limited, combined with pitch damper control, and sent
to the pitch servo motor. The pitch servo measures the output effort (torque) and provides this signal to the
pitch trim servo. The pitch trim servo commands the motor to reduce the average pitch servo effort.
When the autopilot is not engaged, the pitch trim servo may be used to provide manual electric pitch
trim (MEPT). This allows the aircraft to be trimmed using a control wheel switch rather than the trim
wheel. Manual trim commands are generated only when both halves of the MEPT Switch are operated
simultaneously. Trim speeds are scheduled with airspeed to provide more consistent response.
AFCS
ROLL AXIS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
The autopilot roll axis uses roll rate to stabilize aircraft roll attitude during flight director maneuvers. The
flight director roll commands are rate- and attitude-limited, combined with roll damper control, and sent to
the roll servo motor.
YAW AXIS
APPENDICES
The yaw damper uses yaw rate and roll attitude to dampen the aircraft’s natural Dutch roll response. It also
uses lateral acceleration to coordinate turns.
INDEX
190-00629-04 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58
429
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
AUTOMATIC FLIGHT CONTROL SYSTEM
ENGAGEMENT
NOTE: Autopilot engagement/disengagement is not equivalent to servo engagement/disengagement. Use
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
the CWS Switch to disengage the pitch and roll servos while the autopilot remains active.
EIS
When the AP Key is pressed, the autopilot, yaw damper, and flight director (if not already active) are activated.
The flight director engages in Pitch and Roll Hold Modes when initially activated. When the YD Key is pressed,
the system engages the yaw damper independently of the autopilot (if not already engaged). Autopilot and yaw
damper status are displayed in the center of the AFCS Status Box. Engagement is indicated by green ‘AP’ and
‘YD’ annunciations, respectively.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Autopilot Yaw Damper
Engaged Engaged
Figure 7-26 Autopilot and Yaw Damper Engaged
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
CONTROL WHEEL STEERING
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
During autopilot operation, the aircraft may be hand-flown without disengaging the autopilot. Pressing and
holding the CWS Switch disengages the pitch and roll servos from the flight control surfaces and allows the
aircraft to be hand-flown. At the same time, the flight director is synchronized to the aircraft attitude during
the maneuver. CWS activity has no effect on yaw damper engagement.
The ‘AP’ annunciation is temporarily replaced by ‘CWS’ in white for the duration of CWS maneuvers.
Control Wheel Steering
AFCS
Figure 7-27 CWS Annunciation
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
In most scenarios, releasing the CWS Switch reengages the autopilot with a new reference. Refer to flight
director mode descriptions for specific CWS behavior in each mode.
430
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58
190-00629-04 Rev. A
AUTOMATIC FLIGHT CONTROL SYSTEM
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
DISENGAGEMENT
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The autopilot is manually disengaged by pushing the AP DISC/TRIM INT Switch, AP Key on the MFD, GA
Switch, or MEPT ARM Switch. Manual autopilot disengagement is indicated by a five-second flashing yellow
‘AP’ annunciation and a three-second autopilot disconnect aural alert.
Figure 7-28 Manual Autopilot Disengagement
EIS
Pushing the AP DISC/TRIM INT Switch or YD Key disengages both the yaw damper and the autopilot.
When the yaw damper and autopilot are manually disengaged, both the ‘AP’ and ‘YD’ annunciation turn yellow
and flash for 5 seconds and a three-second autopilot disconnect aural alert is generated.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Figure 7-29 Yaw Damper Disengagement
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
After manual disengagement, the autopilot disconnect aural alert may be cancelled by pushing the MEPT ARM
or AP DISC/TRIM INT Switch (AP DISC/TRIM INT Switch also cancels the flashing ‘AP’ annunciation).
Automatic autopilot disengagement is indicated by a flashing red and white ‘AP’ annunciation and by the
autopilot disconnect aural alert, which continue until acknowledged by pushing the AP DISC/TRIM INT or
MEPT ARM Switch. Automatic autopilot disengagement occurs due to:
• Invalid sensor data
• Inability to compute default flight director modes
(FD also disengages automatically)
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
• System failure
AFCS
Yaw damper disengagement is indicated by a five-second flashing yellow ‘YD’ annunciation. Automatic yaw
damper disengagement occurs when autopilot disengagement is caused by failure in a parameter also affecting
the yaw damper. This means the yaw damper can remain operational in some cases where the autopilot
automatically disengages. A localized failure in the yaw damper system or invalid sensor data also cause yaw
damper disengagement.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Figure 7-30 Automatic Autopilot and Yaw Damper Disengagement
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-00629-04 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58
431
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
AUTOMATIC FLIGHT CONTROL SYSTEM
7.6 EXAMPLE FLIGHT PLAN
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
NOTE: The following example flight plan and diagrams (not to be used for navigation) in this section are
for instructional purposes only and should be considered not current. Numbered portions of accompanying
diagrams correspond to numbered procedure steps.
EIS
This scenario-based set of procedures (based on the example flight plan found in the Flight Management
Section) shows various GFC 700 AFCS modes used during a flight. In this scenario, the aircraft departs Charles
B. Wheeler Downtown Airport (KMKC), enroute to Colorado Springs Airport (KCOS). After departure, the
aircraft climbs to 12,000 ft and airway V4 is intercepted, following ATC vectors.
0
24
27
24
27
24
30
21
18
15
18
9
24
21
12
15
27
12
6
Lamar
VOR
(LAA)
Topeka
VOR
(TOP)
21
Hays
VOR
(HYS)
9
V 244
Salina
VOR
(SLN)
12
3
V4
18
V 244
9
6
0
33
KMKC
27
30
6
KCOS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
3
30
3
6
0
33
3
30
33
9
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
33
0
15
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Airway V4 is flown to Salina VOR (SLN) using VOR navigation, then airway V244 is flown using GPS Navigation.
The ILS approach for runway 35L and LPV (WAAS) approach for runway 35R are shown and a missed approach
is executed.
12
21
15
18
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
Figure 7-31 Flight Plan Overview
432
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58
190-00629-04 Rev. A
AUTOMATIC FLIGHT CONTROL SYSTEM
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
DEPARTURE
Climbing to the Selected Altitude and flying an assigned heading:
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
1) Before takeoff set the Selected Altitude to 12,000 feet using the ALT Knob.
2) In this example, Vertical Speed Mode is used to capture the Selected Altitude (Pitch Hold, Vertical Speed, or
Flight Level Change Mode may be used).
a) Press the VS Key to activate Vertical Speed Mode.
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
The Vertical Speed Reference may be adjusted after Vertical Speed Mode is selected using the NOSE UP/
NOSE DN Keys or pushing the CWS Switch while hand-flying the aircraft to establish a new Vertical Speed
Reference.
b) Press the AP Key to engage the autopilot in a climb using Vertical Speed Mode.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
3) Use the HDG Knob to set the Selected Heading, complying with ATC vectors to intercept Airway V4.
Press the HDG Key to activate Heading Select Mode while the autopilot is engaged in the climb. The autopilot
follows the Selected Heading Bug on the HSI and turns the aircraft to the desired heading.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
4) As the aircraft nears the Selected Altitude, the flight director transitions to Selected Altitude Capture Mode,
indicated by the green ‘ALTS’ annunciation flashing for up to 10 seconds.
AFCS
At 50 feet from the Selected Altitude, the green ‘ALT’ annunciation flashes for up to 10 seconds; the autopilot
transitions to Altitude Hold Mode and levels the aircraft.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-00629-04 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58
433
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
AUTOMATIC FLIGHT CONTROL SYSTEM
HD
GM
od
EIS
e
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
3
Selected Altitude of 12,000 MSL
ALT Mode
4
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
KMKC
1
2
VS
e
Mod
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Figure 7-32 Departure
434
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58
190-00629-04 Rev. A
AUTOMATIC FLIGHT CONTROL SYSTEM
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
INTERCEPTING A VOR RADIAL
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
During climb-out, the autopilot continues to fly the aircraft in Heading Select Mode. Airway V4 to Salina
VOR (SLN) should now be intercepted. Since the enroute flight plan waypoints correspond to VORs, flight
director Navigation Mode using either VOR or GPS as the navigation source may be used. In this scenario, VOR
Navigation Mode is used for navigation to the first VOR waypoint in the flight plan.
Intercepting a VOR radial:
1) Arm VOR Navigation Mode:
a) Tune the VOR frequency.
EIS
b) Press the CDI Softkey to set the navigation source to VOR.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
c) Use the CRS Knob to set the Selected Course to the desired value, 255°. Note that at this point, the flight
director is still in Heading Select Mode and the autopilot continues to fly the Selected Heading, 290°.
d) Press the NAV Key. This arms VOR Navigation Mode and the white ‘VOR’ annunciation appears to the left of
the active lateral mode.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
2) As the aircraft nears the Selected Course, the flight director transitions from Heading Select to VOR Navigation
Mode and the ‘VOR’ annunciation flashes green. The autopilot begins turning to intercept the Selected
Course.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
3) The autopilot continues the turn until the aircraft is established on the Selected Course.
0
33
3
30
AFCS
Hd
29 g
0o
V4
6
27
3
24
Salina
VOR
(SLN)
NA
V
Mo
de
2
HD
G
12
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
255
9
o
VO
R
M
od
e,
VO
R
Ar
m
ed
15
1
21
18
APPENDICES
Figure 7-33 Intercepting a VOR Radial
INDEX
190-00629-04 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58
435
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
AUTOMATIC FLIGHT CONTROL SYSTEM
FLYING A FLIGHT PLAN/GPS COURSE
NOTE: Changing the navigation source cancels Navigation Mode and causes the flight director to revert
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
back to Roll Hold Mode (wings rolled level).
As the aircraft closes on Salina VOR, GPS is used to navigate the next leg, airway V244. The aircraft is
currently tracking inbound on Airway V4.
Flying a GPS flight plan:
EIS
1) Transition from VOR to GPS Navigation Mode:
a) Press the CDI Softkey until GPS is the selected navigation source.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
b) Press the NAV Key to activate GPS Navigation Mode. The autopilot guides the aircraft along the active flight
plan leg.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
2) Following the flight plan, the autopilot continues to steer the aircraft under GPS guidance. Note that in GPS
Navigation Mode, course changes defined by the flight plan are automatically made without pilot action
required.
0
33
3
V4
6
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
33
3
30
0
o
075
30
de
AV Mo
6
27
GPS N
260
o
15
21
18
24
2
12
12
AFCS
9
Hays
VOR
(HYS)
Salina
VOR
(SLN)
V 244
1
24
27
076
e
9
o
d
AV Mo
VOR N
15
21
18
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Figure 7-34 Transition to GPS Flight Plan
436
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58
190-00629-04 Rev. A
AUTOMATIC FLIGHT CONTROL SYSTEM
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
DESCENT
While flying the arrival procedure, the aircraft is cleared for descent in preparation for the approach to KCOS.
Three methods are presented for descent:
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
• Flight Level Change descent – Flight Level Change Mode can be used to descend to the Selected Altitude at a
constant airspeed. This descent method does not account for flight plan waypoint altitude constraints.
• Vertical Path Tracking descent – Vertical Path Tracking Mode is used to follow the vertical descent path
defined in the GPS flight plan. Altitude constraints correspond to waypoints in the flight plan. Before VNV
flight control can provide vertical profile guidance, a VNV flight plan must be entered and enabled.
EIS
• Non-path descent in a VNV scenario – A VNV flight plan is entered and enabled, however Pitch Hold, Vertical
Speed, or Flight Level Change Mode can be used to descend to the VNV Target Altitude prior to reaching the
planned TOD. Flight Level Change Mode is used in the example.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Flight Level Change descent:
1) Select Flight Level Change Mode:
a) Using the ALT Knob, set the Selected Altitude to 10,000 feet.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
b) Press the FLC Key to activate Flight Level Change Mode. The annunciation ‘FLC’ appears next to the
Airspeed Reference, which defaults to the current aircraft airspeed. Selected Altitude Capture Mode is armed
automatically.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
2) Use the NOSE UP/NOSE DN Keys or push the CWS Switch while hand-flying the aircraft to adjust the
commanded airspeed while maintaining the same power, or reduce power to allow descent in Flight Level
Change Mode while the autopilot maintains the current airspeed.
3) As the aircraft nears the Selected Altitude, the flight director transitions to Selected Altitude Capture Mode,
indicated by the green ‘ALTS’ annunciation flashing for up to 10 seconds.
AFCS
1
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
The green ‘ALT’ annunciation flashes for up to 10 seconds upon reaching 50 feet from the Selected Altitude; the
autopilot transitions to Altitude Hold Mode and levels the aircraft.
Cruise Altitude of 12,000 MSL
APPENDICES
ALT Mode
2
FLC
Mod
e
3
Selected Altitude of 10,000 MSL
ALT Mode
190-00629-04 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58
INDEX
Figure 7-35 FLC Descent
437
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
AUTOMATIC FLIGHT CONTROL SYSTEM
Vertical Path Tracking descent to VNV Target Altitude:
1) Select VNV flight control:
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
a) Press the VNV Key to arm Vertical Path Tracking Mode. The white annunciation ‘VPTH’ appears.
b) Using the ALT Knob, set the Selected Altitude below the flight plan’s VNV Target Altitude of 10,000 feet.
EIS
If the Selected Altitude is not at least 75 ft below the VNV Target Altitude, the flight director captures the
Selected Altitude rather than the VNV Target Altitude once Vertical Path Tracking Mode becomes active (ALTS is
armed rather than ALTV).
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
c) If Vertical Path Tracking Mode is armed more than 5 minutes prior to descent path capture, acknowledgment is
required for the flight director to transition from Altitude Hold to Vertical Path Tracking Mode. To proceed with
descent path capture if the white ‘VPTH’ annunciation begins flashing, do one of the following
• Press the VNV Key
• Turn the ALT Knob to adjust the Selected Altitude
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
2) When the top of descent (TOD) is reached, the flight director transitions to Vertical Path Tracking Mode and
begins the descent to the VNV Target Altitude. Intention to capture the VNV Target Altitude is indicated by the
white ‘ALTV’ annunciation.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
If the descent is not confirmed by the time of interception, Vertical Path Tracking Mode remains armed and the
descent is not captured.
3) As the aircraft nears the VNV Target Altitude, the flight director transitions to VNV Target Altitude Capture Mode,
indicated by the green ‘ALTV’ annunciation flashing for up to 10 seconds.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
The green ‘ALT’ annunciation flashes for up to 10 seconds upon reaching 50 feet from the VNV Target Altitude;
the autopilot transitions to Altitude Hold Mode and levels the aircraft at the vertical waypoint.
1
ALT Mode
TOD
Cruise Altitude of 12,000 MSL
2
VPT
HM
ode
APPENDICES
3
BOD
VNAV Target Altitude of 10,000 MSL
ALT Mode
Selected Altitude (set below VNAV Target Altitude)
Along-track Offset, 3 nm before OPSHN
3 nm
INDEX
Figure 7-36 VPTH Descent
438
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58
190-00629-04 Rev. A
AUTOMATIC FLIGHT CONTROL SYSTEM
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Non-path descent using Flight Level Change Mode:
1) Using Flight Level Change Mode, command a non-path descent to an intermediate altitude above the next VNV
flight plan altitude.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
a) Using the ALT Knob, set the Selected Altitude below the current aircraft altitude to an altitude (in this case,
9,400 feet) at which to level off between VNV flight plan altitudes.
b) Press the FLC Key before the planned TOD during an altitude hold while VPTH is armed. The Airspeed Reference
defaults to the current aircraft airspeed. Vertical Path Tracking and Selected Altitude Capture Mode are armed
automatically.
EIS
2) Reduce power to allow descent in Flight Level Change Mode. The autopilot maintains the Airspeed Reference.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
3) As the aircraft nears the Selected Altitude, the flight director transitions to Selected Altitude Capture Mode,
indicated by the green ‘ALTS’ annunciation flashing for up to 10 seconds.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
The green ‘ALT’ annunciation flashes for up to 10 seconds upon reaching 50 feet from the Selected Altitude; the
autopilot transitions to Altitude Hold Mode and levels the aircraft. After leveling off reset Selected Altitude at
or below 9,000 ft.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
4) When the next TOD is reached, Vertical Path Tracking becomes active (may require acknowledgment to allow
descent path capture).
AFCS
5) As the aircraft nears the VNV Target Altitude, the flight director transitions to VNV Target Altitude Capture Mode,
indicated by the green ‘ALTV’ annunciation flashing for up to 10 seconds.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
The green ‘ALT’ annunciation flashes for up to 10 seconds upon reaching 50 feet from the VNV Target Altitude;
the autopilot transitions to Altitude Hold Mode and levels the aircraft at the vertical waypoint.
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-00629-04 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58
439
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
AUTOMATIC FLIGHT CONTROL SYSTEM
VP
TH
M
od
e
Planned
TOD
2
BOD
EIS
ALT Mode
1
FL
C
Pla
nn
M
od
e
Selected Altitude of 9,400 MSL
VNAV Target Altitude of 10,000 MSL
3
ed
De
sce
nt
ALT Mode
Pa
th
TOD
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
4
VP
VNAV Target Altitude of 9,000 MSL
TH
Mo
de
5
BOD
ALT Mode
Selected Altitude
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
3 nm
OPSHN
HABUK
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Figure 7-37 Non-path Descent
440
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58
190-00629-04 Rev. A
AUTOMATIC FLIGHT CONTROL SYSTEM
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
APPROACH
Flying an ILS approach:
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
1) Transition from GPS Navigation Mode to Heading Select Mode.
a) Select the Runway 35L ILS approach for KCOS and select ‘VECTORS’ for the transition. Load and activate the
approach into the flight plan.
b) Use the HDG Knob to set the Selected Heading after getting vectors from ATC.
c) Press the HDG Key. The autopilot turns the aircraft to the desired heading.
EIS
d) Use Heading Select Mode to comply with ATC vectors as requested.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
2) Arm LOC Approach and Glideslope modes.
a) Ensure the appropriate localizer frequency is tuned.
b) Press the APR Key when cleared for approach to arm Approach and Glideslope modes. ‘LOC’ and ‘GS’ appear
in white as armed mode annunciations.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
c) The navigation source automatically switches to LOC. After this switch occurs, the localizer signal can be captured
and the flight director determines when to begin the turn to intercept the final approach course. The flight
director now provides guidance to the missed approach point.
• Push the AP DISC/TRIM INT Switch at the
decision height and land the aircraft.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
3) There are two options available at this point, as the autopilot flies the ILS approach:
• Use the GA Switch to execute a missed approach.
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-00629-04 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58
441
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
AUTOMATIC FLIGHT CONTROL SYSTEM
KCOS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
LOC APR/
GS Mode
3
PETEY
2
HD
G
od
M
e
1
EIS
PYNON
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
GPS NAV Mode
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Figure 7-38 ILS Approach to KCOS
442
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58
190-00629-04 Rev. A
AUTOMATIC FLIGHT CONTROL SYSTEM
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Flying a RNAV GPS approach with vertical guidance (SBAS Only):
1) Arm flight director modes for a RNAV GPS approach with vertical guidance:
a) Make sure the navigation source is set to GPS (use CDI Softkey to change navigation source).
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
b) Select the Runway 35R LPV approach for KCOS. Load and activate the approach into the flight plan.
2) Press the APR Key once clearance for approach has been received. GPS Approach Mode is activated and
Glidepath Mode is armed.
EIS
3) Once the glidepath is captured, Glidepath Mode becomes active. The flight director now provides guidance to
the missed approach point.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
4) There are two options available at this point, as the autopilot flies the approach:
• Use the GA Switch to execute a missed approach.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
• Push the AP DISC/TRIM INT Switch at the
decision height and land the aircraft.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-00629-04 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58
443
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
AUTOMATIC FLIGHT CONTROL SYSTEM
KCOS
CEGIX
3
GPS APR/
GP Mode
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
4
EIS
2
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FALUR
HABUK
PYNON
1
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
GPS NAV Mode
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
Figure 7-39 LPV Approach to KCOS
444
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58
190-00629-04 Rev. A
AUTOMATIC FLIGHT CONTROL SYSTEM
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
GO AROUND/MISSED APPROACH
NOTE: As a result of calculations performed by the system while flying the holding pattern, the display may
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
re-size automatically and the aircraft may not precisely track the holding pattern as depicted on the PFD and
MFD.
Flying a missed approach:
EIS
1) Push the GA Switch at the Decision height and apply go-around power to execute a missed approach. The
flight director Command Bars establish a nose-up climb to follow. If flying an ILS or LOC approach the CDI also
switches to GPS as the navigation source.
Note that when the GA Switch is pushed, the missed approach is activated and the autopilot disconnects,
indicated by the ‘AP’ annunciation flashing yellow for 5 seconds and the autopilot disconnect aural alert.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Flashes 5 sec
2) Start the climb to the prescribed altitude in the published Missed Approach Procedure (in this case, 10,000 ft).
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
a) Press the AP Key to re-engage the autopilot.
b) Press the NAV Key to have the autopilot fly to the hold.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
3) Use the ALT Knob to set a Selected Altitude to hold.
To hold the current airspeed during the climb, press the FLC Key.
AFCS
As the aircraft nears the Selected Altitude, the flight director transitions to Selected Altitude Capture Mode,
indicated by the green ‘ALTS’ annunciation flashing for up to 10 seconds.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
The green ‘ALT’ annunciation flashes for up to 10 seconds upon reaching 50 feet from the Selected Altitude; the
autopilot transitions to Altitude Hold Mode and levels the aircraft.
APPENDICES
4) The autopilot flies the holding pattern after the missed approach is activated. Annunciations are displayed in
the Navigation Status Box, above the AFCS Status Box.
INDEX
190-00629-04 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58
445
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
AUTOMATIC FLIGHT CONTROL SYSTEM
4
EIS
MOGAL
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
GPS NAV Mode
3
KCOS
GA Mode
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
2
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
1
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
Figure 7-40 Go Around/Missed Approach
446
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58
190-00629-04 Rev. A
AUTOMATIC FLIGHT CONTROL SYSTEM
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
7.7 AFCS ANNUNCIATIONS AND ALERTS
AFCS STATUS ALERTS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The annunciations in Table 7-5 (listed in order of increasing priority) can appear on the PFD above the
Airspeed and Attitude indicators. Only one annunciation may occur at a time, and messages are prioritized by
criticality.
AFCS Status Annunciation
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Figure 7-41 AFCS Status Annunciation
Rudder Mistrim Right
Rudder Mistrim Left
Aileron Mistrim Left
Elevator Mistrim Down
Pitch Trim Failure
(or stuck MEPT Switch)
Yaw servo providing sustained force in the indicated direction
Roll servo providing sustained force in the indicated direction
Pitch servo providing sustained force in the indicated direction
If AP engaged, take control of the aircraft and disengage AP
If AP disengaged, move MEPT switches separately to unstick
YD control failure; AP also inoperative
Roll Failure
Roll axis control failure; AP inoperative
Pitch Failure
Pitch axis control failure; AP inoperative
AP and MEPT are unavailable; FD may still be available
APPENDICES
Preflight Test
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Yaw Damper Failure
System Failure
AFCS
Elevator Mistrim Up
Description
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Aileron Mistrim Right
Annunciation
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Alert Condition
INDEX
Performing preflight system test; aural alert sounds at completion
Do not press the AP DISC/TRIM INT Switch during servo power-up and preflight
system tests as this may cause the preflight system test to fail or never to start (if
servos fail their power-up tests). Power must be cycled to the servos to remedy the
situation.
Preflight system test failed; aural alert sounds at failure
Table 7-5 AFCS Status Alerts
190-00629-04 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58
447
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
OVERSPEED PROTECTION
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
AUTOMATIC FLIGHT CONTROL SYSTEM
While Pitch Hold, Vertical Speed, Flight Level Change, Vertical Path Tracking, or an altitude capture mode is
active, airspeed is monitored by the flight director. Pitch commands are not changed until overspeed protection
becomes active. Overspeed protection is provided in situations where the flight director cannot acquire and
maintain the mode reference for the selected vertical mode without exceeding the certified maximum autopilot
airspeed.
NOTE: Overspeed protection is not active in ALT, GS or GP Modes.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
When an autopilot overspeed condition occurs, the Airspeed Reference appears in a box above the Airspeed
Indicator, flashing a yellow ‘MAXSPD’ annunciation. Engine power should be reduced and/or the pitch reference
adjusted to slow the aircraft. The annunciation disappears when the overspeed condition is resolved.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Airspeed
Indicator
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Figure 7-42 Overspeed Annunciation
448
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58
190-00629-04 Rev. A
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
SECTION 8 ADDITIONAL FEATURES
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
NOTE: With the availability of SafeTaxi®, ChartView, or FliteCharts®, it may be necessary to carry another
source of charts on-board the aircraft.
Additional features of the system include the following:
• Synthetic Vision System (SVS)
• SafeTaxi® diagrams
EIS
• ChartView and FliteCharts® electronic charts
• AOPA’s Airport Directory
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
• SiriusXM Satellite Radio entertainment
• Scheduler
• Flight Data Logging
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
The optional Synthetic Vision System (SVS) provides a three-dimensional forward view of terrain features on
the PFD. SVS imagery shows the pilot’s view of relevant features in relation to the aircraft attitude, as well as the
flight path pertaining to the active flight plan.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
SafeTaxi diagrams provide detailed taxiway, runway, and ramp information at more than 700 airports in the
United States. By decreasing range on an airport that has a SafeTaxi diagram available, a close up view of the
airport layout can be seen.
The optional ChartView and FliteCharts provide on-board electronic terminal procedures charts. Electronic
charts offer the convenience of rapid access to essential information. Either ChartView or FliteCharts may be
configured in the system, but not both.
AFCS
AOPA’s Airport Directory offers detailed information for a selected airport, such as available services, hours of
operation, and lodging options.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
The optional SiriusXM Satellite Radio entertainment audio feature of the GDL 69A Data Link Receiver handles
more than 170 channels of music, news, and sports. SiriusXM Satellite Radio offers more entertainment choices
and longer range coverage than commercial broadcast stations.
The Scheduler feature can be used to enter and display short term or long term reminder messages such as
Switch fuel tanks, Change oil, or Altimeter-Transponder Check in the Messages Window on the PFD.
APPENDICES
The Flight Data Logging feature automatically stores critical flight and engine data on an SD data card.
Approximately 1,000 flight hours can be recorded for each 1GB of available space on the card.
INDEX
190-00629-04 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58
449
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
8.1 SYNTHETIC VISION SYSTEM (SVS) (OPTIONAL)
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
WARNING: Use appropriate primary systems for navigation, and for terrain, obstacle, and traffic avoidance.
SVS is intended as an aid to situational awareness only and may not provide either the accuracy or reliability
upon which to solely base decisions and/or plan maneuvers to avoid terrain, obstacles, or traffic.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
The SVS terrain display shows land contours (colors are consistent with those of the topographical map display),
large water features, towers, and other obstacles over 200’ AGL that are included in the obstacle database. Cultural
features on the ground such as roads, highways, railroad tracks, cities, and state boundaries are not displayed
even if those features are found on the MFD map. The terrain display also includes a north–south east–west grid
with lines oriented with true north and spaced at one arc-minute intervals to assist in orientation relative to the
terrain.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
The optional Synthetic Vision System (SVS) is a visual enhancement to the G1000 Integrated Flight Deck. SVS
depicts a forward-looking attitude display of the topography immediately in front of the aircraft. The field of
view is 30 degrees to the left and 35 degrees to the right. SVS information is shown on the Primary Flight Display
(PFD), or on the Multifunction Display (MFD) in Reversionary Mode. The depicted imagery is derived from the
aircraft attitude, heading, GPS three-dimensional position, and a nine arc-second database of terrain, obstacles,
and other relevant features. The terrain data resolution of nine arc-seconds, meaning that the terrain elevation
contours are stored in squares measuring nine arc-seconds on each side, is required for the operation of SVS. Loss
of any of the required data, including temporary loss of the GPS signal, will cause SVS to be disabled until the
required data is restored.
The Terrain Awareness and Warning System (TAWS) is integrated within SVS to provide visual and auditory
alerts to indicate the presence of terrain and obstacle threats relevant to the projected flight path. Terrain alerts
are displayed in red and yellow shading on the PFD.
AFCS
The terrain display is intended for situational awareness only. It may not provide the accuracy or fidelity on
which to base decisions and plan maneuvers to avoid terrain or obstacles. Navigation must not be predicated
solely upon the use of the Terrain–SVS or TAWS terrain or obstacle data displayed by the SVS.
• Pathways
• Airport Signs
• Flight Path Marker
• Runway Display
• Horizon Heading Marks
• Terrain Alerting
• Traffic Display
• Obstacle Alerting
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
The following SVS enhancements appear on the PFD:
450
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58
190-00629-04 Rev. A
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Figure 8-1 Synthetic Vision Imagery
SVS OPERATION
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
SVS is activated from the PFD using the softkeys located along the bottom edge of the display. Pressing the
softkeys turns the related function on or off. When SVS is enabled, the pitch scale increments are reduced to
10 degrees up and 7.5 degrees down.
AFCS
SVS functions are displayed on three levels of softkeys. The PFD Softkey leads into the PFD function Softkeys,
including synthetic vision. Pressing the SYN VIS Softkey displays the SVS feature softkeys. The softkeys are
labeled PATHWAY, SYN TERR, HRZN HDG, and APTSIGNS. The BACK Softkey returns to the previous
level of softkeys. Synthetic Terrain must be active before any other SVS feature may be activated.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
HRZN HDG, APTSIGNS, and PATHWAY Softkeys are only available when the SYN TERR Softkey is
activated (gray with black characters). After activating the SYN TERR Softkey, the HRZN HDG, APTSIGNS,
and PATHWAY softkeys may be activated in any combination to display desired features. When system power
is cycled, the last selected state (on or off) of the SYN TERR, HRZN HDG, APTSIGNS, and PATHWAY
softkeys is remembered by the system.
APPENDICES
• PATHWAY Softkey enables display of rectangular boxes that represent course guidance.
• SYN TERR Softkey enables synthetic terrain depiction.
• HRZN HDG Softkey enables horizon heading marks and digits.
• APTSIGNS Softkey enables airport signposts.
INDEX
190-00629-04 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58
451
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
PFD
SYN VIS
BACK
Pressing the BACK Softkey
returns to the top-level softkeys.
BACK
EIS
PATHWAY SYN TERR HRZN HDG APTSIGNS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Pressing the BACK Softkey returns to the previous level of softkeys.
Figure 8-2 SVS Softkeys
Activating and deactivating SVS:
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
1) Press the PFD Softkey.
2) Press the SYN VIS Softkey.
3) Press the SYN TERR Softkey. The SVS display will cycle on or off with the SYN TERR Softkey.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Activating and deactivating Pathways:
1) Press the PFD Softkey.
2) Press the SYN VIS Softkey.
3) Press the PATHWAY Softkey. The Pathway feature will cycle on or off with the PATHWAY Softkey.
AFCS
Activating and deactivating Horizon Headings:
1) Press the PFD Softkey.
2) Press the SYN VIS Softkey.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
3) Press the HRZN HDG Softkey. The horizon heading display will cycle on or off with the HRZN HDG Softkey.
Activating and deactivating Airport Signs:
1) Press the PFD Softkey.
APPENDICES
2) Press the SYN VIS Softkey.
INDEX
3) Press the APTSIGNS Softkey. Display of airport signs will cycle on or off with the APTSIGNS Softkey.
452
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58
190-00629-04 Rev. A
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
SVS FEATURES
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Selected
Altitude
Airport
Runway
Pathways
Color
Matches CDI
Indicating
NAV Source
Flight
Path
Marker
Airplane
Symbol
EIS
Zero
Pitch Line
(ZPL) with
Compass
Heading
Marks
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Synthetic
Terrain
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
SVS
Softkeys
Figure 8-3 SVS on the Primary Flight Display
NOTE: Pathways and terrain features are not a substitute for standard course and altitude deviation
information provided by the altimeter, CDI, and VDI.
AFCS
PATHWAYS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Pathways provide a three-dimensional perspective view of the selected route of flight shown as colored
rectangular boxes representing the horizontal and vertical flight path of the active flight plan. The box
size represents 700 feet wide by 200 feet tall during enroute, oceanic, and terminal flight phases. During
an approach, the box width is 700 feet or one half full scale deviation on the HSI, whichever is less. The
height is 200 feet or one half full scale deviation on the VDI, whichever is less. The altitude at which the
pathway boxes are displayed is determined by the higher of either the selected altitude or the VNAV altitude
programmed for the active leg in the flight plan.
APPENDICES
190-00629-04 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58
INDEX
The color of the rectangular boxes may be magenta, green, or white depending on the route of flight and
navigation source selected. The active GPS or GPS overlay flight plan leg is represented by magenta boxes
that correspond to the Magenta CDI. A localizer course is represented by green boxes that correspond to a
green CDI. An inactive leg of an active flight plan is represented by white boxes corresponding to a white line
drawn on the Inset map or MFD map indicating an inactive leg.
453
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Selected
Altitude
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
Programmed
Altitudes
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Figure 8-4 Programmed and Selected Altitude
AFCS
Pathways provide supplemental glidepath information on an active ILS, LPV, LNAV/VNAV, and some LNAV
approaches. Pathways are intended as an aid to situational awareness and should not be used independent
of the CDI, VDI, glide path indicator, and glide slope indicator. They are removed from the display when
the selected navigation information is not available. Pathways are not displayed beyond the active leg when
leg sequencing is suspended and are not displayed on any portion of the flight plan leg that would lead to
intercepting a leg in the wrong direction.
Departure and Enroute
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Prior to intercepting an active flight plan leg, pathways are displayed as a series of boxes with pointers at
each corner that point in the direction of the active waypoint. Pathways are not displayed for the first leg
of the flight plan if that segment is a Heading-to-Altitude leg. The first segment displaying pathways is the
first active GPS leg or active leg with a GPS overlay. If this leg of the flight plan route is outside the SVS
field of view, pathways will not be visible until the aircraft has turned toward this leg. While approaching
the center of the active leg and prescribed altitude, the number of pathway boxes decreases to a minimum
of four.
INDEX
Pathways are displayed along the flight plan route at the highest of either the selected altitude or the
programmed altitude for the leg. Climb profiles cannot be displayed due to the variables associated with
aircraft performance. Flight plan legs requiring a climb are indicated by pathways displayed at a level above
the aircraft at the altitude selected or programmed.
454
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58
190-00629-04 Rev. A
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Descent and Approach
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Pathways are shown descending only for a programmed descent. When the flight plan includes
programmed descent segments, pathways are displayed along the descent path provided that the selected
altitude is lower than the programmed altitude.
When an approach providing vertical guidance is activated, Pathways are shown level at the selected
altitude up to the point along the final approach course where the altitude intercepts the extended vertical
descent path, glidepath, or glideslope. From the vertical path descent, glidepath, or glideslope intercept
point, the pathways are shown inbound to the Missed Approach Point (MAP) along the published lateral
and vertical descent path, or at the selected altitude, whichever is lower.
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
During an ILS approach, the initial approach segment is displayed in magenta at the segment altitudes
if GPS is selected as the navigation source on the CDI. When switching to localizer inbound with LOC
selected as the navigation source on the CDI, pathways are displayed in green along the localizer and glide
slope.
VOR, LOC BC, and ADF approach segments that are approved to be flown using GPS are displayed in
magenta boxes. Segments that are flown using other than GPS or ILS, such as heading legs or VOR final
approach courses are not displayed.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Selected Altitude
set for Enroute
Selected Altitude
set for Departure
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Climbs NOT
displayed
by pathway
Non-programmed descents NOT displayed by pathway
TOD
AFCS
Selected Altitude
for Step Down
Programmed descent
displayed by pathway
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Selected Altitude or Programmed Altitude
(whichever is higher)
APPENDICES
Figure 8-5 SVS Pathways, Enroute and Descent
INDEX
190-00629-04 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58
455
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
Missed Approach
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Upon activating the missed approach, pathways lead to the Missed Approach Holding Point (MAHP) and
are displayed as a level path at the published altitude for the MAHP, or the selected altitude, whichever is
the highest. If the initial missed approach leg is a Course-to-Altitude (CA) leg, the pathways boxes will
be displayed level at the altitude published for the MAHP. If the initial missed approach leg is defined by
a course using other than GPS, pathways are not displayed for that segment. In this case, the pathways
displayed for the next leg may be outside the field of view and will be visible when the aircraft has turned
in the direction of that leg.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
Pathways are displayed along each segment including the path required to track course reversals that are
part of a procedure, such as holding patterns. Pathways boxes will not indicate a turn to a MAHP unless a
defined geographical waypoint exists between the MAP and MAHP.
FAF
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Descent displayed
by pathway
Selected Altitude
or Programmed Altitude
(whichever is higher)
MAP Climbs NOT displayed
by pathway
Turn Segment
NOT displayed
by pathway
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
MAHP
INDEX
Figure 8-6 SVS Pathways, Approach, Missed Approach, and Holding
456
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58
190-00629-04 Rev. A
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT PATH MARKER
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The Flight Path Marker (FPM), also known as a Velocity Vector, is displayed on the PFD at groundspeeds
above 30 knots. The FPM depicts the approximate projected path of the aircraft accounting for wind speed
and direction relative to the three-dimensional terrain display.
The FPM is always available when the Synthetic Terrain feature is in operation. The FPM represents the
direction of the flight path as it relates to the terrain and obstacles on the display, while the airplane symbol
represents the aircraft heading.
EIS
The FPM works in conjunction with the Pathways feature to assist the pilot in maintaining desired altitudes
and direction when navigating a flight plan. When on course and altitude the FPM is aligned inside the
pathway boxes as shown.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
The FPM may also be used to identify a possible conflict with the aircraft flight path and distant terrain or
obstacles. Displayed terrain or obstacles in the aircraft’s flight path extending above the FPM could indicate
a potential conflict, even before an alert is issued by TAWS. However, decisions regarding terrain and/or
obstacle avoidance should not be made using only the FPM.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Flight Path
Marker
(FPM)
AFCS
Wind
Vector
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
Figure 8-7 Flight Path Marker and Pathways
ZERO PITCH LINE
190-00629-04 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58
INDEX
The Zero Pitch Line is drawn completely across the display and represents the aircraft attitude with respect
to the horizon. It may not align with the terrain horizon, particularly when the terrain is mountainous or
when the aircraft is flown at high altitudes.
457
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
HORIZON HEADING
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The Horizon Heading is synchronized with the HSI and shows approximately 60 degrees of compass
heading in 30‑degree increments on the Zero Pitch Line. Horizon Heading tick marks and digits appearing
on the zero pitch line are not visible behind either the airspeed or altitude display. Horizon Heading is used
for general heading awareness, and is activated and deactivated by pressing the HRZN HDG Softkey.
TRAFFIC
WARNING: Intruder aircraft at or below 500 ft. AGL may not appear on the SVS display or may appear as a
EIS
partial symbol.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Traffic symbols are displayed in their approximate locations as determined by the related traffic systems.
Traffic symbols are displayed in three dimensions, appearing larger as they are getting closer, and smaller
when they are further away. Traffic within 250 feet laterally of the aircraft will not be displayed on the SVS
display. Traffic symbols and coloring are consistent with that used for traffic displayed in the Inset map or
MFD traffic page. If the traffic altitude is unknown, the traffic will not be displayed on the SVS display. For
more details refer to the traffic system discussion in the Hazard Avoidance section.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AIRPORT SIGNS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Airport Signs provide a visual representation of airport location and identification on the synthetic terrain
display. When activated, the signs appear on the display when the aircraft is approximately 15 nm from
an airport and disappear at approximately 4.5 nm. Airport signs are shown without the identifier until
the aircraft is approximately eight nautical miles from the airport. Airport signs are not shown behind the
airspeed or altitude display. Airport signs are activated and deactivated by pressing the APTSIGNS Softkey.
AFCS
Traffic
Airport
Sign
without
Identifier
(Between
8 nm and
15 nm)
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Airport
Sign with
Identifier
(Between
4.5 nm and
8 nm)
Figure 8-8 Airport Signs
458
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58
190-00629-04 Rev. A
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
RUNWAYS
WARNING: Do not use SVS runway depiction as the sole means for determining the proximity of the aircraft
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
to the runway or for maintaining the proper approach path angle during landing.
NOTE: Not all airports have runways with endpoint data in the database, therefore, these runways are not
displayed.
EIS
Runway data provides improved awareness of runway location with respect to the surrounding terrain. All
runway thresholds are depicted at their respective elevations as defined in the database. In some situations,
where threshold elevations differ significantly, crossing runways may appear to be layered. As runways are
displayed, those within 45 degrees of the aircraft heading are displayed in white. Other runways will be gray
in color. When an approach for a specific runway is active, that runway will appear brighter and be outlined
with a white box, regardless of the runway orientation as related to aircraft heading. As the aircraft gets closer
to the runway, more detail such as runway numbers and centerlines will be displayed.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Runway
Selected for
Approach
Other
Runway
on Airport
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
Figure 8-9 Airport Runways
INDEX
190-00629-04 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58
459
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
TAWS ALERTING
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Terrain alerting on the synthetic terrain display is triggered by Forward-looking Terrain Avoidance (FLTA)
alerts, and corresponds to the red and yellow X symbols on the Inset Map and MFD map displays. For more
detailed information regarding TAWS, refer to the Hazard Avoidance Section.
EIS
In some instances, a terrain or obstacle alert may be issued with no conflict shading displayed on the
synthetic terrain. In these cases, the conflict is outside the SVS field of view to the left or right of the
aircraft.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
TERRAIN
Annunciation
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Terrain
Caution
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Potential
Impact
Point
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
Figure 8-10 Terrain Alert
460
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58
190-00629-04 Rev. A
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Obstacles are represented on the synthetic terrain display by standard two-dimensional tower symbols found
on the Inset map and MFD maps and charts. Obstacle symbols appear in the perspective view with relative
height above terrain and distance from the aircraft. Unlike the Inset map and MFD moving map display,
obstacles on the synthetic terrain display do not change colors to warn of potential conflict with the aircraft’s
flight path until the obstacle is associated with an actual FLTA alert. Obstacles greater than 1000 feet below the
aircraft altitude are not shown. Obstacles are shown behind the airspeed and altitude displays.
EIS
Annunciation
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Obstacle
Warning
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Potential
Impact
Point
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Figure 8-11 Obstacle
AFCS
FIELD OF VIEW
The PFD field of view can be represented on the MFD Navigation Map Page. Two dashed lines forming a
V‑shape in front of the aircraft symbol on the map, represent the forward viewing area shown on the PFD.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Configuring field of view:
1) While viewing the Navigation Map Page, press the MENU Key to display the PAGE MENU.
2) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight Map Setup and press the ENT Key.
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-00629-04 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58
461
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Field of
View
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Navigation Map Page OPTIONS Menu
Map Setup Menu, Map Group, Field of View Option
Figure 8-12 Option Menus
3) Turn the FMS Knob to select the Map Group and press the ENT Key.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
4) Turn the large FMS Knob to scroll through the Map Group options to FIELD OF VIEW.
5) Turn the small FMS Knob to select On or Off.
6) Press the FMS Knob to return to the Navigation Map Page.
AFCS
The following figure compares the PFD forward looking depiction with the MFD plan view and FIELD OF
VIEW turned on.
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Lines
Depict
PFD Field
of View
SVS View on the PFD
Field of View on the MFD
INDEX
Figure 8-13 PFD and MFD Field of View Comparison
462
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58
190-00629-04 Rev. A
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
8.2 SAFETAXI
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
SafeTaxi is an enhanced feature that gives greater map detail when viewing airports at close range. The
maximum map ranges for enhanced detail are pilot configurable. When viewing at ranges close enough to
show the airport detail, the map reveals taxiways with identifying letters/numbers, airport Hot Spots, and airport
landmarks including ramps, buildings, control towers, and other prominent features. Resolution is greater at
lower map ranges. When the MFD display is within the SafeTaxi ranges, the airplane symbol on the airport
provides enhanced position awareness.
EIS
Designated Hot Spots are recognized at airports with many intersecting taxiways and runways, and/or complex
ramp areas. Airport Hot Spots are outlined to caution pilots of areas on an airport surface where positional
awareness confusion or runway incursions happen most often. Hot Spots are defined with a magenta circle or
outline around the region of possible confusion.
• VOR Information Page
• Inset Map (PFD)
• User Waypoint Information Page
• Weather Datalink Page
• Trip Planning Page
• Airport Information Page
• Nearest Pages
• Intersection Information Page
• Active and Stored Flight Plan Pages
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
• Navigation Map Page
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Any map page that displays the navigation view can also show the SafeTaxi airport layout within the maximum
configured range. The following is a list of pages where the SafeTaxi feature can be seen:
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
• NDB Information Page
During ground operations the aircraft’s position is displayed in reference to taxiways, runways, and airport
features. In the example shown, the aircraft is on taxiway Bravo approaching the High Alert Intersection boundary
on KSFO airport. Airport Hot Spots are outlined in magenta. When panning over the airport, features such as
runway holding lines and taxiways are shown at the cursor.
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-00629-04 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58
463
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Aircraft
Position
EIS
Taxiway
Identification
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Airport Hot
Spot Outline
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Airport
Features
DCLTR Softkey
Removes Taxiway
Markings
Figure 8-14 SafeTaxi Depiction on the Navigation Map Page
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
The DCLTR Softkey (declutter) label advances to DCLTR-1, DCLTR -2, and DCLTR-3 each time the softkey is
pressed for easy recognition of decluttering level. Pressing the DCLTR Softkey removes the taxiway markings and
airport feature labels. Pressing the DCLTR-1 Softkey removes VOR station ID, the VOR symbol, and intersection
names if within the airport plan view. Pressing the DCLTR-2 Softkey removes the airport runway layout, unless
the airport in view is part of an active route structure. Pressing the DCLTR-3 Softkey cycles back to the original
map detail. Refer to Map Declutter Levels in the Flight Management Section.
Configuring SafeTaxi range:
1) While viewing the Navigation Map Page, press the MENU Key to display the PAGE MENU.
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
2) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the Map Setup Menu Option and press the ENT Key.
Figure 8-15 Navigation Map PAGE MENU, Map Setup Option
464
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58
190-00629-04 Rev. A
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
3) Turn the FMS Knob to select the Aviation Group and press the ENT Key.
4) Turn the large FMS Knob to scroll through the Aviation Group options to SAFETAXI.
5) Turn the small FMS Knob to display the range of distances.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
6) Turn either FMS Knob to select the desired distance for maximum SafeTaxi display range.
7) Press the ENT Key to complete the selection.
8) Press the FMS Knob to return to the Navigation Map Page.
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
SAFETAXI
Option
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
SafeTaxi
Range
Options
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
Figure 8-16 MAP SETUP Menu, Aviation Group, SAFETAXI Range Options
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-00629-04 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58
465
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
SafeTaxi database is revised every 56 days. SafeTaxi is always available for use after the expiration date.
When turning on the system, the Power-up Page indicates whether the databases are current, out of date, or
not available.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
SafeTaxi Database
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Figure 8-17 Power-up Page, SafeTaxi Database
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Power-up Page Display
Definition
Normal operation. SafeTaxi database is valid and within current cycle.
SafeTaxi database has expired.
Database card contains no SafeTaxi data.
AFCS
Table 8-1 SafeTaxi Annunciation Definitions
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
The SafeTaxi Region, Version, Cycle, Effective date and Expires date of the database cycle can also be found
on the AUX - System Status page.
INDEX
APPENDICES
Press the MFD1 DB Softkey to place the cursor in the DATABASE window. Scroll through the listed information
by turning the FMS Knob or pressing the ENT Key until the SafeTaxi database information is shown.
466
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58
190-00629-04 Rev. A
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
The SafeTaxi database cycle number shown in the figure, 11S1, is deciphered as follows:
11 – Indicates the year 2011
S – Indicates the data is for SafeTaxi
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
1 – Indicates the first issue of the SafeTaxi database for the year
The SafeTaxi EFFECTIVE date 13–JAN–11 is the beginning date for the current database cycle. SafeTaxi
EXPIRES date 10–MAR–11 is the revision date for the next database cycle.
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
SafeTaxi Data
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Figure 8-18 AUX – System Status Page, SafeTaxi Current Information
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
SafeTaxi information appears in blue and yellow text. The EFFECTIVE date appears in blue when data is
current and in yellow when the current date is before the effective date. The EXPIRES date appears in blue
when data is current and in yellow when expired. NOT AVAILABLE appears in blue in the REGION field
if SafeTaxi data is not available on the database card. An expired SafeTaxi database is not disabled and will
continue to function indefinitely.
APPENDICES
Press the MFD1 DB Softkey a second time. The softkey label will change to PFD1 DB. The DATABASE
window will now be displaying database information for PFD1. As before, scroll through the listed information
by turning the FMS Knob or pressing the ENT Key until the SafeTaxi database information is shown.
Refer to Updating Garmin Databases in Appendix B for instructions on revising the SafeTaxi database.
INDEX
190-00629-04 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58
467
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Possible SafeTaxi database conditions that may appear on the AUX - System Status Page are displayed below.
The EFFECTIVE date is the beginning date for this database cycle. If the present date is before the effective date,
the EFFECTIVE date appears in yellow and the EXPIRES date appears in blue. The EXPIRES date is the revision
date for the next database cycle. NOT AVAILABLE indicates that SafeTaxi is not available on the database card
or no database card is inserted.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Current Date is before Effective Date
SafeTaxi Database has Expired
SafeTaxi Database Not Installed
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Figure 8-19 AUX – System Status Page, SafeTaxi Database Status
468
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58
190-00629-04 Rev. A
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
8.3 CHARTVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
ChartView resembles the paper version of Jeppesen terminal procedures charts. The charts are displayed in full
color with high-resolution. The MFD depiction shows the aircraft position on the moving map in the planview
of approach charts and on airport diagrams. Airport Hot Spots are outlined in magenta.
The geo-referenced aircraft position is indicated by an aircraft symbol displayed on the chart when the current
position is within the boundaries of the chart. Inset boxes are not considered within the chart boundaries.
Therefore, when the aircraft symbol reaches a chart boundary line, or inset box, the aircraft symbol is removed
from the display.
EIS
Figure 8-20 shows examples of off-scale areas, indicated by the grey shading. Note, the grey shading is for
illustrative purposes only and will not appear on the published chart or MFD display. These off-scale areas
appear on the chart to convey supplemental information. However, the depicted geographical position of this
information, as it relates to the chart planview, is not the actual geographic position. Therefore, when the aircraft
symbol appears within one of these areas, the aircraft position indicated is relative to the chart planview, not to
the off-scale area.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Inset Box
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Off-Scale
Area
Off-Scale
Areas
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Figure 8-20 Sample Chart Indicating Off-Scale Areas
APPENDICES
NOTE: Do not maneuver the aircraft based solely upon the geo-referenced aircraft symbol.
The ChartView database subscription is available from Jeppesen, Inc. Available data includes:
• Arrivals (STAR)
• Airport Diagrams
• Departure Procedures (DP)
• NOTAMs
INDEX
• Approaches
190-00629-04 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58
469
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
CHARTVIEW SOFTKEYS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
ChartView functions are displayed on three levels of softkeys. While on the Navigation Map Page, Nearest
Airports Page, or Flight Plan Page, pressing the SHW CHRT Softkey displays the available terminal chart and
advances to the chart selection level of softkeys: CHRT OPT, CHRT, INFO-1, INFO-2, DP, STAR, APR, WX,
NOTAM, and GO BACK. The chart selection softkeys shown below appear on the Airport Information Page.
Pressing the GO BACK Softkey reverts to the top level softkeys and previous page.
Pressing the CHRT OPT Softkey advances to the next level of softkeys: ALL, HEADER, PLAN, PROFILE,
MINIMUMS, FIT WDTH, FULL SCN, and BACK.
EIS
While viewing the CHRT OPT Softkeys, after 45 seconds of softkey inactivity, the system reverts to the chart
selection softkeys.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
SHW CHRT
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
CHRT OPT
CHRT
INFO-1
DP
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
HEADER
PLAN
APR
WX
NOTAM
GO BACK
Selecting the GO BACK Softkey returns
to the top-level softkeys and previous page.
INFO-2
ALL
STAR
PROFILE
MINIMUMS FIT WDTH FULL SCN
BACK
Selecting the BACK Softkey returns
to the Chart Selection Softkeys.
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
Figure 8-21 ChartView SHW CHRT, Chart Selection, and Chart Option Softkeys
470
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58
190-00629-04 Rev. A
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
TERMINAL PROCEDURES CHARTS
Selecting Terminal Procedures Charts:
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
While viewing the Navigation Map Page, Nearest Airport Page, or Flight Plan Page, press the SHW CHRT
Softkey.
Or:
1) Press the MENU Key to display the PAGE MENU.
2) Turn the large FMS Knob to scroll through the OPTIONS Menu to Show Chart.
EIS
3) Press the ENT Key to display the chart.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Navigation Map Page OPTIONS Menu
Waypoint Airport Information Page OPTIONS Menu
Figure 8-22 Option Menus
AFCS
On the Waypoint Airport Information Page OPTIONS Menu, select the desired chart and press the ENT Key
to display the chart.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
When no terminal procedure chart is available for the nearest airport or the selected airport, the banner
CHART NOT AVAILABLE appears on the screen. The CHART NOT AVAILABLE banner does not refer to
the Jeppesen subscription, but rather the availability of a particular airport chart selection or procedure for a
selected airport.
APPENDICES
Figure 8-23 Chart Not Available Banner
If there is a problem in rendering the data (such as a data error or a failure of an individual chart), the banner
UNABLE TO DISPLAY CHART is then displayed.
INDEX
Figure 8-24 Unable To Display Chart Banner
190-00629-04 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58
471
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
When a chart is not available by pressing the SHW CHRT Softkey or selecting a Page Menu Option, charts
may be obtained for other airports from the WPT Pages or Flight Plan Pages.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
If a chart is available for the destination airport, or the airport selected in the active flight plan, the chart
appears on the screen. When no flight plan is active, or when not flying to a direct-to destination, pressing the
SHW CHRT Softkey displays the chart for the nearest airport, if available.
The chart shown is one associated with the WPT – Airport Information page. Usually this is the airport runway
diagram. Where no runway diagram exists, but Take Off Minimums or Alternate Minimums are available, that
page appears. If Airport Information pages are unavailable, the Approach Chart for the airport is shown.
EIS
Selecting a chart:
1) While viewing the Navigation Map Page, Flight Plan Page, or Nearest Airports Page, press the SHW CHRT
Softkey. The airport diagram or approach chart is displayed on the Airport Information Page.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
2) Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor.
3) Turn the large FMS Knob to select either the Airport Identifier Box or the Approach Box. (Press the APR Softkey
if the Approach Box is not currently shown).
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
4) Turn the small and large FMS Knob to enter the desired airport identifier.
5) Press the ENT Key to complete the airport selection.
6) Turn the large FMS Knob to select the Approach Box.
7) Turn the small FMS Knob to show the approach chart selection choices.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
8) Turn either FMS Knob to scroll through the available charts.
9) Press the ENT Key to complete the chart selection.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
Chart Scale
Select Desired
Approach Chart
From Menu
INDEX
APPENDICES
Scroll Through
Chart With
the Joystick
Figure 8-25 Approach Information Page, Chart Selection
472
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58
190-00629-04 Rev. A
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
While the APPROACH Box is selected using the FMS Knob, the G1000 softkeys are blank. Once the desired
chart is selected, the chart scale can be changed and the chart page can be scrolled using the Joystick. Pressing
the Joystick centers the chart on the screen.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The aircraft symbol is shown on the chart only if the chart is to scale and the aircraft position is within the
boundaries of the chart. The aircraft symbol is not displayed when the Aircraft Not Shown Icon appears. If the
Chart Scale Box displays a banner NOT TO SCALE, the aircraft symbol is not shown. The Aircraft Not Shown
Icon may appear at certain times, even if the chart is displayed to scale.
EIS
Pressing the CHRT Softkey switches between the ChartView diagram and the associated map in the WPT
page group. In the example shown, the CHRT Softkey switches between the Colorado Springs, CO (KCOS)
Airport Diagram and the navigation map on the WPT – Airport Information page.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Press CHRT Softkey
to Switch Between
ChartView and WPT Airport Information Page
APPENDICES
INDEX
Figure 8-26 CHRT Softkey, Airport Information Page
190-00629-04 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58
473
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
Pressing the INFO-1 or INFO-2 Softkey returns to the airport diagram when the view is on a different chart.
If the displayed chart is the airport diagram, the INFO-1 or INFO-2 Softkey has no effect.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The aircraft position is shown in magenta on the ChartView diagrams when the location of the aircraft is
within the chart boundaries. In the example shown, the aircraft is taxiing on Taxiway Alpha on the Charlotte,
NC (KCLT) airport.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
Another source for additional airport information is from the INFO Box above the chart for certain airports.
This information source is not related to the INFO-1 or INFO-2 Softkey. When the INFO Box is selected using
the FMS Knob, the G1000 softkeys are blank. The Charlotte, NC airport has five additional charts offering
information; the Airport Diagram, Take-off Minimums, Class B Airspace, Airline Parking Gate Coordinates, and
Airline Parking Gate Location. (The numbers in parentheses after the chart name are Jeppesen designators.)
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Aircraft
Current
Position
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Figure 8-27 Airport Information Page, INFO View, Full Screen Width
474
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58
190-00629-04 Rev. A
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
In the example shown below, the Class B Chart is selected. Pressing the ENT Key displays the Charlotte Class
B Airspace Chart.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Figure 8-28 Airport Information Page, Class B Chart Selected from INFO View
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Pressing the DP Softkey displays the Departure Procedure Chart if available.
Chart Not
To Scale
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
Aircraft Not
Shown Icon
INDEX
Figure 8-29 Departure Information Page
190-00629-04 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58
475
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
Pressing the STAR Softkey displays the Standard Terminal Arrival Chart if available.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Chart Not
To Scale
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
Change Range
and Scroll
Through the
Chart With the
Joystick
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Aircraft Not
Shown Icon
Figure 8-30 Arrival Information Page
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Pressing the APR Softkey displays the approach chart for the airport if available.
Figure 8-31 Approach Information Page
476
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58
190-00629-04 Rev. A
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Pressing the WX Softkey shows the airport weather frequency information, and includes weather data such as
METAR and TAF from the XM Data Link Receiver, when available. Weather information is available only when
an XM Data Link Receiver is installed and the XM WX Satellite Weather subscription is current.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
WX Info
When
Available
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Figure 8-32 Weather Information Page
NOTE: A subdued softkey label indicates the function is disabled.
AFCS
Recent NOTAMS applicable to the current ChartView cycle are included in the ChartView database. Pressing
the NOTAM Softkey shows the local NOTAM information for selected airports, when available. When NOTAMS
are not available, the NOTAM Softkey label appears subdued and is disabled. The NOTAM Softkey may appear
on the Airport Information Page and all of the chart page selections.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-00629-04 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58
477
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
NOTAM
Softkey
Appears for
Selected
Airports
Figure 8-33 NOTAM Softkey Highlighted
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Local
NOTAM on
This Airport
NOTAM
Softkey
Selected
Figure 8-34 Airport Information Page, Local NOTAMs
INDEX
Pressing the NOTAM Softkey again removes the NOTAMS information.
Pressing the GO BACK Softkey reverts to the previous page (Navigation Map Page, Nearest Pages, or Flight
Plan Page).
478
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58
190-00629-04 Rev. A
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
CHART OPTIONS
Pressing the CHRT OPT Softkey displays the next level of softkeys, the chart options level.
Pressing the ALL Softkey shows the complete approach chart on the screen.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Complete
Chart
Shown
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Figure 8-35 Approach Information Page, ALL View
Pressing the HEADER Softkey shows the header view (approach chart briefing strip) on the screen.
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Approach
Chart
Briefing Strip
APPENDICES
INDEX
Figure 8-36 Approach Information Page, Header View
190-00629-04 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58
479
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Pressing the PLAN Softkey shows the approach chart two dimensional plan view.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
Approach
Chart Plan
View
Figure 8-37 Approach Information Page, Plan View
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Pressing the PROFILE Softkey displays the approach chart descent profile strip.
APPENDICES
Approach
Chart Descent
Profile Strip
INDEX
Figure 8-38 Approach Information Page, Profile View, Full Screen Width
480
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58
190-00629-04 Rev. A
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Pressing the MINIMUMS Softkey displays the minimum descent altitude/visibility strip at the bottom of the
approach chart.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Minimum
Descent
Altitude/
Visibility Strip
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Figure 8-39 Approach Information Page, Minimums View, Full Screen Width
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-00629-04 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58
481
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
If the chart scale has been adjusted to view a small area of the chart, pressing the FIT WIDTH Softkey
changes the chart size to fit the available screen width.
Press FIT WDTH
Softkey to Show
Full Chart Width
INDEX
APPENDICES
Figure 8-40 Airport Information Page, FIT WDTH Softkey Selected
482
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58
190-00629-04 Rev. A
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Pressing the FULL SCN Softkey alternates between removing and replacing the data window to the right.
Selecting Additional Information:
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
1) While viewing the Airport Taxi Diagram, press the FULL SCN Softkey to display the information windows
(AIRPORT, INFO).
2) Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor.
3) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the AIRPORT, INFO, RUNWAYS, or FREQUENCIES Box (INFO Box shown).
4) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the INFO Box choices. If multiple choices are available, scroll to the desired
choice with the large FMS Knob and press the ENT Key to complete the selection.
EIS
5) Press the FMS Knob again to deactivate the cursor.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Available
Information
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Press FULL SCN
Softkey to Switch
Between Full
Screen and Chart
With Info Window
APPENDICES
Figure 8-41 Airport Information Page, Full Screen and Info Window
INDEX
Pressing the BACK Softkey, or waiting for 45 seconds reverts to the chart selection softkeys.
190-00629-04 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58
483
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
The full screen view can also be selected by using the page menu option.
Selecting full screen On or Off:
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
1) While viewing a terminal chart press the MENU Key to display the Page Menu OPTIONS.
2) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the Chart Setup Menu Option and press the ENT Key.
3) Turn the large FMS Knob to move between the FULL SCREEN and COLOR SCHEME Options.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
4) Turn the small FMS Knob to choose between the On and Off Full Screen Options.
Chart Setup Option
Full Screen On/Off Selection
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Figure 8-42 Page Menus
484
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58
190-00629-04 Rev. A
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
DAY/NIGHT VIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
ChartView can be displayed on a white or black background for day or night viewing. The Day View offers
a better presentation in a bright environment. The Night View gives a better presentation for viewing in a dark
environment. When the CHART SETUP Box is selected the G1000 softkeys are blank.
Selecting Day, Night, or Automatic View:
1) While viewing a terminal chart press the MENU Key to display the Page Menu OPTIONS.
2) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the Chart Setup Menu Option and press the ENT Key.
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Figure 8-43 Waypoint Information Page, OPTIONS Menu
3) Turn the large FMS Knob to move to the COLOR SCHEME Option.
4) Turn the small FMS Knob to choose between Day, Auto, and Night Options.
AFCS
5) If Auto Mode is selected, turn the large FMS Knob to select the percentage field. Use the small FMS Knob to
change the percentage value. The percentage value is the day/night crossover point based on the percentage of
backlighting intensity. For example, if the value is set to 15%, the day/night display changes when the display
backlight reaches 15% of full brightness.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
The display must be changed in order for the new setting to become active. This may be accomplished by
selecting another page or changing the display range.
6) Press the FMS Knob when finished to remove the Chart Setup Menu.
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-00629-04 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58
485
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Figure 8-44 Arrival Information Page, Day View
INDEX
Figure 8-45 Arrival Information Page, Night View
486
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58
190-00629-04 Rev. A
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
CHARTVIEW CYCLE NUMBER AND EXPIRATION DATE
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
ChartView database is revised every 14 days. Charts are still viewable during a period that extends from the
cycle expiration date to the disables date. ChartView is disabled 70 days after the expiration date and is no
longer available for viewing. When turning on the system, the Power-up Page displays the current status of the
ChartView database. See the table below for the various ChartView Power-up Page displays and the definition
of each.
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
ChartView Database
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Figure 8-46 Power-up Page, ChartView Database
Definition
Blank Line. system is not configured for ChartView. Contact a Garminauthorized service center for configuration.
System is configured for ChartView but no chart database is installed.
Contact Jeppesen for a ChartView database.
Normal operation. ChartView database is valid and within current
cycle.
ChartView database is within 1 week after expiration date. A new cycle
is available for update.
ChartView database is beyond 1 week after expiration date, but still
within the 70 day viewing period.
ChartView database has timed out. Database is beyond 70 days after
expiration date. ChartView database is no longer available for viewing.
System time is not available. GPS satellite data is unknown or the
system has not yet locked onto satellites. Check database cycle number
for effectivity.
System is verifying chart database when new cycle is installed for the
first time.
After verifying, chart database is found to be corrupt. ChartView is not
available.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Power-up Page Display
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
Table 8-2 ChartView Power-up Page Annunciations and Definitions
190-00629-04 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58
487
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The ChartView time critical information can also be found on the AUX - System Status page. The database
CYCLE number, EXPIRES, and DISABLES dates of the ChartView subscription appear in either blue or yellow
text. When the ChartView EXPIRES date is reached, ChartView becomes inoperative 70 days later. This is
shown as the DISABLES date. When the DISABLES date is reached, charts are no longer available for viewing.
The SHW CHRT Softkey label then appears subdued and is disabled until a revised issue of ChartView is
installed.
NOTE: A subdued softkey label indicates the function is disabled.
EIS
Press the MFD1 DB Softkey to place the cursor in the DATABASE window. Scroll through the listed information
by turning the FMS Knob or pressing the ENT Key until the ChartView database information is shown.
The ChartView database cycle number shown in the figure, 1103, is deciphered as follows:
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
11 – Indicates the year 2011
03 – Indicates the third issue of the ChartView database for the year
The EXPIRES date 17–FEB–11 is the date that this database should be replaced with the next issue.
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
The DISABLES date 28–APR–11 is the date that this database becomes inoperative.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
ChartView
Data
APPENDICES
DBASE Softkey
Selected
INDEX
Figure 8-47 AUX – System Status Page, ChartView Current and Available
488
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58
190-00629-04 Rev. A
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
The ChartView database is obtained directly from Jeppesen. Refer to Updating Jeppesen Databases in
Appendix B for instructions on revising the ChartView database.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Other possible AUX - System Status page conditions are shown in the figure below. The EXPIRES date, in
yellow, is the revision date for the next database cycle. The DISABLES date, in yellow, is the date that this
database cycle is no longer viewable. CYCLE NOT AVAILABLE in blue, indicates no ChartView data is available
on the database card or no database card is inserted.
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
ChartView Database is Disabled
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
ChartView has Expired, but is not Disabled
ChartView Database is Not Available
Figure 8-48 AUX – System Status Page, ChartView Database Status
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-00629-04 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58
489
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
8.4 FLITECHARTS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
FliteCharts resemble the paper version of AeroNav Services terminal procedures charts. The charts are displayed
with high-resolution and in color for applicable charts.
The geo-referenced aircraft position is indicated by an aircraft symbol displayed on the chart when the current
position is within the boundaries of the chart. Not all charts are geo-referenced. These charts will display an
Aircraft Not Shown Icon in the lower right corner of the MFD.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
An aircraft symbol may be displayed within an off-scale area depicted on some charts. The following figure
shows examples of off-scale areas, indicated by the grey shading. Note, these areas are not shaded on the published
chart. These off-scale areas appear on the chart to convey supplemental information. However, the depicted
geographical position of this information, as it relates to the chart planview, is not the actual geographic position.
Therefore, when the aircraft symbol appears within one of these areas, the aircraft position indicated is relative to
the chart planview, not to the off-scale area.
The FliteCharts database subscription is available from Garmin. Available data includes:
• Arrivals (STAR)
• Approaches
• Airport Diagrams
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
• Departure Procedures (DP)
Off-Scale
Area
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Off-Scale
Areas
Off-Scale
Areas
INDEX
Off-Scale
Area
Figure 8-49 Sample Chart Indicating Off-Scale Areas
490
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58
190-00629-04 Rev. A
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
NOTE: Do not maneuver the aircraft based solely upon the geo-referenced aircraft symbol.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
FLITECHARTS SOFTKEYS
FliteCharts functions are displayed on three levels of softkeys. While on the Navigation Map Page, Nearest
Airports Page, or Flight Plan Page, pressing the SHW CHRT Softkey displays the available terminal chart and
advances to the chart selection level of softkeys: CHRT OPT, CHRT, INFO-1, INFO-2, DP, STAR, APR, WX,
and GO BACK. The chart selection softkeys appear on the Airport Information Page.
EIS
Pressing the GO BACK Softkey reverts to the top level softkeys and previous page.
Pressing the CHRT OPT Softkey displays the available terminal chart and advances to the next level of
softkeys: ALL, FIT WDTH, FULL SCN, and BACK.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
While viewing the CHRT OPT Softkeys, after 45 seconds of softkey inactivity, the system reverts to the chart
selection softkeys.
NOTAMs are not available with FliteCharts. The NOTAM Softkey label appears subdued and is disabled.
CHRT OPT
CHRT
INFO-1
ALL
STAR
WX
APR
GO BACK
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
INFO-2
DP
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
SHW CHRT
Selecting the GO BACK Softkey returns
to the top-level softkeys and previous page.
FIT WDTH
FULL SCN
BACK
AFCS
Selecting the BACK Softkey returns
to the Chart Selection Softkeys.
Figure 8-50 FliteCharts SHW CHRT, Chart Selection, and Chart Option Softkeys
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-00629-04 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58
491
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
TERMINAL PROCEDURES CHARTS
Selecting Terminal Procedures Charts:
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
While viewing the Navigation Map Page, Nearest Airport Page, or Flight Plan Page, press the SHW CHRT
Softkey.
Or:
1) Press the MENU Key to display the PAGE MENU.
2) Turn the large FMS Knob to scroll through the OPTIONS Menu to Show Chart.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
3) Press the ENT Key to display the chart.
Navigation Map Page OPTIONS Menu
Waypoint Airport Information Page OPTIONS Menu
Figure 8-51 Option Menus
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
When no terminal procedure chart is available, the banner CHART NOT AVAILABLE appears on the screen.
The CHART NOT AVAILABLE banner does not refer to the FliteCharts subscription, but rather the availability
of a particular airport chart selection or procedure for a selected airport.
Figure 8-52 Chart Not Available Banner
INDEX
APPENDICES
If there is a problem in rendering the data (such as a data error or a failure of an individual chart), the banner
UNABLE TO DISPLAY CHART is then displayed.
Figure 8-53 Unable To Display Chart Banner
492
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58
190-00629-04 Rev. A
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
When a chart is not available by pressing the SHW CHRT Softkey or selecting a Page Menu Option, charts
may be obtained for other airports from the WPT Pages or Flight Plan Pages.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
If a chart is available for the destination airport, or the airport selected in the active flight plan, the chart
appears on the screen. When no flight plan is active, or when not flying to a direct-to destination, pressing the
SHW CHRT Softkey displays the chart for the nearest airport, if available.
The chart shown is one associated with the WPT – Airport Information page. Usually this is the airport runway
diagram. Where no runway diagram exists, but Take Off Minimums or Alternate Minimums are available, that
page appears. If Airport Information pages are unavailable, the Approach Chart for the airport is shown.
EIS
Selecting a chart:
1) While viewing the Navigation Map Page, Flight Plan Page, or Nearest Airports Page, press the SHW CHRT
Softkey. The airport diagram or approach chart is displayed on the Airport Information Page.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
2) Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor.
3) Turn the large FMS Knob to select either the Airport Identifier Box or the Approach Box. (Press the APR Softkey
if the Approach Box is not currently shown).
4) Turn the small and large FMS Knob to enter the desired airport identifier.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
5) Press the ENT Key to complete the airport selection.
6) Turn the large FMS Knob to select the Approach Box.
7) Turn the small FMS Knob to show the approach chart selection choices.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
8) Turn either FMS Knob to scroll through the available charts.
9) Press the ENT Key to complete the chart selection.
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-00629-04 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58
493
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
Chart Not
To Scale
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Select Desired
Approach
Chart from
Menu
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
Pan Chart
With the
Joystick
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Aircraft Not
Shown Icon
Figure 8-54 Approach Information Page, Chart Selection
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
While the APPROACH Box is selected using the FMS Knob, the G1000 softkeys are blank. Once the desired
chart is selected, the chart scale can be changed and the chart can be panned using the Joystick. Pressing the
Joystick centers the chart on the screen.
The aircraft symbol is not shown on FliteCharts. The Chart Scale Box displays a banner NOT TO SCALE, and
the Aircraft Not Shown Icon is displayed in the lower right corner of the screen.
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
Pressing the CHRT Softkey alternates between the FliteCharts diagram and the associated map in the WPT
page group. In the example shown, the CHRT Softkey switches between the Charlotte, NC (KCLT) Airport
Diagram and the navigation map on the WPT – Airport Information page.
494
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58
190-00629-04 Rev. A
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Press CHRT Softkey
to Switch Between
FliteCharts and
Navigation Map Page
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Figure 8-55 CHRT Softkey, Airport Information Page
APPENDICES
Pressing the INFO-1 or INFO-2 Softkey returns to the airport diagram when the view is on a different chart.
If the displayed chart is the airport diagram, the INFO-1 or INFO-2 Softkey has no effect.
Another source for additional airport information is from the INFO Box above the chart, or to the right of the
chart for certain airports. This information source is not related to the INFO-1 or INFO-2 Softkey. When the
INFO Box is selected using the FMS Knob, the G1000 softkeys are blank. The Charlotte, NC airport has three
additional charts offering information; the Airport Diagram, Alternate Minimums, and Take-off Minimums.
INDEX
190-00629-04 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58
495
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
Info Box
Selected
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Figure 8-56 Airport Information Page, INFO View with Airport Information
496
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58
190-00629-04 Rev. A
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
In the example shown below, TAKE OFF MINIMUMS is selected. Pressing the ENT Key displays the Take-off
Minimums and Departure Procedures Chart.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Figure 8-57 Airport Information Page, TAKE OFF MINIMUMS Selected from INFO View
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Pressing the DP Softkey displays the Departure Procedure Chart if available.
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
Figure 8-58 Departure Information Page
190-00629-04 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58
497
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Pressing the STAR Softkey displays the Standard Terminal Arrival Chart if available.
Figure 8-59 Arrival Information Page
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Pressing the APR Softkey displays the approach chart for the airport if available.
INDEX
Figure 8-60 Approach Information Page
498
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58
190-00629-04 Rev. A
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Pressing the WX Softkey shows the airport weather frequency information, when available, and includes
weather data such as METAR and TAF from the XM Data Link Receiver. Weather information is available only
when an XM Data Link Receiver is installed and the XM WX Satellite Weather subscription is current.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Selecting Additional Information:
1) While viewing the Airport Taxi Diagram, press the WX Softkey to display the information windows (AIRPORT,
INFO).
2) Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor.
3) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the INFO Box.
EIS
4) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the INFO Box choices. When the INFO Box is selected the G1000 softkeys
are blank. If multiple choices are available, scroll to the desired choice with the large FMS Knob and press the
ENT Key to complete the selection.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
5) Press the FMS Knob again to deactivate the cursor.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Info Available
on This Airport
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
WX Info
When
Available
AFCS
Chart Not
To Scale
Figure 8-61 Weather Information Page, WX Softkey Selected
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Softkeys are
Blank during
Info Box
Selection
WX Softkey
Selected
APPENDICES
Pressing the GO BACK Softkey reverts to the previous page (Navigation Map Page or Flight Plan Page).
INDEX
190-00629-04 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58
499
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
CHART OPTIONS
Pressing the CHRT OPT Softkey displays the next level of softkeys, the chart options level.
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Pressing the ALL Softkey shows the complete chart on the screen.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Complete
Chart
Shown
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
Figure 8-62 Airport Information Page, ALL View Selected
500
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58
190-00629-04 Rev. A
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Pressing the FIT WIDTH Softkey fits the width of the chart in the display viewing area. In the example
shown, the chart at close range is replaced with the full width chart.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Press FIT WDTH
Softkey to Show
Full Chart Width
Figure 8-63 Approach Information Page, FIT WDTH Softkey Selected
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-00629-04 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58
501
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Pressing the FULL SCN Softkey alternates between removing and replacing the data window to the right.
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Press FULL SCN
Softkey to Switch
Between Chart on
Full Screen and Chart
with Info Window
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Figure 8-64 Airport Information Page, Full Screen and Info Window
INDEX
APPENDICES
Pressing the BACK Softkey, or waiting for 45 seconds reverts to the chart selection softkeys.
502
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58
190-00629-04 Rev. A
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
The full screen view can also be selected by using the page menu option.
Selecting full screen On or Off:
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
1) While viewing a terminal chart press the MENU Key to display the Page Menu OPTIONS.
2) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the Chart Setup Menu Option and press the ENT Key.
3) Turn the large FMS Knob to move between the FULL SCREEN and COLOR SCHEME Options.
4) Turn the small FMS Knob to choose between the On and Off Full Screen Options.
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Chart Setup Option
Full Screen On/Off Selection
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Figure 8-65 Page Menus
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-00629-04 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58
503
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
DAY/NIGHT VIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
FliteCharts can be displayed on a white or black background for day or night viewing. The Day View offers
a better presentation in a bright environment. The Night View gives a better presentation for viewing in a dark
environment. When the CHART SETUP Box is selected the G1000 softkeys are blank.
Selecting Day, Night, or Automatic View:
1) While viewing a terminal chart press the MENU Key to display the Page Menu OPTIONS.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
2) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the Chart Setup Menu Option and press the ENT Key.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Figure 8-66 Waypoint Information Page, OPTIONS Menu
3) Turn the large FMS Knob to move to the COLOR SCHEME Option.
4) Turn the small FMS Knob to choose between Day, Auto, and Night Options.
AFCS
5) If Auto Mode is selected, turn the large FMS Knob to select the percentage field. Use the small FMS Knob to
change the percentage value. The percentage value is the day/night crossover point based on the percentage of
backlighting intensity. For example, if the value is set to 15%, the day/night display changes when the display
backlight reaches 15% of full brightness.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
The display must be changed in order for the new setting to become active. This may be accomplished by
selecting another page or changing the display range.
INDEX
APPENDICES
6) Press the FMS Knob when finished to remove the Chart Setup Menu.
504
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58
190-00629-04 Rev. A
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Figure 8-67 Approach Information Page, Day View
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-00629-04 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58
505
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Figure 8-68 Approach Information Page, Night View
506
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58
190-00629-04 Rev. A
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLITECHARTS CYCLE NUMBER AND EXPIRATION DATE
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
FliteCharts data is revised every 28 days. Charts are still viewable during a period that extends from the
cycle expiration date to the disables date. FliteCharts are disabled 180 days after the expiration date and are no
longer available for viewing upon reaching the disables date. When turning on the system, the Power-up Page
displays the current status of the FliteCharts database. See the table below for the various FliteCharts Power-up
Page displays and the definition of each.
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
FliteCharts Database
Figure 8-69 Power-up Page, FliteCharts Database
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Power-up Page Display
AFCS
Definition
Blank Line. system is not configured for FliteCharts. Contact a Garminauthorized service center for configuration.
System is configured for FliteCharts but no chart database is installed.
Refer to Updating Garmin Databases in Appendix B for the FliteCharts
database
Normal operation. FliteCharts database is valid and within current
cycle.
FliteCharts database is beyond the expiration date, but still within the
180 day viewing period.
FliteCharts database has timed out. Database is beyond 180 days
after expiration date. FliteCharts database is no longer available for
viewing.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
Table 8-3 FliteCharts Power-up Page Annunciations and Definitions
INDEX
190-00629-04 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58
507
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
Other possible AUX - System Status page conditions are shown in the following figure. ‘FliteCharts Expires’
plus a date in white, indicates the chart database is current. ‘Chart data is out of date!’ in yellow, indicates charts
are still viewable, but approaching the disable date.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
When the 180 day grace period has expired, ‘Chart data is disabled.’ in yellow indicates that the FliteCharts
database has expired and is no longer viewable. ‘Chart Data: N/A’ appears in white if no FliteCharts data is
available on the database card or no database card is inserted.
EIS
FliteCharts time critical information can also be found on the AUX - System Status page. The FliteCharts
database REGION, CYCLE number, EFFECTIVE, EXPIRES, and DISABLES dates of the subscription appear in
either blue or yellow text. Dates shown in blue are current data. Dates shown in yellow indicate the data is not
within the current subscription period.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FliteCharts becomes inoperative 180 days after the FliteCharts EXPIRES date is reached, and is no longer
available for viewing. This date is shown as the DISABLES date. After the disable date the SHW CHRT Softkey
label appears subdued and is unavailable until a revised issue of FliteCharts is installed.
NOTE: A subdued softkey label indicates the function is disabled.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Press the MFD1 DB Softkey to place the cursor in the DATABASE window. Scroll through the listed information
by turning the FMS Knob or pressing the ENT Key until the FliteCharts database information is shown.
The FliteCharts database cycle number shown in the figure, 1102, is deciphered as follows:
11 – Indicates the year 2011
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
02 – Indicates the second issue of the FliteCharts database for the year
The FliteCharts EFFECTIVE date 10–FEB–11 is the first date that this database is current.
The FliteCharts EXPIRES date 10–MAR–11 is the last date that this database is current.
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
The DISABLES date 06–SEP–11 is the date that this database becomes inoperative.
508
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58
190-00629-04 Rev. A
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FliteCharts
Data
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Figure 8-70 AUX – System Status Page, FliteCharts Current and Available
The FliteCharts database is provided from Garmin. Refer to Updating Garmin Databases in Appendix B for
instructions on revising the FliteCharts database.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
The other four possible AUX - System Status page conditions are shown here. The EFFECTIVE date, in
yellow, indicates the current date preceeds the date the FliteCharts database becomes effective. The EXPIRES
date, in yellow, is the revision date for the next database cycle. The DISABLES date, in yellow, is the date that
this database cycle is no longer viewable. NOT AVAILABLE in blue, indicate the FliteCharts database is not
available on the database card or no database card is inserted.
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-00629-04 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58
509
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
FliteCharts Expired, but is not Disabled
FliteCharts Database is Disabled
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Current Date is Before Effective Date
FliteCharts Database is Not Available
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
Figure 8-71 AUX – System Status Page, FliteCharts Datbase Status
510
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58
190-00629-04 Rev. A
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
8.5 AIRPORT DIRECTORY
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The Aircraft Owners and Pilots Association (AOPA) and optional AC-U-KWIK Airport Directory databases
offer detailed information regarding services, hours of operation, lodging options, and more. This information is
viewed on the Airport Information Page by selecting the INFO Softkey until INFO-2 is displayed.
Both Airport Directories are available for downloading at flygarmin.com. However, copy only one of the
databases to the Supplemental Data Card. The system cannot recognize both databases simultaneously.
Selecting the Airport Directory Page:
EIS
1) Turn the large FMS Knob to select the ‘WPT’ page group.
2) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the AIRPORT INFORMATION Page. Initially, information for the airport closest
to the aircraft’s present position is displayed.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
3) If necessary, select the INFO softkey until INFO-2 is displayed.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Figure 8-72 AOPA Information on the Airport Information Page
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-00629-04 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58
511
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
AIRPORT DIRECTORY DATABASE CYCLE NUMBER AND REVISION
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The Airport Directory databases are revised every 56 days and offered on a subscription basis. Check fly.
garmin.com for the current database. The Airport Directory is always available for use after the expiration date.
When turning on the system, the Power-up Page indicates whether the databases are current, out of date, or
not available.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Airport Directory
Database
Figure 8-73 Power-up Page, Airport Directory Database
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Power-up Page Display
Definition
Normal operation. AOPA Airport Directory database is valid and within
current cycle.
AOPA Airport Directory database has expired.
AFCS
Database card contains no AOPA Airport Directory data.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Table 8-4 Airport Directory Annunciation Definitions
The Airport Directory Region, Version, Cycle, Effective date and Expires date of the database cycle can also be
found on the AUX - System Status page.
APPENDICES
Press the MFD1 DB Softkey to place the cursor in the DATABASE window. Scroll through the listed
information by turning the FMS Knob or pressing the ENT Key until the Airport Directory database information
is shown.
The Airport Directory database cycle number shown in the figure, 11D1, is deciphered as follows:
11 – Indicates the year 2011
INDEX
D – Indicates the data is for Airport Directory
1 – Indicates the first issue of the Airport Directory database for the year
512
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58
190-00629-04 Rev. A
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
The Airport Directory EFFECTIVE date 13–JAN–11 is the beginning date for the current database cycle. The
Airport Directory EXPIRES date 10–MAR–11 is the revision date for the next database cycle.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
EIS
Airport Directory
Data
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Figure 8-74 AUX – System Status Page, Airport Directory Current Information
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Airport Directory information appears in blue and yellow text. The EFFECTIVE date appears in blue when
data is current and in yellow when the current date is before the effective date. The EXPIRES date appears in
blue when data is current and in yellow when expired (Table 8-4). NOT AVAILABLE appears in blue in the
REGION field if Airport Directory data is not available on the database card. An expired Airport Directory
database is not disabled and will continue to function indefinitely.
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-00629-04 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58
513
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
8.6 SIRIUSXM SATELLITE RADIO ENTERTAINMENT
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
NOTE: Refer to the Hazard Avoidance Section for information about XM WX Satellite Weather products.
The optional SiriusXM Satellite Radio entertainment feature of the GDL 69A Data Link Receiver is available for
the pilot’s and passengers’ enjoyment. The GDL 69A can receive SiriusXM Satellite Radio entertainment services
at any altitude throughout the Continental U.S. Entertainment audio is not available on the GDL 69 Data Link
Receiver.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
SiriusXM Satellite Radio offers a variety of radio programming over long distances without having to constantly
search for new stations. Based on signals from satellites, coverage far exceeds land-based transmissions.
SiriusXM Satellite Radio services are subscription-based. For more information on specific service packages, visit
www.siriusxm.com.
ACTIVATING SIRIUSXM SATELLITE RADIO SERVICES
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
The service is activated by providing SiriusXM Satellite Radio with either one or two coded IDs, depending on
the equipment. Either the Audio Radio ID or the Data Radio ID, or both, must be provided to SiriusXM Satellite
Radio to activate the entertainment subscription.
It is not required to activate both the entertainment and weather service subscriptions with the GDL 69A.
Either or both services can be activated. SiriusXM Satellite Radio uses one or both of the coded IDs to send an
activation signal that, when received by the GDL 69A, allows it to play entertainment programming.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
These IDs are located:
• On the label on the back of the Data Link Receiver
• On the XM Information Page on the MFD
• On the XM Satellite Radio Activation Instructions included with the unit (available at www.garmin.com, P/N
190-00355-04)
AFCS
Contact the installer if the Data Radio ID and the Audio Radio ID cannot be located.
NOTE: The LOCK Softkey on the XM Information Page (Auxiliary Page Group) is used to save GDL 69A
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
activation data when the SiriusXM services are initially set up. It is not used during normal SiriusXM
Radio operation, but there should be no adverse effects if inadvertently pressed during flight. Refer to
the GDL 69/69A XM Satellite Radio Activation Instructions (190-00355-04, Rev H or later) for further
information.
APPENDICES
Activating the SiriusXM Satellite Radio services:
1) Contact SiriusXM Satellite Radio. Follow the instructions provided by SiriusXM Satellite Radio services.
2) Select the Auxiliary Page Group.
3) Select the next to last page in the AUX Page Group.
INDEX
4) Press the INFO Softkey to display the XM Information Page.
5) Verify that the desired services are activated.
514
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58
190-00629-04 Rev. A
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
6) Press the LOCK Softkey.
7) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight YES.
8) To complete activation, press the ENT Key.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Data
Radio ID
Audio
Radio ID
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Weather
Products
Window
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
RADIO
and INFO
Softkeys
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
LOCK Softkey
is Used to Save
Activation Data
During Initial
Setup
Figure 8-75 XM Information Page
AFCS
If XM WX Satellite Weather services have not been activated, all the weather product boxes are blank on
the XM Information Page and a yellow Activation Required message is displayed in the center of the Weather
Data Link Page (Map Page Group). The Service Class refers to the groupings of weather products available for
subscription.
USING SIRIUSXM SATELLITE RADIO
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
The XM Radio Page provides information and control of the audio entertainment features of the SiriusXM
Satellite Radio.
Selecting the XM Radio Page:
1) Turn the large FMS Knob to select the Auxiliary Page Group.
APPENDICES
2) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the displayed AUX - XM Information Page.
3) Press the RADIO Softkey to show the XM Radio Page where audio entertainment is controlled.
INDEX
190-00629-04 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58
515
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Active
Channel
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
Channel
List
Volume
Field
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Categories
Field
Figure 8-76 XM Radio Page
ACTIVE CHANNEL AND CHANNEL LIST
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
The Active Channel Box on the XM Radio Page displays the currently selected channel that the SiriusXM
Radio is using.
The Channels List Box of the XM Radio Page shows a list of the available channels for the selected category.
Channels can be stepped through one at a time or may be selected directly by channel number.
Selecting a channel from the channel list:
AFCS
1) While on the XM Radio Page, press the CHNL Softkey.
2) Press the CH + Softkey to go up through the list in the Channel Box, or move down the list with the
CH – Softkey.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Or:
1) Press the FMS Knob to highlight the channel list and turn the large FMS Knob to scroll through the channels.
2) Press the ENT Key to activate the selected channel.
APPENDICES
Selecting a channel directly:
1) While on the XM Radio Page, press the CHNL Softkey.
2) Press the DIR CH Softkey. The channel number in the Active Channel Box is highlighted.
3) Press the numbered softkeys located on the bottom of the display to directly select the desired channel number.
INDEX
4) Press the ENT Key to activate the selected channel.
516
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58
190-00629-04 Rev. A
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
CATEGORY
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The Category Box of the XM Radio Page displays the currently selected category of audio. Categories of
channels such as jazz, rock, or news can be selected to list the available channels for a type of music or other
contents. One of the optional categories is PRESETS to view channels that have been programmed.
Selecting a category:
1) Press the CATGRY Softkey on the XM Radio Page.
2) Press the CAT + and CAT - Softkeys to cycle through the categories.
EIS
Or:
Turn the small FMS Knob to display the Categories list. Highlight the desired category with the small FMS Knob
and press the ENT Key. Selecting All Categories places all channels in the list.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
Figure 8-77 Categories List
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-00629-04 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58
517
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
PRESETS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Up to 15 channels from any category can be assigned a preset number. The preset channels are selected by
pressing the PRESETS and MORE Softkeys. Then the preset channel can be selected directly and added to
the channel list for the Presets category.
Setting a preset channel number:
1) On the XM Radio Page, while listening to an Active Channel that is wanted for a preset, press the PRESETS
Softkey to access the first five preset channels (PS1 - PS5).
EIS
2) Press the MORE Softkey to access the next five channels (PS6 – PS10), and again to access the last five
channels (PS11 – PS15). Pressing the MORE Softkey repeatedly cycles through the preset channels.
3) Press any one of the (PS1 - PS15) softkeys to assign a number to the active channel.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
4) Press the SET Softkey on the desired channel number to save the channel as a preset.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Press PRESETS to
Access the Preset
Channels Softkeys
Press MORE to Cycle
Through the Preset
Channels
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Press SET to
Save Each
Preset Channel
Figure 8-78 Accessing and Selecting XM Preset Channels
Pressing the BACK Softkey, or waiting during 45 seconds of softkey inactivity, returns the system to the top
level softkeys.
AFCS
VOLUME
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Radio volume is shown as a percentage of full volume. Volume level is controlled by pressing the VOL
Softkey, which brings up volume increase and decrease softkeys. Volume can be muted and unmuted by
pressing the MUTE Softkey.
APPENDICES
Press VOL to bring up XM
Radio volume controls
Press MUTE to Manually Mute/
Unmute XM Radio Audio
INDEX
Figure 8-79 Volume and Mute Sofkeys on the AUX - XM RADIO Page
518
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58
190-00629-04 Rev. A
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Adjusting the volume:
1) With the XM Radio Page displayed, press the VOL Softkey.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
2) Press the VOL – Softkey to reduce volume or press the VOL + Softkey to increase volume. (Once the VOL
Softkey is pressed, the volume can also be adjusted using the small FMS Knob.)
EIS
Figure 8-80 Volume Control
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
AUTOMATIC AUDIO MUTING
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
SiriusXM Satellite Radio audio is muted automatically when the aircraft groundspeed exceeds approximately
30 knots and the airspeed is less than approximately 80 knots. The audio is not unmuted automatically.
The audio must be manually unmuted once the aircraft is airborne and outside the applicable speed range.
Automatic Audio Muting has been implemented to meet regulatory requirements that the aural stall warning
be heard.
When the aircraft is operating within the automute airspeed range, the MUTE Softkey and the volume softkeys
are subdued, and the Unmute selection of the Page Menu is unavailable, preventing the audio from being
unmuted at this time.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Audio availability conforms to the following three states:
• Audio is available on the ground until the aircraft exceeds 30 knots
• Audio is automatically muted (not available) from Airborne Status up to 80 knots airspeed
• Audio is available when airspeed is over 80 knots
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-00629-04 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58
519
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
Unmuting SiriusXM audio:
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
With the XM Radio Page displayed, press the MUTE Softkey to restore (unmute) SiriusXM Audio.
EIS
Pressing the
MUTE Softkey
When Airborne
Unmutes XM
Audio
Figure 8-81 Unmuting XM Audio Using Softkeys
Or:
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
1) While the XM – Radio Page, press the MENU Key to display the PAGE MENU.
2) Turn the large FMS Knob to select the Unmute option.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
3) Press the ENT Key to restore (unmute) SiriusXM Audio.
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
Figure 8-82 Unmuting XM Audio with the Page Menu
520
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58
190-00629-04 Rev. A
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
8.7 SCHEDULER
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The Scheduler feature can be used to enter and display reminder messages (e.g., Change oil, Switch fuel tanks,
or Altimeter-Transponder Check) in the Alerts Window on the PFD. Messages can be set to display based on
a specific date and time (event), once the message timer reaches zero (one-time; default setting), or recurrently
whenever the message timer reaches zero (periodic). Message timers set to periodic alerting automatically reset
to the original timer value once the message is displayed. When power is cycled, all messages are retained until
deleted, and message timer countdown is resumed.
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Figure 8-83 Scheduler (Utility Page)
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Entering a scheduler message:
1) Select the AUX - Utility Page.
2) Press the FMS Knob momentarily to activate the flashing cursor.
3) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the first empty scheduler message naming field.
AFCS
4) Use the FMS Knob to enter the message text to be displayed in the Alerts Window and press the ENT Key.
5) Press the ENT Key again or use the large FMS Knob to move the cursor to the field next to Type.
6) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the message alert type:
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
• Event—Message issued at the specified date/time
• One-time—Message issued when the message timer reaches zero (default setting)
• Periodic—Message issued each time the message timer reaches zero
APPENDICES
7) Press the ENT Key again or use the large FMS Knob to move the cursor to the next field.
8) For periodic and one-time message, use the FMS Knob to enter the timer value (HH:MM:SS) from which to
countdown and press the ENT Key.
INDEX
190-00629-04 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58
521
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
9) For event-based messages:
a) Use the FMS Knob to enter the desired date (DD-MM-YY) and press the ENT Key.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
b) Press the ENT Key again or use the large FMS Knob to move the cursor to the next field.
c) Use the FMS Knob to enter the desired time (HH:MM) and press the ENT Key.
10) Press the ENT Key again or use the large FMS Knob to move the cursor to enter the next message.
Deleting a scheduler message:
1) Select the AUX - Utility Page.
EIS
2) Press the FMS Knob momentarily to activate the flashing cursor.
3) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the name field of the scheduler message to be deleted.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
4) Press the CLR Key to clear the message text. If the CLR Key is pressed again, the message is restored.
5) Press the ENT Key while the message line is cleared to clear the message time.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Scheduler messages appear in the Alerts Window on the PFD. When a scheduler message is waiting, the
ALERTS Softkey label changes to ADVISORY. Pressing the ADVISORY Softkey opens the Alerts Window and
acknowledges the scheduler message. The softkey label reverts to ALERTS when pressed, the Alerts Window is
removed from the display, and the scheduler message is deleted from the message queue.
INDEX
APPENDICES
Figure 8-84 PFD Alerts Window
522
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58
190-00629-04 Rev. A
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
8.8 FLIGHT DATA LOGGING
NOTE: Some aircraft installations may not provide all aircraft/engine data capable of being logged by the
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
system.
The Flight Data Logging feature will automatically store critical flight and engine data on an SD data card (up
to 16GB) inserted into the top card slot of the MFD. Approximately 1,000 flight hours can be recorded for each
1GB of available space on the card.
EIS
Data is written to the SD card once each second while the MFD is powered on. All flight data logged on a
specific date is stored in a file named in a format which includes the date, time, and nearest airport identifier. The
file is created automatically each time the G1000 system is powered on, provided an SD card has been inserted.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
The status of the Flight Data Logging feature can be viewed on the AUX-UTILITY Page. If no SD card has been
inserted, “NO CARD” is displayed. When data is being written to the SD card, “LOGGING DATA” is displayed.
The .csv file may be viewed with Microsoft Excel® or other spreadsheet applications.
The following is a list of data parameters the G1000 system is capable of logging for the Beechcraft G58 aircraft.
• GPS fix
• Time
• Longitude (degrees; geodetic;
+East)
• GPS altitude (MSL)
• Magnetic Heading (degrees)
• GPS vertical alert limit
• GPS altitude (WGS84 datum)
• HSI source
• Baro-Corrected altitude (feet)
• Selected course
• SBAS GPS horizontal protection
level
• Baro Correction (in/Hg)
• Com1/Com2 frequency
• Indicated airspeed (kts)
• Nav1/Nav2 frequency
• SBAS GPS vertical protection
level
• Vertical speed (fpm)
• CDI deflection
• Fuel Qty (right & left)(gals)
• GPS vertical speed (fpm)
• VDI/GP/GS deflection
• Fuel Flow (gph)
• OAT (degrees C)
• Wind Direction (degrees)
• Fuel Pressure (psi)
• True airspeed (knots)
• Wind Speed (knots)
• Voltage 1 and/or 2
• Pitch Attitude Angle (degrees)
• Active Waypoint Identifier
• Amps 1 and/or 2
• Roll Attitude Angle (degrees)
• Distance to next waypoint (nm)
• Engine RPM
• Lateral and Vertical G Force (g)
• Bearing to next waypoint
(degrees)
• Oil Pressure (psi)
• Magnetic variation (degrees)
• Manifold Pressure (in. Hg)
• Autopilot On/Off
• CHT
• AFCS roll/pitch modes
• EGT
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
• Oil Temperature (deg. F)
APPENDICES
• Latitude (degrees; geodetic;
+North)
AFCS
• Ground Track (degrees
magnetic)
• GPS horizontal alert limit
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
• Ground Speed (kts)
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
• Date
• AFCS roll/pitch commands
INDEX
The file containing the recorded data will appear in the format shown in the following figure. This file can be
imported into most computer spreadsheet applications.
190-00629-04 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58
523
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Local Date
YYMMDD
Local 24hr Time
HHMMSS
Nearest Airport
(A blank will be
inserted if no
airport is found)
log_110210_104506_KIXD.csv
EIS
Figure 8-85 Log File Format
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Data logging status can be monitored on the AUX-UTILITY Page.
524
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58
190-00629-04 Rev. A
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
8.9 ABNORMAL OPERATION
SVS TROUBLESHOOTING
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
SVS is intended to be used with traditional attitude, heading, obstacle, terrain, and traffic inputs. SVS is
disabled when valid attitude or heading data is not available for the display. In case of invalid SVS data, the PFD
display reverts to the standard blue-over-brown attitude display.
SVS becomes disabled without the following data resources:
• Attitude data
EIS
• Heading data
• GPS position data
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
• 9 Arc-second Terrain data
• Obstacle data
• TAWS function is not available, in test mode, or failed
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
• The position of the aircraft exceeds the range of the terrain database.
REVERSIONARY MODE
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
SVS can be displayed on the Multifunction Display (MFD) in Reversionary Mode. If it is enabled when switching
to Reversionary Mode, SVS will take up to 30 seconds to be displayed. The standard, non-SVS PFD display will
be shown in the interim.
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
Figure 8-86 SVS Reversionary Mode
190-00629-04 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58
525
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
UNUSUAL ATTITUDES
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Unusual attitudes are displayed with red chevrons overlaid on the display indicating the direction to fly to
correct the unusual attitude condition. The display shows either a brown or blue colored bar at the top or
bottom of the screen to represent earth or sky. This is intended to prevent losing sight of the horizon during
extreme pitch attitudes.
Figure 8-87 Unusual Attitude Display
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
The blue colored bar is also displayed when terrain gradient is great enough to completely fill the display.
AFCS
Blue Band
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Terrain
Completely
Fills Display
INDEX
APPENDICES
Figure 8-88 Blue Sky Bar with Full Display Terrain
526
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58
190-00629-04 Rev. A
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
GDL 69/69A DATA LINK RECEIVER TROUBLESHOOTING
Some quick troubleshooting steps listed below can be performed to find the possible cause of a failure.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
• Ensure the owner/operator of the aircraft in which the Data Link Receiver is installed has subscribed to
SiriusXM
• Ensure the XM subscription has been activated
• Perform a quick check of the circuit breakers to ensure that power is applied to the Data Link Receiver
EIS
For troubleshooting purposes, check the LRU Information Box on the AUX - System Status Page for Data Link
Receiver (GDL 69/69A) status, serial number, and software version number. If a failure has been detected in the
GDL 69/69A the status is marked with a red X.
Selecting the System Status Page:
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
1) Turn the large FMS Knob to select the AUX Page Group.
2) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the System Status Page (the last page in the AUX Page Group).
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
Figure 8-89 LRU Information Window on System Status Page
INDEX
190-00629-04 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58
527
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
If a failure still exists, the following messages may provide insight as to the possible problem:
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Message
CHECK ANTENNA
UPDATING
NO SIGNAL
LOADING
OFF AIR
---
Message Location
XM Radio Page - active channel field
XM Radio Page - active channel field
XM Radio Page - active channel field
Weather Datalink Page - center of page
XM Radio Page - active channel field
XM Radio Page - active channel field
XM Radio Page - active channel field
Description
Data Link Receiver antenna error; service required
Data Link Receiver updating encryption code
Loss of signal; signal strength too low for receiver
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
Acquiring channel audio or information
Channel not in service
Missing channel information
No communication from Data Link Receiver
WEATHER DATA LINK FAILURE Weather Datalink Page - center of page
within last 5 minutes
ACTIVATION REQUIRED
Weather Datalink Page - center of page SiriusXM subscription is not activated
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Table 8-5 GDL 69/69A Data Link Receiver Error Messages
528
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58
190-00629-04 Rev. A
APPENDIX A
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
ANNUNCIATIONS AND ALERTS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
NOTE: The Pilot’s Operating Handbook and FAA Approved Airplane Flight Manual (AFM/POH) supersedes
information found in this document.
The G1000 Alerting System conveys alerts using the following:
EIS
• Alerts Window: The Alerts Window displays text messages for up to 64 prioritized alert messages. Pressing
the ALERTS Softkey displays the Alerts Window. Pressing the ALERTS Softkey a second time removes the
Alerts Window from the display. When the Alerts Window is displayed, the FMS Knob can be used to scroll
through the alert message list.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
• Softkey Annunciation: During certain alerts, the ALERTS Softkey may appear as a flashing annunciation
to accompany an alert. The ALERTS Softkey assumes a new label consistent with the alert level (WARNING,
CAUTION, or ADVISORY). By selecting the softkey when flashing an annunciation, the alert is acknowledged.
The softkey label then returns to ALERTS. If alerts are still present, the ALERTS label is displayed in white
with black text. Selecting the ALERTS Softkey a second time views the alert text messages.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
• System Annunciations: Typically, a large red ‘X’ appears over instruments whose information is supplied by
a failed Line Replaceable Unit (LRU). See the G1000 System Annunciations Section for more information.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
System
Annunciation
(Red ‘X’)
AFCS
Annunciation
Window
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Alerts
Window
APPENDICES
Softkey
Annunciation
Figure A-1 G1000 Alerting System
INDEX
190-00629-04 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58
529
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
APPENDIX A
• Audio Alerting System: The G1000 System issues audio alert tones when specific system conditions are met.
See the Alert Level Definitions Section for more information. The annunciation tone may be tested from the
AUX - System Status Page.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Testing the system annunciation tone:
1) Use the FMS Knob to select the AUX - System Status Page.
2) Press the ANN TEST Softkey.
Or:
EIS
a) Press the MENU Key.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
b) Highlight ‘Enable Annunciator Test Mode’ and press the ENT Key.
Press to Test
Annunciation Tone
AFCS
Figure A-2 System Status Page, Annunciation Tone Testing
ALERT LEVEL DEFINITIONS
The G1000 Alerting System, as installed in Beechcraft G58 aircraft, uses three alert levels.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
• WARNING: This level of alert requires immediate attention.
Warning alert text is accompanied by a continuous chime and a flashing ‘WARNING’ Softkey annunciation
(see Figure A-3). Pressing the WARNING Softkey acknowledges the presence of the warning alert and stops
the aural chime.
APPENDICES
• CAUTION: This level of alert indicates the existence of abnormal conditions on the aircraft that may require
intervention.
Caution alert text is accompanied by a single chime and a flashing ‘CAUTION’ Softkey annunciation (see
Figure A-3). Pressing the CAUTION Softkey acknowledges the presence of the caution alert.
INDEX
• ANNUNCIATION OR MESSAGE ADVISORY: This level of alert provides general information.
An annunciation alert is accompanied by a flashing ‘ADVISORY’ Softkey annunciation (see Figure A-3).
Pressing the ADVISORY Softkey acknowledges the presence of the annunciation alert.
530
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58
190-00629-04 Rev. A
APPENDIX A
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Message advisory alerts issue a flashing ‘ADVISORY’ Softkey annunciation (see Figure A-3). Pressing the
ADVISORY Softkey acknowledges the presence of the message advisory alert and displays the alert text
message in the Alerts Window.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Figure A-3 Softkey Annunciation (ALERTS Softkey Labels)
AIRCRAFT ALERTS
EIS
The following alerts are configured specifically for the Beechcraft G58. Red annunciation window text signifies
warnings and yellow, cautions, and white, annunciation advisories. See the AFM/POH for recommended pilot
actions.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
WARNING ANNUNCIATION
Annunciation Text
GEAR UP
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
Left alternator offline.
Right alternator offline.
Right and Left alternators offline.
L or R fuel flow is greater than 27.4 gph.
L or R fuel qty is at zero.
L or R CHT is greater than 238 deg C.
L or R oil temp is greater than 116 deg C.
L or R oil press is greater than 100 psi.
L or R oil press is less than 10 psi.
Audio Alert
Continuous Tone (received through the
G1000 audio from another source)
Repeating Tone
Repeating Tone
Repeating Tone
Repeating Tone
Repeating Tone
Repeating Tone
Repeating Tone
Repeating Tone
Repeating Tone
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
L ALT INOP
R ALT INOP
L-R ALT INOP
FUEL FLOW HI
FUEL QTY LO
CHT HI
OIL TEMP HI
OIL PRESS HI
OIL PRESS LO
Alerts Window Message
Gear up with power below 13in Hg or flaps down.
CAUTION ANNUNCIATION
INDEX
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58
Audio Alert
Single Chime
Single Chime
Single Chime
Single Chime
Single Chime
Single Chime
Single Chime
Single Chime
Single Chime
Single Chime
Single Chime
Single Chime
APPENDICES
190-00629-04 Rev. A
Alerts Window Message
Left starter relay has power applied.
Right starter relay has power applied.
Left bus voltage greater than 30 VDC.
Right bus voltage greater than 30 VDC.
Left bus voltage less than 24 V.
Right bus voltage less than 24 V.
Aft door not latched.
Press Low — Ops in icing conditions not approved.
Press Low — Ops in icing conditions not approved.
L or R oil press is between 30 and 10 psi.
L or R fuel qty is less than or equal to 13 gal.
L or R alternator load exceeds 100 amps.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Annunciation Text
L START ENGD
R START ENGD
LBUS VOLT HI
RBUS VOLT HI
LBUS VOLT LO
RBUS VOLT LO
AFT DOOR
L AIR PUMP
R AIR PUMP
OIL PRESS LO
FUEL QTY LO
ALT LOAD
531
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
APPENDIX A
ADVISORY ANNUNCIATION
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Annunciation Text
BUSES TIED
Alerts Window Message
Right Bus is tied to Left Bus.
Audio Alert
None
ALERT MESSAGE
EIS
Alerts Window Message
PFD FAN FAIL – The cooling fan for the PFD is inoperative.
MFD FAN FAIL – The cooling fan for the MFD is inoperative.
AVN FAN FAIL – The cooling fan for remote avionics is inoperative.
Audio Alert/Voice Message
None
None
None
VOICE ALERTS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
The following audio alerts are announced by the system using a voice of male or female gender (see the AUX
- System Setup Page to change the audio alert voice for TIS; the GTS 820 gender is set at installation). Terrain
Awareness and Warning System voice alerts are also generated (refer to the TAWS Alerts section).
Alert Trigger
The aircraft has descended below the preset barometric minimum descent altitude.
The aircraft is one minute from Top of Descent. Issued only when vertical navigation is enabled.
Played when a Traffic Advisory (TA) is issued with the TIS system or the optional GTS 820 TAS system. See
the Hazard Avoidance section for additional details on GTS 820 voice alerts.
The aircraft is outside the Traffic Information Service (TIS) coverage area.
“TIS Not Available”
“Traffic, Traffic”
Played when a Traffic Advisory (TA) is issued with the optional SKY 497 TAS system. See the
Skywatch SKY 497 PG for additional details on SKY 497 voice alerts.
Played when the optional traffic system passes a pilot-initiated self test.
“Traffic Advisory System - SKY 497 TAS
Test Passed”
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Voice Alert
“Minimums, minimums”
“Vertical track”
“Traffic”
AFCS
“TAS System Test
Passed”
- GTS 820 TAS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Played when the optional traffic system fails a pilot-initiated self test.
“Traffic Advisory System - SKY 497 TAS
Test Failed”
INDEX
APPENDICES
“TAS System Test Fail” - GTS 820 TAS
“One o’clock” through
Intruder bearing (GTS 820 only)
“Twelve o’clock”
or “No Bearing”
“High”, “Low”, “Same
Intruder relative altitude (GTS 820 only)
Altitude” (if within 200
feet of own altitude), or
“Altitude not available”
“Less than one mile”,
Intruder distance (GTS 820 only)
“One Mile” through “Ten
Miles”, or “More than ten
miles”
532
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58
190-00629-04 Rev. A
APPENDIX A
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
G1000 SYSTEM ANNUNCIATIONS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
When a new message is issued, the ALERTS Softkey flashes to alert the flight crew of a new message. It
continues to flash until acknowledged by pressing the softkey. Active messages are displayed in white text.
Messages that have become inactive change to gray text. The ALERTS Softkey flashes if the state of a displayed
message changes or a new message is displayed. The inactive messages can be removed from the Message
Window by pressing the flashing ALERTS Softkey.
The G1000 System Messages convey messages to the flight crew regarding problems with the G1000 system.
Typically, a large red ‘X’ appears in a window when a related LRU fails or detects invalid data.
EIS
When an LRU or an LRU function fails, a large red ‘X’ is typically displayed on windows associated with
the failed data. The following section describes various system annunciations. Refer to the AFM/POH for
additional information regarding pilot responses to these annunciations.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
NOTE: Upon power-up of the G1000 system, certain windows remain invalid as G1000 equipment begins to
initialize. All windows should be operational within one minute of power-up. Should any window continue
to remain flagged, the G1000 system should be serviced by a Garmin-authorized repair facility.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
System
Annunciation
Red ‘X’
AFCS
Messages Window
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Figure A-4 G1000 System Messages
Alerts Softkey
Annunciation
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-00629-04 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58
533
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
APPENDIX A
GIA 63/63W
Integrated
Avionics Units
GIA 63/63W
Integrated
Avionics Units
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
GDC 74A Air
Data Computer
GRS 77 AHRS
Or
GMU 44
Magnetometer
EIS
GEA 71 Engine
Airframe Unit
Or
GIA 63/63W
Integrated
Avionics Unit
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
GIA 63/63W
Integrated
Avionics Units
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
GDC 74A Air Data Computer
GTX 33 Transponder Or GIA 63/63W Integrated Avionics Units
Figure A-5 G1000 System Failure Annunciations
NOTE: Upon power-up, certain windows remain invalid as G1000 equipment begins to initialize. All windows
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
should be operational within one minute of power-up. If any window continues to remain flagged, the
G1000 System should be serviced by a Garmin-authorized repair facility.
534
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58
190-00629-04 Rev. A
APPENDIX A
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
System Annunciation
Comment
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Attitude and Heading Reference System is aligning.
Display system is not receiving attitude information from the AHRS.
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Display system is not receiving airspeed input from air data computer.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Display system is not receiving valid heading input from AHRS.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Display system is not receiving altitude input from the air data computer.
AFCS
Display system is not receiving vertical speed input from the air data computer.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Display system is not receiving valid transponder information.
APPENDICES
GPS information is either not present or is invalid for navigation use.
Note that AHRS utilizes GPS inputs during normal operation. AHRS operation may be degraded if
GPS signals are not present (see AFM/POH).
190-00629-04 Rev. A
INDEX
Other Various Red X
Indications
A red ‘X’ through any other display field (such as engine instrumentation display) indicates that the
field is not receiving valid data.
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58
535
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
APPENDIX A
G1000 SYSTEM MESSAGE ADVISORIES
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
This section describes various G1000 system message advisories. Certain messages are issued due to an LRU
or an LRU function failure. Such messages are normally accompanied by a corresponding red ‘X’ annunciation
as shown previously in the G1000 System Annunciation section.
NOTE: This Section provides information regarding G1000 message advisories that may be displayed by
EIS
the system. Knowledge of the aircraft, systems, flight conditions, and other existing operational priorities
must be considered when responding to a message. Always use sound pilot judgment. The AFM/POH takes
precedence over any conflicting guidance found in this section.
MFD & PFD MESSAGE ADVISORIES
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Message
DATA LOST – Pilot stored data was
lost. Recheck settings.
XTALK ERROR – A flight display
crosstalk error has occurred.
PFD1 SERVICE – PFD1 needs service.
Return unit for repair.
MFD1 SERVICE – MFD1 needs
service. Return unit for repair.
MANIFEST – PFD1 software
mismatch. Communication halted.
MANIFEST – MFD1 software
mismatch. Communication halted.
PFD1 CONFIG – PFD1 configuration
error. Config service req’d.
MFD1 CONFIG – MFD1 configuration
error. Config service req’d.
SW MISMATCH – GDU software
version mismatch. Xtalk is off.
PFD1 COOLING – PFD1 has poor
cooling. Reducing power usage.
MFD1 COOLING – MFD1 has poor
cooling. Reducing power usage.
PFD1 KEYSTK – PFD1 [key name] Key
is stuck.
MFD1 KEYSTK – MFD1 [key name]
Key is stuck.
CNFG MODULE – PFD1 configuration
module is inoperative.
PFD1 VOLTAGE – PFD1 has low
voltage. Reducing power usage.
MFD1 VOLTAGE – MFD1 has low
voltage. Reducing power usage.
536
Comments
The pilot profile data was lost. System reverts to default pilot profile and settings. The
pilot may reconfigure the MFD & PFD with preferred settings, if desired.
The MFD and PFD are not communicating with each other. The G1000 system should
be serviced.
The PFD and/or MFD self-test has detected a problem. The G1000 system should be
serviced.
The PFD and/or MFD has incorrect software installed. The G1000 system should be
serviced.
The PFD configuration settings do not match backup configuration memory. The
G1000 system should be serviced.
The MFD configuration settings do not match backup configuration memory. The
G1000 system should be serviced.
The MFD and PFD have different software versions installed. The G1000 system
should be serviced.
The PFD and/or MFD is overheating and is reducing power consumption by dimming
the display. If problem persists, the G1000 system should be serviced.
A key is stuck on the PFD and/or MFD bezel. Attempt to free the stuck key by pressing
it several times. The G1000 system should be serviced if the problem persists.
The PFD1 configuration module backup memory has failed. The G1000 system should
be serviced.
The PFD1 voltage is low. The G1000 system should be serviced.
The MFD voltage is low. The G1000 system should be serviced.
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58
190-00629-04 Rev. A
APPENDIX A
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
DATABASE MESSAGE ADVISORIES
The MFD and/or PFD detected a failure in the terrain database. Ensure that the
terrain card is properly inserted in display. Replace terrain card. If problem persists,
the G1000 system should be serviced.
The MFD and/or PFD detected a failure in the obstacle database. Ensure that the
data card is properly inserted. Replace data card. If problem persists, the G1000
system should be serviced.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
The MFD and/or PFD detected a failure in the airport terrain database. Ensure that
the data card is properly inserted. Replace data card. If problem persists, the G1000
system should be serviced.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
The MFD and/or PFD detected a failure in the Safe Taxi database. Ensure that the
data card is properly inserted. Replace data card. If problem persists, the G1000
system should be serviced.
The MFD and/or PFD detected a failure in the Chartview database (optional feature).
Ensure that the data card is properly inserted. Replace data card. If problem
persists, the G1000 system should be serviced.
The MFD and/or PFD detected a failure in the FliteCharts database (optional feature).
Ensure that the data card is properly inserted. Replace data card. If problem
persists, the G1000 system should be serviced.
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
The terrain database is present on another LRU, but is missing on the specified LRU.
Ensure that the terrain card is properly inserted in the specified display. Replace
terrain card. If problem persists, the G1000 system should be serviced.
APPENDICES
The obstacle database is present on another LRU, but is missing on the specified
LRU. Ensure that the terrain card is properly inserted in the specified display.
Replace terrain card. If problem persists, the G1000 system should be serviced.
The airport terrain database is present on another LRU, but is missing on the
specified LRU. Ensure that the terrain card is properly inserted in the specified
display. Replace terrain card. If problem persists, the G1000 system should be
serviced.
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58
INDEX
190-00629-04 Rev. A
The MFD and/or PFD detected a failure in the basemap database. The G1000 system
should be serviced.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
MFD1 DB ERR – MFD1 terrain
database missing.
PFD1 DB ERR – PFD1 terrain database
missing.
MFD1 DB ERR – MFD1 obstacle
database missing.
PFD1 DB ERR – PFD1 obstacle
database missing.
MFD1 DB ERR – MFD1 airport terrain
database missing.
PFD1 DB ERR – PFD1 airport terrain
database missing.
The MFD and/or PFD detected a failure in the navigation database. Attempt to
reload the navigation database. If problem persists, the G1000 system should be
serviced.
EIS
MFD1 DB ERR – MFD1 FliteCharts
database error exists.
Comments
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Message
MFD1 DB ERR – MFD1 navigation
database error exists.
PFD1 DB ERR – PFD1 navigation
database error exists.
MFD1 DB ERR – MFD1 basemap
database error exists.
PFD1 DB ERR – PFD1 basemap
database error exists.
MFD1 DB ERR – MFD1 terrain
database error exists.
PFD1 DB ERR – PFD1 terrain database
error exists.
MFD1 DB ERR – MFD1 obstacle
database error exists.
PFD1 DB ERR – PFD1 obstacle
database error exists.
MFD1 DB ERR – MFD1 airport terrain
database error exists.
PFD1 DB ERR – PFD1 airport terrain
database error exists.
MFD1 DB ERR – MFD1 Safe Taxi
database error exists.
PFD1 DB ERR – PFD1 Safe Taxi
database error exists.
MFD1 DB ERR – MFD1 Chartview
database error exists.
537
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
APPENDIX A
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Message
Comments
DB MISMATCH – Navigation database The PFD and MFD have different navigation database versions or regions installed.
mismatch. Xtalk is off.
Crossfill is off. Check the AUX-SYSTEM STATUS Page to determine versions or
regions. Also, check the AUX-SYSTEM STATUS Page for a database synchronization
function not completed. After synchronization is complete, power must be turned off,
then on.
DB MISMATCH – Standby Navigation The PFD and MFD have different standby navigation database versions or regions
database mismatch.
installed. Check the AUX-SYSTEM STATUS Page to determine versions or regions.
Also, check the AUX-SYSTEM STATUS Page for a database synchronization function
not completed. After synchronization is complete, power must be turned off, then on.
DB MISMATCH – Terrain database
The PFD and MFD have different terrain database versions or regions installed.
mismatch.
Check the AUX-SYSTEM STATUS Page to determine versions or regions. Also,
check the AUX-SYSTEM STATUS Page for a database synchronization function not
completed. After synchronization is complete, power must be turned off, then on.
DB MISMATCH – Obstacle database
The PFD and MFD have different obstacle database versions or regions installed.
mismatch.
Check the AUX-SYSTEM STATUS Page to determine versions or regions. Also,
check the AUX-SYSTEM STATUS Page for a database synchronization function not
completed. After synchronization is complete, power must be turned off, then on.
DB MISMATCH – Airport Terrain
The PFD and MFD have different airport terrain database versions or regions
database mismatch.
installed. Check the AUX-SYSTEM STATUS Page to determine versions or regions.
Also, check the AUX-SYSTEM STATUS Page for a database synchronization function
not completed. After synchronization is complete, power must be turned off, then on.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
GMA 1347 MESSAGE ADVISORIES
Comments
The audio panel self-test has detected a failure. The audio panel is unavailable. The
G1000 system should be serviced.
GMA1 CONFIG – GMA1 configuration The audio panel configuration settings do not match backup configuration memory.
error. Config service req’d.
The G1000 system should be serviced.
MANIFEST – GMA1 software
The audio panel has incorrect software installed. The G1000 system should be serviced.
mismatch. Communication halted.
GMA1 SERVICE – GMA1 needs
The audio panel self-test has detected a problem in the unit. Certain audio functions may
service. Return unit for repair.
still be available, and the audio panel may still be usable. The G1000 system should be
serviced when possible.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
Message
GMA1 FAIL – GMA1 is inoperative.
GIA 63W MESSAGE ADVISORIES
INDEX
APPENDICES
Message
GIA1 CONFIG – GIA1 config error.
Config service req’d.
GIA2 CONFIG – GIA2 config error.
Config service req’d.
GIA1 CONFIG – GIA1 audio config
error. Config service req’d.
GIA2 CONFIG – GIA2 audio config
error. Config service req’d.
538
Comments
The GIA1 and/or GIA2 configuration settings do not match backup configuration
memory. The G1000 system should be serviced.
The GIA1 and/or GIA2 have an error in the audio configuration. The G1000 system
should be serviced.
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58
190-00629-04 Rev. A
APPENDIX A
Comments
The GIA1 and/or GIA2 temperature is too low to operate correctly. Allow units to
warm up to operating temperature.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The GIA1 and/or GIA2 temperature is too high. If problem persists, the G1000 system
should be serviced.
EIS
The GIA1 and/or GIA2 self-test has detected a problem in the unit. The G1000 system
should be serviced.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
A GIA mismatch has been detected, where only one is SBAS capable. The G1000
system should be serviced.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
The GIA1 and/or GIA 2 has incorrect software installed. The G1000 system should be
serviced.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Incorrect servo software is installed, or gain settings are incorrect.
COM1 and/or COM2 software mismatch. The system should be serviced.
AFCS
NAV1 and/or NAV2 software mismatch. The system should be serviced.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
COM1 and/or COM2 configuration settings do not match backup configuration
memory. The system should be serviced.
APPENDICES
The system has detected an over temperature condition in COM1 and/or COM2. The
transmitter operates at reduced power. If the problem persists, the G1000 system
should be serviced.
INDEX
190-00629-04 Rev. A
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Message
GIA1 COOLING – GIA1 temperature
too low.
GIA2 COOLING – GIA2 temperature
too low.
GIA1 COOLING – GIA1 over
temperature.
GIA2 COOLING – GIA2 over
temperature.
GIA1 SERVICE – GIA1 needs service.
Return the unit for repair.
GIA2 SERVICE – GIA2 needs service.
Return the unit for repair.
HW MISMATCH – GIA hardware
mismatch. GIA1 communication
halted.
HW MISMATCH – GIA hardware
mismatch. GIA2 communication
halted.
MANIFEST – GIA1 software
mismatch, communication halted.
MANIFEST – GIA2 software
mismatch, communication halted.
MANIFEST – GFC software mismatch,
communication halted.
MANIFEST – COM1 software
mismatch, communication halted.
MANIFEST – COM2 software
mismatch, communication halted.
MANIFEST – NAV1 software
mismatch, communication halted.
MANIFEST – NAV2 software
mismatch, communication halted.
COM1 CONFIG – COM1 config error.
Config service req’d.
COM2 CONFIG – COM2 config error.
Config service req’d.
COM1 TEMP – COM1 over temp.
Reducing transmitter power.
COM2 TEMP – COM2 over temp.
Reducing transmitter power.
COM1 SERVICE – COM1 needs
service. Return unit for repair.
COM2 SERVICE – COM2 needs
service. Return unit for repair.
The system has detected a failure in COM1 and/or COM2. COM1 and/or COM2 may
still be usable. The G1000 system should be serviced when possible.
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58
539
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
APPENDIX A
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Message
COM1 PTT – COM1 push-to-talk key
is stuck.
COM2 PTT – COM2 push-to-talk key
is stuck.
COM1 RMT XFR – COM1 remote
transfer key is stuck.
COM2 RMT XFR – COM2 remote
transfer key is stuck.
LOI – GPS integrity lost. Crosscheck
with other NAVS.
GPS NAV LOST – Loss of GPS
navigation. Insufficient satellites.
GPS NAV LOST – Loss of GPS
navigation. Position error.
GPS NAV LOST – Loss of GPS
navigation. GPS fail.
ABORT APR – Loss of GPS navigation.
Abort approach.
APR DWNGRADE – Approach
downgraded.
TRUE APR – True north approach.
Change HDG refereence to TRUE.
GPS1 SERVICE – GPS1 needs service.
Return unit for repair.
GPS2 SERVICE – GPS2 needs service.
Return unit for repair.
NAV1 SERVICE – NAV1 needs service.
Return unit for repair.
NAV2 SERVICE – NAV2 needs service.
Return unit for repair.
NAV1 RMT XFR – NAV1 remote
transfer key is stuck.
NAV2 RMT XFR – NAV2 remote
transfer key is stuck.
G/S1 FAIL – G/S1 is inoperative.
G/S2 FAIL – G/S2 is inoperative.
INDEX
G/S1 SERVICE – G/S1 needs service.
Return unit for repair.
G/S2 SERVICE – G/S2 needs service.
Return unit for repair.
540
Comments
The COM1 and/or COM2 external push-to-talk switch is stuck in the enable (or
“pressed”) position. Press the PTT switch again to cycle its operation.
If the problem persists, the G1000 system should be serviced.
The COM1 and/or COM2 transfer switch is stuck in the enabled (or “pressed”)
position. Press the transfer switch again to cycle its operation. If the problem
persists, the G1000 system should be serviced.
GPS integrity is insufficient for the current phase of flight.
Loss of GPS navigation due to insufficient satellites.
Loss of GPS navigation due to position error.
Loss of GPS navigation due to GPS failure.
Abort approach due to loss of GPS navigation.
Vertical guidance generated by SBAS is unavailable, use LNAV only minimums.
Displayed after passing the first waypoint of a true north approach when the nav angle is
set to ‘AUTO’.
A failure has been detected in the GPS1 and/or GPS2 receiver. The receiver may still
be available. The G1000 system should be serviced.
A failure has been detected in the NAV1 and/or NAV2 receiver. The receiver may still
be available. The G1000 system should be serviced.
The remote NAV1 and/or NAV2 transfer switch is stuck in the enabled (or “pressed”)
state. Press the transfer switch again to cycle its operation. If the problem persists,
the G1000 system should be serviced.
A failure has been detected in glideslope receiver 1 and/or receiver 2. The G1000
system should be serviced.
A failure has been detected in glideslope receiver 1 and/or receiver 2. The receiver
may still be available. The G1000 system should be serviced when possible.
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58
190-00629-04 Rev. A
APPENDIX A
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
GEA 71 MESSAGE ADVISORIES
Comments
The GEA1 configuration settings do not match those of backup configuration memory.
The G1000 system should be serviced.
The #1 GEA 71 has incorrect software installed. The G1000 system should be
serviced.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Message
GEA1 CONFIG – GEA1 config error.
Config service req’d.
MANIFEST – GEA1 software
mismatch, communication halted.
GTX 33 MESSAGE ADVISORIES
Comments
The transponder has incorrect software installed. The G1000 system should be
serviced.
The transponder has incorrect software installed. The G1000 system should be
serviced.
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
ADS-B is inoperative. The transponder may not be receiving a valid GPS position.
Other transponder functions may be available. Service when possible.
The transponder configuration settings do not match those of backup configuration
memory. The G1000 system should be serviced.
There is no communication with the #1 transponder.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Message
MANIFEST – GTX1 software
mismatch, communication halted.
GTX1 MANIFEST – GTX1 software
mismatch, communication halted.
XPDR1 ADS-B FAIL – Transponder:
XPDR1 is unable to transmit ADS-B
messages.
XPDR1 CONFIG – XPDR1 config error.
Config service req’d.
XPDR1 FAIL – XPDR1 is inoperative.
XPDR1 SRVC – XPDR1 needs service.
Return unit for repair.
The #1 transponder should be serviced when possible.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
GRS 77 MESSAGE ADVISORIES
Comments
The #1 AHRS is not receiving true airspeed from the air data computer. The AHRS
relies on GPS information to augment the lack of airspeed. The G1000 system should
be serviced.
AHRS1 GPS – AHRS1 using backup
The #1 AHRS is using the backup GPS path. Primary GPS path has failed. The G1000
GPS source.
system should be serviced when possible.
AHRS1 GPS – AHRS1 not receiving
The #1 AHRS is not receiving any or any useful GPS information. Check AFMS
any GPS information.
limitations. The G1000 system should be serviced.
AHRS1 GPS – AHRS1 not receiving
The #1 AHRS is not receiving backup GPS information. The G1000 system should be
backup GPS information.
serviced.
AHRS1 GPS – AHRS1 operating
The #1 AHRS is operating exclusively in no-GPS mode. The G1000 system should be
exclusively in no-GPS mode.
serviced.
AHRS1 SRVC – AHRS1 Magnetic-field The #1 AHRS earth magnetic field model is out of date. Update magnetic field model
model needs update.
when practical.
GEO LIMITS – AHRS1 too far North/ The aircraft is outside geographical limits for approved AHRS operation. Heading is
South, no magnetic compass.
flagged as invalid.
MANIFEST – GRS1 software
The #1 AHRS has incorrect software installed. The G1000 system should be serviced.
mismatch, communication halted.
APPENDICES
INDEX
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
190-00629-04 Rev. A
AFCS
Message
AHRS1 TAS – AHRS1 not receiving
airspeed.
541
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
APPENDIX A
GMU 44 MESSAGE ADVISORIES
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Message
HDG FAULT – AHRS1 magnetometer
fault has occurred.
MANIFEST – GMU1 software
mismatch, communication halted.
Comments
A fault has occurred in the #1 GMU 44. Heading is flagged as invalid. The AHRS uses
GPS for backup mode operation. The G1000 system should be serviced.
The GMU 44 has incorrect software installed. The G1000 system should be serviced.
GDL 69A MESSAGE ADVISORIES
Comments
GDL 69 configuration settings do not match those of backup configuration memory.
The G1000 system should be serviced.
A failure has been detected in the GDL 69. The receiver is unavailable. The G1000
system should be serviced
MANIFEST – GDL software mismatch, The GDL 69 has incorrect software installed. The G1000 system should be serviced.
communication halted.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
Message
GDL69 CONFIG – GDL 69 config
error. Config service req’d.
GDL69 FAIL – GDL 69 has failed.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
GDC 74A MESSAGE ADVISORIES
Message
MANIFEST – GDC1 software
mismatch, communication halted.
Comments
The GDC 74A has incorrect software installed. The G1000 system should be serviced.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
GWX 68 MESSAGE ADVISORIES
AFCS
Message
GWX CONFIG – GWX config error.
Config service req’d.
GWX FAIL – GWX is inoperative.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
GWX SERVICE – Needs service.
Return unit for repair.
WX ALERT – Possible severe weather
ahead.
MANIFEST – GWX software
mismatch, communication halted.
Comments
GWX 68 configuration settings do not match those of the GDU configuration. The
G1000 system should be serviced.
The GDU is not recieving status packet from the GWX 68 or the GWX 68 is reporting
a fault. The GWX 68 radar system should be serviced.
A failure has been detected in the GWX 68. The GWX 68 may still be usable.
The GWX 68 indicates severe weather within ±10 degrees of the aircraft heading at a
range of 80 to 320 nm.
The GWX 68 has incorrect software installed. The G1000 system should be serviced.
APPENDICES
GTS 820 TRAFFIC ADVISORY SYSTEM
INDEX
Message Advisory
GTS CONFIG – GTS Config error.
Config service req'd.
MANIFEST – GTS software mismatch,
communication halted.
542
Comments
The GTS and GDU have different copies of the GTS configuration, or the Mode S
address is invalid The G1000 system should be serviced.
The GTS has incorrect software installed. The G1000 system should be serviced.
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58
190-00629-04 Rev. A
APPENDIX A
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
MISCELLANEOUS MESSAGE ADVISORIES
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58
EIS
190-00629-04 Rev. A
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Message
Comments
FPL WPT LOCK – Flight plan waypoint Upon power-up, the G1000 system detects that a stored flight plan waypoint is
is locked.
locked. This occurs when an navigation database update eliminates an obsolete
waypoint. The flight plan cannot find the specified waypoint and flags this message.
This can also occur with user waypoints in a flight plan that is deleted.
Remove the waypoint from the flight plan if it no longer exists in any database,
or update the waypoint name/identifier to reflect the new information.
FPL WPT MOVE – Flight plan
The system has detected that a waypoint coordinate has changed due to a new
waypoint moved.
navigation database update. Verify that stored flight plans contain correct waypoint
locations.
TIMER EXPIRD – Timer has expired.
The system notifies the pilot that the timer has expired.
DB CHANGE – Database changed.
This occurs when a stored flight plan contains a procedure that is no longer consistent
Verify user modified procedures.
with the navigation database. This alert is issued only after an navigation database
update. Verify that the user-modified procedures in stored flight plans are correct and
up to date.
DB CHANGE – Database changed.
This occurs when a stored flight plan contains an airway that is no longer consistent
Verify stored airways.
with the navigation database. This alert is issued only after an navigation database
update. Verify use of airways in stored flight plans and reload airways as needed.
FPL TRUNC – Flight plan has been
This occurs when a newly installed navigation database eliminates an obsolete
truncated.
approach or arrival used by a stored flight plan. The obsolete procedure is removed
from the flight plan. Update flight plan with current arrival or approach.
LOCKED FPL – Cannot navigate
This occurs when the pilot attempts to activate a stored flight plan that contains
locked flight plan.
locked waypoint. Remove locked waypoint from flight plan. Update flight plan with
current waypoint.
WPT ARRIVAL – Arriving at waypoint
Arriving at waypoint [xxxx], where [xxxx] is the waypoint name.
-[xxxx]
STEEP TURN – Steep turn ahead.
A steep turn is 15 seconds ahead. Prepare to turn.
INSIDE ARSPC – Inside airspace.
The aircraft is inside the airspace.
ARSPC AHEAD – Airspace ahead less Special use airspace is ahead of aircraft. The aircraft will penetrate the special use
than 10 minutes.
airspace within 10 minutes.
ARSPC NEAR – Airspace near and
Special use airspace is near and ahead of the aircraft position.
ahead.
ARSPC NEAR – Airspace near – less
Special use airspace is within 2 nm of the aircraft position.
than 2 nm.
APPR INACTV – Approach is not
The system notifies the pilot that the loaded approach is not active. Activate
active.
approach when required.
SLCT FREQ – Select appropriate
The system notifies the pilot to load the approach frequency for the appropriate NAV
frequency for approach.
receiver. Select the correct frequency for the approach.
SLCT NAV – Select NAV on CDI for
The system notifies the pilot to set the CDI to the correct NAV receiver. Set the CDI to
approach.
the correct NAV receiver.
PTK FAIL – Parallel track unavailable:
Bad parallel track geometry.
bad geometry.
543
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
APPENDIX A
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Message
PTK FAIL – Parallel track unavailable:
invalid leg type.
PTK FAIL – Parallel track unavailable:
past IAF.
UNABLE V WPT – Can’t reach current
vertical waypoint.
EIS
VNV – Unavailable. Unsupported leg
type in flight plan.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
VNV – Unavailable. Excessive
crosstrack error.
VNV – Unavailable. Excessive track
angle error.
VNV – Unavailable. Parallel course
selected.
NO WGS84 WPT – Non WGS 84
waypoint for navigation -[xxxx]
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
TRAFFIC FAIL – Traffic device has
failed.
STRMSCP FAIL – Stormscope has
failed.
FAILED PATH – A data path has failed.
SCHEDULER [#] – <message>.
MAG VAR WARN – Large magnetic
variance. Verify all course angles.
Comments
Invalid leg type for parallel offset.
IAF waypoint for parallel offset has been passed.
The current vertical waypoint can not be reached within the maximum flight path
angle and vertical speed constraints. The system automatically transitions to the next
vertical waypoint.
The lateral flight plan contains a procedure turn, vector, or other unsupported leg
type prior to the active vertical waypoint. This prevents vertical guidance to the active
vertical waypoint.
The current crosstrack exceeds the limit, causing vertical deviation to go invalid.
The current track angle error exceeds the limit, causing the vertical deviation to go
invalid.
A parallel course has been selected, causing the vertical deviation to go invalid.
The position of the selected waypoint [xxxxx] is not calculated based on the WGS84
map reference datum and may be positioned in error as displayed. Do not use GPS to
navigate to the selected non-WGS84 waypoint.
The G1000 is no longer receiving data from the traffic system. The traffic device
should be serviced.
Stormscope has failed. The G1000 system should be serviced.
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
A data path connected to the GDU or the GIA 63/W has failed.
Message criteria entered by the user.
The GDU’s internal model cannot determine the exact magnetic variance for
geographic locations near the magnetic poles. Displayed magnetic course angles may
differ from the actual magnetic heading by more than 2°.
SVS – SVS DISABLED: Out of available Synthetic Vision is disabled because the aircraft is not within the boundaries of the
terrain region.
installed terrain database.
SVS – SVS DISABLED: Terrain DB
Synthetic Vision is disabled because a terrain database of sufficient resolution (9 arcresolution too low.
second or better) is not currently installed.
CHECK CRS – Database course for
Selected course for LOC1 differs from published localizer course by more than 10
LOC1 / [LOC ID] is [CRS]°.
degrees.
CHECK CRS – Database course for
Selected course for LOC2 differs from published localizer course by more than 10
LOC2 / [LOC ID] is [CRS]°.
degrees.
[PFD1 or MFD1] CARD 1 REM – Card The SD card was removed from the top card slot of the PFD or MFD. The SD card
1 was removed. Reinsert card.
needs to be reinserted.
[PFD1 or MFD1] CARD 2 REM – Card The SD card was removed from the bottom card slot of the PFD or MFD. The SD card
2 was removed. Reinsert card.
needs to be reinserted.
[PFD1 or MFD1] CARD 1 ERR – Card
The SD card in the top card slot of the PFD or MFD contains invalid data.
1 is invalid.
[PFD1 or MFD1] CARD 2 ERR – Card
The SD card in the bottom card slot of the PFD or MFD contains invalid data.
2 is invalid.
544
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58
190-00629-04 Rev. A
APPENDIX A
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT PLAN IMPORT/EXPORT MESSAGES
In some circumstances, some messages may appear in conjunction with others.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Flight Plan Import/Export Results
Description
‘Flight plan successfully imported.’
A flight plan file stored on the SD card was successfully imported as a stored flight
plan.
‘File contained user waypoints only.
The file stored on the SD card did not contain a flight plan, only user waypoints.
User waypoints imported successfully. These waypoints have been saved to the system user waypoints. No flight plans
No stored flight plan data was
stored in the system have been modified.
modified.’
‘No flight plan files found to import.’ The SD card contains no flight plan data.
‘Flight plan import failed.’
Flight plan data was not successfully imported from the SD card.
‘Flight plan partially imported.’
Some flight plan waypoints were successfully imported from the SD card, however
others had errors and were not imported. A partial stored flight plan now exists in
the system.
‘File contained user waypoints only.’
The file stored on the SD card did not contain a flight plan, only user waypoints. One
or more of these waypoints did not import successfully.
‘Too many points. Flight plan
The flight plan on the SD card contains more waypoints than the system can support.
truncated.’
The flight plan was imported with as many waypoints as possible.
‘Some waypoints not loaded.
The flight plan on the SD card contains one or more waypoints that the system cannot
Waypoints locked.’
find in the navigation database. The flight plan has been imported, but must be
edited within the system before it can be activated for use.
‘User waypoint database full. Not all The flight plan file on the SD card contains user waypoints. The quantity of stored
loaded.’
user waypoints has exceeded system capacity, therefore not all the user waypoints
on the SD card have been imported. Any flight plan user waypoints that were not
imported are locked in the flight plan. The flight plan must be edited within the
system before it can be activated for use.
‘One or more user waypoints
One or more imported user waypoints were renamed when imported due to naming
renamed.’
conflicts with waypoints already existing in the system.
‘Flight plan successfully exported.’
The stored flight plan was successfully exported to the SD card.
‘Flight plan export failed.’
The stored flight plan was not successfully exported to the SD card. The SD card may
not have sufficient available memory or the card may have been removed prematurely.
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-00629-04 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58
545
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
APPENDIX A
PILOT PROFILE IMPORT/EXPORT MESSAGES
Description
Displayed if the SD card does not have one or more valid pilot profile filenames.
Displayed if the profile name matches the name of existing profile.
Displayed if the profile name is invalid.
Displayed if the maximum number for pilot profiles has been reached.
Displayed if the importing operation fails for any other reason.
Displayed if the importing operation succeeds.
Displayed if the filename matches the name of an existing file on the SD card.
Displayed if the export operation fails.
Displayed if the export operation succeeds.
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Pilot Profile Import/Export Results
‘No pilot profile plan files found to
import.’
‘Overwrite existing profile?’
‘Profile name invalid. Enter a different
profile name.’
‘All available pilot profiles in use. Delete a
profile before importing another.’
‘Pilot profile import failed.’
‘Pilot profile import succeeded.’
‘Overwrite existing file?’
‘Pilot profile export failed.’
‘Pilot profile export succeeded.’
546
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58
190-00629-04 Rev. A
APPENDIX B
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
DATABASE MANAGEMENT
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Database information is obtained from third party sources. Inaccuracies in the data may be discovered from
time to time. Garmin communicates this information by issuing a Database Alert. These notifications are available
at www.fly.garmin.com.
Garmin requests the flight crew report any observed discrepancies related to database information. These
discrepancies could come in the form of an incorrect procedure; incorrectly identified terrain, obstacles and fixes;
or any other displayed item used for navigation or communication in the air or on the ground. Go to www.fly.
garmin.com and select “Aviation Data Error Report.
EIS
CAUTION: Never disconnect power to the system when loading a database. Power interuption during the
database loading process could result in maintenance being required to reboot the system.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
The system uses Secure Digital (SD) cards to load and store various types of data. For basic flight operations,
SD cards are required for database storage as well as Jeppesen navigation and ChartView database updates. Not
all SD cards are compatible with the system. Use only SD cards supplied by Garmin or the aircraft manufacturer.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
CAUTION: When downloading updates to the Jeppesen Navigation Database, copy the data to an SD card
other than a Garmin Supplemental Data Card. Otherwise, data corruption can occur.
NOTE: When loading database updates, the ‘DB Mismatch’ message will be displayed until database
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
synchronization is complete, followed by turning system power off, then on. Synchronization can be
monitored on the AUX-SYSTEM STATUS Page.
NOTE: Loading a database in the system prior to its effective date will result in the expiration date on the
power-up screen and the effective date on the AUX-System Status Page being displayed in amber.
AFCS
JEPPESEN DATABASES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
The Jeppesen navigation database is updated on a 28-day cycle. The ChartView database is updated on a
14-day cycle. If the ChartView database is not updated within 70 days of the expiration date, ChartView will
no longer function. Both of these databases are provided directly from Jeppesen.
The ChartView database should be copied to the Garmin supplied Supplemental Data Card which will reside
in the bottom card slot on the MFD. The navigation database must be installed from the Jeppesen or user
supplied SD data card. Contact Jeppesen (www.jeppesen.com) for subscription and update information.
APPENDICES
NOTE: After the navigation database is installed, the card may be removed.
Updating the active Jeppesen navigation database (not using the Dual Navigation Database or
Automatic Database Synchronization Features):
INDEX
1) With the system OFF, insert the SD card containing the new navigation database version into the top card slot of the
display (PFD1, PFD2 or MFD) to be updated (label of SD card facing left).
2) Turn the system ON. A prompt similar to the following is displayed in the upper left corner of the display:
190-00629-04 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58
547
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
APPENDIX B
Figure B-1 Standby Navigation Database Prompt
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
3) Press the NO Softkey to proceed to loading the active database.
4) A prompt similar to the following is displayed, press the YES Softkey to update the active navigation database.
Figure B-2 Database Update Confirmation
5) After the update completes, the display starts in normal mode. Do not remove power while the display is
starting.
AFCS
6) Turn the system OFF and remove the SD card from the top card slot.
7) Repeat steps 1 through 6 for the other display (PFD or MFD). Remove the SD card when finished.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
8) Apply power to the system and press the ENT Key to acknowledge the startup screen.
9) Turn the large FMS Knob to select the AUX Page group on the MFD.
10) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the System Status Page.
APPENDICES
11) Press the Display Database Selection Softkey to show active navigation database information for each display (MFD1
DB and PFD1 DB). Verify the correct active navigation database cycle information is shown for each display.
DUAL NAVIGATION DATABASE FEATURE
INDEX
The dual navigation database feature allows each display to store an upcoming navigation database on the
bottom SD card so that the system can automatically load it to replace the active database when the new
database becomes effective (the next cycle becomes available seven days prior to its effective date).
548
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58
190-00629-04 Rev. A
APPENDIX B
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
If a navigation database loader card is inserted into the top SD card slot of a display, and an SD card is in the
bottom slot, the system will prompt the user (upon on-ground power up) as to whether the database should
be stored on the bottom SD card as the standby database. If the user responds affirmatively, the system will
copy the navigation database from the top SD card to the bottom SD card. As long as the bottom SD card
remains in the card slot, this standby navigation database will be available for the system to use as the active
database as soon as it becomes effective.
EIS
The system checks the active and standby databases upon (on-ground only) power-up. If the standby
database is current and the active database is out of date, the display will upload the standby database into the
active internal database location. Uploading the standby database to the active location takes approximately
45-55 seconds. The pilot is alerted that the update is complete by a system alert message, ‘NAV DB UPDATED’.
Loading a standby navigation database:
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
1) With the system OFF, insert the SD card containing the new navigation database version into the top card slot
of the MFD.
2) Verify that an SD card is inserted in the bottom slot of each PFD and the MFD.
3) Turn the system ON. A prompt similar to the following is displayed.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Figure B-3 Standby Navigation Database Prompt
4) Press the YES Softkey. The navigation database is copied to the SD card in the bottom card slot of the MFD.
AFCS
5) After the navigation database files are copied to the bottom SD card, the display will appear as shown in Figure
B-4.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-00629-04 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58
549
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
APPENDIX B
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Figure B-4 Standby Navigation Database Update Complete
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
6) As instructed on the display, press any key to continue. The display will now appear as shown in Figure B-5.
Figure B-5 Navigation Database Verification Prompt
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
7) Press any key to continue. The display will now appear as shown in Figure B-6.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Figure B-6 Active Navigation Database Prompt
APPENDICES
8) Press the NO Softkey. The display now starts in normal mode. Since the database effective date is not yet valid,
it should not be loaded as the active database. The display now starts in normal mode. Do not remove power
while the display is starting.
9) Press the ENT Key to acknowledge the startup screen.
10) Turn the large FMS Knob to select the AUX Page group on the MFD.
11) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the System Status Page.
INDEX
12) The new database is copied to the SD card in the bottom card slot of each PFD. Progress can be monitored in
the SYNC STATUS field. When copying is finished, ‘Complete’ is displayed.
550
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58
190-00629-04 Rev. A
APPENDIX B
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
13) Turn system power OFF.
14) Remove the SD card from the top card slot of the MFD.
15) Turn system power ON.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
16) Press the ENT Key to acknowledge the startup screen.
17) Turn the large FMS Knob to select the AUX Page group on the MFD.
18) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the System Status Page.
EIS
19) Press the Display Database Selection Softkey to show standby navigation database information for each display
(MFD1 DB and PFD1 DB). Verify the correct standby navigation database cycle information is shown for each
display.
NOTE: The system compares the active databases on each PFD and the MFD, and displays a system alert
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
message ‘DB Mismatch’ if they are not identical. Similarly, if the standby databases on each PFD and the
MFD are not identical, the system will display a ‘DB Mismatch’ alert for the standby navigation databases.
GARMIN DATABASES
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
The following databases are stored on Supplemental Data Cards provided by Garmin:
• Expanded basemap
• Airport terrain
• SafeTaxi
• Terrain
• Obstacle
• FliteCharts
• Airport Directory
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
After subscribing to the desired database product, these database products will be downloaded to three
Supplemental Data Cards (with the exception of FliteCharts, which is loaded on only one card). Insert each
Supplemental Data Card into the correct location shown in Figure B-7. These cards must not be removed
except to update the databases stored on each card.
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
PFD
MFD
INDEX
Figure B-7 Correct Database Locations
190-00629-04 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58
551
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Since these databases are not stored internally in the displays, a Supplemental Data Card containing identical
database versions must be kept in each display unit.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
APPENDIX B
The terrain database contains the terrain mapping data. The airport terrain database contains increased
resolution terrain data around airports. These databases are updated periodically and have no expiration date.
The basemap database contains data for the topography and land features, such as rivers, lakes, and towns.
It is updated only periodically, with no set schedule. There is no expiration date.
EIS
The obstacle database contains data for obstacles, such as towers, that pose a potential hazard to aircraft.
Obstacles 200 feet and higher are included in the obstacle database. It is very important to note that not all
obstacles are necessarily charted and therefore may not be contained in the obstacle database. This database is
updated on a 56-day cycle.
NOTE: The data contained in the terrain and obstacle databases comes from government agencies. Garmin
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
accurately processes and cross-validates the data, but cannot guarantee the accuracy and completeness of
the data.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
The AOPA or AC-U-KWIK Airport Directory provides data on airports and heliports throughout the U.S. or
worldwide, respectively. The AOPA Directory offers detailed information for over 5,300 U. S. airports, along
with the names and phone numbers of thousands of FBOs. These databases are updated every 56 days. The
AC-U-KWIK Directory offers detailed information for more than 8,000 airports with runways longer than 3,000
feet worldwide.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
The SafeTaxi database contains detailed airport diagrams for selected airports. These diagrams aid in following
ground control instructions by accurately displaying the aircraft position on the map in relation to taxiways,
ramps, runways, terminals, and services. This database is updated on a 56-day cycle.
The FliteCharts database contains procedure charts for the United States only. This database is updated on a
28-day cycle. If not updated within 180 days of the expiration date, FliteCharts will no longer function.
AFCS
AUTOMATIC DATABASE SYNCHRONIZATION FEATURE
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
The automatic database synchronization feature automatically transfers the database from a single SD
database card to the SD cards on each PFD and the MFD to ensure that all databases are synchronized
throughout the system. After power-up, the system compares all copies of each applicable database. If similar
databases do not match, the most recent valid database is automatically copied to each card in the system that
does not already contain that database.
INDEX
APPENDICES
The following databases are checked and synchronized: Basemap, Safetaxi, Airport Terrain, Obstacle,
Airport Directory, and Terrain. This feature applies only to databases that are stored on the SD card that
resides in the bottom slot of each display. This feature does not apply to the active navigation database which
is stored internally in each display, or to the charts databases (FliteCharts and ChartView) which are only
required to be present on the MFD. The typical procedure would be to download new databases to the MFD
card, then synchronize the data to the PFD(s).
552
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58
190-00629-04 Rev. A
APPENDIX B
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
NOTE: The 9-arc second terrain database may take as long as 100 minutes to synchronize using this method.
Therefore the user may want to transfer the data using a PC, or connect the system to a ground power
source while performing the database synchronization.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
EIS
The synchronization progress may be monitored on the AUX-System Status Page in the Sync Status section
of the Database Window. This section shows the synchronization status of each applicable database, including
the percent complete, time remaining, and to which displays the databases are being copied. When the
synchronization is complete, the status is listed as ‘Complete’, followed by the displays to which the databases
were copied. This sub-section is only present when a sync is occurring or has occurred on the current powerup.
An indication of ‘Complete’ still requires a power cycle before the synchronized databases will be used by
the system.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
Figure B-7 Check Database Cycle Number (MFD shown)
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
The Display Database Softkey (Figure B-9) is used to place the cursor in the Database Window. Upon first
press of the Display Database Softkey, the softkey will change to a selected state (black text on gray background)
and the cursor will appear in the Database Window. At this point the user can scroll through all databases in
the Database Window to view status information. If the Display Database Softkey is pressed repeatedly, the
softkey will cycle through PFD and MFD. Database status information in the Database Window will reflect
the database of the selected PFD or MFD. After a successful sync and restart, verify that the proper databases
are now in use on the AUX–System Status Page.
APPENDICES
190-00629-04 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58
INDEX
If an error occurs during the synchronization, an error message will be displayed, followed by the affected
display in the Sync Status section of the Database Window. If a synchronization completes on one display, but
an error occurs on another, the error message will be displayed with the affected diaplay listed after it. When
an error message is displayed, the problem must be corrected before the synchronization can be completed.
A power cycle is required to restart synchronization when ‘Card Full’ or ‘Err’ is shown.
553
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
APPENDIX B
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Error Message
Canceled
Card Full
Err
Timeout
Description
Database synchronization has been canceled by removing the bottom SD card in display being updated
SD card does not contain sufficient memory
Displayed for all other errors that may cause the synchronization process to be halted
System timed-out prior to the database transfer completing
Table B-1 Database Synchronization Error Messages
UPDATING GARMIN DATABASES
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
The Garmin database updates can be obtained by following the instructions detailed in the ‘Aviation
Databases’ section of the Garmin website (fly.garmin.com). Once the updated files have been downloaded
from the website, a PC equipped with an appropriate SD card reader is used to unpack and program the new
databases onto an existing Supplemental Data Card. Equipment required to perform the update is as follows:
• Windows-compatible PC computer (Windows 2000, Windows XP, Vista, or Windows 7)
• SD Card Reader: SanDisk SDDR-93, SanDisk SDDR-99, Verbatim #96504, or equivalent
• Updated database obtained from the Garmin website
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
• Existing Supplemental Database SD Cards (010-00330-42, or -43) from both PFDs and MFD
In some cases it may be necessary to obtain an unlock code from Garmin in order to make the database
product functional. It may also be necessary to have the system configured by a Garmin authorized service
facility in order to use some database features.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
UPDATING BASEMAP, SAFETAXI, AIRPORT TERRAIN, OBSTACLE, AND AIRPORT DIRECTORY
DATABASES
These databases may be copied to one Supplemental Data Card, then automatically synchronized to other
card in the system:
AFCS
1) With system power OFF, remove the MFD database card from the bottom card slot of the MFD.
2) Update the basemap, SafeTaxi, airport terrain, obstacle and/or airport directory databases on the MFD card.
3) Insert the MFD database card into the bottom card slot of the MFD.
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
4) Apply power to the system, check that the databases are initialized and displayed on the power-up screen
(Figure B-8). If a ‘Verifying’ message is seen, wait for the system to finish loading before proceeding to step 5.
554
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58
190-00629-04 Rev. A
APPENDIX B
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
EIS
Figure B-8 Database Information on the Power-up Screen
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
5) Acknowledge the Power-up Page agreement by pressing the ENT Key or the right most softkey.
6) Turn the large FMS Knob to select the AUX Page group on the MFD.
7) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the System Status Page.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
8) Monitor the Sync Status in the Database Window. Wait for all databases to complete synching, indicated by
‘Complete’ being displayed.
9) Remove and reapply power to the system.
10) Turn the large FMS Knob to select the AUX Page group on the MFD.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
11) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the System Status Page.
12) Press the Display Database Selection Softkey to show database information for each display (MFD1 DB or
PFD1 DB). Verify the correct database cycle information is shown for each database for each display.
MFD1 DB Selected PFD1 DB Selected
AFCS
Unselected
Figure B-9 Display Database Selection Softkey
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
UPDATING TERRAIN, FLITECHARTS, AND CHARTVIEW DATABASES
1) With system power OFF, remove the Supplemental Data Card from the bottom card slot of the MFD and PFDs.
APPENDICES
2) Copy the updated terrain database to each of the Supplemental Data Cards. Copy the updated FliteCharts or
ChartView database to one Supplemental Data Card.
3) Insert the updated Supplemental Data Cards into the bottom card slot of the MFD and PFDs. The Supplemental
Data Card containing the FliteCharts or ChartView database is inserted in the MFD.
INDEX
4) Apply power to the system, check that the databases are initialized and displayed on the power-up screen
(Figure B-8). A ‘Verifying’ message may be seen. If this message is present, wait for the system to finish loading
before proceeding to step 5.
5) Acknowledge the Power-up Page agreement by pressing the ENT Key or the right most softkey.
190-00629-04 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58
555
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
APPENDIX B
6) Turn the large FMS Knob to select the AUX Page group on the MFD.
7) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the System Status Page.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
8) Press the Display Database Selection Softkey to show database information for each display (MFD1 DB or
PFD1 DB). Verify the correct database cycle information is shown for each database for each display.
9) Remove power from the system.
MAGNETIC FIELD VARIATION DATABASE UPDATE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
A copy of the current magnetic field variation database (MV DB) is included with the navigation database.
At startup, the system compares this version of the MV DB with that presently being used by the AHRS (GRS).
If the system determines the MV DB needs to be updated, a prompt is displayed on the Navigation Map Page.
Figure B-10 GRS Magnetic Field Variation Database Update Prompt
Loading the magnetic field variation database update:
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
1) With ‘OK’ highlighted, as shown in figure B-10, press the ENT Key on the MFD. A progress monitor is displayed
as shown in Figure B-11.
Figure B-11 Uploading Database to GRS
INDEX
2) When the upload is complete, the system is ready for use.
556
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58
190-00629-04 Rev. A
APPENDIX C
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
GLOSSARY
auxiliary
Automated Weather Observing System
B ALT
BARO
BATT
BC
Bearing
barometric altitude
barometric setting
battery
backcourse
The compass direction from the
present position to a destination
waypoint.
beat frequency oscillator
backspace
bearing
BFO
BKSP
BRG
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
CO
COM
CONFIG
COOL
COPLT
center runway
degrees Celsius
Course to Altitude
calculator
Indicated airspeed corrected for
installation and instrument errors.
Course to DME distance
Course Deviation Indicator
Control Display Unit
Course to Fix
Cylinder Head Temperature
checklist
channel
Course to Intercept
cloud
clear
centimeter
Communication, Navigation, &
Surveillance
carbon monoxide
communication radio
configuration
coolant
co-pilot
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
C
ºC
CA
CALC
Calibrated
Airspeed
CD
CDI
CDU
CF
CHT
CHKLIST
CHNL
CI
CLD
CLR
cm
CNS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
190-00629-04 Rev. A
AUX
AWOS
EIS
AIM
AIRMET
ALRT
ALT
ALT, ALTN
AMPS
ANNUNC
ANT
AP
AP DISC
APR
APT
ARINC
ARSPC
ARTCC
ARV
AS
ASB
ASOS
ATC
ATCRBS
ATIS
ATK
AUTOSEQ
accuracy
active, activate
air data computer
Automatic Direction Finder
Attitude Direction Indicator
Arc to fix
Automatic Flight Control System
Airplane Flight Manual
Airplane Flight Manual Supplement
airframe
Above Ground Level
Attitude and Heading Reference
System
Airman’s Information Manual
Airman’s Meteorological Information
alert
altitude
alternator
amperes
annunciation
antenna
autopilot
autopilot disconnect
approach
airport, aerodrome
Aeronautical Radio Incorporated
airspace
Air Route Traffic Control Center
arrival
airspeed
Aviation Support Branch
Automated Surface Observing System
Air Traffic Control
ATC Radar Beacon System
Automatic Terminal Information Service
along-track
automatic sequence
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
ACC
ACT, ACTV
ADC
ADF
ADI
AF
AFCS
AFM
AFMS
AFRM
AGL
AHRS
557
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
APPENDIX C
Course
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Course to
Steer
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
CR
CRG
CRNT
Crosstrack
Error
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
CRS
CRS
CRSR
CTA
CTRL
Cumulative
CVR
CVRG
CWS
CYL
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
D ALT
DB, DBASE
dBZ
DCLTR,
DECLTR
DEC FUEL
deg
DEIC, DEICE
DEP
Desired Track
INDEX
DEST
DF
DFLT
DGRD
558
The line between two points to be
followed by the aircraft.
The recommended direction to steer
in order to reduce course error or stay
on course. Provides the most efficient
heading to get back to the desired
course and proceed along the flight
plan.
Course to Radial
Cockpit Reference Guide
current
The distance the aircraft is off a
desired course in either direction, left
or right.
course
Course to Steer
cursor
Control Area
control
The total of all legs in a flight plan.
Cockpit Voice Recorder
coverage
control wheel steering
cylinder
density altitude
database
decibels ‘Z’ (radar return)
declutter
decrease fuel
degree
de-icing
departure
The desired course between the active
“from” and “to” waypoints.
destination
Direct to Fix
default
degrade
DH
Dilution of
Precision
DIR
DIS
Distance
DME
DOP
DP
DPRT
DR
DSBL
DTK
E
ECU
Efficiency
EGT
EIS
ELEV
ELEV
EMERGCY
EMI
ENDUR
Endurance
ENG
ENGD
ENR
Enroute Safe
Altitude
decision height
A measure of GPS satellite geometry
quality on a scale of one to ten (lower
numbers equal better geometry,
where higher numbers equal poorer
geometry).
direction
distance
The ‘great circle’ distance from the
present position to a destination
waypoint.
Distance Measuring Equipment
Dilution of Precision
Departure Procedure
departure
dead reckoning
disabled
Desired Track
empty, east
Engine Control Unit
A measure of fuel consumption,
expressed in distance per unit of fuel.
Exhaust Gas Temperature
Engine Indication System
elevation
elevator
emergency
Electromagnetic Interference
endurance
Flight endurance, or total possible
flight time based on available fuel on
board.
engine
engaged
enroute
The recommended minimum altitude
within ten miles left or right of the
desired course on an active flight plan
or direct-to.
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58
190-00629-04 Rev. A
APPENDIX C
glideslope
go-around
gallon(s)
gearbox
Garmin Air Data Computer
Garmin Satellite Data Link
Garmin Display Unit
Garmin Engine/Airframe Unit
geographic
Garmin Flight Control
Garmin Integrated Avionics Unit
Global Navigation Satellite Landing
System
GMA
Garmin Audio Panel System
GMT
Greenwich Mean Time
GMU
Garmin Magnetometer Unit
GND
ground
gph
gallons per hour
GPS
Global Positioning System
Grid MORA
Grid Minimum Off-Route Altitude;
one degree latitude by one degree
longitude in size and clears the highest
elevation reference point in the grid by
1000 feet for all areas of the grid
Groundspeed The velocity that the aircraft is
travelling relative to a ground position.
Ground Track see Track
GRS
Garmin Reference System
GS
Ground speed
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
190-00629-04 Rev. A
G/S, GS
GA
gal, gl
GBOX
GDC
GDL
GDU
GEA
GEO
GFC
GIA
GLS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
degrees Fahrenheit
Course From Fix to Altitude
Federal Aviation Administration
Full Authority Digital Engine Control
Final Approach Fix
failure
Course From Fix to Distance
Federal Communication Commission
forecast
Course From Fix to DME Distance
flight director
Fault Detection and Exclusion
fuel flow
Flight Information Services-Broadcast
Flight Information Service Data Link
flight level
Flight Level Change
Course From Fix to Manual Termination
Flight Management System
Fuel On Board
Estimated
Time Enroute
Fuel On
Board
flight plan
feet per minute
frequency
freezing
Flight Service Station
foot/feet
The fuel flow rate, expressed in units of
fuel per hour.
The total amount of usable fuel on
board the aircraft.
EIS
ºF
FA
FAA
FADEC
FAF
FAIL
FC
FCC
FCST
FD
FD
FDE
FFLOW
FIS-B
FISDL
FL
FLC
FM
FMS
FOB
Estimated
Time of
Arrival
FPL
fpm
FREQ
FRZ
FSS
ft
Fuel Flow
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
ETA
ETE
EXPIRD
enter
Estimated Position Error
Estimated Position Uncertainty
error
Enroute Safe Altitude
A measure of horizontal GPS position
error derived by satellite geometry
conditions and other factors.
The estimated time at which the
aircraft should reach the destination
waypoint, based upon current speed
and track.
The estimated time it takes to reach
the destination waypoint from the
present position, based upon current
ground speed.
Estimated Time of Arrival
Estimated Time Enroute
expired
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
ENT
EPE
EPU
ERR
ESA
Estimated
Position Error
559
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
APPENDIX C
GSL
GTS
GTX
Geodetic Sea Level
Garmin Traffic System
Garmin Transponder
HA
HDG
Heading
Hold Terminating at Altitude
heading
The direction an aircraft is pointed,
based upon indications from a
magnetic compass or a properly set
directional gyro.
Hold Terminating at Fix
Horizontal Figure of Merit
mercury
high
High Sensitivity
Hold with Manual Termination
A measure of the uncertainty in the
aircraft’s horizontal position.
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
HF
HFOM
Hg
HI
HI SENS
HM
Horizontal
Figure of
Merit
hPa
HPL
hr
HSDB
HSI
HT
HUL
Hz
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
I
IAF
IAT
IAU
ICAO
INDEX
ICS
ID
IDENT, IDNT
IF
IFR
IG
560
hectopascal
Horizontal Protection Level
hour
High-Speed Data Bus
Horizontal Situation Indicator
heat
Horizontal Uncertainty Level
Hertz
Inner Marker
Initial Approach Fix
Indicated Air Temperature
Integrated Avionics Unit
International Civil Aviation
Organization
Intercom System
Identification/Morse Code Identifier
identification
Initial Fix
Instrument Flight Rules
Imperial gallon
ILS
IMC
in
INACTV
INC FUEL
IND
Indicated
INFO
in HG
INT
INTEG
IrDA, IRDA
Instrument Landing System
Instrument Meteorological Conditions
inch
inactive
increase fuel
indicated
Information provided by properly
calibrated and set instrumentation on
the aircraft panel.
information
inches of mercury
intersection(s)
integrity (RAIM unavailable)
Infrared Data Association
KEYSTK
kg
kHz
km
kt
key stuck
kilogram
kilohertz
kilometer
knot
L
LAT
LBL
lb
LCD
LCL
LED
Left Over Fuel
On Board
left, left runway
latitude
label
pound
Liquid Crystal Display
local
Light Emitting Diode
The amount of fuel remaining on
board after the completion of one or
more legs of a flight plan or direct-to.
Left Over Fuel The amount of flight time remaining,
Reserve
based on the amount of fuel on board
after the completion of one or more
legs of a flight plan or direct-to, and a
known consumption rate.
Leg
The portion of a flight plan between
two waypoints.
LIFR
Low Instrument Flight Rules
LNAV
Lateral Navigation
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58
190-00629-04 Rev. A
APPENDIX C
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58
INDEX
pressure altitude
Passenger Address
Proximity Advisory
passenger(s)
personal computer
Primary Flight Display
Procedure Turn to Course Intercept
pitch
position
parts per million
Present Position
pressure
procedure(s), procedure turn
pounds per square inch
APPENDICES
P ALT
PA
PA
PASS
PC
PFD
PI
PIT, PTCH
POSN
PPM
P. POS
PRES, PRESS
PROC
psi
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Outer Marker
Outside Air Temperature
Omni Bearing Selector
offset
oxygen
AFCS
O
OAT
OBS
OFST
OXY
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
NRST
north
navigation
NAVigation AID
Non-directional Beacon
Next Generation Radar
nautical mile(s)
No Procedure Turn Required
(Procdeure shall not be executed
without ATC clearance)
nearest
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
190-00629-04 Rev. A
N
NAV
NAVAID
NDB
NEXRAD
nm
NoPT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
MKR
MOA
MOV
mpm
Middle Marker
meter
Magnetic
Magnetic Variation
Missed Approach Hold Point
manifold pressure (inches Hg)
Manual Squelch
Missed Approach Point
Master Avionics Squelch
maximum
maximum speed (overspeed)
barometric minimum descent altitude
manual electric trim
Meteorological Aviation Routine
manual electric pitch trim
Multi Function Display
Military Grid Reference System
megahertz
microphone
minimum
Uses Grid MORAs to determine a safe
altitude within ten miles of the aircraft
present position.
marker beacon
Military Operations Area
movement
meters per minute
Minimum Safe Altitude
message
Mean Sea Level
meter
millivolt(s)
Marginal Visual Flight Rules
EIS
M
m
MAG
MAG VAR
MAHP
MAN IN
MAN SQ
MAP
MASQ
MAX
MAXSPD
MDA
MET
METAR
MEPT
MFD
MGRS
MHz
MIC
MIN
Minimum
Safe Altitude
MSA
MSG
MSL
MT
mV
MVFR
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
LRU
LT
LTNG
LVL
low
localizer
loss of integrity (GPS)
longitude
Localizer Performance with Vertical
guidance
Line Replaceable Unit
left
lightning
level
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
LO
LOC
LOI
LON
LPV
561
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
APPENDIX C
PT
PTK
PTT
PWR
Procedure Turn
parallel track
Push-to-Talk
power
sec
SEL, SLCT
SFC
SIAP
QTY
quantity
R
RAD
RAIM
REQ
RES
REV
RF
RMI
RMT
RNG
RNWY
ROL
ROM
rpm
RST FUEL
RSV
RT
RVRSNRY
RX
right, right runway
radial
Receiver Autonomous Integrity
Monitoring
random access memory
reference
remaining (fuel remaining above
Reserve)
required
reserve (fuel reserve entered by pilot)
reverse, revision, revise
Constant Radius Turn to Fix
Radio Magnetic Indicator
remote
range
runway
roll
read only memory
revolutions per minute
reset fuel
reserve (fuel reserve entered by pilot)
right
reversionary
receive
SID
SIGMET
Sim
SLP/SKD
SMBL
SPD
SPI
SPKR
SQ
SRVC, SVC
STAL
STAR
STATS
STBY
STD
STRMSCP
SUA
SUSP
SW
SYS
SVS
second(s)
select
surface
Standard Instrument Approach
Procedures
Standard Instrument Departure
Significant Meteorological Information
simulator
slip/skid
symbol
speed
Special Position Identification
speaker
squelch
service
stall
Standard Terminal Arrival Route
statistics
standby
standard
Stormscope
Special Use Airspace
suspend
software
system
Synthetic Vision System
S
SA
SAT
SBAS
SCIT
SD
south
Selective Availability
Static Air Temperature
Satellite-Based Augmentation System
Storm Cell Identification and Tracking
Secure Digital
T
TA
TACAN
TAF
TAS
TAS
TAT
TAWS
TCA
TCAS
TEL
true
Traffic Advisory
Tactical Air Navigation System
Terminal Aerodrome Forecast
True Airspeed
Traffic Advisory System, true airspeed
Total Air Temperature
Terrain Awareness and Warning System
Terminal Control Area
Traffic Collision Avoidance System
telephone
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
RAM
REF
REM
562
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58
190-00629-04 Rev. A
APPENDIX C
APPENDICES
INDEX
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
transfer
transponder
cross-talk
cross-track
AFCS
190-00629-04 Rev. A
XFER, XFR
XPDR
XTALK
XTK
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
velocity (airspeed)
Heading Vector to Altitude
VOR approach
variation
Heading Vector to DME Distance
volts, direct current
vertical
A measure of the uncertainty in the
aircraft’s vertical position.
watt(s), west
Wide Area Augmentation System
warning (GPS position error)
World Geodetic System - 1984
waypoint(s)
world wide
weather
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
V, Vspeed
VA
VAPP
VAR
VD
Vdc
VERT
Vertical Figure
of Merit
W
WAAS
WARN
WGS-84
WPT
WW
WX
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
unavailable
user
Coordinated Universal Time
Universal Transverse Mercator /
Universal Polar Stereographic Grid
EIS
UNAVAIL
USR
UTC
UTM/UPS
Vertical Speed The vertical speed necessary to
Required
descend/climb from a current position
and altitude to a defined target
position and altitude, based upon
current groundspeed.
VFOM
Vertical Figure of Merit
VFR
Visual Flight Rules
VHF
Very High Frequency
VI
Heading Vector to Intercept
VLOC
VOR/Localizer Receiver
VM
Heading Vector to Manual Termination
VMC
Visual Meteorological Conditions
VNAV, VNV
vertical navigation
VOL
volume
VOR
VHF Omni-directional Range
VORTAC
very high frequency omnidirectional
range station and tactical air
navigation
VPL
Vertical Protection Level
VPROF
VNV profile, vertical profile
VPTH
VNV path, vertical path
VR
Heading Vector to Radial
VS
vertical speed
VSI
Vertical Speed Indicator
VSR
Vertical Speed Required
VTF
vector to final
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Track Angle
Error
TRG
TRK
TRSA
TRUNC
TTL
TURN
TX
temperature
terminal
Track Between Two Fixes
Temporary Flight Restriction
True Heading
Traffic Information System
Turbine Inlet Temperature
Track Angle Error
Terminal Maneuvering Area
Timer/Reference
topographic
Direction of aircraft movement relative
to a ground position; also ‘Ground
Track’
The angle difference between the
desired track and the current track.
target
track
Terminal Radar Service Area
truncated
total
procedure turn
transmit
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
TEMP
TERM
TF
TFR
T HDG
TIS
TIT
TKE
TMA
TMR/REF
Topo
Track
563
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
APPENDIX C
Blank Page
564
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58
190-00629-04 Rev. A
APPENDIX D
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FREQUENTLY ASKED QUESTIONS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
If a particular aspect of G1000 operational capability is not addressed by these commonly asked questions or in
the index, contact Garmin (see the copyright page or back cover for contact information) or a Garmin-authorized
dealer. Garmin is dedicated to supporting its products and customers.
What is SBAS?
EIS
The Satellite Based Augmentation System (SBAS) uses a system of ground stations to correct any GPS signal
errors. These ground stations correct for errors caused by ionospheric disturbances, timing, and satellite
orbit errors. It also provides vital integrity information regarding the health of each GPS satellite. The signal
correction is then broadcast through geostationary satellites. This correction information can then be received
by any SBAS-enabled GPS receiver.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
SBAS is designed to provide the additional accuracy, availability, and integrity necessary to enable users to rely
on GPS for all phases of flight.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
There are several SBAS systems serving different parts of the world. The Wide Area Augmentation System
(WAAS) is currently available in the United States, including Alaska and Hawaii. The European Geostationary
Navigation Overlay Service (EGNOS) offers coverage of Europe, parts of the middle east and northern Africa.
The Multi-functional Satellite Augmentation System (MSAS) covers mainly Japan and parts of northern Australia.
How does SBAS affect approach operations?
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Both LNAV/VNAV and LPV approaches use the accuracy of SBAS to include vertical (glide path) guidance
capability. The additional accuracy and vertical guidance capability allows improved instrument approaches to
an expanded number of airports throughout the U.S.
The implementation of LPV approaches further improves precision approach capabilities. LPV approaches
are designed to make full use of the improved GPS signal from the SBAS. This approach combines the LNAV/
VNAV vertical accuracy with lateral guidance similar to the typical Instrument Landing System (ILS). LPV
approaches allow lower approach minimums.
AFCS
What is RAIM and how does it affect approach operations?
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
RAIM is an acronym for Receiver Autonomous Integrity Monitoring. RAIM is a GPS receiver function that
performs the following functions:
• Monitors and verifies integrity and geometry of tracked GPS satellites
• Notifies the pilot when satellite conditions do not provide the necessary coverage to support a certain phase
of flight
APPENDICES
• Predicts satellite coverage of a destination area to determine whether the number of available satellites is
sufficient to satisfy requirements
NOTE: If RAIM is not predicted to be available for the final approach course, the approach does not become
190-00629-04 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58
INDEX
active, as indicated by the “RAIM not available from FAF to MAP” message and the LOI annunciation
flagging on the HSI.
565
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
APPENDIX D
For RAIM to work correctly, the GPS receiver must track at least five satellites. A minimum of six satellites is
required to allow RAIM to eliminate a single corrupt satellite from the navigation solution.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
RAIM ensures that satellite geometry allows for a navigation solution calculation within a specified protection
limit (2.0 nm for oceanic and en route, 1.0 nm for terminal, and 0.3 nm for non-precision approaches). The
G1000 System monitors RAIM and issues an alert message when RAIM is not available (see Appendix A).
Without RAIM, GPS position accuracy cannot be monitored. If RAIM is not available when crossing the FAF,
the pilot must fly the missed approach procedure.
What is GSL altitude?
EIS
GSL (Geodetic Sea Level) altitude is the height above Mean Sea Level (MSL), as calculated geometrically,
generally using a global positioning system (GPS) as the primary data source. The calculated result may or may
not include a barometric component, but the primary source is geometric.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Why are there not any approaches available for a flight plan?
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Approaches are available for the final destination airport in a flight plan or as a direct-to (keep in mind
that some VOR/VORTAC identifiers are similar to airport identifiers). If a destination airport does not have a
published approach, the G1000 indicates “NONE” for the available procedures.
What happens when an approach is selected? Can a flight plan with an approach, a departure, or an
arrival be stored?
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
When an approach, departure, or arrival is loaded into the active flight plan, a set of approach, departure,
or arrival waypoints is inserted into the flight plan, along with a header line showing the title of the selected
instrument procedure. The original en route portion of the flight plan remains active, unless the instrument
procedure is activated. This may be done either when the procedure is loaded or at a later time.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
Flight plans can also be stored with an approach, a departure, or an arrival. Note that the active flight plan
is erased when the system is turned off. Also, the active flight plan is overwritten when another flight plan is
activated. When storing flight plans with an approach, a departure, or an arrival, the G1000 uses the waypoint
information from the current database to define the waypoints. If the database is changed or updated, the
G1000 System automatically updates the information, provided the procedure has not been modified. Should
an approach, departure, or arrival procedure no longer be available, the flight plan becomes locked until the
procedure is deleted from the flight plan.
Can “slant Golf” (“/G”) be filed using the G1000?
APPENDICES
“/G” may be filed for a flight plan. The G1000 System meets the requirements of TSO-C145a Class 3 and
ETSO-C145 Class 3 installations. GPS approaches are not to be flown with an expired database. See the
approved AFM/POH as well as the Aeronautical Information Manual (AIM) for more information.
What does the OBS Softkey do?
INDEX
The OBS Softkey is used to select manual sequencing of waypoints. Activating OBS mode sets the current
active-to waypoint as the primary navigation reference and prevents the system from sequencing to the next
waypoint in a flight plan. When OBS mode is cancelled, automatic waypoint sequencing is continued, and
the G1000 automatically activates the next waypoint in the flight plan once the aircraft has crossed the present
active waypoint.
566
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58
190-00629-04 Rev. A
APPENDIX D
OBS
Manual sequencing - ‘holds’ on selected waypoint
Manually select course to waypoint from HSI
Indicates ‘TO’ or ‘FROM’ waypoint
Cannot be set for final approach course or published holding patterns
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
•
•
•
•
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
•
•
•
•
Normal (OBS not activated)
Automatic sequencing of waypoints
Manual course change on HSI not possible
Always navigates ‘TO’ the active waypoint
Must be in this mode for final approach course
When OBS mode is active, the G1000 allows the pilot to set a desired course to/from a waypoint using the
CRS/BARO Knob and HSI (much like a VOR).
EIS
The most common application for using the OBS Softkey is the missed approach. The G1000 suspends
automatic waypoint sequencing (indicated by a ‘SUSP’ annunciation placed on the HSI) when the missed
approach point (MAP) is crossed. This prevents the G1000 from automatically sequencing to the missed
approach holding point (MAHP). During this time, the OBS Softkey designation changes to SUSP. Pressing
the SUSP Softkey reactivates automatic waypoint sequencing. The OBS Softkey then resumes its normal
functionality.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Why does the G1000 not automatically sequence to the next waypoint?
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
The G1000 only sequences flight plan waypoints when automatic sequencing is enabled (i.e., no “OBS” or
‘SUSP’ annunciation). For automatic sequencing to occur, the aircraft must also cross the “bisector” of the turn
being navigated. The bisector is a line passing through the waypoint common to two flight plan legs at an
equal angle from each leg.
How can a waypoint be skipped in an approach, a departure, or an arrival?
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
The G1000 allows the pilot to manually select any approach, departure, or arrival leg as the active leg of
the flight plan. This procedure is performed on the MFD from the Active Flight Plan Page by highlighting the
desired waypoint and selecting the ACT LEG Softkey then the ENT Key to approve the selection. The GPS
then provides navigation along the selected flight plan leg.
AFCS
When does turn anticipation begin?
The G1000 smooths adjacent leg transitions based on a normal 15° bank angle (with the ability to roll up to
30°) and provides three pilot cues for turn anticipation:
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
• A waypoint alert (‘Next DTK ###° in # seconds’ or ‘Next HDG ###° in # seconds’) appears on the PFD 10
seconds before the turn point and flashes as it counts down to zero.
APPENDICES
• A flashing turn advisory (‘Turn [right/left] to ###° in # seconds’) appears on the PFD 10 seconds before the
turn and flashes as it counts down to zero. ‘Turn [right/left] to ###° now’ or ‘Next [DTK/HDG] to ###° now’
is displayed when the pilot is to begin the turn and the HSI (GPS mode) automatically sequences to the next
DTK or HDG value.
• The To/From indicator on the HSI flips momentarily to indicate that the midpoint of the turn has been
crossed.
INDEX
190-00629-04 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58
567
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
APPENDIX D
When does the CDI scale change?
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Once a departure is activated, the G1000 Course Deviation Indicator (CDI) full scale deflection is set to 0.3
nm. The CDI scale changes to 1.0 nm (terminal mode) then ramps up to 2.0 nm (enroute mode) at 30 nm
from the departure airport. When 31 nm from the destination, the CDI scale smoothly transition from 2.0 nm
back to 1.0 nm (terminal mode). At 2.0 nm before the FAF during an active approach, the CDI scale transitions
down further based on the type of approach activated (LNAV, LNAV/VNAV, LPV). When a missed approach is
activated, the CDI is set to 0.3 nm. See the Flight Instruments Section for more details on CDI scaling.
Why does the HSI not respond like a VOR when OBS mode is active?
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
Unlike a VOR, the CDI scale used on GPS equipment is based on the crosstrack distance to the desired
course, not on the angular relationship to the destination. Therefore, the CDI deflection on the GPS is constant
regardless of the distance to the destination and does not become less sensitive when further away from the
destination.
What is the correct missed approach procedure? How is the missed approach holding point selected?
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
To comply with TSO specifications, the G1000 does not automatically sequence past the MAP. The first
waypoint in the missed approach procedure becomes the active waypoint when the SUSP Softkey is selected
after crossing the MAP. All published missed approach procedures must be followed, as indicated on the
approach plate.
To execute the missed approach procedure prior to the MAP (not recommended), select the Active Flight Plan
Page and use the ACT LEG Softkey to activate the missed approach portion of the procedure.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
After a missed approach, how can the same approach be re-selected? How can a new approach be
activated?
NOTE: Do not attempt to reactivate the current approach prior to crossing the missed approach point
AFCS
(MAP). If an attempt to do so is made, an alert message “Are you sure you want to discontinue the current
approach?” appears. The G1000 directs the pilot back to the transition waypoint and does not take into
consideration any missed approach procedures, if the current approach is reactivated.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
After flying the missed approach procedure, the pilot may reactivate the same approach for another attempt by
pressing the PROC Key. Once the clearance is given for another attempt, activate the approach by highlighting
‘ACTIVATE APPROACH’ using the large FMS Knob and pressing the ENT Key. The G1000 provides navigation
along the desired course to the waypoint and rejoins the approach in sequence from that point.
APPENDICES
To activate a new approach for the same airport, select the new procedure by pressing the PROC Key. Choose
‘SELECT APPROACH’, select the desired approach from the list shown, and press the ENT Key. Select the
desired transition, then activate the approach using the ENT Key.
INDEX
To activate a new approach to a different airport, press the Direct-to Key and select the desired airport using
the FMS Knobs. Press the ENT Key to accept the selected airport, then follow the steps in the preceding
paragraph to select an approach for the new airport.
568
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58
190-00629-04 Rev. A
APPENDIX E
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
MAP SYMBOLS
NOTE: Refer to the Flight Management Section for the topography legend and the Hazard Avoidance
AIRPORT
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Section for XM Weather Product legends.
LINE SYMBOLS
Item
Symbol
Unknown Airport
Symbol
EIS
Item
ICAO Control Area
Class B Airspace
Mode C Tower Area
Non-towered, Non-serviced Airport
Non-towered, Serviced Airport
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Towered, Serviced Airport
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Warning Area Prohibited Area
Alert Area
Restricted Area
Caution Area Training Area
Danger Area
Unknown Area
Class C
Terminal Radar Service Area
Mode C Area
Towered, Non-serviced Airport
Military Operations Area (MOA)
Restricted (Private) Airport
State or Province Border
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Heliport
International Border
NAVAIDS
Road
Item
Symbol
LOM (compass locator at outer marker)
Railroad
AFCS
Intersection
Latitude/Longitude
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
NDB (non-directional radio beacon)
VOR
VOR/DME
APPENDICES
VOR/ILS
VORTAC
TACAN
INDEX
190-00629-04 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58
569
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
APPENDIX E
MISCELLANEOUS
STORMSCOPE LIGHTNING STRIKES
Item
Symbol
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
ARTCC Frequency or FSS Frequency
Item
Symbol
Lightning Strike (0-6 sec ago)
Lightning Strike (6-20 sec ago)
Default Map Pointer
Lightning Strike (20-60 sec ago)
Elevation Pointer
EIS
Lightning Strike (60-120 sec ago)
TRAFFIC
Wind Vector
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Item
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Measuring Pointer
Symbol
Non-threat Traffic (hollow diamond)
Overzoom Indicator
Proximity Advisory
Terrain Proximity or TAWS Enabled
Traffic Advisory, Out of Range
Traffic Enabled
Traffic Advisory
User Waypoint
AFCS
Vertical Navigation Along Track Waypoint
Parallel Track Waypoint
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Unanchored Flight Path Waypoint
Top of Descent (TOD)
APPENDICES
Bottom of Descent (BOD)
INDEX
Navigating using Dead Reckoning
570
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58
190-00629-04 Rev. A
APPENDIX E
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
TERRAIN AVOIDANCE COLORS AND SYMBOLS
Potential Impact Point
Terrain Above Aircraft Altitude
100 ft Threshold
1000 ft
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Projected Flight Path
Unlighted Obstacle
EIS
Terrain Color
Terrain Location
Red (WARNING) Terrain above, or within 100 ft below the aircraft altitude
Yellow (CAUTION) Terrain between 100 ft and 1000 ft below the aircraft altitude
Black
Terrain more than 1000 ft below the aircraft altitude
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Figure E-1 TAWS Color Chart
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Figure E-2 TAWS Potential Impact Points
Obstacle Symbol
Obstacle Location
Red
(WARNING)
Obstacle within 100 ft of
or above aircraft altitude
Yellow
(CAUTION)
Obstacle within 1000 ft of
aircraft altitude
Gray
Obstacle more than 1000
ft below aircraft altitude
AFCS
Obstacle
Color
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Unlighted Obstacle
Lighted Obstacle
Height < 1000 ft AGL > 1000 ft AGL < 1000 ft AGL > 1000 ft AGL
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Obstacle Symbols and Colors
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-00629-04 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58
571
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
APPENDIX E
HAZARD AVOIDANCE FEATURES
Feature
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
This table identifies the symbols displayed in the
lower right corner of PFD or MFD maps to indicate
which hazard avoidance features are activated for
display.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
Feature
Symbol
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Surface Analysis display enabled
Freezing Levels display enabled
Winds Aloft display enabled
Traffic display enabled
County Warnings display enabled
NEXRAD display enabled
Cyclone Warnings display enabled
Cloud Top display enabled
Icing Potential (CIP and SLD) (ICNG)
Pilot Weather Report (PIREPs)
XM Lightning display enabled
Cell Movement display enabled
SIGMETs/AIRMETs display enabled
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
City Forecast display enabled
Terrain Proximity/TAWS display enabled
Echo Top display enabled
Air Report (AIREPs)
Turbulence (TURB)
Loss of hazard avoidance feature, (a
white X is shown over the symbol to
indicate not available; e.g., traffic)
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
METARs display enabled
Symbol
572
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58
190-00629-04 Rev. A
INDEX
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
B
Backlighting-------------------------------------------------- 53
Barometric setting, Altimeter----------------------56, 63–64
BARO Transition---------------------------------------------- 42
Bearing/distance, measuring------------------------------149
Bearing information------------------------------------ 68–69
Bearing Information Windows----------------------------- 57
Bearing line------------------------------------------- 336, 340
Bearing source----------------------------------------------- 69
APPENDICES
C
INDEX
190-00629-04 Rev. A
Approach-----------------------------------------------------566
Activating-------------------------------------------------250
ILS----------------------------------------------------------441
Loading--------------------------------------- 212, 247, 249
Missed-----------------------------------------------------445
Removing--------------------------------------------------250
WAAS------------------------------------------------------443
Approach box-----------------------------------------------494
Approach channel------------------------------------------247
Approach Mode-------------------------------- 426, 441, 443
APR softkey------------------------------------------- 249, 257
Arc HSI--------------------------------------------------------- 66
Arrival Alerts-------------------------------------------------- 42
Arrival procedure-197, 210, 243, 245, 246, 270, 272, 281
Attitude---------------------------------------------------------- 1
Attitude Indicator-----------------------------------56, 61–62
Audio alerting system--------------------------------------530
Audio Panel--------------------------------------------------- 16
Audio panel controls
SPKR-------------------------------------------------------128
Audio panel fail-safe operation---------------------------135
Automatic audio muting-----------------------------------519
Automatic Dependent Surveillance - Broadcast--------377
Automatic Flight Control System (AFCS)--------- 399–448
Alerts and annunciations------------------------ 447–448
Controls-------------------------------------------- 400–401
Status Annunciations------------------------------------447
Status Box-------------------------------------------------403
Automatic squelch------------------------------------------110
Autopilot----------------------------------------399, 429–431
Autopilot Disconnect-------------------------- 401, 420, 431
Auto-tuning--------------------------------------------------118
Auto-tuning, COM------------------------------------------105
Auto-tuning, NAV-------------------------------------------114
Auto Zoom---------------------------------------------------142
Auxiliary Pages (AUX)--------------------------------------- 32
AUX - system status page-466, 468, 488, 489, 508, 509,
512
Aviation Symbols------------------------------------- 154, 197
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Activate a Flight Plan---------------------------------------215
Active channel-----------------------------------------------516
Active database-------------------------------------- 548, 549
Active frequency------------------------------------- 102, 111
AC-U-KWIK------------------------------------------- 511, 552
ADS-B---------------------------------------------------------377
ADS-B Out------------------------------------------------------ 4
AFCS Status Box--------------------------------------- 56, 403
AHRS-----------------------------------------------16, 541, 542
Airborne Color Weather Radar----------------------------324
Air Data Computer-------------------------------------------- 1
AIRMETs------------------------------------------------------309
Airport
Information-----------------------------------------------174
Nearest----------------------------------------------------- 45
Airport Directory------------------------------- 511, 512, 552
Airspace Alerts--------------------------------- 189, 190, 289
Airspeed Indicator----------------------------------56, 58–59
Airspeed Reference---------------------------------- 410–411
Airways
Collapsed--------------------------------------------------228
Expanded--------------------------------------------------228
Alerting System-------------------------------------- 529, 533
Alerts---------------------------------------------------------529
Aircraft-----------------------------------------------------531
Airspace---------------------------------------------------- 42
Arrival------------------------------------------------------- 43
Audio voice------------------------------------------ 43, 532
Levels------------------------------------------------------530
Messages--------------------------------------------------542
Alerts Window------------------------------------------------ 80
Along Track Offset----------------------------------- 219, 220
ALT------------------------------------------------------------285
Altimeter---------------------------------------------56, 62–63
Altimeter barometric setting------------------------------- 56
Altitude
Constraints----------------------------------------- 235, 272
Altitude alerting---------------------------------------------- 83
Altitude Buffer------------------------------------------------ 42
Altitude Hold--------------------------------------------------- 9
Altitude Hold Mode----------------------------------------408
Altitude Reference----------------------------- 407, 408, 416
Altitude Trend Vector---------------------------------------- 63
Annunciations
G1000 System--------------------------------------- 18, 533
Test tone---------------------------------------------- 46, 530
Annunciations, softkey-------------------------------------- 80
Annunciation Window-------------------------------------- 80
Antenna stabilization--------------------------------------341
Antenna tilt--------------------------------------------------338
AOPA-------------------------------------------------- 511, 552
AOPA Airport Directory------------------449, 511, 512, 513
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
A
Calibrated Airspeed-----------------------------------------254
CDI---------------------------- 246, 261, 272, 280, 287, 543
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58
I-1
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
INDEX
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
CELL MOV Softkey------------------------------------------308
Chart Not Available---------------------------------- 471, 492
Chart options----------------------------------------- 479, 500
Chart setup box-------------------------------------- 485, 504
ChartView--------------------------------------- 449, 469, 488
ChartView database----------------------------------------488
ChartView functions----------------------------------------470
ChartView plan view---------------------------------------480
ChartView profile view-------------------------------------480
ChartView softkeys-----------------------------------------470
CLD TOP Softkey--------------------------------------------306
Closest Point-------------------------------------------------228
COM
Frequency box--------------------------------------------- 56
COM channel spacing--------------------------------------109
COM Configuration------------------------------------------ 45
COM frequency box----------------------------------- 99, 102
Command Bars----------------------------------------------404
COM Radio
Channel spacing------------------------------------------ 45
COM tuning failure-----------------------------------------135
Controls--------------------------------------------------------- 7
Controls (Softkeys)-------------------------------------- 19–22
Control Wheel Steering (CWS)--------------------- 401, 430
Copy a Flight Plan------------------------------------------215
County Warnings--------------------------------------------322
Course Deviation Indicator (CDI)-----------------45, 70–71
Course To Fix------------------------------------------------251
Cyclone-------------------------------------------------------323
Cylinder Head Temperature (CHT °F)-----------------90, 93
D
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
Data Bar Fields, MFD---------------------------------------- 44
Database(s)--------------------------------------------- 14, 547
Database synchronization---------------------------------- 46
Database Synchronization--------------547, 552, 553, 554
Data link-------------------------------------------------------- 1
Datalink receiver troubleshooting------------------------527
Data logging-------------------------------------------------524
Data Logging----------------------------------------- 449, 523
Date and time------------------------------------------------ 39
Day/Night views-------------------------------------- 485, 504
Day view----------------------------------485, 486, 504, 505
DB Mismatch------------------------------------------------551
Dead Reckoning---------------------------------------------- 85
Decision Height (DH)------------------------------------57, 84
Declutter, display--------------------------------------------- 86
Delete Flight Plans------------------------------------------215
Deleting
An entire airway----------------------------------- 217, 218
An entire procedure------------------------------ 217, 218
An individual waypoint--------------------------- 216, 217
Flight Plan Items-----------------------------------------216
I-2
Density Altitude---------------------------------------------256
Departure
Procedure----------------- 208, 222, 239, 240, 242, 243
Select------------------------------------239, 243, 247, 250
Time--------------------------------------------------------254
Timer-------------------------------------------------------- 49
Digital audio entertainment---------------------------------- 4
Dilution of Precision (DOP)--------------------------------- 27
Direct-to----------167, 191-195, 233, 234, 270, 272, 287
Display backup------------------------------------ 12, 16, 101
DME
Information Window-------------------------------------- 69
DME audio---------------------------------------------------112
DME transceiver pairing-----------------------------------120
DME tuning--------------------------------------------------120
Dual navigation database---------------------------------548
E
ECHO TOP Softkey------------------------------------------305
Emergency frequency---------------------------------------135
Engine Indication System (EIS)------------------------ 87–96
Entering Flight ID-------------------------------------------121
Entertainment inputs---------------------------------------133
Estimated Position Error (EPE)----------------------------- 27
Exporting a Flight Plan-------------------------------------202
extended squitter-------------------------------------------377
F
Fail-safe operation------------------------------------------135
Failure Input-------------------------------------------------- 17
FD---------------------------------------------------------------- 9
Field of View (SVS)------------------------------------------165
Flight Director------------------------------------------------ 43
Flight director (FD)-----------------------------399, 402–403
Modes, lateral------------------------------------- 421–448
Modes, vertical------------------------------------ 405–419
Flight ID------------------------------------------------------127
Flight level change--------------------------------------------- 9
Flight Level Change Mode-------------------- 410, 437, 439
Flight plan
Closest point to reference------------------------------228
Storing-----------------------------------------------------566
Flight plan import/export messages---------------------545
Flight timer---------------------------------------------------- 49
FliteCharts-------------------------------------------- 449, 490
FliteCharts cycle---------------------------------------------508
FliteCharts expiration--------------------------------------508
FliteCharts functions---------------------------------------491
FPA----------------------------------------------------- 235, 277
Freezing Levels--------------------------------------- 313, 314
Frequency
Nearest----------------------------------------------------187
Frequency spacing------------------------------------------109
Frequency transfer arrow----------------------------------103
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58
190-00629-04 Rev. A
INDEX
L
Land Symbols------------------------------------------------153
Lateral modes, flight director----------------------- 421–448
LNAV----------------------------------------------------------261
Log File-------------------------------------------------------524
Logging Data------------------------------------------------523
LO SENS------------------------------------------------------119
Low Altitude Annunciation--------------------------------- 83
LPV----------------------------------------------- 261, 287, 432
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
M
Magnetometer-------------------------------------------- 1, 18
Map
Pages-------------------------------------------------------- 31
Panning----------------------------------------------------144
Symbols----------------------------------------------------569
Marker beacon----------------------------------------------119
Marker Beacon Annunciations----------------------------- 81
MASQ processing-------------------------------------------- 97
Measurement units, changing displayed----------------- 41
Menus--------------------------------------------------------- 30
Message advisories---530, 536, 537, 538, 541, 542, 543
Messages Reminder----------------------------------------- 50
METARs------------------------------------------------------310
MFD Data Bar fields----------------------------------------- 44
Minimum Descent Altitude (MDA)--------------------57, 84
Minimums----------------------------------------------------532
Missed Approach----------- 197, 251, 258, 261, 287, 445
Mode S-------------------------------------------------------121
Morse code identifier---------------------------------------113
Multi Function Display (MFD)
Softkeys----------------------------------------------------- 24
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58
AFCS
190-00629-04 Rev. A
Jeppesen navigation database----------------------------547
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Heading------------------------------------------------------- 56
Heading Select------------------------------------------------- 9
Heading Select Mode--------------------------------------423
HI SENS-------------------------------------------------------119
Horizontal scan--------------------------- 334-338, 342, 343
Horizontal Situation Indicator (HSI)------- 56, 65–76, 247
HSI double green arrow------------------------------------111
HSI magenta arrow-----------------------------------------111
HSI single green arrow-------------------------------------111
J
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
H
IDENT function----------------------------------------------127
ID indicator--------------------------------------------------113
ILS approach-------------------------------------------------441
Importing a Flight Plan-------------------------------------201
Indicated Altitude-------------------------------------------254
INFO box-----------------------------------------------------495
Initialization (system)---------------------------------------- 14
Inset Map, PFD----------------------------------------------- 57
Intercom system (ICS)--------------------------------------133
Intersection
Information---------------------------------------- 175–176
Inverting a flight plan--------------------------------------215
IOI-------------------------------------------------------------358
EIS
Gain-----------------------------------------------------------339
Garmin Databases------------------------------------------551
GBT-----------------------------------------------------------378
GDC 74A-------------------------------------------------------- 1
GDL 69/69A----------------------------------------------1, 292
GDU 1040------------------------------------------------------ 1
GEA 71---------------------------------------------------------- 1
Geodetic Sea Level (GSL)----------------------------------352
GFC 700------------------------------------------------------399
GIA 63----------------------------------------------------------- 1
Glidepath-----------------------------------------------------285
Glidepath Indicator------------------------------------------ 64
Glidepath Mode (GP)-------------------------- 417, 426, 443
Glideslope----------------------------------------------------285
Glideslope Indicator----------------------------------------- 64
Glideslope Mode------------------------------------- 419, 441
Global Positioning System (GPS)
Navigation----------------------------------------- 191–290
Receiver information--------------------------------- 26–28
GMA 1347------------------------------------------------- 1, 14
GMU 44--------------------------------------------------------- 1
Go Around Mode------------------------------------ 445–446
GPS CDI------------------------------------------------------- 44
Ground-Based Transceivers--------------------------------378
Ground mapping--------------------------------------------344
Groundspeed------------------------------------------------- 50
GRS 77---------------------------------------------------------- 1
GTS 800------------------------------------------------------542
GTX 33---------------------------------------------------------- 1
GTX 33 Transponder----------------------------------------121
GWX 68------------------------------------------------------324
I
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
G
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Frequently asked questions--------------------------------565
Fuel
Efficiency--------------------------------------------------256
Endurance-------------------------------------------------256
Remaining-------------------------------------------------256
Required---------------------------------------------------256
Statistics---------------------------------------------------256
Fuel Flow (FFLOW GPH)--------------------------------90, 93
Fuel on Board-----------------------------------------------256
Fuel Quantity (FUEL QTY GAL)-------------------- 90, 93, 95
I-3
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
INDEX
N
Q
National Weather Service----------------------------------322
NAV1 audio--------------------------------------------------112
NAV2 audio--------------------------------------------------112
NAV frequency box------------------------------------------ 99
Navigation
Database------------------------------------------- 235, 236
Map--------------------------------------------------------193
Navigation Mode----------------------- 424–425, 435–436
Navigation mode selection--------------------------------111
Navigation (NAV) Frequency Box-------------------------- 56
Navigation source-------------------------------------- 70–72
Navigation Status Box-------------------------------------- 56
Nav radio selection-----------------------------------------111
Nearest
Airport-------------- 171, 172, 173, 174, 187–190, 249
Airport Minimum Runway Length---------------------174
Airports----------------------------------------------------- 45
Airports Page-------------------------------- 172, 173, 174
Airport Surface Matching-------------------------------174
VOR------------------------------------------------- 187–188
Nearest Pages (NRST)--------------------------------------- 33
NEXRAD Softkey--------------------------------------------301
Night view--------------------------------485, 486, 504, 506
Non-path descent------------------------------415, 439–440
Normal operating mode--------------------------------15, 16
Quick tuning 121.500 MHz-------------------------------104
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
O
AFCS
OBS Mode----------------------------------------------- 75–76
Obstacles---------------------------------------------- 538, 539
Odometer----------------------------------------------------- 50
Oil Pressure (OIL PSI)------------------------------- 90, 93, 95
Omni Bearing Selector (OBS)----------------------- 566–567
Other Statistics--------------------------------------- 254, 256
Outside Air Temperature (OAT)---------------------------- 56
Overview-------------------------------------------------------- 1
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
P
INDEX
APPENDICES
Page groups--------------------------------------------- 31–34
Page Navigation--------------------------------------------- 43
Parallel Track------------------------------------ 220, 221, 222
Pilot Profile Import/Export Messages--------------------546
Pilot profiles--------------------------------------------- 35–36
Pitch hold------------------------------------------------------- 9
Pitch Hold Mode--------------------------------------------406
Pitch indication----------------------------------------------- 61
Presets--------------------------------------------------------518
Primary Flight Display (PFD)---------------------------------- 2
Softkeys------------------------------------------------ 19–21
Procedures
GFC 700-------------------------------------------- 432–446
I-4
R
Radio volume level-----------------------------------------113
RAIM---------------------------------------246, 258, 259, 260
Range---------------------------------------------------------163
Receiver Autonomous Integrity Monitoring (RAIM)-27–28,
258, 565
Reminder messages----------------------------------------- 50
Required
Vertical Speed--------------------------------------------278
Vertical Speed Indicator---------------------------------278
Reversionary mode-----------------------------------------135
ROC-----------------------------------------------------------358
Roll Hold Mode---------------------------------------------422
RS-232----------------------------------------------------------- 4
RS-485----------------------------------------------------------- 3
Runway
Minimum length------------------------------------------- 45
Surface------------------------------------------------------ 45
RVSI---------------------------------------------------- 278, 279
RX indicator--------------------------------------------------103
S
SafeTaxi------------------------------------------ 449, 463, 466
SafeTaxi®----------------------------------------------------449
SafeTaxi database-------------------------------------------467
SBAS---------------------------------------258, 259, 260, 565
Scheduler------------------------------ 50–51, 449–450, 521
SD card-------------------------------------------------------- 13
Sector scan---------------------------------------------------340
Secure Digital (SD) card------------------------------------547
Selected Altitude-56, 62, 83, 406, 407, 409, 410, 412, 416
Bug---------------------------------------------------------- 56
Selected Altitude Capture Mode------406-, 409, 412, 420
Selected Altitude Intercept Arc----------------------------166
Selected Course-----------------------57, 66, 425, 427, 428
Selected Heading-------------------------------------- 66, 423
Selecting a COM radio-------------------------------------102
Sequencing, automatic-------------------------------------567
Sequencing waypoints, suspend--------------------------- 76
Service class-------------------------------------------------515
SIGMETs------------------------------------------------------309
SiriusXM
Radio-------------------------------------------------------514
Receiver troubleshooting-------------------------------527
SiriusXM channel list---------------------------------------516
SiriusXM radio volume-------------------------------------519
SiriusXM Satellite Radio---------------------- 514, 515, 516
Slip/Skid Indicator----------------------------------------56, 61
Softkey annunciations--------------------------------------- 80
Softkeys-------------------------------------------------- 19–22
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58
190-00629-04 Rev. A
INDEX
U
Unable to display chart----------------------------- 471, 492
Updating Garmin databases------------------------------467
User-Defined Holding Pattern-----------------------------230
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
V
Vertical deviation-------------------------------------- 63, 414
Vertical deviation guidance-------------------------------236
Vertical Deviation Indicator (VDI)--------------64, 278, 279
Vertical navigation------------------------------------------235
Direct-to---------------------------------------------------234
Vertical Navigation flight control------------------ 412–416
Vertical Path Tracking Mode------------------412–413, 438
Vertical scan------------------------------------------ 337, 338
Vertical speed-------------------------------------------------- 9
Vertical speed guidance-----------------------------------236
Vertical Speed Indicator (VSI)------------------------------ 63
Vertical Speed Mode---------------------------------------409
Vertical Speed Reference----------------------------------409
Vertical track-------------------------------------------------532
VFR code-----------------------------------------------------126
VNAV-------------------------------------------------- 195, 544
VNAV Target Altitude-------------------------------- 412–415
VNAV Target Altitude Capture Mode--------------------416
VNV---------------------------------------------------- 277, 563
VNV guidance
Disabling--------------------------------------------------233
Enabling---------------------------------------------------233
VNV indications, PFD---------------------------------------- 79
VNV Target Altitude----------------------------------------- 64
Voice alerts, TIS Traffic------------------------------- 373, 532
VOL annunciation-------------------------------------------130
VOR
Nearest--------------------------------------------- 187–188
VOR selection------------------------------------------------111
VSI-------------------------------------------------------------279
Vspeed references------------------------------------------- 57
VS TGT------------------------------------------------- 235, 277
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
190-00629-04 Rev. A
EIS
TA-------------------------------------------------------------532
Tachometer (RPM)---------------------------------- 90, 93, 95
TAF------------------------------------------------------------310
TAFs-----------------------------------------------------------310
Takeoff Mode------------------------------------------------420
TAS----------------------334, 335, 337, 338, 339, 340, 541
TAWS----------------------------------------------82, 356, 364
Terminal procedures charts------------------------- 471, 492
Terrain--------------------------------------------------------538
Color indications-----------------------------------------571
Tilt------------------------------------------------------ 337, 338
Tilt line--------------------------------------------------------338
Timer
Departure--------------------------------------------------- 49
Flight-------------------------------------------------------- 49
Timer, PFD generic------------------------------------------- 47
TIS-------------------------------------------------------------369
TOD---------------------------------------------- 277, 278, 284
TOPO DATA------------------------------------- 150, 151, 160
Top of Descent--------------------------------------- 277, 278
TOPO SCALE-------------------------------------------------152
Track----------------------------------------------------------- 65
Traffic Advisory System-------------------------------------542
Traffic Advisory (TA)-----------------------------82, 334, 532
Traffic AdvisoryTraffic Advisory (TA)----------------------532
Traffic Annunciation----------------------------------------- 57
Transponder
Status Box-------------------------------------------------- 56
Transponder code entry------------------------------------125
Transponder data box-----------------------------------97, 99
Transponder softkeys---------------------------------------122
Transponder standby mode-------------------------------122
Trend Vector
Turn Rate--------------------------------------------------- 68
Trip Planning------------------------------------ 254, 255, 256
Trip statistics--------------------------------------50, 255, 256
True Airspeed-------------------------------------- 56, 58, 256
Turn anticipation--------------------------------------------567
Turn Rate Indicator------------------------------------------ 68
TX indicator--------------------------------------------------103
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
T
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
LTNG-------------------------------------------------------307
Speaker-------------------------------------------------------128
Split COM operation----------------------------------------132
STAB----------------------------------------------------------341
Standby database-------------------------------------------549
Standby frequency----------------------------- 102, 105, 111
Standby frequency field------------------------------------102
Standby Navigation Database--------------------- 549, 551
Stereo headsets---------------------------------------------128
Stormscope--------------------------------------------------346
Stuck microphone-------------------------------------------135
Sunrise--------------------------------------------------------255
Sunset--------------------------------------------------------255
Surface Analysis---------------------------------------------312
SVS------------------------------------------------------- 61, 544
SVS troubleshooting----------------------------------------525
Symbols, map------------------------------------------------569
Synthetic vision (SVS)------------------------------- 449, 450
Synthetic Vision System------------------------------------- 61
System annunciations---------------------------18, 529, 533
System message advisories--------------------------------536
System Setup Page------------------------------------------ 34
System Status Page------------------------------------------ 46
System time--------------------------------------------------- 56
System Time--------------------------------------------------- 40
I-5
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
INDEX
W
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
WAAS--------------------------------------261, 432, 539, 565
WAAS precision approach---------------------------------443
WATCH------------------------------------------------ 342, 343
Waypoint
Automatic sequencing----------------------------------567
Skipping---------------------------------------------------567
Waypoint Selection Submenu--- 192, 199, 200, 204, 258
Waypoint sequencing, suspend---------------------------- 76
Weather Attenuated Color Highlight--------------------342
Weather (real-time)-------------------------------------------- 4
Wind--------------------------------------------------- 140, 162
Wind data----------------------------------------------------- 57
Winds Aloft--------------------------------------------------315
WIND Softkey------------------------------------------------315
X
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
XM
radio--------------------------------------------------------292
Satellite Weather-----------------------------------------292
XM radio entertainment-----------------------------------133
XM Satellite Weather
Icing--------------------------------------------------------318
PIREPs-----------------------------------------------------320
Turbulence-------------------------------------------------319
XM weather/radio--------------------------------------------- 4
Y
Yaw Damper---------------------------------------------------- 9
Z
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
Zoom
Auto--------------------------------------------------------142
I-6
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58
190-00629-04 Rev. A
G1000
®
Integrated Flight Deck
Pilot’s Guide
®
G1000 Pilot’s Guide
Garmin International, Inc.
1200 East 151st Street
Olathe, Kansas 66062, U.S.A.
Garmin AT, Inc.
2345 Turner Road SE
Salem, OR 97302, U.S.A.
Garmin (Europe) Ltd.
Liberty House, Hounsdown Business Park
Southampton, Hampshire SO40 9LR U.K.
Contact Garmin Product Support or view
warranty information at www.flygarmin.com.
Beechcraft G58
Garmin Corporation
No. 68, Zhangshu 2nd Road
Xizhi District, New Taipei City, Taiwan
190-00629-04
Revision A
Beechcraft G58
Was this manual useful for you? yes no
Thank you for your participation!

* Your assessment is very important for improving the work of artificial intelligence, which forms the content of this project

Download PDF

advertising